rena 1817 ARTES SCIENTIA VERITAS LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN TUBBOR SI QUERIS PENINSULAM AMOENAM CIRCUMSPICE WOWVANOUISSUES RADO BEQUEST OF H. H. BARTLETT w 1 A MAP OF THE WORLD Shewing the Course of M", DAMPIERS Voyage Round it: From 1679, to 1691. . 80 90 80 80 go 9 80 TARI TERUT 1. THAT 70 70 70 MET 70 60 NOU 111 6.1. NARKIN Groen 09 09 60 ID Lolar Screen That Davies thand Go Artick circle BUTTON O oc KA* BUTI 50 og S Scotland Indlands C. Farwell Nya Zemla €. Patientha Cathaya Thu of to England Yrendre to of Sorway SE WEDAAN an Іapan c Compagnies Land o C. butog Porno 7 R I 4 for. North wallet NORTH Brittain monene fois Moscov of France no 30 s.offAnnidam Vew Found I and Az ore 1, V Scotland " NORTH Going... 220 130 galios any Polands R Madera bo Canaries 2.0 DP im Iapan 22 30 30 AMERICA * Data Fort xin TVARKY Cape out- S А Tropick of Cancer A Barbaria K "bia109 U gratto erranian 25 am Natola 1314 20 120/201 20 Virginia Plonida Sivew juexica liforn & BILED JLG ELLID Gualata Sea Bermudas Bahama) PERSI CHIN orna 1 Ladrones Sea figypt MPOGOL gal OD I. Guam Caritse I. C.Vand AT RICA To Cazaret Luconia Ladro 1 nes philipina 10 ***** Arabran *C. Corriente Day of Bengal GUNEA Sierra Leong HP. She bars Mindanao 900 PACIFICK Yaribas or Acappelis Gratul28 Riabeth B. Caldera FYRM LAND Surnam APAT ceylan Bifara aldere Forses Eilole BMM ZAVA 270 249 250 260 120 190 Aquinoctial Line 20 20 2 28 Malabrigo Guanchaque Truido 35 Cherapee Wundas 360 300 Congo 332 100 no THIOPIAN Guinea TIL Saga Ling SOUTH KNX ANX BRASIL sa AMERICA 2ofessderation Angola INDIAN wenye SEA 10 10 brasa 1st selleria Going ...**********... Dari Lan2 Cegiel Iof lohy SEA Ferrando SEA Mozama wwws un New 0 Holland Tropick of Capricorn YZEG I. mgchay Baldigra I Childco 20 The Warhaitez 20 20 R. de teflata 20 Tropick of Capricorsa SOU TEREN c. of Good topel -700 OCEANI Serights Patagonia 3 Maguse Terra de Magalauickland Dr. Zeeland of side war! 30 Tuese 30 pleine Seight Status care 20 30 Juttua Dingens Land circle of BURU 40 Antartich 40 4.0 MA Antarck Circle HU 50 ܘܟ BO go U TUO W 811 60 50 60 09 70 70 70 70 80 910 80 H:Noll Fecit 이 ​80 glo 80 А New Voyage ROUND THE WORLD Deſcribing particularly, The fAhmus of America, ſeveral Coaſts and' Ilands in the Weſt Indies the Iſles of Cape Verd, the Paſſage by Terra del Fuego, the South Sea Coaſts of Chili, Peru, and Mexico; the Iſle of Guam one of the Ladrones, Mindanao, and other Philippine and Eaſt-India Iſlands near Cambodia, China, Formoſa, Luconia, Celebes, &c. New Holland, Sumatră, Nicobar Illes; the Cape of Good Hope, and Santa Hellene. THEIR Soil, Rivers, Harbours, Plants, fruits, Ani. mals, and Inhabitants. THEIR Cuſtoms, Religion, Government, Trade, &c. By William Dampier . Illuſtrated with Particular Maps and Draughts The Second Editio ozreded. LONDON Printed for James Knapton, at the Crown in St Paul's Church-yard. MDCXCVII. Museums G 420 .DIG 1697 aq Det To the Right Honourable Charles Mountague, Erą Preſident of the Royal Society, One of the Lords Commiſſioners of the Treaſury, Oc. SIR, M A Y it pleaſe you to Pardon the Boldneſs of aStranger to your Perſon, if upon the encouragement of Common Fame, he preſumes ſo much upon your Can- dor, as to lay before you this Account of his Travels As the Scene of them is not only Remote, but for the moſt part little fre- quented alſo, ſo there may be ſome things in them New even to you; and ſome, poſſibly, not altogether unuſeful to the Publick : And that juſt Veneration which the World pays, as to your Genera! Worth, ſo elpecially to at Zeal for the advancement of Knowledge, and the Intereſt of your Country, which you expreſs upon all Occaſions, gives you a particular Right to whatever may any way tend to the promoting theſe Intereſts, as an Offering due to your Merit. I have not ſo much of the vanity of a Traveller, as to be fond of telling ſtories, eſpecially of this kind; a A 2 The Epiſtle redicat ry. kind; nor can I think this plain piece of mine, deſerves a place among your more Curious Collections: much leſs have I the Arrogance to uſe your Name by way of Pa- tronage for the too obvious faults, both of the Author and the Work. Yet dare I avow, according to my narrow ſphere and poor abilities, a hearty Zeal for the promo- ting of uſeful knowledge, and of any thing that may never ſo remotely tend to my Countries advantage : And I muſt own an Am ition of tranſmitting to the Publick through your hands, theſe Eſſays I have made toward thoſe great ends, of which you are ſo de ſervedly eſteemed the Patron This hath been my design in this Publica tion, being deſirous to bring in my Glean- ings here and there in Remote Regions , that general Magazine, of the knowledge of Foreign Parts, which the Royal Society thought you moſt worthy the Cuſtody of, when they choſe you for their Preſident : and if in peruſing theſe Papers, your Goodneſs ſhall ſo far diſtinguiſh the Experience of the Author from his Faults, as to judge him capable of ſerving his Country, either im- mediately, or by ſerving you, he will en- deavour by ſome real proofs to ſhew him- felt, SIR, Tour Moſt Faithful Devoted, Humble Servant, W. Dampier. to Museums Gift Bartlett Coll. 11-9-72 967533-154 THE PREFACE. proceed Before the Reader any further in the perufal of this Work, I muſt be peak a little of his Patience kers, to take along with him this ſhort account of it. It is compoſed of a mixt Relation of Places, and Actions, in the ſame order of time in which they occurred: for whichirid I kept a Journal of every days Obſervations. In the Deſcription of Places, their Produce, &c. I have endeavoured to give what ſatisfaétien I could to my Country-men ; tho poſibly to the Deſcribing ſeveral things that may have been much better accounted for by others : Chooſing to be more particular than might be needful wich reſpect to the intelligent Reader, rather than to omit 25+ I thought might tend to the Information of Perſons no lefs ſenſible and inquiſitive, tho not ſo Learned or Eccperienced. For which reaſon, my chief Care hath been to be as puti- cular as was conſiſtent with my intended brevity, in ſet- ting down ſuch Obſervables as I met with : Nor have I given my ſelf any great trouble ſince my Reiurn, to compare my Diſcoveries with thoſe of others : The rom ther, becauſe, should it ſo happen that I have deſcribed Some places ar things which others have done before me, yet in different Accounts, even of the ſame things, it can hard- ly be but there will be ſome new Light afforded by each of them. But after all, conſidering that the main of this Voyage hath its Scene laid in long Tracts of the Remoter parts both of the Eaſt and Weſt Indies, ſome of avbich A 3 very The Preface. adry ſeldom viſited by Engliſh men, and others as rarely by any Europeans, I may without vanity incourage the Reader to expect many things wholly new to him, and many others more fully deſcribed than be he may have ſeen elſewhere; for which not only this Voyage, tho it ſelf of many years continuance, but alſo ſeveral former long and diſtant Voyages, have qualified me. As for the Aćtions of the Company, among whom I made the greateſt part of this Voyage, a I bread of which I have carried on thro it, tis not to divert the Reader with them třat I mention them, much leſs that I take any pleaſure in relating them : but for methods ſake, and for the Readers ſatisfa&tion; who could not ſo well acquieſce in my Deſcription of Places, &c. without knowing the particular Traverjes I made among them; nor in theſe, without an Account of the Concomitant Circumſtances : Befides, that I would not prejudice the truth and ſincerity of my Relation, tho by omiſſions only. And as for the Traverſes themſelves, they make for the Readers advan- tage, how little ſoever for mine ; ſince thereby I have been the better inabled to gratify his Curioſity; as one who ram- bles about a Country can give ufi ally' a better account of it, than a Carrier who jogs on to his Inn, without ever going out of his Road. As to my Stile, it cannot be expected, that a Seaman jhould effect Politeneſs ; for were I able to do it, yet I think I ſhould be little ſollicitous abcui it, in a work of this Nature. I have frequently indeed, deveſted my ſelf of Sea Phraſes, to gratify the Land Reader ; for which the Seamen will bardly forgive me : And yet, poſſibly, I ſhall 220t ſeem Complaij ant enough to the other ; becauſe I ſtill retain the uſe of ſo many Sea-terms. I confe's I have not been at all ſcrupulous in this matter, either as to the one or the other of theſe ; for I am perſwaded, that if what I I fay be intelligible, it matters not greatly in what words it is exprefs'd. For the same reaſon I have not been curious as to zhe (pelling of the Names of Places, Plants, Fruits, Ani- mals, i The Prefaced mals, &c. which in many of theſe remot er parts are given at the pleaſure of Travellers, and vary according to their different Humours : Neither have I confined my ſelf to ſuch Names as are given by Learned Authors, or ſo much as enquired after many of them. I write for my Countrymen; and have therefore, for the moſt part, uſed ſuch Names as are familiar to our Engliſh Seamen, and thoſe of our Colonies abroad, yet without neglecting'others that occurr d. And it may ſuffice me to have given (uch Names and De- ſcriptions as I could: I ſhall leave to thoſe of more leiſure and opportunity the trouble of comparing theſe with thoſe which other Authors have deſigned. The Reader will find as he goes along, Some References to an Appendix, which I once deſigned to this Book; as, , to a Chapter about the Winds in different parts of the World; to a Deſcription of the Bay of Campeachy in the Weſt Indies, where I lived long in a former Voyage ; and to a particular Chorographical Deſcription of all the South Sea Coaſt of America, partly from a Spaniſh MSS, and fartly from my own and other Travellers Obſervations, beſide thoſe contained in this Book. But ſuch an Appendix would have ſwelled it too unreaſonably; and therefore I chofe rather to publiſh it hereafter by its ſelf, as opportuni- ty ſhall ſerve. And the ſame muſt be ſaid alſo as to a particular Voyage from Achin in the Iſle of Sumatra, to Tonquin, Malacca, &c. which ſhould have been inſert- ed as a part of this General one ; but it would have been too long, and therefore omitting it for the preſint, I have carried on this, next way from Sumatra to England; and ſo made the Tour of the World, correspondent to the Title. For the better apprehending the Courſe of the Voyage, and the Situation of the Places mentioned in it, I have cauſed ſeveral Maps to be engraven, and ſome particular Draughts of my own Compoſure. Among them, there is in the map of the American Iſthmus, a new Scheme of the adjoining Bay of Panama and its Iſlands, which to ſome may ſeem ſuperfluous after that which Mr Rin- A. groſe a The Preface. groſe hath publiſhed in the Hiſtory of the Bucca- neers ; and which he offers as a very exa&t Draught. I muft needs diſagree with him in that, and doubt not but this which I bere publiſh will be found more agreeable to that Bay, by any who ſhall have opportunity to examine it, for it is a contraction of a larger Map which I took from Several Stations in the Bay it ſelf. Ibe Reader may judge how well I was able to do it, by my ſeveral Traverſes a- bout it, mentioned in this Bouk ; thoſe, particularly, which are deſcribed in the 7th Chapter, which I have cauſed to be marked out with a pricked Line : as the Courſe of my Voyage is generally in all the Maps, for the Readers more cafy tracing it. I have nothing more to add, but that there are here and there ſome miſtakes made, as to expreſion, and the like, which will need a favourable Correction as they occur "up- on Reading. For inſtance, the Log of Wood lying out at ſome diſtance from ſides of the Boats diſcribed at Guan, and paralled to their Keel, which for diſtinctions Jake I have called the little Boat, might more clearly aad properly have been called the ſide Log, or by ſome ſuch Name; for though faflioned at the bottom and ends Boat- wiſe , pct is not hollow at top, but ſolid throughout. y other places alſo. I may not have expreſsid my jelf ſo fully as I ought: Bút any conſiderable Omiſſion, that I ſhall recolle&t or be informd of, I ſhall indeavour to make up in theſe Accounts, I bave yet to publiſh ; and for any faults I leave the Reader to the joint uſe of bis Fudgment and Can- dour. THE THE CONTENTS T in HE Introduction containing the Authors Departure South Seas, to the time of his leaving Captain Sharp. Chap. I. His Return out of the South Seas, to bis Landing at the Iſthmus of America. II. His Return by Land over the Ifthmus." III. His Traverſes among the Weſt India Ilands and Coaft, and arrival in Virginia. IV. His depariure for the South Seas again ; bis touching at the Iſlands of Cape Verd, and the African Coaft, and Arrival at the iſle of John Fernando in the South Seas. V. His Courſe thence Northward to the iſles of Lobos, and Gallapagos, to Caldera Bay, Rea Lejo, and Amapálla, in the K. of Mexico. VI. He goes back towards Peru, to the Iſle Plata, Point Santa Hellena, Manta, Paita, Lobos, Puna, Guiaquil, and Plata again. VII. His Progreſs Northward again to the R.Saint Ja- go, Tomaco, the Iſle Galleo, I. Gorgonia, the Pearl Iſles, &c. in of the Bay Panama. VIII. He proceeds along the Mexican Coaſt, to the Keys of Quibo, Rea Lejo, andthe Harbour of Guatulco. IX. He Coaſts along to Acapula, Petaplan, Eſta- pa, Coima, Sallagua, Cape Corrientes: thence to the Iſles of Chametly, Bay of Valderas, Iſles of Pon- The Contents Pontique, other Iſles of Chametly, Maſſaclan, Roſario, R. Saint Jago, Santa Pecaque, Iſles of Santa Maria, Valderas, and Cape Corrientes again. X. He ſtands over the Southern Ocean for the Eaſt Indies, and arrives at Guam, one of the Ladrone Iſles. XI. His arrival at Mindanao, one of the Philippine Iſlands : and of its Natural State. XII. The Political State of Mindanao XIII. Occurrences during the Authors ſtay at Mindanao. XIV. He departs towards Manila, in the Iſle of Luco- nia; touching at Bat Iſland, and the Iſle of Mindora, and leaving Luconia, he goes to Pulo Condore,on the Coaſt of Cambodia, to Pulo Uby, in the Bay of Sim, and to Pulo Condore again. XV. He goes to the I. of St. John on the coaſt of China, to the Iſles Piſcadores near Formoſa; and the Baſhee, or s Iſlands, between Formoſa and Lu- conia, called Orange, Monmouth, Grafton, Ba- fhee, and Goat Iſles. XVI. He Coaſts along the Eaſt ſide of Luconia, Min- danao, and other of the Philippines : and touching et the I. Celebes, and Callafufung in the I. of Bou- ton, be arrives at New Holland. XVII. He thence, touches at the I. Trifte, and another ; and ſteering along the Weſt Coaſt of Suma- tra, arrives at the I. of Nicobar, where he ſtays be Shore, and the Ship departs. XVIII. He ſtands over from thence in an open Boat to Paſſange Jonca; and thence to Achin; and after Several Traverſes comes to Bencouli, all on the l. of Sumatra. XIX. He Ships himſelf for England, and arrives at the Cape of Good Hope. XX. His departure thence to the I. Santa Hellena, and Arrival in the Downs. at goes و Mr. The Author's Departure from England. An. 1679 Mr. William Dampier's VOYAGE ROUND THE Terreſtrial Globe, The Introduction. Ibe Authors Departure from England, and arrival in Jamaica. His firſt going over tbe Iſthmus of America in- to the South Seas: his Coaſting a- long Peru and Chili , and back again, to his parting with Captain Sharp near the Iſle of Plata, in order to re- turn over Land ab SAWYER Firſt ſet out of England on this Voyage, at the beginning of the year 1679, in the Loyal Mer- chant of London, bound for Jamaica, Captain Knap- I man a : II The Author's Arrival at Jamaica. Ps. 1699 man Commander. I went a Paſſenger, deſigning when I came thither, to go from thence to the Bay of Campeacby, in the Gulph of Mexico, to cut Log.wood: where in a former Voyage I had {pent about three years in that employs and ſo was well acquainted with the place and the work. We failed with a proſperous gale without any impediment, or remarkable paſſage in our Voyage: unleſs that when we came in light of the Iſland Hiſpaniola, and were coaſting along on the South fide of it, by the little Iles of Vacca, or Aſh, I obſerved Captain Knapman was more vigilant than ordinary, keeping at a good diſtance off ſhore, for fear of coming too near thoſe ſmall dow Iſlands; as he did once, in a voyage from England, about the year 1673, loſing his Ship there, by the care leſneſs of his Mates. But we ſucceeded better ; and arrived fafe at Port Royal in Jamaica ſome time in April 1679, and went immediately alhore. I had brought ſome goods with me from England which I intended to fell here, and ſtock my ſelf with Rum and Sugar, Saws, Axes, Hats, Stock- ings, Shoes, and ſuch other Commodities, as I knew would fell among the Campeachy Log-wood Curters. Accordingly I ſold my Engliſh Cargo at Port Royal ; but upon ſome maturer conſiderations of my intended Voyage to Campeachy, I changed my thoughts of that deſign, and continued at fa. maica all that year, in expectation of ſome other buſineſs. I ſhall not trouble the Reader with my Obſer- vations at that Ifle, ſo well known to Engliſh men; nor with the particulars of my own Affairs during my ſtay there. But in ſhort, having there made a purchaſe of a ſmall Eftate in Dorſetſhire, near my Native Country of Somerſet, of one whoſe Title to it III a 3 maica ; The Author's firſt entering the South Seas. it I was well aſſured of, I was juſt embarking my An.1680 ſelf for England, about Chriſtmas, 1679, when one Mr Hobby invited me to go firſt a ſhort Trading Voyage to the Country of the Moskito's, of whom I hall ſpeak in my firſichapter. I was willing to get up ſome money before my return, having laid out what I had at Jamaica ; ſo I ſent the Writing of my new purchafe along with the ſame friends whom I ſhould have accompanied to England, and went on board Mr Hobby. Soon after our ſetting out we came to an an- → chor again in Negril Bay, at the Weft end of Ja- but finding there Captain Coxon, Sawkins, Sharp, and other Privateers, Mr Hobby's men all left him to go with them, upon an expedition they had contrived, leaving not one with him be- ſide my ſelf; and being thus left alone, after 3 or . 4 days ſtay with Mr Hobby, I was the more eaſily perſwaded to go with them too. It was ſhortly after Chriſtmas 1679 when we ſet out. The firſt Expedition was to Portobel ; which being accompliſhed, it was refolved to march by Land over the Iſthmus of Darien, upon fome new Adventures in the South Seas. Accordingly on the 5th of April 1680, we went ahore on the Iſthmus, near Golden Iland, one of the Sambaloes, to the number of between 3 and 400 men, carrying with us ſuch Proviſions as were neceſſary, and Toys wherewith to gratify the Wild Indians, through whoſe Country we were to paſs. In about nine days march we arrived at Santa Maria, and took it, and after a ſtay there of about three days, we went on to the South Seacoaſt, and there embarked our ſelves in ſuch Canoas and Periago's us our Indian friends furniſhed us withal. We were in fight of Panama by the 23d of April, and having in vain attempted Puebla Nova , before which Sawkins, then went IV His Coaſting along Peru. An. 1681 then Commander in chief, and others, were kill'd, we made ſome ſtay at the Neighbouring Illes of Quibo. Here we reſolved to change our courſe, and ſtand away to the Southward for the Coaſt of Peru. Accordingly we left the Keys or Inles of Quibo the 6th of Junė, and ſpent the reſt of the year in that Southern courſe; for touching at the Iſles of Gorgonia and Plata , we came to Ylo, a ſmall Town on the coaſt of Peru, and took it. This was in O&tober, and in November we thence to Coquimbo on the ſame Coaſt, and about Chriſtmas were got as far as the Iſle of John Fernan- do, which was the fartheſt of our Courſe to the Southward. After Chriſtmas we went back again to the Northward, having a deſign upon Arica, a ſtrong Town advantageouſly ſituated in the hollow of the Elbow, or bending of the Peruvian Coaſt. But being there repulfed with great loſs, we con- tinued our courſe Northward, till by the middle of April we were come in ſight of the Iſle of Plata, a little to the Southward of the Equinoctial Line. I have related this part of my Voyage thus ſuin- marily and conciſely, as well becauſe the World hath Accounts of it already, in the relations that Mr Ringroſe and others have given of Captain Sharp's Expedition, who was made chief Commander, upon Sawkins's being kill'd: as alſo, becauſe in thə proſecution of this Voyage I ſhall come to ſpeak of theſe parts again, upon occaſion of my going the ſecond time into the South Seas : and ihall there deſcribe at large the places both of the North, and South America, as they occur red And for this reaſon, that I might a- void needleſs Repetitions, and haſten to fuch particulars, as the Publick hath hitherto had no account of, I have choſen to comprize the 3 Relation to me. The Company, diſagree. V Relation of my Voyage hitherto, in this ſhort An.1689 compaſs, and place it as an Introduction before the reft, that the Reader may the better per- ceive where I mean to begin to be Particular; for there I have placd the Title of my firſt Chap- ter. All therefore that I have to add to the In- troduction, is this : That while we lay at the Ile of Fobn Fernando , Captain Sharp was, by general conſent , diſplaced from being Com- mander ; the Company being not ſatisfied ei- ther with his Courage or Behaviour. In his ſtead , Captain Watling was advanced : but he being killed hortly after before Arica, we were without a Commander during all the reſt of our return towards Plata. Now Watling being killed, a great number of the meaner ſort began to be as earneſt for chooſing Cap- tain Sharp again into the vacancy, as before they had been as forward as any to turn him out : And on the other ſide, bler and more experienced men being al- together diſſatisfied with Sharp's former "Con- duct, would by no means conſent to have him choſen. In ſhort, by that time we were come in fight of the inand Plata, the difference between the Contending Parties was grown fo high, that they reſolved to part Companies; having firſt made an A- greement, that which Party foever ſhould, upon Polling, appear to have the Majority, they ſhould keep the Ship: And the other Should content themſelves with the Lanch or Long-boat, and Canoas, and return back over the Iſthmus, or go to ſeek their fortune other- ways, as they would. the a- 3 > Ac- VI He leaves Captain Sharp. 49.1681 Accordingly we put it to the Vote; and upon dividing, Captain Sharp's party carried it. `I, who had never been pleaſed with his manage- ment, though I had hitherto kept my mind to my ſelf, now declared my ſelf on the ſide of thoſe that were Out-voted; and according to our agreement, we took our ſhares of ſuch Ne- ceſſaries, as were fit to carry over Land with us, (for chat was our Reſolution :) and ſo prepared for our Departure. THE දමය මග.. පූ . . සත පනත. 22 . INICA The North Sea Coaſt of the Isthmus of AMERICA to the west of Portobel 20 Ital: Miles Place these between the Introduction & Chap: 1. The South Sea Coaſt of the Isthmus of Panama AMERICA to the west of Panama 40, 60 I. Perica Ital: Miles Puebla Nava Nata ба. of Nicaragua RAGUA . 1. Tabago Coſta Carpenters R. del Drago Toro NORTH SEA Rica 1. Otoque The Keys Lavelia 1. Scuda Portobel. Sholes 1. Canda I. centarnas I Roncher of no SOUTH Blewfields River R. Chagre Moro de Round Porcos Quican I 1. Cubo Quibo, or Quicaro, or Cobaya pubert VER A Grof A SEA 11 22 JA Fort A L Port cripan & Nombre de Dios Dios REAL A Fort 11 # Portobel 0.9 I. Bastimentos THE NORTH Point Sanballast Springers Rey. la Sounds Key SEA 3 11 THE HISTHMUS R of Conception Sam Chagrey 12. A Map of the IS THMUS of DARIEN, & Bay of PANAMA u balas Islands QOX Venta de Cruzes Cheapo BYT R. of I. of Pines Cheapo 20 60 40 Ital: Miles bocolden Panama OPA 2 in Chepelio South stea 20F1D'AR'I EIN I. Perica Entrance o 0 0 Sholes 1. jabogilla 26 es OT. BAY I. Fabago Pachequerg Nata % Ongi Sholes into the Congo 26 TheKi I Otoque Ρ Α Ν Α M I. Chuchan 577 Pearly Thands 27 Punta Mala The The Darrere Jonath Seas 立​R Sholes Scuchadero I. S. Paul R. of Sta Maria Usta Maria 1 C. SLorenz Gulph of S Michael 143 Caret Bay The Gold R. & Mines 2 THE I. Gallera SOUTH SEA Pomt Gamchina 1 An. 1681 THE TR A V ELS OF Mr. William Dampier. Ο Η Α Ρ Ι. An Account of the Author's Return out of the South Seas, to bis Landing near Cape St. Lawrence, in the Iſthmus of Darien : With an Occaſional Deſcrip- on of the Moskito Indians. A Pril the 17th 1681. about Ten a Clock in the morning, being 12 leagues N. W. frorn the Iſland Plata, we left 'Captain Sharp and thoſe who were willing to go with him in the Ship, and imbarqued into our Lanch and Ca- noas, deſigning for the River of Sancta Maria, in the Gulf of St. Michael, which is about 200 leagues from the Iſle of plata. We were in number 44 white Men who bore Arms, a Spaniſh Indian, who bore Arms alſo; and two Moskito Indians, who al- B ways 2 The Authors Return out of the South Seas, An.1681 ways bear Arms amongſt the Privateers, and are much valued by them for ſtriking Fiſh, and Turtle or Tortoiſe, and Manatee or Sea Cow; and 5 Slaves taken in the South Seas, who fell to our ſhare. The Craft which carried us was a Lanch,or Long Boat, one Canoa, and another Canoa which had been fawn aſunder in the middle, in order to have made Bumkins, or Veſſels for carrying water, if we had not ſeparated from our Ship. This we joyned to- gether again and made it tight; providing Sails to help us along: And for 3 days before we parted, we fifted ſo much Flower as we could well carry, and rubb d up 20 or 30 pound of Chocolate with Sugar to ſweeten it; theſe things and a Kettle the Slaves carried alſo on their backs after we landed. And becauſe there were ſome who deſigned to go with us that we knew were not well able to march, we gave out, that if any man faultred in the Journey over Land he muſt expect to be ſhot to death ; for we knew that the Spaniards would ſoon be after us, and one man falling into their hands might be the ruin of us all, by giving an account of our ſtrength and condition : yet this would not deter them from going with us. We had but little Wind when we parted from the Ship; but before 12 a Clock the Sea-breeze came in ſtrong, which was like to founder us before we got in with the foar; for our ſecurity therefore, we cut up an old dry Hide that we brought with us, and barricadoed the Lanch all round with it to keep the water out. About 10 a clock at night we got in about 7 leagues to wind- ward of Cape Paſſao under the Line, and then it proved calm ; and we lay and drove all night, be- ing fatigued the preceeding day. The 18th day we had little wind till the Afternoon; and then we made fail, ftanding along the ſhore to the North- ward, having the wind at S. S. W. and fair wea- ther AG . a The Author's Return, &c. 3 At 7 à clock we came abreſt of Cape Paſſao, and An. 1681 found a ſmall Bark at an Anchor in a ſmail Bay to Leeward of the Cape, which we took our own Boats being too ſmall to tranſport us. We took her juſt under the Equinoctial Line, ſhe was not only a help to us, but in taking her we were ſafe from being deſcribed : We did not deſign to have meddled with any when we parted with our conforts, nor to have ſeen any if we could have helped it. The Bark came from Gallio laden with Timber, and was bound for Guiaquil. The 19th day in the morning we came to an an- chor about 12 leagues to the Southward of Cape St. Franciſco, to put our new Bark into a better trim. In 3 or 4 hours time we finiſhed our buſineſs, and came to fail again, and ſteered along the Coaſt with the Wind at S. S. W. intending to touch at Gorgonie. Being to the Northward of Cape St. Franciſco we met with very wet weather ; but the Wind conti- nuing we arrived at Gorgonia the 24th day in the morning, before it was light: we were afraid to approach it in the day time, for fear the Spaniards ſhould lye there for us it being the place where we careened lately, and where they might expect us. When we came aſhore we found the Spaniards had been there to ſeek after us, by a Houſe they had built, which would entertain 100 Men, and by a great Croſs before the Doors. This was token e- nough that the Spaniards did expect us this way a- gain ; therefore we examined our Priſoners if they knew any thing of it, who confeſſed they had heard of a Pereagó (or large Canoa) that rowed with 14 Oars, which was kept in a River on the Main, and once in 2 or 3 days came over to Ger- gonia purpoſely to ſee for us, and that having diſ- i covered us, the was to make all ſpeed to Panama with the news; where they had 3 Ships ready to ſend after us. We a B 2 2 4 The Author's Return out of the South Seas. An. 1681 We lay here all the day, and ſcrubb’d our new Bark, that if ever we ſhould be chaſed we might the better eſcape : we fillid our Water, and in the evening went from thence,having the Wind at S.W. a brisk gale. The 25th day we had muchWind and Rain, and we loſt the Canoa that had been cut and was join d together; we would have kept all our Canoas to carry us up the River, the Bark not being fo con- venient. The 27th day we went from thence with a mo- derate gale of Wind at S. W. In the afternoon we had exceflive Showers of Rain. The 28th day was very wet all the motning; be- twixt 10 and in it cleared up, and we ſaw two great Ships about a league and half to the Weſt- ward of us, we being then two leagues from the Shore, and about 10 leagues to the Southward of point Garrachina. Theſe Ships had been cruiſing between Gorgonia and the Gulf 6 months; but whe- ther our Priſoners did know it I cannot tell. We preſently furled our Sails, and rowed in cloſe under the ſhore, knowing that they were Cruiſers; for if they had been bound to Panama this Wind would have carried them thither; and no Ships bound from Panama come on this ſide the Bay, but keep the North ſide of the Bay till as far as the Keys of Quibo to the Weſtward ; and then if they are bound to the Southward they ſtand over and may fetch Gallec, or betwixt it and Cape St. Franciſco. The Glare did not continue long before it rained again, and kept us from the light of each other : but if they had ſeen and chaсed us, we were re- folved to run our Bark and Canoas afhore, and take our felves to the Mountains and travel over Land; for we knew that the Indians which lived in theſe parts never had any Commerce with the Spaniards; ſo we might have had a chance for our Lives. The : The Author's Return out of the South Seas. 5 The 29th day, at 9 a clock in the morning, we An.1681 came to an Anchor at Point Garrachina, about 7 leagues from the Gulf of St. Michael, which was the place where we firſt came into the South Seas, and the way by which we deſigned to return. Here we lay all the day, and went ahore and dried our Cloaths, clean dour Guns, dried our Am- munition, and fixt our felves againſt our Enemies, if we ſhould be attack'd ; for we did expect to find fome oppoſition at Landing: we likewiſe kept a good Look-out all the day, for fear of thoſe two Ships that we ſaw the day before. The zoth day in the morning at 8 a clock we came into the Gulf of St. Michael's mouth; for we put from Point Garrachina in the Evening, de- ſigning to have reach'd the Iſlands in the Guif be- fore day; that we might the better work our e- ſcape from our Enemies, if we ſhould find any of thein waiting to ſtop our paſſage. About 9 a clock we came to an Anchor a mile without a large Iſland, which lyes 4 miles from the mouth of the River; we had other ſmall Iſlands without us, and might have gone up into the Ri- ver, having a ſtrong tyde of flood, but would not adventure farther till we had lookt well about us. We immediately ſent a Canoa aſhore on the Iſland, where we ſaw (what we always feared) a Ship at the mouth of the River, lying cloſe by the fhore, and a large Tent by it, by which we found it would be a hard task for us to eſcape them. When the Canoa came aboard with this news, fome of our men were a little diſheartned; but it was no more than I ever expected. Our care was now to get ſafe over land, ſeeing we could not land here according to our deſire : Therefore before the Tide of flood was ſpent, we manned our Canoa and rowed again to the Iland, to ſee if the Enemy was yet in motion. When we came a a B 3 16 a 9 The Author's Return out of the South Seas. Anº 1681 came aſhore we diſpers’d our felves all over the Iſland, to prevent our Enemies from coming any way to view us; and preſently after high-water we ſaw a ſmall Canoa coming over from the Ship to the Iland that we were on; which made us all get into our Canoa, and wait their coming ; and we lay cloſe till they came within Piſtol-Shot of us, and then being ready, we ſtarted out and took them. There were in her one white man and two Indians; who being examined, told us that the Ship which we ſaw at the Rivers mouth had lain there fix months, guarding the River, waiting for our coming; that ſhe had 12 Guns, and 150 Sea-men and Souldiers : that the Sea-men all lay aboard, but the Souldiers lay alhore in their Tent; that there were 300 men at the Mines, who had all ſmall Arms, and would be aboard in two Tydes time. They likewiſe told us, that there were two Ships cruiſing in the Bay, between this place and Gorgonia ; the biggeſt had 20 Guns, and 200 Men, the other 10 Guns,and 150 men: Beſides all this they told us that the Indians on this ſide the Coun- try were our Enemies; which was the worſt news of all. However we preſently brought theſe Pri- foners aboard, and got under fail, turning out with the Tyde of Ebb, for it was not convenient to ſtay longer there. We did not long conſider what to do; but in tended to land that night, or the next day betimes; for we did not queſtion but we ſhould either get a good commerce with the Indians, by fuch toys as we had purpoſely brought with us, or elſe force our way through their Country, in ſpight of all their oppoſition: and we did not fear what theſe Spaniards could do againſt us, in caſe they ſhould land and come after us. We had a ſtrong Souther- ly Wind, which blew right in; and the Tyde of Ebb being far fpent, we could not turn out. I per- a An account of the Moskito Indians. 7 I perſwaded them to run into the River of Congo, An. 1681 which is a large River, about three leagues from the Iſlands where we lay; which with a Southerly Wind we could have done: and when we were got ſo high as the Tide flows, then we might have landed. But all the arguments I could uſe were not of force ſufficient to convince them that there was a large River ſo near us, but they would land ſomewhere, they neither did know how, where, nor when. When we had rowed and towed againſt the Wind all night, we juſt got about Cape St. Lorenzo in the morning; and failed about 4 miles farther to the Weſtward, and run into a ſmall Creek with- in two Keys, or little Iſlands, and rowed up to the head of the Creek, being about a niile up, and there we landed, May 1. 1681. We got out all our Proviſion and Cloaths, and then funk our Veffel. While we were landing, and fixing our Snap- facks to march, our Moskito Indians ſtruck a plenti- ful diſh of Fiſh, which we immediately dreſt, and therewith ſatisfied our hunger. Having made mention of the Moskito Indians, it may not be amits to conclude this Chapter with a Short account of them. They are tall, well made, raw-boned, luſty, ſtrong, and nimble of foot; long vifag d, lank black hair, look fiern, hard fa- vour'd, and of a dark Copper-colour Complexion. They are but a finall Nation or Family, and not 100 men of them in number, inhabiting on the Main, on the North ſide, near Cape Gratia Dios; between Cape Honduras and Nicaragua, They are very ingenious at throwing the Lance, Fiígig, Har- poon, or any manner of Dart, being bred to itfrom their Infancy; for the Children imitating their Pa. rents, never go abroad without a Lance in their hands, which they throw at any object, till uſe hath made a 9 B4 a An account of the Moskito Indians. An. 168; made them maſters of the Art. Then they learn to put by a Lance, Arrow, or Dart; the manner is thus. Two Boys ſtand at a ſmall diſtance, and Dart a blunt ftick at one another; each of them holding a ſmall ſtick in his right hand, with which he ſtrikes away that which was darted at him. As they grow in years they become more dexterous and courageous, and then they will ſtand a fair inark, to any one that will ſhoot Arrows at them; which they will put by with a very ſmall ſtick, no bigger than the rod of a Fowling piece; and when they are grown to be men, they will guard them- ſelves from Arrows, tho they come very thick at them, provided two do not happen to come at once. They have extraordinary good Eyes, and will diſcry a Sail at Sea farther, and ſee any thing better than we. Their chieféſt employment in their own Country is to ſtrike Fiſh, Turtle or Manatee, the manner of which I deſcribe elſe, where, Chap 3. For this they are eſteemed and co- 3 veted by all Privateers; for one or two of them in a Ship, will maintain 100 men:So that when we careen our Ships, we chooſe commonly ſuch places, where there is plenty of Turtle or Manatee for theſe Mof- kito men to ſtrike ; and it is veiy rare to find Pri- vateers deftitute of one or more of them, when the Commander, or moft of the men are Engliſh; bit they do not love the French, and the Spaniards they hate mortally. When they come among Pri- vateers, they get the uſe of Guns, and prove very good Marks men: They behave themſelves very bold in fight, and never ſeem to flinch nor hang back; for they think that the white men with whom they are, know better than they do when it is beſt to fight, and let the diſadvantage of their party be never ſo great, they will never yield nor give back while any of their party ftand. I could never perceive any Religion nor any Ceremonies, OL An account of the Moskito Indians or ſuperſtitious Obſervations among them, being An.1681 ready to imitate us in whatſoever they ſaw us do at any time. Only they ſeem to fear the Devil, whom they call Walleſaw; and they ſay he often appears to fome among them, whom our men commonly call their Prieits, when they deſire to ſpeak with him on urgent buſineſs; but the reſt know not any thing of him, nor how he appears, otherwiſe than as theſe Prieſts tell them. Yet they all ſay they muſt not anger him, for then he will beat them, and that ſometimes he carries away theſe their Prieſts. Thus much I have heard from ſome of them who ſpeak good Engliſh. They marry but one Wife, with whom they live till death ſeparates them. At their firſt coming to- gether, the man makes a very ſmall Plantation, for there is Land enough, and they may chooſe what ſpot they pleaſe. They delight to ſettle near the Sea, or by fome River, for the ſake of ſtriking Fiſh, their beloved imployment. Far within Land there are other Indians, with whom they are always at War. After the man hath cleared a ſpot of Land, and hath Planted it, he ſeldom minds it afterward, but leaves the ma- naging of it to his Wife, and he goes out a ſtriking: Sometimes he ſeeks only for Fih, at other times for Turtle, or Manatee, and whatever he gets he brings home to his Wife, and never ſtirs out to ſeek for more till it is all eaten. When hunger begins to bite, he either takes his Canoa and feeks for more game at Sea, or walks out into the Woods and hunts about for Pecary, Warree, each a ſort of Wild Hogs, or Deer; and ſeldom returns empty handed, nor ſeeks for any more ſo long as any of it laſts. Their Plantations are ſo ſmall, that they cannot ſubſiſt with what they produce : for their largeſt Plantations have not above 20 or 30 Plan- tain-Trees, a bed of Yams and Potatoes, a buſh of 10 a a An account of the Moskito Indians An.168. of Indian Pepper, and a ſmall ſpot of Pine-apples รู้ which laſt fruit is a main thing they delight in, for with theſe they make a fort of drink which our men call Pine-drink, much eſteemed by theſe Mos- kito's, and to which they invite each other to be merry, providing Fish and Fleſh alſo. Whoever of them makes of this Liquor treats his Neighbours, making a little Canoa full at a time, and ſo enough to make them all drunk ; and it is ſeldom that ſuch ' Feafts are made, but the party that makes them hath fome deſign, either to be revenged for ſome injury done him, or to debate of ſuch differences as have hapned between him and his neighbours, and to examine into the truth of ſuch matters. Yet before they are warmed with drink, they never ſpeak one word of their grievances: and the wo- men, who commonly know their husbands deſigns, prevent them from doing any injury to each other by hiding their Lances, Harpoons, Bows and Ar- rows, or any other Weapon that they have. , Theſe Moskitoes are in general very civil and kind to the Engliſh, of whom they receive a great deal of reſpect, both when they are aboard their Ships, and alſo alhore, either in Jamaica, or elſewhere, whither they often come with the Seamen. We always humour them, letting them go any whither as they will, and return to their Country in any Veſſel bound that way, if they pleaſe. They will have the management of themſelves in their ſtriking, and will go in their own little Canoa , which our men could not go in without danger of overſetting ; nor will they then let any white man come in their Canoa, but will go a ſtriking in it juſt as they pleaſe : All which we allow them. For should we croſs them, tho they ſhould fee Shoals of Fiſh, or Turtle, or the like, they will purpoſely ftrike their Harpoons and Turtle-irons aſide, or ſo glance them as to kill nothing. They have no form of : II An account of the Moskito Indians. of Government among them, but acknowledge the An. 1681 King of England for their Soveraign: They learn our Language, and take the Governor of Fa. maica to be one of the greateſt Princes in the World. While they are among the Engliſh, they wear good Cloaths, and take delight to go neat and tight; but when they return again to their own Country, they put by all their Cloaths, and go after their own Country faſhion, wearing only a ſmall piece of Linnen tyed about their waſtes, hanging down to their knees. CHA P. II. The Author's Land Journey from the South to the North-Sea, over the Terra Firma, or Iſthmus of Darien. B Eing landed, May the ift, we began our march about 3 a Clock in the Afternoon, directing our courſe by our Pocket Compaſſes N. E. and having gone about 2 miles, we canie to the foot of a hill were we built fmall Hutts and lay all night; having exceſſive Rains till 12 a Clock. The ad day in the morning having fair weather, we aſcended the hill, and found a ſmall Indian path, which we followed till we found it run too much Eaſterly, and then doubting it would carry us out of our way, we climb'd fome of the higheſt Trees on the Hill, which was not meanly furniſh- ed with as large and tall Trees as ever I ſaw: At length we diſcovered fome Houſes in a Valley on the North ſide of the Hill, but it being fteep could not 1 2 а. A Journey over the Iſthmus of America. An.168 inot deſcend on that fide, but followed the ſmall path which led us down the Hill on the Eaſt ſide, where we preſentiy found ſeveral other Indian Houſes. The firſt that we came to at the foot of the Hill, had none but women at home, who could not ſpeak Spaniſh, but gave each of us a good Cala- baſh or Shell full of Corn-drink. The other Houſes had ſome men at home, but none that ſpoke Spa- niſh; yet we made a ſhift to buy fuch food as their Houſes or Plantations afforded, which we dreſt, and eat all together ; having all ſorts of our Provi- fion in common, becauſe none ſhould live better than others, or pay dearer for any thing than it was worth. This day we had marched 6 mile. In the evening the Husbands of thoſe women came home, and told us in broken Spaniſh, that they had been on board the Guard Ship, which we fled from two days before, that we were now not above three mile from the mouth of the River of Congo,and that they could go from thence aboard the Guard Ship in half a Tydes time. This evening we ſupped plentifully on Fowls, and Pecary; a fort of Wild Hogs which we bought of the Indians; Yams, Potatoes and Plantains ſerved us for Bread, whereof we had enough. After Sup- per we agreed with one of theſe Indians to guide us a days march into the Country,towards the North fide; he was to have for his pains a Hatchet, and his bargain was to bring us to a certain Indians ha- bitation, who could ſpeak Spaniſh; from whom we were in hopes to be better ſatisfied of our Journey. The 3d day having fair weather, we began to ftir hetimes, and ſet out betwixt 6 and 7 a clock, marching through ſeveral old ruined Plantations. This morning one of our men being tired gave us the ſlip. By 12 a clock we had gone 8 mile, and arrived at the Indians houſe, who lived on the bank af the River Congé, and ſpake very good Spaniſh; to whom A Journey over the Iſthmus .of America. 13 whom we declared the reaſon of this viſit. An. 1681 At firſt he ſeemed to be very dubious of enter- taining any diſcourſe with us, and gave very im- pertinent anſwers to the queſtions that we demand- ed of him; he told us he knew no way to the North ſide of the Country, but could carry us to Cheapo or to Santa Maria, which we knew to be Spaniſh Garriſons; the one lying to the Eaſtward of us, the other to the Weſtward : Either of them at leaſt 20 miles out of our way. We could get no other anſwer from Irim, and all his diſcourſe was in ſuch an angry tone, as plainly declared he was not our friend. However, we were forced to make a virtue of neceffity, and humour him, for it was neither time nor place to be angry with the Indian ; all our lives lying in their hand. We were now at a great loſs, not knowing what courſe to take, for we tempted him with Beads, Money, Hatchets, Macheats, or long Knives; but nothing would work on him, till one of our men took a Sky-coloured Petticoat out of his bag and put it on his Wife, who was ſo much pleaſed with the Preſent, that he immediately began to chatter to her Husband, and ſoon brought him into a better humour. He could then tell us that he knew the way to the North lide, and would have gone with us, but that he had cut his foot 2 days before, which made him uncapable of ſerving us himſelf: But he would take care that we ſhould not want a guide ; and therefore he hired the ſame Indian who brought us hither, to conduct us 2 days march further for another Hatchet. The old man would have ſtayed us here all the day, becauſe it rained very hard ; but our buſineſs required more hafte, our Enemies lying ſo near us, for he told us that he could go from his houſe aboard the Guard Ship in a Tydes time ; and this was the 4th day ſince they ſaw us. So we marched 3 mile farther, and 14 A Journey over the Iſthmus of America. An. 1681and th en built Hutts, where we ſtayed all night ; it rained all the afternoon, and the greateſt part of the night. The 4th day we began our march betimes, for the forenoons were commonly fair, but much rain afternoon: tho whether it rained or ſhined it was much at one with us, for I verily believed we croft the Rivers 30 times this day: the Indians having no paths to travel from one part of the Country to another, and therefore guiding themſelves by the Rivers. We marched this day 12 miles, and then built our Hutts and lay down to ſleep ; but we al- ways kept two men on the watch ; otherwiſe our own Slaves might have knockt us on the head while we ſlept. It rained violently all the afternoon, and moſt part of the night. We had much ado to kindle a fire this evening: our Hutts were but very mean or ordinary, and our Fire ſmall, ſo that we could not dry our Cloaths, ſcarce warm our felves, and no fort of food for the Belly; all which made it very hard with us. I confeſs theſe hardſhips quite expell’d the thoughts of an Enemy, for now having been 4 days in the Country, we began to have but few other cares than how to get Guides and Food, the Spaniards were ſeldom in our thoughts. The sth day we ſet out in the morning betimes, and having travelled 7 miles in thoſe wild pathlefs Woods, by 10 a clock in the morning we arrived at a young Spaniſh Indian s Houſe, who had former- ly lived with the Biſhop of Panama. The young Indian was very brisk, 1poke very good Spaniſh, and received us very kindly. This Plantation afforded us ſtore of Proviſion, Yams, and Potatoes, but no- thing of any fleſh, beſide 2 fat Monkeys we ſhot, part whereof we diſtributed to ſome of our Com- pany, who were weak and fickly; for others we got Eggs, and ſuch refreſhments as the Indians had, for we ſtill provided for the ſick and weak. We had 3 15 A Journey over the Iſthmus of America. had a Spaniſh Indian in our company, who firft took An.1681 up Arms with Captain Sawkins, and had been with us ever ſince his death. He was perſwaded to live here by the maſter of the houſe, who promiſed him his Siſter in marriage, and to be aſſiſtant to him in clearing a Plantation ; but we would not conſent to part from him here, for fear of ſome treachery, but promiſed to releaſe him in two or three days, when we were certainly out of dan- ger of our Enemies. We ſtayed here all the Afrer- noon, and dryed our Cloath, and Ammunition, cleared our Guns, and provided our felves for a march the next morning. Our Chyrurgeon Mr. Wafer came to a fad dif- after here: Being drying his Powder, a careleſs fel- low paſſed by with his Pipe lighted, and ſet fire to his Powder, which blew upand ſcorch'd his Knee; and reduced him to that condition, that he was not able to march; wherefore we allowed him a Slave to cariy his things, being all of us the more concern'd at the accident, becauſe lyable ourſelves every moment to misfortune, and none to look after us but him. This Indian Plantation was feated on the bank of the River Congo, in a very fat Soyl, and thus far we might have come in our Canoa, if I could have perſwaded them to it. The 6th day we ſet out again, having hired ano- ther guide. Here we firſt croft the River Congo in a Canoa, having been from our firſt Landing on the Weft ſide of the River, and beingover, we march- ed to the Eaſtwards 2 mile, and came to another River, which we forded ſeveral times, though it was very deep. Two of our men were not able to keep company with us, but came after us as they were able. The laſt time we forded the River, it was ſo deep, that our talleft men ſtood in the deep- eft place, and handed the fick, weak, and ſhort men ; by which means we all got over tafe, ex- cept 16 A Journey over the Iſthmus of America. An. 1681 cept thoſe two who were behind. Foreſeeing a neceſſity of wading through Rivers frequently in our Land-march, I took care before I left the Ship, to provide my ſelf a large Joint of Bambo, which I ſtopt at both ends, cloſing it with Wax, ſo as to keep out any Water. In this I preſerved my Jour- nal and other Writings from being wet, tho I was often forced to ſwim. When we were over this River, we ſat down to wait the coming of our Conforts who were left behind, and in half an hour they came. But the River by that time was ſo high, that they could not get over it, neither could we help them over, but bid them be of good comfort and ſtay till the River did fall : But we marched 2 mile farther by the ſide of the River, and there built our Hutts, having gone this day 6 miles. We had ſcarce finiſhed our Hutts before the River roſe much higher, and overflowing the Banks, obliged us to remove into higher ground: But the night came on before we could build more Hutts, ſo we lay ftraggling in the Woods, fome under one Tree, ſome under another, as we could find conveniency which might have been in- different comfortable ifthe weather had been fair; but the greateſt part of the night we had extraor- dinary hard Rain, with much Lightnening and terri- ble claps of Thunder. Theſe hardships and incon- veniencies made us all careleſs, and there was no Watch kept, (tho I believe no body did ſleep :) So our Slaves taking opportunity, went away in the night ; all but one, who was hid in fome hole and knew nothing of their deſign, or elſe fell aſleep. Thoſe that went away, carried with them our Chyrurgeons Gun and all his Money. The next morning being the 8th day, we went to the Rivers ſide, and found it much fallen; and bere our Guide would have us ford it again, which being deep, and the current running ſwift, we could not over. A Journey over the Iſthmus of America 17 not. Then we contrived to ſwim over; thoſe An. 1681 that could not ſwim, we were reſolved to help o- ver as well as we could: But this was not fo feiza- ble, for we ſhould not be able to get all our things At length we concluded to ſend one man over with a Line, who ſhould hale over all our things firſt, and then get the men over. This be- ing agreed on, one George Gayny took the end of a Line, and made it faſt about his Neck, and left the other end aſhore, and one man ſtood by the Line, to clear it away to him. But when Gayny was in the midſt of the water, the Line in drawing after him chanc'd to kink, or grow entangled ; and he that ſtood by to clear it away, ſtopt the Line, which turned Gayny on his back, and he that had the Line in his hand threw it all into the River after him, thinking he might recover himſelf, but the ſtreani running very ſwift and the man having three hun- dred Dollars at his back, was carried down, and never ſeen more by us. Thoſe two men whom we left behind the day before, told us afterwards that they found him lying dead in a Creek, where the Eddy had driven him aſhore, and the Money on his back ; but they meddled not with any of it, being only in care how to work their way thro a wild unknown Country. This put a period to that contrivance. This was the fourth man that we loſt in this Land Journey; for thoſe two men that we left the day before, did not come to us till we were in the North Seas, ſo we yielded them alſo for loft. Being fruſtrated of getting over the River this way, we lookt about for a Tree to fell acroſs the River. At length we found one, which awe cut down, and it reached clear over: on this we paſſed to the other ſide, where we found a ſmall Plantain-walk, which we foon ranſackt. While we were buſie getting Plantsins, our Guide Wis gone, but in leſs than two hours came to us C again, a 18 A Journey over the Iſthmus of America. An.1581 again, and brought with him an old Indian, to whom he deliver'd up his charge; and we gave him a Hatchet and diſmiſt him, and entered our ſelves under the conduct of our new Guide: who imme- diately led us away, and croft another River, and enter d into a large Valley of the fatteft Land I did ever take notice of; the Trees were not very thick, but the largeſt that I ſaw in all my travels: We ſaw great tracks which were made by the Pecaries, but ſaw none of them. We march'd in this pleaſantCoun- try till 3 a clock in the afternoon, in all about 4 miles, and then arrived at the old mans Country- houſe, which was only a habitation for Hunting : there was a ſmall Plantain-walk, fome Yams and Potatoes. Here we took up our quarters for this day, and refreſhed our felves with ſuch food as the place afforded, and dryed our Cloaths and Ammu- nition. At this place our young Spaniſh Indian provided to leave us, for now we thought our ſelves paſt danger. This was he that was perſwa- ded to ſtay at the laſt houſe we came from, to marry the young mans Siſter; and we diſmiſs'd him according to our promiſe. The ninth day the old man conducted us towards his own habitation. We marched about 5 miles in this Valley; and then aſcended a Hill, and travel- led about 5 miles farther over two or three ſmall Hills, before we came to any ſettlement. Half a mile before we came to the Plantations we light of a path, which carried us to the Indians habitations. We Taw many wooden Croiſeserected in the way, which created fome jealouſie in us that here were ſome Spaniards : Therefore we new primed all our Guns, and provided our felves for an Enemy; but coming into the Town found none but Indians, who were all got together in a large houſe to receive us : for the old man had a little boy with him that he ſent before. They a A Journey over the Iſthmus of America They made us welcome to ſuch as they had, An. 1681 which was very mean ; for theſe were new Planta- tions, the Corn being not eared. Patatoes, Yams, and Plantains they had none but what they brought from their old Plantations. There were none of them fpoke good spaniſh : Two young men could ſpeak a little; it cauſed us to take more notice of them. To theſe we made a Preſent, and deſired them to get us a Guide to conduct us to the North fide, or part of the way, which they promiſed to do themſelves, if we would reward them for it, but told us we muſt lye ſtill the next day. But we thought our felves nearer the North Sea than we were, and propoſed to go without a Guide, ra- ther than ſtay here a whole day. However ſome of our men who were tired refolved to ſtay behind, and Mr. Wafer our Chirurgeon, who marched in great pain ever ſince his Knee was burned with powder, was refolved to ſtay with them. The tenth day we got up betimes reſolving to march, but the Indians oppoſed it as much as they could ; but ſeeing they could not perſwade us to ftay, they came with us; and having taken leave of our friends, we ſet out. Here therefore we left the Chirurgeon and two more, as we faid, and marched away to the Eaſt- ward, following our Guides. But we often look d on our Pocket-Compaſſes, and ſhewed them to the Guides, pointing at the way that we would go, which made them ſhake their heads, and ſay, they were pretty things, but not convenient for us. Af- ter we had deſcended the Hill on which the Town food, we came down into a Valley, and guided our ſelves by a River, which we croffed 32 times and having marched 9 miles, we built Hurts and lay there all night. This evening I killed a Quaum, a large Bird as big as a Turkey, wherewith we treated our Guides, for we brought no Proviſion with a 100 C 2 20 A Journey over the Iſthmus of America. An. 1681 with us. This night our laſt Slave run away. The eleventh day we marched to mile farther, and built Hutts at night, but went fupperleſs to Bed. The twelfth in the morning we croſſed a deep River, pafling over it on a Tree, and marched mi'e in a low ſwampy ground and came to the fide of a great deep River, but could not get over. We builc Hutts upon its Banks, and lay there all night, upon our Barbecu's, or frames of ſticks, raiſed about 3 foot from the Ground. The thirteenth day, when we turned out the River had overflowed its Banks,and was 2 foot deep in our Hutts, and our Guides went from us not tel. ling us their intent,which made us think they were returned home again. Now we began to repent our hafte in coming from the laſt ſettlements, for we had no food ſince we came from thence.Indeed we got Macaw-berries in this place, wherewith we fatistied our ſelves this day, tho courſly. The fourteenth day in the morning betimes, our Guides came to us again, and the Waters being fallen within their bounds, they carry'd us to a Tree that ſtood on the bank of a River, and told us if we could fell that Tree croſs it, we might país; if not, we could paſs no further. Therefore we fet 2 of the beſt Ax-men that we had, who fell dit exactly croſs the River and the boughs juſt reached over; on this we paiſed very ſafe. We afterwards croſſed another River three times, with much difficulty, and at 3 clock in the afternoon we came to an Indian ſettlement, where we met à drove of Monkeys, and killed 4 of them and ſtay, ed here all night ; having marched this day 6 miles. Here we got Plantains enough, and a kind recep- tion of the Indian that lived here all alone, except one boy to wait on him. 2 a The 21 S 3150 A Journey over the Iſthmus of America. The fifteenth day when we ſet out, the kind An.1681 Indian and his boy went with us in a Canoa, and ſet us over ſuch places as we could not ford: and being paſt thoſe great Rivers, he returned back a- gain, heving helped us at leaſt 2 mile.We marched afterwards s mile, and came to largePlantain walks, where we took up our quarters that night; we there fed plentifully on Plantains, both ripe and green, and had fair weather all the day and night. I think theſe were the largeſt Plantain walks, and the biggeſt Plantains, that ever I ſaw, but no Houſe near them. We gathered what we pleaſed by'öur Guides orders. no 2011 dato The ſixteenth day we marched 3 mile, and came . ro a large ſettlement, where we abode all day ; not a man of us us but wilht the Journey at at end: our Feet being bliſtered, and our Thighs fript with wading thro fo many, Rivers; Rivers; the way being al- . molt continually thro Rivers, or pathleſs Woads. In the afternoon s of us went to ſeek for game, and kill d Monkeys, which we dreſt for Supper. Here we firſt began to have fair weather, which continued with us till we came to the North Se. afn The eighteenth day we f t out at to a Clock and the Indians with Canoas carried us a league up a River, and when we landed the kind Indians went withi us and carried our burthens. We marched mile farther and then built our Hurts, having tra- yelled from the laſt fettlements 6 miles, w The nineteenth day our Guides loft their way, and we did not march above two miles. The twentieth day by 12 a clock we came to Cheapo River. The Rivers we croft hitherto run all into the South Seas; and this of Choapo was the laſt we met with that run that way. Here an old man who came from the laſt fettlenients, diſtributed his burthen of Plantains amongſt us,and taking his leave returned home. Afterward we forded the River C and W 5 SI $ cz 3 A Journey over the Iſthmus .of America. An. 1681 and inarched to the foot of a very high Mountain, where we lay all night. This day we marched a- bout 9 miles The 21ſt day ſome of the Indians returned back, and we marched up a very high mountain ; being on the top,we went ſome miles on a ridge, and ſteep on both fides ; then defcended a little, and came to a fine Spring, where we lay all night, having gone this day about 9 miles, the weather Aill very fair and clear. The 22d day we marched over another very high Mountain, keeping on the ridge s miles. When we came to the North end, we, to our great comfort, faw the Sea ; then we deſcended and part- ed our ſelves into 3 Companies, and lay by the fide of a River, which was the firſt we met that runs into the North Sea. The 23d day we came thro ſeveral large Plan- tain walks, and at 10 a clock, came to an Indian habitation, not far from the North Sea. Here we got Canoas to carry us down the River Conception to the Sea ſide; having gone this day about 7 miles. We found a great many Indians at the mouth of this River · They had ſettled themſelves here for the benefit of Trade with the Privateers, and their Commodities were Yans, Potatoes, Plantains, Sugar, Canës, Fowls, and Eggs. Theſe Indians told us, that there had been a great many Engliſh and French Ships here, which were all gone but one Barco-longo, a French Privateer that lay at La Sounds Key or Illand. This Iſland is about 3 leagues from the mouth of the River Conception, and is one of the Samballoes, a range of Iſlands reaching for about 20 leagues, from point Samballas . to Gol- den-Iſland Eaſtward. Theſe Iſlands or Keys, as we call them, were firſt niade the Rendezvous of Pri- vateers in the year 1679, being very convenient for careening, and had names given to ſome of them A Journey over the Iſthmus of America. 23 them by the Captains of the Privateers; as this A1.1681 La-Sound s Key particularly. Thus we finiſhed our Journy from the South Sea to the North in 22 days; in which time by my ac- count, we travelled 110 miles, crofſing ſome very high Mountains ; but our common march was in the Valleys among deep and dangerous Rivers. At our firſt landing in this Country, we were told that the Indians were our Enemies; we knew the Rivers to be deep, the wet ſeaſon to be coming in ; yet excepting thoſe we left behind, we loft but one man, who was drowned as I ſaid. Our firit land- ing place on the South Coaſt was very diſadvanta- geous, for we travelled at leaſt 50 miles more , than we need to have done, could we have gone up Cheapo River, or Santa Maria River; for at either of theſe places a man may pafs from Sea to Sea in 3 days time with eaſe. The Indians can do it in a day and a half, by which you may ſee how eaſy it is for a party of Men to travel over. I muſt con- feſs the Indians did affiſt us very much, and I queſti- on whether ever we had got over without their af- fiſtance, becauſe they brought us from time to time to their Plantations, where we always got Proviſi- on, which elſe we ſhould have wanted. But if a party of soo, or 600 men, or more, were minded to travel from the North to the South Seas, they may do without asking leave of the Indians ; though it be much better to be friends with them. On the 24th of May,(having lain one night at the Rivers mouth) we all went on board the Privateer, who lay at La Sound's Key. It was a French Veſſel, Captain Triſtian Commander. The firſt thing we did was to get ſuch things as we could to gratifie our Indian Guides, for we were reſoived to reward them to their hearts content. This we did by giv- ing them Beads, Knives, Sciſſars, and Looking: glaſſes, which we bought of the Privateers Crew; a а C4 end a 24 The Author's arrival at the North Seas. An. 1681 and half a Dollar a man from each of us; which we would have beſtowed in Goods alſo, but could not get any, the Privateer having no more toys. They were ſo well ſatisfied with theſe, that they returned with joy to their friends, and were very kind to our Conſorts whom we left behind ; as Mr. Wafer our Chyrurgeon and the reſt of them told us, when they came to us ſome months after- wards, as ſhall be ſaid hereafter. I might have given a further account of ſeveral things relating to this Country ; the Inland parts of which are ſo little known to the Europeans. But I ſhall leave this province ito Mr. Wafer, who made a longer abode in it than I ; and is better able to do it thau any man that I know; and lis now prepar- ing a particular Deſcription of this Country for the Preſs. be bo ob СНАР. Place this at P. 24. NEW a Map of the Mary Land The Isles of CAPE VERD I.S. Antonio 21. St Vincent I. d'Sal I. S. Lucia Id's Nicolas VIRGINIA A chamack Carolina Middle Part of AMERICA MEXICO THE NORTH or I. Chaon Bleyn Diniy bag Stille? I. d'Bonas vita Bermudas I. d'Mavo 130 FLORIDA Herra fora 30 Water Villaye sont Pan Pd Praya Cividad CALIFORNIA California 1. d’SIago Gulph of I, d'Fuogo SO Bahama D Islands ATLAN Florida The Tropick of Cancer d'St Lago OF I. d'Bravo 10. Leagues 28 Florida cas I. tavana CUBA C. S. Lucas 1. Chametlis GULIH N. BISCAY Malaclan Rosario MEXIC Roleta la Vera I.SIohn Sta Pecaque Lago Cruz 'vlloa I. Pontique compostella NOVAUHISPANIA Purification Mexico C. Corrientes V collima Thelupan I. Chametly FAM. Petu Splan & Tecoanytepec o M R R. Iles Marias P. George's la stE I. of Pines French Tortuga, or Petit Guavres selts Bays Porto Rico dypvadyo RCE Caihooca Dalderas X 20 Guaxaca I IUCATAN 20 2keys Cuba o Ball B G.I. Catmanes 7. G. Caimanes opcaiman Brac v Iamaica I. Hispaniola اد alita с B.Sallagua Cheapo na Honduras Gafonduras Negril B Port Roya I Vacca Nevis Valley Maguella R.Eftapa. Moskitos or Ash tique R. Chequetan C. Gratia Dios Pearl Iſlands & The Caribbee S+Chriftophers TICK 5. Domingo Martinica Islands 7 Tabago Trinidada SEA. ruba Curasag Asta Barbara I.Tangola HON DU RAS ° Guamala Cape R Segovia Literatus Rialeja Acapulco Port Marquis Port Angels Røman Bonairy Aves SA Dincia Barbados Blanco O of Rancheria Margarita I. Sacrificio Aniol R. Lempi Seuda Port Guatulco Corn I. of Nicaragua Carpenters Andreas Proyidence Costa Rica Chagre, bel Cartagena The Sambalas Rio la Hachas senarika Paria i con St Michael'mon ger nombre de Dios Caraceo. Verina Venezuel 10 ricoja DAR IEN 10 G. of Maracaybo Port of M. La Madre de Popa 1. Am falla Volcan veja Panama Nata Bay Rio C. Blanco °14 Guiary Comana подтуб игрес NEW AN VENE ZU E LA THE SOUTH Η Caldera 31.com Onur qchina of Panam Surinam R. G. de Darien Gran Sta Fe DALUSIA Port Pinas Keys of Quicaro or Quibo, Bay C. Corrientes Grande de site POPAYAN GVAILANA 600 Madalena 300 goo all HELLU I. 'ocos anbo Engligh Miles I. Gorgona 1.Gallo CSt Francisco Martha womaco R. Oron The Equinoctial Prime Lake C. Paſao Manta Quito M. Christo Iles Gillapagos I.Plata e o S E A szólanche Guiaquil of the R. Amazons C. St Lorenzo P,SHellena Pt Chandy Pit Arena, & I. Pung I. St Clara Guia PERU uombez B) R Á SIL A M A ZONES C. Blanco Colan PT Aguide Paita Piura I. Làbos de terre I Lobos denar: o 1 25 An. 1681 CHAP. II. 9. The Author's cruiſing with the Privateers in the North Seas on the Weſt India Ceaft. The go to the Iſle of St. Andreas Of the Cedars there. ThcCorn Iſlands, and their Inhab tants. Bluefields River, and an Account of the Ma. natee there, or Sea. Cow; with the manner how the Moskito Indians kill them, and T0;- toiſe, &c. The Maho-tree. The Savages of Bocco toro. He touches again at Point Sam- ballas, and its Iſlands. The Groves of Sapadil- laes , the Soldier-Inſect, and Mancha- neel Tree. The River of Darien, and the Wild Indians ne ar i/ ; Monaſlery of Madre de Po- pa, Rio Grande, Santa Martha Town, and the high Mountain there; Rio la HachaTown, Rancho Reys, and Pearl Fiſhery there, the Indian Inhabitants and Country. Dutch Iſle of Queriſao, &c.Count D'Eftree's unfortunate Éxpedition thither. Iſe of Bon-Airy. Ine of Aves, the Booby, and Man of War Bird: The Wreck of D'Eftree's Fl et, and Captain Pain's Adventure here. Little Ife of Aves. The Iſles Roca's ; the Noddy and Tropick Bird, Mineral Water, Egg-Birds; the Man- grove Trees, black, red, and white. Ife of Tortuga, its Salt-ponds. Iſe of Blanco; the Guano Animal, their Variety; and the beſt Sea Tortoiſe, Modern Alterations in the Weſt Indies The Coaſt of Caraccus, its re. markable 26 An. 1681 Privateers in the North Seas. markable Land, and Produ&t of the beſt Cacao Nuts. The Cacao deſcribed at large, with the Husbandry of it. City of Caraccos. La Guiare Fort and Haven. Town of Comana. Verina, its famous beft Spaniſh Tobacco. The rich Trade of the Coaſt of Caraccos. Of the Sucking Fiſh or Remora. The Author's arrival in Virginia. 34 Guns, 40 Men He Privateer on board which we went being TH now clean'd, and our Indian Guides thus fatis fy'd and fet afhore, we ſet fail in two days for Springer's Key, another of the Samballoe's Illes, and about 7 or 8 leagues from La Sounds Key. Here lay 8 fail of Privateers more, viz. Capt. Coxon, 1o Guns, 100 Men Capt. Payne, 10 Guns, 100 Men:( Engliſh Com- , Capt.Wright, manders and aBarcolongo , Engliſhmen. Capt Williams, a ſmall Barcolongo Capt. Yanks a Barcolongo 4 Guns, about 60 Men, Englifh, Dutch, and French ; himſelf a Dutchman. Capt. Archemboe, 8 Guns, 40 Men.) French Com- Capt.Tucker, 6 Guns, 70 Men. . manders and Capt. Roſe, a Barcolongo. Men. An hour before we came to the Fleet, Captain Wright, who had been ſent to Chagra River, arrived at Springer's Key, with a large Canoa or Pereago laden with Flower, which he took there. Some of the priſoners belonging to the Pereago, came from Panama not above 6 days before he took her, and told the news of our coming over land, and like- wife related the condition and ſtrength of Panama, which was the main thing they enquired after; for Captain Wright was ſent thither purpoſely to get a Priſoner that was able to inform them of the ſtrength of that City, becauſe theſe Privateers de- figned to join all their force, and by the aſſiſtance of } j The Privateers Intelligence. 27 of the Indians,(who had promiſed to be their Guides) An.1681 to march over land to Panama ; and there is no other way of getting Priſoners for that purpoſe, but by abſconding between Chagra and Portabell, becauſe there are much Goods brought that way from Pana- ma; eſpecially when the Armado Iyeth at Portabell . All the Commanders were aboard of Captain Wright when we came into the Fleet; and were mighty inquiſitive of the Priſoners to know the truth of what they related concerning us. But as ſoon as they knew we were come, they immediately came aboard of Captain Triſtian, being all overjoy d to ſee us, for Captain Coxon, and many others, had left us in the South Seas about 12 months ſince, and had never heard what became of us ſince that time. They enquired of us what we did there? how we lived ? how far we had been ? and what diſcoveries we made in thoſe Seas? After we had anſwered theſe general queſtions, they began to be more par- ticular, in examining, us concerning our paſſage through the Country from the South Seas. Were- lated the whole matter, giving them an account of the fatigues of our march, and the inconveniencies we ſuffered by the rains, and diſheartned them quite from that delign. Then they propoſed ſeveral other places where ſuch a party of men as were now got together might make a Voyage ; but the objections of fome or other ſtill hinder'd any proceeding: For the Privateers have an account of moſt Towns within 20 leagues of the Sea, on all the Coaſt from Trinidado down to La Vera Cruz; and are able to give a near gueſs of the ſtrength aud riches of them: For they make it their buſineſs to examine all Priſoners that fall into their hands , concerning the Country, Town, or City that they belong to ; whether born there, or how long they have known it ? how ma- ny families? whether moft Spaniards? or whether che > 28 Cruiſing on the Weſt India Coaft. An. 1682 the major part are not Copper-colour'd, as Mulattoes, Muſteſees, or Indians ? whether rich, and what their riches do confiftin? and what their chiefelt manu- fa&tures? If fortified, how many Great Guns, and what number of finall Arms ? Whether it is poſſible to come undefcried on them? How many Look-outs or Centinels? for ſuch the Spaniards always keep : and how the Look-ours are placed? Whether poſſible to avoid the Look-outs, or take them? If any River or Creek comes near it, or where the beſt Landing? with innumerable other ſuch queſtions, which their curioſities lead them to demand. And if they have hid any former diſcourſe of ſuch places from other Priſoners, they compare one with the other, then examine again, and enquire if he or enquire if he or any of them, are capable to be Guides to conduct a party of men thither : if not, where and how any Priſoner may be taken that may do it; and from thence they af- terwards lay their Schemes to proſecute whatever deſign they take in hand. 10 tontos lens Oions It was 7 or 8 days before any reſolution was raken, yet conſultations were held every day. The French ſeemed very forward to go to any Town that the Engliſh could or would propoſe, becauſe the Go- vernour of Petit-Gvaros (from whom the Privateers take Commiſſions) had recommended a Gentleman Sately come from France to be General of the Expe- dition; and fent word by Captain Tucker, with whom this Gentleman came, that they ſhould, if poſible, make an attempt on ſome Town before he return'd again. The Engliſh, when they were in company with the French , ſeem'd to approve of what the French ſaid, but never look'don that Gene- ral to be fit for the ſervice in hand... dogaeton At length it was concluded to go to a Town, called Coretaga, which Town lieth a great way in the Country, but not luch a tedious march as it would be from hence to Panama. Our way to it lay a CE а Пs yo The Inè of St. Anderas, iedves 29 tay up Carpenter's River, which is about 60 leagues AW.1687 to the Weltward of Portabell. Our greateſt obſtructi- on in this deſign was our want of Boars: Therefore it was concluded to go with all our Fleet to St. An- . dreas, a ſmall uninhabited Iſland, lying near the ille of Providence, to the Weſtward of it, in 13 Deg. 15 Min. North Lat. and from Portabell N. N. W. about 70 leagues ; where we ſhould be but a little way from Carpenter's River. And beſides, at this Iſland we might build Canoas, it being plentifully ſtored with large Cedars for ſuch a purpoſe ; and for this reaſon the Jamaica men come hither frequently to build Sloops; Cedar being very fit for building, and it being to be had hereat free-coft,beſide other Wood. Famaica is well ſtored with Cedars of its owr', chiefly aniong the Rocky Mountains : chefe alſo of St. Andreas grow in itony ground, and are the largeſt that ever I knew or heard of; the Bo- dies alone being ordinarily 40 or so foot long, ma- ny 60 or 70, and upwards, and of a proportionable bigneſs. The Bermudas Illes are well ftored with them ; fois Virginia, which is generally a ſandy foil. I ſaw none in the Eaſt Indies, nor in the South Sea Coaſt, except on the Iſthmus as I came over it. We reckon the Pereago's and Canoa's that are made of Ce- dar to be the belt of any; they are nothing but the Tree it ſelf made hollow Boat-wiſe, with a flat bot - tom, and the Canoa generally ſharp at both ends, the Pereago at one only, with the other end flat. But what is commonly ſaid of Cedar, that the Worm will not touch it, is a miſtake, for I have ſeen of it very much worm-eaten. All things being thus concluded on, we failed from hence, directing our courſe toward St. Andreas. We kept company the firſt day, but at night it blew a hard gale at N. E. and ſome of our Ships bore away. The next day others were forced to leave us, and the ſecond night we loſt all our company. I was 30 The Privateers ſeparate. An.1681 was now belonging to Captain Archembo, for all the reft of the Fleet were over mann'd: Captain Ar- chembo wanting men, we that came out of the South Seas muft either fail with him, or remain among the Indians. Indeed we found no cauſe to diſlike the Captain ; but his French Sea-men were the ſaddeſt creatures that I was ever among ; for though we had bad weather that requir'd many hands aloft, yet the biggeſt part of them never ſtirr'd out of their Ham- mocks, but to eat or eaſe themſelves. We made a fhift to find the Iſland the fourth day, where we met Captain Wright, who came chither the day be- fore; and had taken a Spaniſh Tartan, wherein were 30 men, all well armed: She had 4 Patereroes, and ſome long Guns placed in a Swivel on the Guunel. They fought an hour before they yielded. The news they related was, that they came from Carta- gena in company of 11 Armadilloes(which are ſmall Veſſels of War) to ſeek for the Fleet of Privateers lying in the Samballoes : that they parted from the Armadilloes 2 days before : that they wert order d to ſearch the Samballoes for us, and if they did not find us, then they were order'd to go to Portabell, and lye there till they had farther intelligence of us; and he ſuppoſed theſe Armadilloes to be now there. We that came over Land out of the South Seas be- ing weary of living among the French, deſired Cap- tain Wright to fit up his Prize the Tartan, and make a Man of War of her for us, which he at firſt ſeemed , to decline; becauſe he was ſettled among the French on Hiſpaniola, and was very well beloved both by the Governor of Petit-Guavos, and all the Gentry; and they would reſent it ill, that Captain Wright, who had no occaſion of Men, fhould be founkind to Captain Archembo, as to ſeduce his Men from him; he being ſo meanly mann'd that he could hardly fail his Ship with his French-men. We told him The Corn Iſlands. 31 him we would no longer remain with Captain Ar- An.1681 chembo, but would go ashore there, and build Ca- 0 noas to tranſport our felves down to the Moskitoes, if he wonld not entertain us; for Privateersare not obliged to any Ship, but free to go aſhore where they pleaſe, or to go into any other Ship that will entertain them, only paying for their proviſion. When Captain Wright ſaw our reſolutions, he agreed with us on condition we ſhould be under his command, as one Ships Company, to which we unanimouſly confented. We ſtaid here about 10 days, to ſee if any more of our Fleet would come to us; but there came 110 more of us to the Iſland but three, viz. Captain Wright, Captain Archembo, and Captain Tucker. Therefore we concluded the reſt were bore away either for Bocca-toro, or Bluefields River on the Main; and we deſigned to ſeek them. We had fine wea- ther while we lay here, only fome Tornadoes, or Thunder-ſhowers: But in this Iſle of St. Andreas there being neither Fish, Fowl, nor Deer, and it being therefore but an ordinary place for us, who had but little Proviſion, we failed from hence again in queſt of our ſcattered Fleet, directing our courſe for ſome Iſlands lying near the Main, called by the Privateers the Corn-Iſlands; being in hopes to get Corn there. Theſe Iſlands I take to be the ſame which are generally called in the Maps the Pearl Iſlands, lying about the Lat. of 12 D. 10 M. North. Here we arrived the next day, and went alhore on one of them, but found none of the Inhabitants; for here are but a few, poor, naked Indians that live here; who have been ſo often plundered by the Privateers, that they have but little Proviſion; and when they ſee a Sail they hide themſelves; other wife Ships that come here would take them, and make Slaves of them; and I have ſeen fome of them that have been ſlaves. They are people of a ز a mean 32 The Indians of the Corn Iſlands. An.1681 mean Stature, yet ſtrong Limbs ; they are of a dark copper colour, black Hair, full round Faces, ſmall black Eyes, their Eye-brows hanging over theirEyes, low Foreheads, ſhort thick Noſes, not high, but flattiſh; full Lips, and ſhort Chins. They have a faſhion to cut holes in the Lips of the Boys when they are young, cloſe to their Chin; which they keep open with little Pegs till they are 14 or 15 years old: then they wear Beards in them, made of Tur- tle or Tortoiſe-lhell, in the form you ſee in the Margin. The little notch at the upper end they put in through the Lip, where it remains between the Teeth and the Lip: the under part hangs down over their Chin. This they commonly wear all day, and when they ſleep they take it out. They have likewiſe holes bored in their Ears, both Men and Women, when young; and by continual ſtretching thern with great Pegs, they grow to be as big as a Milld Five ſhilling piece: Herein they wear pieces of Wood cut very round and ſmooth; ſo that their Ear ſeems to be ali Wood, with a little Skin about it. Another Ornament the Women uſe is about their Legs, which they are very curious in; for from the Infancy of the Girls their Mothers make faſt a piece of Cotton Cloath about the ſmall of their Leg, from the Ankle to the Calf, very hard ; which makes them have a very full Calf: this the Women wear to their dying day. Both Men and Women go naked, only a Clout aa bout their Waftes; yet they have but little Feet, though they go barefoot. Finding no Proviſion here, we failed toward Bluefield River, where we careened our Tartane; and there Captain Archemba and Captain Tucker left us, and went towards Bocca- a toro. This a Blew fields River. 33 This Bleavfields River comes out between the Ri- An. 1681 vers of Nicaragua and Veragua. At its mouth is a fine ſandy Bay, where Barks may clean: It is deep at its mouth, but a ſhole within; fo that Ships may not enter, yet Barks of 60 or 70 Tuns may. It had this name from Captain Blewfield, a famous Priva- teer living on Providence Illand long before Jamaica was taken. Which Iſland of Providence was ſettled by the Engliſh, and belonged to the Earls of Warwick. In this River we found a Canoa coming down the ſtream; and though we went with our Canoas to ſeek for Inhabitants, yet we found none, but ſaw in 2 or 3 places ſigns that Indians had made on the ſide of the River. The Canoa which we found was but meanly made for want of Tools, therefore we concluded theſe Indians have no commerce with the Spaniards, nor with other Indians that have. While we lay here, our Moskito-men went in their Canoa, and ſtruck us fome Manatee, or Sea-Cow. Beſides this Blenfields River, I have ſeen of the Ma- natee in the Bay of Campechy, on the Coaſts of Boc- ca del Drago, and Bocco del Toro, in the River of Da- rien, and among the South Keys or little Iſlands of Cuba. I have heard of their being found on the North of Jamaica, a few; and in the Rivers of Su- rinam in great multitudes, which is a very low Land. I have ſeen of them alſo at Mindanea, one of the Philippine Iſlands, and on the Coaſt of Nerv-Holland. This Creature is about the bigneſs of a Horſe, and Io or 12 foot long. The Mouth of it is much like the Mouth of a Cow, having great thick Lips. The Eyes are no bigger than a ſmall Pea. The Ears are only two ſmall holes on each fide of the Head. The Neck is ſhort and thick, bigger than the Head. The biggeſt part of this Creature is at the Shoulderis, where it hath two large Fins, one on each ſide of its Belly. Under each of theſe Fins the Female hath a ſmall Dug to ſuckle her young. From the D Shoul a 34 4 The Manatee, or Sea-Covo: An.1681 Shoulders towards the Tail it retains its bigneſs for about 2 foot, then groweth ſmaller and ſmaller to the very Tail, which is flat, and about 14 inches broad, and 20 inches long, and in the middle 4 or s inches thick, but about the edges of it not above 2 inches thick. From the Head to the Tail it is round and ſmooth, without any Fin but thoſe two before- mentioned. I have heard that ſome have weighed above 12001. but I never ſaw any ſo large. The Manatee delights to live in brackish Water; and they are commonly in Creeks and Rivers near the Sea. 'Tis for this reaſon poſibly they are not ſeen in the South Seas, (that ever I could obſerve) where the Coaſt is generally a bold Shore, that is, high Land and deep Water clofe home by it, with a high Sea or great Surges ; except in the Bay of Panama: yet even there is no Manatee. Whereas the Weſt- Indies, being, as it were, one great Bay compoſed of many ſmaller, are moſtly low Land and ſhoal Water, and afford proper paſture (as I may fay) for the Ma- natee. Sometimes we find them in falt Water, fometimes in freſh; but never far at Sea And thoſe that live in the Sea at ſuch places where there is no River nor Creek fit for them to enter, yet do commonly come once or twice in 24 hours to the mouth of any Freſh-Water-River that is near their place of abode. They live on Graſs 7 or 8 inches long, and of a narrow Blade, which grows in the Sea in many places, eſpecially among Iſlands near the Main. This Graſs groweth likewiſe in Creeks, or in great Rivers, near the ſides of them, in ſuch places where there is but little Tide or Current. They never come afhore, nor into ſhallower Water than where they can ſwim. Their Fleſh is white, both the fat and the lean, and extraordinary ſweet wholſom Meat. The Tail of a young Cow is moſt eſteemed; but if old, both Head and Tail are very tough. A Calf that ſucks is the moſt delicate meat ; Priva- The Manatee, or Sea-Cow. 35 Privateers commonly roaſt them; as they do alſo An. 1681 great pieces cut out of the Bellies of the old ones. The Skin of the Manatee, is of great uſe to Priva- teers, for they cut them out into ſtraps, which they make faft on the ſides of their Canoas through which they put their Oars in rowing, inſtead of tholes or pegs. The Skin of the Bull, or of the back of the Cow, is too thick for this uſe; but of it they make Horſe-whips, cutting them 2 or 3 foot long : at the handle they leave the full Subſtance of the Skin, and from thence cut it away tapering, but very even and ſquare all the four ſides. While the Thongs are green they twiſt them, and hang them to dry; which in a weeks time become as hard as Wood. The Moskito-men have always a ſmall Canoa for their uſe to ſtrike Fiſh, Tortoiſe, or Manatee, which they keep uſually to themſelves, and very neat and clean. They uſe no Oars but Paddles, the broad part of which doth not go tapering towards the ſtaff, pole, or handle of it, as in the Dar; nor do they uſe it in the ſame manner, by laying it on the ſide of the Veſſel ; but hold it perpendicularly, griping the ſtaff hard with both hands, and putting back the water by main ſtrength, and very quick ſtrokes. One of the Moskitoes (for there go but two in a Canoa ) fits in the ſtern, the other kneels down in the head, and both paddle till they come to the place where they expect their game. Then they lie ſtill, or paddle very ſoftly, looking well about them; and he that is in the head of the Canoa lays down his paddle, and ſtands up with his ſtriking ſtaff in his hand. This ſtaff is about 8 foot long, almoſt as big as a man's Arm, at the great end, in which there is a hole to place his Harpoon in. At the other end of his ftaff there is a piece of light Wood called Bob-wood, with a hole in it, through which the fmall end of the ſtaff comes, and on this piece of Bob-wood, there is a line of 10 or 12 fa- thom a D2 36 a The Manatee, or Sea-Cow. An. 1681 thom wound neatly about, and the end of the line made faſt to it. The other end of the line is made faſt to the Harpoon, which is at the great end of the ſtaff, and the Moskito-man keeps about a fathom of it looſe in his hand. When he ſtrikes, the Harpoon prenſently comes out of the ſtaff, and as the Manatee ſwims away, the line runs off from the bob; and although at firſt both ſtaff and bob may be carried under water, yet as the line runs off it will riſe a- gain. Then the Moskito-men, paddle with all their might to get hold of the bob again, and ſpend uſu- ally a quarter of an hour before they get it. When the Manatee begins to be tired, it lieth ftill, and then the Moskito-men paddle to the bob and take it up, and begin to hale in the line. When the Manatee feels them, he ſwims away again, with the Canoa after him; then he that ſteers muſt be nim- ble to turn the head of the Canoa that way that his confort points, who being in the head of the Canoa, and holding the line, both fees and feels which way the Manatee is ſwimming. Thus the Ca- noa is towed with a violent motion, 'till the Ma- natee's ſtrength decays. Then they gather in the line, which they are often forc'd to let all go to the very end. At length when the Creatures ſtrength is ſpent, they hale it up to the Canoa's fide, and knock it on the head, and tow it to the neareſt ſhore where they make it faſt, and ſeek for another ; which having taken, they go aſhore with it, to put it into their Canoa : For it is ſo heavy that they cannot lift it in, but they hale it up in ſhoal water as near the ſhore as they can, and then overſet the Canoa, laying one ſide cloſe to the Manatee. Then they roll it in, which brings the Canoa upright a- gain ; and when they have heav'd out the water, they faſten a line to the other Manatee that lieth a- float, and tow it after them. I have known two Moskito-Men for a week every day bring aboard two Manatee а The Maho-Tree. 37 Manatee in this manner; the leaſt of which hath An. 1681 not weighed leſs than 600 pound, and that in a very ſmall Canoa, that 3 Engliſh men would ſcarce ad- venture to go in. When they ſtrike a Cow that hath a young one, they ſeldom miſs the Calf, for She commonly takes her young under one of her Fins. But if the Calf is ſo big that ſhe cannot carry it, or Shefo frighted that the only minds to ſave her own life, yet the young never leaves her till the Moskito men have an opportunity to ſtrike her. The Manner of ſtriking Manatee and Tortoiſe is much the ſame ; only when they ſeek for Manatee they paddle fo gently, that they make no noiſe, and never touch the ſide of the Canoa with their paddle; becauſe it is a Creature that hears very well. But they are not ſo nice when they ſeek for Tortoiſe, whoſe Eyes are better than his Ears. They ſtrike the Tortoiſe with a ſquare ſharp Iron-peg, the other with a Harpoon. The Moskito-men make their own ſtriking Inſtruments, as Harpoons, Fish- hooks, and Tortoiſe-Irons or Pegs. Theſe Pegs, or Tortoiſe-Irons are made 4ſquare, ſhort at one end,and not much above an inch in length, of ſuch a fi- gure as you ſee in the Margin. The ſmall ſpike at the broad end hath the line fa- ften'd to it, and goes alſo into a hole at the end of the Striking-ſtaff: which when the Tortoiſe is ftruck flies off, the Iron and end of the line faftned to it, going quite within the Shell, where it is ſo buried that the Tor- toiſe cannot poſſibly eſcape. They make their Lines both for Fiſhing and Stri- king with the bark of Maho; which is a ſort of Tree or Shrub, that grows plentifull all over the Weſt- Indies; and whoſe Bark is made up of ſtrings or threads, very ſtrong. You may draw it off either in flakes or ſmall threads as you have occaſion. 'Tis fit for any manner of Cordage; and Privateers often make their a а D 3 38 a Savages of Boca-toro. An.1681 their Rigging of it. So much by way of Digreffion. When we had cleaned our Tartain we failed from hence, bound for Boca-toro, which is an opening between two Iſlands about 10 Deg. 10 Min. North Lat. between the Rivers of Veragne and Chagre. Here we met with Captain Yanky, who told us that there had been a Fleet of Spaniſh Armadilloes to ſeek us : that Captain Triſtian having fallen to Leeward, was coming to Boca-toro, and fell in amongſt them, ſuppoſing them to be our Fleet: that they fir'd and chac'd him, but he row'd and tow'd, and they ſuppos'd he got away : that Captain Pain was likewiſe chaced by them and Captain Williams; and that they had not ſeen them ſince; that they lay within the Iſlands; that the Spaniards never came into him ; and that Captain Coxon was in at the Careening place. This Boca-toro is a place that the Privateers uſe to reſort to, as much as any place in all the Coaſt, be- cauſe here is plenty of green Tortoiſe, and a good Careening place. The Indians here have no com- merce with the Spaniards; but are very barbarous, and will not be dealt with. They have deſtroyed many Privateers, as they did not long after this fome of Captain Pain's men; who having built a Tent aſhore to put his goods in while he Careened his Ship, and ſome men lying there with their arms, in the night the Indians crept ſoftly into the Tent, and cut off the Heads of 3 or 4 men, and made their eſcape; nor was this the firſt time they had ſerved the Privateers fo. There grow on this Coaſt Vinelloes in great quantity, with which Chocolate is perfumed. Theſe I ſhall deſcribe elſewhere. Our Fleet being thus ſcattered, there were now no hopes of getting together again ; therefore every one did what they thought moſt conducing to ob- tain their ends. Captain Wright, with whom I now was, was reſolvd to cruiſe on the Coaſt of Carta- gene; and it being now almoſt the Weſterly wind ſeaſon, a Point Samballas, and its Iſands. 39 ſeaſon, we failed from hence, and Captain Yanky A1.1681 with us; and we conforted, becauſe Captain Yankya had no Commiſſion and was afraid the French would take away his Bark. We paſt by Scuda, a ſmall Iſland (where 'tis ſaid Sir Francis Drake's Bowels were bury'd) and came to a ſmall River to Weſtward of Chagre; where we took two new Canoas, and car- ry'd them with us into the Samballoes. We had the Wind at Weſt, with much Rain; which brought us to Point-Samballas. Here Captain Wright and Cap- tain Yanky left us in the Tartane, to fix the Canoas while they went on the Coaſt of Cartagene to ſeek for Proviſion. We cruiſed in among the Iſlands, and kept our Moskito-men, or Strikers out, who brought aboard ſome half-grown Tortoiſe; and fome of us went afhore every day to hunt for what we could find in the Woods : Sometimes we got Pecary, Warree, or Deer; at other times we light on a drove of large fat Monkeys, or Quames, Corroſoes, (each a large fort of Fowl) Pidgeons, Parrots, or Turtle- doves. We liv'd very well on what we got, not ſtaying long in one place; but ſometimes we would go on the Iſlands, where there grow great Groves of Sapadillies, which is a ſort of Fruit much like a Pear, but more juicy; and under thoſe Trees we found plenty of Soldiers, a little kind of Animals that live in Shells, and have two great Claws like a Crab, and are good food. One time our Men found a great many large ones, and being ſharp-ſet, had them dreft, but moſt of them were very fick afterwards, being poyſoned by them: For on this Illand were many Manchaneel-Trees, whoſe Fruit is like a ſmall Crab, and ſmells very well, but they are not wholeſome, and we commonly take care of meddling with any Animals that eat them. And this we take for a general rule; when we find any Fruits that we have not ſeen before, if we ſee them peck'd by Birds, we may freely eat; but if we fee a و D4 no 40 River of Darien, An.1681 no ſuch ſign, we let them alone ; for of this fruit no Birds will taſte. Many of theſe Iſlands have of theſe Manchaneel-Trees growing on them. Thus cruiſing in among theſe Iſlands, at length we came again to La Sound's Key; and the day be- fore having met with a Jamaica Sloop that was come over on the Coaſt to trade, ſhe went with us. It was in the evening when we came to an Anchor, and the next morning we fir'd two Guns for the In- dians that liv'd on the Main to come aboard; for by this time we concluded we ſhould hear from our five Men, that we left in the heart of the Country among the Indians, this being about the latter end of Auguſt, and it was the beginning of May when we parted from them. According to our expectati- on the Indians came aboard, and brought our friends with them : Mr. Wafer wore a Clout about him, and was painted like an Indian; and he was ſome time aboard before I knew him. One of them, named Richard Cobſon, dy'd within 3 or 4 days af- ter, and was bury'd on La Sound's Key. After this we went to other Keys, to the Eaſt- ward of theſe, to meet Captain Wright and Captain Yanky, who met with a Fleet of Pereagoes laden with Indian Corn, Hog, and Fowls, going to Car- tagene ; being convoyed by a ſmall Armadilly of 2 Guns and 6 Patereroes. Her they chaced aſhore, and moſt of the Pereagoes; but they got two of them off, and brought them away. Here Captain Wright's and Captain Tanky's Barks were clean d; and we ſtock'd our felves with Corn, and then went towards the Coaſt of Cartagene. In our way thither we paſſed by the River of Darien; which is very broad at the mouth, but not above 6 foot Water on a Spring-Tide ; for the Tide riſeth but little here. Captain Coxon, about 6 months be- fore we came out of the South Seas, went up this Ri- ver with a party of Men: Every Man carry'da ſmall ſtrong Wild Indians. 41 ſtrong Bag to put his Goldin; expecting great Riches An. 1681 there, tho they got little or none. They rowed up about 100 leagues before they came to any ſettle- ment, and then found fome Spaniards, wholived there to truck with the Indians for Gold ; there being Gold Scales in every houſe. The Spaniards admired how they came ſo far from the mouth of the River, be- cauſe there are a fort of Indians living between that place and the Sea, who are very dreadful to the Spa- niards, and will not have any commerce with them, nor with any white People. They uſe Trunks about 8 foot long, out of which they blow poyſoned Darts; and are ſo filent in their attacks on their Enemies, and retreat ſo nimbly again, that the Spa- niards can never find them. Their Darts are made of Macaw-wood, being about the bigneſs and length of a Knitting-needle: one end is wound about with Cotton, the other end is extraordinary ſharp and ſmall; and is jagged with notches like a Harpoon: So that whatever it ftrikes into, it immediately breaks off, by the weight of the biggeſt end; which it is not of ſtrength to bear, (it being made ſo llen- der for that purpoſe) and is very difficult to be got out again, by reaſon of thoſe notches. Theſe Indi- ans have always War with our Darien friendly Indi- ans, and live on both ſides this great River so or 60 leagues from the Sea, but not near the mouth of the River. There are abundance of Manatee in this River, and ſome Creeks belonging to it. This re- lation I had from ſeveral Men who accompany'd Captain Coxon in that diſcovery; and from Mr. Cook in particular, who was with them, and is a very intelligent Perſon : He is now chief Mate of a Ship bound to Guinea. To return therefore to the proſe- cution of our Voyage ; Meeting with nothing of note, we paſſed by Cartagene ; which is a City ſo well known, that I ſhall ſay nothing of it. We ſaiļd by in ſight of it, for it lies open to the Sea ; and 3 42 Santa-Martha. Its High Land. An. 1681 and had a fair view of Madre de Popa, or Nueſtra Sen- nora de Popa, a Monaſtery of the Virgin Mary's, ſtanding on the top of a very fteep Hill juſt behind Cartagene. It is a place of incredible Wealth, by reaſon of the offerings made here continually; and for this reaſon often in danger of being viſited by the Privateers, did not the neighbourhood of Cartagene keep them in awe. "Tis, in ſhort, the very Loretto of the Weſt-Indies: it hath innumerable Miracles re- lated of it. Any misfortune that befalls the Priva- teers is attributed to this Lady's doing; and the Spaniards report that ſhe was abroad that night the Oxford Man of War was blown up at the Iſle of Vacca near Hiſpaniola, and that ſhe came home all wet; as, belike, ſhe often returns with her Clothes dirty and torn with paffing thro' Woods, and bad ways, when She has been out upon any Expedition ; deſerving doubtleſs a new ſuit for ſuch eminent pieces of ſervice. From hence we paſſed on to the Rio Grande, where we took up freſh Water at Sea, a league off the mouth of that River. From thence we failed Eaſt- ward, paſſing by St. Martha, a large Town, and good Harbour, belonging to the Spaniards: yer hath it within theſe few years been twice taken by the Privateers. It ſtands cloſe upon the Sea, and the Hill within land is a very large one, towering up a great heighth from a vaſt body of Land. I am of opinion than it is higher than the Pike of Tenariff ; others alſo that have ſeen both, think the ſame; tho its bigneſs makes its heighth leſs ſenſible. I have ſeen it in paſſing by, 30 leagues off at Sea; others as they told me, above 60 : and ſeveral have told me, that they have ſeen at once Jamaica, Hiſpaniola, and the high Land of Santa Maria; and yet the near- eft of theſe two places is diſtant from it 120 leagues ; and Jamaica, which is fartheſt off, is accounted near 150 leagues; and I queſtion whether any Land on either of thoſe two Iſlands may be ſeen so leagues. It's Pearl-Fiſhery. 43 Its head is generally hid in the Clouds; but in clear An. 1681 weather, when the top appears, it looks white; ſuppoſed to be covered with Snow. St. Martha lieth in the Lat. 12 Deg. North. Being advanced 5 or 6 leagues to the Eaſtward of Santa Martha, we left our Ships at Anchor, and re- turn'd back in our Canoas to the River Grande ; en- tring it by a mouth of it that diſembogues it felf near Santa Martha : purpoſing to attempt ſome Towns that lie a pretty way up that River. But this defign meeting with diſcouragements, we re- turn'd to our Ships, and ſer fail to Rio la Hacha. This hath been a ſtrong Spaniſh Town, and is well built; but being often taken by the Privateers, the Spaniards deſerted it ſome time before our arrival. It lieth to the Weftward of a River; and right a- gainſt the Town is a good Road for Ships, the bot- tom clean and fandy. The Jamaica Sloops uſed of- ten to come over to trade here: and I am inform’d that the Spaniards have again fettled themſelves in it, and made it very ſtrong. We enter'd the Fort, and brought two ſmall Guns aboard. From thence we went to the Rancheries, one or two ſmall Indian Villages, where the Spaniards keep two Barks to fiſh for Pearl. The Pearl-banks lie about 4 or 5 leagues off from the ſhore, as I have been told ; thither the Fiſhing-Barks go and anchor; then the Divers go down to the bottom, and fill a Basket ( which is let down before ) with Oyſters; and when they come up, others go down, two at a time; this they do till the Bark is full, and then go aſhore, where the old men, women and children of the Indians open the Oyſters, there being a Spaniſh Over- ſeer to look after the Pearl. Yet theſe Indians do very often fecure the beſt Pearl for themſelves as many Fa- maica men can teſtifie who daily trade with them. The meat they ftring up, and hang it a drying. At this place we went alhore, where we found one of the Barks, a 44 Cruiſing in the Weſt-Indies. An.1681 Barks, and faw great heaps of Oyſters-Shells, but the people all fled : Yet in another place, between this and Rio la Hacha, we took ſome of the Indians, who ſeem to be a ſtubborn fort of people : They are long-viſaged, black hair, their noſes ſomewhat ri- fing in the middle, and of a ftern look. The Spani- ards report them to be a very numerous Nation; and that they will not ſubject themſelves to their yoak : Yet they have Spaniſh Prieſts among them ; and by trading have brought them to be ſomewhat fociable; but cannot keep a ſevere hand over them. The Land is but barren, it being of a light ſand near the Sea; and moſt Savannah, or Champian : and the graſs but thin and courſe, yet they feed plenty of Cattle. Every man knoweth his own and looketh after them ; but the Land is in common, except only their Houſes or ſmall Plantations where they live, which every man maintains with ſome fence about it. They may remove from one place to another as they pleaſe, no Man having right to any Land but what he poſſeſſeth. This part of the Country is not ſo ſubject to Rain as to the Weſt- ward of Santa Martha ; yet here are Tornadoes, or Thunder-fhowers; but neither ſo violent as on the Coaſt of Portabell, nor fo frequent. The Weſterly Winds in the Weſterly wind ſeaſon blow here, tho’ not ſo ſtrong nor laſting as on the Coaſts of Carta- gena and Portabell . When we had ſpent ſome time here, we return’d again towards the Coaſt of Cartagene ; and being be- tween Rio Grande and that place, we met with Wefterly winds, which kept us ftill to the Eaſtward of Cartagene 3 or 4 days; and then in the morning we deſcry'd a Sail off at Sea, and we chaced her at noon: Captain Wright, who failed beſt, came up with her, and engaged her; and in half an hour after, Captain Yanky, who failed better than the Tartan (the Veſſel that I was in) came up with her like- Iſle of Queriſao. 45 likewiſe and laid her aboard, then Captain Wright An.1688 alſo; and they took her before they came up. They loft 2 or 3 men, and had 7 or 8 wounded. The Prize was a Ship of 12 Guns and 40 men, who had all good fmall Arms: She was laden with Sugar and Tobacco, and had 8 or 10 Tuns of Marmalet on board : She came from Saint Jago on Cuba, and was bound to Cartagene. We went back with her to Rio Grande, to fix our Rigging, which was ſhattered in the Fight, and to conſider what to do with her; for theſe were com- modities of little uſe to us, and not worth going into a Port with. At the Rio Grande Captain Wright demanded the Prize as his due by virtue of his Com- miſſion : Captain Yanky ſaid it was his due by the Law of Privateers. Indeed Captain Wright had the moſt right to her, having by his Commiſſion pro- tected Captain Yanky from the French, who would have turned him out becauſe he had no Commiffi- on; and he likewiſe began to engage her Firſt. But the Company were all afraid that Captain Wright would preſently carry her into a Port; therefore moſt of Captain Wright's men ftuck to Captain Yanky, and Captain Wright looſing his Prize, burned his own Bark, and had Captain Yanky's, it being bigger than his own; the Tartan was fold to a Jamaica Trader, and Captain Yanky commanded the Prize Ship. We went again from hence to Rio la Hacha, and ſet the Priſoners aſhore: and it being now the beginning of November, we concluded to go to Queriſao to ſell our Sugar, if favour'd by wefterly Winds, which were now come in. We ſailed from thence, having fair weather and Winds to our mind, which brought us to Queriſco, a Dutch Iſland. Captain Wright went a- ſhore to the Governour, and offered him the Sale of the Sugar: but the Governour told him he had a great Trade with the Spaniards, therefore he could not admit us in there; but if we would go to St. Tho- mas, 46 Iſe of Queriſao. An. 1681 mas, which is an Iſland, and free Port, belonging to the Danes, and a Sanctuary for Privateers, he would ſend a Sloop with ſuch Goods as we wanted, and Money to buy the Sugar, which he would take at a certain rate; but it was not agreed to. Queriſao is the only Iſland of importance that the Dutch have in the Weſt-Indies. It is about 5 leagues in length, and anay be 9 or ro in circumference: the Northernmoſt point is laid down in North lat. 12 d. 40 m. and it is about 7 or 8 leagues from the Main, near Cape Roman. On the South ſide of the Eaſt end is a good harbour, call’d Santa Barbara ; but the chiefeſt harbour is about 3 leagues from the S. E. end, on the South ſide of it; where the Dutch have a very good Town, and a very ſtrong Fort. Ships bound in thither muſt be ſure to keep cloſe to the Harbour's Mouth, and have a Haſar or Rope ready to ſend one end aſhore to the Fort: for there is no Anchoring at the entrance of the Harbour, and the Current always ſets to the Weſtward. But being got in, it is a very ſecure Port for Ships, either to Careen or lie ſafe. At the Eaft end are two hills, one of them is much higher than the other, and ſteepeſt towards the Northſide. The reſt of the Iſland is in different level; where of late ſome rich Men have made Sugar-works ; which formerly was all pa- fture for Cattle: there are alſo ſome ſmall Planta- tions of Potatoes and Yames, and they have ſtill a great many Cattle on the Iſland ; but it is not ſo much eſteemed for its produce, as for its ſituation for the Trade with the Spaniards. Formerly the Ha- bour was never without Ships from Cartagene and Portobell, that did uſe to buy of the Dutch here 1000 or 1500 Negroes at once, beſides great quantities of European Commodities ; but of late that Trade is fallen into the hands of the Engliſh at Jamaica : yet ſtill the Dutch have a vaſt Trade over all the Weſt Indies, ſending from Holland Ships of good force laden with D'Eftre's Expedition. 47 with European goods, whereby they make very pro- An. 1681 fitable Returns. The Dutch have two other Iſlands here, but of little moment in compariſon of Queri- Sao; the one lieth 7 or 8 leagues to the Weſtward of Queriſao, called Aruba ; the other 9 or 10 leagues to the Eaſtward of it, called Bon-Airy. From theſe Iſlands the Dutch fetch in Sloops Proviſion for Queri- Sao, to maintain their Garriſon and Negroes. I was never at Aruba, therefore cannot ſay any thing of it as to my own knowledge ; but by report it is much like Bon-Airy, which I ſhall deſcribe, only not ſo big. Between Queriſao and Bon-Airy is a ſmall Illand called Little Queriſao, it is not above a league from Great Queriſao. The King of France has long had an eye on Queriſao, and made ſome attempts to take it, but never yet fucceeded. I have heard that about 23 or 24 years ſince, the Governour had fold it to the French, but dy'd a ſmall time before the Fleet canie to demand it; and by his death that deſign faild. Afterwards, in the year 1678, the Count D’Eſtre, who a year before had taken the Iſle of Tobago from the Dutch, was ſent hither alſo with a Squadron of ſtout Ships, very well mann'd, and fitted with Bombs and Carcaſſes; intending to take it by ſtorm. This Fleet firſt came to Martinico; where, while they ſtay'd, Orders were ſent to Petit-Guavres, for all Pri- vateers to repair thither, and affift the Count in his Deſign. There were but two Privateers Ships that went thither to him, which were mann'd partly with French, partly with Engliſhmen. Theſe ſet out with the Count; but in their way to Queriſao, the whole Fleet was loft on a Riff or Ridge of Rocks, that runs off from the Iſle of Aves; not above two Ships eſcaping, one of which was one of the Priva- teers, and ſo that Deſign periſhed. ; Wherefore not driving a bargain for our Sugar with the Governour of Queriſao, we went from thence to Bon-Airy, another Dutch Illand, where we met a Dutch 48 a Iſle of Bon-Airy. An.1681 Dutch Sloop come from Europe, laden with Iriſh Beef; which we brought in exchange for ſome of our Sugar. Bon-Airy is the Eaſtermoſt of the Dutch Iſlands, and is the largeſt of the three, tho' not the moſt con- ſiderable. The middle of the Iſland is laid down in Lat. 12 d. 16 in. It is about 20 leagues from the Main, and 9 or 10 from Queriſao, and is accounted 16 or 17 leagues round. The Road is on the S. W. fide, near the middle of the Iſland ; where there is a pretty deep Bay runs in. Ships that come from the Eaſtward luff up cloſe to the Eaſtern ſhore ; and let go their Anchor in 60 fathom Water, within half a Cables length of the ſhore. But at the ſame time they muſt be ready with a Boat to carry a Hafar or Rope, and make it faſt alhore; otherwiſe, when the Land-wind comes in the night, the Ship would drive off to Sea again; for the ground is ſo ffeep, that no Anchor can hold if once it ſtarts. About half a mile to the Weſtward of this Anchoring-place, there is a finall low Iland, and a Channel between it and the main Iſland. The Houſes are about half a mile within Land, right in the Road: There is a Governour lives here, a Deputy to the Governour of Queriſao, and 7 or 8 Soldiers, with 5 or 6 Families of Indians. There is no Fort; and the Soldiers in peaceable times have little to do but to eat and ſleep, for they never watch, but in time of War. The Indians are Huf- band-men, and plant Maize and Guinea Corn, and ſome Yames, and Potatoes: But their chiefeſt Bufi- neſs is about Cattle ; for this Iſland is plentifully ſtocked with Goats; and they ſend great quantities every year in Salt to Queriſao. There are ſome Horſes, and Bulls and Cows; but I never ſaw any Sheep, tho' I have been all over the Iſland. The South ſide is plain low Land, and there are ſeveral forts of Trees, but none very large. There is a ſmall a a a Spring a a Booby, and Man of War Birds. 49 Spring of water by the Houſes, which ferves the In- An.1681 habitants, though it is blackiſh. At the Weſt end of the Iſand there is a good Spring of Freſh water, and 3 or 4 Indian Families live there, but no water nor Houſes at any other place. On the South ſide near the Eaſt end, is a good Sale-pond, where Dutch Sloops come for Salt. From Bon- Airy we went to the Iſle of Aves, or Birds; ſo called from its great plenty of Birds, as Men of War and Boobies, but eſpecially Boobies. The Booby is a Water-fowl, ſomewhat leſs than a Hen, of a light greyiſh colour. I obſervd the Boobies of this Iſland to be whiter than others. This Bird hath a ſtrong Bill, longer and bigger than a Crows, and broader at the end; her Feet aré flat like a Ducks Feet. It is a very ſimple Creature, and will hardly go out of a mans way. In other places they build their Nefts on the ground, but here they build on Trees, which I never ſaw any where elſe : tho I have ſeen of them in a great many places. Their Fleſh is black and eats Fiſhy, but are often eaten by the Privateers. Their numbers have been much lela ſend by the French Fleet, which was loſt here, as I ſhall give an account: The Man of War (as it is called by the Engliſh) is about the bigneſs of a Kite, and in ſhape like it, but black; and the Neck is red. It lives on Fiſh, yet never lights on the water, but foars aloft like akite, and when it ſees its prey, it flys down head fore- moſt to the waters edge, very ſwiftly takes it prey out of the Sea with his Bill. and immediately mounts again as fwifily; and never touching the Water with his Bill. His Wings are very long : His Feet are like other Land-fowl, and he builds on Trees, where he finds any, but where they are wanting, on the ground. This Illand Aves lies about 8 or 9 leagues to the Eaſtward of thellland Bon-airy, about 14 or is leagues E from a 50 D' Eſtree's Shipprack. An.1682 from the Main, and about the lat. of ud. 45 m. North. It is but ſmall, nor above 4 mile in length, and towards the Eaſt end not halfa mile broad. On the North ſide it is low land, commonly overflown with the Tide; but on the South ſide there is a great Rocky Bank of Coral thrown up by the Sea. The Weſtend is for near a mile ſpace, plain even Savannah Land, without any Trees. There are 2 or 3 Wells dug by Privateers, who often frequent this Ifand, becauſe there is a good Harbor about the middle of it on the North fide, where they may conveniently careen. The Riff or Bank of Rocks on which the French Fleet was loſt, as I mentioned above, runs a- long from the Eaft end to the Northward about 3 mile, then trends away to the Weſtward, making as it were a Half Moon. This Riff breaks off all the Sea, and there is good riding in even fandy ground to the Weſtward of it. There are 2 or 3 ſmall low ſandy Keys or Iſlands within this Riff, about 3 miles from the Main Iſland. The Count de Eſtree loſt his Fleet here in this manner. Coming from the Eaſtward he fell in on the back of the Riff, and fired Guns to give warning to the reſt of his Fleet: But they ſuppoſing their Admiral was engaged with Enemies, hoiſed up their Topfails, and crowd- ed all the Sail they could make, and ran full fail aſhore after him; all within half a mile of each o. ther. For his Light being in the Main Top was an unhappy Beacon for them to follow; and there eſcaped but one Kings-Ship, and one Privateer. The Ships continued whole all day, and the Men had time enough, moſt of them, to get aſhore, yet ma- ny periſhed in the Wreck: and many of thoſe that got ſafe on the Iſland, for want of being accuſtomed to ſuch hardſhips, died like rotten Sheep. But the Privateers who had been uſed to ſuch accidents lived merrily, from whom I had this relation : and they told me, that if they had gone to Jamaica with zol. و Pain's Adventure 51 a Man in their Pockets, they could not have en An.168 joyed themſelves more: For they kept in a Gang by themſelves, and watched when the Ships broke, to get the Goods that came from them, and though much was ftaved againſt the Rocks, yet abundance of Wine and Brandy floated over the Riff, where theſe Privateers waited to take it up. They lived here about 3 weeks, waiting an opportunity to tran- ſport themſelves back again to Hiſpaniola; in all which time they were never without 2 or 2 Hogſ- heads of Wine and Brandy in their Tents, andBar- rels of Beef and Pork; which they could live on without Bread well enough, tho the new.comers out of France could not. There were about 40 Frenchmen on board in one of the Ships where there was good ſtore of Liquor, till the after part of her broke away,and floated over the Riff, and was car- ry'd away toSea,with all the men drinking and ling- who being in drink did not mind the danger, but were never heard of afterwards. In a ſhort time after this great Shipwrack, Cap- tain Pain, Commander of a Privateer of 6 Guns, had a pleaſant accident befel him at this Ilard. He came hither to careen, intending to fit himſelf ve- ry well ; for here lay driven on the Iſland, Maits, Yards, Timbers, and many things that he wanted, therefore he hald into the Harbour, cloſe to the Illand, and unrigg d his Ship. Before he had done, a Dutch Ship of 20 Guns, was ſent from Queriſao to take up the Guns that were loft on the Riff: But ſeeing a Ship in the Harbour, and knowing her to be a French Privateer; they thought to take her firſt, and came within a mile of her, and began to fire at her, intending to warp in the next day, for it is very narrow going in.Captain Pain got ashore ſome of his Guns, and did what he could to refift them; tho he did in a manner conclude he muſt be taken. But while his men were thus buficd, he ſpy'd a Dutch ing; a a a É 2 a 52, Ipes of Little Aves, and Roca's, An.1682 Dutch Sloop turning to get into the Road, and faw her at the evening anchor at the Weſt end of the Iland. This gave him fome hope of making his cícape ; which he did, by ſending two Canoas in the night aboard the Sloop, who took her, and got conſiderable purchaſe in her; and he went away in her, making a good Reprizal, and leaving his own empty Ship to the Dutch Man of War. There is another Iſland to the Eaſtward of the Iſle of Aves about 4 leagues, called by Privateers the little Iſle of Aves, which is overgrown with Mangrove Trees. I have ſeen it, but was never on it. There are no Inhabitants that I could learn, on either of theſe Iſlands, but Boobies and a few other Birds. While we were at the Iſle of Aves, we careend Captain Wrighi's Bark,rand ſcrubb'd the Sugar prize, and got 2 Guns out of the Wrecks; continuing here till the beginning of Feb. 1687. We went from hence to the Iſles Roca's to careen the Sugar-prize, which the Iſle of Aves was not a place to convenient for. Accordingly we haled clofe to one of the ſmall Iſlands, and got our Guns aſhore the firſt thing we did, and built a Breaft-work on the point, and planted all our Guns there, to hin- der an Enemy from coming to us while we lay on the Careen : Then we made a Houſe, and cover'd it with our Sails, to put our goods and proviſions in. While we lay here, a French Man of War of 36 Guns, caine thro the Keys, or Little Iſlands; to whom we fold about 10 Tun of Sugar. I was a- board cwice or thrice, and very kindly welcomed both by the Captain and his Lieutenant, who was a Cavalier of Malta; and they both offer'd me great encouragement in France, if I would go with them; , but I ever deſign'd to continue with thoſe of my own Nation. The Iſlands Roca's are a parcel of ſmall uninhabit- ed Iſlands, lying about the Lat. of 11 d. 40 min. about a ز The Noddy, and Tropick Birds. 53 about 15 or 16 leagues from the Main, and about An.1682 20 leagues N. W. b. W. from Turtuga, and 6 or 7 leagues to the Weſtward of Orchilla, another Iland lying about the ſame diſtance from the Main which Iſland I have ſeen but was never at it. Roca's ſtretch themſelves Eaſt and Weit about 5 leagues, and their breadth about 3 leagues. The northern- moſt of theſe Vllands is the moſt remarkable by rea. ſon of a high white rocky Hillar the weſt end of it, which may be ſeen a great way; and on it there are abundance of Tropick Birds, Men of War, Boo- by and Noddys, which breed there. The Boohy, and Man of War, I have deſcribed already. The Noddy is a ſmall Black Bird, much about the bigneſs of the Engliſh Black-bird, and indifferent good meat. They bulid in Rocks. We never find them far off from Shore. I have ſeen of them in other places but never ſaw any of their Neſts but in this Inand; where there is great plenty of them. The Tropick Bird is as big as a Pigeon, but round and plumplike a Partridge. They are all white, except two or three Feachers in each Wing of a light grey. Their Bills are of a yellowish colour, thick and ſhort. They have one long Feather, or rather a Quill, about 7 inches long, grows out at the Rump, which is all the Tail they have. They are never ſeen far without either Tropick, for which reaſon they are called Tropick-birds. They are very good food, and we meet with them a great way at Sea;and I never ſaw of them any where but at Sea, and in this Mandi where they build, and are found in great plenty: By the Sea, on the South ſide of that high Hill, there is freſh water comes out of the Rocks, but ſo flowly, that it yields not above 40 gallons in 24 hours; and it taſtes ſo copperiſh, or aluminous ra- ther, and rough in the mouth, that it feenis very unpleaſant at firſt drinking: but after 2 or 3 days any other Water will ſeem to have no taite. E 3 The 54 Mangrove-Trees. An. 1682. The middle of this Iſland is low plain Land, over- grown with long Graſs, where there are multitudes of ſmall grey Fowls, no bigger than a Black-bird ; yer lay Eggs bigger than a Magpy's : and they are therefore by Privateers called Egg-birds. The Eaſt end of the Iſland is overgrown with black Man- a grove Trees There are three forts of Mangrove-Trees, black, red, and white. The black Mangrove is the largeſt Tree,the body about as big as an Oak,and about 20 feet high. It is very hard and ſerviceable Timber, but extraordinary heavy,therefore not much made uſe of for building. The red Mangrove groweth commonly by the Sea fide, or by Rivers or Creeks. The body is not ſo big as that of the black Man- grove, but always grows out of many roots about the bigneſs of a mans Leg, ſome bigger, ſome leſs, which at about 6, 8, or 10 foot above the ground, joyn into one trunk or body, that ſeems to be ſup. ported by ſo many artificial Stakes. Where this ſort of Tree grows, it is impoſſible to march, by reaſon of theſe Stakes, which grow ſo mixt one among another, that I have, when forced to go through them, gone half a mile, and never ſet my foot on the ground, ftepping from root to root. The Timber is hard and good for many uſes. The inſide of the Bark is red, and it is uſed for tanning of Leather very much all over the Weſt Indies. The white Mangrove never groweth ſo big as the other two forts, neither is it of any great uſe : Of the young Trees Privateers uſe to make Looms, or Han- dles for their Oars; for it is commonly ſtrait, but not very ſtrong, which is the fault of them. Nei- ther the black nor white Mangrove grow towering up from ſtilts or riſing root, as the red doth; but the body immediately out of the ground, like other Trees. The 2 Iſle of Tortuga. 55 The Land of this Eaſt end is light ſand, which is An.1682 ſometimes overflown with the Sea at Spring-tides. The Road for Ships is on the South fide, againſt the middle of the Iſland. The reſt of the Iſlands of Roca's are low. The next to this on the South fide is but ſmall, flat, and even, without Trees, bearing only Graſs. On the South ſide of it is a pond of brackiſh Water, which fometimes Privateers uſe in- ſtead of better, there is likewiſe good riding by it. About a league from this are two other Iſlands, not 200 yards diſtant from each other; yet a deep Channel for Ships to paſs through. They are both overgrown with red Mangrove Trees, which Trees, above any of the Mangroves, do flouriſh beft in wet drowned Land, ſuch as theſe 2 Iſlands are ; only the Eaſt point of the Weſtermoft Iſland is dry Sand, without Tree or Buſh: On this point we careened, lying on the South ſide of it. The other Iſlands are low, and have red Man- groves, and other Trees on them. Here alfo Ships may ride; but no ſuch place for careening as where we lay; becauſe at that place Ships may hale cloſe to the ſhore; and if they have but four Guns on the point may ſecure the Channel, and hinder any Ene- my from coming near them. I obſerv'd that within among the Iſlands, was good riding in many places, but not without the Iſlands, except to the Weſt- ward, or S. Weſt of them. For on the Eaſt, or N. E. of theſe Hands, the common Trade-Wind blows, and makes a great Sea : and to the South- ward of them there is no ground under 70, 80, or 100 fathom, cloſe by the Land. After we had filled what Water we could from hence, we ſet out again in April 1682. and came to Salt-Tortuga, fo called to diſtinguiſh it from the Shoals of Dry Tortugas, near Cape Florida, and from the Iſle of Tortugas by Hiſpaniola, which was called formerly French Tortugas ; though not having heard E 4 any 56 a Iſle of Torruga. Salt. Ponds. An.1682 any mention of that name a great while, I am apt I to think it is ſwallow d up in that of Petit-Guaves, the chief Garriſon the French have in thoſe parts. ThisIſland we arrived at is pretty large, uninhabited, and abounds with Salt. It isin Lat. 11 degrees North, and lyeth weſt, and a little Northerly from Marga- rita, an Iſland inhabited by the Spaniards, ſtrong, and wealthy ; it is diſtant from it about 14 leagues, and 17 or 18 from Cape Blanco on the Main : A Ship being within theſe Iſlands, a little to the South- ward, may ſee at once the Main, Margarita, and Tortuga, when it is clear weather. The Eaſt end of Tortuga is full of rugged, bare, broken Rocks, which ftretch themſelves a little way out to Sea. At the S. E. part is an indifferent good Road for Ships, much frequented in peaceable times by Merchant- ſhips, that come hither to lade Salt, in the months of May, June, July, and Auguft. For at the Eaſt end is a large Salt-pond, within 200 paces of the Sea. The Salt begins to kern, or grain, in April, except it is a dry ſeaſon ; for it is obſerved that rain makes the Salt kern. I have ſeen above 20 fail at a time in this road come to lade Salt; and theſe Ships coming from ſome of the Caribbe Iſlands, are al- ways well ſtored with Rum, Sugar, and Lime-juice to make Punch ; to hearten their Men when they are at work, getting and bringing aboard the Salt; and they commonly provide the more, in hopes to meet with Privateers, who reſort hither in the afore- ſaid months, purpoſely to keep a Chriſtmas as they call it; being ſure to meet with Liquor enough to be merry with, and are very liberal to thoſe that treat them. Near the Weſt end of the Iſland, on the South ſide, there is a ſmall Harbour and ſome freſh Water: That end of the Iſland is full of ſhrub- by Trees, but the Eaſt end is rocky and barren as to Trees, producing only courſe Grafs. There are Come Goats on it, but not many; and Turtle or Tortoiſe 1 a The Guano. Ide of Blanco. 57 Tortoiſe come upon the ſandy Bays to lay their An.1682 Eggs and from them the Iſland hath its name. There is no riding any where but in the Roads where the Salt-ponds are, or in the Harbour. At this Ille we thought to have ſold our Sugar among the Englifh Ships that come hither for Salt; but failing there, we deſign d for Trinidada,an Iſland near the Main inhabited by the Spaniards, tolerably ftrong and wealthy : but the Current and Eaſterly winds hindering us, we paſſed through between Margarita and the Main, and went to Blanco, a pret- ty large Iland almoſt North of Margarita ; about 30 leagues from the Main, and in ud. so m. North Lat. It is a flat, even, low, uninhabited Illand, dry and healthy, moſt Savannah ofiong Graſs, and hath ſome Trees of Lignum Vite growing in Spots, with ſhrubby Buſhes of other Wood about them. It is plentifully ſtored with Guano's, which are an Animal like a Lizard, but much bigger. The body is as big as the ſmall of a mans leg, and from the hind quarter the Tail grows tapering to the end, which is very ſmall. If a man takes hold of the tail, except very near the hind quarter, it will part and break off in one of the joints, and the Guano will get away. They lay Eggs, as moſt of thoſe amphi- bious creatures do, and are very good to eat. Their fleſh is much eſteemed by Privateers, who commonly dreſs them for their fick men ; for they make very good Broath. They are of divers colours, as almoſt black, dark brown light brown, dark green, light green, yellow aud ſpeckled: They all live as well in the Water as on Land, and ſome of them are conftantly in the Water, and among Rocks: Theſe are commonly black. Others that live in ſwampy wet ground are commonly on Buſhes and Trees, theſe are green. But ſuch as live in diy ground, as here at Blanco, are commonly yellow ; yet theſe al- lo will live in the Water, and are ſometimes on Trees. و 58 Modern Changes in the Weſt-Indies. An.1682 Trees. The Road is on the N. W. end, againſt a ſmall Cove, or little fandy Bay. There is no ri- ding any where elſe, for it is deep water and ſteep cloſe to the Land. There is one ſmall Spring on the Welt fide, and there are fandy Bays round the Iland, where Turtle or Tortoiſe come up in great abundance, going aſhore in the night. Theſe that frequent this Iſland are called green Turtle, and they are the beſt of that fort, both for largeneſs and ſweetneſs of any in all the Weſt Indies. I would here give a particular deſcription of theſe and other forts of Turtle in theſe Seas; but becauſe I ſhall have occaſion to mention fome other forts of Turtle when I come again into the South Seas, that are very different from all theſe, I ſhall there give a general account of all theſe ſeveral forts at once, that the difference between them may be the better diſ- cerned. Some of our modern Deſcriptions ſpeak of Goats on this Iſland. I know not what there may have been formerly, but there are none now to my certain knowledge; for my ſelf and many more of our crew have been all over it. Indeed theſe parts have undergone great changes in this laſt age, as well in places themſelves, as in their Owners and Commodities of them ; particularly Nombre de Dios, a City once famous, and which ſtill retains a confi- derable name in ſome late accounts is now nothing but a Name. For I have lain aſhore in the place where that City ſtood; but it is all overgrown with Wood, ſo as to leave no ſign that any Town hath been there. We ftaid at the Iſle of Blanco not above 10 days, and then went back to Salt-Tortuga again, where Captain Yanky parted with us : And from thence, after about 4 days, all which time our men were 4 drunk and quarrelling, we in Captain Wright's Ship went to the Coaſt of Caraccos on the Main Land. This Coaft is upon ſeveral accounts very remarka- ble : a а Coaſt of Caraccos. Remarkable Land. 59 ble: 'Tis a continu'd tract of high Ridges of Hills An. 1682 and finall Valleys intermix d, for about 20 leagues, ſtretching Eaſt and Weft; but in ſuch manner, that the Ridges of Hills and the Valleys alternately run pointing upon the ſhore from South to North : the Valleys, ſome of them about 40r 5, others not a- bove i or 2 furlongs wide, and in length from the Sea ſcarce any of them above 4 or 5 mile at moſtr; there being a long ridge of Mountains at that di- ftance from the Sea-coaſt, and in a manner parallel to it, that joins thoſe ſhorter Ridges, and cloſeth up the South end of the Valleys, which at the North ends of them lye open to the Sea, and make ſo ma- ny little Sandy Bays, that are the only Landing places on all the Coaſt. Both the main Ridge, and theſe ſhorter Ribs are very high Land, ſo that 3 or 4 leagues off at Sea the Valleys ſcarce appear to the Eye, but all looks like one great Mountain. From the Iſles of Roca's about 15, and from the Iſle of Aves about 20 leagues off, we ſee this Coaft very plain from on board our Ships; yet when at Anchor on this Coaſt we cannot ſee thoſe Iſles: tho again from the tops of theſe Hills they appear as if at no great diſtance, like ſo many Hillocks in a Pond. Theſe Hills are barren, except the lower ſides of them, that are cover'd with ſome of the ſame rich black mould that fills the Valleys, and is as good as I have ſeen. In ſome of the Valleys there is a ſtrong red Clay, but in the general they are extreamly fertile, well watered, and inhabited by Spaniards and their Negro's. They have Maiz and Plantains for their ſupport; with Indian Fowls and fome Hogs. But the main product of theſe Valleys, and indeed the only Commodity it vends, are the Cacao-Nurs, of which the Chocolate is nade. The Cacao-Tree grows no where in the North Seas but in the Bay of Campechy, on Coſta Rica, between Porabel and Nica- ragua, chicfly up Carpenters River ; and on this Coalt j 60 Of the beſt Cacao-Nuts. An.1682 as high as the Iſle of Trinidada. In the South Seas, it grows on the River of Guiaquil, a little to the Southward of the Line, and in the Valley of Collima, on the South ſide of the Continent of Mexico: both which places I ſhall hereafter deſcribe. Beſides theſe, I am confident there is no place in the world where the Cacao grows, except thoſe in Jamaica, of which there are now but few remaining of many and large Walks or Plantations of them found there by the Engliſh at their firſt arrival, and ſince planted by them; and even theſe, though there is a great deal of pains and care beſtowed on them, yet ſeldom come to any thing, being generally blighted. The Nuts of this Coaſt of Caraccos, though leſs than thoſe of Coſta Rica, which are large flat Nuts, yet are bet- ter and fatter, in my opinion, being lo very oily, that we are forced to uſe Water in rubbirg them up; and the Spaniards that live here, inſtead of parching them to get off the Shell before they pound or rub them, to make Chocolate, do in a manner burn them to dry up the Oil; for elſe, they ſay, it would fill them too full of blood, drinking Chocolate, as they do, 5 or 6 times a day. My wor- thy Confort Mr. Ringroſe commends moſt the Guia- quil Nut: I preſume becauſe he had little knowlege of the reft; for being intimately acquainted with him, I know the courſe of his Travels and Experi- ence. But I am perſwaded had he known the reſt fo well as I pretend to have done, who have at ſeveral times been long uſed to, and in a manner lived up- on all the ſeveral ſorts of them above mentioned, he would prefer the Caracces Nuts before any other; yet poſſibly the drying up of theſe Nuts ſo much by the Spaniards here, as I ſaid, may leſſen their Efteem with thoſe Europeans, that uſe their Cho- colate ready rubb d up: ſo that we always choſe to make it up our felves. The a The Caczo-Tree. 61 The Cacao-Tree hath a body about a foot and an An. 1682 half thick (the largeſt fort) and 7 or 8 foot high to the Branches, which are large, and ſpreading like an Oak, with a pretty thick, finooth, dark-green leaf, ſhap'd like that of a Plum-Tree, but larger. The Nuts are incloſed in Cods as big as both a Mans fiſts put together: At the broad end of which there is a ſmall, tough, limber ftalk, by which they hang pendulous froin the body of the Tree, in all parts of it from top to bottom, ſcattered at irregular diſtances, and from the greater branches a little way up: eſpecially at the joints of them, or partings, where they hang thickeft; but never on the ſmaller boughs. There may be ordinarily about 20 or 30 of theſe Cods upon a well-bearing Tree: and they have 2 Crops of them in a year ; one in December, but the beit in June. The Cod it ſelf or Shell is almoſt half an inch thick; neither ſpongy nor woody, but of a ſubſtance between both, brittle, yet harder than the Rind of a Lemmon: like which its ſurface is grained or knobbed, but more courſe and unequal. The Cods at firſt are of a dark Green, but the ſide of them next the Sun of a Muddy Red. As they grow ripe the Green turns to a fine bright Yellow, and the Muddy to a more lively beautiful Red, very pleaſant to the Eye. They neither ripen, nor are gather'd at once: but for three weeks or a month, when the Seaſon is, the Overſeers of the Plantations go every day about to ſee which are turn'd Yellow ; cutting at once, it may be, not a- bove one from a Tree. The Cods thus gathered they lay in ſeveral heaps to ſweat ; and then burſting the Shell with their hands, they pull out the Nits, which are the only ſubſtance they contain, having no ftalk or pith among theni; and (excepting that theſe Nuts lye in regular rows, are placed like the grins of Maiz, but ſticking together; and ſo cloſe- ly ſtowed, that after they have been once feparated, it a 62 3 City of Caraccos. An.1682 it would be hard to place them again in fo narrow a compaſs. There are generally near 100 Nuts in a Cod : in proportion to the greatneſs of which, for it varies, the Nuts are bigger or leſs. When taken out they dry them in the Sun upon Mats ſpread on the ground: after which they need no more care, having a thin hard skin of their own, and much Oil , which preſerves them: Salt-water will not hurt them; for we had our Bags rotten, lying in the bottom of our Ship, and yet the Nuts never the worſe. They raiſe the young Trees of Nuts, ſer with the great end downward, in fine black Mould, and in the ſame places where they are to bear which they do in 4 or 5 years time, without the trouble of tranſplanting. There are ordinarily of theſe Trees, from 500 to 2000 and upward in a Plantation or Cacoa-walk, as they call them: and they ſhelter the young Trees from the weather with Plaintains fet about them for 2 or 3 years; deſtroy- ing all the Plantains by ſuch time the Cacoa-Trees are of a pretty good body, and able to endure the which I take to be the moſt pernicious to them of any thing : for tho theſe Valleys lye open to the North winds, unleſs a little ſhelter d here and there by foie groves of Plantain Trees, which are purpoſely ſet near the Shores of the ſeveral Bays, yet, by all that I could either obſerve or learn, the Cacao's in this country are never blighted, as I have often known them to be in other places. Ca- coa-Nuts are uſed as Money in the Bay of Cam- peachy. The chief Town of this Country is called Carac- cos, a good way within Land, 'tis a large wealthy place, where live moſt of the owners of theſe Cacao walks, that are in the Valleys by the ſhore ; the Plantations being managed by Overſeers and Negro's . It is in a large Savannah Country, that abounds with Cattle: and a Spaniard of my acquain- tance, heat; : a La Guiare. La Comana. Verina. 63 tance, a very ſenſible man who hath been there, An.1682 tells me that 'tis very populous, and he judges it to be 3 times as big as Corunna in Gallicia. The way. to it is very ſteep and craggy, over that ridge of Hills, which I faid cloſes up the Valleys and par- cition Hills of the Cacao Coaſt. In this Coaſt it ſelf the chief place is La Guiare, a good Town cloſe by the Sea; and tho it had but a bad Harbour yet it is much frequented by the Spaniſh ſhipping ; for the Dutch and Engliſh anchor in the ſandy Bays that lye here and there in the mouths of ſeveral Valleys, and where there is very good riding. The Town is open, but hath a ſtrong Fort; yet both were taken ſome years ſince by Captain Wright and his Privateers. "Tis ſeated about 4 or 5 leagues to the weftward of Cape Blanco, which Cape is the Eaſtermoft boundary of this Coaſt of Caraccos. Fur- ther Eaſtward about 20 leagues is a great lake or branch of the Sea, called La Laguna de Venezuola about which are many rich Towns; but the mouth of the Lake is Shallow that no Ships can enter. Near this mouth is a place called Comana, where the Privateers were once repulſed without daring to ac- tempt it any more, being the only place in the North Seas they attempted in vain for many years; and the Spaniards ſince throw it in their teeth fre- quently, as a word of reproach or defiance to them: Not far from that place is Verina, a ſmall Village and Spaniſh Plantation, famous for its Tobacco, repu- ted the beſt in the world. But to return to Caraccos, all this Coaft is fubjet to dry winds, generally North E. which cauſed us to have ſcabby Lips, and we always found it thus, and that in different ſeaſons of the year, for I have been on this Coaſt ſeveral times. In other reſpects it is very healthy and a ſweer clear Air. The Spa- niards have Look-outs or Scouts on the Hills and Breaſt-wo.lks in the Valleys, and moſt of their و a و 64 Rich Trade of the coaſt of Caraccos, An.1682 their Negro's are furniſhed with Arms alſo for de- fence of the Bays. The Dutch have a very profita. bleTrade here, almoſt to themſelves. I have known 3 or 4 great Ships at a time on the Coaſt, each, it may be, of 30 or 40 Guns. They carry hither all forts of European Commodities, eſpecially Linnen; making vaſt returns, chiefly in Silver and Cacao. And I have often wondered and regretted it, that none of my own Countrymen find the way thither directly from England ; for our Jamaica-men Trade thither indeed , and find the ſweet of it, though they carry Engliſh Commodities at fecond or third hand. While we lay on this Coaſt, we went aſhore in fome of the Bays, and took 7 or 8 Tun of Cacoa ; and after that 3 Barks, one laden with Hides, the ſecond with European Commodities, the third with Earthen-ware and Brandy. With theſe 3 Barks we went again to the Iſlands of Roca's, where we ſhar'd our Commodities, and ſeparated, having Veſſels enough to tranſport us all whither we thought'moſt convenient. Twenty of us(for we were about 60) took one of the Veſſels and our ſhare of the Goods, and went directly for Virginia. In our way thither we took ſeveral of the Sucking-fifhes ; for when we ſee them about the Ship we caſt out a Line and Hook, and they will take it with any manner of Bait, whether Fish or Fleſh. The Suck- ing-fiſh is about the bignefs of a large Whiting, and much of the ſame ſhape towards the Tail, but the Head is flatter. From the Head to the middle of iesBack there groweth a ſort of fleſh of a hard griltly ſubſtance, like that part of the Limpit ( a Shell-fiſh, tapering up pyramidically ) which ſticks to the Rocks; or like the head or mouth of a Shell-Snail, but harder. This excreſcence is of a flat oval form, about 7 or 8 inches long, and s or 6 broad; and ri- ſing about half an inch high. It is full of ſmall ridges, a 65 Of the Sucking-Fiſh, or Remora. ridges, with which it will faften it felf to any thing An.1682 that it meets with in the Sea, juſt as a Snail doth to a Wall. When any of them happen to come about a Ship they ſeldom leave her, for they will feed on ſuch filth as is daily thrown overboard, or on meer excrements. When it is fair weather and but little wind, they will play about the Ship; but in bluft- ring weather, or when the Ship fails quick, they commonly faften themſelves to the Ships bottom, from whence neither the Ships motion, though ne- ver ſo ſwift, nor the moſt tempeſtuous Sea can re- move them. They will likewiſe faften themſelves to any other bigger Fish; for they never ſwim faft themſelves, if they meet with any thing to carry them. I have found them ſticking to a Shark,after it was hald in on the deck, though a Shark is ſo ſtrong and boiſterous a Fish, and throws about bini ſo vehemently for half an hour together, it may be, when caught, that did not theSucking-fiſh ſtick at no ordinary rate, it muſt needs be caſt off by ſo much violence. It is uſual alſo to ſee them ſticking to Turtle, to any old Trees, Planks, or the like that lye driving at Sea. Any knobs or inqualities at a Ships bottom, are a great hinderance to the ſwiftneſs of its failing; and 10 or 12 of theſe ſticking toit muſt needs retard it, as much, in a manner,as if its bottoin were foul. So that I am inclined to think that this Fiſh is the Remora, of which the Antients tell fuch ſtories: if it be not, I know no other that is, and I leave the Reader to judge. I have ſeen of theſe Sucking- fiſhes in great plenty in the Bay of Campeclj, and in all the Sea between that and the Coaſt of Caraccos, as about thoſe Iſlands, particularly, I have lately deſcribed, Rocas, Blanco, Tortugas, &c. They have no ſcales, and are very good meat. We met nothing elſe worth remark, in our Voy- age to Virginia ; where we arrived in July 1682. That Country is ſo well known to our Nation, that F 或 ​ 26 The Author's arrival in Virginia. An.1682 I ſhall ſay nothing of it, nor ſhall I detain the Rea: der with the ſtory of my own affairs, and the trou- bles that befel me during about 13 months of my ſtay there, but in the next Chapter enter imme- diately upon my ſecond Voyage into the South Seas, and round the Globe. СНАР. TV The Author's ad Voyage to the South Seas. 67 An. 1682 CHA P. II. The Authors Voyage to the Iſle of John Fernan- do in the South Seas He arrives at the Ilies of Cape Verd. Iſle of Sall; its Salt ponds. The Flamingo, and its remarkable Neft. Amber- . grieſe where found. The Iſles of St. Nicholas, Mayo, St. Jago, Fogo, a burning Mountain with the reſt of the Iſles of Cape Verd. Sher- borough River on ihe coaſt of Guinea. The Commodities, and Negroes there : A Town of theirs defcribd. Tornadoes, Sbarks, Flying fiſh. A Sea deep and clear, jet pal.. Iſle of Sibble de Ward. Smallred Lobſters. Stre gtur Le Mair. States Iſland. Cape Horn in Terra del Fuego. Their meeting with Captain Eaton in the South Seas, and their going together to the Ife of John Fernando. Of a Moskito. man left there alone 3 Years : His Art and 3 Sagacity, with that of other Indians. The Iſland deſcribed. The Savanans of America. Goats at John Fernando's. Seali. Sea-lions, Snappers a ſort of Fiſh. Rock-fiſh. The Bays, and natural ſtrength of this Iſland. up Bing now entering upon the Relation of a new of thisBook,proceeding from Virginia by the way ofTer- ra del Fuego, and the South Seas, the Eaſt Indies, and ſo on, till my return to England by the way of the Cape of Good Hope, I ſhall give my Reader this ſhort Account of my firſt entrance upon it. Among thoſe who F 2 aco 68 The Authors ad Voyage to the South Seas. An.1682 accompanied Captain Sharp into the South Seas in our former expedition, and leaving him there, re- turn'dover Land, as is ſaid in the Introduction, and in the iſt and 2d Chapters; there was one Mr. Cook, an Engliſh Native of St. Chriſtophers, a Criole, as we call all born of European Parents in the Weſt Indies. He was a ſenſible man, and had been ſome years a Privateer. At our joining our ſelves with thoſe Privateers we met at our coming again to the North Seas, his lot was to be with Captain Tanky, who kept Company for ſome conſiderable time with Captain Wright, in whoſe Ship Iwas, and part- ed with us at our 2d Anchoring at the Iſle of Tor- tugas; as I have ſaid in the laſt Chapter. After our parting, this Mr. Cook being Quarter-maſter un- der Captain Yanky, the ſecond place in the Ship, according to the Law of Privateers, laid claim to a Ship they took from the Spaniards ; and ſuch of Captain Yanky's men as were fo diſpoſed, particu- larly all thoſe who came with us over Land went aboard this PrizeShip under the new Captain Cook. This diſtribution was made at the Ine of Vacca, or the Iſle of Afh, as we call it ; and here they parted allo ſuch Goods as they had taken. But Captain Cook having no Commiſſion, as Captain Yanky, Captain Triſtian, and ſome other French Commanders had, wholay then at that Iſland, and they grutching the Engliſh ſuch a Veſſel, they all join'd together, plun- dered the Engliſh of their Ship, Goods and Arms, and turned them alhore. Yet Captain Triſtian took in about 8 or 10 of theſe Engliſh, and carryd' them with him to Petit-Guavres: of which number Cap- tain Cook was one, and Captain Davis another, who with the reſt found means to ſeize the Ship as ſhe lay at anchor in the Road, Captain Triſtian and many ofhis men being then alhore: and the Engliſh ſending alhore ſuch French-men as remained in the Ship and were maſtered by them, though ſuperior in number, ſtood His Departure from Virginia 69 ſtood away with herimmediately for thelle of Vacca, An. 1683 before any notice of this ſurprize could reach the FrenchGovernor of that Ine ; fo deceiving him alſo by a Stratagem, they got on board the reſt of their Countrymen, who had been left on that Iland; and going thence they took a Ship newly come from France laden with Wines. They alſo took a Ship of good force, in which they reſolved to em- bark themſelves, and make a new Expedition into the South Seas, to cruiſe on the Coaſt of Chili and Peru. But firſt they went for Virginia with their Prizes; where they arrived the April after my com- ing thither. The beſt of their Prizes carried 18 Guns: this they fitted up there with Sails, and eve- , ry thing neceſſary for ſo long a Voyage ; felling the Wines they had taken for ſuch Proviſions as they wanted. My felf, and thoſe of our Feilow- travellers over the Iſthmus of America, who came with me to Virginia the year before this (moit of which had ſince made a ſhort Voyage to Carolina, and were again return'd to Virginia) reſolved to join our felves to theſe new Adventurers: and as many more engaged in the ſame deſign,as made our whole Crew confift of about 70 Men. So having furnished our felves with neceſſary materials, and agreed up- on ſome particular Rules, eſpecially of Temperance and Sobriety, by reaſon of the length of our in- tended Voyage, we all went on board our Ship. Auguſt 23. 1683. we failed from Achomack in Vir- ginia, under the Command of Captain Cook, bound for the South Seas. I ſhall not trouble the Reader with an account of every days run, buc halten to the leſs known parts of the World, to give a de- ſcription of them: only relating ſuch memorable ac- cidents as hapned to us, and ſuch places as we touch- ed at by the way. We met nothing worth obſervation till we came to the Iſlands of Cape Verd, except a terrible Storm, which F 3 a а 70 The Ifies of Cape Verd. An.1582 uh'ch could not eſcape it: This hapned in a few w days after we left Virginia ; with a S.S. E. wind juſt in our Teeth. The ſtorm laſted above a week : it drencht us all like ſo many drowned Rats, and was one of the worft ftorms I ever was in. One I met with in the Eaſt Indies was more violent for the time; but of not above 24 hours continuance. Af- ter that Storm we had favourable Winds and good weather; andin a ſhort time we arrived at the Iſland Sall, which is one of the Eaſtermoſt of the Cape Verd Iſland. Of theſe there are ten in number (ſo con- liderable as to bear diſtinct names) and they lyeſe- veral degrees off from Cape Verd in Africk, whence they receive that Appellation ; taking up about 5 deg. of Longitude in breadth, and about as many of Lacitude in their length, viz. from near 14 to 19 North. They are moſt inhabited by Portugueſe Ban- ditti. This of Sall is an Iſland lying in the Lat. of 16, in Long. 19 deg. 33 m. Weſt from the Lizard in England, ftretching from North to South about 8 or 9 leagues, and not above a league and an half or 2 leagues wide. It hath its name from the abun- dance of Salt that is naturally congealed there, the whole Iſland being full of large Salc-ponds. The Land is very barren, producing no Tree that I could ſee, but fome ſmall ſhrubby Buſhes by the Sea fide: Neither could I diſcern any Graſs ; yet there are ſome poor Goats on it, . I know not whether there are any other Beaſts on the Iſland: There are ſome wild Fowl, but, I judge not many. I ſaw a few Flamingo's, which is a ſort of large Fowl, much like a Heron in ſhape, but bigger, and of a reddiſh colour. They delight to keep together in great companies, and feed in Mud or Ponds, or in ſuch places where there is not much Water: They are very ſhy, therefore it is hard to ſhoot them. Yet I have lain obſcured in the evening near a place where they reſort, and with a The Flamingo, and its Artificial Neft. 71 with two more in my company have killed 14 of An. 1683 them at once; the firſt ſhot being made while they were ſtanding on the ground, the other two as they roſe. They build their Nefts in ſhallow Ponds, where there is much Mud, which they ſcrape toge- ther, making little Hillocks, like ſmall Illands, ap- pearing out of the Water, a foot and half high from the bottom. They make the foundation of theſe Hillocks broad, bringing them up tapering to the top, where they leave a ſmall hollow pit to lay their Eggs in; and when they either lay their Eggs, or hatch them, they ſtand all the while, not on the Hillock, but cloſe by it' with their Legs on the ground and in the water, reſting themſelves againſt the Hillock, and covering the hollow Neft upon it with their Rumps : For their Legs are very long ; and building thus, as they do, upon the ground, they could neither draw their Legs conveniently in- to their Nefts, nor ſit down upon them otherwiſe than by reſting their whole bodies there, to the pre- judice of their Eggs or their young, were it not for this admirable contrivance, which they have by na- tural inſtinct. They never lay more than two Eggs, and ſeldom fewer. The young ones cannot fly till they are almoſt full.grown, but will run prodigiouſly faft; yet we have taken many of them. The Fleſh of both young and old is lean and black, yet very good meat, taſting neither fishy, nor any way un- favory. Their Tongues are large, having a large knob of fat at the root, which is an excellent bit: a Diſh of Flamingo's Tongues being fit for a Prince's Table. *** When many of them are ſtanding together by a Ponds fide, being half a mile diſtant from a Man, they appear to him like a Brick Wall; their Feathers being of the colour of new red Brick ; and they commonly ftand upright, and ſingle, one by one, exactly in a row (except when feeding) and cloſe F 4 by a a 5 F 4 a a 72 siti Iſle of Sall. An. 1683 by each other. The young ones at firſt are of a light grey: and as their Wing-feathers ſpring out, they grow darker : and never come to their right colour, or any beautiful ſhape, under 10 or II months old. I have ſeen Flamingoes at Rio la Hacha, and at an Iſland lying near the Main of America, right againſt Quseriſao, called by Privateers Flamingo- Key, from the multitude of theſe Fowls that breed there, and I never ſaw of their Neſts and young but there. There were not above 5 or 6 men on this Iſand of Sall , and a poor Governour as they call'd him, who came aboard in our Boat, and brought 3 or 4 poor lean Goats for a Preſent to our Captain, tel- ling him they were the beſt that the Illand did afford. The Captain, minding more the poverty of the Giver than the value of the Preſent, gave him in requital a Coat to cloath him; for he had no- thing but a few Rags on his back, and an old Hat riot worth 3 farthings; which yet I believe he wore but ſeldom, for fear he ſhould want before he might get another: for he told us there had not been a Ship in 3 years before. We bought of him about 20 Buſhels of Salt for a few old Cloaths; and he begg'd a little Powder and Shot. We ſtay d here 3 days; in which time one of theſe Portugueſe offered to ſome of our men a lump of Ambergrieſe in ex- change for ſome Cloaths, defiring them to keep it fecret; for he ſaid if the Governor ſhould know it he should be hanged. At length one Mr. Coppinger bought it for a ſmall matter ; yet I believe he gave more than it was worth. We had not a man in the Ship that knew Ambergriefe: but I have ſince ſeen it in other places, and therefore am certain it was not right. It was of a dark colour like Sheeps Dung, and very ſoft, but of no ſmell, and poſſibly "twas ſome of their Goats Dung, I afterwards ſaw ſome ſold at the Necquebars in the Eaſt Indies, which was of a a Ambergrie ſe where found. 73 a lighter colour, but very hard, neither had it any An.1683 ſmell; and this alſo, I ſuppoſe, was a cheat. Yet it is certain that in both theſe places there is Amber- grieſe found. I was told by one Fohn Read a Briſtol Man, that he was Prentice to a Mafter who traded to theſe Iſlands of Cape Verd, and once as he was riding at an Anchor at Fogo, another of theſe Iſlands, there was a lump of it ſwam by the Ship, and the Boat being aſhore he miſt it; but knew it to be Amber- grieſe, having taken up a lump ſwimming in the like manner the Voyage before; and his Mafter hav. ing at ſeveral times bought pieces of it of the Na- tives of the Iſle of Fogo, ſo as to enrich himſelf thereby. And ſo at the Necquebars, Engliſhmere have bought, as I have been credibly informed, great quantities of very good Ambergrieſe. Yet the Inha- bitants are ſo ſubtle that they will counterfeit it, both there and here: and I have heard that in the Gulf of Florida, whence much of it comes, the Native Indians there uſe the ſame Fraud. Upon this occaſion, I cannot omit to tell my Reader what I learnt from Mr. Hill, a Chyrur- geon, upon his ſhewing me once a piece of Amber- griefe, which was thus. One Mr. Benjarnin Barker, a man that I have been long well acquainted with, and know him to be a very diligent and obſerving perſon, and likewiſe very ſober and credible, told this Mr. Hill, that being in the Bay of Honduras to procure Logwood, which grows there in great a- bundance, and paſſing in a Canoa over to one of the Ilands in that Bay, he found upon the ſhore, on a fandy Bay there, a lump of Ambergrieſe, ſo large, that when carried to Famaica, he found it to weigh i hundred pound and upwards. When he firſt found it, it lay dry, above the mark which the Sea then came to at High-water; and he obſerved in it a great multitude of Peetles: It was of a dusky co- lour, 74 Ife of St. Nicholas. An.1683 lour, towards black, and about the hardneſs of mel- low Cheeſe, and of a very fragrant ſmell: This that Mr. Hill ſhewed me, being ſome of it, which Mr. Barker gave him. Beſides choſe already mentioned, all the places where I have heard that Ambergrieſe hath been found, are Bermudas, and the Bahama Il- lands in the Weſt Indies; and that part of the Coaſt of Africk, with its adjacent Iſlands, which reaches from Mozambique to the Red Sea. We went from this Iſland of Sall, to St. Nicholas, another of the Cape Verd Iſlands, lying Weſt South Weſt from Sall, about 22 leagues. We arrived there the next day after we left the other, and An- chored on the S. E. fide of the Iſland. This is a pretty large Iſland; it is one of the biggeſt of all the Cape Verd, and lyeth in a triangular form. The largeſt ſide, which lyeth to the Eaſt, is about 30 leagues long, and the other two above 20 leagues each. It is a mountainous barren Iſland, and rocky all round towards the Sea ; yet in the heart of it, there are Valleys, where the Portugueſe, which inha- bit here, have Vineyards and Plantations, and Wood for fewel. Here are many Goats, which are but poor in compariſon with thoſe in other places, yet much better than thoſe at Sall: There are likewiſe many Affes. The Governour of this Iſland came aboard us, with 3 or 4 Gentlemen more in his com- pany, who were all indifferently well cloathed, and accoutred with Swords and Piſtols ; but the reſt that accompanied him to the Sea fide, which were about 20 or 30 men more, were but in a ragged garb. The Governour brought aboard ſomie Wine made in the Iſland, which talted much like Madera Wine: It was of a pale colour, and lookt thick. He told us the chief Town was in a Valley 14 mile from the Bay where we rode ; that he had there under him above one hundred families, beſides other Inhabitants that lived ſcattering in Valleys more re- a mote. Iſle of Mayo. 75 mote: They were all very ſwarthy, the Governor An.1683 was the cleareſt of them, yet of a dark tawny com- plexion. At this Iſland we ſcrubb'd the bottom of our Ship, and here alſo we dug Wells aſhore on the Bay, and fill'dall our Water, and after 5 or 6 days ſtay , we went from hence to Mayo, another of the Cape Verd Iſlands, lying about 40 miles Eaſt and by South from the other; arriving there the next day, and anchoring on the N.W. ſide of the Iſland. We fent our Boat on More, intending to have purchaſed ſome Proviſion, as Beef or Goats, with which this Iſland is better ſtock d than the reſt of the Iſlands. But the Inhabitants would not ſuffer our men to land, for about a week before our arrival there came an Engliſh Ship, the men of which came alhore,pre- tending friendſhip, and ſeized on the Governour with ſome others, and carrying them aboard;made them fend aſhore for Cattle to ranfom their Liber- ties: and yet after this ſet ſail, and carry d them away, and they had not heard of them ſince. The Engliſh-man that did this (as I was afterwards in- formed) was one Captain Bond of Briſtol. Whether ever he brought back thoſe men again I know not: He hiinſelf and moſt of his men have ſince gone over to the Spaniards: and twas he who had like to have burnt our Ship after this in the Bay of Panama; as I ſhall have occaſion to relate. This Iſle of Mayo is but ſmall, and invironed with fholes; yet a place much frequented by ſhipping for its great plenty of Salt: and though there is but bad landing, yet many Ships lade here every year. Here are plenty of Bulls, Cows, and Goats; and at a certain ſeaſon in the year, as May, June, fuly, and Auguſt, a ſort of ſmall Sea Tortoiſe come hither to lay their Eggs: but thefe Turtle are not ſo ſweet as thoſe in the Weſt Indies. The inhabitants plant Corn, Yams, Potatoes, and ſome Plantains, and breed a few a 76 Iſle of St. Jago. An.1683 a few Fowls; living very poor, yet much better than the Inhabitants of any other of theſe Ilands, St. Fago excepted, which lieth 40r s leagues to the Weſtward of Mayo, and is the chief, the moſt fruit- ful, and beſt inhabited of all the Ilands of Cape Verd ; yer mountainous, and much barren Land in it. On the Eaſt ſide of the Iſle of St. Jago is a good Port, which in peaceable times eſpecially is ſeldom without Ships ; for this hath long been a place which Ships have been wont to touch at for Water and Refreſhments, as thoſe outward bound to the Eaſt Indies, Engliſh, French, and Dutch; many of the Ships bound to the Coaſt of Guinea, the Dutch to Surinam, and their own Portugueſe Fleet going for Braziel, which is gezierally about the latter end of September: but few Ships call in here in their return for Europe. When any Ships are here the Country People bring down their Commodities to ſell to the Seamen and Paſſengers, viz. Bullocks, Hogs, Goats, Fowls, Eggs, Plantains, and Cocoa Nuts; which they will give in Exchange for Shirts, Drawers, Handker- chiefs, Hats, Waftecoats, Britches, or in a manner for any ſort of Cloath, eſpecially Linnen, for Woollen is not much efieemed there. They care not willingly to part with their Cattel of any ſort but in exchange for Money, or Linnen, or ſome other valuable Commodity. Travellers muſt have a care of theſe people, for they are very thieviſh; and if they ſee an opportunity, will ſnatch any thing from you, and run away with it. We did not touch at this Iſland in this Voyage ; but I was there before this in the year 1670, when I ſaw a Fort here lying on the topof an Hill, and command- ing the Harbour. The Governor of this Iſland is chief over all the reſt of the Iſlands. I have been told that there are two large Towns on this Iſland, ſome ſmall Villages, and ر The other Ifles of Cape Verd. 97 and a great many Inhabitants ; and that they make An 168; a great deal of Wine, ſuch as is that of St. Nicholas, I have not been on any ocher of the Cape Verd Iſlands, nor near them; but have ſeen moſt of them at a diſtance. They ſeem to be mountainous and barren; ſome of theſe before-mentioned being - the moſt fruitful and moſt frequented by Strangers, eſpecially ft. Jago and Mayo. As to the reſt of them, Fogo and Brava are two ſmall Iſlands lying to the Weſtward of St. Fago, but of little note ; only Fogo is rernarkable for its being a Vulcano : It is all of it one large Mountain of a good heighth, out of the top whereof iſſue Flames of Fire, yet only diſcerned in the night: and then it may be ſeen a great way at Sea. Yet this Inand is not without Inhabitants, who live at the foot of the Mountain near the Sea. Their ſubſiſtance is much the ſame as in the other Ilands; they have ſome Goats, Fowls, Plantains, Coco-Nurs, &c. as I am informed. Of the Plan- tains and Coco-Nuts I ſhall have occaſion to ſpeak when I come into the Eaſt Indies : and ſhall defer the giving an account of them til then. The remainder of theſe Iſlands of Cape Verd, are St. Anthonio, St. Lucia, St. Vincente, and Bona-Viſta : of which I know nothing conſiderable. Our entrance among theſe Iſlands was from the North Eaſt; for in our paſſage from Virginia weran pretty far toward the coaſt of Gualata in Africk, to preſerve the Trade-wind, left we ſhould be born off too much to the Weftward, and fo loſe the Iſlands, Weanchored at the South of Sall, and paſſing by the South of St. Nicholas anchored again at Mayo, as hath been ſaid; where we made the ſhorter ſtay, becauſe we could get no Fleſh among the Inhabitants, by reaſon of the regret they had at their Governor and his Mens being carried away by Captain Bond. So leaving the Ines of Cape Verd we ſtood away to the Southward with the Wind at E. N. E. intending to have 78 The River of Sherboro in Guinea. A1.1683 have touched no more till we came to the Streights of Magellan. But when we came into the lat. of 10 deg. North, we met the Winds at S. by W. and S. S. W. therefore we altered our Reſolutions, and ſteered away for the Coaſt of Guinea, and in few days came to the Mouth of the River of Sherboro, which is an Engliſh Factory, lying South of Sierra Liona. We had one of our men who was well ac- quainted there, and by his direction we went in among the Shoals, and came to an Anchor. Sherboro was a good way from us, ſo I can give no account of the place,or our Factory there ; ſave that I have been informed, that there is a conſiderable Tfade driven there for a ſort of red Wood for dying, which grows in that Country very plentifully; 'tis called by our people Cam-wood. A little within the Shore where we anchored was a Town of Negroes, Natives of this Coaft. It was skreen'd from our ſight by a large Grove of Trees that grew between them and the thore : but we went thither to them ſeveral times during the 3 or 4 days of our ſtay here, to re- freſh our felves; and they as often came aboard us, bringing with them Plantains, Sugar-canes, Palm- wines, Rice, Fowls, and Honey, which they ſold us. They were no way ſhy of us, being well ac- quainted with the Engliſh, by reaſon of our Guinea Factories and Trade. This Town ſeem'd pretty large; the Houſes but low and ordinary ; but one great Houſe in the midſt of it, where their chief men meet and receive Strangers : and here they treated us with Palm-wine. As to their Perſons, they are like other Negroes. While we lay here we ſcrubb'd the bottom of our Ship, and then fill'd all our Water-casks; and buying up two Punche- ons of Rice for our Voyage, we departed from herice about the middle of November 1683, proſe- cuting our intended courſe towards the Streights of Magellan. We Tornadoes, or Thunder-Showers. 79 We had but little wind after we got out, and very An. 1683 hot weather with ſome fierce Tornadoes, common- ly riſing out of the N. E. which brought Thunder, Lightening and Rain. Theſe did not laſt long ; ſometimes not a quarter of an hour, and then the wind would ſhuffle about to the Southward again, and fall flat calm, for theſe Tornadoes commonly come againſt the wind that is then blowing, as our Thunder-Clouds are often obſerved to do in En- gland; but the Tornadoes I ſhall deſcribe more large- ly in my Chapter of Winds in the Appendix to this Book. At this time many of our men were taken with Feavers; yet we loft but one. While we lay in the calms we caught ſeveral great Sharks ; fome- times 2 or 3 in a day, and eat them all, boyling and 2 ſqueezing them dry, and then ftewing them with Vinegar, Pepper, &c. for we had but little fielha- board. We took the benefit of every Tornado, which came ſometimes 3 or 4 in a day, and carried what Sail we could to get to the Southward, for we had but little wind when they were over; and thoſe ſmall winds between the Tornadoes were much a. gainſt us, at S. by E.and S.S. E. till we paſt the Equinoctial Line, which we croft about a degree to the Eaſtward of the Meridian of the Iſle of St. Fago, one of the Cape Verd Iſlands. Åt firſt we could ſcarce lye S. W. but being got a degree to the Southward of the Line, the wind veer'd more Eaſterly, and then we ftemm'd S. W', by S. and as we got farther to the Southward, fo the wind came about to the Eaſtward and freſhen- ed upon us. In the Lat. of 3 S. we had the wind at S. E. in the Lat. of 5 we had it at E.S. E, where it ſtood a conſiderable time, and blew a freſh top gallant gale. We then made the beſt uſe of it, steering on briskly with all the Sail we could make; and this wind by the 18 of Jan. carried us into the Lat. of 36 South. In all this time we met with nothing a 80 Ines of Sibbel de Wards. An.1683 nothing worthy remark; not ſo much as a Fiſh, ex- cept Flying Fish, which have been ſo often de- ſcribed, that I think it needleſs for me to do it. Here we found the Sea much changed from its natural greenneſs; to a white, or paliſh colour, which cauſed us to fouud, ſuppoſing we might ſtrike ground: For when ever we find the colour of the Sea to change, we know we are not far from Land, or ſhoals which ſtretch out into the Sea, running from fome Land. But here we found no ground with 100 fathom Line. I was this day at noon by reckoning, 48 d. som. Weft from the Lizard, the variation by our morning amplitude 15 d. so m. Eaſt, the variation increaſing. The 20 day one of our Chyrurgeons dyed much lament- ed, becauſe we had but one more for ſuch a dan- gerous Voyage. January 28th we made the Sibbel de Wards, which are 3 Iſlands lying in the lat. of 51 d. 25 m. South, and longitude Welt from the Lizard in England, by my account, 57 d. 28 m. the variation here we found to be 23 d. 10 m. I had for a month before we came hither, endeavoured to perſwade Captain Cook and his Company to anchor at theſe Ilands, where I told them we might probably get water, as I then thought,andin caſe we should miſs of it here, yet by being good Husbands of what we had, we might reach Fohn Fernando's in the South Seas, be- fore our water was ſpent. This I urged to hinder their deſigns of going through the Streights of Man gellan, which I knew would prove very dangerous to us, the rather, becauſe ourmen being Privateers, and ſo more wilful and leſs under command, would not be fo ready to give a watchful attendance in a paſſage ſo little known. For altho theſe men were more under command, than I had ever ſeen any Privateers, yet I could not expect to find them at a minutes call, in coming to an anchor, or weigh- ing 2 IO A ſort of ſmall Lobſters. 81 ing Anchor : beſide, if ever we ſhould have occa- An.1683 ſion to moor, or caſt out two Anchors, we had not a Boat to carry out or weigh an Anchor. Theſe Iſlands of Sibbel de Wards were ſo named by the Dutch. They are all three rocky barren Hands with- out any Tree, only fome Dildo buſhes growing on them: and I do believe there is no water on any one of them, for there was no appearance of any water. The 2 Northermoft we could not come near, but the Southermoft we came cloſe by, but could not ſtrike ground till within 2 Cablength of the ſhore, and there found it to be foul rocky ground. From the time that we were in 1o deg. South, till we came to theſe Iſlands, we had the Wind be- tween E. N. É. and the N. N. E. fair weather, and a brisk gale. The day that we made theſe Iſlands we ſaw great ſhoals of ſmall Lobfters, which co- lour'd the Red Sea in ſpots for a mile in compais, and we drew ſome of them out of the Sea in our Water-buckets. They were no bigger than the top of a mans little finger, yet all their Claws both great and ſmall like a Lobſter. I never ſaw any of this fort of Fish naturally red but here; for ours on the Engliſh Coaſt, which are black naturally, are not red till they are boild: neither did I ever any where elſe meet with any Fiſh of the Lobſter ſhape ſo ſmall as theſe ; unleſs, it may be, Shrimps, or Prawns. Captain Swan and Captain Eaton met alſo with Shoals of this Fiih in much the ſame Latitude and Longitude. Leaving therefore the Silbel de Waid Iflands, as having neither good Anchorage nor Water, we failed on, directing our courſe for the Streights of Magellan. But the Winds hanging in the weſter- bord,and blowing hard, oft put us by our Topfails; ſo that we could not fetch it. The 6th day of Fe- bruary we fell in with the Streights Lé Malr, which a a G IS 82 Streight Le Mair. States Iſland, An.1683 is very high Land on both ſides, and the Streiglits very narrow. We had the wind at N. N.W. a freſh gale; and ſeeing the opening of the Streights, we ran in with it, till within 4 mile of the mouth, and then it fell calm, and we found a ſtrong tide ſetting out of the Streights to the Northward, and like to founder our Ship; but whether flood or ebb I know not; only it made ſuch a ſhort cockling Sea as if we had been in a race, or place where two tides meer: For it ran every way, ſometimes break- ing in over our Wafte, ſometimes over our Poop, ſometimes over our Bow, and the Ship toiſed like an Egg-Shell, ſo that I never felt ſuch uncertain jerks in a Ship. At 8 a clock in the evening we had a ſmall breez at W. N. W. and ſteered away to the Eaſtward, intending to go round the States Iſland, the Eaft end of which we reached the next day by noon, having a freſh breeze all night, The 7th day at noon being off the Eaft end of States Iſland, I had a good obſervation of the Sun, and found my ſelf in lat. 54 deg. 52 min. South . At the Eaſt end of States Iſland are three ſmall Ilands, or rather Rocks, pretty high, and white with the dung of Fowls . Wherefore having ob- ſerved the Sunwe haled up South, deſigning to paſs round to the Southward of Cape Horne, which is the Southermoft Land of Terra del Fuego. The winds hung in the weſtern quarter betwixt the N. W. and the Weſt, ſo that we could not get much to the Weſtward, and we never ſaw Terra del Fuego, after that evening that we made the ſtreight Le Mair. I have heard that there have beenSmokes and Fires on Terra del Fuego, not on the tops of Hills, but in Plains and Valleys, feen by thoſe who have failed through the ſtreights of Magellan ; ſuppoſed to be made by the Natives. We did not ſee the Sun at riſing or ſetting,inor- der to take an amplitude after we left the Sibbel de Wards, a They meet Captain Eaton in the S. Seas. Wards, till we got into the South Seas: therefore I An. 1683 knew not whether the variation increas'd any more or no. Indeed I had an obſervation of the Sun at noon, in lat. 59 deg. 30 min. and we were then ſtanding to the Southward, with the wind atW. b.N. and that night the Wind came about more to the Southward of the Weſt, and we tackt. I was then in lat. 60 by reckoning, which was the fartheit South latitude that ever I was in. The 14th day of February, being in lat. 57, and to the Weſt of Cape Horne, we had a violent ſtorm, which held us till the 3d day of March, blowing commonly at S. W, and S. W. by W. and W.S.W. thick weather all the time, with ſmall drizling Rain, but not hard. We made a ſhift however to ſave 23 Barrels of Rain-water, beſides what we dreft our Victuals withal. March the third the Wind ſhifred at once and came about atSouth,blowing a fierce gale of wind, ſoon after it came about to the Eaſtward, and we ſtood into the South Seas. The 9th day having an obſervation of the Sun, not having ſeen it of late, we found our felves in lat. 47 d. 10 m. and the variation to be but is d. . 30 min. Eaſt. The wind ftood at S. E. we had fair weather and a moderate gale; and the 17th day we were în lat. 36 by obſervation, and then found the va- riation to be but 8 degrees Eaſt. The 19th day when we look'd out in the morn- ing we faw a Shrip to the Southward of 115,coming with all the fail ſhe could make after us: we lay muzled to let her come up with us,for we ſuppoſed her to be a Spaniſh Ship come from Baldivia bound to Lima: we being now to the Northward of Baldivia, and this being the time of the year whenShips that trade thence to Baldinia, return home. They had the ſame opinion of us, and therefore made fure to G 2 take a 84 They arrive at the Iſle of John Fernando A2.1683 take us, but coming nearer we both found our mi- ſtakes. This proved to be one Captain Eaton in a Ship ſent purpoſely from London for the South Seas. We hailed each other, and the Captain came on board, and told us of his actions on the Coaſt of Brazil, and in the River of Plate. He met Captain Swan (one that came from En- gland to trade here) at the Eaſt Entrance into the Streights of Magellan, and they accompanied each other through the Streights, and were ſeparated af- ter they were through by the Storm before menti- oned. Both we and Captain Eaton being bound for Fohn Fernando's Ille, we kept company, and we ſpared him Bread and Beef, and he ſpared us Water, which he took in as he paſſed through the Streights. March the 22d, 1684. we came in light of the Iſland, and the next day got in an anchored in a Bay at the South end of the Iſland, in 25 fathom water,not two Cables lengths from the ſhore. We preſently got out our Canoa, and went alhore to ſee for a Moskito Indian, whom we left here when we were chaſed hence by three Spaniſh Ships in the year 1681. a little before we went to Arica ; Captain Watlin being then our Commander, after Captain Sharp was turned out. This Indian lived here alone above 2 years, and altho he was ſeveral times ſought after by the Spa- niards, who knew he was left on the Iſland, yet they could never find him. He was in the Woods hunting for Goats, when Captain Watlin drew off his men, and the Ship was under fail before he came back to ſhore. He had with him his Gun . and a Knife, with a ſmall Horn of Powder, and a few Shot; which being ſpent, he contrived a way by notching his Knife, to ſaw the barrel of his Gun into ſmall pieces, wherewith he made Harpoons, Lances, Hooks, and along Knife; heating the pie- ces firſt in the fire, which he ſtruck with his Gun- a flint, a A Moskito Indian left here. 85 fint, and a piece of the barrel of his Gun which An. 1683 he hardened ; having learnt to do that among the Engliſh. The hot pieces of Iron he would hammer out and bend as he pleaſed with Stones, and ſaw them with his jagged Knife, or grind them to an edge by long labour, and harden them to a good temper, as there was occaſion. All this may ſeem ſtrange to thoſe that are not acquainted with the ſagacity of the Indians ; but it is no more than theſe Moskito men are accuſtomed to in their own Coun- try, where they make their own Fiſhing and Strik- ing Inſtruments, without either Forge or Anvil; tho they ſpend a great deal of time about them. Other wild Indians who have not the uſe of Iron, which the Moskito men have from the Engliſh, make Hatchets of a very hard ſtone, with which they will cut down Trees, (the Cotton Tree eſpecially,which is a ſoft tender Wood) to build their Houſes or make Canoas ; and though in working their Ca- noas hollow, they cannor dig them ſo neat and thin, yet they will make them fit for their ſervice. This their digging or hatchet-work they help out by fire; whether for the felling of the Trees, or for the making the inſide of their Canoas hollow. Theſe contrivances are uſed particularly by the Savage In- dians of Blesvfield's River, deſcribed in the 3d Chap- ter, whoſe Canoas and Stone-hatchets I have ſeen. There Stone-hatchets are about 10 inches long, 4 broad, and 3 inches thick in the middle. They 2 are grownd away flat and ſharp at both ends: right in the midſt, and clear round it they make a notch, ſo wide and deep that a man might place his Fin- ger along it, and taking a ſtick or withe about 4 foot long, they bind it round the Hatchet-lead, in that notch, and ſo twiſting it hard, uſe it as an handle or helve; the head being held by it very faft. Nor are other Wild Indians leſs ingenious. Thoſe of Patagonia, particularly, head their Arrows with ر G3 86 ز a His Reception of ws. 19.1583 with Flint cut or grownd, which I have ſeen and admired. But to return to our Moskito man on the Idle of John Fernando. With ſuch Inftruments as he made in that manner, he got ſuch Proviſion as the Iſland afforded ; either Goats or Fiſh. He told us that at firſt he was forced to eat Seal, which is ve- ry ordinary neat, before he had made Hooks: but afterwards he never killed any Seals but to make lines, cutting their skins into thongs. He had a little Houſe or Hut half a mile from the Sea, which was lined with Goats skin ; his Couch or Barbecu of ſticks lying along about 2 foot diſtant from the ground, was ſpread with the ſame, and was all his Bedding. He had no Cloaths left, having worn out thoſe he brought from Watlin's Ship, but only a Skin about his Wafte. He ſaw our Ship the day before we came to an Anchor, and did believe we were Engliſh, and therefore kill'd 3 Goats in the morning, before we came to an Anchor, and dreſt them with Cabbage, to treat us when we came a- Thore. He came then to the Sea ſide to congratulate our ſafe arrival. And when we landed, a Moskito Indian named Robin, firſt leape aſhore, and running to his brother Moskito man, threw himſelf flat on his face at his feet; who helping him up and em bracing him, fell flat with his face on the ground at Robins feet, and was by him taken up alſo. We ſtood with pleaſure to behold the ſurprize and ten- derneſs, and folemnity of this interview,which was exceedingly affectionate on both ſides, and when their ceremonies of civility were over, we alſo that food gazing at them drew near, each of us embracing hiin we had found here, who was over- joyed to ſee ſo many of his old friends come hither, as he thought, purpoſely to fetch hiin.He was named Will as the other was Robin. Theſe were names given them by the Engliſh, for they have no names among themſelves; and they take it as a great favour to be 3 Dame 2 The Iſle of John Fernando deſcribd. 87 named by any of us; and will complain for want An.1683 of it, if we do not appoint then ſome nanie when they are with us: ſaying of themſelves they are poor Men, and have no name. This Iſland is in lat. 34 d. 15 m. and about 120 leagues from the Main.It is about 12 leagues round, full of high Hills, and ſmall pleaſant Valleys which if manured, would probably produce any thing proper for the Climate. The ſides of the Moun- tains are part Savanahs, part Wood-land. Savanahs are clear pieces of Land without Woods, not be- cauſe more barren than the Wood-land, for they are frequently ſpots of as good Land as any, and often are intermixt with Wood-land. In the Bay of Campeachy are very large Savanahs, which I have ſeen full of Cattle; but about the Riverr of Plate are the largeſt that ever I heard of, so, 60, or 100 miles in length ; and famaica, Cuba, and Hiſpaniola, have manySavanahs intermixt with Woods. Places cleared of Wood by Art and Labour do not go by this name, but thoſe only which are found to in the uninhabitted parts of America, ſuch as this Ille of John Fernandoes; or which were originally clear in The Graſs in theſe Savanahs at Fohn Fernardo's is not a long flaggy Graſs, ſuch as is uſually in the Sa- vanals in the West Indies, but a ſort of kindly Graſs, both thick and flouriſhing the biggeſt part of the year. The Woods afford divers forts of Trees; ſome large and goodTimber for building, but none fit for Mafts. The Cabbage Trees of this Ille, are but finall and low; yet afford a good head, and the Cabbage very ſweet. This Tree is deſcribed in the 7 Chapter The Savanahs are ſtocked with Goats in great Herds: but thoſe that live on the Eaſt end of the Illand are not ſo far as thoſe on the Weſt end; for though there is much more Grafs, and plenty of G4 Water other parts. 83 Goats at J. Fernando's. An.1683 Water in every Valley, nevertheleſs they thrive not fo well here as on the Weſt end, where there is leſs food; and yet there are found greater Flocks, and thoſe too fatter and ſweet er. That weft end of the Iſland is all high Champi- on ground without any Valley, and but one place to land; there is neither Wood nor any freſh Wa. ter, and the Graſs ſhort and dry. Goats were firſt put on the Iſland by John Fer- nando, who firft diſcovered it in his Voyage from Lima to Baldivia:(and diſcovered alſo another Iſland about the ſame bigneſs, 20 leagues to the Weſtward of this.) From thoſe Goats there were propagated, and the Iſland hath taken its name from this its firſt diſcoverer, who when he returned to Lima, de- fired a Patent for it, deſigning to ſettle here, and it was in his 2d Voyage hither that he fet afhore 3 or 4 Goats, which have ſince by their increaſe, ſo well ſtocked the whole Iſland. But he could never get a Patent for it, therefore it lies ſtill de- ſtitute of Inhabitants though doubtleſs capable of maintaining 4 or soo Families, by what may be produced off the Land only. I ſpeak much within compaſs: for the Savanahs would at preſent feed 1ooo head of Cattle beſides Goats, and the Land being cultivated would properly bear Corn, or Wheat, and good Peaſe, Yams, or Potatoes; for the Land in their Valleys and fides of the Mountains is of a good black fruitful mould. The Sea about it is likewiſe very productive of its Inhabitants. Seals fwarm as thick about this Iſland, as if they had no other place in the World to live in ; for there is not a Bay nor Rock that one can get a- Thore on, butis full of them. Sea Lions are here in great Companies, and Fiſh, particularly Snappers and Rock-fih, are fo plentiful, that 2 men in an hours time will take with Hook and Line, as many as will ſerve 100 men. The Seals. 89 The Seals are a ſort of Creatures pretty well An.1683 known, yet it may rot be amiſs to deſcrible them. They are as big as Calves, the head of them like a. Dog, therefore call d by the Dutch the Sea-hounds. Under each Shoulder grows a long thick Fin:Theſe ſerve them to ſwim with when in the Sea, and are inſtead of Legs to them when on the Land for raiſing their Bodies up on end, by the help of theſe Finsor Stumps,and ſo having their Tail-parts drawn cloſe under them, they rebound as it were and throw their Bodies forward, drawing their hinder- parts after them; and then again riſing up, and ſpringing forward with their fore parts, alternately, they lye tumbling up and down, all the while they are moving on Land. From their Shoulders to their Tails they grow tapering like Filh, and have two ſmall Fins on each ſide the Rump, which is commonly covered with their Fins. Theſe Fins ſerve inſtead of a Tail in the Sea, and on Land i they ſiton them, when they give ſuck to their young: Their hair is of divers colours, as black, grey, dun, fpotted ; looking very fleek and pleaſant when they come firſt out of the Sea: For theſe at John Fernan- do's have fine thick Short Fur; the like I have not taken notice of any where but in theſe Seas. Here are always thouſands, I might ſay poiſibly millions of them, either ſitting on the Bays, or going and coming in the Sea round the Iſland; which is co- vered with them (as they lye at the top of the wa- ter playing and funning theinfelves) for a mile or two from the ſhore. When they come out of the Sea they bleat like Sheep for their young; and tho they paſs through hundreds of others young ones, before they come to their own, yet they will not ſuffer any of them to ſuck. The young ones, are like Puppies, and lye much alhore; but when beaten by any of us, they, as well as the old ones will make toward the Sea, and ſwim very ſwift and 90 The Sea Linn. AW.168 and nimble ; tho on ſhore they lye very ſluggiſhl y and will not go out of our ways unleſs we beat them, but ſnap at us. A blow on the Noſe foon kills them. Large Ships might here load themſelves with Seals skins, and Trane-oil ; for they are extra- ordinary fat. Seals are found as well in cold as hot Climates, and in the cold places they love to get on lumps of Ice, where they will lye and fun them- ſelves, as here on the Land : They are frequent in the Northern parts of Europe and Anrerica, and in the Southward parts of Africa, as about the Cape of Good Hope, and at the ſtreights of Magellan ; and tho never ſaw any in the Weſt Indies, but in the Bay of Campeachy, at certain Iſlands called the Alcoranes and at others called the Deſartes; yet they are over all the American Coaſt of the South Seas, from Terra del Fuego, up to the Equinoctial Line: but to the North of the Equinox again in theſe Seas, I never ſaw any, till as far as 21 North Lat. Nor did I ever fee any in the Eaſt Indies. In general they ſeem to re- fort where there is plenty of Fish, for that is their food : and Fish, ſuch as they feed on, as Cods, Groopers, &c. are moſt plentiful on rocky Coaſts: and ſuch is moſtly the Weftern Coaſt of the South America ; as I ſhall further relate. The Sea Lion is a large creature about 12 or 14 foot long. The biggeſt part of his body is as big as a Bull: it is ſhaped like a Seal, but 6 times as big. The Head is like a Lion's Head ; it hath a broad Face with many long Hairs growing about its Lips like a Cat. It has a great goggle Eye, the Teeth 3 inches long, about the bigneſs of a Mans Thumb. In Capt.Sharp'stime ſome of ourMen madeDice with them. They have no Hair on their Bodies like the Seal, they are of a dun colour, and are all extraor- dinary fat: one of them being cut up and boild will yield a Hogſhead of Oil, which is very ſweet and wholeſome to fry meat withal. The lean Fleſh a a 15 Snapper Fift. Rock Fiſh. 91 is black, and of a courſe grain ; yet indifferent good An.1683 food. They will lye a week at a time aſhore if not be diſturbed. Where 3, or 4, or more of them come aſhore together, they huddle one on another like Swine, and grunt like them, making a hideous noiſe. They eat Fiſh; which I believe is their com- mon food а a The Snapper is a Fish made much like a Roach, but a great deal bigger. It hath a large Head and Mouth, and great Gills. The Back is of a bright Red, the Belly of a Silver-colour: The Scales are as broad as a ſhilling. The Snapper is excellent meat. They are in many places in the Weſt-Indies, and the South Seas : I have not ſeen them any where beſide. The Rock-fiſh is called by Sea-men a Grooper : the Spaniards call it a Baecalao, which is the name for Cod; becauſe it is much like it. It is rounder than the Snapper, of a dark brown colour; and hath ſmall Scales no bigger than a Silver penny. This Filh is good ſweet meat, and is found in great plenty on all the Coaſt of Peru and Chili. There are only two Bays in the whole Iſland where Ships may anchor; theſe are both at the Eaſt end, and in both of them is a Rivolet of good freſh water. Either of theſe Bays may be fortified with little charge, to that degree, that so men in each may be able to keep off 1000, and there is no coming into theſe Bays from the Weſt end, but with great difficulty, over the Mountains, where if 3 men are plac'd, they may keep down as many as come againſt them on any ſide. This was partly ex- perienced by 5 Engliſhmen that Captain Davis left here, who defended themſelves againſt a great bo- dy of Spaniards who landed in the Bays, and came here to deſtroy them; and tho the ſecond time one of their Conforts deſerted and fied to the Spa- niards, yet the other 4 kept their ground, and were . afterward taken in from hence by Captain Strong of London. We 92 A1.1683 The Management of their Sick, We remained at John Fernando's 16 days; our ſick men were aſhore all the time, and one of Captain Eaton's Doctors, (for he had 4 in his Ship) tending and feeding them with Goat, and ſeveral Herbs, whereof here is plenty growing in the Brooks, and their Diſeaſes were chiefly Scorbutick. CHAP 93 An 1684 CHAP. V. The Author departs from John Fernando's. Of the Pacifick Sea. Of the Andes, or high Mcun- tains in Peru and Chili. A Prize taken. Ifle. of Lobos : Penguins, and other Birds there Three Prizes more. The Iſands Gallapago's : The Dildo-tree , Burton wood , Mammet. trees, Guanoes, Land Tortoiſe, their ſeveral lind, Green Snakes, Turtle. Doves, Tortoiſe, or Turtle-graſs. Sea Turtle, their ſeveral kinds. The Air and Weather at the Gallapa- go's. Some of the Iſlands deſcrib'd, their Soil, &c. The Iſland Cocos deſcribd. Cape Blan- co, and the Bay of Caldera'; the Savanahs there, Captain Cook dies. Of Nicoya, and a red Wood for Dying, and other commodi. ties. A narrow Eſcape of 12 Men. Lance- wood. Volcan Vejo, a burning Mountain on the Coaſt of Ria Lexa. A Tornado The Iſland and Harbor of Rea Leja. The Gulph of Amapalla, and Point Cafivina. Ijes of Mangera and Amapalla. The Indian Inhabi. tants. Hog plumb-tree. Other Iſlands in the Gulph of Amapalla. Captain Eaton and Captain Davis careen tleir Ships kere, and afterwards part. T! HE 8th of April 1684. we failed from the Ille of John Fernando with the Wind at S. E. We were now 2 Ships in Company : Captain Cook's, whoſe Pacifick Sea. 94 An.1684 whoſe Ship I was in, and who liere took the ſick- neſs of which he dy da while after; and Captain Eaton's. Our paſſage lay now along the Pacifick Sea, properly ſo called. For tho it be uſual with our Map-makers to give that Name to this whole O- cean, calling it Mare Auſtrale, Mar del Zur, or Mare Pacificum ; yet, in my opinion, the Name of the Pacifick Sea ought not to be extended from S. to N. farther than from 30 to about 4 degrees South 4 Latitude, and from the American ſhore Weſtward indefinitely, with reſpect to my obſervation , who have been in theſe parts 250 leagues or more from Land, and ſtill had the Sea very quiet from winds. For in all this Tract of Water, ofwhich I have ſpoken, there are no dark rainy Clouds, though often a thick Horizon, ſo as to hinder an obferva- tion of the Sun with the Quadrant; and in the morning hazy weather frequently, and thick Miſts, but ſcarce able to wer one. Nor are there in this Sea any winds but the Trade-wind, no Tempefts, no Tornado's, or Hurricans, (though North of the Equator, they are met with as well in this Ocean as in the Atlantick) yet the Sea it ſelf at the new and full of the Moon, runs with high, large, long Surges, but ſuch as never break out at Sea, and ſo are ſafe enough; unleſs that where they fall in and break upon the ſhore, and make it bad landing. In this Sea we made the beſt of our way toward the Line, till in the lat. of 24 S. where we fell in with the main Land of the South America. All this courſe of the Land, both of Chili and Peru is vaftly high; therefore we kept 12 or 14 leagues off from fhore, being unwilling to be ſeen by the Spaniards dwelling there. The Land (eſpecially beyond this, from 24 deg.S. lat. to 17, and from 14 to 10) is of a moſt prodigious heighth. It lies generally in ridges parallel to the Shore, and 3 or 4 ridges one within another, each ſurpalling other in heighth ; and Andes of Chili and Peru. 95 and thoſe that are fartheft within Land are much An 1684 higher than the others. They always appear blue when ſeen at Sea : ſometimes they are obfcured with Clouds, but not fo often as the high Lands in other parts of the world ; for here are feldom, or never any Rains on theſe Hills, any more than in the Sea near it: neither are they ſubject to Fogs. Theſe are the higheſt Mountains that ever I law, far ſurpaſſing the Pike of Tenariffe, or Santa Martha, and I believe any Mountains in the world. I have ſeen very high Land in the Lat. of 30 South, but not ſo high as in the Latitudes before defcribed. In Sir John Narborough's Voyage alſo to Baldivia (a City on this Coaſt) mention is made of very high Land feen near Baldivia : and the Spa- niards with whom I have diſcourſed have told me, that there is very high Land all the way between Coquimbo ( which lies in about 30 deg. S. Lat.) and Baldivia, which is in 4,0 South; ſo that by all like- lihood theſe ridges of Mountains do run in a con- tinued Chain from one end of Peru and Chili to the other, all along this South Sea Coaſt, called uſually the Andes, or Sierra Nuevada des Andes. The exceſſive heighth of theſe Mountains may, poſlibly, be the reaſon that there are no Rivers of note that fall into theſe Seas.Some ſmall Rivers indeed there are, but very few of them, for in ſome places there is not one that comes out into the Sea in 150 or 200 leagues; and where they are thickeft they are 30, 40, or so leagues afunder, and too little and ſhallow to be navigable. Beſides, ſome of theſe do not con- ſtantly run, but are dry at certain ſeaſons of the year: as the River of Ylo runs flush with a quick current at the latter end of Fanuary, and fo con- tinues till June, and then it decreaſeth by degrees, growing leſs, and running ſlow till the latter end of September, when it fails wholly, and runs no more till Jannary again : This I have ſeen at both ſea- fons, a a 96 Lobos. An.1684 fons,in 2 former Voyages I made hither, and have been informed by the Spaniards, that other Rivers on this Coaſt are of the like nature, being rather Torrents orLand-floods caus'd by their Rains at cer- tain feaſons far within Land, than perenial Streams. We kept ſtill along in fight of this Coaſt, but at a good diſtance from it, encountring with nothing of note, till in the lat. of 9 deg. 40 m. South, on the 3d of May, we deſcried a Sail to the Northward of us. She was plying to Windward, we chaced her, and Capt. Eaton being a head foon took her : the came from Guiaquil about a month before, laden with Timber and was bound to Lima. Three days before we took her the carne from Santa, whither fhe had gone for water, and where they had news of our being in theſe Seas by an Expreſs from Bal- divia ; for as we afterwards heard, Captain Swan had been at Baldivia to ſeek a Trade there, and he having met Captain Eaton in the ſtreights of Ma- gellan, the Spaniards of Baldivia were doubtleſs in- formed of us by him ; ſuſpecting him alſo to be one of us, tho he was not. Upon this news the Vice- roy of Lima ſent Expreſſes to all the Sea Ports, that they might provide themſelves againſt our aſſaults. We immediately ſteered away for the Iſland Lo- bos, which lyeth in lat. 6 deg. 24 min. South lat (I took the Elevation of it alhore with an Aſtro. labe) and it's s leagues from the Main : it is called Lobos de la Mair, to diſtinguish it from another that is not far from it, and extremely like it, called Lobos de la Terra, for it lies nearer the Main. Lobos, or Lovos, is the Spaniſh name for a Seal, of which there are great plenty about theſe, and ſeveral o- ther Iſlands in theſe Seas that go by this Name. The 9 of May we arrived at this Iſle of Lobos de la Mar, and came to an anchor with our Prize. This Lobos conſiſts indeed of two little Iſlands, each a- bout a mile round, of an indifferent heighth, a ſmall a Penguins. 97 ſmall Channel between, fit for Boats only; and fe. An.1684 veral Rocks lying on the North ſide of the Illands, a little way from ſhore. There is a ſmall Cove or ſandy Bay ſheltred from the wind, at the Weſt end of the Eaſtermoft Iſland; where Ships may careen: The reſt of the ſhore, as well round the 2 Iſlands as berween them, is a Rocky Coaſt, confilling of ſmall Cliffs. Within Land they are both of them partly Rocky, and partly Sandy, Earren, without any freſh Water, Tree, Shrub, Graſs, or Herbs; or any Land Animals (for the Seals and Sea-Lyons come aſhore here) but Fowls: Of which there are great multitudes; as Boobies, but moſtly Penguins which I have ſeen plentifully all over the South Seas, on the Coaſt of Neavfoundland, and off the Cape of Good Hope. They are a Sea Fowl, about as big as a Duck, and ſuch Feet; but a ſharp Bill, feeding on Fiſh: They do not fly but flutter, having rather ftumps like a young Gollins, than Wings : And theſe are inſtead of Fins to them in the Water. Their Feathers are Downy. Their fleſh is but or- dinary food; but their Eggs are good meat. There is another fort of ſmall black Fowi, that make holes in the Sand for their Night habitations, whoſe fel! is good ſweet meat : I never ſaw any of them but here, and at John Fernandos. There is good riding between the Eaſtermoſt Inand and the Rocks, in 10, 12, or 14 fathon ; for the wind is commonly at S. or S. S. E. and the Eaftermoft Íſland lying Eaſt and Weft ſhelters that Road. Here we fcrubb'd our Ships and being in a readi- neſs to fail, the Priſoners were examined, to krow if any of them could conduct us to fome town where we might make ſome attempt: For they had before informed us that we were deſcried by the Spaniards, and by that we knew that they would ſend no Riches by Sea ſo long as we were here. Many Towns . 98 5 Cruiſings. An. 1684 Towns were conſidered on, as Guiaquil , Zana, Truwillo, and others : At laft Truxillo was pitched on, as the moſt important; therefore the likelieſt to make us a Voyage if we could Conquer it: which we did not much queſtion; though we knew it to be a very populous City. But the greateſt difficulty was in Landing; for Guanchaguo, which is the near- eft Sea-port to it, but 6 miles off, is an ill place to Land; ſince ſometimes the very Fiſhermen that live there are not able to go out in 3 or 4 days. How- ever the 17th of May in the Afternoon, our Men were muftered of both Ships Companies, and their Arms proved. We were in all 108 Men fit for Ser- vice; beſides the fick: and the next day we intend- ed to Sail and take the Wood Prize with us. But the next day one of our Men being afhoar betimes on the Iſland deſcried three Sail bound to the North- ward; two of them without the land to the Weft- ward; the other between it and the Continent. We foon got our Anchors up and chaſed: and Captain Eaton, who drew the leaſt draught of Wa- ter, put through between the Weſtermoft Idland and the Rocks, and went after thoſe two that were without the Iſlands. We in Captain Cook's Ship went after the other, which food in for the Main- Land: but we foon fetched her up; and having taken her, ſtood in again with her to the Iſland; for we ſaw that Captain Eaton wanted no help, ha- ving taken both thoſe that he went after. He came in with one of his Prizes; but the other was ſo far to Leeward, and ſo deep that he could not then get her in: but he hoped to get her in the next day : but being deep laden, as deſigned to go down be- fore the wind to Panama, ſhe would not bear Sail. The 19th day ſhe turned all day; but got nothing nearer the Iſland. Our Moskito ſtrikers according to their cuſtom went out and ſtruck 6 Turtles; for here are indifferent plenty of them. Theſe Ships that 99 Cruiſings. that we took the day before we came from Guancha- Añ.1684 quo, were all 3 laden with Flower; bound for Panama. Two of them were laden as deep as they could fwim ; the other was not above halfladen; but was ordered by the Vice-Roy of Lima to fail with the other two, or elſe ſhe ſhould not fail till we were gone out of the Seas : for he hoped they night eſcape us by ſetting out early. In the biggeſt Ship was a Letter to the Preſident of Panama from the Vice-Roy of Lima ; aſſuring him, that there were Enemies come into that Sea: for which reaſon he had diſpatched theſe three Ships with Flower, that they might not want; (for Panama is ſupplied frorn Peru ; ) and deſired him to be frugal of it, for he knew not when he ſhould ſend more. In this Ship were likewiſe 7 or 8 Tuns of Marmalate of Quinces; and a ſtately Mule ſent to the Preſident, and a very large Image of the Virgin Mary in Wood, Carved and Painted, to adorn a new Church at Panama, and fent from Lima by the Vice-Roy; for this great Ship came from thence not long before. She brought alſo from Lima 800000 pieces of Eight to carry with her to Pa- nama: but while ſhe lay at Guanchaquo, taking in her lading of Flower, cheMerchants hearing of C.Swan's being at Baldivia, ordered the Money aſhore again. Theſe Priſoners likewiſe informed us that the Gen- tlemen (Inhabitants of Truxillo) were building a Fort atGuanchaquo (which is the Sea Port for Truxillo) cloſe by the Sea; purpoſely to hinder the deſigns of any that ſhould attempt to land there. Upon this news we altered our former reſolutions, and reſol- ved to go with our three Prizes to the Gallapagos : which are a great many large Iſlands, lying fome under the Equator, others on each ſide of it. I ſhall here omit the deſcription of Truxillo: becauſe in niy Appendix at the latter end of the Book, I intend to give a general Relation of moſt of the Towns of note on this Coaſt, from Baldicia to Panama; and from thence towards California. H2 The IOO Ines of the Gallapagos. An. 1684 The 19th day in the evening we failed from the Iſland Lobos, with Captain Eaton in our Company. We carried the 3 Flower Prizes with us, but our firſt Prize laden with Timber, we left here at an Anchor; the Wind was at S. by E. which is the common Trade-wind here, and we ſteered away N. W. by N. intending to run into the lacitude of the Iſles of Gallapagos, and ſteer off Weſt, becauſe we did not know the certain diſtance, and therefore could not ſhape a direct courſe to them. When we came within 40 minutes of the Equator, we fteer- ed Weft, having the wind at South, a very mode- rate gentle gale. It was the 31ſt day of May when we firft had light of the Iſlands Galapagos: Some of them appeared on our Weather-bow, fome on our Lee-bow, others right a Head. We at firft fight trimm'd our Sails, and ſteered as nigh the Wind as we could, ſtriving to get to the Southermoſt of them, but our Prizes being deep laden, their Sails but ſmall and thin, and a very ſmall Gale, they could not keep up with us; therefore we likewiſe edged away again, a point from the Wind to keep near them; and in the evening the Ship that I was in, and Captain Eaton, Anchored on the Eaſt ſide of one of the Eaſtermoft Ilands, a mile from the fhore, in ſixteen fathom Water, clean, white, hard Sand. The Gallapagos Ilands are a great number of un- inhabited Iſlands, lying under, and on both ſides of the Equator. The Eaſtermoſt of them are about 110 leagues from the Main. They are laid down in the longitude of 181, reaching to the Weſtward as far as 176, therefore their longitude from England Weftward is about 68 deg. But I believe our Hy. dographers do not place them far enough to the Weſtward.The Spaniards who firſt diſcovered them, and in whoſe drafts alone they are laid down, re- port them to be a great number, ſtretching North- Weſt و IoT Dildo-tree. Burton-wood. Weſt from the line, as far as 5 degrees N. but we An. 1684 ſaw not above 14 or 1s. They are ſome of them 7 or 8 leagues long, and 3 or 4 broad. They are of a good heighth, moſt of them flat and even on the top; 4 or 5 of the Eaſtermoft are rocky, barren, 5 and hilly, producing neither Tree, Herb, nor Grafs, but'a few Dildo-trees, except by the Sea ſide. The Dildo-tree is a green prickly ſhrub, that grows a- bout 10 or 12 foot high, without either Leaf or Fruit. It is as big as a mans Leg from the root to the top, and it is full of ſharp prickles, growing in thick rows from top to bottom: This ſhrub is fit for no uſe, not ſo much as to burn. Cloſe by the Sea there growsin ſome places Buſhes of Burton-wood, which is very good firing. This fort of Wood grows in many places in the Weſt Indies, eſpecially in the Bay of Campeachy, and in the Sambaloes . I did never fee any in theſe Seas but here. There is Water on theſe barren Iſlands, in ponds and holes among the Rocks: Some other of theſe Iſlands are moſtly plain and low, and the Land more fertile; producing Trees of divers forts, unknown to us. Some of the Weſtermoft of theſe Iſlands, are 9 or 10 leagues long, and 6 or 7 broad; the Mould deep and black. Theſe produce Trees of great and tall bo- dies, eſpecially Mammee-trees, which grow herein great Groves. In theſe large Iſlands there are ſome pretty big Rivers; and on many of the other leſſer Iſlands, there are Brooks of good Water. The Spa- niards when they firſt diſcovered theſe Iſlands, found multitudes of Guanoes, and Land-turtle or Tortoiſe, and named them the Gallapago's Iſlands. I do be- lieve there is no place in the World, that is fo plentifuly ſtored with theſe Animals. The Gua- noes here, are as fat and large, as any that I ever ſaw; they are ſo tame, that a man may knock down 2o in an hours time with a club. The Land-turtle are here ſo numerous, that s or 600 men might fubfift H3 102 Land-Tortoiſe, their Kinds. n.1684 fubfiſt on them alone for feveral months, without a- ny other fort of Proviſion: They are extraordinary large and fat, and ſo ſweet, that no Pullet eats more pleafantly. One of the largeſt of theſe Creatures will weigh iso or 200 weight, and ſome of them are 2 foot, or 2 foot 6 inches over the Gallapee or Belly. I did never ſee any but at this place, that will weigh above 30 pound weight. I have heard that at the Iſle of St. Lawrence or Madagaſcar, and at the Engliſh Foreſt, an Iland near it, called alſo Don Maſcarin, and now poſſeſſed by the French; there are very large ones, but whether fo big, fat, and ſweet as theſe, I know not. There are 3 or 4 forts of theſe Creatures in the Weſt Indies. One is called by the Spaniards, Hecatee; theſe live moſt in freſh Water- ponds, and ſeldom come on Land. They weigh about 10 or 15 pound; they have ſmall Legs and flat Feet, and ſmall long Necks. Another Tort is called Terapen, theſe are a great deal leſs than the Hecatee; the ſhell on their Backs is all carved natu- rally, finely wrought and well clouded ; the Backs of theſe are rounder than thoſe before mentioned ; they are otherwiſe much of the ſame form: theſe delight to live in wet ſwampy places, or on the Land near fuch places. Both theſe forts are very good Meat. They are in great plenty on the Iſle of Pines near Cuba: there the Spaniſh Hunters when they meet them in the Woods bring them home to their Huts, and mark them by notching their ſhells, then let them go; this they do to have them at hand, for they never ramble far from thence. When theſe Hunters return to Cuba, after about a month or fix weeks ſtay they carry with them 3 or 400,or more, of thefe Creatures to fell; for they are very good Meat, and every man knows his own by their Marks. Theſe Tortoiſe in the Gallapagos are more like the Hecatee, except that, as I ſaid before, they are much bigger ; and they have very long ſmall Necks, a و a Sea-Tortoiſe, and their Kinds. 103 Necks and little Heads. There are ſome greenSnakes An.1684 on theſe Iſlands, but no other Land Animal that I did ever ſee. There are great plenty of Turtle- Doves ſo tame, that a man may kill 5 or 6 dozen in a forenoon with a ſtick. They are ſomewhat leſs than aPigeon, and are very good meat, and commonly fat. There are good wide Channels between theſe Iſlands fit for Ships to paſs; and in ſome places ſhole Water, where there grows plenty of Turtle-graſs therefore theſe Iſlands are plentifully ſtored with Sea turtle : of that ſort which is called the Green- Turtle : I have hitherto deferred the Deſcription of thefe Creatures, therefore I ſhall give it here. There are 4 ſorts of Sea-turtle, viz. the Trunk turtle, the Loggerhead, the Hawksbill, and the Green Turtle. The Trunk-turtle is commonly bigger than the o- ther, their backs are higher and rounder, and their fleſh rank, and not wholſom. The Loggerhead is ſo called, becauſe it hach a great head, much bigger thanı the other forts; their fleſh is likewiſe very rank, and ſeldom eaten but in caſe of neceſſity; they feed on Mofs that grows about Rocks. The Hawksbill Tur- tle is the leaſt kind; they are ſo called becauſe their mouths are long and fmall, fomewhat reſembling the Bill of a Hawk : On the backs of theie Hawks- bill Turtle grows that ſhell which is ſo much efteem- ed for making Cabinets, Combs, and other things. The largeſt of them may have 3 pound and an half of hell, I have taken fome that have had 3 pound Io ounces; but they commonly have a pound and half, or 2 pound; fome not ſo much : theſe are but ordinary food, but generally ſweeter than the Loggerhead : yet theſe Hawksbills in ſome places are unwholſome, cauſing them that eat them to purge and vomit exceſſively, eſpecially thoſe be- tween the Samboloes and Portabel. We meet with other Fiſh in the Weſt Indies of the ſame malignant nature ; but I ſhall deſcribe them in the Appendix. Theſe HawksbillTurtles are better or worſe accord- 3 H4 ing i 104 Sea-Tortoiſe, and their Kinds. 113,1684ing to their feeding. In ſome places they feed on Graſs, as the green Tortoiſe alſo doth; in other places they keep among Rocks, and feed on Moſs or Sca Weads : but theſe are not ſo ſweet as thoſe that eat Graſs, neither is their Shell ſo clear, for they are commonly overgrown with Barnacles , which ſpoils the Shell ; and their fleſh is common- ly yellow, eſpecially the fat. Hawksbill Turtle are in many places of the Weſt Indies. They have Iſlands and places peculiar to themſelves where they lay their Eggs and ſeldom come among any other Tur- tle. There and all other Turtle layEggs in the Sand in N. lat. their time of laying is in May, June, July, in. S. lat. about Chriſtmas, fome begin tooner, fome later : They lay three times in a ſeaſon, and at each time 80 or 90 Eggs. Their Eggs are as big as a Hens Egg, and very round, covered only with a white tough skin. There are ſome Bays on the North ſide of Famaica, where theſe Hawksbills re- fort to lay. In the Bays of Honduras are Iſlands which they likewiſe make their breeding places and many places along all the Coaſt on the Main of the Weſt Indies, from Trinidado to LaVera Cruz in the Bay of Nova Hiſpania. When a Sea Turtle turns out of the Sea to lay, ſhe is at leaſt an hour before ſhe re- turns again; for ſhe is to go above high water mark, and if it be low water when ſhe comes afhore, the muft reft once or twice, being heavy, before ſhe comes to the place where ſhe lays. When ſhe hath found a place for her purpoſe, ſhe makes a great hole with her Fins in the Sands, wherein ſhe lays her Eggs, then covers them 2 foot deep with the ſame fand which he threw out of the hole, and to re- turns : fometimes they come up the night before they intend to lay and take a view of the place and ſo having made a Tour, or Semicircular March, they return to the Sea again,and they never fail to come aihore the next night, to lay near that place. All á a - Sea. Tortoiſe, and their Kinds. 105 All ſorts of Turtle uſe the ſame methods in laying. An.1684 I knew a Man in Famaica that made 8 pound Ster. ling of the Shell of theſe Hawksbill Turtle which he got in one Seaſon, and in one ſmall Bay, not half a mile long. The manner of taking them is, to watch the Bay, by walking from one part to the other all night; making no noiſe, nor keeping any fort of light. When the Turtle come afhore, the Man that watches for them turns them on their backs, then hales them above high water mark,and leaves them till the morning. A large green Turtle with her weightand ſtruggling will puzzle 2 men to turn her. The HawksbillTurtle are not only found in the Weſt Indies, but on the Coaſt of Guinea, and in the Eaſt Indies: I never ſaw any in the S. Seas The Green Turtle are ſo called, becauſe their ſhell is greener than any other. It is very thin and clear,and better clowded than the Hawksbill: but 'tis uſed only for inlays, being extraordinary thin. Theſe Turtles are generally larger than the Hawksbill : One will weigh 2 or 300 pound: Their backs are flatter than the Hawksbill, their Heads round and ſmall. Green Turtle are the ſweeteſt of all the kinds : But there are degrees of them, both in re- fpect to their fleſh and their bigneſs. I have ob- ſerved that at Blanco in the Weſč Indies the Green Turtle (which is the only kind there) are larger chan any other in the North Seas. There they commonly will weigh 280 or 300 pound: Their Far is Yellow, and the Lean white, and their fleſh extraordinary ſweet. At Bocca Toro Weſt of Portobel they are not ſo la:ge, their deſh not ſo white ; nor the Fat fo Yellow. Thoſe in the Bays of Honduras and Campeachy are ſomewhat finaller ſtill, their Fat is green, and the Lean of a darker colour than thoſe at Boca Toro. I heard of a monſtrous green Turtle once taken at Port Royal in the Bay of Campeachy, that was 4 foot deep from the back to the belly, and 106 Sea-Tortoiſe, and their Kinds. 4n,1684, and the belly 6 foot broad : Capt. Rocky's Son of about 9 or 1o years of Age when in it, as in a boat, on board his Father's Ship about a quarter of a mile from the ſhore. The leaves of Fat afforded 8 Gal- lons of Oyl. The Turtle that live among the Keys or ſmall Inands on the South ſide of Cuba, are a mixt fort, ſome bigger ſome leſs; and ſo their fleſh is of a mixt colour, ſome green, fome dark, fome yellowiſh. With theſe Port Royal in Jamaica is conítantly ſupplied, by Sloops that come hither with Nets to take them. They carry them alive to Jamaica, where the Turtles have wires made with ſtakes in the Sea to preſerve them alive : and the Marker is every day plentifully ſtored with Turtle, it being the common food there, chiefly for the or- dinary ſort of people. Green Turtle live on Graſs which grows in the Sea, in 3, 4, 5, or 6 fathom water at moſt of the places before mentioned. This Graſs is different from Manatee Grafs; for that is a ſmall blade : but this a quarter of an inch broad and 6 inches long. The Turtle of theſe Iſlands Gallapagos, are a ſort of a baſtard green Turtle ; for their ſhell is thicker than other green Turtle in the Weſt or Eaſt Indies, and their fleſh is not fofweet. They are larger than any othergreen Turtle ; for it is common for theſe to be 3 or 4 foot deep, and their Gallapees, or bellies s foot wide: but there are other greenTurtle in the South Seas that are not ſo big as the ſmalleſt Hawks- bill. Theſe are ſeen at the Iſland Plata, and other places thereabouts : They feed on Moſs, and are very rank, but fat. But theſe forts are different from any others : For both He's and She's come aſhore in the day time, and lye in the Sun ; but in other places none but the She's go aſhore, and that in the night only, to lay their Eggs : The beſt feeding for Turtle in the South Seas is among theſe Gallapago Iſlands; for here is plenty of Graſs. There a 107 Sea. Tortoiſe, and their Kinds. There is another fort of Green Turtle in the An.1684 South Seas, which are but ſmall , yet pretty ſweet : Theſe lye Weſtward on the Coaſt of Mexico . One thing is very ſtrange and remarkable in theſe Crea. tures; that at the breeding time they leave for 2 or 3 months their common haunts where they feed moſt of the year, and reſort to other places, only to lay their Eggs: And 'tis not thought that they eat any thing during this ſeafon : fo that both He's and She's grow very lean ; but the He's to that de- gree that none will eat them. The moſt remarka- ble places that I did ever hear of for their breeding is at an Iſland in the Weſt Indies called Caimanes, and the Iſle Aſcention in the Weſtern Ocean : and when the breeding time is paſt there is none remaining.Doubt- leſs they ſwim ſome hundreds of leagues to come to thoſe 2 places: For it hath been often obſer- ved that at Caimanes, at the breeding time, there are found all thoſe forts of Turtle before deſcribed. The South Keys of Cuba are above 40 leagues from thence ; which is the neareſt place that theſe Crea- tures can come from: and it is moſt certain, that there could not live ſo many there as come here in one feafon. Thoſe that go to lay at Aſcention muſt needs travel much farther; for there is no Land nearer it than 300 Leagues : And it is certain that theſe Crea- tures live always near the ſhore. In the South Sea likewife theGallapagos is the place where theylive the biggeft part of the year ; yet they go from thence at their Seafon over to the Main, to lay their Eggs; which is 100 Leagues, the neareſt place. Altho multitudes of theſe Turtles go from their common places of feeding and abode, to thoſe laying places, yet they do not all go : And at the time when the Turtle reſort to thele places to lay their Eggs, they are accompanied with abundance of Filh, eſpecially Sharks; the places which the Turtle then leave be-, ing 108 The weather at the Gallapagos. An. 1 684 ing at that time deſtitute of Filh, which follow the Turtle. When the She's go thus to their places to lay, the Male accompany them, and never leave them till their return : Both Male and Female are Fat tlie beginning of the Seaſon; but before they return, the Male, as I faid, are ſo lean that they are not fit to eat; but the Female are good to the very laſt : Yet not fo Fat as at beginning of the Seaſon. It is reported of theſe Creatures, that they are 9 days engendring, and in the Water; the Male on the Females back. It is obſervable that the Male while engendring do not eaſily forſake their Fe- male: For I have gone and taken hold of the Male when engendring: and a very bad ſtriker may ſtrike them then : for the Male is not ſhie at all, but the Female ſeeing a Boat, when they riſe to blow, would make her eſcape, but that the Male graſps her with his 2 fore Fins, and holds her faſt. When they are thus coupled it is beſt to ſtrike the Female firſt, then you are ſure of the Male alſo. Theſe Creatures are thought to live to a great Age ; and it is obſerved by the Famaica Turtlers, that they are many years before they come to their full growth. The air of theſe Iſlands is temperate enough con- fidering the Clime. Here is conſtantly a freſh Sea breeze all Day,and cooling refreſhing winds in the Night : Therefore the heat is not ſo violent here, as in moſt places near the Equator. The time of the Year for the Rains is in November, December, and fanuary. Then there is oftentimes exceſſive dark Tempeſtuous weather, mixt with much Thunder and Lightning. Sometimes before and after theſe Months there are moderate refreſhing Showers; but in May, June, July, and Auguſt the weather is always very fair. We ſtaid at one of theſe Iſands, which lies under the Equator, but one night ; becauſe our prizes could 2 a The Soil, &c. 109 could not get into an anchor. We refreſht our An.1684 ſelves very well, both with Land and Sea Turtle : and the next day we failed from thence. The next Illand of the Gallapagos that we came to is but 2 leagues from this: "Tis Rocky and Barren like this; it is about 5 or 6 leagues long, and 4 broad. We anchored in the Afternoon, at the North fide of the Iſland, a quarter of a mile from the ſhore, in 16 fathom water. It is freep all round this Iſland and no Anchoring only at this place. Here it is but ordinary riding, for the ground is ſo ſteep, that if an anchor ſtarts it never holds again; and the wind is commonly off from the Land, except in the night, when the Land wind comes more from the Weſt; for there it blows right along the ſhore, though but faintly. Here is no water but in Ponds and holes of the Rocks. That which we firft an- chored ar hath water on the North end ; falling down in a ſtream from high ſteep Rocks, upon the ſandy Bay, where it may be taken up. As ſoon as we came to an anchor, we made a Tent aſhore for Captain Cook, who was ſick. Here we found theSea Turtle lying aſhore on the Sand: this is not cuſto- mary in the Weſt Indies. We curned them on their backs that they might not get away. The next day more came up; when we found it to be their cuftom to lye in the Sun : fo we never took care to turn them afterwards; but fent alhore the Cook every morning, who kill'd as many as fervid for the day: This cuſtom we obſerv'd all the time we lay here; feeding fometimes on Land Turtle, ſometimes on Sea Turtle, there being plenty of either fort. Cap- tain Davis came hither again a ſecond time; and then he went to other Iſlands on the Weſt ſide of theſe. There he found ſuch plenty of Land Turtle, that he and his men eat nothing elſe for 3 months that he ſtaid there. They were lo fat that he ſaved 60 Jars of Oyl out of thoſe that he ſpent : This Oy 110 S. Cocos-Iland An.1684 Oyl ſerved inſtead of Butter to eat with Dough- boys with Dumplins, in his return out of theſe Seas. He found very convenient places to Careen, and good Channels between the Iſlands; and very good Anchoring in many places. There he found alſo plenty of brooks of good freſh water; and fire- wood enough: there being plenty of Trees fit for many uſes. Captain Harris , one that we ſhall ſpeak of hereafter, came hither likewiſe; and found ſome Iſlands that had plenty of Mammee-trees, and pretty Targe Rivers. The Sea about theſe Iſlands is plenti- fully ſtored with Filh, ſuch as are at John Fernando They are both large, and fat; and as plentiful here as at John Fernando's : Here are particularly abun, dance of Sharks. The North part of this ſecond Ille we anchor'd at lyes 28 minutes North of the Equa. tor. I took the heighth of the Sun with an Aſtro- labe. Theſe Iſles of the Gallapago's have plenty of Salt. We ſtay'd here but 12 days; in which time we put aſhore sooo packs of Flower, for a reſerve, if we ſhould have occaſion of any before we left theſe Seas. Here one of our Indian Priſoners informed us that he was born at Rea Leja, and that he would en- gage to carry us thither. He being'examin d of the ſtrength and riches of it, fatisfy'd the Company fo well, that they were reſolv'd to go thither. Having thus concluded; the 12th of June we failed from hence, deſigning to touch at the Iſland Cocos, as well to put aſhore ſome Flower there, as to ſee the Iſland, becauſe it was in our way to Ren Leja. We ſteer'd North, till in Lat. 4 d. 40 min. intending then to ſteer W. by N.; for we expected to have had the Wind at S. by E. or S. S. E. as we had on the South ſide of the Equator. Thus I had formerly found the winds near the ſhore in theſe la- titudes: but when we firſt parted from the Gallapa- gos, we had the Wind at S. and as we failed far- ther North we had the Winds at S. by W. then at S.S. W. Cape Blanco. S. S.W., Winds which we did not expect. We An1684 thought at firſt that the Wind would come about a- gain to the South; but when we came to fail off Weſt to the Iſland Cocos, we had the Wind at S. W. by S. and could lye but W.by N. Yet we ftood that courſe till we were in the lat. 5 d. 40 m. North; S . and then deſpairing, as the Winds were, to find the Iſland Cocos, we ſteer'd over to the Main; for had we ſeen the Illand then we could not have fetcht it, being ſo far to the North of it. The Iland Cocos is ſo named by the Spaniards, becauſe there are abundance of Coco-nut Trees growing on it. They are not only in one or two places, but grow in great Groves, all round the Iſland, by the Sea. This is an uninhabited Illand, it is 7 or 8 leagues round, and pretty high in the mid- dle, where it is deftitute of Trees, but looks very green and pleaſant, with an Herb called by the Spaniards Gramadel. It is low Land by the Sea fide. This Iſland is in 5 d. 15 m. North of the Equator; it is environed with Rocks, which makes it almoſt inacceſlibie: only at the N. E. end there is a ſmall Harbor where Ships may fafely enter and ride fe- cure. In this Harbour there is a fine Brook of freih Water running into the Sea. This is the account that the Spaniards give of it, and I had the ſame alſo from Captain Eaton, who was there afterward. Any who like us had not experienced the nature of the Winds in theſe parts, might reaſonably ex- pect that we could have failed with a flown ſheer to Rea Leja; but we found ourſelves miſtaken, for as we came nearer the ſhore, we found the winds right in our Teeth; but I shall refer my Reader to the Chapter of Winds, in the Appendix, for a further account of this. We hedivery fair weather and finall winds in this Voyage from the Gallapagos, and at the beginning of Fuly we fell in with Cape Blanco, on the Main of Mexico. a II2 Caldera-Bay. An.1684 Mexico. This is ſo called from two white Rocks ly- ing off it. When we are off at Sea,right againſt the Cape, they appear as part of the Cape; but being near the ſhore, either to the Eaſtward or Weſtward of the Cape, they appear like two Ships under fail, at firſt view, but coming nearer, they are like two high Towers; they being ſmall, high, and ſteep on all fides, and they are about half a mile from the Cape. This Cape is in lat 9 d. 56 m. It is about the height of Beachy-head in England, on the Coaſt of Siſſeść . It is a full point, with freep Rocks to the Sea. The top of it is flat and even for about a mile; then it gradually falls away on each ſide with a gentle defcent. It appears very pleaſant, being co- vered with great lofty Trees.From the Cape on the N. W. fide the land runs in N.E.for about 4. leagues, making a ſmall Bay called by the Spaniards Calderd. A league within Cape Blanco, on the N. W. fide of it, and at the entrance of this Bay, there is a ſmall Brook of very good water running into theSea.Here the land is low, making a fadling between 2 ſmall Hills. It is very rich Land, producing large tall Trees of many forts ; the Mold is black and deep, which I have always taken notice of to be a fat foil. About a mile from this Brook towards the N. E.the Wood land terminates. Here the Savan- nah land begins, and runs fome leagues into the Country, making many fmall Hills and Dales.Thefe Savannahs are not altogether clear of Trees, but are here and there ſprinkled with ſmall Groves, which render them very delightful. The Graſs which grows here is very kindly, thick and long ; I have ſeen none better in the Weſt Indies. Toward the bottom of the Bay the Land by the Sea is low and full of Mangroves, but farther in the Country the Land is high and mountainous. The Mountains are part Woodland, part Savannah. The Trees in thoſe Woods are but ſmall and ſhort ; and the Mountain a a Cape Blanco and Caldera Baya 113 Mountain Savannahs are cloached but with indiffe- An. 1634 rent Graſs . From the bottom of this Bay, it is but 14 or is leagues to the Lake of Nicaragua, on the North-Sea Coaft: the way between is ſomewhat Mountanous, but moſt Savannah. Captain Cook, who was taken fick at Fohn Fernana does, continued fo till we caine within 2 or 3 leagues 3 of Cape Blanco, and then dy'd of a ſudden ; tho’ he ſeemed that morning to be as likely to live, as he had been ſome weeks before; but it is uſual witli fick Men coming from the Sea, where they have nothing but the Sea-Air, to die off as ſoon as ever they come within the view of the Land. About 4 hours after we all came to an Anchor, (namely the Ship that I was in, Captain Eaton, and the great Meal-Prize,) a league within the Cape, right a- gainſt the Brook of Freſh-water, in 14 fathom clean hard Sand. Preſently after we came to an Anchor, Captain Cook was carried aſhore to be buried ; 12 Men carried their Arms to guard thoſe that were ordered to dig the Grave; for although we ſaw no appearance of Inhabitants, yet we did not know but the Country might be thick inhabited. And before Captain Cook was interr'd, 3 Spaniſh Indians came to the place where our Men were digging the Grave, and demanded what they were, and from whence they came? To whom our Men an- ſwered, they came from Lima, and were bound to Rea Lejo, but that the Captain of one of the Ships dying at Sea, oblig'd them to come into this place to give him Chriſtian burial. The 3 Spaniſh Indians, : who were very ſhy at firſt, began to be more bold, and drawing nearer, asked many filly queſtions, and our Men did not ſtick to footh them up with as many falfhoods, purpoſely to draw them into their clutches. Our Men often Laught at their temerity, and asked them if they never ſaw any Spaniards be- fore. They told them, that they themſelves were I I Spa- a Nicoya. 42.1684 Spaniards, and that they lived among Spaniards, and that altho' they were born there, yet they had never ſeen 3 Ships there before: Our Men told them, that neither now might they have ſeen ſo many, if it had not been on an urgent occaſion. At length they drill'd them by diſcourſe ſo near, that our Men lay'd hold on all three at once; but before Captain Cook was buried, one of them made his eſcape, the other two were brought off aboard our Ship. Cap- tain Eaton immediately came aboard, and examin'd them; they confeſſed they came purpoſely to view our Ship, and if poſſible, to inform themſelves what we were; for the Preſident of Panama not long before, ſent a Letter of Advice to Nicoya, in- forming the Magiſtrates thereof, that ſome Enemies were come into theſe Seas, and that therefore it behoved them to be careful of themſelves. Ni- coya is a ſmall Mulatto Town, about 12 or 13 leagues Eaft from hence, ſtanding on the Banks of a River of that name. It is a place very fit for building Ships, therefore moſt of the Inhabitants are Carpenters; who are commonly employed in building new, or repairing old Ships. It was here that Captain Sharp, (juſt after I left him, in the year 1681,) got Car- penters to fix his Ship, before he returned for En- gland : and for that reaſon it behoved the Spaniards to be careful, ( according to the Governor of Panama's advice, ) left any Men at other times wanting ſuch neceſſaries as that place afforded, might again be fupply'd there. Theſe Spaniſh Indians told us likewiſe, that they were ſent to the place where they were ta- ken, in order to view our Ships, as fearing theſe were thoſe mention'd by the Preſident of Panama: It being demanded of them to give an account of the Eftate and Riches of the Country, they ſaid, that the Inhabitants were most Husbandmen, who were imployed either in Planting and Manuring of Corn, or chiefly about Cattle; they having large Savan- nahs, 115 Red-wood. nahs, which were well ſtored with Bulls, Cows, An. 1684 and Horſes: that by the Sea-ſide in ſome places, there grew fome Red-wood, uſeful in Dying; of this they faid there was little profit made, becauſe they were forced to ſend it to the Lake of Nicaragua, which runs into the North Seas: that they fent thi- ther alſo great quantities of Bull and Cow Hides, and brought from thence in exchange Europe Com- modities i as Hats, Linnen, and Woollen, where- with they clothed themſelves; that the Fleſh of the Cattle turned to no other profit than ſuſtenance for their Families; as for Butter and Cheeſe, they make but little in thoſe parts. After they had gi- ven this Relation, they told us, that if we wanted Proviſion, there was a Beef-eftantion, or Farm of Bulls or Cows about 3 Mile off, where we might kill what we pleas’d. This was welcom News, for we had no fort of Fleſh ſince we left the Gallapa- gos; therefore 24 of us immediately entered into two Boats, taking one of theſe Spaniſh Indians with us for a Pilot, and went alhore about a league from the Ship. There we haled up our Boats dry, and marched all away, following our Guide, who foon brought us to ſome Houſes, and a large Pen for Cattle. This Pen ftood in a large Savannah, about 2 mile from our Boats: There were a great many fat Bulls and Cows feeding in the Savannahs: fome of us would have killed 3 or 4 to carry on board, but others oppoſed it, and ſaid it was better to ſtay all night, and in the morning drive the Cattle into the Pen, and then kill 20 or 30, or as many as we pleas’d, I was minded to return aboard, and endeavour à to perſuade them all to go with me, but ſome would not; therefore I return’d with 12, which was half, and left the other 12 behind. At this place I ſaw 3 or 4 Tun of the Red-wood, which I take to be that ſort of Wood, call'd in Fa- maica Blood-wood, or Nicaragua-wood. We who 1 2 a return- 116 A narrow Eſcape of 12 Men. An.1684 returned aboard, met no one to oppoſe us, and the next day we expected our Conforts that we left a- fhoar, but none came; therefore at 4 a clock in the afternoon, 10 Men went in our Canoa to ſee what was become of them : When they came to the Bay where we landed, to go to the Eftantion, they found our Men all on a ſmall Rock, half a mile from the Shoar, ftanding in the Water up to their Waftes. Theſe Men had ſlept a ſhoar in the houſe, and turned out betimes in the morning to pen the Cattle : 2 or 3 went one way, and as many another way to get the Cattle to the pen, and other's ſtood at the Pen to drive them in. When they were thus ſcatter'd about 40 or so armed Spaniards came in among them : Our Men immediately call'd to each other, and drew together in a body before the Spa- niards could attack them; and march'd to their Boat, which was hall d up dry on the Sand. But when they came to the Sandy Bay they found their Boat all in flames. This was a very unpleaſing ſight, for they knew not how to get aboard, unleſs they march'd by Land to the place where Captain Cook was buried, which was near a League. The greateſt part of the way was thick Woods, where the Spa- niards might eally lay an Ambuſh for them, at which they are very expert. On the other ſide, the Spani- ards now thought them fecure; and therefore came to them, and ask'd them if they would be pleas'd to walk to their Plantations, with many other fuch Flouts; but our Men anſwer'd never a word. It was about half ebb, when one of our Men took no- tice of a Rock a good diſtance from the ſhoar, juſt appearing above Water; he ſhew'd it to his Con- forts, and told them it would be a good Caſtle for them if they could get thither. They all wiſh'd themſelves there ; for the Spaniards, who lay as yet at a good diſtance from them behind the Buſhes, as ſecure of their prey, began to whiſtle now and then a a a ſhot A narrow Eſcape of 12 Men. 117 a ſhot among them. Having therefore well conſi- A2.1684 der'd the place, together with the danger they were in, they propoſed to ſend one of the talleſt Men to try if the Sea between them and the Rock were fordable: This counſel they preſently put in execu- tion, and found it according to their deſire. So they all march'd over to the Rock, where they re- main till the Canoa came to them; which was a- bout 7 hours. It was the latter part of the Ebb when they firſt went over, and then the Rock was dry; but when the Tyde of Flood returned again, the Rock was cover'd, and the Water ſtill flowing ; ſo that if our Canoa had ſtay'd but one hour longer, they might have been in as great danger of their lives from the Sea, as before from the Spaniards ; for the Tyde riſeth here about 8 foot. The Spaniards remained on the ſhoar, expecting to ſee them de- ſtroy'd, but never came from behind the Buſhes where they firſt planted themſelves; they having not above 3 or 4 Hand-guns, the reſt of them being arm’d with Lances. The Spaniards in theſe parts are very expert in heaving or darting the Lance; with which, upon occaſion, they will do great feats, eſpecially in Ambuſcades, and by their good will they care not for fighting otherwiſe, but content themſelves with ſtanding aloof, threatning and cal- ling Names, at which they are as expert as the other; ſo that if their Tongues be quiet, we always take it for granted they have laid fome Ambuſh. Before night our Canoa came aboard, and brought our Men all ſafe. The next day two Canoas were ſent to the bottom of the Bay too ſeek for a large Canoa, which we were inform'd was there. The Spaniards have neither Ships nor Barks here, and but a few Canoas, which they feldom uſe: neither are there any Fiſher-men here, as I judge, becauſe Fiſh is very ſcarce; for I never ſaw any here, neither could any of our Men ever take any ; and yet where ever I 3 we 118 Lance-wood. An. 1684 We come to an Anchor, we always ſend out our Strikers, and put out our Hooks and Lines over- board, to try for Fiſh. The next day our Men re- turn'd out of the Bay, and brought the Canoa with them which they were fent for; and 3 or 4 days afterward the 2 Canoas were fent out again for ano- ther, which they likewiſe brought aboard. Thele Canoas were fitted with Thoats or Benches, Straps, and Oars, fit for ſervice; and one of theſe Captain Eaton had for his ſhare, and we the other, which we fixt for landing Men when occaſion required. While we lay here we filled our Water, and cut a great many Loonis, or Handles, or Staves for Oars; for here is plenty of Lance-wood, which is moft proper for that uſe. I never ſaw any in the South Seas, but in this place: there is plenty of it in Jamaica, eſpe- cially at a place calld Blewfields, (not Blewfields Ri- ver which is on the Main) near the Weſt end of that Iſland. The Lance-wood grows ſtrait like our young Afhes; it is very hard, tough, and heavy, therefore Privateers eſteem it very much, not only to make Looms for Oars, but Scowring-Rods for their Guns; for they have ſeldom leſs than 3 or 4 ſpare Rods, for fear one ſhould break, and they are much better than Rods made of Aſh. The day before we went from hence, Mr. Edward Davis, the Company's Quarter-Maſter, was made Captain by conſent of all the Company ; for it was his place by Succeſſion. The 20th day of July we failed from this Bay of Caldera, with Captain Eaton, and our Prize which we brought from Gallapagos in company, directing our Courſe for Rea Lejo. The Wind was at North, which although but an ordinary Wind, yet it carried us in three days abreſt of our intended Port. Rea Lejo is the moſt remarkable Land on all this Coaſt, for there is a high peeked burning Moun- tain, call'd by the Spaniards, Volcan-Vejo, or the Old Volcan: 3 . Volcan-Vejo, a burning Mountain. Volcan: This muſt be brought to bare N. E. then Am. 1684 fteer in directly with the Mountain, and that courſe will bring you to the Harbour. The Sea Winds are here at S. S. W. therefore Ships that corne hither muſt take the Sea-winds, for there is no going in with a Land-wind. The Volcan may be eaſily known, becauſe there is not any other ſo high a Mountain near it, neither is there any that appears in the like form all along the Coaſt; beſides it ſmoaks all the day, and in the night it ſometimes fends forth fames of fire. This Mountain may be ſeen 20 leagues : being within 3 leagues of the Harbour, che 3 entrance into it may be feen: There is a finall flat low Iſland which makes the Harbour; it is about a mile long, and a quarter of a mile broad, and is from the Main about a mile and half. There is a Channel at each end of the Iſland; the Weſt Chan- nel is the wideſt and fafeſt, yet at the N.W. point of the Iſland there is a fhole which Ships muſt take heed of in going in. Being paft that shole, you muſt keep clofe to the Iſland, for there is a ſhallow fandy Point Atrikes over from the Main almoſt half way. The Eaſt Channel is not ſo wide, beſides there runs a ſtronger tide; therefore Ships feldom or never go in that way. This Harbour is capable of receiving 200 Sail of Ships: the beſt riding is near the Main, where there is 7 or 8 fathom water, clean hard Sand. Rea Lejo Town is 2 leagues from hence, and there are 2 Creeks that run towards it; the Wetter- moſt comes near the backſide of the Town, the o- ther runs up to the Town, but neither Ships nor Barks can go ſo far. Theſe Creeks are very narrow, and the Land on each ſide drowned, and full of Red Mangrove-trees. About a mile and half below the Town, on the banks of the Eaſt Creek, the Spani- ards had caft up a ſtrong Breaft-work; it was like- wiſe reported they had another on the Weſt Greek, 14 both a I20 Rea Lejo Iſland and Harbour. An.1684. both ſo advantageouſly placed, that 10 Men might with eaſe keep 200 Men from landing. I ſhall give a deſcription of the Town in my return hither, and therefore forbear to do it here. Wherefore to reſume the thread of our courſe, we were now in ſight of the Volcan, being by eſtimation 7 or 8 leagues from the ſhore, and the Mountain bearing N. E. we took in our Topfails, and haľd up our Courſes, intending to go with our Canoas into the Harbour in the night. In the evening we had a very hard Tornado, out of the N. E. with much Thunder, Lightening, and Rain. The violence of the Wind did not latt long, yet it was 11 a-clock at night before we got out our Canoas, and then it was quite calm. We rowed in directly for the ſhore, and thought to have reach'd it before day, but it was 9 a-clock in the morning before we got into the Harbour. When we caine with- in a league of the Iſland of Rea Lejo, that makes the Harbour, we ſaw a Houſe on it, and coming nearer we ſaw 2 or 3 Men, who ſtood and looked on us, till we came within half a mile of the Iſland, then they went into their Canoa, which lay on the in- fide of the Iland, and rowed towards the Main; but we evertook them before they got over, and brought them back again to the Iland. There was a Horſeman right againſt us on the Main when we took the Canoa, who immediately rode away towards the Town as faſt as he could. The reſt of our Canoas rowed heavily, and did not come to the Iſland till 12 a-clock, therefore we were forced to ſtay for them. Before they came, we examined the Priſo- ners, who told us, that they were ſet there to watch, for the Governour of Rea Lejo receiv'd a Letter about a month tefore, wherein he was adviſed of fome Enemies come into the Sea, and therefore admo- niſhed to be careful ; that immediately there- upon the Governour had cauſed a Houſe to be built on this land, and ordered 4 Men to be continually there a a 121 Galf of Amapalla and Point Cafivina. there to watch night and day; and if they ſaw any An. 1684 Ship coming thither, they were to give notice of it. They ſaid they did not expect to ſee Boats or Ca- noas, but lookt out for a Ship. At firſt they took us , in our advanced Canoa to be ſome Men that had been caſt away and loſt our Ship : till ſeeing 3 or 4 Canoas more, they began to ſuſpect what we were. They told us likewiſe, that the Horſeman which we ſaw, did come to them every morning, and that in leſs than an hours time he could be at the Town. When Captain Eaton and his Canoas came aſhore, we told them what had hapned. It was now 3 hours ſince the Horſeman rode away, and we could not expect to get to the Town in leſs than two hours; in which time the Governour having notice of our coming might be provided to receive us at his Breaft-works; therefore we thought it beſt to defer this deſign till another time. There is a fine Spring of freſh water on the Iſland, there are ſome Trees alſo, but the biggeſt part is Savannah, whereon is good graſs, tho there is no fort of Beaſt to eat it.This Iſland is in lat. 12 d. 10 m. North. Here we ſtay'd till 4 a-clock in the after- noon; then our Ships being come within a league of the ſhore, we all went on board, and ſteer'd for the Gulf of Amapalla, intending there to careen our Ships. The 26th of July Captain Eaton came aboard our Ship, to conſult with Captain Davis, how to get ſome Indians to aſſiſt us in careening : It was con- cluded, that when we came near the Gulf, Cap- tain Davis ſhould take two Canoas, well Mann'd, and go before, and Captain Eaton ſhould ſtay aboard. According to this agreement, Captain Davis went away for the Gulf the next day. The Gulf of Amapalla is a great Arm of the Sea, running 8 or 10 leagues into the Country. It is bounded on the South fide of its Entrance with Point 122 Iſles of Mangera and Amapalla. Am. 1684 Point Cafivina, and on the N. W. fide with St. Mi- chaels Mount. Both theſe places are very remarka- ble: Point Caſivina is in lat. 12 d. 40 m. North : It m is a high round Point, which at Sea appears like an Iland; becauſe the Land within it is very low. St. Michaels Mount is a very high peeked Hill , not very ſteep: the Land at the foot of it on the S. E. fide, is low and even, for at leaſt a mile. From this low Land the Gulf of Amapalla enters on that fide. Between this low Land and Point Caſivina, there are two conſiderable high Iſlands; the Souther- moſt is called Mangera, the other is called Amapalla ; and they are two miles aſunder. Mangera is a high round Iſland, about 2 leagues in compaſs, appearing like a tall Grove. It is in- vironed with Rocks all round, only a ſmall Cove, or Sandy Bay on the N. E. ſide. The Mold and Soil of this Iſland is black, but not deep; it is mixt with Stones, yet very productive of large tall Tim- ber-Trees. In the middle of the Iſland there is an Indian Town, and a fair Spaniſh Church. The In- dians have Plantations of Maiz round the Town, and fome Plantains : They have a few Cocks and Hens, but no other fort of tame Fowl; neither have they any ſort of Beaft, but Cats and Dogs. There is a path from the Town to the Sandy Bay, but the way is ſteep and rocky. At this Sandy Bay there are always 10 or 12 Canoas lie haled up dry, except when they are in ufe. Amapalla is a larger Iſland than Mangera; the Soil much the fame. There are two Towns on it, about two miles afunder ; one on the North ſide, the other on the Eaſt fide : That on the Eaſt fide is not above a mile from the Sea; it ſtands on Plain on the top of an Hill, the path to it fo ſteep and rocky, that a few Men might keep down a great number, only with Stones. There is a very fair Church ſtanding in the midſt of the Town. The a a a a a The Hog-Plumb-Tree. 123 The other Town is not ſo big, yet it has a good An.1684 handſome Church. One thing I have obſerved in all the Indian Towns under the Spaniſh Government, as well in theſe parts, as in the Bay of Campeachy, and elſewhere, that the Images of the Virgin Mary, and other Saints, (with which all their Churches were filld) are ſtill painted in an Indian Complexion, and partly in that dreſs; but in thoſe Towns which are ịnhabited chiefly by Spaniards, the Saints alſo con- form themſelves to the Spaniſh garb and complexion. The Houſes here are but mean: the Indians of both places have good Field Maiz, remote from the Town: They have but few Plantains, but they have abundance of large Hog-Plumb-Trees growing about their Houſes. The Tree chat bears this Fruit is as big as our largeſt Plumb-Tree: The Leaf is of a dark green colour, and as broad as the Leaf of a Plumb- Tree; but they are ſhaped like the Haw-thorn Leaf. The Trees are very brittle Wood; the Fruit is oval, and as big as a ſmall Horſe Plumb. It is at firft ve- ry green, but when it is ripe, one ſide is yellow, the other red. It hath a great Stone, and but little ſubſtance about it: the Fruit is pleaſant enough ; but I do not remember that ever I ſaw one through- ly ripe, that had not a Maggot or two in it. I do not remember that I did ever fee any of this Fruit in the South Seas, but at this place. In the Bay of Compeachy they are very plentiful; and in Jamaica they plant them to fence their ground. Theſe Indians have alſo ſome Fowls, as thoſe at Mangera : No Spaniards dwell among them, but only one Padre or Prieſt, who ſerves for all three Towns; theſe two at Amapalla, and that at Mangera. They are under the Governour of the Town of St. Mi- chaels, at the foot of St. Michael's Mount, to whom they pay their Tribute in Maiz; being extremely poor, yet very contented. They have nothing to make Money of, but their Plantations of Maiz and their 124 Other Iſlands in Amapalla Gulph. An. 1684 their Fowls; the Padre or Frier hath his tenths of it, and knows to a Peck how much every Man hath, and how many Fowls of which they dare not kill one, though they are fick, without leave from him. There was (as I ſaid) never another white Man on theſe Iſlands, but the Frier. He could ſpeak the Indian Language, as all Friers muſt that live among them. In this vaſt Country of America, there are divers Nations of Indians, different in their Language, therefore thoſe Friers that are minded to live among any Nation of the Indians, muſt learn the Language of thoſe People they propoſe to teach. Although theſe here are but poor, yet the Indians in many o- ther places have great riches, which the Spaniards draw from them for trifles : in ſuch places the Fri- ers get plentiful incomes; as particularly in the Bay of Champeachy, where the Indians have large Cacao- walks; or in other places where they plant Cocho- neel Trees, or Silveſter Trees; or where they gather Vinelloes, and in ſuch places where they gather Gold. In ſuch places as theſe, the Friers do get a great deal of wealth. There was but one of all the Indians on both theſe Iſlands that could ſpeak Spa- niſh; he could write Spaniſh alſo, being bred up pur- poſely, to keep their Regiſters and Books of Ac- count; he was Secretary to both Iſlands. They had a Cafica too, (a ſmall ſort of Magiſtrate the In- dians have among themſelves,) but he could neither write nor ſpeak Spaniſh. There are a great many more Illands in this Bay, but none inhabited as theſe. There is one pretty large Iſland, belonging to a Nunnery, as the Indians told us, this was ſtocked with Bulls and Cows : there were 3 or 4 Indians lived there to look after the Cattle, for the ſake of which we often fre- quented this Iſland, while we lay in the Bay : they are all low Iſlands, except Amapalla and Mangera. There are 2 Channels to come into this Gulf, a one a Other Iſlands in Amapalla Gulf. 125 one between Po'nt Caſivina and Mangera, the other An. 1684. between Mangera and Amapalla : the latter is the beſt. The Riding-place is on the Eaſt ſide of Ama- palla, right againſt a ſpot of low ground; for all the Iſland, except this one place, is high Land. Run- ning in farther, Ships may anchor near the Main, on the N. E. ſide of the Illand Amapalla. This is the place moſt frequented by Spaniards : it is called the Port of Martin Lopez. This Gulf, or Lake, runs in ſome Leagues beyond all the Iſlands; but it is ſhole Water, and not capable of Ships. It was into this Gulf that Captain Davis was gone with the two Canoas, to endeavour for a Priſoner, to gain intelligence, if poſſible, before our Ships came in: He came the firſt night to Mangera, but for want of a Pilot did not know where to look for the Town. In the morning he found a great many Canoas haled up on the Bay; and from that Bay found a path which led him, and his company, to the Town. The Indians ſaw our Ships in the evening coming towards the Iſland, and being before inform- ed of Enemies in the Sea, they kept Scouts out all Night for fear : who ſeeing Captain Davis coming, run into the Town, and alarm d all the People. When Captain Davis came thither, they all run in- to the Woods. The Fryer happened to be there at this time; who being unable to ramble into the Woods, fell into Captain Davis's hands: There were two Indian Boys with him, who were likewiſe ta- ken. Captain Davis went only to get a Priſoner, therefore was well ſatisfy'd with the Fryer, and im- mediately came down to the Sea fide. He went from thence to the Iland Amapalla, carrying the Fryer and the two Indian Boys with him. Theſe were his Pilots to conduct him to the Landing-place, where they arrivd about Noon. They made no ſtay here, but left 3 or 4 Men to look after the Ca- noas, and Captain Davis, with the reſt, marched to the 126 Other Iſlands in Amapalla Gulph. An. 1684 the Town, taking the Fryer with them. The Town, as is before noted, is about a mile from the Land. ing place, ſtanding in a plain on the top of a hill, having a very ſteep aſcent to go to it. All the Indi- ans ſtood on the top of the hill, waiting Captain Da- vis's coming The Secretary, mention'd before, had no great kindneſs for the Spaniards . It was he that perſuaded the Indians to wait Captain Davis's coming; for they were all running into the Woods; but he told them, that if any of the Spaniards Enemies came thither, it was not to hurt thein, but the Spaniards, whoſe Slaves they were ; and that their Poverty would protect them. This Man with the Cafica ſtood more forward than the reſt, at the bank of the Hill, when Captain Davis with his Company appeared beneath. They calld out therefore in Spaniſh, de- manding of our Men what they were, and from whence they came? to whom Captain Davis and his Men reply'd, they were Biſcayers, and that they were ſent thither by the King of Spain to clear thoſe Seas from Enemies; that their Ships were coming into the Gulf to Careen, and that they come thi- ther before the Ships, to ſeek a convenient place for it, as alſo to deſire the Indians affiftance. The Secretary, who, as I ſaid before, was the only Man that could ſpeak Spaniſh, told them that they were welcome, for he had a great reſpect for any Old Spain Men, eſpecially for the Biſcayers, of whom he had heard a very honourable report; therefore he deſired them to come up to their Town. Captain Davis and his Men immediately afcended the Hill, the Frier going before; and they were received with a great deal of affection by the Indians. The Cefica and Secretary embrac'd Captain Davis, and the other Indians received his Men with the like Ce- remony. Theſe Salutations being ended, they all marched towards the Church, for that is the place of all a a Other Iſlands in Amapalla Gulph. 127 all publick Meetings, and all Plays and Paſtimes are An. 1684 acted there alſo; therefore in the Churches belong- ing to Indian Towns, they have all ſorts of Vizards, and ſtrange antick Drefles both for Men and Wo- men, and abundance of Muſical Hautboys and Strumftrums. The Strumftrum is made fomewhat like a Cittern; moſt of thoſe that the Indians uſe are made of a large Gourd cut in the midſt, and a thin board laid over the hollow, and which is faftned to the ſides: this ferves for the belly; over which the Strings are placed. The rights before any Holidays, or the nights enſuing, are the times when they 211 meet to make merry. Their Mirth conſiſts in fing- ing, dancing, and ſporting in thoſe antick Habits, and uſing as many antick geſtures. If the Moon ſhine they uſe but few Torches, if not the Church is full of light. They meet at theſe times all ſorts of both Sexes. All the Indians that I have been acquainted with, who are under the Spaniards, ſeem to be more me lancholy than other Indians that are free; and at theſe publick Meetings, when they are in the greateſt of their jollity, their Mirch ſeems to be rather forced than real. Their Songs are very melancholy and doleful; fo is their Mufick: but whether it be natu- ral to the Indians to be thus melancholy, or the ef- fect of their Slavery, I am not certain : But I have always -been prone to believe, that they are then only condoling their Misfortunes, the loſs of their Country and Liberties: which altho' theſe that are now living do not know, nor remember what it was to be free, yet there ſeems to be a deep impreſſion in their thoughts, of the Slavery which the Spaniards have brought them under, increas d probably by ſome Traditions of their ancient Freedom. Captain Davis intended when they were all in the Church to ſhut the Doors, and then make a bargain with them, letting them know what he was, and ſo draw them afterwards by fair means to our aſliſtance : the 128 Other Iſlands in Amapalla Gulph. An. 1684 the Frier being with him, who had alſo promis'd to engage them to it: but before they were all in the Church,one of Captain Davis his Men puſht one of the Indians, to haften him into the Church. The Indian immediately ran away; and all the reſt taking ; the alarm, ſprang out of the Church like Deer; it was hard to ſay which was firſt : and Captain Da- vis, who knew nothing of what hapned, was left in the Church only with the Fryer. When they were all fled, Captain Davis's Men fir'd and kill'd the Secretary; and thus our hopes periſhed by the indiſcretion of one fooliſh fellow. In the afternoon the Ships came into the Gulf between Point Caſivina and Mangera, and anchored near the Iſland Amapalla, on the Eaſt ſide, in 10 fa- thom water, clean hard Sand. In the evening Cap- tain Davis and his Company came aboard, and brought the Fryer with them ; who told Captain Davis, that if the Secretary had not been kill'd, he could have ſent him a Letter by one of the Indians that was taken at Mangera, and perſuaded him to come to us; but now the only way was to ſend one of thoſe Indians to ſeek the Cafica, and that himſelf would inſtruct him what to ſay, and did not que- ſtion but the Caſica would come on his word. The next day we ſent afhore one of the Indians, who before night returned with the Caſica and 6 other Indians, who remained with us all the time that we ſtaid here. Theſe Indians did us good ſervice; ef- pecially in pilotting us to an Iſland where we kill'd Beef whenever we wanted; and for this their fer- vice we ſatisfy'd them to their hearts content. It was at this Iſland Amapalla, that a party of Engliſhmen and Frenchmen came afterwards, and Itay'd a great while, and at laſt landed on the Main, and marched over Land to the Cape River, which diſembogues in- to the North Seas near Cape Gratia Dios, and is therefore call’d the Cape River : Near the Head of this The Paſſage along the Cape River. 129 this River they made Bark-logs (which I ſhall An. 1684 deſcribe in the next chapter) and ſo went into the North Seas. This was the way that Captain Sharp had propoſed to go if he had been put to it; for this way was partly known to Privateers by the dif- covery that was made into the Country about 30 years ſince, by a party of Engliſhmen that went up that River in Canoas, about as far as the place where theſe Frenchmen made their Bark-logs: there they landed and march'd to a Town called Segovia in the Country. They were near a month getting up the River, for there are many Cataracts where they were often forced to leave the River, and hale their Canoas afhoar over the Land, 'till they were paſt the Cataracks, and then lanch their Canoas again into the River. I have diſcourſed ſeveral Men that were in that Expedition, and if I miſtake not Captain Sharp was one of them. But to return to our Voyage in hand; when both our Ships were clean, and our Water fillid, Captain Davis and Captain Eaton broke off Confortſhips. Captain Ea- ton took aboard of his Ships 400 Packs of Flower, and failed out of the Gulf the ſecond day of Sep- tember. K СНАР 130 An. 1684 CH A P. VI. They depart from Amapalla. Tornadoes. Cape St. Franciſco. They meet Captain Eaton, and part again. Iſle of Plata deſcribed. Another meeting with Cap. Eaton, and their final part- ing. Point Sancta Helena. Algetrane a ſort of Tar. A Spaniſh Wreck. Cruiſings. Manta near Cape St. Lorenzo. Monte Chriſto. Cruža fongs. Cape Blanco. Payta. The Buildings in Peru. The Soil of Peru. Colan. Bark- logs deſcribed. Piura. The Road of Payta. Lobos de Terra. They come again to Lobos de la Mar. The Bay of Guiaquil. Iſle of Sancta Clara. A rich Spaniſh Wreck there. Cat-fiſh. Point Arena in the Ife Pana. Тbe Iſland deſcribed. The Palmeto-tree. Town and Harbour of Puna. River of Guiaquil. Guiaquil Town. Its Commodities, Cacao, Sarſaparilla, Quito cloth. Of the City, and Gold, and Air of Quito. They enter the Bay in order to make an attempt on the Town of Guiaquil. A great advantage ſlipt that might have been made of a company of Negroes taken in Guiaquil River. They go to Plata again. Ifle Plata. T HE third day of September 1684. we ſent the Frier alhore, and left the Indians in poſſeſſion of the Prize which we brought in hither, though fhe was ſtill half laden with Flower, and we failed out with the Land-Wind, paſſing between Amapalla and Tornadoes. 131 and Mangerd. When we were a league out, we ſaw An.1684 a Canoa coming with Sail and Oars after us; there- fore we ſhortened Sail, and ftaid for her. She was a Canoa ſent by the Governour of St. Michaels Town to our Captain, deſiring him not to carry away the Frier. The Meſſenger being told, that the Frier was ſet aſhore again at Amapalla, he returned with joy, and we made Sail again, having the Wind at W.N. W. We ſteerd towards the Coaſt of Peru : We had Tornadoes every day till we made Cape St. Franciſco, which from June to November are very common on theſe Coaits ; and we had with the Tornadoes very much Thunder, Lightning and Rain. When the Tornadoes were over, the Wind, which while they laſted was moſt from the South Eaſt, came about again to the Weſt, and never failed us till we were in light of Cape St. Franciſco, where we found the Wind at South with fair weather. This Cape is in lat. o 1 d. oo North. It is a high bluff, or full point of Land, clothed with tall great Trees. Paſſing by this Point coming from the North, you will ſee a ſmall low Point, which you might ſuppoſe to be the Cape; but you are then paft it, and preſently after- wards it appears with three Points. The Land in the Country within this Cape is very high, and the Mountains commonly appear very black. When we came in with this Cape, we overtcok Captain Ea- ton, plying under the ſhore: he in his paſſage from Amapalla, while he was on that Coaft, met with ſuch terrible Tornadoes of Thunder and Lightning, that as he and all his Men related, they had never met with the like in any place. They were very much af- frighted by them, the Air ſmelling very much of Sulphur, and they apprehending themſelves in great danger of being burnt by the Lightning. He touch'd at the Iſland Cocos, and put alhore 200 Packs of Flower there, and loaded his Boat with Coco Nuts, and took in freſh-water. In the evening we fepa- rated a K 2 a 132 The Iſle Plata. n.1684 rated again from Captain Eaton; for he ſtood off to Sea, and we plied up under the ſhore, making our beſt advantage both of Sea and Land-winds. The Sea-winds are here at South, the Land-winds at S.S. E. but ſometimes when we came abreaſt of a River, we ſhould have the Wind at S. E. The 20th day of September we came to the Iſland Plata, and anchored in 16 fathom. We had very good Weather from the time that we fell in with Cape St. Franciſco ; and were now fallen in again with the ſame places from whence I begin the ac- count of this Voyage in the firſt Chapter, having now compaft in the whole Continent of the South America. The Illand Plata, as ſome report, was ſo named by the Spaniards, after Sir Francis Drake took the Cacafoga, a Ship chiefly laden with Plate, which they ſay he brought hither, and divided it here with his Men. It is about 4 mile long, and a mile and half broad, and of a good heighth. It is bounded with high ſteep Cliffs clear round, only at one place on the Eaſt ſide. The top of it is flat and even, the Soil ſandy and dry: the Trees it produceth are but ſmall bodied, low, and grow thin; and there are only 3 or 4 forts of Trees all unknown to us. I obſerved they were much overgrown with long Mofs. There is good Graſs, eſpecially in the be- ginning of the Year. There is no Water on this Illand but at one place on the Eaſt fide, cloſe by the Sea; there it drills ſlowly down from the Rocks, where it may be received into Veſſels. There were plenty of Goats, but they are now all deſtroy'd. There is no other fort of Land-Animal that I did ever fee : here are plenty of Boobies and Men of War Birds. The anchoring place is on the Eaſt fide, near the middle of the Iſland, cloſe by the ſhore, within two Cables lengths of the fandy Bay : there is about 18 or 20 fathom good loft oazy ground, and ſmooth Water ; for a Point St. Hellena. 133 for the S. E. point of the Iſland ſhelters from the An.1684 South Winds which conſtantly blow here. From the S. E. point there ſtrikes out a ſmall hole a quar- ter of a mile into the Sea, where there is commonly a great Riplin, or working of ſhort Waves, during all the Flood. The Tide runs pretty ſtrong, the Flood to the South, and the Ebb to the North. There is good landing on the Sandy Bay againſt the an- choring-place, from whence you may go up into the Iſland, and at no place beſides. There are 2 or 3 high, ſteep, ſmall Rocks at the S. E. Point, not a Cables length from the Iſland; and another much bigger at the N. E. end: it is deep Water all round, but at the anchoring-place, and at the ſhole at the S. E. point. This Iſland lieth in lat. ou d. 10 m. South. It is diſtant from Cape St. Lorenzo 4 or 5 leagues, bearing from it W. S. W. and half a point wefterly. At this Iſland are plenty of thoſe ſmall Sea-Turtle , ſpoken of in my laſt Chapter. The 21ſt day Captain Eaton came to an anchor by us: he was very willing to have conforted with us again ; but Captain Davis's Men were fo unrea- ſonable, that they would not allow Captain Eaton's Men an equal ſhare with them in what they got : therefore Captain Eaton ſtaid here but one night, and the next day faild from hence, ſteering away to the Southward. We ſtaid no longer than the day enſuing, and then we failed toward Point St. Hellena, intending there to land ſome Men purpoſely to get Priſoners for intelligence. Point Santa Hellena bears South from the Iſland Plata. It lies in lat. 2 d. 15 m. South. The Point is pretty high, flat, and even at top; overgrown with many great Thiſtles, but no ſort of Tree; ata diſtance it appears like an Inand, becauſe the Land within it is very low. This Point ſtrikes out Weſt into the Sea, making a pretty large Bay on the North ſide. A mile within the Point K3 Pitch; 134 St. Hellena Village, Algatrane. An.1684 Point, on the Sandy Bay, cloſe by the Sea, there is a poor fmall Indian Village, called Sanct a Hellena; the Land about it is low, ſandy, and barren, there are no Trees nor Grafs growing near it; neither do the Indians produce any Fruit, Grain, or Plant, but Water-Melons only, which are large and very ſweet, There is no freſh Water at this place, nor near it; therefore the inhabitants are obliged to fetch all their Water from the River Colanche, which is in the bottom of the Bay, about 4 leagues from it. Not 4 far from this Town on the Bay, cloſe by the Sea, about 5 paces from high-water-mark, there is a fort of bitumenous matter boils out of a little hole in the earth. It is like thin Tar; the Spaniards call it Alga- trane. By much boiling it becomes hard like Pitch. It is frequently uſed by the Spaniards inſtead of and the Indians that inhabit here ſave it in Jars. It boils up moſt at high-water; and then the Indians are ready to receive it. Theſe Indians are Fiſhermen, and go out to Sea on Bark-logs. Their chief fubſiſtence is Maiz, moſt of which they get from Ships that come hither for Algatrane. There is good anchoring to leeward of the Point,right againſt the Village: but on the Weſt ſide of the Point it is deep Water, and no anchoring. The Spaniards do report, that there was once a very rich Ship driven , alhore here in calm, for want of Wind to work her. Aſſoon as ever ſhe ſtruck, ſhe heeld off to Sea, and filld with Water preſently, and then ſiid off to 7 or fathom Water, where ſhe lies to this day; none having attempted to fiſh for her, becauſe ſhe lies deep, and there falls in here a great high Sea. When we were abreaft of this point, we ſent away our Canoas in the night, to take the Indian Village. They landed in the morning betimes cloſe by the Town, and took fome Priſoners. They took likewiſe a ſmall Bark which the Indians had ſet on fire, but our Men quenched it, and took the Indian that did it; who : Manta. 135 who being asked wherefore he fet the Bark on fire, An. 1684 ſaid, That there was an Order from the Vice-Roy lately ſet out, commanding all Sea-Men to burn their Veſſels if attack'd by us, and betake them- ſelves to their Boats. There was another Bark in a ſmall Cove, a Mile from the Village, thither our Men went, thinking to take her, but the Sea-Men that were aboard fet her in flames and fled : In the evening our Men came aboard, and brought the ſmall Bark with them, the fire of which they had quenched; and then we returned again towards Plata ; where we driv'd the 26th day of Sep- tember. In the evening we ſent out ſome Men in cur Bark lately taken, and Canoas, to an Indian Village called Manta, 2 or 3 leagues to the Weſtward of Cape St. Lorenzo ; hoping there to get other Priſo- ners, for we could not learn from thoſe we took at Point St. Hellena the reaſon why the Vice-Roy ſhould give ſuch orders to burn the Ships. They had a freſh Sea-breeze till 12 a clock at night, and then it proved Calm ; wherefore they rowed away with their Canoas as near to the Town as they thought convenient, and lay ſtill till day. Manta is a ſmall Indian Village on the Main, di- ſtant from the Iſland Plata 7 or 8 leagues. It ſtands ſo advantageouſly to be ſeen, being built on a ſmall aſcent, that it makes a very fair proſpect to the Sea ; yet but a few poor ſcattering Indian houſes. There is a very fine Church, adorned with a great deal of carved Work. It was formerly a habitation of Spa- niards; but they are all removed from hence now. The Land about it is dry and fandy, bearing only a few ſhrubby Trees. Theſe Indians plant no man- ner of Grain or Root, but are ſupplied from other places; and commonly keep a ſtock of Proviſion to relieve Ships that want ; for this is the firſt Settle- ment that Ships can touch at, which come from Pa- a K 4 nama, IO 136 Monte-Chriſto. An. 1684 nama, bound to Lima, or any other Port in Peru. The Land being dry and ſandy, is not fit to pro- duce Crops of Maize; which is the reaſon they plant none. There is a Spring of good Water be- tween the Village and the Seas. On the back of the Town, a pretty way up in the Country, there is a very high Mountain, tows- ing up like a Sugar-loaf, called Monte-Chriſto. It is a very good Sea-mark, for there is none like it on all the Coaſt. The Body of this Mountain bears due South from Manta. About a mile and half from the Slrore, right againſt the Village, there is a Rock, which is very dangerous, becauſe it never appears above Water; neither doth the Sea break on it, be- cauſe here is ſeldom any great Sea : yet it is now ſo well known, that all Ships bound to this place do eaſily avoid it. A mile within this Rock there is good anchoring, in 6, 8, or 10 fathom Water, good hard Sand, and clear Ground : And a mile from the Road on the Weſt fide, there is a ſhole run- ning out a mile into the Sea. From Manta to Cape St. Lorenzo the Land is plain and even, of an indif- ferent heighth. See a further account of theſe Coaſts in the Appendix. As ſoon as ever the day appear d, our Men landed, and marched towards the Village, which was about a mile and a half from their Landing-place : Some of the Indians who were ſtirring, ſaw them coming, and alarmed their Neighbours; ſo that all that were able got away. They took only two old Women, who both ſaid, that it was reported that a great ma- ny Enemies were come over land thro’the Coun- try of Darien into the South Seas, and that they were at preſent in Canoas and Periagoes : and that the Vice-Roy upon this news had ſet out the fore-men- tioned order for burning their own Ships. Our Men found no ſort of proviſion here; the Vice-Roy having likewiſe fent Orders to all Sea-ports to keep a a Capt. Swan. 137 keep no proviſion, but juſt to ſupply themſelves. An. 1684 Theſe Women alſo ſaid, that the Manta Indians were ſent over to the Iſland Plata, to deſtroy all the Goats there ; which they performed about a month agone : With this News our Men returned again, and arriv'd at Plata the next day. We lay ſtill at the Iſland Plata, being not reſolv'd what to do; till the 2d day of October : and then Captain Swan in the Cygnet of London arriv'd there. He was fitted out by very eminent Merchants of that City, on a deſign only to trade with the Spani- ards or Indians, having a very conſiderable Cargo well forted for theſe parts of the World ; but meeting with divers diſappointments, and being out of hopes to obtain a Trade in theſe Seas, his Men forc'd him to entertain a company of Privateers which he met with near Nicoya, a Town whither he was going to ſeek a Trade, and theſe Privateers were bound thi- ther in Boats to get a Ship. Theſe were the Men that we had heard of at Manta ; they came over Land, under the command of Captain Peter Harris, Nephew to that Captain Harris who was kill'd be- fore Panama. Captain Swan was ſtill Commander of his own Ship, and Captain Harris commanded a ſmall Bark under Captain Swan. There was much joy on all ſides when they arriv’d; and immediate- ly hereupon Captain Davis and Captain Swan con- forted, wiſhing for Captain Eaton again. Our little Bark, which was taken at Santa Hellena, was imme- diately ſent out to cruize, while the Ships were fit- ting; for Captain Swan's Ship being full of goods, was not fit to entertain his new gueſt, till the goods were diſpos'd of; therefore he by the conſent of the Super- cargo's, got up all his goods on Deck, and ſold to any one that would buy upon truſt: the reſt was thrown over-board into the Sea, except fine Goods, as Silks, Muſlins, Stockings, &c. and except the Iron, whereof he had a good quantity, both wrought and 138 a Cape Blanco. An. 1684 and in Bars ; This was fav’d for Ballaſt. The third day after our Bark was ſent ſo cruize, ſhe brought in a Prize of 400 Tuns, laden with Timber: They took her in the Bay of Guiaquil ; ſhe came from a Town of that Name, and was bound to Lima. The Commander of this Prize ſaid that it was generally reported and believed at Guiaquil, that the Vice-Roy was fitting out 10 fail of Frigots to drive us out of the Seas. This news made our unſettled Crew wiſh, that they had been perſuaded to accept of Captain Eaton's company on reaſonable terms. Captain Davis and Captain Swan had ſome diſcourſe concerning Captain Eaton ; they at laſt concluded to ſend our fmall Bark towards the Coaſt of Lima, as far as the Iſand Lobos, to ſeek Captain Eaton. This being approved by all hands, ſhe was cleaned the next day, and ſent away, mann'd with 20 men, 10 of Captain Daviss',andro of Swan's men: and Captain Swan writ a Letter directed to Captain Ea- ton; defiring his company, and the Iſle of Plata was appointed for the general Randezvous. When this Bark was gone, we turn'd another Bark which we had, into a Fire-fhip; having 6 or 7 Carpenters, who foon fix'd her: and while the Carpenters were at work about the Fire-ſhip, we fcrubb’d and clean'd our Men of War, as well as time and place would permit. The 19th day of October we finiſhid our Buſineſs, and the 20th day we faild towards the Iſland Lobos, where our Bark was order'd to ftay for us, or meet us again at Plata. We had but little Wind; there- fore it was the 23d day before we paſs’d by Point St. Hellena. The 25th day we croſſed over the Bay of Guiaquil. The 30th day we doubled Cape Blanco, This Cape is in lat. 3 d. 45 m. It is counted the worſt Cape in all the South Seas to double, paſſing to the Southward; for in all other places Ships may ſtand off to Sea 20 or 30 Leagues off, if they find they cannot Payta. The Buildings in Peru. 139 cannot get any thing under the ſhore; but here An. 1684 they dare not do it: for, by relation of the Spani- ards, they find a current ſetting N. W. which will carry a Ship off more in 2 hours, than they can run in again in s. Beſides, ſetting to the Northward, they loſe ground : therefore they always beat it up under the ſhore, which oft-times they find very difficult, becauſe the Wind commonly blows very ſtrong at S. S. W. or S. by W. without altering; for here are never any Land-winds. This Cape is of an indifferene heighth : It is fenced with white Rocks to the Sea ; for which reaſon, I believe, it hath this name: The Land in the Country ſeems to be full of high, ſteep, rugged, and barren Rocks. The ad day of November we got as high as Payta : We lay about 6 leagues off ſhore all the day, that the Spaniards might not fee us; and in the evening ſent our Canoas aſhore to take it, mann'd with 110 Men. Payta is a ſmall Spaniſh Sea-port Town, in the lat. of 5d. 15 m. It is built on the Sand, cloſe by the Sea, in a nook, elbow, or ſmall Bay, under a pret- ty high hill. There are not above 75 or 80 Houſes, and 2 Churches. The Houſes are but low and ill built . The building in this Country of Peru is much alike on all the Sea-coaſt. The Walls are built of Brick, made with Earth and Straw kneaded toge- ther : They are about 3 foot long, 2 foot broad, and a foot and half thick : They never burn them, but lay them a long time in the Sun to dry before they are uſed in building. In ſome places they have no roofs, only Poles laid a-croſs from the ſide Walls, and cover'd with Matts; and then thoſe Walls are carry'd up to a conſiderable heighth. But where they build Roofs upon their Houſes, the Walls are not made ſo high, as I ſaid before. The Houſes in general all over this Kingdom are but meanly built : one chief reaſon, with the common People, eſpeci- ally, 140 The Soil and Buildings of Peru. An.1684 ally, is the want of materials to build withal ; for however it be more within Land, yet here is nei- their Stone nor Timber, to build with nor any mate- rials but ſuch Brick as I have deſcribed : and even the Stone which they have in ſome places is ſo brit- tle, that you may rub it into Sand with your fingers. Another reaſon why they build ſo meanly is, be- cauſe it never rains; therefore they only endeavour to fence themſelves from the Sun. Yet their Walls, which are built but with an ordinary ſort of Brick, in compariſon with what is made in other parts of the World, continue a long time as firm as when firſt made, having never any Winds nor Rains to rot, moulder, or ſhake them. However, the richer fort have Timber, which they make uſe of in build- ing; but it is brought from other places. This dry Country commences to the Northward from about Cape Blanco to Coquimbo in about 30 d. S. having no Rain that I could ever obſerve or hear of; nor any green thing growing in the Mountains: nei- ther yet in the Valleys, except where here and there water'd with a few ſmall Rivers diſperſed up and down. So that the Northernmoſt parts of this Tract of Land are fupply'd with Timber from Guiaquil, Gallee, Tomaco, and other places that are watered with Rains; where there are plenty of all ſort of Timber. In the South parts, as about Guaſco and Coquimbo, they fetch their Timber from the Iſland Chiloe, or other places thereabouts. The Walls of Churches and rich Men's Houſes are whitened with Lime, both within and without; and the doors and poſts are very large, and adorned with carved-work, and the Beams alſo in the Churches: The inſide of the Houſes are hung round with rich embroydered, or painted Clothes. They have likewiſe abundance of fine Pictures, which adds no ſmall ornament to their Houſe : Theſe, I ſuppoſe, they have from Old Spain. But the Houſes of Payta are none of them ſo Payta. Colan. Bark-logs. 141 ſo richly furniſhed. The Churches were large and An.1684 fairly carved: At one end of the Town there was a ſmall Fort cloſe by the Sea, but no great Guns in it. This Fort, only with Muſquets will command all the Bay, ſo as to hinder any Boats from landing. There is another Fort on the top of the Hill, juſt over the Town, which commands both it and the lower Fort. There is neither Wood nor Water to be had here: They fetch their Water from an Indi- an Town called Colan, about 2 leagues N. N. E. from Payta: for at Colan there is a ſmall River of freſh Water, which runs out into the Sea ; from whence Ships that touch at Payta are fupply'd with Water, and other refreſhments, as Fowls, Hogs, Plantains, Yames, and Maize: Payta being deſtitute of all theſe things, only as they fetch them from Colan, as they have occaſion. The Indians of Colan are all Fiſher-men: They go out to Sea and fiſh on Bark-logs. Bark-logs are made of many round logs of Wood in manner of a Raft, and very different according to the uſe that they are deſign'd for, or the humour of the People that make them, or the matter that they are made of. If they are made for Fishing, then they are on- ly 3 or 4 logs of Light-wood, of 7 or 8 foot long, plac'd by the ſide of each other, pinn'd faſt together with wooden Pins, and bound hard with Withes, The Logs are ſo plac'd, that the middlemoft are longer than thoſe by the ſides, eſpecially at the head or fore-part, which grows narrower gradually into an angle or point, the better to cut through the Water. Others are made to carry Goods: The bot- tom of theſe is made of 20 or 30 great Trees of a- bout 20, 30, or 40 foot long, falten'd as the other, ſide to ſide, and ſo ſhaped: On the top of theſe they place another ſhorter row of Trees a-croſs them, pinn'd faft to each other, and then pinn'd to the un- dermoft row: This double row of Planks makes the bottom a a a 142 Bark-logs deſcribed. An. 1684 bottom of the Float, and of a conſiderable breadth. From this bottom the Raft is raiſed to about 10 foot higher, with rows of Poſts ſometimes ſet upright, and ſupporting a floor or two: but thoſe I obſerv'd were rais’d by thick Trees laid a-croſs each other,as in Wood Piles; only not cloſe together as in the bottom of the Float, but at the ends and ſides only, ſo as to leave the middle all hollow like a Chamber; except that here and there a Beam goes a-croſs it, to a keep the Float more compact. In this hollow, at about 4 foot heighth from the Beams at the bottom, they lay ſmall Poles along, and cloſe together, to make a floor for another Room, on the top of which alſo they lay another ſuch floor made of Poles: And the entrances into both theſe Rooms is only by creep- ing between the great traverſe Trees which make the Walls of this Sea-houſe. The loweſt of theſe ſtories ſerves as a Cellar : there they lay great Stones for Ballaſt, and their Jars of freſh-water cloſed up, and whatever may bear being wet : for by the weight of the Ballaſt and Cargo, the bottom of this Room and of the whole Veſſel is funk ſo deep, as to lie 2 or 3 feet within the ſurface of the Water. The ſecond ſtory is for the Sea-men, and their ne- ceſſaries. Above this ſecond ſtory the Goods are Itowed, to what heighth they pleaſe, uſually about 8 or 10 feet, and kept together by Poles ſet upright quite round: only there is a little ſpace abaft for the Steers-man (for they have a large Rudder,) and afore for the Fire-hearth, to dreſs their Victuals, efpecial- ly when they make long Voyages, as from Lima to Truxillo ,or Guiaquil , or Panama ; which laft Voyage is 5 or 600 leagues . In the midſt of all, among the 5 Goods, riſes a Maft, to which is faften'd a large Sail, as in our Weft-Country Barges in the Thames. They always go before the Wind, being unable to ply againſt it: and therefore are fit only for theſe Seas, where the Wind is always in a manner the fame, Single Bark-Logs. Piura. 143 ſame, not varying above a point or two all the way An.1684 from Lima, till ſuch time as they come into the Bay of Panama: and even there they meet with no great Sea; but ſometimes Northerly winds: and then they lower their Sails, and drive before it, waiting a change. All their care then is only to keep off from Shore; for they are ſo made that they cannot fink at Sea. Theſe Řafts carry 60 or 70 Tuns of Goods and upwards; their Cargo is chiefly Wine, Oyle, Flower, Sugar, Quito-cloth, Soap, Goat-Skins dreft, &c. The Float is manag’d uſually by 3 or 4 Men, who being unable to return with it againſt the Trade-Wind, when they come to Panama diſpoſe of the goods and bottom together; getting a paiſage back again for themſelves in fome Ship or Boat bound to the Port they came from ; and there they make a new Bark-log for their next Cargo. The ſmaller ſort of Bark-logs, deſcribed before, which lie flat on the Water, and are uſed for Fil- ing, or carrying Water to Ships, or the like (halfa Tun, or a Tun at a time) are more governable than the other, tho’they have Mafts and Sails too. With theſe they go out at night by the help of the Land- wind (which is ſeldom wanting on this Coaft ) and return back in the day-time with the Sea-wind. This ſort of Floats are uſed in many places both in the Eaſt and Weſt Indies. On the Coaft of Coro- mandel in the Eaſt Indies they call them Catamarans. Theſe are but one Log or two ſometimes, of a ſore of light Wood, and are made without Sail or Rud- der, and ſo ſmall, that they carry but one Man, whoſe legs and breech are always in the Water, and he manages his Log with a Paddle, appearing at a diſtance like a Man ſitting on a Fiſhe's Back. The Country about Payta is mountainous and bar- ren, like all the reſt of the Kingdom of Peru. There is no Town of confequence nearer it than Piura, which is a large Town in the Country 40 miles di- ftant. a 144 Piura. Payta. An.1684 ſtant. It lieth, by report of our Spaniſh Priſoners, in a Valley,which is watered with a ſmall River that diſembogues it felf into the Bay of Chirapee, in about 7 d. of North latitude. This Bay is nearer to Piura than Payta : yet all Goods imported by Sea for Piura are landed at Payta; for the Bay of Chirapee is full of dangerous ſholes, and therefore not frequented by ſhipping. The Road of Payta is one of the beſt on the Coaft of Peru. It is ſheltered from the South- weſt by a point of Land, which makes a large Bay and ſmooth Water for Ships to ride in. There is room enough for a good Fleet of Ships, and good anchoring in any depth, from 6 fathom water to 20 fathom. Right againſt the Town, the nearer the Town the ſhallower the water, and the ſmoother the riding : it is clean fand all over the Bay. Moſt Ships paſſing either to the North or the South touch at this place for water; for tho' here is none at the Town, yet thoſe Indian Fiſhermen of Colan will, and do ſupply all Ships very reaſonably; and good wa- ter is much prized on all this Coaſt through the ſcar- city of it. November the 3d. at 6 a clock in the morning, our Men landed, about 4 miles to the South of the Town, and took ſome Priſoners that were ſent thi- ther to watch for fear of us; and theſe Priſoners faid, that the Governour of Piura came with 100 armed Men to Payta the night before, purpoſely to oppoſe our landing there if we ſhould attempt it. Our Men march'd directly to the Fort on the Hill, and took it without the loſs of one Man. Here- upon the Governour of Piura with all his Men, and the Inhabitants of the Town, ran away as faſt as they could. Then our Men entered the Town, and found it emptied both of Money and Goods; there was not ſo much as a Meal of Victuals left for them. The Priſoners told us a Ship had been here a lit- tle before and burnt a great Ship in the Road, but did a Iſle of Lobos de Terra. 145 did not land their Men; and that here they put a- A1.1684 fhore all their Priſoners and Pilots. We knew this muſt be Captain Eaton's Ship which had done this, and by theſe circumſtances we ſuppoſed he was gone to the Eaſt-Indies, it being always deſign'd by him. The Priſoners told us alſo, that ſince Captain Ea- ton was here, a ſmall Bark had been off the Harbour, and taken a pair of Bark-logs a fishing, and made the Fiſhermen bring aboard 20 or 30 Jars of freſh Water. This we ſuppoſed was our Bark that was ſent to the Lobos to ſeek Captain Eaton. In the evening we came in with our Ships, and anchored before the Town in 10 fathom Water, near a mile from the ſhore. Here we ſtaid till the fixth day, in hopes to get a Ranſom for the Town. Out Captains demanded 300 Packs of Flower, 3000 pound of Sugar, 25 Jars of Wine, and 1000 Jars of Water to be brought off to us; but we got nothing of it. Therefore Captain Swan order'd the Town to be fir’d, which was preſently done. Then all our Men came aboard, and Captain Swan ordered the Bark which Captain Harris commanded, to be burnt, becauſe ſhe did not fail well. At night, when the Land-wind came off, we failed from hence towards Lobos. The roth day in the evening we ſaw a Sail bearing N. W.by N. as far as we could well diſcern her on our Deck. We im- mediately chaſed, ſeparating our felves, the better to meet her in the night; but we miſt her. There- fore the next morning we again trimm'd ſharp, and made the beſt of our way to the Lobos de la Mar. The 14th day we had ſight of the Iſland Lobos de Terra: it bore Eaſt from us; we ſtood in towards it, and betwixt 7 and 8 a-clock in the night came to an anchor at the N. E. end of the Iſland, in 14 fathoin Water. This Iſland at Sea is of an indifferent height, and appears like Lobos de la Mar. About a quarter of a mile from the North end there is a great hollow L Rock a I 146 Lobos de la Mar, again. Am. 1684 Rock, and a good Channel becween, where there is 7 fathom water. The 15th day we went alhore, and found abundance of Penguins and Boobies, and Seal in great quantities. We ſent aboard of all theſe to be dreſt, for we had not tafted any fleſh in a great while before ; therefore ſome of us did eat very heartily. Captain Swan, to encourage his Men to eat this courſe fleſh, would commend it for extraor- dinary good food, comparing the Seal to roaſting Pig, the Boobies to Hens, and the Penguins to Ducks: this he did to train them to live contentedly on courſe Meat, not knowing but we might be forced to make uſe of ſuch food before we departed out of theſe Seas; for it is generally ſeen among Privateers, that nothing imboldens them ſooner to mutiny than want, which we could not well ſuffer in a place where there are ſuch quantities of theſe Ani- mals to be had, if Men could be perſuaded to be contented with them. In the afternoon we failed from Lobos de Terra, with the Wind at S. by E. and arrived at Lobos de la Mar on the 19th day. Here we found a Letter, left by our Bark that was ſent to ſeek Captain Eaton, by which we underſtood, that Captain Eaton had been there, but was gone before they arriv'd, and had left no Letter to adviſe us which way he was gone; and that our Bark was again returned to Plata, in hopes to find us there, or meet us by the way, elfe refolving to ſtay for us there. We were ſorry to hear that Captain Eaton was gone, for now we did not ex- pect to meet with him any more in thefe Seas. The 21ſt day we ſent out our Moskito Strikers for Turtle, who brought aboard enough to ſerve both Ships Companies, and this they did all the time that we abode here. While we lay at this Iſland, Captain Swan made new Yards, ſquarer than thoſe he had before, and made his Sails larger, and our Ships Company in the mean time ſplit Plank for Fire- Bay of Guiaquil. Iſle of St. Clara. 147 Fire-wood, and put aboard as many Planks as we An.1684 could conveniently ftow, for other uſes : Here be- ing Plank enough of all ſorts, which we had brought hither in the firft Prize that we took, and left here. The 26th day in the evening, we ſaw a ſmall Bark about 3 leagues N.N. W. from the Iſland, but we ſuppoſing her to be our own Bark, did not go after her. The next morning ſhe was 2 leagues South of the Iſland, ſtanding off to Sea; but we did not now chace her neither, although we knew ſhe was not our Bark; for being to Windward of us, ſhe could have made her eſcape, if we had chaſed her. This Bark, as we were afterward informed, was ſent out purpoſely to ſee if we were at this Iſland. Her orders were, not to come too near, only to ap- pear in ſight; they ſuppoſing that if we were here we ſhould ſoon be after her; as indeed it was a won- der we had not chaced her : But our not doing ſo, and lying cloſe under the Iſland undiſcern’d by them, was a great occaſion of our coming upon Funa after- wards unexpectedly, they being now without fear of any Enemy fo near them. The 28th day we fcrubbed our Ships bottoms, in- tending to fail the next day towards Guiaquil; it be- ing concluded upon to attempt that Town before we returned again to Plata. Accordingly, on the 29th day in the morning, we looſed from hence, ſteering directly for the Bay of Guiaquil. This Bay runs in between Cape Blanco on the South-ſide, and Point Chandy on the North. About 25 leagues from Cape Blanco, near the bottom of the Bay, there is a ſmall Iſland called Santa Clara, which lies Eaſt and Weft: It is of an indifferent length, and it appears like a dead Man ſtretched out in a Shroud. The Eaſt end repreſents the Head, and the Weſt end the Feet. Ships that are bound into the River of Guia- quil paſs on the South-fide, to avoid the ſholes which lie on the North-fide of it; whereon formerly Ships L 2 have 148 A rich Wreck. Cat-fiſh. A1.1684 have been loft. It is reported by the Spaniards, that there is a very rich Wreck lies on the North ſide of that Iſand, not far from it; and that ſome of the Plate hath been taken up by one who came from Old Spain, with a Patent from the King to fiſh in thoſe Seas for Wrecks; but he dying, the Project ceas'd, and the Wreck ſtill remains as he left it; on- ly the Indians by ſtealth do ſometimes take up ſome of it : and they might have taken up much more, if it were not for the Cat-fiſh which ſwarms hereabouts. The Cat-fiſh is much like a Whiting, but the Head is flatter and bigger. It hath a great wide Mouth, and certain ſmall Strings pointing out from each ſide of it, like Cats Whiskers: and for that reaſon it is called a Cat-fiſh. It hath three Fins; one growing on the top of his back, and one on either ſide. Each of theſe Fins hath a ſtiff ſharp Bone, which is very ve- nemous if it ſtrikes into a man's fleſh: therefore it is dangerous diving where many of theſe Fiſh are. The Indians that adventured to ſearch this Wreck, have to their forrow experienced it; fome having loſt their lives, others the uſe of their limbs by it: this we were informed by an Indian, who himſelf had been fiſhing on it by ſtealth. I my ſelf have known ſome white men that have loſt the uſe of their hands, only by a ſmall prick with the fin of theſe Fiſh: therefore when we catch them with a Hook, we tread on them to take the Hook out of their mouths, for otherwiſe, in flurting about (as all Fiſh will when firft taken ) they might acciden- tally ſtrike their ſharp Fins into the hands of thoſe that caught them. Some of theſe Fiſh are 7 or 8 pound weight; fome again, in ſome particular places, are none of them bigger than a man's Thumb, but their Fins are all alike venemous. They uſe to be at the mouths of Rivers, or where there is much Mud and Oaze, and they are found all over the American Coaſt, both in the North and South Seas, at leaſt Punta Arena. Puna. 149 leaſt in the hot Countries, as alſo in the Eaſt-Indies : A1.1684 where failing with Captain Minchin among certain Iſlands near the Streights of Malacca, he pointed to an Illand, at which he told me he loſt the uſe of his hand by one of theſe, only in going to take the Hook out of its mouth. The wound was ſcarce viſible, yet his Hand was much ſwoln, and the pain laſted about 9 weeks; during moſt part of which the raging heat of it was almoſt ready to diſtract him.However, though the bony Fins of theſe Fish are ſo venemous, yet the Bones in their Bodies are not ſo; at leaſt we never perceived any ſuch effect in eating the Fish; and their Fleſh is very ſweet, delicious and whole- ſome Meat. From the Iſland Santa Clara to Punta Arena is 7 7 leagues E.N.E. This Punta Arena, or Sandy Point, is the Weſtermoft point of the Iſland Puna. Here all. Ships bound into the River of Guiaquil anchor, and muſt wait for a Pilot, the entrance being very dan- gerous for Strangers. The Iſland Puna is a pretty large flat low Iſland, ftretching Eaſt and Weſt about 12 or 14 leagues long, and about 4 or s leagues wide. The Tide runs very ſtrong all about this Iſland, but ſo many different ways, by reaſon of the Branches, Creeks, and Rivers that run into the Sea near it, that it cafts up many dangerous fholes on all ſides of it. There is in the Ifand only one Indian Town on the South- ſide of it, cloſe by the Sea, and 7 leagues from Point . Arena, which Town is alſo called Puna. The Indians of this Town are all Seamen, and are the only Pi- lots in theſe Seas, eſpecially for this River. Their chiefeſt employment, when they are not at Sea, is fiſhing. Theſe men are obliged by the Spaniards to keep good watch for Ships that anchor at Point Are- na, which, as I ſaid before, is 7 leagues from the Town Puna. The place where they keep this watch is at a Point of Land on the Iſland Puna, that ſtarts L 3 out 150 Palmeto-Tree. hin.1684 out into the Sea; from whence they can ſee all Ships that anchor at Point Arena. The Indians come thither in the morning, and return at night on Horſe back. From this watching Point to Point Arena it is 4. leagues, all drowned Mangrove-land: and in the midway between theſe two Points is ano- nother ſmall Point, where theſe Indians are oblig'd to keep another Watch, when they fear an Enemy. The Centinel goes thither in a Canoa in the morn- ing, and returns at night; for there is no coming thither by Land, through that Mangrove marſhy ground. The middle of the Iſland Puna is Savannah or Pafture. There are ſome ridges of good Wood- land, which is of a light yellow or fandy mould, producing large tall Trees, moſt unknown even to Travellers : But there are plenty of Palmeto-Trees, which, becauſe I am acquainted with, I ſhall de- fcribe. The Palmeto-Tree is about the bigneſs of an ordinary Aih: It is about 30 foot high; the body ítreiglit, without any limb, or branch, or leaf, ex- cepe at the head only, where it ſpreads forth into many ſmall Branches, not half ſo big as a man's arm, fome no bigger than ones finger : Theſe branches, are about 3 or 4 foot long, clear from any knot : At the end of the branch there groweth one broad leaf, about the bigneſs of a large Fan. This, when it firſt shoots forth, grows in folds, like a Fan when it is cloſed; and ſtill as it grows bigger ſo it opens, till it becomes like a Fan ſpread abroad. It is ſtrengthned towards the ſtalk with many ſmall ribs ſpringing from thence, and growing into the leaf; which as they grow near the end of the leaf, grow thinner and ſmaller. The leaves that make the bruſh part of the Flag-brooms which are brought in- to England, grow juſt in this manner; and are in- deed a ſmall kind of Palmeto ; for there are of them of ſeveral dimenſions. In Bermudus, and elſewhere, they make Hats, Baskets, Brooms, Fans to blow che a a Houſes of Puna Guiaquil River. 157 the fire inſtead of Bellows, with many other Houſe-An.1684 Implements, of Palmeto-Leaves. On the Ridges where theſe Trees grow, the Indians have here and there Plantations of Maiz, Yams, and Potatoes, There are in the Town of Puna about 20 Houſes, and a ſmall Church. The Houſes ſtand all on Polts, 10 or 12 foot high, with Ladders on the outſide to go up into them. I did never ſee the like Building any where but among the Malayans in the Eaſt-Indies . They are thatched with Palmeto-Leaves, and their Chambers well boarded, in which laſt they exceed the Malayans. The beſt place for Ships to lie at an anchor is againſt the middle of the Town. There is s fathom Water within a Cables length of the S Shore, and good foft deep Oaze where Ships may ca- reen, or hale alhore: it flows is or 16 foot Water up and down. From Puna to Guiaquil is reckoned 7 leagues. It is one league before you come to the River of Guiaquil's mouth, where it is above two mile wide ; from thence upwards the River lies pretty ſtreight, with- out any conſiderable turnings. Both ſides of the Ri- ver are low fwampy Land, overgrown with Red Mangroves, ſo that there is no landing. Four mile before you come to the Town of Guiaquil, there is a low Iſland ſtanding in the River. This Illand di- vides the River into two parts, making two very fair Channels for Ships to paſs up and down. The S. W. Channel is the wideſt; the other is as deep, but nar- rower and narrower yet, by reaſon of many Trees and Buſhes, which ſpread over the River, both from the Main and from the Iſland, and there are alſo i ſeveral great ſtumps of Trees ftanding upright in the Water, on either ſide. The Iſland is above a mile long. From the upper part of the Iſland to the Town of Guiaquil, is almoſt a league, and near as much from one ſide of the River to the other. In that ſpacious place Ships of the greateſt burthen may In 4 ride a 150 Guiaq. T. Cacao. Sarſaparilla. Quito Cloth. An.1684 ride afloat; but the beſt place for Ships is neareſt to that part of the Land where the Town ftands; and this place is ſeldom without Ships. Guiaquil ſtands facing the Iſland, cloſe by the River, partly on the ſide, and partly at the foot of a gentle Hill decli- ning towards the River, by which the lower part of it is often overflown. There are two Forts, one ſtanding in the low ground, the other on the hill. This Town makes a very fine proſpect, it being beautify'd with ſeveral Churches and other good Buildings. Here lives a Governour, who, as I have been informed, hath his Patent from the King of Spain. Guiaquil may be reckoned one of the chiefeſt Sea-Ports in the South Seas: The Commodities which are exported from hence are Cacao, Hides, Tallow, Sarſaparilla, and other Drugs, and Woollen-Cloth, commonly called Cloth of Quito. The Cacao grows on both ſides of the River a- bove the Town. It is a ſmall Nut, like the Campea- chy Nut, I think the ſmalleſt of the two; they pro- duce as much Cacao here as ſerves all the Kingdom of Peru; and much of it is ſent to Acapulco, and from thence to the Phillipine Iſlands. Sarſaparilla grows in the Water by the ſides of the River, as I have been informed. The Quito-cloth comes from a rich Town in the Country within Land call'd Quito. There is a great deal made, both Serges and Eroad-cloth. This Cloth is not very fine, but is worn by the common ſort of people throughout the whole Kingdom of Puru. This, and all other commodities which come from Quito, are ſkipt off at Guiaquil for other parts; and all imported goods for the City of Quito pafs by Guiaquil: by which it may appear that Guia- quil is a place of no niean trade. Quito, as I have been informed, is a very popu- lous City, feated in the heart of the Country. It is inhabited partly by Spaniards; but the major part of its a Quito, its Gold, and bad Air. 153 its Inhabitants are Indians, under the Spaniſh Go- An.1684 vernment. It is environ'd with Mountains of a vaſt heighth, from whoſe bowels many great Rivers have their riſe. Theſe Mountains abound in Gold, which by violent rains is waſh'd with the Sand into the adjacent Brooks; where the Indians reſort in Troops, waſhing away the Sand, and putting up the Gold-duft in their Calabaſhes or Gourd-Shells: But for the manner of gathering the Gold I refer you to Mr. Waffer's Book: Only I ſhall remark here, that Quito is the place in all the Kingdom of Peru that abounds moſt with this rich Metal, as I have been often informed. The Country is ſubject to great Rains, and very thick Fogs, eſpecially the Valleys. For that reaſon it is very unwholſome and fickly. The chiefeſt Diſtempers are Fevers, violent Head-ach, Pains in the Bowels, and Fluxes. I know no place where Gold is found but what is very unhealthy: as I ſhall more particularly relate when I come to ſpeak of Achin in the Iſle of Sumatra in the Eaſt-Indies. Guia- quil is not ſo fickly as Quito and other Towns farther within Land; yet in compariſon with the Towns that are on the Coaſt of Mare Pacifico, South of Cape Blanco, it is very ſickly. It was to this Town of Guiaquil that we were bound, therefore we left our Ships off Cape Blanco, and ran into the Bay of Guiaquil with our Bark and Canoas, ſteering in for the Iſland Santa Clara, where we arrived the next day after we left our Ships; and from thence we fent away two Canoas the next evening to Point Arena. At this Point there are abundance of Oyſters, and other Shell-fiſh, as Cockles and Muſcles; therefore the Indians of Puna often come hither to get theſe Fiſh. Our Canoas got over before day, and abſconded in a Creek, to wait for the coming of the Puna Indians. The next morning fome a 154 Town of Guiaquil attempted. An. 1684 fome of them, according to their cuſtom, came thither on Bark-logs, at the latter part of the Ebb, and were all taken by our Men. The next day, by their advice, the two Watchmen of the Indian Town Puna were taken by our Men, and all its Inhabitants nor one eſcaping. The next Ebb they took a ſmall Bark laden with Quito-cloth. She came from Guia- quil that Tide, and was bound to Lima; they having advice that we were gone off the Coaſt, by the Bark which I faid we ſaw while we lay at the Iſland Lo- bos. The Maſter of this Cloth-bark informed our Men, that there were three Barks coming from Guia- quil, laden with Negroes: He ſaid they would come from thence the next Tide. The ſame Tide of Ebb that they took the Cloth-bark, they ſent a Canoa to our Bark, where the biggeſt part of the Men were, to haften them away with ſpeed to the Indian Town. The Bark was now riding at Point Arena ; and the next Flood ſhe came with all the Men, and the reſt of the Canoas, to Puna. The Tide of Flood being now far ſpent, we lay at this Town till the laſt of the Ebb, and then rowed away, leaving 5 Men a- board our Bark, who were order'd to lie ftill till 8 a-clock the next morning, and not to fire at any Boat or Bark; but after that time they might fire at any object: for it was ſuppoſed that before that time we ſhould be maſters of Guiaquil. We had not rowed above 2 mile, before we met and took one of the three Barks laden with Negroes, the Maſter of her faid, that the other two would come from Guiaquil the next Tide of Ebb. We cut her Main-Maft down, and left her at an Anchor. It was now ſtrong Flood, and therefore we rowed with all ſpeed to- wards the Town, in hopes to get thither before the Flood was down, but we found it farther than we did expect it to be; or elſe our Canoas, being very full of Men, did not row ſo faſt as we would have them. The day broke when we were two leagues from Town of Guiaquil attempted. 155 from the Town, and then we had not above an An.1684 hours Flood more; therefore our Captains deſired the Indian Pilot to direct us to ſome Creek where we might abſcond all day, which was immediately done, and one Canoa was ſent towards Puna to our Bark, to order them not to move nor fire till the next day. But ſhe came too late to countermand the firſt orders: for the two Barks before mentioned, laden with Negroes, came from the Town the laſt quarter of the evening Tide, and lay in the River, clofe by the ſhore on one ſide, and we rowed up on the other ſide and miſt them; neither did they ſee nor hear us. Afſoon as the Flood was ſpent, the two Barks weighed and went down with the Ebb, towards Puna. Our Bark, ſeeing them coming di- rectly towards them, and both full of Men, ſuppoſed that we by ſome accident had been deſtroyed, and that the two Barks were manned with Spaniſh Sol- diers, and ſent to take our Ships, and therefore they fired three Guns at them a league before they came near. The two Spaniſh Barks immediately came to an anchor, and the Maſters got into their Boats, and rowed for the ſhore; but our Canoa that was ſent from us took them both. The firing of theſe 3 Guns made a great diſorder among our advanced Men, for moſt of them did believe they were heard at Guiaquil, and that therefore it could be no profit to lye ſtill in the Creek ; but either row away to the Town, or back again to our Ships. It was now quarter Ebb: therefore we could not move upwards, if we had been diſpos'd ſo to do. At length Captain Davis ſaid, he would immediately land in the Creek where they lay, and march directly to the Town, if but 40 Men would accompany him : and without ſaying more words, he landed among the Mangroves in the Marſhes. Thoſe that were ſo minded fol- lowed him, to the number of 40 or so. Captain Swan lay ſtill with the reſt of the Party in the Creek, for : a 156 Guiaquil attempted. An.1684 for they thought it impoſſible to do any good that way. Captain Davis and his Men were abſent about 4 4 hours, and then returned all wet, and quite tired, and could not find any paſſage out into the firm Land. He had been ſo far, that he almoſt diſpair’d of getting back again : for a Man cannot paſs thro' choſe Red Mangroves but with very much labour. When Capt. Davis was return'd, we concluded to be going towards the Town the beginning of the next Flood; and if we found that the Town was alarm’d, we purpoſed to return again without attempting any thing there. Afſoon as it was Flood we rowed away, and paſſed by the Iſland through the N.E. Channel, which is the narroweft. There are ſo many Stumps in the River, that it is very dangerous paſſing in the night (and that is the time we always take for ſuch attempts) for the River runs very ſwift, and one of our Canoas ſtuck on a Stump, and had certainly overſer, if she had not been immediately reſcued by others. When we were come almoſt to the end of the Iſland, there was a Muſquet fired at us out of the Buſhes, on the Main. We then had the Town open before us, and preſently ſaw lighted Torches, or Candles, all the Town over ; whereas before the Gun was fired there was but one Light; there- fore we now concluded we were diſcovered : Yer many of our Men ſaid, that it was a Holiday the next day, as it was indeed, and that therefore the Spaniards were making Fireworks, which they often do in the night againſt ſuch times. Werowed there- fore a little farther, and found firm Land, and Cap- tain Davis pitched his Canoa aſhore and landed with his Men. Captain Swan, and moſt of his Men, did not think it convenient to attempt any thing, ſeeing the Town was alarm’d; but at låſt, being upbraided with Cowardize, Captain Swan and his Men landed alſo. The place were we landed was about 2 mile from the Town: it was all overgrown with Woods fo a Guiaquil attempted. 157 ſo thick, that we could not march through in the An. 1684 night ; and therefore we ſat down, waiting for the light of the day. We had two Indian Pilots with us; one that had been with us a month, who having re- ceived ſome abuſes from a Gentleman of Guiaquil, to be revenged offered his ſervice to us, and we found him very faithful: the other was taken by us not above 2 or 3 days before, and he ſeemed to be as willing as the other to aſſiſt us. This latter was led by one of Captain Davis's men, who Shewed himſelf very forward to go to the Town, and up- braided others with faint-heartedneſs: Yet this man ( as he afterwards confeſſed ) notwithſtanding his Courage, privately cut the ſtring that the Guide was made faſt with, and let him go to the Town by himſelf, not caring to follow him ; but when he thought the Guide was got far enough from us, he cried out that the Pilot was gone, and that ſome body had cut the Cord that tied him. This put every Man into a moving poſture to ſeek the Indian, but all in vain ; and our confternation was great, being in the dark and among Woods : ſo the deſign was wholly daſhed, for not a Man after that had the heart to ſpeak of going farther. Here we ſtaid till day, and then rowed out into the middle of the River, where we had a fair view of the Town; which, as I ſaid before, makes a very pleaſant prof- pect. We lay ſtill about half an hour, being a mile, or ſomething better, from the Town. They did not fire one Gun at us, nor we at them. Thus our deſign on Guiaquil faild: yet Captain Townley, and Captain Francois Gronet took it a little while after this. When we had taken a full view of the Town we rowed over the River, where we went aſhore to a Beef Eftantion or Farm, and killd a Cow, which we dreſt and eat. We ſtaid there till the evening Tide of Ebb, and then rowed down the River, and the 9th day in the morning arrived at Puna. In our way a 158 Negroes taken. A great advantage flipt. An. 1684 way thither we went aboard the 3 Barks laden with Negroes, that lay at their Anchor in the River, and carry'd the Barks away with us. There were 1000 Negroes in the 3 Barks, all lufty young men 2 and women. When we came to Puna, we ſent a Canoa to Point Arena, to ſee if the Ships were come thither. The 12th day ſhe returned again, with tydings that they were both there at Anchor. Therefore in the afternoon we all went aboard of our Ships, and carry'd the Cloth-bark with us, and about 40 of the ftouteſt Negro men, leaving their 3 Barks with the reſt; and out of theſe alſo Captain Davis and Captain Swan choſe about 14 or 15 a-piece, and turn'd the reſt alhore. There was never a greater opportunity put into the hands of men to enrich themſelves than we had; to have gone with theſe Negroes, and ſettled our felves at Santa Maria, on the Iſthmus of Darien, and employed them in getting Gold out of the Mines there. Which might have been done with eaſe: For about 6 months before this, Captain Harris ( who was now with us) coming over Land from the North Seas with his body of Privateers, had routed the Spaniards away from the Town and Gold-Mines of Santa Maria, ſo that they had never attempted to ſettle there again ſince: Add to this, that the Indian neighbourhood, who were mortal Enemies to the Spaniards, and had been fluſht by their ſucceſſes againſt them, through the aſliſtance of the Privateers, for ſeveral years, were our faft friends, and ready to receive and aſſiſt us. We had, , as I have ſaid, 1000 Negroes to work for us, we had 200 Tun of Flower that lay at the Gallapagos, there was the River of Santa Maria, where we could ca- reen and fit our Ships; and might fortiſe the mouth ſo, that if all the ſtrength the Spaniards have in Peru had come againſt us, we could have kept them out. If they lay with Guard-ſhips of ſtrength to keep us in, Plata, again. 159 in, yet we had a great Country to live in, and a An.1684 great Nation of Indians that were our friends: Be- ſide, which was the principal thing, we had the North Seas to befriend us; from whence we could export our felves, or effects, or import Goods or Men to our aſſiſtance; for in a ſhort time we ſhould have had aſſiſtance from all parts of the Weſt-Indies; many thouſands of Privateers from Jamaica and the French Iſlands eſpecially would have flockt over to us; and long before this time we might have been Maſters not only of thofe Mines, ( the richeſt Gold-Mines ever yer found in America ) but of all the Coaſt as high as Quito: and much more than I ſay might then probably have been done. But theſe may ſeem to the Reader but Golden Dreams: To leave them therefore; The 13th day we ſail'd from Point Arena towards Plata, to ſeek our Bark that was ſent to the Iſland Lobos, in ſearch of Captain Eaton. We were 2 Ships in company, and 2 Barks: and the 16th day we arriv’d at Plata, but found no Bark there, nor any Letter. Thenext day we went over to the Main to fill Water, and in our paſſage met our Bark : ſhe had been a fecond time at the Iſland Lobos, and not finding us, was coming to Plata again. They had been in ſome want of Proviſion ſince they left us, and therefore , they had been at Santa Hellena, and taken it; where they got as much Maize as ſerved them 3 or 4 days; and that, with ſome Fiſh and Turtle which they ftruck, laſted them till they came to the Iſland Lobos de Terra. They got Boobies and Penguins Eggs, of which they laid in a ſtore; and went from thence to Lobos de la Mar, where they repleniſhed their ſtock of Eggs, and ſalted up a few young Seal, for fear they hould want: and being thus victualled, they returned again towards Plata. When our Water was fill'd we went over again to the Iſland Plata. There we parted the Cloths that were taken in the Cloth- а а 160 Large Turtle at Plata. An.1684 Cloth-Bark into two Lots or Shares; Captain Da- vis and his Men had ane part, and Captain Swan and his Men had the other part. The Bark which the Cloth was in Captain Swan kept for a Tender. At this time here were at Plata a great many large Turtle, which I judge came from the Gallapagos, for I had never ſeen any here before, tho' I had been here ſeveral times : This was their coupling-time, which is much ſooner in the year here than in the Weſt-Indies, properly ſo called. Our Strikers brought aboard every day more than we could eat. Captain Swan had no Striker, and therefore had no Turtle but what was ſent him from Captain Davis; and all his Flower too he had from Captain Davis : but ſince our diſappointment at Guiaquil, Captain Davis's Men murmured againſt Captain Swan, and did not willingly give him any Proviſion, becauſe he was not ſo forward to go thither as Captain Davis. How- ever, at laſt, theſe differences were made up, and we concluded to go into the Bay of Panama, to a Town called La Velia ; but becauſe we had not Ca- noas enough to land our Men, we were reſolved to ſearch fome Rivers where the Spaniards have no com- merce, there to get Indian Canoas. СНАР. 160 An.1684 CHAP. VII. , They leave the Iſle of Plata. Cape Paſſao. The Coaſt between that and Cape St. Franciſco ; and from thence on to Panama. The River of St. Jago. The Red and the White Cotton-Tree. The Cabbage-Tree. The Indians of St. Jago River, and its Neighbourhood. The Iſle of Gallo. The River and Village of Tomaco. Ilie of Gorgona. The Pearl-Oyſters there and in other parts. The Land on the Main. Cape Corrientes. Point Garachina. Iand Gall lera. The Kings, or Pearl-Iſlands. Pacheque. St. Paul's Iſland. Lavelia. Nata. The Clam- fiſh. Oyſters. The pleaſant Proſpects in the Bay of Panama. Old Panama. The New City. The great Concourſe there from Lima and Por- tobel, &c. upon the Arrival of the Spaniſh Armada in the Weſt Indies. The Courſe the Armada takes : with an incidental Account of the firſt Inducements that made the Privateers undertake the paſſage over the Iſthmus of Da- rien into the South Seas, and of the particular beginning of their Correspondence with the Indi- ans that inhabit that Iſthmus. Of the Air and Weather at Panama. The Iſles of Perico. Ta- bago a pleaſant Nand. The Mammee-Tree. The Village Tabago. A Spaniſh Stratagem or two, of Capt. Bond their Engineer. The Ignorance of the Spaniards of theſe parts in Sea Affairs. A Party of French Privateer's arrive from over Land. Of the Commiſſions that are given M . out 162 An.1684 Cape Paſlao. out by the French Governour of Petit-Guavres. Of the Gulf of St. Michael, and the Rivers of Congos, Sambo, and Sta Maria ; and an Error of the common Maps, in the placing Point Garachina and Cape St. Lorenzo, corrected. Of the Town and Gold Mines of Sta Maria ; and the Town of Scuchadero. Capt. Town- ley's Arrival with ſome more Engliſh Priva- teers over Land. Jars of Piſco wine. A Bark of Capt. Knight's joins them. Point Garachina again. Porto de Pinas. Iſle of Otoque. The Pacquet from Lima taken. Other Engliſh and French Privateers arrive. Chepelio, one of the ſweeteſt Iſlands in the World. The Sapadillo, A- vogato Pear, Mammee Sappota, Wild Mam- mee, and Star-apple. Cheapo River and Town. Some Traverſings in the Bay of Panama ; and an account of the Strength of the Spaniſh Fleet, and of the Privateers, and the Engagement be- tween them. ز TH HE 23d day of December 1684, we failed from the Iſland Plata towards the Bay of Panama. The Wind at S.S. E. a fine brisk gale, and fair wea- ther. The next morning we paſt by Cape Paſſao. This Cape is in lat. cod. 08 m. South of the Equa- tor. It runs out into the Sea with a high round point, which ſeems to be divided in the midſt. It is bald againſt the Sea, but within land, and on both ſides, it is full of ſhort Trees. The Land in the Country is very high and mountainous, and it ap- pears to be very woody. Between Cape Paſlao and Cape Saint Franciſco, the Land by the Sea is full of ſmall Points, making as many little Sandy Bays between them; and is of an indifferent heighth, cover'd a Spaniſh Pilots. 163 cover'd with Trees of divers forts : So that failing An. 1684 by this Coaft, you ſee nothing but a vaſt Grove or Wood; which is ſo much the more pleaſant, be- cauſe the Trees are of ſeveral forms, both in reſpect to their growth and colour. Our deſign was, as I ſaid in my laſt Chapter, to ſearch for Canoas in fome River where the Spaniards have neither Settlement nor Trade with the native Indians. We had Spaniſh Pilots, and Indians bred un- der the Spaniards, who were able to carry us into any Harbour or River belonging to the Spaniards, but were wholly unacquainted with thoſe Rivers which are not frequented by the Spaniards. There are many ſuch unfrequented Rivers between Plata and Panama : indeed all the way from the Line to the Gulf of St. Michaels, or even to Panama it ſelf, the Coaſt is not inhabited by any Spaniards, nor are the Indians that inhabit there any way un- der their ſubjection : except only near the Iſle Gal- lo, where on the banks of a Gold River or two, there are ſome Spaniards who work there to find Gold. Now our Pilots being at a loſs on theſe leſs fre- quented Coafts, we fupply'd that defect out of the Spaniſh Pilot-Books, which we took in their Ships: Theſe we found by experience to be very good Guides. Yet nevertheleſs the Country in many . places by the Sea being low, and full of openings, Creeks and Rivers, it is ſomewhat difficult to find any particular River that a Man deſigns to go to, where he is not well acquainted. This however could be no diſcouragement to us ; for one River might probably be as well furniſhed with Indian Canoas as another; and if we found them, it was to us indifferent where; yet we pitcht on the River Saint Jago, not becauſe there were not other Rivers as large and as likely to be inhabited with Indians as it; but becauſe that River was not far from Gallo, an Iland where our Ships could an- chor M 2 164 River of St. Jago. Ax.1684 chor ſafely and ride ſecurely. We paſt by Cape St. Franciſco, meeting with great and continu'd Rains. The Land by the Sea, to the North of the Cape, is low and extraordinary Woody; the Trees are very thick, and ſeem to be of a prodigious height and bigneſs. From Cape Saint Franciſco the Land runs more Eaſterly into the Bay of Panama. I take this Cape to be its bounds on the South fide, and the Illes of Cobaya or Quiboto bound it on the North ſide. Between this Cape and the Iſle Gallo, there are many large and navigable Rivers. We paſſed by them all till we came to the River St. Fago. This River is near 2 d. North of the Equator. It is large and navigable fome leagues up; and 7 leagues from the Sea it divides it ſelf into 2 parts, making an Iſland that is 4 leagues wide againſt the Sea. The wideſt branch is that on the S. W. fide of the Iſland. Both Branches are very deep; but the mouth of the narrower is ſo choakt with holes, that at low Water even Canoas cannot enter Above the Iſland it is a . league wide, and the Stream runs pretty ſtreight, and very ſwift The Tide flows about 3 leagues up the River, but to what height I know not. Probably the River hath its original from ſome of the rich Mountains near the City of Quito, and it runs thro a Country, as rich in Soil, as perhaps any in the World, eſpecially when it draws within 10 or 12 leagues of the Sea. The Land there both on the Iſland, and on both ſides of the River, is of a black deep Mouid, producing extraordinary great tall Trees of many Torts, ſuch as uſually grow in theſe hot Climates. I ſhall only give an account of the Cotton and Cabbage-Trees, whereof there is great plen- ty; and they are as large of their kinds as ever I faw. There are two ſorts of Cotton-Trees, one is called the Red, the other the White Cotton-Tree. The White Cotton-Tree grows like an Oak, but generally much Cotton-Trees. 165 much bigger and taller than our Oaks: The Body is Av.1684 ftreight and clear from Knots or Boughs to the very Head: there it ſpreads forth many great Limbs jult like an Oak. The Bark is ſmooth, and of a grey co- lour: the Leaves are as big as a large Plumb-Leaf, jagged at the edge; they are oval, ſmooth, and of a dark green colour. Some of theſe Trees have their Bodies much bigger 18 or 20 foor high, than nearer the ground, being big-belly'd like Nine-pins. They bear a very fine fort of Cotton, called Silk-Corton. When this Cotton is ripe, the Trees appear like our Apple-Trees in England, when full of Bloffoms. IfI do not miſtake, the Cotton falls down in November, or December: then the ground is cover'd white with it. This is not ſubſtantial and continuous, like that which grows upon the Cotton-Shrubs, in Plantati- ons, but like the Down of Thiſtles; fo that I did never know any uſe made of it in the Weſt-Indies, be- cauſe it is not worth the labour of gathering it: but in the Eaſt-Indies the Natives gather and ufe it for Pillows. It hath a ſmall black Seed among it. The Leaves of this Tree fall off the beginning of April; while the old Leaves are falling off, the young ones ſpring out, and in a weeks time the Tree całts off her old Robes, and is clothed in a new pleafant garb. The red Cotton-Tree is like the other, but hardly fo big: it bears no Cotton, but its Wood is ſomewhat harder of the two, yet both forts are fofc ſpongy Wood, fit for no uſe that I know, but only for Canoas, which being ítreight and tall , they are very good for; but they will not laſt long, efpeci- ally if not drawn afhore often and tarred; other- wiſe the Worm and the Water foon rot then. They are the biggeſt Trees, or perhaps Weeds rather, in the Weft-Indies . They are common in the Eaſt and Weſt-Indies in good fat Land. As the Cotton is the biggeſt Tree in the Woods, ſo the Cabbage-Tree is the talleſt: The Body is noc Very a M 3 166 Cabbage-Trees An. 1684 very big, but very high and ſtreight. I have mea- ſured one in the Bay of Campeachy, 120 feet long as it lay on the ground, and there are ſome much higher. It has no Limbs nor Boughs, but at the Head there are many Branches bigger than a Man's Arm. Theſe Branches are not round, but flat, with ſharp edges; they are 12 or 14 foot long. A- bout 2 foot from the Trunk, the Branches Shoot forth ſmall long Leaves, about an inch broad, which grow ſo regularly on both ſides of the Branch, that the whole Branch ſeems to be but one Leaf, made up of many ſmall ones. The Cabbage-Fruit ſhoots out in the midſt of theſe Branches, from the top of the Tree: It is inveſted with many young Leaves or Branches, which are ready to ſpread abroad, as the old Branches droop and fall down. The Cabbage it ſelf when it is taken out of the Leaves which it ſeems to be folded in, is as big as the ſmall of a Man's Leg, and a foot long: It is as white as Milk, and as ſweet as a Nut if eaten raw; and it is very ſweet and wholſom if boiled. Beſides the Cab- bage it ſelf, there grow out between the Cabbage and the large Branches, ſmall Twigs as of a Shrub, about two foot long from their Stump. At the end of thoſe Twigs ( which grow very thick together) there hang Berries, hard and round, and as big as a Cherry. Theſe the Tree ſheds every year, and they are very good for Hogs ; for this reaſon the Spaniards fine any who ſhall cut down one of theſe in their Woods. The Body of the Tree is full of Rings round it, half a foot aſunder from the bottom to the top. The Bark is thin and brittle; the Wood is black and very hard; the heart or middle of the Tree is white Pith. They do not climb to get the Cabbage, but cut them down ; for ſhould they ga- ther it off the Tree as it ſtands, yet its head being gone it ſoon dies. Theſe Trees are much uſed by Planters in Jamaica, to board the ſides of the Houſes ; for a Spaniards, why little acquainted here. 167 for it is but ſplitting the Trunk into 4 parts with Am. 1684 an Ax, and there are ſo many Planks. Theſe Trees appear very pleaſant, and they beautifie the whole Wood, ſpreading their green Branches above allo- ther Trees. All this Country is ſubject to very great Rains, fo that this part of Peru pays for the dry weather which they have about Lima and all that Coaft. I believe that is one reaſon why the Spaniards have made fuch ſmall diſcoveries, in this and other Rivers on this Coaſt. Another reaſon may be, becauſe it lies nor fo directly in their way; for they do not Coaft it a- long in going from Panama to Lima, but firſt go Weft- ward as far as to the Keys or Illes of Cobeya, for a Weſterly wind, and from thence ſtand over towards Cape St. Franciſco, not touching any where uſually, till they come to Manta near Cape St. Lorenza. In their return indeed from Lima to Panama, they may keep along the Coaft hereabouts; but then their Ships are always laden, whereas the light Ships that go from Panama, are moſt at leaſure to make diſco- veries. A third reaſon may be, the wildneſs and enmity of all the Natives on this Coaſt, who are naturally fortified by their Rivers and vaft Woods, from whence with their Arrows they can eally an- noy any that ſhall land there to aſſault them. At this River particularly there are no Indians live with- in 6 leagues of the Sea, and all the Country ſo far is full of impaffible Woods ; fo that to get at the Indians, or the Mines and Mountains, there is no way but by rowing up the River; and if any who are Enemies to the Natives attempt this, ( as the Spaniards are always hated by them) they muſt all the way be expoſed to the Arrows of thoſe who would lye purpoſely in Ambuſh in the Woods for them. Theſe wild Indians have ſmall Plantations of Maiz, and good Plantain-gardens; for Plantains are their chiefeft food. They have alſo a few Fowls and Hogs. It M 4 168 St. Jago River. Hogs. An. 1684. It was to this River that we were bound, to ſeek for Canoas, therefore the 26th ſuppoſing our felves to be abreſt of it, we went from our Ships with 4 Canoas. 4. The 27th day in the morning we entered at half Flood into the ſmaller Branch of that River, and rowed up 6 leagues before we met any Inhabitants. There we found two ſmall Huts thatched with Pal- meto Leaves. The Indians ſeeing us rowing towards their Houſes, got their Wives and little ones, with their Houſhold-ſtuff, into their Canoas, and paddled away fafter than we could row; for we were forced to keep in the middle of the River becauſe of our Oars, but they with their Paddles kept cloſe under the Banks, and ſo had not the ſtrength of the ſtream againſt them, as we had. Theſe Huts were cloſe by the River on the Eaſt ſide of it, juſt againſt the end of the Illand. We ſaw a great many other Houſes a league from us on the other ſide of the Ri- ver; but the main ſtream into which we were now come, ſeemed to be ſo ſwift, that we were afraid to put over, for fear we ſhould not be able to get back again. We found only a Hog, fome Fowls and Plan- tains in the Huts: We killed the Hog and the Fowls, which were dreſt preſently. Their Hogs they got ( as I ſuppoſe) from the Spaniards by fome accident, or from fome Neighbouring Indians who converſe with the Spaniards ; for this that we took was of their European kind, which the Spaniards have intro- duced them into America very plentifully, eſpecially into the Iſlands Famaica, Hiſpaniola, and Cuba above all, this laſt being very largely ſtored with them; where they feed in the Woods in the day time, and at night come in at the founding of a Conch shell, and are put up in their Crauls or Pens, and yet fome turn wild, which nevertheleſs are often decoy- ed in by the other, which being all marked, when- ever they fee an unmarked Hog in the Pen they know it is a wild one, and ſhoot him preſently. In Theſe a а Iſand Gallo. Tomaco River. 169 Theſe Crauls I have not ſeen on the Continent; An.1684 where the Spaniaruls keep them tame at home. Among the Wild Indians, or in their Woods, are no Hogs, but Pecary and Warree, a ſort I have men- tioned before. After we had refreſhed our felves, we returned toward the mouth of the River. It was the eyen- ing when we came from thence, and we got to the Rivers mouth the next morning before day: Our Ships when we left them were order'd to go to Gal- lo, where they were to ſtay for us. Gallo is a ſmall uninhabited Iſland, lying in between 2 and 3 De- grees North Lat. It lyeth in a wide Bay about 3 leagues from the mouth of the River Tomaco ; and 4 leagues and half from a ſmall Indian Village called Tomaco: The Iſland Gallo is of an indifferent heighth; it is cloathed with very good Timber Trees, and is therefore often viſited with Barks from Guiaquil and other places: for moſt of the Timber carry'd from Guiaquil to Lima, is firſt fetcht from Gallo. There is a Spring of good Water at the N. E. end : at that place there is a fine ſmall Sandy Bay, where there is good landing. The road for Ships is againſt this Bay, where there is good ſecure riding in 6 or 7 fa- thom water; and here Ships may careen. It is but fhole water all about this Iſland; yet there is a Chan- nel to come in at, where there is not leſs than 4 fa- thom water: You muſt go in with the Tyde of Flood, and come out with Ebb, founding all the way. Tomaco is a large River that takes its Name from an Indian Village ſo called : It is reported to ſpring from the rich Mountains about Quito. It is thick in- habited with Indians; and there are ſome Spaniards that live there, who traffick with the Indians for Gold. It is ſhole at the mouth of the River, yet Barks may a 4. enter. The 170 Tomaco Tomon. An.1684 The Village Tomaco is but ſmall, and is feated not far from the mouth of the River. It is a place to entertain the Spaniſh Merchants that come to Gallo to load Timber, or to traffick with the Indians for Gold. At this place one Doleman, with 7 or 8 Men more, once of Capt. Sharp's Crew, were kill'd in the year 1680. From the branch of the River St. Fago, where we now lay, to Tomaco, is about 5 leagues ;; the Land low, and full of Creeks, ſo that Canoas may paſs within Land through thoſe Creeks, and from thence into Tonaco River. The 28th day we left the River of St. Fago, crof- fing fome Creeks in our way with our Canoas; and came to an Indian Houſe, where we took the Man and all his Family. We ſtaid here till the afternoon, and then rowed toward Tomaco, with the Man of this Houſe for our Guide. We arrived at Tomaco a- bout 12 a clock at night. Here we took all the In- habitants of the Village, and a Spaniſh Knight, called Don Diego de Pinas. This Knight came in a Ship from Lima to lade Timber. The Ship was riding in a Creek about a mile off, and there were only one Spaniard and 8 Indians aboard. We went in a Ca- noa with 7 Men and took her; ſhe had no Goods, but 12 or 13 Jars of good Wine, which we took out, and the next day let the Ship go. Here an In- dian Canoa came aboard with three Men in her. Theſe Men could not ſpeak Spaniſh, neither could they diſtinguiſh us from Spaniards; the wild Indians uſually thinking all white Men to be Spaniards. We gave them 3 or 4 Callabaſhes of Wine, which they freely drank. They were ftreight-bodied, and well limb'd Men, of a mean heighth; their Hair black, long viſag’d, ſmall Noſes and Eyes; and were thin fac'd, ill look'd Men, of a very dark A little before night Captain Swan and all of us re- turned to Tomaco, and left the Vefſel to the Seamen. The 31ſt day two of our Canoas, who had been ET up copper colour. a A Pacquet taken. 171 up the River of Tomaco, returned back again to the An. 1684 Village. They had rowed 7 or 8 leagues up, and found but one Spaniſh Houſe, which they were told did belong to a Lady who lived at Lima; ſhe had Ser- vants here that traded with the Indians for Gold; but they ſeeing our Men coming, ran away; yet our Men found there ſeveral Ounces of Gold in Cal- labaſhes. The firſt day of January 1685, we went from To- maco towards Gallo . We carry'd the Knight with us, and two ſmall Canoas which we took there, and while we were rowing over, one of our Canoas took a Packet-Boat that was ſent from Panama to Lima. The Spaniards threw the Pacquet of Letters over-board, with a Line and a Buoy to it, but our Men ſeeing it, took it up, and brought the Letters, and all the Priſoners aboard our Ships that were then at an anchor at Gallo. Here we ſtaid till the 6th day, reading the Letters, by which we underſtood that the Armada from Old Spain was come to Porta- bel; and that the Preſident of Panama had ſent this Pacquet on purpoſe to haften the Plate-Fleet thither from Lima. We were very joyful of this News, and therefore ſent away the Pacquet-Boat with all her Letters; and we altered our former Reſolutions of going to La- velia. We now concluded to careen our Ships as ſpeedily as we could, that we might be ready to intercept this Fleet. The propereſt place that we could think on for doing it was among the Kings- Iſlands or Pearl Keys, becauſe they are near Panama, and all Ships bound to Panama from the Coaſt of Lima, paſs by them ; ſo that being there, we could not poſſibly miſs the Fleet. According to theſe Reſo- lutions we failed the next morning, in order to exe- cute what we deſigned. We were 2 Ships and 3 Barks in Company, viz. Captain Davis, Captain Swan, a Fireſhip, and 2 fmall Barks, as Tenders ; و one 172 Gorgonia. An. 1685 one on Captain Davis's Ship, the other on Cap- tain Swan's. We weigh'd before day, and got out all but Captain Swan's Tender, which never budg’d; for the Men were all aſleep when we went out, and the Tide of Flood coming on before they waked, we were forced to ſtay for them till the next day. The 8th day in the morning we defcry'd a Sail to the Weſt of us; the Wind was at South, and we chaſed her, and before noon took her. She was a Ship of about 90 Tun, laden with Flower; ſhe came from Truxillio, and was bound to Panama. This Ship came very opportunely to us, for Flower began to grow ſcarce, and Captain Davis's Men grudged at what was given to Captain Swan, who, as I ſaid before, had none but what he had from Captain Davis. We jogged on after this with a gentle Gale to- wards Gorgonia, an Iſland lying about 25 leagues from the Iſland Gallo. The 9th day we anchored at Gorgonia, on the Weſt-ſide of the INand, in 38 fa- thom, clean Ground, not 2 Cables length from the fhore. Gorgonia is an uninhabited Iſland, in lat. a- bout 3 degrees North : It is a pretty high Iſland, and very remarkable, by reaſon of 2 Saddles, or riſings and fallings on the top. It is about 2 leagues long, and a league broad; and it is 4 leagues from the Main: At the Weſt-end is another ſmall Iſland. The Land againft the anchoring-place is low; there is a ſmall fandy Bay and good landing. The Soil or Mould of it is black and deep, in the low ground, but on the ſide of the high Land it is a kind of a red Clay. This Iſand is very well cloathed with large Trees of ſeveral forts, that are flouriſhing and green all the year. It's very well watered with ſmall Brooks that iſſue from the high Land. Here are a great many little black Monkeys, fome Indian Conies, and a few Snakes, which are all the Land- Animals that I know there. It is reported of this Ifland Pearl-Oyſters. 173 Iſland that it rains on every day in the year more or An. 1685 leſs; but that I can diſprove: however it is a very wet Coaſt, and it rains abundantly here all the year long: There are but few fair days; for there is little difference in the ſeaſons of the year between the wet and dry; only in that ſeaſon which ſhould be the dry time, the rains are leſs frequent and more moderate than in the wet ſeaſon, for then it pours as out of a Sieve. It is deep Water, and no anchoring any where about this Iſland, only at that Weft fide: The Tide riſeth and faileth 7 or 8 foot up and down. Here are a great many Perewincies and Muſcles to be had at low Water. Then the Monkeys come down by the Sea-ſide, and catch them, digging them out of their Shells with their Claws. Here are Pearl-Oyſters in great plenty: They grow to the looſe Rocks, in 4, 5, or 6 fathom Wa- ter, by Beards, or little ſmall Roots, as a Muſcle : Theſe Oyſters are commoniy flatter and thinner than other Oyſters; otherwiſe much alike in ſhape. The fiſh is not ſweet nor very wholſome; it is as ſlimy as a Shell-Snail: They taſte very copperiſh, if eaten raw, and are beſt boyld. The Indians who gather them for the Spaniards, hang the meat of them on itrings like Jews-Ears, and dry them before they eat them. The Pearl is found at the head of the Oyſter, lying between the Meat and the Shell. Some will have 20 or 30 ſmall Seed-Pearl, fome none at all, and ſome will have 1 or 2 pretty large ones. The inſide of the Shell is more glorious than the Pearl it ſelf. I did never ſee any in the South Seas but here. It is reported there are ſome at the South end of Callifornia. In the Weſt-Indies, the Ran- cho Rejs, or Rancheria, ſpoken of in Chap. 3. is the 3 place where they are found moſt plentifully. "Tis ſaid there are ſome at the Iſland Margarita, near St. Auguſtin, a Town in the Gulf of Florida, &c. In the 174 Cape Corrientes. Point Garachina. An. 1685 the Eaſt-Indies, the Iſland Ainam, near the South end of China, is ſaid to have plenty of thefe Oyſters more productive of large round Pearl, than thoſe in other places. They are found alſo in other parts of the Eaſt-Indies, and on the Perſian Coaft. At this Iſand Gorgona we rummaged our Prize, and found a few Boxes of Marmalade, and 3 or 4 Jars of Brandy, which were equally ſhared between Captain Davis , Captain Swan, and their Men. Here we fill d all our Water, and Captain Swan furniſhed himſelf with Flower; afterward we turned aſhore a great many Priſoners, but kept the chiefeſt to put them aſhore in a better place. The 13th day we failed from hence toward the King s-Iſlands. We were now 6 Sail, 2 Men of War, 2 Tenders, a Fireſhip, and the Prize. We had but little Wind, but what we had was the common Trade at South. The Land we failed by on the Main is very low towards the Sea fide, but in the Country there are very high Mountains. The 16th day we paſſed by Cape Corrientes. This Cape is in lat. s d. 10 m. it is high bluff Land, with 3 or 4 ſmall Hillocks on the top. It appears at a di- 4 a Itance like an Iſland. Here we found a ſtrong cur- rent running to the North, but whether it be always fo I know not. The day after we paſſed by the Cape,we ſaw a ſmall white Iſland, which we chaſed, fuppofing it had been a Sail, till coming near, we found our Errour. The 21ſt day we ſaw Point Garachina. This Point is in lat. 7 d. 20 m. North; it is pretty high Land, rocky, and deftitute of Trees; yet within Land it is Woody. It is fenced with Rocks againſt the Sea. Within the Point, by the Sea, at low Water, you may find ſtore of Oyſters and Muſcles. The Kings Iſlands, or Pearl Keys, are about 12 leagues diſtant from this Point. Between Point Ga- rachina and them, there is a ſmall low flat barren Iſland, called The Kings, or Pearl Iſlands. 175 called Gallera, at which Captain Harris was ſharing An. 1685 with his Men the Gold he took in his pillaging Sancta Maria, which I ſpake of a little before, when on a ſudden 5 Spaniſh Barks, fitted out on purpoſe at Pa- nama, came upon him; but he fought them fo ftout- ly with one ſmall Bark he had, and ſome few Ca- noas, boarding their Admiral particularly, that they were all glad to leave him. By this Idand we an- chored, and ſent our Boats to the King's Iſlands for a good careening place. The King's Iſlands are a great many low, woody Iſlands, lying N. W. by N. and S. E. by S. They are about 7 leagues from the Main, and 14 leagues in length; and from Panama about 12 leagues. Why they are called the King's Iſlands I know not; they are ſometimes, and moſtly in Maps, called the Pearl Iſlands. I cannot imagin wherefore they are called fo, for I did never ſee one Pearl Oyfter about them, nor any Pearl Oyſter Shells; but on the other Oy- fters I have made many a Meal there: The Norther- moſt Iſland of all this range is called Pacheca, or Pa- cheque. This is but a ſmall Iſland, diſtant from Paa nama 11 or 12 leagues. The Southermoft of them is called St. Pauls. Beſides theſe two I know no more that are called by any particular name, though there are many that far exceed either of the two in big- neſs. Some of theſe Ilands are planted with Plan- tains and Bonanas; and there are Fields of Rice on others of them. The Gentlemen of Panama, to whom they belong, keep Negroes there, to plant, weed, and husband the Plantations. Many of them, eſpecially the largeſt, are wholly untill’d; yet very good fat Land, full of large Trees. Theſe unplanted Iſlands fhelter many runaway Negroes, who abfcond in the Woods all day, and in the night boldly p llage the Plantain Walls. Betwixt theſe Iſlands and the Main is a Channel of 7 or 8 leagues wide; there is good depth of Water, and good anchoring all the way. a a a 176 Lavelia. Nata. An.1685 way. The Iſlands border thick on each other, yet they make many ſmall narrow deep Channels, fit only for Boats to paſs between moſt of them. At the S. E. end, about a league from St. Pauls Iſland, there is a good place for Ships to careen, or hale aſhore. It is ſurrounded with the Land, and hath a good deep Channel on the North ſide to go in at. The tide riſeth here about 10 foot perpendicular. We brought our Ships into this place the 25th day, but were forced to tarry for a Spring Tide before we could have Water enough to clean them; there- fore we firſt cleaned our Barks, that they might cruiſe before Panama, while we lay here. The 27th day our Barks being clean we ſent them out with 20 Men in each. The fourth day after, they returned with a Prize laden with Maiz, or Indian Corn, Salt Beef, and Fowls. She came from Lavelia and was bound to Panama. Lavelia is a Town we once de- ſigned to attempt. It is pretty large and ſtands on the Banks of a River on the North ſide of the Bay of Panama, 6 or 7 leagues from the Sea. Nata is another ſuch Town, ſtanding in a Plain near another branch of the ſame River. In theſe Towns, and ſome others on the ſame Coaſt, they breed Hogs, Fowls, Bulls and Cows, and plant Maize purpoſely for the ſupport of Panama, which is ſupplied with Proviſion moſtly from other Towns and the neighbouring Iſands. The Beef and Fowl our Men took came to us in a good time, for we had eaten but little Fleſh ſince we left the Iſland Plata. The Harbor where we ca- reen'd was incompaſſed by three Iſlands, and our Ships rode in the middle. That on which we haled our Ships afhore was a little Iſland on the North ſide of the Harbor. There was a fine ſmall ſandy Bay, but all the reſt of the Iſland was invironed with Rocks, on which at low Water we did uſe to gather Oy- fters, Clams, Muſcles, and Limpits. The Clam is a a a 7 Bay of Panama 177 a fort of Oyſter which grows ſo faſt to the Rock, An. 1685 that there is no ſeparating it from thence, therefore we did open it where it grows, and take out the Meat, which is very large, fat, and ſweet. Here are a few common Oyſters, ſuch as we have in En- gland; of which fort I have met with none in theſe Seas, but here, at Point Garachina, at Puna, and on the Mexican Coait, in the lat. of 23 d. North. I have a Manuſcript of Mr. Teat, Captain Swan's chief Mate, which gives an account of Oyſters plenti- fully found in Port St. Julian, on the Eaſt ſide and ſomewhat to the North of the Streights of Magel- lan : but there is no mention made of what Oyſters they are. Here are ſome Guanoes, but we found no other fort of Land Animal. Here are alſo ſome Pigeons and Turtle-Doves. The reſt of the Iſlands that incompaſs this Harbor had of all theſe forts of Creatures. Our Men therefore did every day go over in Canoas to them, to fiſh, fowl, or hunt for Guanoes; but having one Man ſurprized once by ſome Spaniards lying there in Ambuſh, and carried off by them to Panama, we were after that more cautious of ftraggling The 14th day of February 1685. we made an end of cleaning our Ship, fill'd all our Water, and ſtock'd our felves with Fire wood. The isth day we went out from among the Iſlands, and anchored in the Channel between them and the Main, in 25 fathom Water, ſoft oazy Ground. The Plate Fleet was not yet arrived; therefore we intended to cruiſe before the City of Panama, which is from this place about 25 leagues. The next day we failed towards Pana- ma, palling in the Channel between the King's Iſlands and the Main. It is very pleaſant failing here, ha- ving the Main on one ſide, which appears in divers forms. It is beautified with many ſmall Hills cloathed with Woods of divers forts of Trees, which are al- ways green and flouriſhing. There are ſome few N ſmall 178 City of Panama. An. 1685 ſmall high Ilands within a league of the Main, ſcat- tering here and there one: Theſe are partly woody, partly bare; and they, as well as the Main, ap- pear very pleaſant. The King's Iſlands are on the o- ther ſide of this Channel, and make alſo a very love- ly proſpect as you fail by them. Theſe, as I have already noted, are low and flat, appearing in ſeve- ral ſhapes, according as they are naturally formed by many ſmall Creeks and Branches of the Sea. The 16th day we anchored at Pacheque, in 17 fathom Wa- ter, about a league from the Iſland, and failed from thence the next day with the Wind at N. N. E. di- recting our courſe towards Panama. When we came abreſt of old Panama we anchored, and ſent our Canoa aſhore with our Priſoner Don Diego de Pinas, with a Letter to the Governor, to treat about an Exchange for our Man they had ſpi- rited away, as I ſaid; and another Captain Harris left in the River of St. Maria the year before, coming over Land. Don Diego was deſirous to go on this Errand in the name, and with the conſent of the reſt of our Spaniſh Priſoners; but by fome accident he was killed before he got aſhore, as we heard afterwards. Old Panama was formerly a famous place, but it was taken by Sir Henry Morgan about the year 1673. and at that time great part of it was burned to aſhes, and it was never re-edified ſince. New Panama is a very fair City, ſtanding cloſe by the Sea, about 4 mile from the Ruines of the Old Town. It gives name to a large Bay which is fa- mous for a great many navigable Rivers, fome whereof are very rich in Gold; it is alſo very plea- ſantly ſprinkled with Iſlands, that are not only profi- table to their Owners, but very delightful to the Paſſengers and Seamen that fail by them ; ſome of which I have already deſcribed. It is incompaſſed on the backſide with a pleaſant Country, which is full of ſmall Hills and Valleys, beautified with many a Groves Panama. The Spaniſh Armada. 179 Groves and Spots of Trees, that appear in the Sa- An. 1685 Vannahs like ſo many little Iſlands. This City is en- compaſſed with a high Stone-Wall; the Houſes are ſaid to be of Brick. Their Roofs appear higher than the top of the City Wall. It is beautify'd with a great many fair Churches and Religious Houſes, be- fides the Preſident's Houſe, and other eminent Build- ings; which altogether make one of the fineſt objects that I did ever ſee, in America eſpecially. There are a great many Guns on her Walls, moſt of which look toward the Land. They had none at all againſt the Sea, when I firſt entered thoſe Seas with Captain Sawkins, Captain Coxon, Captain Sharp, and others; for till then they did not fear any Enemy by Sea : but ſince then they have planted Guns clear round. This is a flourishing City by reaſon it is a thorough- fair for all imported or exported Goods and Trea- ſure, to and from all parts of Peru and Chili, whereof their Store-houſes are never empty. The Road alſo is ſeldom or never without Ships. Beſides, once in 3 years, when the Spaniſh Armada comes to Portobel, then the Plate-Fleet alſo from Lima comes hither with the King's Treaſure, and abundance of Merchant-Ships full of Goods and Plate ; at that time the City is full of Merchants and Gentlemen the Seamen are buſie in landing the Treaſure and Goods, and the Carriers or Caravan-Maſters, im- ployed in carrying it over Land on Mules (in vaſt droves every day ) to Portobel, and bringing back European Goods from thence : Though the City be then ſo full, yet during this heat of buſineſs there is no hiring of an ordinary Slave under a piece of Eight a day; Houſes, alſo Chambers, Beds, and Victuals are then extraordinary dear. Now I am on this ſubject, I think it will not be amiſs to give the Reader an account of the progrefs of the Armada from Old Spain, which comes thus every three years into the Indies. Its firſt arrival is N 2 ac 18 A Spaniſh Propheſie. An. 1685 at Cartagena, from whence, as I have been told, an Expreſs is immediately ſent over Land to Lima, thro’ the Southern Continent, and another by Sea to Porto- bel, with two Pacquets of Letters, one for the Vice- roy of Lima, the other for the Viceroy of Mexico. I know not which way that of Mexico goes after its ar- rival at Portobel, whether by Land or Sea : but I be- lieve by Sea to La Vera Cruz. That for Lima is ſent by Land to Panama, and from thence by Sea to Lima. Upon mention of theſe Pacquets I ſhall digreſs yet a little further, and acquaint my Reader, that before my firſt going over into the South Seas with Captain Sharp (and indeed before any Privateers (at leaſt ſince Drake and Oxengham) had gone that way which we afterwards went, except La Sound, a French Cap- tain, who by Captain Wright's Inſtructions had ven- tured as far as Cheapo Town with a body of Men, but was driven back again) I being then on board Capt. Coxon, in company with 3 or 4 more Privateers, about 4 leagues to the Eaſt of Portobel, we took the Pacquets bound thither from Cartagena. We open'd a great quantity of the Merchants Letters, and found the Contents of many of them to be very ſurprizing, the Merchants of ſeveral parts of old Spain thereby informing their Correſpondents of Paname, and elſe- where, of a certain Propheſie that went about Spain that year, the tenour of which was, That there would be Englijh Privateers that year in the Weſt-In- dies, who would make ſuch great Diſcoveries, as to open a door into the South Seas, which they ſuppoſed was faſteſt ſhut; and the Letters were accordingly full of cautions to their Friends to be very watchful and careful of their Coafts. This Door they ſpake of we all concluded muſt be the paſſage over Land through the Country of the Indians of Darien, who were a little before this become our Friends, and had lately fallen out with the Spani- ards, breaking off the Intercourſe which for ſome a time The Story of John Gret. 181 time they had with them : and upon calling al. An. 1685 ſo to mind the frequent Invitations we had from thoſe Indians a little before this time, to paſs thro' their Country, and fall upon the Spaniards in the South Seas, we from hencefoțward began to enter- tain ſuch thoughts in earneſt, and foon came to a Reſolution to make thoſe Attempts which we after- wards did, with Capt. Sharp, Coxon, &c. So that the taking theſe Letters gave the firſt Life to thoſe bold Undertakings: and we took the advantage of the Fears the Spaniards were in from that Propheſie, or probable Conjecture, or whatever it were ; for we ſealed up moſt of the Letters again, and ſent them aſhore to Portobel. The occaſion of this our late Friendſhip with thoſe Indians was thus. About Is years before this time, Capt.Wright being cruiſing near that Coaſt, and go- ing in among the Samballoes Iſles to ſtrike Fiſh and Turtle, took there a young Indian Lad as he was pad- dling about in a Canoa. He brought him aboard his Ship, and gave him the Name of John Gret, clothing him, and intending to breed him among the Engliſh. But his Moskito-Strikers, taking a fanſie to the Boy, begg'd him of Captain Wright, and took him with them at their return into their own Country, where they taught him their Art, and he married a Wife among them, ond learnt their Language, as he had done ſome broken Engliſh while he was with Captain Wright, which he improved among the Moskitoes, who correſponding ſo much with us, do all of them ſinatter Engliſh after a fort; but hisown Language he had almoſt forgot. Thus he lived among them for many years; till about 6 or 8 months before our ta- king theſe Letters, Captain Wright being again among the Samballoes, took thence another Indian Boy about Io or 12 years old, the Son of a Man of ſome ac- count among thoſe Indians; and wanting a Striker, he went away to the Moskito's Country, where he took a a a O N 3 a 182 The Story of John Gret. An. 1685 took in Fohn Gret, who was now very expert at it. fohn Grer was much pleaſed to ſee a Lad there of his own Country, and it came into his Mind to perſuade Capt.Wright upon this occaſion to endeavour a Friend- Ship with thoſe Indians; a thing our Privateers had long coveted, but never durft attempt, having ſuch dreadful apprehenſions of their Numbers and Fierce- nefs: but fohn Gret offered the Captain that he would go aſhore and negotiate the matter ; who ac- cordingly ſent him in his Canoa till he was near the Shore, which of a ſudden was covered with Indians, ſtanding ready with their Bows and Arrows. John Gret, who had only a Clout about his middle, as the faſhion of the Indians is, leapt then out of the Boat, and ſwam, the Boat retiring a little way back; and the Indians aſhore feeing him in that habit, and hearing him call to them in their own Tongue, ( which he had recovered by converſing with the Boy lately taken ) ſuffered him quietly to land, and gathered all about to hear how it was with him. He told them particularly, that he was one of their Countrymen, and how he had been taken many years ago by the Engliſh, who had uſed him very kindly; that they were miſtaken in being ſo much afraid of that Nation, who were not Enemies to them, but to the Spaniards : to confirm this, he told them how well the Engliſh treated another young Lad of theirs, they had lately taken, ſuch an one's Son; for this he had learnt of the Youth, and his Father was one of the Company that was got together on the shore. He perfuaded them therefore to make a League with theſe friendly People, by whoſe help they might be able to quell the Spaniards, aſſuring alſo the Father of the Boy, that if he would but go with him to the Ship, which they ſaw at anchor at an Iſand there, (it was Golden Iſland, the Eaſtermoft of the Samballoes, a place where there is good ſtriking for Turtle) he ſhould have his Son reſtored to him, and a Agreement of the Engliſh with the Darien Indians. 183 and they might all expect a very kind Reception. Az 1685 Upon theſe aſſurances 20 or 30 of them went off pre- ſently, in 2 or 3 Canoas laden with Plantains, Bona- 3 noes, Fowls, &c. and Captain Wright having treated them on board, went afhore with them, and was en- tertained by them, and Preſents were made on each ſide. Captain Wright gave the Boy to his Father in a very handſom Engliſh Dreſs, which he had cauſed to be made purpoſely for him; and an Agreement was immediately ſtruck up between the Engliſh and thefe Indians, who invited the Engliſh through their Coun- try into the South Seas. Purſuant to this Agreement, the Engliſh, when they came upon any ſuch deſign, or for Traffick with them, were to give a certain ſignal which they pitcht upon, whereby they might be known. But it hap- pen'd that Mr. La Sound, the French Captain ſpoken of a little before, being then one of Captain Wright's Men, learnt this Signal, and ſtaying aſhore at Petit- Guavres, upon Captain Wright's going thither foon after, who had his Commiſſion from thence, he gave the other French there, ſuch an account of the Agreement before mentioned, and the eaſineſs of entring the South Seas thereupon, that he gor at the head of about 120 of them, who made that unſuc- ceſsful attempt upon Cheapo, as I ſaid ; making uſe of the ſignal they had learnt for pafling the Indians Country, who at that time could not diſtinguiſh ſo well between the ſeveral Nations of the Europeans, as they can fince. From ſuch ſmall beginnings aroſe thoſe great ſtirs that have been ſince made all over the South Seas, viz. from the Letters we took, and from the Friendſhip contracted with theſe Indians by means of John Gret. Yer this Friendſhip had like to have been ſtifled in its Infancy; for within a few months after an Engliſi, trading Sloop came on this Coaft from Jamaica, and Fohn Gret, who by this time had advanced himſelf to N.4 be 184 Courſe of the Spaniſh Armada. An.1685 be a Grandee among theſe Indians, together with 5 or 5 6 more of that quality, went off to the Sloopin their long Gowns, as the cuſtom is for ſuch to wear among thein. Being received aboard, they expected to find every thing friendly, and John Gret talkt to them in Engliſh; but theſe Engliſh Men, having no know- ledge at all of what had happened, endeavoured to make them Slaves as is commonly done ); for upon carrying them to Jamaica they could have ſold them for 10 or 12 pound a-piece. But “John Gret, and the reſt perceiving this, leapt all over board, and were by the others kill'd every one of them in the Water. The Indians on fhore never came to the knowledg of it; if they had, it wou'd have endangered our Cor- reſpondence. Several times after, upon our conver- ſing with them, they enquired of us what was become of their Countrymen : but we told them we knew not, as indeed it was a great while after that we heard this ſtory; ſo they concluded the Spaniards had met with them, and killd, or taken them. But to return to the account of the progreſs of the Armado which we left at Cartagena : After an ap- pointed ſtay there of about 60 days, as I take it, it goes thence to Portobel, where it lies 30 days, and no longer. Therefore the Viceroy of Lima on notice of the Armada's arrival at Cartagena, immediately ſends away the King's Treaſure to Panama, where it is land- ed, and lies ready to be ſent to Portobel upon the firſt News of the Armada's arrival there. This is the rea- ſon partly of their ſending Expreſſes ſo early to Lima, that upon the Armada's firſt coming to Portobel, the Treaſure and Goods may lie ready at Panama, to be ſent away upon the Mules: and it requires ſome time for the Lima Fleet to unlade, becauſe the Ships ride not at Panama, but at Perica, which are 3 ſmall Plands, 2 leagues from thence. The King's Treaſure is ſaid to amount commonly to about 24000000 of Pieces of Eight; beſides abundance of Merchants Money Spaniſh Armada and Flota. 185 Money. All this Treaſure is carried on Mules, and An.1685 there are large Stables at both places to lodg them. Sometimes the Merchants to ſteal the Cuſtom, pack up Money among Goods, and ſend it to Venta de Cruzes on the River Chagre ; from thence down the River, and afterwards by Sea to Portobel : in which paſſage I have known a whole Fleet of Periago's and Canoas taken. The Merchants who are not ready to fail by the thirtieth day after the Armada's arrival are in danger to be left behind, for the Ships all weigh the 30th day preciſely, and go to the Harbors Mouth : yet ſometimes on great importunity, the Admiral may ſtay a week longer; for it is impoſſible that all the Merchants ſhould get ready, for want of Men. When the Armada departs from Portobel it re- turns again to Cartagena, by which time all the King's Revenue, which comes out of the Country, is got rea- dy there. Here alſo meets them again a great Ship, called the Pattache, one of the Spaniſh Galeons, which before their firſt arrival at Cartagena goes from the reſt of the Armada on purpoſe to gather the Tribute of the Coaſt, touching at the Margarita's, and other pla- ces in her way thence to Cartagena, as Punta de Guaira, Maracaybo, Rio de la Hacha, and Sancta Martha ; and at all theſe places takes in Treaſure for the King. Af- ter the ſet ſtay at Cartagena, the Armada goes away to the Havana in the Iſle of Cuba, to meet there the Flo- ta, which is a ſmall number of Ships that go to La Ve- ra Cruz, and there takes in the effects of the City and Country of Mexico, and what is brought thither in the Ship which comes thither every year from the Philip- pine Iſlands; and having join'd the reſt at the Havana, the whole Armada ſets Tail for Spain through the Gulf of Florida. The Ships in the South Seas lie a great deal longer at Panama before they return to Lima. The Merchants and Gentlemen which come from Lima, ſtay as little time as they can at Portobel, which is at the beſt but a ſickly place, and at this time is very full of ܪ ܂ و а 186 The Air and Weather of Panama. An. 1685 of men from all parts. But Panama, as it is not over- charg’d with men ſo unreaſonably as the other, tho very full, ſo it enjoys a good air, lying open to the Sea wind; which riſeth commonly about 10 or 11 a clock in the morning, and continues till 8 or 9 a clock at night: then the Land wind comes, and blows till 8 or 9 in the morning. There are no Woods nor Marſhes near Panana, but a brave dry Champain land, not ſubject to fogs nor mifts. The wet ſeaſon begins in the latter end of May, and continues till November. At that time the Sea breezes are at S. S. W. and the Land winds at N. At the dry feaſon the winds are moſt betwixt the E. N. E. and the North: Yet off in the Bay they are commonly at South ; but of this I ſhall be more particular in my Chapter of Winds in the Appendio. The rains are not ſo exceffive about Panama it ſelf, as on either ſide of the Bay; yet in the months of Fune, July and Auguft, they are ſevere enough, Gen- tlemen that come from Peru to Panama, eſpecially in theſe months, cut their hair cloſe, to preſerve them from Fevers; for the place is fickly to them, becauſe they come out of a Country which never hath any Rains or Fogs, but enjoys a conſtant ferenity; but I am apt to believe this City is healthy enough to any other people. Thus much for Panama. The 20th day we went and anchored within a league of the Iſlands Perico ( which are only 3 little barren rocky Iſlands ) in expectation of the Preſident of Panama's Anſwer to the Letter, I ſaid, we ſent him by Don Diego, treating about exchange of Priſoners ; this being the day on which he had given us his Pa- role to return with an Anſwer: The 21ſt day we took another Bark laden with Hogs, Fowl, Salt Beef, and Moloſſoes: She came from Lavelia and was going to Panama. In the afternoon we ſent another Letter afhore by a young Moſtiſo (a mixt brood of Indians and Europeans) directed to the Preſident, and 3 or 4 Co- a pies 1. Tabago. The Mammet-Tree. 187 pies of it to be diſperſed abroad among the common An.1685 People. This Letter, which was full of Threats, to- gether with the young Man's managing the buſineſs, wrought ſo powerfully among the common People, that the City was in an uproar. The Preſident im- mediately ſent a Gentleman aboard, who demanded the Flower-Prize that we took off of Gallo, and all the Priſoners, for the Ranſom of our two Men: but our Captains told him they would exchange Man for Man. The Gentleman ſaid he had not Orders for that, but if we would ſtay till the next day,he would bring the Governeur's Anſwer. The next day he brought aboard our two Men, and had about 40 Priſoners in exchange. The 24th day we run over to the Iſland Tabago. T'abago is in the Bay, and about 6 leagues South of Panama. It is about 3 mile long, and 2 broad, a high mountainous Iſland. On the North ſide it declines with a gentle deſcent to the Sea. The Land by the Sea is of a black Mould, and deep; but toward the top of the Mountain it is ſtrong and dry. The North ſide of this Iſland makes a very pleaſant ſhew : it feems to be a Garden of Fruit incloſed with many high Trees; the chiefeſt Fruits are Plantains and Bona- na’s. They thrive very well from the foot to the middle of it ; but thoſe near the top are but ſmall, as wanting moiſture. Cloſe by the Sea there are many Coco-Nut-Trees, which make a very pleaſant ſight. Within the Coco-Nut-Trees there grow many Mam- met-Trees. The Mammet is a large, tall, and ſtreight- bodied Tree, clean, without Knots or Limbs, for 60 or 70 foot, or more. The Head ſpreads abroad into many ſmall Limbs, which grow pretty thick, and cloſe together. The Bark is of a dark grey colour, thick and rough, full of large Chops. The Fruit is bigger than Quince, it is round, and covered with a thick Rind, of a grey colour. When the Fruit is ripe, the Rind is yellow and tough; and it will then peel off a a a 188 A Spaniſh Stratagem. An. 1685 off like Leather; but before it is ripe it is brittle: the Juice is then white and clammy ; but when ripe not ſo. The ripe Fruit under the Rind is yellow as a Carret; and in the middle are two large rough Stones flat, and each of them much bigger than an Almond. The Fruit ſmells very well, and the taſte is anſwera- ble to the ſmell. The S. W. end of the Iſland hath never been cleared, but is full of Fire-wood, and Trees of divers forts. There is a very fine ſmall Brook of freſh Water, that ſprings out of the ſide of the Mountain, and gliding through the Grove of Fruit- Trees, falis into the Sea on the North ſide. There was a ſmall Town ſtanding by the Sea, with a Church at one end, but now the biggeſt part of it is deſtroy- ed by the Privateers. There is good anchoring right againſt the Town, about a mile from the ſhore,where you may have 16 or 18 fathom Water, ſoft oazy ground. There is a ſmall Iſland clofe by the N. W. end of this called Tabogilla, with a ſmall Channel to paſs between. There is another woody Iſland about a mile on the N. E. fide of Tabago, and a good Channel between them: this Inand hath no Name that ever I heard. While we lay at Tabago we had like to have had a ſcurvy trick plaid us by a pretended Merchant from Panama, who came, as by ſtealth, to traffick with us privately; a thing common enough with the Spaniſh Merchants, both in the North and South Seas, notwith- ſtanding the ſevere Prohibitions of the Governours ; who yet ſometimes connive at it, and will even trade with the Privateers themſelves. Our Merchant was by agreement to bring out his Bark laden with Goods in the night, and we to go and anchor at the South of Perico. Out he came, with a Fireſhip inſtead of a Bark, and approached very near, hailing us with the Watch-word we had agreed upon. We ſuſpecting the worſt,call'd to them to come to an anchor, and upon their not doing ſo, fir'd at them: when immediately a و their Spaniſh Stratagems. 189 their Men going out into the Canoas ſet fire to their An.1685 Ship, which blew up, and burnt cloſe by us; ſo that we were forced to cut our Cables in all haſte, and ſcamper away as well as we could. The Spaniard was not altogether ſo politick in ap- pointing to meet us at Perico, for there we had Sea- room; whereas had he come thus upon us at Tabago, the Land-wind bearing hard upon us as it did, we muſt either have been burnt by the Fireſhip, or upon looſing our Cables, have been driven aſhore : But I ſuppoſe they choſe Perico rather for the Scene of their Enterprize, partly becauſe they might there beft fculk among the Iſlands, and partly becauſe if their Exploit faild, they could thence eſcape beſt from our Canoas to Panama, but 2 leagues off. During this Exploit, Captain Swan (whoſe Ship was leſs than ours, and ſo not ſo much aim'd at by the Spaniards) lay about a mile off, with a Canoa at the Buoy of his Anchor, as fearing ſome Treachery from our pretended Merchant; and a little before the Bark blew up, he ſaw a ſmall Float on the Water and as it appeared, a Man on it, making towards his Ship; but the Man dived, and diſappeared of a ſud- den, as thinking probably that he was diſcover'd. This was ſuppoſed to be one coming with ſome combuſtible Matter to have ſtuck about the Rudder. For ſuch a trick Captain Sharp was ſerv'd at Coquimbo, and his Ship had like to have been burnt by it, if by meer accident it had not been diſcover'd: I was then aboard Captain Sharp's Ship. Captain Swan ſeeing the Blaze by us, cut his Cables as we did, his Bark did the like; ſo we kept under fail all the night, being more ſcared than hurt. The Bark that was on fire drove burning towards Tabago; but after the firſt blaſt ſhe did not burn clear, only made a ſmother, for ſhe was not well made, though Captain Bond had the framing and management of it. a This 190 Capt. Bond. The South Sea Shipping. An.1685 This Captain Bond was he of whom I made mention in my 4th Chapter. He, after his being at the Iſles of Cape Verd, ſtood away for the South Seas, at the inſtigation of one Richard Morton, who had been with Captain Sharp in the South Seas. In his way he met with Captain Eaton, and they two conforted a day or two: at laſt Morton went aboard of Captain Eaton, and perſuaded him to loſe Captain Bond in the night, which Captain Eaton did, Morton continuing aboard of Captain Eaton, as finding his the better Ship. Cap- tain Bond thus loſing both his Confort Eaton, and Morton his Pilot, and his Ship being but an ordinary Sailer, he deſpaired of getting into the South Seas; and he had plaid ſuch tricks among the Caribbe Iſles, as I have been informed, that he did not dare to ap- pear at any of the Engliſh Iſlands. Therefore he per- ſuaded his Men to go to the Spaniards, and they con- ſented to do any thing that he ſhould propofe: fo he preſently ſteered away into the Weſt-Indies, and the firſt place where he came to an anchor was at Portobel. He preſently declared to the Governour, that there were Engliſh Ships coming into the South Seas and that if they queſtioned it, he offered to be kept a Priſoner till time ſhould diſcover the truth of what he ſaid ; but they believed him, and ſent him away to Panama, where he was in great eſteem. This ſeveral Priſoners The Spaniards of Panama could not have fitted out their Fireſhip without this Captain Bond's affiftance: for it is ſtrange to fay, how groſly igno- rant the Spaniards in the Weſt-Indies, but eſpecially in the South Seas, are of Sea-affairs. They build indeed good Ships; but this is a ſmall matter : for any Ship of a good bottom will ſerve for theſe Seas on the South Coaft. They rig their Ships but untowardly, , have no Guns, but in 3 or 4 of the King's Ships; and are as meanly furniſhed with Warlike Proviſions and as much at a loſs for the making any Fireſhips, or other leſs told us. a More Privateers arrive. 191 leſs uſual Machines. Nay they have not the fence to An. 1685 have their Guns run within the fides upon their diſ- charge, but have Platforms without for the Men to ſtand on to charge them; ſo that when we come near we can fetch them down with ſmall ſhot out of our Boats. A main reaſon of this is, that the Native Spa- niards are too proud to be Seamen, but uſe the Indians for all thoſe Offices : one Spaniard, it may be, going in the Ship to command it, and himſelf of little more knowledge than thoſe poor ignorant creatures: nor can they gian much Experience, feldom going far off to Sea, but coaſting along the ſhores. But to proceed: In the morning when it was light we came again to an anchor cloſe by our Buoys, and ſtrove to get our Anchors again ; but our Buoy-Ropes being rotten, broke. While we were puzzling about our Anchors, we ſaw a great many Canoas full of Men paſs between Tabago and the other Iſland. This put us into a new conſternation: we lay ſtill ſome time, till we ſaw that they came directly towards us, then we weighed and ſtood towards them: and when we came within hail, we found that they were Engliſh and French Privateers come out of the North Seas through the Iſthmus of Darien. They were 280 Men, in 28 Canoas; 200 of them French , the reſt Englijh. They were commanded by Captain Gronet, and Captain Lequie. We preſently came to an Anchor again, and all the Canoas came aboard. Theſe Men told us, that there were 180 Engliſh Men more, un- , der the Command of Captain Townley, in the Coun- try of Darien, making Canoas (as theſe Men had been) to bring them into theſe Seas. All the Englifo Men that came over in this party were immediately enter- tain’d by Captain Davis and Captain Swan in their own Ships; and the French Men were ordered to have our Flower Prize to carry them, and Captain Gronet being the eldeſt Commander was to command them there ; and thus they were all diſpoſed of to their hearts 192 French Commiſſions to Privateers. An.1685 hearts content. Captain Gronet, to retalliate this kind- neſs, offered Captain Davis and Captain Swan, each of them a new Commiſſion from the Governor of Petit Guavres. It has been uſual for many years paſt, for the Governor of Petit Guavres to ſend blank Com- miſſions to Sea by many of his Captains, with orders to diſpoſe of them to whom they faw convenient. Thoſe of Petit Guavres by this means making them- ſelves the Sanctuary and Aſylum of all People of de- ſperate Fortunes ; and increaſing their own Wealth, and the Strength and Reputation of their Party thereby. Captain Davis accepted of one, having be- fore only an old Commiſſion, which fell to him by Inheritance at the deceaſe of Captain Cook ; who took it from Captain Thriſtian, together with his Bark, as is before mentioned. But Captain Swan re- fuſed it, ſaying he had an order from the Duke of York, neither to give offence to the Spaniards, nor to receive any affront from them; and that he had been injured by them at Baldivia, where they had killa ſome of his Men, and wounded ſeveral more; ſo that he thought he had a lawful Commiſſion of his own to right himſelf. I never read any of theſe French Commiſſions while I was in theſe Seas, nor did I then know the import of them: but I have learnt ſince, that the Tenour of them is, to give a liberty to fiſh, fowl, and hunt. The occaſion of this is, that the Iſland of Hiſpaniola, where the Garriſon of Petit Guavres is, belongs partly to the French, and partly to the Spaniards; and in time of Peace theſe Commiffi- ons are given as a Warrant to thoſe of each ſide to protect them from the adverſe Party : but in effect the French do not reſtrain them to Hiſpaniola, but make them a pretence for a general ravage in any part of America, by Sea or Land. Having thus diſpoſed of our Aſſociates, weintend- ed to fail towards the Gulf of St. Michael, to ſeek Captain Townley; who by this time we thought might Gulf of St. Michael. 193 might be entring into theſe Seas. Accordingly the An. 1685 ſecond day of March, 1685, we failed from hence towards the Gulf of St. Michael. This Gulf lies near 30 leagues from Panama, towards the S. E. The way thither from Panama is, to paſs between the Kings Iſlands and the Main. It is a place where many great Rivers having finiſhed their Courſes, are ſwallowed up in the Sea. It is bounded on the S. with Point Garachina, which lieth in North lat. 6 d. 40 m. and on the North ſide with Cape St. Lorenzo. Where, by the way, I muſt correct a grofs Error in our common Maps; which giving no name at all to the South Cape, which yet is the moſt conſidera- ble, and is the true Point Garachina ; do give that name to the North Cape, which is of ſmall remark, only for thoſe whoſe buſineſs is into the Gulf: and the name St. Lorenzo, which is the true name of this Northern Point, is by them wholly omitted ; the name of the other Point being ſubſtituted into its place. The chief Rivers which run into this Gulf of St. Michael, are Santa Maria, Sambo, and Congos. The River Congos (which is the River I would have perſuaded our Men to have gone up, as their neareſt way in our Journey over Land, mentioned Chap.1.) comes directly out of the Country, and ſwallows up many ſmall Streams that fall into it from both ſides; and at laſt loſeth it ſelf on the North ſide of the Gulf, a league within Cape St. Lorenzo. It is not very wide, but deep, and navigable fome leagues within Land. There are Sands without it; but a Channel for Ships. 'Tis not made uſe of by the Spaniards, becauſe of the neighbourhood of Santa Maria River ; where they have moſt buſineſs on ac- count of the Mines. The River of Sambo ſeems to be a great River, for there is a great Tide at its mouth ; but I can ſay nothing more of it, having never been in it. This River fails into the Sea on the South Gide of the Gulf, o near 194 River and Town of Santa Maria. An. 1685 near Point Garachina. Between the mouth of theſe 2 Rivers on either ſide, the Gulf runs in towards the Land ſomewhat narrower, and makes 5 or 6 ſmall Iſlands, which are clothed with great Trees, green and flouriſhing all the year, and good Channels be- tween the Illands. Beyond which, further in ſtill, the ſhore on each ſide cloſes fo near, with 2 Points of low Mangrove Land, as to make a narrow or ſtreight, ſcarce half a mile wide. This ſerves as a mouth or entrance to the inner part of the Gulf, which is a deep Bay 2 or 3 leagues over every way; and about the Eaſt end thereof are the mouths of ſeveral Rivers, the chief of which is that of Santa Maria. There are many Outlets or Creeks beſides this narrow place I have deſcribed, but none navi- gable beſide that. For this reaſon, the Spaniſh Guard- fhip, mention'd in Chap. 1. choſe to lie between theſe two Points, as the only paſſage they could imagine we ſhould attempt; ſince this is the way that the Privateers have generally taken, as the neareft between the North and South Seas. The River of Santa Maria is the largeſt of all the Rivers of this Gulf: It is navigable 8 or 9 leagues up; for ſo high the Tide flows. Beyond that place the Ri- ver is divided into many Branches, which are only fit for Canoas. The Tide riſes and falls in this River about 18 foot. About 6 leagues from the River’s mouth, on the South fide of it, the Spaniards about 20 years ago, upon their firft diſcovery of the Gold Mines here, built the Town Santa Maria, of the ſame name with the River. This Town was taken by Captain Coxon, Captain Harris; and Captain Sharp, at their entrance into theſe Seas; it being then but newly built. Since that time it is grown conſiderable ; for when Cap- tain Harris, the Nephew of the former, took it, (as is ſaid in Chap. 6.) he found in it all forts of Tradef- men, with a great deal of Flower, and Wine, and abun- 195 1 The Gold Mines of Santa Maria. abundance of Iron Crows and Pickaxes. Theſe AB.1685 were Inſtruments for the Slaves to work in the Gold Mines; for beſides what Gold and Sand they take up together, they often find great lumps, wedg'd be- tween the Rocks, as if it naturally grew there. I have ſeen a lump as big as a Hens Egg, brought by Cap- tain Harris from thence,(who took 120 pound there) and he told me that there were lumps a great deal bigger : but theſe they were forc'd to beat in pieces, that they might divide them. Theſe lumps are not ſo folid, but that they have creviſes and pores full of Earth and Duft. This Town is not far from the Mines, where the Spaniards keep a great many Slaves to work in the dry time of the year: but in the rainy ſeaſon when the Rivers do overflow, they cannot work ſo well. Yet the Mines are ſo nigh the mountains, that as the Rivers ſoon riſe, ſo they are foon down again ; and preſently after the Rain is the beſt ſearching for Gold in the Sands: for the violent Rains do waſh down the Gold intɔ the Ri- vers, where much of it ſettles to the bottom, and re- mains. Then the Native Indians who live here- abouts get moſt ; and of them the Spaniards buy more Gold than their Slaves get by working. I have been told that they get the value of 5 Shillings a day: one with another. The Spaniards withdraw moſt of them with their Slaves, during the wet ſeaſon, to Panama. At this Town of St. Maria, Captain Townly was lying with his Party, making Canoas, when Captain Gronet came into the Seas; for it was then abandoned by the Spaniards. There is another ſmall new Town at the mouth of the River call'd the Scuchaderoes: It ſtands on the North ſide of the open place, at the mouth of the River of St. Maria, where there is more air than at the Mines, or at Santa Maria Town, where they are in a manner ſtifled with heat for want of air. O 2 All 196 A Prize of two Barks. An.1685 All about theſe Rivers, eſpecially near the Sea, the Land is low, it is deep black Earth, and the Trees it produceth are extraordinary large and high. Thus much concerning the Gulf of St. Michael, whi- ther we are bound. The ſecond day of March, as is ſaid before, we weigh'd from Perico, and the ſame night we anchored again at Pacheque. The third day we failed from thence, ſteering towards the Gulf. Captain Swan undertook to fetch off Captain Townly and his Men: therefore he kept near the Main; but the reſt of the Ships ſtood nearer the Kings Iſlands. Captain Swan deſired this Office, becauſe he intended to ſend Let- ters over-land by the Indians to Jamaica, which he did; ordering the Indians to deliver his Letters to any Engliſh Veſſel in the other Seas. At 2 a clock we were again near the place where we clean'd our Ships. There we ſaw two Ships coming out, who proved to be Captain Townly and his Men. They were coming out of the River in the night, and took 2 Barks bound for Panama; the one was laden with Flower, the other with Wine, Brandy, Sugar, and Oyl. The Priſoners that he took declared, that the Lima Fleet was ready to fail. We went and anchored among the King's Iſlands, and the next day Captain Swan returned out of the River of Santa Maria, being informed by the Indians, that Captain Towvnly was come over to the Kings Iſlands. At this place Captain Towvnly put out a great deal of his Goods to make room for his Men. He diſtributed his Wine and Brandy, fome to every Ship, that it might be drunk out; becauſe he wanted the Jars to carry Water in. The Spaniards in theſe Seas carry all their Wine, Brandy, and Oyl in Jars that hold 7 or 8 Gallons. When they lade at Piſco, (a place a- bout 40 leagues to the Southward of Lima, and fa- mous for Wine) they bring nothing elſe but Jars of Wine, and they ftow one tier on the top of another fo News of more Privateers coming. 197 fo artificially, that we could hardly do the like An.1685 without breaking them: yet they often carry in this manner 1500 or 2000, or more in a Ship, and ſeldom break one. The roth day we took a ſmall Bark that came from Guiaquil : ſhe had nothing in her but Ballaſt. The 12th day there came an In- dian Canoa out of the River of Santa Maria, and told us, that there were 300 Engliſh and French men more coming over Land from the North Seas. The Isth day we met a Bark, with 5 or 6 Engliſh men in her, that belonged to Captain Knight, who had been in the South Seas 5 or 6 months, and was now on the Mexican Coaſt. There he had ſpied this Bark; but not being able to come up with her in his Ship, he detach'd theſe 5 or 6 Men in a Canoa, who took her, but when they had done could not recover their own Ship again, loſing company with her in the night ; and therefore they came into the Bay of Panama, intending to go over land back into the North Seas, but that they luckily met with us : for the Iſthmus of Darien was now become a common Road for Privateers to paſs between the North and South Seas at their pleaſure. This Bark of Captain Knight's had in her 40 or 50 Jars of Brandy: ſhe was now commanded by Mr. Henry More; but Captain Swan, intending to promote Captain Harris, cauſed Mr. More to be turned out, alledging that it was ve- ry likely theſe Men were run away from their Com- mander. Mr. More willingly reſigned her, and went . aboard of Captain Swan, and became one of his Men. It was now the latter end of the dry ſeaſon here; and the Water at the Kings, or Pearl Iſlands, ( of which there was plenty when we firſt came hither ) was now dried away. Therefore we were forced to go to Point Garachina, thinking to water our Ships there. Captain Harris, being now Com- mander of the new Bark, was ſent into the River > O 3 of 198 Porto Pinas. An.1685 of Santa Maria, to ſee for thoſe Men that the Indi- ans told us of, whilſt the reſt of the Ships failed to- wards Point Garachina; where we arrived the 21ſt day, and anchored 2 mile from the Point, and found a ſtrong Tide running out of the River Sambo. The next day we run within the Point, and anchored in four fathom at low Water. The Tide riſeth here 8 or 9 foot: The Flood ſets N.N. E. the Ebb S. S. W. The Indians that inhabit in the River Sambo came to us in Canoas, and brought Plan- tains and Bonanoes. They could not ſpeak, nor underſtand Spaniſh; therefore I believe they have no Commerce with the Spaniards. We found no freſh Water here neither; ſo we went from hence to Port Pinas, which is 7 leagues S. by W. from hence. Porto Pinas liech in lat. 7 d. North. It is ſo called becauſe there are many Pine-Trees growing there. The Land is pretty high, riſing gently as it runs in- to the Country. This Country near the Sea is all covered with pretty high Woods: the Land that bounds the Harbor is low in the middle, but high and rocky at both ſides. At the mouth of the Har- bor there are 2 ſmall high Iſlands, or rather barren Rocks. The Spaniards in their Pilot Books com- mend this for a good Harbor; but it lieth all open to the S. W. Winds, which frequently blow here in the wet ſeaſon: beſides, the Harbor within the Iſlands is a place of but ſmall extent, and hath a very narrow going in ; what depth of Water there is in the Harbor I know not. The 25th day we arrived at this Harbor of Pines, but did not go in with our Ships , find- ing it but an ordinary place to lye at. We ſent in our Boats to ſearch it, and they found a ſtream of good Water running into the Sea: but there were ſuch great ſwelling Surges came into the Harbor, that we could not conveniently fill our Water there. The Bay of Panama. 199 The 26th day we returned to Point Garachina again. An. 1685 In our way we took a finall Veffel laden with Cacao: ſhe came from Guiaquil. The 29th day we arrived at Point Garachina. There we found Cap- tain Harris, who had been in the River of Santa Maria; but he did not meet the Men that he went for. Yet he was informed again by the Indians, that they were making Canoas in one of the branches of the River of Santa Maria. Here we ſhared our Cacao lately taken. Becauſe we could not fill our Water here, we de- ſigned to go to Tabago again, where we were ſure to be ſupply’d. Accordingly, on the zoth day we ſet fail, being now 9 Ships in company; and had a ſmall Wind at S. S. E. The firſt day of April, being in the Channel between the Kings Iſlands and the Main, we had much Thunder, Lightning, and ſome Rain: This evening we anchored at the Iſland Pacheque, and immediately fent 4 Canoas before us to the Iſland Tabago, to take fome Priſo- ners for information, and we followed the next day. The 3d day in the evening we anchored by Perica, and the next morning went to Tabago: where we found our 4 Canoas. They arrived there in the night, and took a Canoa that came (as is uſual ) from Panama for Plantains. There were in the Canoa 4 Indians and a Mulata. The Mulata, be- cauſe he ſaid he was in the Fireſhip that came to burn us in the night, was immediately hang d. Theſe Priſoners confirmed, that one Captain Bond, an Engliſhman, did command her. Here we fill d our Water, and cut Fire-Wood; and from hence we fent 4 Canoas over to the Main, with one of the Indians lately taken, to guide them to a Sugar-Work; for now we had Cacao, we wanted Sugar to make Chocolate. But the chief- eit of their buſineſs was to get Coppers ; for each Ship having now ſo many Men, our Pots would a 04 not 200 Ile of Otoque. An. 1685 not boil Victuals faſt enough, tho' we kept them boiling all the day. About 2 or 3 days after, they returned aboard with 3 Coppers. While we lay here, Captain Davis's Bark went to the Iſland Otoque. This is another inhabited Iſland in the Bay of Panama, not ſo big as Tabago, yet there are good Plantain Walks on it, and ſome Negroes to look after them. Theſe Negroes rear Fowls and Hogs for their Mafters, who live at Pana- ma; as at the Kings Iſlands. It was for ſome Fowls or Hogs that our Men went thither ; but by acci- dent they met alſo with an Expreſs, that was ſent to Panama with an account, that the Lima Fleet was at Sea. Moſt of the Letters were thrown over- board and loft; yet we found ſome that ſaid poſi- tively, that the Fleet was coming with all the Itrength that they could make in the Kingdom of Peru; yet were order'd not to fight us, except they were forc'd to it: (though afterwards they choſe to fight us, having firſt landed their Treaſure at Lavelia) and that the Pilots of Lima had been in conſultation what Courſe to ſteer to miſs us. For the ſatisfaction of thoſe who may be curious to know, I have here inſerted the Reſolutions taken by the Commitee of Pilots, as one of our Company tranſlated them, out of the Spaniſh of two of the Letters we took. The firſt Letter as fol- lows: Having been with bis SIR, Excellency, and heard the Let- ter of Captain Michael Sanches de Tena read; wherein he ſays, there ſhould be a meeting of the Pilots of Panama in the ſaid City, they ſay tis not time, putting for objection the Gallapagoes ; to which I anſwered, that it was fear of the Enemy, and that they might well go that way. I told this to bis Excellency, who was pleaſed to command ma to write the Courſe, which is as follows. The 201 The Spaniſh Fleet's Sailing-Orders. The day for ſailing being come, go forth to the Weſt South An.1685 Weft; from that to Weſt till you are forty leagues off at Sea; then keep at the ſame diſtance to the N.W. till you come under the Line : from whence the Pilot muſt ſhape his Courſe for Moro de Porco, and for the Coaſt of La- velia and Natta : Where you may ſpeak with the People, and according to the information they give, you may keep the ſame Courſe for Otoque, from thence to Tabago, and so to Panama: this is what offers as to the Courſe. The Letter is obfcure: but the Reader muſt make what he can of it. The Directions in the other Letter were to this effect. TH و HE ſureſt Courſe to be obſerved going forth from Malabrigo, is thus : you muſt ſail W. by S. that you may avoid the ſight of the Iſlands of Lobos; and if you ſhould chance to ſee them, by reaſon of the Breezes, and Should fall to Leeward of the Lat. of Malabrigo, keep on a Wind as near as you can, and if neceſſary, go about, and ſtand in for the ſhore : then tack and ſtand off and be ſure keep your Latitude ; and when you are 40 leagues to the Weſtward of the Iſlands Lobos, keep that diſtance till you come under the Line ; and then, if the general Wind follows you farther, you muſt ſail N. N. E. till you come into 3 degrees North. And if in this Lat. you ſhould find the Breezes, make it your buſineſs to keep the Coaſt, and ſo ſail for Panama. If in your Courſe you Should come in light of the Land before you are abreſt of Cape St. Franciſco, be ſure to ſtretch off again out of ſight of Land, that you may not be diſcovered by the Ene- my. The laſt Letter fuppoſes the Fleet's ſetting out from Malabrigo, in about 8 deg. South Lat. (as the other doth its going immediately from Lima, 4 deg. further South) and from hence is that caution given of avoiding Lobos, as near Malabrigo in their uſual 202 Chepelio a pleaſant Ifle. Sapadillo-Tree. An.1685 uſual way to Panama, and hardly to be kept out of fight, as the Winds are thereabouts: yet to be avoid- ed by the Spaniſh Fleet at this time, becauſe as they had twice before heard of the Privateers lying at Lobos de la Mar, they knew not but at that time we might be there in expectation of them. The roth day we failed from Tabago towards the Kings Iſlands again, becauſe our Pilots told us, that the King's Ships did always come this way. The IIth day we anchored at the place where we ca- reen’d. Here we found Captain Harris, who had gone a ſecond time into the River of Santa Maria, and fetched the Body of Men that laſt came over land, as the Indians had informed us: but they fell Short of the number they told us of. The 19th day we ſent 250 Men in 15 Canoas to the River Cheapo, to take the Town of Cheapo. The 21ſt day all our Ships, but Captain Harris, who ftaid to clean his Ship, followed after. The 22d day we arrived at the Iſland Chepelio. Chepelio is the pleaſanteſt Iſland in the Bay of Pa- nama: It is but 7 leagues from the City of Panama, . . and a league from the Main. This Iſland is about 2 2 mile long, and almoſt ſo broad ; it is low on the North ſide, and riſeth by a ſmall aſcent towards the South ſide. The Soil is yellow, a kind of Clay. The high fide is ftony; the low Land is planted with all ſorts of delicate Fruits, viz. Sapadilloes, Avogato-Pears, Mammees, Mammee- Sappota's, Star-Apples, &c. The middle of the Iſland is plant- ed with Plantain-Trees, which are not very large, but the Fruit extraordinary ſweet. The Sapadillo-Tree is as big as a large Pear-Tree. The Fruit much like a Bergamo-Pear, both in co- lour, ſhape and ſize; but on fome Trees the Fruit is a little longer. When it is green or firſt gathered, the juice is white and clammy, and it will Itick like glew; then the Fruit is hard, but after it hath been gathered Avogato Pear. Mammee Sapota-Tree. 203 gathered 2 or 3 days, it grows foft and juicy, and An. 1685 then the juice is clear as Spring-water, and very ſweet: In the midſt of the Fruit are 2 or 3 black ftones or feeds, about the bigneſs of the Pumkin ſeed. This is an excellent Fruit. The Avogato Pear-Tree is as big as moft Pear-Trees, and is commonly pretty high; the skin or bark black and pretty ſmooth; the leaves large, of an oval ſhape, and the Fruit as big as a large Lemon. It is of a green colour, till it is ripe, and then it is a little yellowiſh. They are ſeldom fit to eat till they have been gathered 2 or 3 days; then they become ſoft, and the skin or rind will peel off . The ſubſtance in the inſide is green, or a little yel- lowiſh, and as ſoft as Butter. Within the ſubſtance there is a ſtone as big as a Horſe-plumb. This Fruit hath no taſte of its ſelf, and therefore 'tis uſu- ally mixt with Sugar and Lime-juice, and beaten together in a Plate, and this is an excellent diſh. The ordinary way is to eat it with a little Salt and a roſted Plantain, and thus a Man that's hun- gry, may make a good meal of it. It is very whole- ſome eaten any way. It is reported that this Fruit provokes to luft, and therefore is ſaid to be much eſteemed by the Spaniards; and I do believe they are much eſteemed by them, for I have met with plenty of them in many places in the North Seas, where the Spaniards are ſettled, as in the Bay of Cam- pechy, on the coaſt of Cartagena, and the Coaſt of Carraccos; and there are ſome in Jamaica, which were planted by the Spaniards, when they poſſeſſed that Illand. The Mammee Sapota-Tree is different from the Mammee deſcribed at the Iſle of Tabago in this Chapter. It is not ſo big or ſo tall, neither is the Fruit ſo big or ſo round. The rind of the Fruit is thin and brittle; the inſide is a deep red, and it has a rough flat long ſtone. This is accounted the prin- words a cipal 204 Wild Mammee. Star-apple. Cheapo River. An. 1685 cipal Fruit of the Weſt-Indies. It is very pleaſant and wholeſome. I have not ſeen any of theſe on Jamai- ca; but in many places in the Weſt-Indies among the Spaniards. There is another fort of Mammee- Tree, which is called the wild Mammee: This bears a Fruit which is of no value, but the Tree is ſtreight, tall, and very tough, and therefore princi- pally uſed for making Mafts. The Star-Apple-Tree grows much like the Quince- Tree, but much bigger. It is full of leaves, and the leaf is broad, of an oval ſhape, and of a very dark green Colour. The Fruit is as big as a large Apple, which is commonly ſo covered with leaves, that a man can hardly ſee it. They ſay this is a good Fruit; I did never taſte any, but have ſeen both of the Trees and Fruit in many places on the Main, on the North ſide of the Continent, and in Jamaica. When the Spaniards poſſeft that Iſland they planted this and other ſorts of Fruit, as the Sapadillo, Avogato-Pear, and the like ; and of thefe Fruits there is ſtill in Jamaica in thoſe Planta- tions that were firſt ſettled by the Spaniards, as at the Angels, at 7 mile Walk, and 16 mile Walk. There I have ſeen theſe Trees which were planted by the Spaniards, but I did never ſee any improvement made by the Engliſh, who ſeem in that little curious. The Road for Ships is on the North ſide, where there is good anchoring half a mile from the ſhore. There is a Well cloſe by the Sea on the North ſide, and formerly there were 3 or 4 Houſes cloſe by it , but now they are deſtroyed. This Iſland ſtands right againſt the mouth of the River Cheapo. The River Cheapo ſprings out of the Mountains near the North ſide of the Country, and it being penned up on the South fide by other Mountains , bends its courſe to the Weſtward between both, till finding a paſſage on the S. W. it makes a kind of a half circle: and being ſwell’d to a conſidera- a ble a Cheapo Town. 205 ble bigneſs, it runs with a ſlow motion into the An. 1685 Sea, 7 leagues from Panama. This River is very deep, and about a quarter of a mile broad: but the mouth of it is choaked up with Sands, ſo that no Ships can enter, but Barks may. There is a finall Spaniſh Town of the ſame name within 6 leagues of the Sea: it ſtands on the left hand going from the Sea. This is it which I ſaid Captain La Sound attempted. The Land about it is champion, with many ſmall Hills clothed with Woods; but the biggeſt part of the Country is Savannah. On the South ſide of the River it is all wood-land for many leagues together. It was to this Town that our 250 Men were ſent. The 24th day they returned out of the River, ha- ving taken the Town without any oppoſition : but they found nothing in it. By the way going thi- ther they took a Canoa, but moſt of the Men eſcaped aſhore upon one of the Kings Iſlands : She was ſent out well appointed with armed Men, to watch our motion. The 25th day Captain Harris came to us, having cleaned his Ship. The 26th day we went again toward Tabago; our Fleet now, upon Captain Harris joining us again, conſiſted of 10 Sail. We arriv'd at Tabago the 28th day; there our Priſoners were examined concerning the ſtrength of Panama; for now we thought our ſelves ſtrong enough for ſuch an Enterprize, being near 1000 Men. Out of theſe, on occaſion, we could have landed 900: but our Priſoners gave us ſmall Encouragement to it, for they aſſured us, that all the ſtrength of the Country was there, and that many Men were come from Portobel, beſides its own Inhabitants, who of themſelves were more in number than we. Theſe Reaſons, together with the ſtrength of the place (which hath a high Wall) deterr'd us from attempting it. While we lay here at Tabago, fome of our Men burnt the Town on the Iland. The 206 Iſle of Pacheque. An. 1685 The 4th of May we failed hence again, bound for the King's Iſlands; and there we continu'd cruiſing from one end of theſe Iſlands to the other; till on the 22d day Captain Davis and Captain Gronet went to Pacheque, leaving the reſt of the Fleet at anchor at St. Paul's Iſland. Froin Pacheque we ſent 2 Canoas to the Iſland Chepelio, in hopes to get a Priſoner there. The 25th day our Canoas return'd from Che- pelio, with three Priſoners which they took there: They were Sea-men belonging to Panama, who ſaid that proviſion was ſo ſcarce and dear there, that the poor were almoſt ſtarved; being hindred by us from thoſe common and daily fupplies of Plantains, which they did formerly enjoy from the Iſlands; eſpecially from thoſe two of Chepelio and Tabago. That the Preſident of Panama had ſtrictly ordered, that none ſhould adventure to any of the Iſlands for Plantains : but neceſſity had obliged them to treſpaſs againſt the Preſident's Order. They far- ther reported, that the Fleet from Lima was ex- pected every day; for it was generally talked that they were come from Lima: and that the report at Panama was, that King Charles II. of England was dead, and that the Duke of York was crowned King. The 27th day Captain Swan and Captain Townly al- ſo came to Pacheque, where we lay: but Captain Swan's Bark was gone in among the Kings Iſlands for Plantains. The Iſland Pacheque, as I have before related, is the northermoſt of the Kings Iſlands. It is a ſmall low Iſland about a league round. On the South ſide of it there are 2 or 3 ſmall Iſlands, nei- ther of them half a mile round. Between Pacheque and theſe Iſlands is a ſmall Channel not above 6 or 7 paces wide, and about a mile long. Through this Captain Townly made a bold run, being preſt hard by the Spaniards in the fight I am going to ſpeak of, though he was ignorant whether there was a ſufficient depth of Water or not. On the Eaſt ſide of Spaniſh Fleet from Lima: their Strength. 207 of this Channel all our Fleet lay waiting for the An.1685 Lima Fleet, which we were in hopes would come this way The 28th day we had a very wet morning, for the Rains were come in, as they do uſually in May, or fune, fooner or later ; fo that May is here a very uncertain month. Hitherto, till within a few days, we had had good fair weather, and the Wind at N. N. E. but now the weather was altered, and the Wind at S.S. W. However about eleven a-clock it cleared up, and we ſaw the Spaniſh Fleet about 3 leagues W. N. W. 3 from the Iſland Pacheque, ftanding cloſe on a Wind to the Eaſtward; but they could not fetch the Iſland by a league. We were riding a league S. E. from the Iſland, between it and the Main; only Captain Gronet was about a mile to the Northward of us near the Iſland: he weighed fo ſoon as they came in light, and ſtood over for the Main; and we lay ftill, expecting when he would tack and come to us: but he took care to keep himſelf out of Captain Swan and Townly came aboard of Cap- tain Davis, to order how to engage the Enemy, who we ſaw came purpoſely to fight us, they being in all 14 Sail, beſides Periagoes, rowing with 12 and 14 Oars apiece. Six Sail of them were Ships of good force : firſt the Admiral 48 Guns, 450 Men; the Vice-Admiral 40 Guns, 400 Men; the Rear- Admiral 36 Guns, 360 Men; a Ship of 24. Guns, 300 Men; one of 18 Guns, 250 Men; and one of eight Guns, 200 Men; 2 great Fireſhips, 6 Ships only with ſmall Arms, having 800 Men on board them all; beſides 2 or 3 hundred Men in Periagoes. This account of their Strength we had afterwards from Captain Knight, who being to the Windward on the Coaſt of Peru, took Priſoners, of whom he had this Information, being what they brought from harms way. : 208 The Privateers Strength. An.1685 from Lima. Beſides theſe Men, they had alſo ſome hundreds of old Spain Men that came from Portobel, and met them at Lavelia, from whence they now came: and their ſtrength of Men from Lima was 3000 Men, being all the ſtrength they could make in that Kingdom; and for greater ſecurity, they had firſt landed their Treaſure at Lavelia. Our Fleet conſiſted of 10 Sail : firſt Captain Da- vis 36 Guns, 156 Men, moſt Engliſh; Captain Swan 16 Guns, 140 Men, all Engliſh : Theſe were the only Ships of force that we had ; the reſt having nonę but ſmall Arms. Captain Townly had 110 Men, all Engliſh. Captain Gronet 308 Men, all French. Captain Harris 100 Men, moſt Engliſh. Captain Branly 36 Men, fome Engliſh fome French. Davis his Tender 8 Men; Swan's Tender 8 Men; Townly's Bark 80 Men; and a ſmall Bark of thirty Tuns made a Fireſhip, with a Canoas Crew in her. We had in all 960 Men. But Captain Gronet came not to us till all was over, yet we were not dif- couraged at it, but reſolved to fight them ; for be- ing to Windward of the Enemy, we had it at our choice, whether we would fight or not. It was 3 a-clock in the afternoon when we weighed, and being all under fail, we bore down right afore the Wind on our Enemies, who kept cloſe on a Wind to come to us; but night came on without any thing, beſide the exchanging of a few ſhot on each ſide. When it grew dark the Spaniſh Admiral put out a light, as a ſignal for his Fleet to come to an Anchor. We ſaw the light in the Admiral's top, which continued about half an hour, and then it was taken down. In a ſhort time after we ſaw the light again, and being to Windward, we kept under fail, fuppoſing the light had been in the Ad- miral's top; but as it proved, this was only a Stra- tagem of theirs; for this light was put out the fe- cond time at one of their Barks Topmaft-head, and then a A Sea Fight. 209 then ſhe went to the Leeward; which deceived us : An.168$ for we thought fill the light was in the Admirals top, and by that means thought our ſelves to wind- ward of them. In the morning therefore, contrary to our ex- pectation, we found they had got the Weather-gage of us, and were coming upon us with full Sail: lo we ran for it, and after a running Fight all day, and having taken a turn almoſt round the Bay of Panama, we came to an anchor again at the lile of Pacheque, in the vrey ſame place from whence we ſet out in the morning. Thus ended this days work, and with it all that we had been projecting for 5 or 6 months : when inſtead of making our felves Maſters of the Spaniſh Fleet and Treaſure, we were glad to eſcape them ; and owed that too, in a great meaſure, to their want of courage to purſue their advantage. The 3cth day in the morning, when we looked out, we ſaw the Spaniſh Fleet all together, 3 leagues to Leeward of us, at an anchor. It was but little Wind till 10 a-clock, and then ſprung up a fmall breeze at South, and the Spaniſh Fleet went away to Panama. What loſs they had I know not; we loſt but one Man: and having held a conſult, we re- folved to go to the Keys of Quibo or Cobaya, to ſeek Captain Harris, who was forced away from us in the Fight: that being the place appointed for our Rendezvous upon any ſuch accident. As for Gronet, he ſaid his Men would not ſuffer him to joyn us in the Fight : but we were not fatisfy'd with that ex- cuſe; ſo we ſuffer'd him to go with us to the Iles of Quiboa, and there caſhier'd our cowardly Compani- on. Some were for taking from him the ship which we had given him: but at length he was ſuffered to keep it with his Men, and we ſent them away in it to ſome other place. P СНАР. 210 "An. 1685 CHAP. VIII. They ſet out from Tabago, Iſle of Chuche The Mountain calld Moro de Porcos. The Coaſt to the Weſtward of the Bay of Panama. Ilies of Quibo, Quicaro, Rancheria. The Palma- Maria-tree. The Iſles Cannales and Cantarras. They build Canoas for a New Expedition ; and take Puebla Nova. Captain Knight joins them. Canoas how made. The Coaſt and Winds between Quibo and Nicoya. Volcan Vejo again. Tornadoes and the Sea rough. Rea Lejo Harbour. The City of Leon taken and burnt. Rea Lejo Creek; the Town and Commodities : the Guava-fruit, and Prickle- Pear : A Ranſom paid honourably upon Pa- role : The Town burnt. Captain Davis and others go off for the South Coaſt. A contagi. ous Sickneſs at Rea Lejo, Terrible Tornadoes. The Volcan of Guatimala : the rich Commodi- ties of that Country, Indico, Otta or Anatta, Cochineel, Silveſter. Drift Wood, and Pu- mice Stones. The Coaſt further on to the North- meſt. Captain Townly's fruitleſs Expedi- tion towards Tecoantepeque. The Iſland Tangola, and neighbouring Continent. Gua- tulco Port. The Buffadore, or Water. Spout. Ruins of Guatulco Village. The Coaſt ad- joining. Captain Townly marches to the Ri- ver Capalita. Turtle at Guatulco. An Indian Settlement. The Vinella Plant and Fruit. : A , Ccording to the Reſolutions we had taken, we ſet out June the iſt, 1685. paſſing be- A we tween 2II Iſe Chuche. Moro de Porcos. tween Point Garachina and the King's Iſlands. The An. 1685 Wind was at S. S. W. rainy weather, with Torna- does of Thunder and Lightning. The 3d day we paſſed by the Iſland Chuche, the laſt remainder of the Iſles in the Bay of Panama. This is a ſmall, low, round, woody Iſland, uninhabited ; lying 4 leagues S. S. W. from Pacheca. In our paſſage to Quibo Captain Branly loſt his Main-Maſt; therefore he and all his Men left his Bark, and came aboard Captain Davis his Ship: Captain Swan alſo ſprung his Maintop-Maſt, and got up another; but while he was doing it, and we were making the beſt of our way, we loft fight of him, and were now on the North fide of the Bay; for this way all Ships muſt paſs from Panama, whether bound towards the Coaſt of Mexico or Peru. The 10th day we paſſed by Moro de Porcos, or the Mountain of Hogs. Why ſo called I know not: it is a high round Hill on the coaſt of Lavelia. This ſide of the Bay of Panama runs out weſterly to the Iſlands of Quibo; there are on this Coaſt ma- ny Rivers and Creeks, but none fo large as thoſe on the South ſide of the Bay. It is a Coaſt that is partly Mountainous, partly low Land, and very thick of Woods bordering on the Sea; but a few leagues within land it conſiſts moſtly of Savannahs, which are ſtock'd with Bulls and Ćows. The Ri- vers on this ſide are not wholly deſtitute of Gold, though not ſo rich as the Rivers on the other ſide of the Bay. The Coaſt is but thinly inhabited, for except the Rivers that lead up to the Towns of Nata and Lavelia, I know of no other Settlement between Panama and Puebla Nova. The Spaniards may travel by land from Panama through all the Kingdom of Mexico, as being full of Savannahs 3 but towards the Coaſt of Peru they cannot paſs fur- ther than the River Cheapo ; the Land there being ſo full of thick Woods, and watered with ſo many P 2 greant 212 а The Iſles of Quibo. Palma-Maria Tree. An.1685 great Rivers, beſides leſs Rivers and Creeks, that the Indians themfelves who inhabit there cannot travel far without much trouble. We met with very wet Weather in our Voyage to Quibo ; and with S. S. W. and ſometimes S. W. Winds, which retarded our courſe. It was the 15th day of June when we arrived at Quibo, and found there Captain Harris whom we fought. The Iland Quibo or Cabaya is in lat. 7 d. 14 m. North of . the Equator. It is about 6 or 7 leagues long, and 3 or 4 broad. The Land is low, except only near 4 the N. E. end. It is all over plentifully ſtored with great tall flouriſhing Trees of many forts; and there is good Water on the Eaſt and North Eaſt fides of the Illand. Here are ſome Deer, and plenty of pretty large black Monkies, whoſe Fleſh is ſweet and wholeſome ; beſides a few Guanoes, and ſome Snakes. I know no other fort of Land Animal on the Iſand. There is a ſhole runs out from the S. E. point of the Iſland, half a mile into the Sea ; and a league to the North of this ſhole point, on the Eaſt fide, there is a Rock about a mile from the ſhore, which at the laſt quarter Ebb appears above Water. Beſides theſe two places there is no danger on this fide, but Ships may run within a quarter of a mile of the ſhore, and anchor in 6, 8, 10, or 12 fathom, good, clean Sand and Oaze. There are many other Ilands lying ſome on the S. W. fide, others on the N. and N. E. ſides of this Iſland; as the Iſland Quicaro, which is a pretty large Iſland S. W. of Quibo, and on the North of it is a ſmall Iſland called the Rancheria; on which Iſland are plenty of Palma-Maria Treesa The Palma- Maria is a tall ſtraight-bodied Tree, with a ſmall Head, but very unlike the Palm-Tree, notwith- ſtanding the name. It is greatly eſteemed for ma- king Mafts, being very tough, as well as of a good length; for the grain of the Wood runs not ſtraight along a . Puebla Nova taken. 213 along it, but twiſting gradually about it. Theſe Trees An.1685 grow in many places of the Weſt Indies, and are fre- quently uſed both by the Engliſh and Spaniards there for that uſe. The Iſlands Canales and Cantarras, are ſmall Iſlands lying on the N. E. of Rancheria. Theſe have all Channels to paſs between, and good an- choring about them; and they are as well ſtored with Trees and Water as Quibo. Sailing without them all, they appear to be part of the Main. The Iſland Quibo is the largeſt and moſt noted; for al- though the reſt have Names. yet they are feldom uſed only for diſtinction fake : thefe, and the reſt of this knot, paſſing all under the common name of the Keys of Quibo. Captain Swan gave to ſeveral of theſe Iſlands the Names of thoſe Engliſh Merchants and Gentlemen who were Owners of his Ship. fune 16th Captain Swan came to an anchor by us : and then our Captains conſulted about new methods to advance their fortunes : and becauſe they were now out of hopes to get any thing at Sea, they reſolved to try what the Land would afford. They demanded of our Pilots what Towns on the coaſt of Mexico they could carry us to. The City of Leon being the chiefeſt in the Country (any thing near us ) tho' a pretty way within Land, was pitcht on. But now we wanted Canoas to land our Men, and we had no other way but to cut down Trees, and make as many as we had oc- caſion for: Theſe Iſlands affording plenty of large Trees fit for our purpoſe. While this was doing, we ſent 150 Men to take Puebla Nova (a Town upon the Main near the innermoft of theſe Iſlands ) to get Proviſion: It was in going to take this Town that Captain Sawkins was killed, in the year 1680, who was ſucceeded by Sharp. Our Men took the Town with much eaſe; although there was more ſtrength of Men than when Captain Sawkins was kill'd. They return'd again the 24th day, but got a P 3 no a 214 The manner of making Canoas. An. 1685 no Proviſion there. They took an empty Bark in their way, and brought her to us. The sth day of fuly Captain Knight, mentioned in my laſt Chapter, came to us. He had been crui- fing a great way to the Weſtward, but got nothing beſide a good Ship. At laſt he went to the South- ward, as high as the Bay of Guiaquil, where he took a Bark-log, or pair of Bark-logs as we call it, laden chiefly with Flower. She had other Goods, as Wine, Oyl, Brandy, Sugar, Soap, and Leather of Goats-Skins; and he took out as much of each as he had occaſion for, and then turned her away again. The Maſter of the Float told him, that the King's Ships were gone from Lima towards Panama : that they carry'd but half the King's Treaſure with them, for fear of us, although they had all the ftrength that the Kingdom could afford : that all the Merchant-Ships which ſhould have gone with them were laden, and lying at Payta, where they were to wait for further Orders. Captain Knight having but few Men, did not dare to go to Payta, where, if he had been better provided, he might have taken them all; but he made the beſt of his way into the Bay of Panama, in hopes to find us there inriched with the Spoils of the Lima Fleet; but coming to the Kings Ijiands, he had advice by a Priſoner, that we had ingaged with their Fleet, but were worfted, and ſince that made our way to the Weftward; and therefore he came hither to He preſently conforted with us, and ſet his Men to work to make Canoas. Every Ship’s Company made for themſelves; but we all helped each other to launch them; for ſome were made a mile from the Sea. The manner of making a Canoa is, after cutting down a large long Tree, and ſquaring the upper- moſt fide, and then turning it upon the flat fide, to ſhape the oppoſite ſide for the bottom. Then again they ſeek us. 2 They fvil from Quibo for Rea Lejo. 215 they turn her, and dig the inſide ; boring alſo three An.1685 holes in the bottom, one before, one in the mid- dle, and one abaft thereby to gage the thickeſt of the bottom; for otherwiſe we might cut the bottom thinner than is convenient. We left the bottoms commonly about 3 inches thick, and the ſides 2 inches thick below, and one and an half at the top. One or both of the ends we ſharpen to a point. Captain Davis made two very large Canoas: one was 36 foot long, and 5 or 6 feet wide; the other 32 foot long, and near as wide as the other. In a months time we finiſh'd our buſineſs and were ready to fail. Here Captain Harris went to lay his Ship aground to clean her, but ſhe being old and rot- ton fell in pieces : and therefore he and all his Men went aboard of Captain Davis and Captain Swan. While we lay here we ſtruck Turtle every day, for they were now very plentiful; but from Auguſt to March here are not many. The 18th day of July, Fohn Roſe, a Frenchman, and 14 men more, belonging to Captain Gronet, having made a new Canoa, came in her to Captain Davis, and deſired to ſerve under him ; and Captain Davis accepted of them, becauſe they had a Canoa of their own. The 20th day of July we failed from Quibo, bend- ing our courſe for Rea Lejo, which is the Port for Leon, the City that we now deſign'd to attempt. We were now 640 men in 8 fail of Ships, Com- manded by Captain Davis, Captain Swan, Captain Townly, and Captain Knight with a Fireſhip, and 3 Tenders, which laſt had not a conſtant crew. We paft out between the River Quibo and the Rancheria, leaving Quibo and Qisicaro on our Larboard ſide, and the Rancheria, with the reſt of the Iſlands, and the Main on our Starboardſide. The Wind at firſt was at South South Weſt, We coaſted along Shore paſſing by the Gulf of Nicoya, the Gulf of Dulce, and by the Iſland Caneo. All this Coaft is low Land, a P 4 Over- 216 Volcan Vejo. An.1685 overgrown with thick Woods, and there are but few inhabitants near the fhore. As we failed to the Weſtward, we had variable Winds, ſometimes S. W. and at W.S. W. and ſometimes at E. N. E. but we had them moſt commonly at S. W. we had a Tornado or two every day, and in the evening or in the night, we had Land-winds at N. N. E. The 8th day of huguft, being in the lat. of 11d. 20 m. by obſervation, we ſaw a high Hill in the Country, towring up like a Sugar-loaf, which bore N. E. by N. We ſuppoſed it to be Volcan Vejo, by the ſmoak which afcended from its top; therefore we fieered in North, and made it plainer, and then knew it to be that Volean, which is the Sea-mark for the Harbour for Rea Lejo; for, as I ſaid before, in Chapter the sth, it is a very remarkable Moun- tain. When we had brought this Mountain to bear N. E. we got out all our Canoas, and provided to embark into them them the next day. The oth day in the morning, being about 8 leagues from the ſhore, we left our Ships under the charge of a few Men, and 520 of us went away in 31 Canoas, rowing towards the Harbour of Rea Lejo. We had fair Weather, and little Wind till 2 a-clock in the afternoon, then we had a Tornado from the ſhore, with much Thunder, Lightning, and Rain, and ſuch a guft of Wind, that we were allike to be founder'd. In this extremity we put right afore the Wind, every Canoas Crew making what shift they could to avoid the threatning dan- ger. The ſmall Canoas being moſt light and buoyant, mounted nimbly over the Surges, but the great heavy Canoas lay like logs in the Seas, ready c) be ſwallow'd by every foaming Billow. Some of our Canoas were half full of Water, yet kept two Men conſtantly heaving it out. The fierceneſs of the Wind continu'd about half an hour, and a-- bated by degrees; and as the Wind died away, lo the Tornadoes. 217 che fury of the Sea abated : for in all hot Countries An. 1685 as I have obſerved, the Sea is ſoon raiſed by the Wind, and as ſoon down again when the Wind is gone; and therefore it is a Proverb among the Sea- ; men, Up Wind, up Sea : Down Wind, down Sea. At 7 a-clock in the evening it was quite calm, and the Sea as ſmooth as a Mill-pond. Then we tugged to get into the ſhore, but finding we could not do it before day, we rowed off again, to keep our ſelves out of ſight. By that time it was day, we were s leagues from the Land, which we thought was far enough off ſhore. Here we jutended to lie till the evening, but at 3 a-clock in the afternoon we had another Tornado, .more fierce than that which we had the day before. This put us in greater peril of our Lives, but did not laſt ſo long. As ſoon as the violence of the Tornado was over, we rowed in for the ſhore, and entered the Harbour in the night: The Creek which leads towards Leon, lieth on the S. E. ſide of the Harbour. Our Pilot being very well acquainted here, carry'd us into the mouth of it, but could carry us no farther till day, becauſe it is but a ſmall Creek, and there are other Creeks like it. The next morning as ſoon as it was light, we rowed into the Creek, which is very narrow; the Land on both ſides lying ſo low, that every Tide it is overflown with the Sea. This fort of Land produceth red Mangrove-Trees, which are here ſo plentiful and thick, that there is no palling thro them. Beyond theſe Mangroves on the firm Land, cloſe by the ſide of the River, the Spaniards have built a Breaſt-work, purpoſely to hinder an Enemy from landing. When we came in light of the Breaſt-work, we rowed as faſt as we could to get alhore: The noiſe of our Oars alarmed the Indians, who were ſet to watch, and preſently they ran a- way towards the City of Leon, to give notice of our approach. We landed as ſoon as we could, and marched a 218 City of Leon, and Country adjacent. An. 1685 marched after them : 470 men were drawn out to march to the Town, and I was left with 59 men more, to ſtay and guard the Canoas 'till they return. The City of Leon, is 20 mile up in the Country: The way to it plain and even, through a champion Country, of long graſſy Savannahs, and ſpots of high Woods. About 5 mile from the landing-place there is a Sugar work, 3 mile farther there is ano- ther, and 2 mile beyond that, there is a fine Ri- ver to ford, which is not very deep, beſides which, there is no water in all the way, till you come to an Indian Town, which is 2 mile before you come to the City, and from thence it is a pleaſant ſtraight ſandy way to Leon. This City ſtands in a plain not far from a high peeked Mountain, which oftentimes cafts forth fire and ſmoak from its top. It may be ſeen at Sea, and it is call'd the Volcan of Leon. The Houſes of Leon are not high built, but ſtrong and large, with Gardens about them. The Walls are Stone, and the covering of Pan-tile : There are 3 Churches and a Cathedral, which is the head Church in theſe parts. Our Countryman Mr. Gage, who travelled in theſe parts , recommends it to the World, as the pleaſanteft place in all America, and calls it the Paradice of the Indies. Indeed if we conſider the advantage of its ſituation, we may find it furpaffing moft places, for health and pleaſure, in America, for the Country about it is of a ſandy Soil, which foon drinks up all the Rain that falls, to which theſe parts are much ſubject. It is in- compaſſed with Savannahs; ſo that they have the benefit of the breezes coming from any quarter, all which makes it a very healthy place. It is a place of no great Trade, and therefore not rich in money. Their wealth lies in their Paſtures, and Cattle, and Plantations of Sugar. It is ſaid that they make Cordage here of Hemp, but if they have any ſuch Manufactory, it is at ſome diſtance from City of Leon taken. 219 from the Town, for here is no ſign of any ſuch An.1685 thing. Thither our Men were now marching ; they went from the Canoas about 8 a clock. Captain Townly with 80 of the briskeft Men marched be- fore, Captain Swan with 100 Men marched next, and Captain Davis with 107 Men marched next, and Captain Knight brought up the Rear. Captain Townly, who was near 2 mile a head of the reſt, met about 70 Horſemen 4 mile before he came to the City, but they never ſtood him. About 3 a clock Captain Townly only with his 80 Men enter- ed the Town, and was briskly charged in a broad Street, with 170 or 200 Spaniſh Horſemen, but 2 or 3 of their Leaders being knock'd down, the reſt fled. Their Foot conſiſted of about soo Men, which were drawn up in the Parade ; for the Spaniards in theſe parts make a large ſquare in every Town, tho' the Town it ſelf be ſmall. This ſquare is cal- led the Parade : commonly the Church makes one ſide of it, and the Gentlemen's Houſes with their Galleries about them the other. But the Foot alſo ſeeing their Horſe retire, left an empty City to Captain Towvnly; beginning to ſave themſelves by flight. Captain Swan came in about 4 a clock, Captain Davis with his Men about 5, and Cap- , tain Knight with as many Men as he could incou- rage to march, came in about 6, but he left many Men tired on the Road; theſe, as is uſual, came dropping in one or two at a time, as they were a- ble. The next morning the Spaniards killd one of our tired Men; he was a ſtout old Grey-headed Man, aged about 84, who had ſerved under Olivir in the time of the Iriſh Rebellion; after which he was at Famaica, and had followed Privateering e- ver ſince. He would not accept of the offer our Men made him to tarry aſhore, but ſaid he would venture as far as the beſt of them; and when ſur- rounded 220 City of Leon burnt. "An. 1685 rounded by the Spaniards he refuſed to take quarter, but diſcharged his Gun amongſt them, keeping a Piſtol ſtill charged, ſo they ſhot him dead at a di- ftance. His name was Swan; he was a very mer- ry hearty old Man, and always uſed to declare he would never take quarter : But they took Mi. Smith, who was tired alſo; he was a Merchant belonging to Captain Swan, and being carried before the Governour of Leon, was known by a Mulatto Wo- man that waited on him. Mr. Smith had lived ma- ny years in the Canaries, and could ſpeak and write very good Spaniſh, and it was there this Mulatto Woman remembred him. He being examined how many Men we were, ſaid 1000 at the City, and 5oo at the Canoas, which made well for us at the Canoas, who ftraggling about every day might ea- fily have been deſtroyed. But this fo daunted the Governour, that he did never offer to moleft our Men, although he had with him above 1000 Men, as Mr. Smith gueſſed. He fent in a Flag of Truce about noon, pretending to ranfom the Town ra- ther than let it be burnt; but our Captains de- manded 300000 pieces of Eight for its ranſom, and as much Proviſion as would victual 1000 Men 4 . months, and Mr. Smith to be ranfomed for ſome of their Priſoners; but the Spaniards did not in- tend to ranſom the Town, but only capitulated day after day to prolong time till they had got more Men. Our Captains therefore conſidering the di- ſtance that they were from the Canoas, reſolved to be marching down. The 14th day in the morning they ordered the City to be ſet on fire, which was prefently done, and then they came away: but they took more time in coming down than in go- ing up. The 15th day in the morning the Spaniards fent in Mr. Smith, and had a Gentlewoman in ex- change. Then our Captains fent a Letter to the Governour, to acquaint him, that they intended next Rea Lejo Harbour and Town. 221 next to viſit Rea Lejo, and defired to meet him there : An. 1685 they alſo releaſed a Gentleman on his promiſe of paying 150 Beefs for his Ranſom, and to deliver them to us at Rea Lejo ; and the ſame day our Men came to their Canoas; where having ſtaid all night, the next morning we all entered our Canoas, and came to the Harbour of Rea Lejo, and in the after- noon our Ships came thither to an anchor. The Creek that leads to Rea Lejo Iyeth from the N. W. part of the Harbour, and it runs in Norther- ly. It is about 2 leagues from the Iſland in the Harbours mouth to the Town ; two thirds of the way it is broad, then you enter a narrow deep Creek, bordered on both ſides with Red Mangrove Trees, whoſe limbs reach almoſt from one ſide to the other. A mile from the mouth of the Creek it turns away Weft. There the Spaniards have made a very ſtrong Breaſtwork, fronting towards the mouth of the Creek, in which were placed 100 Soldiers to hinder us from landing: and 20 yards below that Breaftwork there was a Chain of great Trees placed croſs the Creek, ſo that Io Men could have kept off soo or 1000. When we came in ſight of the Breaftwork we fired but two Guns, and they all ran away : and we were afterwards near half an hour cutting the Boom or Chain. Here we landed, and marched to the Town of Rio Lexo, or Rea Lejo, which is a- bout a mile from hence. This Town ſtands on a Plain by a ſmall River. It is a pretty large Town with 3 Churches, and an Hoſpital that hath a fine Garden belonging to it: beſides many large fair Houſes, they all ſtand at a good diſtance one from another, with Yards about them. This is a very fickly place, and I believe hath need enough of an Hoſpital; for it is feated ſo nigh the Creeks and Swamps, that it is never free from a noiſom ſmell. The Land about it is a ſtrong yellow Clay : yet where a 222. а The Guava. Prickle-Pear. An. 1685 where the Town ſtands it ſeems to be Sand. Here are ſeveral forts of Fruits, as Guavo's, Pine-Apples, Melons, and Prickle-Pears. The Pine-Apple and Melon are well known. The Guava Fruit grows on a hard ſcrubbed Shrub, whoſe Bark is ſmooth and whitiſh, the branches pretty long and ſmall, the leaf ſomewhat like the leaf of a Hazel, the fruit much like a Pear, with a thin rind; it is full of ſmall hard feeds, and it may be eaten while it is green, which is a thing very rare in the Indies: for moſt Fruit, both in the Eaſt or Weſt-Indies, is full of clammy, white, unſa- vory juice, before it is ripe, though pleaſant enough afterwards. When this Fruit is ripe it is yellow, foft, and very pleaſant. It bakes as well as a Pear, and it may be coddled and it makes good Pies. There are of divers forts different in ſhape, taſte, and co- lour. The inſide of ſome is yellow, of others red. When this Fruit is eaten green it is binding, when ripe it is looſening The Prickle-Pear, Bush, or Shrub, of about 4 or 5 foot high, grows in many places of the Weſt- Indies, as at famaica, and moſt other Iſlands there; and on the Main in ſeveral places. This prickly Shrub delights moft in barren fandy grounds; and they thrive beſt in places that are near the Sea ; eſpecially where the Sand is ſaltish. The Tree, or Shrub, is 3 or 4 foot high, ſpeading forth ſeveral branches; and on each branch 2 or 3 leaves. Theſe leaves (if I may call them ſo ) are round, as broad every way as the Palm of a Man's hand, and as a thick; their ſubſtance like Houſeleek: theſe leaves are fenced round with ſtrong Prickles above an inch long. The Fruit grows at the farther edge of the leaf; it is as big as a large Plumb, growing ſmall near the leaf, and big towards the top, where it . opens like a Medlar. This Fruit at firſt is green like the leaf,, from whence it ſprings with ſmall Prickles about a Rea Lejo burnt. 223 about it: but when ripe, it is of a deep red colour. An.1685 The inſide is full of ſmall black feeds, mixt with a certain red Pulp like thick Syrup: it is very pleaſant in taſte, cooling, and refreſhing; but if a Man eats 15 or 20 of them, they will colour his Water, making it look like blood. This I have often expe- riencd, yet found no harm by it. There are many Sugar-works in the Country, and Eſtantions or Beef Farms : There is alſo a great deal of Pitch, Tar, and Cordage, made in the Country, which is the chief of their Trade. This Town we approach'd without any oppoſition, and found nothing but empty Houſes: beſides ſuch things as they could not, or would not, carry a- way, which were chiefly about soo Packs of Flow- er, brought hither in the great Ship that we left at Amapalla, and ſome Pitch, Tar, and Cordage. Theſe things we wanted, and therefore we ſent them all aboard. Here we received 150 Beefs, promiſed by the Gentleman that was releaſed com- ing from Leon ; beſides we viſited the Beef Farms every day, and the Sugar-works, going in ſmall companies of 20 or 30 Men, and brought away every Man his load : for we found no Horſes, which if we had, yet the ways were ſo wer and dirty, that they would not have been ſerviceable We ſtay'd here froni the 17th till the 24th day, and then ſome of our deſtructive Crew ſet fire to the Houſes : I know not by whoſe order, but we march'd away and left them burning: at the Breſt-work, we imbarked into our Canoas, and re- turned aboard our Ships. The 25th day Captain Davis and Captain Swan broke off Confortſhips ; for Captain Davis was minded to return again on the coaſt of Peru, but Captain Swan deſir'd to go farther to the Weſt- ward. I had till this time been with Captain Davis, but now left him, and went aboard of Captain Swan to us. 224 Malignant Fevers. An. 1685 Swan. It was not from any diſlike to my old Cap- tain, but to get fome knowledge of the Northern parts of this Continent of Mexico: and I knew that Captain Swan determined to coaſt it as far North as he thought convenient, and then paſs over for the Eaſt Indies; which was a way very agreeable to my inclination. Captain Townly, with his two Barks, was reſolved to keep us company : but Captain Knight and Captain Harris followed Captain Davis. The 27th day in the morning Captain Davis with his Ships went out of the Harbour, having a freſh Land-wind. They were in Company, Captain Davis's Ship with Captain Harris in her, Captain Davis's Bark and Fireſhip, and Captain Knight in his own Ship; in all 4 Sail. Captain Swan took his laſt farewel of him, by firing 15 Guns, and he fired 11 in return of the civility. We ſtay'd here ſome time afterwards to fill our Water, and cut Fire-wood: but our Men, who had been very healthy till now, began to fall down apace in Fevers. Whether it was the badneſs of the Water, or the unhealthineſs of the Town was the cauſe of it, we did not know; but of the two ] rather believe it was a Diſtemper we got at Rea Lejo : for it was reported that they had been viſited with a Malignant Fever in that Town, which had occaſion'd many people to abandon it; and al- though this Viſitation was over with them, yet their Houſes and Goods might ftill retain fomewhat of the Infection, and communicate the ſame to us. I the rather believe this, becauſe it afterwards raged very much, not only among us, but alſo among Captain Davis and his Men, as he told me himſelf ſince, when I met him in England: Himſelf had like to have died, as did ſeveral of his and our Men. The 3d day of September we turned aſhore all our Priſoners and Pilots, they being unacquainted fur- ther to the Weſt, which was the Coaſt that we de- ligned Tornadoes. Volcan, and City of Guatamala. 225 ſigned to viſit: for the Spaniards have very little An.1685 Trade by Sea, beyond the River Lempa, a little to the North Weſt of this place. About 10 a clock in the morning the fame day, we went from hence, ſteering Weſtward, being in company 4 Sail, as well as they who left us, viz. Caprain Swan and his Bark, and Captain Townly and his Bark, and about 340 Men. We mee with very bad weather as we fail'd along this Coaſt : feldom a day paſt but we had one or two violent Tornadoes, and with them very frighe- ful Flaſhes of Lightning and Claps of Thunder ; I did never meet with the like before nor ſince. Theſe Tornadoes commonly came out of the N. E. the Wind did not laſt long, but blew very fierce for the time. When the Tornadoes were over we had the Wind at W. fometimes at W. S. W. and S. W. and ſometimes to che Norch of the Weſt, as far as the N: W. We kepe at a good diſtance off ſhore, and faw no Land till the 14th day; but then being in lat. 12 d. som. the Volcan of Guat amala appeared in fight. This is a very high Mountain with two peeks or heads, appearing like two Sugar-loaves. Ic often belches forch Flames of Fire and Smoak from between the two heads, and this, as the Spaniards do report, happens chiefly in tempeſtuous weather. It is called ſo from the City Guatamala which ſtands near the foot of ic, about 3 leagues from the South Sea, and by report, 40 or so leagues from the Gulf of Marique in the Bay of Honduras, in the North Seas. This City is famous for many rich Commo- dities chac are produced thereabours (ſome almoſt peculiar to this Country,) and yearly ſent into Europe, eſpecially 4 rich Dies, Indico, Otra or Anatia, Silveſter, and Cochineel. Indico is made of an Herb which grows a foot and a half or 2 foot high, full of ſmall branches ; Q and a 226 Indico. Otta or Anatta. 7,1685 and the branches full of leaves, reſembling the leaves which grow on Flax, but more thick and ſubſtantial. They cut this Herb or Shrub and caſt it into a large Ciſtern made in the ground for that purpoſe, wbich is half full of Water: The Indico Stalk or Herb remains in the Water till all the leaves, and I think, the skin, the rind, or bark, rot off, and in a manner diſſolve : but if any of the leaves ſhould ſtick faſt, they force them off by much labour coffing and tumbling the maſs inthe water, till all the pulpy ſubſtance is diſſolved. Then the Shrub, or woody part, is taken out, and the Water, which is like Ink, being diſturbed no more ſettles, and the Indico falls to the bottom of the Ciſtern like Mud. When it is thus ſeccled they draw off the Water, and take the Mud and lay it in the Sun to dry, which there becomes bard, as you ſee it brought home. Otca, or Anatta, is a red ſort of Dye. It is made of a red Flower that grows on Shrubs 7 or 8 foot high. Ic is thrown into a Ciſtern of Water as the Indico is, but with this difference, that there is no ſtalk, nor ſo much as the head of the Flower, but only che Flower ic ſelf pulld off from the head, as you peel Roſe leaves from the bud. This remains in the Water till it rots, and by much jumbling is diffolves to a liquid ſubſtance, like the Indico; and being fercled, and the water drawn off, che red Mud is made up into Rolls or Cakes, and laid in the Sun to dry. I did never ſee any made but at a place called the Angels in Jamaica,ac Sir Tho. Muddiford's Plancations, about 20 years ſince; buc was grubb'd up while I was there, and the ground otherwiſe employed. I do believe there is none any where elſe on Jamaica: and even this probably was owing to the Spaniards when they had that Iſland. Indico is common enough in Jamaica. I obſerved they planted it moſt in Candy ground: they fow great a Indico. Otta or Anatta. 227 great Fields of it, and I think they low it every An.1685 year ; but I did never ſee the feeds ic bears. In- dico is produced all over the Weſt-Indies, on moſt of the Caribbee Iſlands, as well as the Main; yet no part of the Main yields ſuch great quantities both of Indico and Otta as this Country about Guatimala. I believe that Occa is made now only by the Spani- ards ; for ſince the deſtroying that at the Angels Plantation in Jamaica, I have not heard of any improvement made of this commodity by our Countrymen any where; and as to Jamaica, I have ſince been informed, chat 'cis wholly left off there. I know not what quantities either of Indico or Oc- ta are made at Coba or Hiſpaniola : but the place moſt uſed by our Jamaica Sloops for theſe things is the Iſland Porto Rico, where our Jamaica Tra- ders did uſe to by Indico for 3 Rials, and Otra for 4 4 Rials the pound; which is but 2 s. 3 d. of our Money: and yet at the ſame time Occa was worth in Jamaica 5 s. the pound, and Indico 3 s. 6d. the pound; and even this allo paid in Goods; by which means alone chey got so or 60 per Cent. Our Traders had not then found the way of trading with the Spaniards in the Bay of Honduras; buc Captain Coxon went tbicher (as I cake it) at the be- ginning of the year 1679. under pretence to cut Logwood, and went into the Gulf of Marique which is in the bottom of that Bay. There he landed with his Canoas, and cook a whole Score- houſe full of Indico and Otta in Cheſts piled up in ſeveral parcels, and marked with different marks, ready to be ſhipt off aboard two Ships chat then lay in che road purpoſely to take it in ; buc theſe Ships could not come at him it being ſhole- water. He opened ſome of the Cheſts of Indico, and ſuppoſing the other Cheſts to be all of the ſame ſpecies, ordered his Men to carry them away. They immediately ſet to work, and took the neareſt ac Q 2 hand; 228 Cochineel. In.1685 hand; and having carried out one heap of Cheſts, they ſeized on another great pile of a different mark from the reſt, intending to carry them away next. But a Spaniſl Gentleman, their Priſoner, knowing that there was a great deal more than they could carry away, deſired them to take only ſuch as belonged to the Merchants, (whoſe Marks he andertook to ſhew them) and to ſpare ſuch as bad che fame Mark with thoſe in that great Pile they were then entring upon : becauſe he ſaid, choſe Cheſts belonged to the Ship-Captains, who fol- lowing the Seas, as themſelves did, he hoped they would for that reaſon rather ſpare their Goods than the Merchants. They conſented to his Requeſt : buc upon their opening their Cheſts (which was nor before they came to Jamaica, where by conni- vance they were permitted to fell them) they found that the Don had been too ſharp for them; the few Cheſts which chey had taken of the ſame Mark with the great Pile proving to be Otta, of greater value by far than the other ; whereas they might as well have loaded the whole Ship with Otta, as with Indico. The Cochineel is an Infect, bred in a ſort of Fruit much like the Prickle Pear. The Tree or Shrub that bears it is like the Prickle Pear-tree, about 5 foor high, and ſo prickly; only the Leaves are not quite fo big, but che Fruir is bigger. On the top of the Fruit there grows a red Flower: This Flower, when the Fruit is ripe, falls down on the top of the Fruit, which then begins to open, and covers it ſo, that no Rain or Dew can we the inſide. The next day, or 2 days after its falling down, the Flower being chen ſcorched away by the heat of the Sun, the Fruit opens as broad as the mouch of a pint pot, and the inſide of the Fruit is by this time full of ſmall red inſects with curious chin wings. As they were bred here, ſo here they would dye for Cochineel. Silveſter. 229 for want of food, and rot in their husks, (having An. 1685 by this time eaten up their mother Fruit) did not the Indians, who plane large fields of theſe Trees, when once they perceive the Fruit open, take care to drive them out for they ſpread under the branch- es of the Tree a large Linnen cloth, and then with ſticks they ſhake the branches, and ſo diſturb the poor inſects, that they cake wing to be gone, yer hovering ſtill over the head of their native Tree, but the beat of the Sun ſo diſorders them, that they preſently fall down dead on the cloth ſpread for that purpoſe, where the Indians let them remain 2 or 3 days longer, till they are throughly dry. When chey fly up they are red, when they fall down they are black; and when firſt they are quite dry they are white as che the ſheet wherein they lye, though the colour change a little after. Theſe yield the much eſteemed Scarlet. The Cochineel Trees are called by the Spaniards Toona's: They are planted in the Country about Guat amala, and about Cheap and Guaxaca, all 3 in the Kingdom of Mexico. The Silveſter is a red grain growing in a Fruit much reſembling the Cochineel-fruit, as doth allo the Tree that bears it. There firſt ſhoots forth a yellow Flower, then comes the Fruit, which is longer than the Cochineel-fruit. The Fruit being ripe opens alſo very wide. The inſide being full of theſe ſmall Seeds or Grains, they fall out with the leaſt couch or ſhake. The Indians that gacher chem hold a diſh under to receive the Seed, and then ſhake it down. Theſe Trees grow wild; and 8 or 10 of theſe Fruits will yield an ounce of Seed: but of the Cochineel-fruics, 3 or 4 will yield an ounce of inſects. The Silveſter gives a colour almoſt as fair as the Cochineel; and ſo like it as to be often miſtaken for it, but it is not near ſo valuable. I often made enquiry how the Silveſter grows, and of the Cochineel; but was never fully ſatisfied, till 3 a Q3 I 230 Drift wood, and Pumice-ſtones. An. 1685 I met a Spaniſh Gentleman that had lived 30 years in the Weſt Indies, and ſome years where theſe grow ; and from him I had theſe relations. He was a ve- ry intelligent perſon, and pretended to be well ac- quainted in the Bay of Campeachy; therefore I exa- mined him in many particulars concerning that Bay, where I was well acquainted my ſelf, living there 3 years. He gave very true and pertinenc anſwers to all my demands, ſo that I could have no diſtruſt of what he related. When we firſt ſaw the Mountain of Guarimala, we were by judgement 25 leagues diſtance from it. As we came nearer the Land it appeared higher and plainer, yet we ſaw no fire, but a little ſmoak pro- ceeding from it. The Land by the Sea was of a good heighth, yer bur low in compariſon with that in the Country. The Sea for about 8 or ro leagues from the ſhore, was full of floating Trees, or Drift wood as it is called, (of which I have ſeen a great deal, but no where ſo much as here,) and Pumice- ſtones floacing, which probably are thrown out of the burning Mountains, and waſhed down to the Thore by the Rains, which are very violent and frequent in this Country; and on the ſide of Hon- duras it is exceſſively wet. The 24th day we were in lat. 14 d. 30 m. North, and the weather more ſettled. Then Captain Townly took with him 106 men in 9 Canoas; and went away to the Weſtward, where he intended to Land, and romage in the Country for ſome re- freſhment for our fick men, we having at this time near half our men fick, and many were dead, ſince we left Rea Lejo. We in the Ships lay ſtill with our Topſails furled, and our Corſes or lower Sails haild op this day and the next, that Captain Townly might get the ſtart of us. The 26th day we made fail again, coaſting to the Weſtward, having the Wind ac North and fair weather The Sea-Coaſt. 231 weather. We ran along by a tract of very highLand, An. 1685 which came from the Eaſtward, more within Land than we could ſee, after we fell in with it, it bare us company for about 10 leagues, and ended with a pretty gentle deſcent cowards the Weſt. There we had a perfect view of a pleaſant low Country, which ſeemed to be rich in paſturage for Cattle. It was plentifully furniſhed with groves of green Trees, mixt among the graſſy Savannahs: Here the Land was fenced from the Sea with high ſandy Hills, for the Waves all along this Coaſt run high, and beat againſt the ſhore very boiſterouſly, making the Land wholly unapproachable in Boats or Canoas : So we coaſted ſtill along by this low Land, 8 or 9 leagues farther, keeping cloſe to the ſhore for fear of miſſing Captain Townly. We lay by in the night, and in the day made an ealie fail. The 2d day of O&tober Captain Townly came a- board; he had coaſted along ſhore in his Canoas, ſeeking for an entrance, but found none. At laſt, being out of hopes to find any Bay, Creek, or Ri- ver, into which he might ſafely enter; he put a- ſhore on a ſandy Bay, but overſer all his Canoas; he had one man drowned, and ſeveral loft cheir Arms, and ſome of them that had not waxt up their Cartrage or Carouche Boxes, wer all their Powder. Captain Townly with much ado got a- . Thore, and dragged the Canoas up dry on the Bay ; then every man ſearched his Carouche-box, and drew the wec Powder out of his Gun, and pro- vided to march into the Country, but finding it full of great Creeks which they could not ford, they were forced to return again to their Canoas. In the night they made good fires to keep themſelves warm; the next morning 200 Spaniards and Indians fell on them but were immediately repulſed, and made greater ſpeed back than they had done for- Q4 ward 232 Ifle Tangola: Guatulco, a Port An. 1685 ward. Captain Townly followed them, but not far for fear of his Canoas. Theſe men come from Te- guant apeque, a Town that Captain Townly went chiefly to ſeek, becauſe the Spaniſh Books make mencion of a large River there; but whether it was run away at this time, or rather Captain Townly and his men were ſhort fighted, I know not; but they could not find it. Úpon his return we preſently made fail, coaſting ſtill Weſtward, having the Wind at E. N. E. fair weather and a freſh gale. We kept within 2 miles of the ſhore, founding all the way; and found at 6 miles diſtance from Land 19 fathom; ac 8 miles diſtance 2 i fachom, groſs Sand. We ſaw no open- ing, nor ſign of any place to land ar, ſo we failed about 20 leagues farther, and came to a ſmall high Iſland called Tangola, where there is good anchor- ing. The Iſland is indifferently well furniſhed with Wood and Water, and liech about a league from the ſhore, The main against the Iſland is pretty high Champion Savannah Land by the Sea; but 2 or 3 leagues within land it is higher, and very woody. We coaſted a league farther and came to Guatul- co. This Porr is in lar. 15 d. 30 m. it is one of the beſt in all this Kingdom of Mexico. Near a mile from the mouth of the Harbour, on the Eaſt lide, there is a little and cloſe by the ſhore; and on the Weft ſide of the mouth of the Harbour there is a great hollow Rock which by the continual work- ing of the Sea in and out makes a great noiſe, which may be heard a great way. Every Surge that comes in forceth the Water out of a little hole on its rop, as out of a pipe, from whence ic flys our just like the blowing of a Whale ; to which the Spaniards alſo liken it. They call this Rock and Spout the Buffadore: upon what account I know not. in Ev en 2 Guatulco. Capalita River. 233 in the calmelt ſeaſons the Sea beats in there, ma- An. 1685 king the Water ſpour out at the hole: ſo that this is always a good mark to find the Harbour by. The Harbour is about 3 mile deep, and one mile broad; it runs in N. W. But the Weſt ſide of the Harbour is beſt to ride in for ſmall Ships; for there you may ride land-locked: whereas any where elſe you are open to the S. W. Winds, which often blow here. There is good clean ground any where, and good gradual foundings from 16 to 6 fathom ; it is boun- ded with a ſmooth ſandy ſhore, very good to land at; and at the bottom of the Harbour there is a fine Brook of freſh Water running into the Sea. Here formerly ſtood a ſmall Spaniſh Town, or Village, which was taken by Sir Francis Drake : but now there is nothing remaining of it, belide a little Chappel ſtanding among the Trees, about 200 pa- ces from the Sea. The land appears in ſmall ſhort ridges parallel to the ſhore, and to each other ; the innermoſt ftill gradually higher than that nearer the ſhore ; and they are all cloathed with very high flouriſhing Trees. that it is extraordinary pleaſant and delightful to behold at a diſtance. I have no where ſeen any thing like it. At this place Captain Swan, who had been very fick, came aſhore, and all the ſick Men with him, and the Surgeon to tend them. Captain Townley again took a company of Men with him, and went into the Country to ſeek for Houſes or Inhabitants. He marched away to the Eaſtward and came to the River Capalita, which is a ſwift River, yet deep near the mouth and is about a league from Guarulco. There 2 of his Men (wam over the River, and took 3 Indians that were placed there, as Centinels, to watch for our coming. Theſe could none of them ſpeak Spaniſh; yet our men by ſigns made them underſtand, that they deſired to know if there was any Town or Village near; who by the ſigns which 234 Turtle. Vinello's, An.1685 which they made gave our men to underſtand, that they could guide them to a Settlement : but there was no underſtanding by them, whether it was a Spaniſh or Indian Settlement, nor how far it was thi- ther. They brought theſe Indians aboard with them, and the nexe day, which was che 6th day of Ołto- ber, Captain Townly with 149 Men (of whom I was one) went alhore again, taking one of theſe Indians with us for a Guide to conduct us to this Secclement. Our Men that ſtay'd aboard fill'd our Water, and cat Wood, and mended our Sails : and our Moskito Men ſtruck 3 or 4 Turtle every day. They were a ſmall ſort of Turtle, and not very ſweer, yer very well eſteemed by us all, becauſe we had eaten no fleſh a great while. The 8th day we returned out of the Country, having been about 14 miles directly within land before we came to any Secclement. There we found a ſmall Indian Vil- lage, and in it a great quantity of Vinello's drying in the Sun. The Vinello is a liccle Cod full of ſmall black ſeeds, it is 4 or 5 inches long, about the bigneſs of che ſtem of a Tobacco leaf, and when dried much reſembling it : ſo chat our Privateers at firſt have often thrown them away when they cook any, won- dering why the Spaniards ſhould lay up Tobacco items. This Cod grows on a ſmall Vine, which climbs about and ſupports it ſelf by the neighbour- Trees: it firſt bears a yellow Flower, from whence the Cod afterwards proceeds. It is firſt green, but when ripe it turns yellow ; then the Indians whoſe Manufacture it is, and who fell ic cheap to the Spa- niards, gather it, and lay it in the Sun, which makes it ſoft; then it changes to a Cheſnuc-colour. Then they frequently preſs it between their fingers, which makes it flat. If the Indians do any thing to them beſide, I know not, but I have ſeen the Spaniards Neek them with Oyl. a Theſe Vinello's, where found. 235 Theſe Vines grow plentifully at Bocca-toro, where An.1685 I have gathered and tried to cure them, but could not: which makes me think that the Indians have ſome ſecret that I know not of to cure them. I have often aske the Spaniards how they were cured, but I never could meet with any could tell me.One Mr. Cree alſo, a very curious perſon, who ſpake Spaniſh well, and had been a Privateer all his Life, and 7 years a Priſoner among the Spaniards at Porto- bel and Cart agena, yet upon all his enquiry could not find any of them that underſtood it. Could we have learnt the Art of it, ſeveral of us would have gone to Bocca-toro yearly, at the dry ſeaſon and cured them, and freighted our Veſſel. We there might have had Turtle enough for food, and ſtore of Vinello's. Mr. Cree firſt ihewed me thoſe at Bocca-toro. At, or near a Town alſo, called Caja hooca, in the Bay of Campeachy,chefe Cods are found. They are commonly ſold for 3 pence a Cod among the Spaniards in the Weſt Indies, and are ſold by the Druggiſt, for they are much uſed among Chocolate to perfume it. Some will uſe them among Tobac- co, for it gives a delicate ſcent. I never heard of any Vinello's buc here in this Country, about Cai- hooca, and at Bocca-toro. The Indians of this Village could ſpeak but little Spaniſh. They ſeemed to be a poor innocent peo- ple: and by them we underſtood, that here are ve- ry few Spaniards in theſe parts; yet all the Indians hereabout are under them. The Land from the Sea to their Houſes is black Earth, mixt with ſome Stones and Rocks; all the way full of very high Trees. The roth day we ſent 4 Canoas to the Weſt- ward, who were ordered to lye for us at Port Ann gels ; where we were in hopes that by ſome means or other they might ger Priſoners, that might give us a better account of the Country than ac 236 They depart from Guatulco. An.1685 at preſent we could have ; and we followed them with our Ships : all our Men being now pretty well recovered of the Fever which had raged amongſt us ever ſince we departed from Rea Lejo. DAT so he С НА Р. 237 An.1685 CHA P. IX. Р. They ſet out from Guatulco. The Iſle Sacrificio. Port Angels. Jaccals A narrom Eſcape. The Rock Algatrofs, and the neighbouring Coast. Snooks, a ſort of Fiſh. The Town of Acapulco. of the Trade it drives with the Phillipine Iſlands. The Haven of Acapulco. A Tor- A nado. Port Marquis. Capt. Townly makes a fruitleſs Attempt A long Jandy Bay, but very rough Seas. The Palm-tree great and ſmall. The Hill Petaplan. A poor indian Village. Jew-filh. Chequetan, a good Harbour. Efta- pa ; Muſcles there. A Caravan of Mules taken. A Hill near Thelupan. The Coaſt hereabouts. The Volcan, Town, Valley, and Bay of Colima. Sallagua Port. Oarrha Ragged Hills. Co- ronada or the Crown-Land. Cape Corri- entes. ifles of Chametly. The City Purifi- cation. Valderas, or the Valley of Flags. They miſs their deſign on this Goaſt. Captain Townly leaves them with the Darien Indi- ans. The Point and iſes of Pontique. O- ther Iſles of Chametly. The Penguin-fruit, the yellow and the red. Seals here. Of the Ri- ver of Cullacan, and the Trade of a Town there with California. Maffaclan. River and Toron of Roſario. Caput Cavalli, and ano- ther Hill. The diffictlty of Intelligence on this Coaſt. The River of Oleta. River of St. Jago. Maxentelba Rock, and Zeliſco Hill . Sancta Pecaque 238 An. 1685 The Iſle Sacrificio. Pechaque Town in the River of St. Jago. Of Compoſtella. Many of them cut off at Sancta Pecaque. Of California ; whether an Iſland, or not: and of the North Weſt and North Eaſt Paſage. A Method propoſed for Diſcove- ry of the North Weſt and North Eaſt Paſſages. Iſle of Santa Maria A Prickly Plant. Captain Swan propoſes a Voyage to the Eaſt Indies. Valley of Balderas again, and Cape Corrientes. The reaſon of their ill Succeſs on the Mexican Coaſt , and Departure thence for the Eaſt, Indies IT T was the 12th of O&tober 1685, when we ſet. out of the Harbour of Guatulco with our Ships. The Land here lies along Weſt, and a little South- erly for about 20 or 30 leagues, and the Sea Winds are commonly at W. S. W. ſometimes at S. W.the Land Winds at N. We had now fair weather, and but little Wind. We coaſted along to the Weſt- ward, keeping as near the ſhore as we could for the benefit of the Land Winds, for the Sea Winds were right againſt us; and we found a current ſetting to the Eaſtward which kept us back, and obliged us to anchor at the Inland Sacrificio, which is a ſmall green Mand about half a mile long. It lieth about a league to the Weſt of Guatulco, and about half a mile from the Main. There ſeems to be a fine Bay co the Weſt of the Inand; but ic is full of Rocks. The beſt riding is between the Iſland and the Main : there you will have 5 or 6 fathom VVater. Here runs a precy ſtrong ride; the Sea riſeth and fallech 5 or 6 foot up and down. The 18th day we failed from hence, coafting to the Weſtward after our Canoas. We kept near the hore, which was all ſandy Bays; the Country pretty Port Angels. 239 pretty high and woody, and a great Sea tumbling An.1685 in upon the fhore. The 22d day 2 of our Canoas came aboard, and told us they had been a great way to the Weſtward but could not find Port An- gels. They had attempted to land the day before, at a place where they ſaw a great many Bulls and Cows feeding, in hopes to get ſome of them; but the Sea run ſo high, that they over fer both Ca- noas, and wet all their Arms, and loft 4 Guns, and had one man drowned, and with much ado goc off again. They couid give no account of the other 2 Canoas, for they loſt company the firſt night that they went from Guatulco, and had not ſeen them ſince. We were now abreſt of Port Angels, though our men in the Canoas did not know it ; therefore we went in and anchored there. This is a broad open Bay, with 2 or 3 Rocks at the Weſtſide. Here is good anchoring all overthe Bay, in 30 or 20 or 12 fachom Water ; but you muſt ride open to all Winds, except the Land Winds, till you come into 12 or 13 fathom Water ; then you are ſheltered from the W.S. W. which are the common Trade Winds. The Tide riſeth here about 5 foot ; the Flood fets on the N. E. and the Ebb to the S. W. The landing in this Bay is bad; the place of land- ing is cloſe by the Welt ſide, behind a few Rocks; here always goes a great ſwell. The Spaniards com- pare this Harbour for goodneſs to Guatulco, but there is a great difference between them. For Guatulco is almoſt landlocked, and this is an open road, and no one would eaſily know it by their Cha- racter of it, but by its marks, and its lacitude,which is is d. North. For this reaſon our Canoas, which were ſent from Guatulco and ordered to carry here for us did not know it, (not thinking this to be that fine Harbour) and therefore went farther ; 2 of them as I ſaid before returned again, but the other 3 a 240 A Farm. Jaccals. An.1685 other two were not yet come to us. The Land chat bounds this Harbour is pretty high, the Earch fandy and yellow, in ſome places red; it is partly Wood- land, partly Savannahs. The Trees in the Woods are large and tall, and the Savannahs are plenti- fully ſtored with very kindly Graſs. Two leagues to the Eaſt of this place is a Beef Farm, belonging to Don Diego de la Roſa. The 23 day we landed about 100 men and march- ed thither, where we found plenty of far Bulls and Cows, feeding in the Savannahs, and in the Houſe good ſtore of Sale and Maiz, and fome Hogs, and Cocks and Hens: bur che owners or overſeers were gone. We lay here 2 or 3 days feaſting on freſh proviſion, but could not contrive to carry any quan- city aboard, becauſe the way was ſo long, and our men boc weak, and a great wide River to ford. Therefore we recurned again from thence the 26th day, and brought every one a licule Beef or Pork for the men thac ſtayd aboard. The two nights that we ſtay'd aſhore at this place we heard great droves of Jaccals, as we fuppos'd them to be, bark- ing all night long, not far from us. None of us faw cheſe; but I do verily believe they were Jaccals; cho I did never ſee thoſe Creatures in America, nor hear any but at this time. We could not think chac there were leſs than 30 or 40 in a company. We got aboard in the evening; buc did not yet hear a- ny news of our cwo Canoas. The 27th day in the morning we failed from hence, with the Land Wind at N. by W. The Sea Wind came about noon at W. S. W. and in the e- vening we anchor'd in 16 fathom water, by a ſmall rocky Hand, which liech about half a mile from the Main, and 6 leagues Weſtward from Port An- gels. The Spaniards give no account of this Iſland in their Pilot-book. The 28th day we failed again with the Land Wind; in the afternoon the Sea breez A Narrow Eſcape 24.1 breez blew hard, and we ſprung our Main Topmaft., An. 1685. This Coaſt is full of ſmall Hills and Valleys, and a greatSea falls in upon the ſhore. In the night we met with the other 2 of our Canoas that went from us at Guatulco. They had been as far as Acapulco to ſeek Port Angells. Coming back from thence they went inco a River to get Water, and were encountered by 150 Spaniards, yet they filld their Water in 1pight of them, but had one man ſhot through the Thigh. Afterward they went into a Lagune, or Lake of Salt water, where they found much dried Fiſh and brought ſome aboard. We being now a- breſt, of that place, ſent in a Canoa mann'd with 12 men for more Fiſh : The mouth of this Lagune is not Piſtol-Thot wide, and on both ſides are pretty high Rocks, fo conveniently placed by nature, that many men may abfcond behind; and within the Rock the Lagune opens wide on both ſides. The Spaniards being allarmed by our 2 Canoas that had been 2 or 3 days before, came armed to this place to ſecure their Filh ; and ſeeing our Canoa coming, they lay ſnug behind the Rocks, and ſuf- fered the Canoa to paſs in, then they fired their Volley, and wounded 5 of our men. Our people were a little furprized at this ſudden advencure, yet fired their Guns, and rowed farther into the Lagune, for they durft not adventure to come out again through the narrow entrance, which was near a quarter of a mile in length. Therefore they rowed inco che middle of the Lagune, where they lay out of Gun fhor, and looked about to ſee if there was not another paſſage to get oucar, broad- er than that by which they entered, but could ſee none. So they lay ſtill 2 days and 3 nights, in hopes that we ſhould come to ſeek them; but we lay off ar Sea, about 3 leagues diſtant, waiting for their return, fuppofing by their long abſence that they had made ſome greater diſcovery, and were R gone 242 The Sea Goaft. An. 1685. gone farther than the Fiſh-range; becauſe it is u- ſual with Privateers when they enter upon ſuch de figos, to ſearch farther than they propoſed, if they meet any encouragement. But Captain Townly and his Bark being near the ſhore, heard ſome Guns fired in the Lagune. So he mann'd his Ca- noa, and went towards the ſhore, and beating the Spaniards away from the Rocks, made a free paſſage for our men to come out of their pound, where elſe they muſt have been ſtarved or knocked on the head by the Spaniards. They came aboard their Ships again the zift. of O&tober. This Lagune is about the lac. of 16 d. 40 m. North. From hence we made fail again, coaſting to the Weſtward, having fair weather and a Current ſet- ting to the Weſt. The ſecond day of November we paſt by a Rock, called by the Spaniards the Alga- trofs. The Land hereabour is of an indifferent height, and woody, and more within the Country Mountanous. Here are 7 or 8 white cliffs by the Sea, which are very remarkable, becauſe there are none ſo white and ſo thick together, on all the Coaſt. They are 5 or 6 mile to the Weſt of the Algarroſs Rock. There is a dangerous ſhoal lieth S. by W. from theſe Cliffs, 4 or 5 mile off ac Sea. Two Leagues to the Weſt of theſe Cliffs there is a precey large River, which forms a ſmall Iſland at its mouth. The Channel on the Eaſt fide is but Thoal and fandy, but the Weſt Channel is deep e- nough for Canoas co encer. On the Banks of this Channel the Spaniards have made a Breſt-work, to hinder an Enemy from landing and filling Water. The 3d. day we anchored abreſt of this River, in 14 fachom Water, about a mile and a half oft ſhore. The next morning we mann'd our Canoas, and went aſhore to the Breſt-work with little reſiſtance, alchough there were about 200 men to keep us off . They fired about 20 or 30 Guns at us, but ſeeing a we Snooks, a ſort of Fiſh. 243 we were reſolved to land, they quitted the place ; , An. 1685 one chief reaſon why the Spaniards are ſo frequently routed by us, although many times much our ſu- periors in numbers, and in many places fortified with Breſt-works is, their want of ſmall fire arms, for they have buc few on all the Sea Coaſts, unleſs near their larger Garriſons. Here we found a great deal of Salt, brought hither as I judge for to falt Fiſh, which they take in the Lagunes. The Filh I obſerved here moſtly, were what we call Snooks, neither a Sea-fiſh nor freſh Water-fiſh, but very nu- merous in theſe fait Lakes. This Filh is about a foot long, and round, and as thick as the ſmall of a mans Leg, with a pretty long head : It hach Scales of a whitiſh colour, and is good meat. How the Spaniards take them I koow nor: for we never found any Nets, Hooks, or Lines, neither yec any Bark, Boar, or Canoa, among them on all this Coaft ; except the Ship I ſhall mention at Aca- pulco. We marched 2 or 3 leagues into the Country, and met with but one Houſe, where we cook a Mulatto Priſoner, who informed us of a Ship that was lately arrived at Acapulco; ſhe came from Lima. Captain Townly wanting a good Ship, thought now he had an opportunity of getting one, if he could perſuade his men to venture with him, into the Harbour of Acapulco, and fetch this Lima Ship out. Therefore he immediately propoſed it, and found not only all his own men willing to affift him, but many of Captain Swan's men allo. Cap- tain Swan oppoſed it, becauſe Proviſion being ſcarce with us, he thought our time might be much bet- ter imployed in firit providing our felves with food, and here was plenty of Maiz in the River where we now were, as we were informed by the ſame Priſoner ; who offered to conduct as to the place where it was. Buc neither the preſent necefliry, nor R2 Cap- a 244 Acapulco An. 1685 Captain Swan's perſuaſion availed any thing, no nor yet their own intereſt ; for the great deſign we had then in hand, was to lye and wait for a rich Ship which comes to Acapulco every year richly la- den from the Phillipine Iſlands. But it was neceſſary we ſhould be well ſtored with Provifions, to ena- ble us to cruize about, and wait the cime of her co- ming. However Townly's party prevailing, we only filled our water here, and made ready to be gone. So the 5 th day in the afternoon we failed again, coaſting to the Weſtward, towards Acapulco. The 7th day in the afternoon, being about 12 leagues from the ſhore, we ſaw the high-land of Acapulco, which is very remarkable ; for there is a round Hill ſtanding between other 2 Hills; the weſtermoſt of which is the biggeſt and higheſt, and hach cwo Hillocks like two Paps on its cop; the eaſtermoſt Hill is higher and ſharper than the mid- dlemoft. From the middle Hill the Land declines toward the Sea,ending in a high round point. There is no land ſhaped like this on all the Coaſt. In the Evening Captain Townly went away from the Ships wich 140 men in 12 Canoas, to try to get the Lima Ship out of Acapulco Harbour. Acapulco is a pretty large Town 17 deg. North of the Equator. It is the Sea-port for the City of Mexico, on the Weſt ſide of the Continent, as La Vera Cruz or St. John d'Ulloa in the Bay of Nova Hiſpania, is on the North ſide. This Town is the only place of Trade on all this Coaft; for there is little or no traffick by Sea on all the North Weſt part of this vaſt Kingdom, here being as I have ſaid neither Boats, Barks nor Ships, (that I could ever fee) unleſs only what come hither from other parts, and ſome Boats near che S. E. end of California ; as I gueſs by the intercourſe between that and the Main for Pearl-filhing. ; The The Ships that Trade with Manila. 245 The Ships that Trade hither are only 3, two , An, 1685, that conſtantly go once a year between this and Manila in Luconia, one of the Phillipine Iſlands, and one Ship more every year to and from Lima. This from Lima commonly arrives a little before Chrift- mas; ſhe brings them Quick-ſilver, Cacoa, and pieces of Eight. Here the ſtays till the Manila Ship arrives, and takes in a Cargo of Spices, Silks, Callicoes, and Muzlins, and other Eaſt In- dia Commodities for the uſe of Perts, and then returns to Lima. This is but a ſmall Veſſel of 20 Guns, but the 2 Manila Ships are each ſaid to be above 1000 Tun. Theſe make their Voy- ages alternately, ſo that one or other of them is al- ways at the Manillas. When either of them ſets out from Acapulco, it is at the latter end of March, or the beginning of April ; ſhe always couches to refreſh at Guam, one of the Ladrone Iſlands in about 60 days ſpace after the ſets out. There ſhe ſtays buc 2 or 3 days, and then proſecutes her Voyage to Manila, where ſhe commonly arrives ſome time in June. By that time the other is ready to fail from thence laden with Eaſt India Commodities. She ſtretcheth away to che Norch as far as 36, or ſometimes into 40 degrees of North lat. before ſhe gers a wind to ſtand over to the American ſhore. She falls in firſt with the Coaſt of California, and then Coaſts along the ſhore co the South again, and never miſſes of a wind to bring her away from thence quite to Acapulco. When ſhe gets the length of Cape St. Lucas, which is the Southermoſt point of California, the ſtretcheth over to Cape Corientes, which is in about the 20th degree of North latitude, from thence ſhe Coafts along till ſhe comes to Sal- lagwa, and there ſhe ſecs alhore Paſſengers, that are bound to the City of Mexico : From thence the makes her beſt way, coafting ſtill along ſhore, till ſhe arrives at Acapulco, which is commonly about Chriſt- R3 246 Acapulco Harbour. An. 1685. Chriſtmas, never more than 8 or to days before or after. Upon the return of this Ship to the Manila, the other which ſtayeth chere till her arrival, takes her turn back to Acapulco Sir John Narborough there- fore was impoſed on by the Spaniards, who told him that there were 6 fail or more that uſed this Trade. The Port of Acapulco is very commodious for the reception of Ships, and ſo large, that ſome hundreds may ſafely ride there without damnify- ing each other. There is a ſmall low Iſland croſ- fing the mouth of the Harbour it is about a mile and a half long, and half a mile broad, ſtretching Eaſt and Welt. It leaves a good wide deep Chan- nel at each end, where Ships may ſafely go in or come out, taking the advantage of the Winds; they muſt enter with the Sea-wind, and go out with the Land-wind, for theſe winds ſeldom or never fail to ſucceed each other alternately in their proper ſeaſons of the day or night. The Weſtermoft Channel is the narroweft, but ſo deep there is no anchoring, and the Manile Ships pals in that way, but the Ships from Lima encer on the S. W.Chan- nel. This Harbour runs in North about 3 miles, then growing very narrow, it turns ſhort about to the Weſt, and runs about a mile farther where it ends. The Town ſtands on the N. W. fide, at the mouth of this narrow paſſage, cloſe by the Sea, and ac the end of the Town there is a Platform with a great many Guns. Oppoſite to the Town, on the East fide ſtands a high ſtrong Caſtle, faid to have 40 Guns of a very great bore. Ships common- ly ride near the bottom of the Harbour, under the Command both of the Caſtle and the Plat- form. Captain Townly, who, as I ſaid before, with 140 men, left our Ships on a deſign to fetch the Lima Ship out of the Harbour, had not rowed above 3 or 4. leagues before che Voyage was like to end with Port Marquis. 247 with all their Lives; for on a ſudden they were en- An. 1685. countered with a violent Tornado from the ſhore ; which had like to have foundred all the Canoas : but they eſcaped that danger, and the ſecond night got ſafe inco Port Marquis. Port Marquis is a very good Harbour, a league to the Eaſt of Acapulco Har- bour. Here they ſtaid all the next day to dry them- ſelves, their Cloaths, their Arms and Ammunition, and the next night they rowed ſoftly into Acapul- co Harbour: and becauſe they would not be heard, they bald in their Oars and paddled as ſoftly as if they had been ſeeking Manatee. They paddled cloſe to the Caſtle; then ſtruck over to the Town, and found the Ship riding between the Breſ-work and the Fort, within abouc 100 yards of each. When they had well viewed her, and conſidered che danger of the delign, they thought it not poſſi- ble to accompliſh it: cherefore they paddled ſoftly back again, till they were out of command of the Forts, and then they went to land, and fell in a- mong a company of Spaniſh Souldiers (for the Spani- ards having ſeen them the day before,had ſet Guards along the Coaſt, who immediately fired at them, but did them no damage, only made them recire farther from the ſhore. They lay afterwards at the mouth of the Harbour till it was day,to take a view of the Town and Caſtle, and then returned aboard again, being tired, hungry, and ſorry for their dif- appointment. The 13th day we made fail again further on to the Weſtward, with the land-wind, which is com- monly at N. E but the Sea-winds are ac S. W. Wo paſſed by a long fandy Bay of above 20 leagues. All the way along it the Sea falls with ſuch force on the ſhore, that it is impoſſible to come near it with Boat or Canoa: yet it is good clean ground, and good an- choring a mile or two from the ſhore. The Land by the Sea is low, and indifferent fertile, produ- cing R4 248 a 3 The Palm Tree. Hill of Patalpan. An. 1685. cing many forts of Trees, eſpecially the ſpreading Palm, which grows in ſpots from one end of the Bay to the other. The Palm-tree is as big as an ordinary Aſh, growing about 20 or 30 foot high. The body is clear from boughs or branches, cill juſt at the head: there it ſpreads forth many large green branches, not much unlike the Cabbage-tree before deſcribed. Theſe branches alſo grow in many places, (as in Jamaica, Darien, the Bay of Campeachy, ớc.) from a ſtump not above a foot or two high; which is not the remains of a Tree cut down'; for none of theſe ſort of Trees will ever grow again when they have once loſt their head; but thele are a ſort of Dwarf-palm, and the branches which grow from the ftump are not ſo large as thoſe that grow on the great Tree. Theſe ſmaller branches are uſed both in the Eaſt and West-Indies for thatching Houſes: they are very laſting and ſerviceable, much ſurpaſting the Palmeto. For this chatch, if well laid on, will endure 5 or 6 years; and this is called by the Spaniards the Palmeto Royal. The En- gliſh at Jamaica give it the ſame Name. Whether this be the ſame which they in Guinea ger che Palm wine from I know not ; buc I know thac it is like this. The Land in the Country is full of finall peeked barren Hills, making as many liccle Valleys, which appear flouriſhing and green. At the Weſt end of this Bay is the Hill of Pet aplan in lac, 17 d. 30 m. N. This is a round point ſtretching out into the Sea: at a diſtance it ſeems to be an Illand. A liccle to the Weſt of this Hill are ſeveral round Rocks, which we left without us, fieering in between them and the round point, where we had 11 fa- thom water. We came to an anchor on the N.W. fide of the Hill, and went alhore, about 170 Men of us, and marched into the Country 12 or 14 miles. Jew-fiſh. Chequetan. 249 miles. There we came to a poor Indian Village An. 1685. that did not afford us a meal of Victuals, The peo- ple all fled only a Mulatto woman, and 3 or 4 ſmall Children, who were taken and brought a- board. She told us that a Carrier, (one who drives a Caravan of Mules) was going to Acapulco laden with Flower and other Goods, but ſtope in the Road for fear of us, a little to the Weſt of this Vil- lage, for he had heard of our being on this Coaſt) and ſhe chought he ſtill remained there : and there- fore it was we kept the Woman to be our Guide to carry us to that place. At this place where we now lay,our Moskito-men ftruck ſome ſmall Turtle, and many fmall Jep-fiſh. The Jewo.fiſh is a very good Fiſh, and I judge fo called by the Engliſh becauſe it hach Scales and Fins, therefore a clean Fish according to the Levitical Law, and the Jews at Jamaica buy them and eat them very freely. It is a very large Fiſh, ſhaped much like a Cod, but a great deal bigger; one will weigh 3, or 4, or 5 hundred weight. It hath a large head with great Fins and Scales, as big as an half- Crown anſwerable to the bigneſs of his body. It very ſweet Mear, and commonly far. This Fiſh lives among Rocks; there are plenty of them in the Weſt Indies, about Jamaica, and the Coaſt of Carraccos; but chiefly in theſe Seas, eſpecially more Weſtward. We went from hence with our Ships the 18 day, and ſteered Weſtward about 2 leagues farther, to a place called Chequetan. A mile and half from the ſhore there is a ſmall Key, and within it is a very good Harbour where Ships may careen ; there is alſo a ſmall River of freſh water and wood enough. The 14th day in the morning we went with 95 Men in 6 Canoas to ſeek for the Carrier, taking the Mulatto woman for our Guide ; but Captain Townly would not go with us. Before day we land- ed a a : 250 A Caravan of Mules taken. An. 1685. ed at a place called Eſt apa, a league to the Weſt of Chequetan. The woman was well acquainted here, having been often at this place for Muſcles, as the told us, for here are great plenty of them: they feem in all reſpects like our Engliſh Muſcles. She carried us through the pachleſs wood by the fide of a River, for about a league : then we came into a Savannah full of Bulls and Cows; and here the Carrier before mentioned was lying at the Eftan- cion houſe with his Mules, not having dared to advance all this while, as not knowing where we lay : ſo his own fear made him, his Mules, and all his Goods become a Prey to us. He had 40 packs of Flower, ſome Chocolate, a great many ſmall Cheeſes, and abundance of Earthen Ware. The earables we brought away, but the Earthen Veſſels we had no occaſion for, and therefore left them. The Mules were about 60: we brought our Prize with them to the thore, and ſo turned them away. Here we alſo killed fome Cows, and brought with us to our Canoas. In the afternoon our Ships came to an anchor half a mile from the place where we landed, and then we went aboard. Captain Town- by ſeeing our good ſucceſs went, aſhore with his Men to kill fome Cows ; for here were no Inha- bicants near to oppoſe us. The land is very woody, of a good fertile loil, watered with many ſmall Rivers : yet it bath but few Iohabitants near the Sea. Captain Townly killed 18 Beefs, and after he came aboard, our Men, contrary to Captain Swan's inclination, gaveCaptain Townly part of the Flower which we cook alhore. Afterwards we gave che Woman fome Cloaths for her and her Children, and put her and two of them alhore: but one of them, a very pretty Boy, about 7 or 8 years old Captain Swan kept. The Woman cried and begg'd kard to have him; but Captain Swan would not, but promis'd to make much of him, and was as good 3 The Coaſting along. 251 good as his word. He proved afterwards a very An. 1683. fine Boy for Wit, Courage, and Dextericy;I have often wonderd at his Expreſſions and Actions. The 21ſt day in the evening we faild hence with the Land-wind. The Land-winds on this part of the Coaſt are ar N. and the Sea-winds ac W. S.W. We had fair weather, and coafled along to the Weſtward. The Land is high, and full of ragged Hills; and Weſt from theſe ragged Hills che Land makes many pleaſant and fruitful Valleys among the Mountains. The 25th day we were abreſt of a very remarkable Hill, which towring above the reſt of its fellows, is divided in the top, and makes two ſmall parts. It is in lar. 18 d. 3 m. North. The Spaniards make mention of a Town called Thelupan a near this Hill, which we would have viſited if we could have found the way to it. The 26th day Captain Swan and Captain Townly with 200 Men, of whom I was one, went in our Canoas to ſeek for the City of Colima, a rich place by report, buc how far within Land I could never learn: for as I faid before, here is no Trade by Sea, and therefore we could never ger Guides to inform us or conduct us to any Town, but one or two on this Coaſt; and there is never a Town that lieth open co che Sea buc Acapulco; and therefore our ſearch was commonly fruitleſs, as now, for we rowed above 20 leagues along ſhore, and found it a very bad Coaſt to land, we ſaw no Houſe nor ſign of lo- habitants, although we paſt by a fine Valley called, the Valley of Maguella, only at two places, che one at our firſt ſecting out on this Expedition, and the other at the end of it, we ſaw a Horſeman fer, as we ſuppoſed, as a Centinel, to watch us. Ac both places we landed with difficulty, and at each place we followed the track of the Horſe on the ſandy Bay; but where they entered the VVoods we loſt the track and although we diligently ſearch for a 252 The Volcan and Valley of Colima. An. 1685 for it, yet we could find it no more, ſo we were perfectly at a loſs to find out the Houſes or Town they came from. The 28th day being tired and hopeleſs to find any Town, we went aboard our Ships, that were now come abreſt of the place where we were: for always when we leave our Ships, we either order a certain place of meeting, or elſe leave them a ſign to know where we are by making one or more great Smokes: yet we had all like to have been ruin'd by ſuch a ſignal as this in a former Voyage under Captain Sharp, when we made that unfortunate attempt upon Arica, wbich is mentioned in the Hiſtory of the Buccaneers. For upon the routing our Men,and taking ſeveral of them, ſome of thoſe ſo taken told the Spaniards, that it was agreed between them and their Com- panians on board to make two great Smokes at a diſtance from each other, as ſoon as the Town ſhould be taken, as a ſignal to the Ship, that it might ſafely enter the Harbour. The Spaniards made theſe Smokes preſently : I was then among thoſe who ſtay’d on board : and whether the ſignal was not ſo exactly made, or ſome other diſcourage- menc happen'd, I remember not : but we forbore going in till we ſaw our ſcatter'd Crew coming off in their Canoas. Had we entred the Port upon the falſe, ſignal we muſt have been taken or ſunk; for we muſt have paſt cloſe by the Fort, and could have had no Wind to bring us out, till the Land- wind ſhould riſe in the night. But to our preſent Voyage : After we came a- board we ſaw the Volcan of Colima. This is a very high Mountain, in about 18 d. 36 m. North, ſtanding 5 or 6 leagues from the Sea, in the midst of a pleaſant Valley. It appears with a ſharp peeks, from each of which there do always iſſue Aames of fire or (moke. The Valley in which this Volcan ftands is called the Valley of Colima, from the Town it 8 Valley of Colima. 253 ic ſelf which ſtands there not far from the Volcan. An.1685 The Town is faid to be great and rich, the chief of all its Neighbourhood: and the Valley in which it is ſeated, by the relation which the Spaniards give of it, is the moſt pleaſant and fruitful Valley in all the Kingdom of Mexico. This Valley is about 10 or 12 leagues wide by the Sea, where it makes a ſmall Bay : but how far the Vale runs into the Country I know not. It is ſaid to be full of Cacao- Gardens, Fields of Corn, Whear, and Plantain- walks. The neighbouring Sea is bounded with a ſandy ſhoar; but there is no going alhoar for the violence of the waves. The Land within it is low all along, and Woody for about 2 leagues from the Eaſt-fide; at the end of the Woods there is a deep River runs out into the Sea: but it hach ſuch a great Bar, or Sandy fhole, that when we were here no Boat or Canoa could poſſibly enter, the Sea running ſo high upon the Bar: otherwiſe, I judge, we ſhould have made fome farther diſcove- ry into this pleaſant Valley. On the Weſt-lide of the River the Savannah Land begins, and runs to the other ſide of the Valley. We had but little wind when we came aboard ; therefore we lay off this Bay that afternoon and the night enſuing. The 29th day our Captains went away from our Ships with 200 men, intending at the firſt conve- nient place to land and ſearch about for a path : for the Spaniſh Books make mention of 2 or 3 other Towns hereabouts, eſpecially one called Sallagua, to the Weſt of this Bay. Our Canoas rowed along as near the ſhoar as they could ; buc the Sea went ſo high that they could not land. About 10 or II a clock 2 Horſemen came near the ſhoar, and one of them took a Bottle out of his pocket, and drank to our men: while he was drinking one of our men (natcht up his Gun, and let drive at him, and killd his Horſe : fo his confort immediately ſet Spurs to his : . a 254 Port of Sallagua. An. 1685. his Horſe and rode away, leaving the other to come after afoot. But he being Booted made buc flow haſte; therefore 2 of our men ſtripe them- ſelves, and ſwam alhore to take him: but he had a Micheat, or long Knife, wherewith he kepo them boch from ſeizing him, they having nothing in their hands wherewith to defend themſelves, or offend him. The zoth day our men came all a- board again; for they could not find any place to land in The firſt day of December we paſſed by the Porc of Sallague. This Port is in lat. 18 d. 52 m. It is only a precty deep Bay, divided in the middle with a rocky point, which makes, as it were, two Har- bours. Ships may ride ſecurely in either, but the Weſt Harbour is the beſt: there is good anchoring any where in toor 12 fachom, and a Brook of freſh Water runs into the Sea. Here we ſaw a great new thatched Houſe, and a great many Spaniards both Horſe and Foot, with Drums beating, and Co- lours flying in defiance of us as we thought. We took no notice of them till the next morning, and then we landed about 200 Men to try their Cou- rage, but they preſently withdrew. The Foot ne- ver ſtay'd co exchange one ſhot, but the Horſemen ftay'd till 2 or 3 were knocked down, and then they drew off, our men purſuing them : At laſt 2 of our Men took 2 Horſes that had loſt their Ri- ders, and mounting them rode after the Spaniards full drive till they came among them, thinking to have taken a Priſoner for Intelligence, but had like to have been raken themſelves; for 4, Spaniards ſur- 4 rounded them, after they had diſcharged their Pi- ſtols and unhorfed them; and if ſome of our beſt Footmen had not come to their reſcue, they muſt have yielded, or have been killed. They were both cut in 2 or 3 places, but their wounds were not morcal. The 4 Spaniards got away before our Men could Oarrha, The Author taken fick. 255 could hurt them, and mounting their Horſes ſpeed- An. 1685. ed after their Conforts, who were marched away into the Country. Our men finding a broad Road leading into the Country, followed ic about 4 leagues in a dry ftony Country, full of ſhort Woods : but finding no ſign of Inhabitants they returned again. In their way back they took two Mulatto's, who were not able to march as faſt as their Conforts; therefore they had skulked in the Woods, and by that means thought to have eſcaped our Men. Theſe Priſoners informed us, that this great Road did lead to a great City called, Oarrha, from whence many of thoſe Horſemen before ſpoken of came; that this City was diſtant from hence as far as a Horſe will go in 4 days; and that there is no place of conſequence nearer: that the Country is very poor, and thinly inhabited. They faid alſo that theſe Men came to aſſiſt the Phillipine Ship, that was every day expected here, to puc aſhore Paſſengers for Mexico. The Spaniſh Piloc- Books mencion a Town alſo called Sallagua here- abouts : but we could not find it, nor hear any thing of it by our Priſoners: We now intended to cruize off of Cape Corientes to wait for the Phillipine Ship. So the 6th day of De- cember we ſet ſail, coaſting to the Weſtwards, to- wards Cape Corientes. We had fair weather, and but little Wind: the Sea breezes ac N. W. and the Land-wind at N. The Land is of an indifferent heighth, full of ragged points, which at a diſtance appear like Iſlands, the Country is very woody, but the Trees are not high, nor very big. Here I was taken lick of a Fever and Ague, that afterwards turned to a Dropſy, which I laboured under a long time after, and many of our Men died of this diſtemper, though our Surgeons uſed their greateſt skill to preſerve their lives. The Dropſy is a general diſtemper on this Coaſt, and the Natives ſay, 256 Cape Corientes. An. 1685. ſay, that the beſt remedy they can find for it is the Stone or Cod of an Allegacor (of which they have 4, one near each Leg, within the Fleſh) pulverized and drunk in Water : this Receipt we alſo found mentioned in an Almanack made at Mexico: I would have tried it, but we found no Allegators here, though there are ſeveral. There are many good Harbours between Salla- gua and Cape Corientes: but we paſſed by them all. As we drew near the Cape, the Land by the Sea appeared of an indifferent heighth, full of white Clifts; but in the Country the Land is high and barren, and full of ſharp peeked Hills, unpleaſant to the ſight. To the Weſt of this ragged Land is a chain of Mountains running parrallel with the ſhore : they end on the Weſt with a gentle deſcent; but on the Eat Gide they keep their heighth, ending with a high ſteep Mountain, which hath three ſmall ſharp peeked tops, ſomewhat reſembling a Crown; and therefore called by the Spaniards, Coronada the Crown-Land. The 11th day we were fair in fight of Cape Cor- rientes, ic bore N. by W. and the Crown-Land bore Norch. The Cape is of an indifferent heighth, with ſteep Rocks to the Sea. It is flat and even on the top, cloathed with woods: the Land in the Country is high and doubled. This Cape lieth in 20 d. 28 m. North. I find its longitude from Tenariff to be 230 d. 56 m. but I keep my longitude Weſtward according to our courſe, and according to this reckoning, I find it is from the Lizard in England 121 d.41 m. ſo that the difference of time is 8 hours, and almoſt 6 minutes. Here we had reſolved to cruize for the Phillipine Ship, becauſe ihe always makes this Cape in her Voyage homeward. We were (as I have ſaid ) 4. ſhips in company , Captain Swan, and his Ten- der; Captain Townly, and his Tender. It was fo ordered ifles of Chametly. 257 ordered, that Captain Swan ſhould lie 8 or 10 An.1685 leagues off ſhoar, and the reſt about a league di- ftant each from other, becween bim and the Cape, that ſo we might not miſs the Philippine Ship: buc we wanted Proviſion; and therefore we fent Cap- tain Townly's Bark, with 50 or 60 men to the Weſt of the Cape, to ſearch about for ſome Town or Plantations, where we might ger Provifion of any fort. The reſt of us in the mean time cruizing in our ſtations. The 17th day the Bark came to us again, but had got nothing, for they could not get about the Cape becauſe the Wind on this Coaſt is commonly between the N. W. and the S. W. which makes it very difficule getting to the Weſtward ; but they left 4 Canoas with 46 men at the Cape, who reſolved to row to the Weſtward. The 18th day we faled to the Keys of Chametly to fill our Water. Theſe Keys or Iſlands of Chametly are abouc 16 or 18 leagues to the Eaſtward of Cape Corrientes. They are ſmall, low, and woody, in- vironed with Rocks; there are 5 of them lying in the form of a half-Moon, not a mile from the ſhoar; and between them and the Main is very good Riding, ſecure from any Wind. The Spani. ards do report, that here live Fiſhermen, to fiſh for the Inhabitants of the City of Purification. This is ſaid to be a large Town, the beſt hereabouts; but is 14 leagues up in the Country. The 20th inſtant we entered within theſe Inands, paffing in on the S. E fide, and anchored becween the lands and the Main, in 5 fachom clean Sand. 5 Here we found good freſh Water and Wood and caught plenty of Rock-fiſh with Hook and Line, a ſort of Fiſh I defcrib'd at the Iſle of Fohn Fernando, but we ſaw no ſiga of Inhabitants, beſides 3 or 4 old Hutts; therefore I do believe that the Spaniſh, or Indian Fiſhermen come hither only at Lent, or ſome other ſuch ſeaſon, but that they do not live S here 258 Valderas, a pleaſant Valley. An. 1685 here conſtantly. The 21ſt day Captain Townly went away with about 60 men to take an Indian Village, 7 or 8 leagues from hence to the Weſtward more towards the Cape, and the next day we went to cruize off the Cape, where Captain Townly was to meer us. The 24th day, as we were cruizing off the Cape, the 4 Canoas before mentioned, which Captain Townly's Bark left at the Cape, came off tous. They, after the Bark left them, paſt to the Weſt of the Cape, and rowed into the Valley Val- deras, or perhaps Val d'Iris ; for ic fignifies the Valley of Flags. This Valley lies in the bottom of a pretty deep Bay, that runs in between Cape Corrientes on the S. E. and the point of Pontique on the N. W. which two places are about ten leagues alunder. The Valley is about 3 leagues wide; there is a level fandy Bay againſt the Sea, and good ſmooth land- ing. In the midſt of the Bay is a fine River,where- а into Boars may enter ; but it is brackiſh at the lac- ter end of the dry Seaſon, which is in February, March, and part of April.' I ſhall ſpeak more of the Seaſons in my Chapter of Winds, in the Ap- pendix. This Valley is bounded within Land,wich a ſmall green Hill, that makes a very gentle de- ſcent into the Valley, and affords a very pleafant proſpect to Sea-ward. It is inriched with fruitful Savannahs, mixt with Groves of Trees fic for any uſes, beſide Fruit-Trees in abundante, as Guava's, Oranges and Limes, which here grow wild in ſuch plenty, as if Nacure had deſigned it only for a Garder. The Savannahs are full of fat Bulls and Cows, and ſome Horſes, but no Houſe in ſight. When our Canoas came to this pleaſant Valley, they landed 37 men, and marched into the Coun- try ſeeking for ſome Honſes. They had not gone paſt 3 mile before they were attacke by 150 Spani- ards, Horſe and Foot : There was a ſmall thin Wood A Skirmiſh. 259 Wood cloſe by them, into which our Men retreat- An.1686 ed, to ſecure themſelves from the fury of the Horſe: Yet the Spaniards rode in among them, and attack'd them very furiouſly, till the Spaniſh , Captain, and 17 more, tumbled dead off their Horſes: then the reſt retreated, being many of them wounded. We loft 4. Men, and had 2 deſperately wounded. In this Action, the Foot,who were Armed with Lances and Swords, and were the greateſt number, never made any attack; the Horſe-men had each a brace of Piftols, and ſome ſhort Guns. If the Foot had come in, they had certainly deſtroy'd all our Men. When the skirmiſh was over, our Men plac'd the two wounded Men on Horſes, and came to their Canoas. There they kill'd one of the Horſes, and dreſsd it, being afraid to venture into the Savannah to kill a Bullock, of which there was ſtore. When they had eaten, and ſatisfy'd themſelves, they return- ed aboard. The 25th day, being Chriſtmas, we cruized in pretty near the Cape, and ſent in 3 Canoas with che Strikers to get Fiſh; being deſirous to have a Chriſtmas Dimer. In the Afternoon they returned aboard with 3 great Few- Fiſh, which feafted us all, and the next day we ſent alhoar our Canoas again, and got 3 or 4 more. Captain Townly, who went from us at Chametly, came aboard the 28th day, and brought about 40 Buſhels of Maiz. He had landed to the Eaſtward of Cape Corrientes, and march'd to an Indian Village that is 4 or 5 leagues in the Country. The Indians ſeeing him coming, fet 2 Houſes on fire, that were full of Maiz, and run away: Yer he and his Men gor, in other Houſes, as much as they could bring down on their backs; which he brought aboard. We cruized off the Cape till the firſt day of Ja nuary 1686. and then made towards the Valley Valderas, to hunt for Beef; and before Night we Anchored in the bottom of the Bay, in 60 fachom wa- S 2 260 Their Deſigns on this Coaft. An. 1686 water, a mile from the ſhoar. Here we ſtay'd Hunting till the 7th day, and Captain Swan and Captain Townly went alhoar every morning with about 240 Men, and marched to a ſmall Hill ; where they remaind with 50 or 60 men to watch the Spaniards, who appear'd in great companies on other Hills not far diftant, but did never attempt any thing againſt our Men. Here we killd and falted above 2 months Meat, beſides what we ſpent freſh; and might have killd as much more, if we had been better fford with Salt. Our hopes of meeting the Philippine Ship were now over; for we did all conclude, that while we were neceffitated to hunc here for Proviſions, she was paft by to the Eaſtward, as indeed he was, as we did underſtand afterwards by Priſoners. So this deſign faild thro? Captain Townley's eagerneſs after the Lima Ship, which he attempted in Acapulco Harbour, as I have related. For though we took a little Flower hard by, yet the fame Guide which told us of that Ship would have conducted us where we might had ſtore of Beef and Maiz: buc inftead thereof, we loft both our time, and the opportunity of providing our felves, and ſo were forced to be victualling when we ſhould have been cruizing off Cape Corri- entes, in expectation of the Manila Ship. Hicherto we had coafted along here with 2 diffe- rent deſigns : The one was to get the Manila Ship, which would have enriched us beyond meaſure; and this Captain Townley. was moſt for. Sir Tho.Ca- vendiſh formerly took the Manila Ship of Cape St. Lucas in California, (where we alſo would have waited for her, had we been early enough ſtored with Proviſions, to have mer her there) and threw much rich Goods over-board. The other deſign, which Captain Swan and our Crew were moſt for, was to ſearch along the Coaſt for rich Towns, and Mines chiefly of Gold and Silver, which we were aſſured Darien Indians. Point Pontique. 261 aſſured were in this Country, and we hoped near the ſhoar ; not knowing (as we afterwards found) An.1686 that it was in effect an Inland Country, its Wealth remote from the South Sea Coaſt, and having licule or no commerce with it ; its Trade being driven Eaſtward with Europe, by La Vera Cruz. Yet we had ſtill ſome expectacion of Mines, and ſo reſolved to ſteer on farther Northward. But Captain Town- ly, who had no other deſign in coming on this Coaſt but to meet chis Ship, reſolved to return again to- wards the Coaſt of Pers. In all this Voyage on the Mexican Coaſt, we had with us a Captain, and 2 or 3 of his Men of our friendly Indians of the Ifthmus of Darien; who ha- ving conducted over ſome Parties of our Privateers, and expreſſing a deſire to go along with us, were received, and kindly entertained aboard our Ships : and we were pleas'd in having, by chis means, Guides ready provided, ſhould we be for returning over Land, as ſeveral of us thought to do, racher than fail round about. Buc at this time, we of Captain Swan's Ship deſigning farther to the North- Weſt, and Captain Townly going back, we com micced cheſe our Indian Friends to his care, to carry them home. So here we parted; he to the Eaſt- ward, and we to the Weſtward, intending to ſearch as far to the Weſtward as che Spaniards were ſeccled. It was the 7th day of January in the morning, when we failed from this pleafanc Valley. The Wind was ac N. E. and the weather fair. 'Acui a Clock the Sea-wind came ac N. W. Before night we paſſed by Point Pontique ; this is che Weft-point of the Bay of the Valley of Valderas, and is diftant from Cape Corrientes 10 leagues. This point is in lat. 2od. som. North; it is high, round, rocky and barren. At a diſtance it appears like an Iſland. A league to the Weſt of this poine are two ſmall bar- a S3 ren a 262 Other Ifles of Chametly. An.1686 ren Idands, called the Iſlands of Pontique. There are feveral high, ſharp, white Rocks, that lie (cac- tering about them: we paſt between theſe rocky Iſlands on the left, and the Main on the right ; for there is no danger. The Sea coaft beyond this point runs Northward for about 18 leagues, making ma- ny ragged points, with ſmall ſandy Bays between them. The Land by the Sea-ſide is low and pret- ty woody, but in the Country full of high, ſharp, barren, rugged, unpleaſant Hills. The 14th day we had fight of a ſmall white Rock, which appears very much like a Ship under fail. This Rock is in lat. 21 d. 15 m. it is 3 leagues from the Main. There is a good Channel between it and the Main, where you will have 12 or 14 fa- thom water near the Mand; but running nearer the Main you will have gradual foundings, till you come in with the ſhoar. At Night we Anchored in 6 fathom water, near a league from the Main, in good Oazy ground. We caught a great many Cat- Fiß here, and at ſeveral places on this Coaſt, both before and after this. From this Iſland the Land runs more Northerly, making a fair fandy Bay: Buc the Sea falls in with ſuch violence on the ſhoar, that there is no landing, but very good anchoring on all the Coaſt, and gra- dual foundings. About a league off ſhoar you will have 6 fachom, and four mile off ſhoar you will have 7 fachom warer. We came to an Anchor every Evening; and in the Mornings we failed off with the Land-wind; which we found at N. E. and the Sea-breezes at N. W. The 2oth day we anchored about 3 miles on the Eaſt-ſide of the Iſlands Cbametly, different from thoſe of that Name before-mentioned; for theſe are 6 ſmall Iſlands in lat. 23 d. 11 m. a liccle to che South of the Tropick of Cancer, and about 3 leagues from the Main, where a Salt Lake hath its out-ler into The Penguin Fruit, yellow and red. 263 into the Sea. Theſe Ines are of an indifferent An. 1686 heighth : Some of them have a few ſhrubby buſhes; the reſt are bare of any ſort of Wood. They are rocky round by the Sea: only one or two of them have ſandy Bays on the North-fide. There is a forc of Fruit growing on theſe Iſlands called Penguins ; and 'cis all the Fruit they have. The Penguin Fruit is of two forts, the yellow and the red. The yellow Penguin grows on a green ſtern, as big as a Man's Arm, above a fooc high from the ground: The leaves of this ſtalk are half a foot long, and an inch broad ; the edges full of Tharp prickles. The Fruit grows ac che head of the ſtalk, in 2 or 3 great cluders, 16 or 20 in a cluſter. The Fruit is as big as a Pallets Egg, of a round form, and in colour yellow. It has a thick skin or rind, and the inſide is full of ſmall black ſeeds, mixt among the Fruit. It is a ſharp pleaſant Fruir. The red Penguin is of the bigneſs and colour of a ſmall dry Onion, and is in ſhape much like a Nine-pin; for it grows, not on a ſtalk, or ſtem, as the other, but one end on the ground, the other ſtanding up- right. Sixty or 70 grow thus together as cloſe as they can ſtand one by another, and all from the ſame roor, or cluſter of roots. Theſe Penguins are en- compaſt or fenced with long leaves, about a foot and a half, or two foot long, and prickly like the former ; and the Fruic too is much alike. They are both wholſon, and never offend che ſtomach: bur thoſe that eat many will find a beat or tickling in their Fundament. They grow ſo plentifully in the Bay of Campeachy, that there is no pafling for their high prickly leaves. There are ſome Guanoes on theſe Iſlands, buc no other ſort of Land Animal. The Bays about che Iſlands are ſometimes viſited with Seal, and this was the firſt place where I had ſeen any of theſe Animals on the North ſide of the Equator, in theſe Seas. S4 264 Pearl Fijlery at California. An. 1686 Seas. For the Fiſh on this fandy Coaſt lie moſt in the Lagunes or Salt-lakes, and mouths of Rivers ; but the Seals coine not ſo much there, as I judge : for this being no rocky Coaſt, where Fich reſort moſt, there ſeems to be but little food for the Seals, unleſs they will venture upon Cat-Fiſh. Captain Swan went away from hence with 100 Men, in our Canoas, to the Northward, to ſeek for the River Coolec an, poſſibly the fame with the River of Paftla, which ſome Maps lay down in the Province or Region of Callacan. This River lieth in about 24 d. N. lat. We were informed, that there is a fair and rich Spaniſl, Town feated on the Eaſt-fide of it, with Savannahs about it, full of Bulls and Cows; and that the Inhabitants of this Town paſs over in Boats to the land California, where they fich for Pearl. I have been told Gince by a Spaniard, that faid he had been at the Iſland California, that there are great plenty of Pearl Oyſters there, and that the Native Indians of California,near the Pearl- fiſhery, are mortal Enemies to the Spaniards. Our Canoas were abſent 3 or 4 days, and ſaid they had been above 30 leagues but found no River; chat the Land by the Sea was low, and all ſandy Bay; buc ſuch a great Sea, that there was no landing. They met us in their recurn in the lat.:23 d. 30 m.coafting along ſhoar after them towards Cullacan; ſo we re- turned again to the Eaſtward. This was the far- theft that I was to the North, on this Coaſt. Six or 7 leagues N N. W. from the Iſles of Chao metly, there is a ſmall narrow entrance into a Lake, which runs about 12 leagues Eaſterly, parallel with the ſhoar, making many ſmall low Mangrove Idlands. The mouth of this Lake is in lat. abouc 23 d. 30 m. It is called by the Spaniards Rio de Sal; for it is a Salt Lake. There is Water enough for Boats and Canoas to enter, and ſmooth landing af- ter you are in. On the Weſ-lide of ic there is an Houſes Rio de Sal. Maffaclan. 265 Houſe, and an ERantion, or Farm of large Cattel. An. 1686 Our Men went into the Lake, and landed, and co- ming to the Houſe found 7 or 8 Buſhels of Maiz; buc the Cattel were driven away by the Spaniards : yet there our Men took the Owner of the Eſtan- sion, and brought him aboard. He ſaid, that the Beefs were driven a great way into the Country, for fear we ſhould kill them. While we lay here, Captain Swan went into this Lake again, and landed 150 Men on the N. E. fide, and marched into the Country: Aboue a mile from the Landing-place, as they were entring a dry Salina, or Sale-pond, they fired at two Indians that croft che way before them: one of them being wounded in the thigh fell down, and being examined, he told our Men, that there was an Indian Town 4 or s leagues off, and that the way which they were going would bring them thither. While they were in diſcourſe with the Indian, they were attacked by 100 Spaniſh Horſemen, who came with a deſign to ſcare them back, but wanted both Arms and Hearts to do it. Our Men paſt on from hence, and in their way marched through a Savannah of long dry Graſs : This the Spaniards ſet on fire, thinking to burn them; buc that did not hinder our Men from march: ing forward, though it did trouble chem a little. They rambled for want of Guides all this day, and part of the next, before they came to the Town the Indian ſpake of. There they found a company of Spaniards and Indians who made head againſt them ; but were driven out of the Town after a fhort diſpute. Here our Chirurgeon, and one Man more, were wounded with Arrows; but none of the reſt were hurt. When they came into the Town they found 2 or 3 Indians wounded, who told them that the Name of the Town was Malaclan; that there were a few Spaniards living in it, and the reſt were Indians: that five leagues from this Town there 3 266 River and Town of Roſario. Gold Mines. An.1686 there were two rich Gold Mines, where the Spa- niards of Compoſtella, which is the chiefeſt Town in theſe parts, kept many Slaves and Indians at work for Gold. Here our Men lay that night, and the next morning packt up all the Maiz that they could find, and brought it on their backs to the Canoas, and came aboard. We lay here till the 2d of February, and then Captain Swan went away with about 80 Men to the River Roſario ; where they landed, and marched to an Indian Town of the fame Name. They found it about 9 mile from the Sea, the way to it fair and even. This was a fine little Town, of about 60 or 70 Houſes, with a fair Church, and it was chiefly inhabited with Indians. They cook Priſoners there, which cold them, that the River Roſario is rich in Gold, and charche Mines are not above two leagues from the Town. Captain Swan did not think it convenient to go to che Mines, but made haſte aboard with the Maiz which he took there, to the quantity of about 80 or go Buſhels 3 and which to us, in the ſcarcity we were in of Proviſions, was at that time more valuable than all the Gold in the World: and had be gone to the Mines,che Spaniards would probably have deſtroyed the Corn before his return. The 3d day of February we went with our Ships alſo towards the River Roſario, and anchored the next day againſt the Rivers mouch, in 7 fathom good Oazy ground, a league from the ſhoar. This River is in lat. 22 d. 51 m. N. When you are at an anchor againſt this River, you will ſee a round Hill, like a Sugar-loaf, a little way within Land right over the River,and bearing N.E. by N. To the Weſtward of chac Hill there is another pretty long Hill, called by the Spaniards Caput Cavalli, or the Horſe's Head. The 7th day Captain Sman came aboard with the Maiz which he got. This was but a ſmall quantity for ſo many Men as we were, eſpecially conſidering the a River of St. Jago. 267 the place we were in, being ſtrangers, and having An.1686 no Pilots to direct or guide us into any River; and we being without all ſort of Proviſion, but what we were forced to ger in chis manner from the ſhoar. And though our Pilot-Book directed us well enough to find the Rivers, yet for want of Guides to carry us to the Settlements, we were forced to ſearch two or three days before we could find a place to land ; for as I have ſaid before, beſides the Seas being too rough for landing in many places, they have neither Boat, Bark, nor Canoa, that we could ever ſee or hear of: and therefore, as there are no ſuch land- ing places in theſe Rivers, as there are in the North Seas, ſo when we were landed, we did not know which way to go to any Town, except we acci- dentally met with a path. Indeed, the Spaniards and Indians, whom we had aboard, knew the Names of ſeveral Rivers and Towns near them, and knew the Towns when they ſaw them; but they knew not the way to go to them from the Sea. The 8th day Captain Swan ſent about 40 Men to ſeek for the River Oleta, which is to the Eaſt- ward of the River Roſario. The next day we fol- lowed after with the Ships, having the Wind ac W.N. W. and fair weather. In the Afternoon our Canoas came again to us, for they could not find the River Oleta; therefore we deſigned next for the River St. Fago, to the Eaſtward ftill . The IIth day in the Evening we Anchored againſt the mouch of the River, in 7 fathom water, good loft . Oazy ground, and about two mile from the ſhoar. There was a high white Rock without us, called Mexentelbo. This Rock at a diſtance appears like a Ship under fail ; ic bore from us W.N. W. diftant about 3 leagues. The Hill Zeliſco bore S. E. which is a very high Hill in the Country, with a Saddle or bending on the top. The River St. ago is in lat. 22 d. Is m. It is one of the principal Rivers on a this 268 Santa Pecaque. An. 1686 this Coaft; there is 10 foot Water on the Bar at low Water, but how much it flows here I know not. The mouch of this River is near half a mile broad, and very ſmooth entring. Within the mouth ic is broader ; for there are 3 or 4 Rivers more meet there, and iſſue all out together. The Water is brackiſh a great way up; yet there is freſh Water to be had, by digging or making Wells in the fandy Bay, 2 or 3 foot deep, juſt ac che mouth of the River. The unth day Captain Swan fent 70 men in 4 Ca- noas into this River, to ſeek a Town; for although we had no intelligence of any, yet the Country appearing very promiſing, we did not quefiion but they would find Inhabitants before they returned. They ſpent two days in Rowing up and down the Creeks and Rivers; at laſt they came to a large Field of Maiz, which was almoſt ripe : They immediately fell to gathering as faſt as they could, and intended to lade the Canoas; but ſeeing an Indian chat was ſet to watch the Corn, they quit- ted that croubleſom and tedious work, and ſeiz'd him, and brought him aboard, in hopes by bis in- formation, to have ſome more eaſie and expedite way of a ſupply, by finding Corn ready cuc and dried. He being examined, faid, that there was a Town called Santa Pecaque, four leagues from the place where he was taken; and that if we de- Yigned to go thicher, he would undertake to be our Guide. Captain Swan immediately ordered his Men to make ready, and the ſame evening went away with 8 Canoas and 140 Men, taking the Inza dian for their Guide. He rowed about five leagues up the River, and landed the next morning. The River at this place was not above Piftol-ſhot wide, and the Banks pretty high on each ſide, and the Land plain and even. He left 23 Men to guard the Canoas, and marcht City, and Silver Mines of Compoſtella. 269 marcht with the reſt to the Town. He ſet out An.1686 from the Canoas at 6 a clock in the morning, and reacht the Town by 10. The way thro which he paſſed was very plain, part of it Wood-land, part Savannahs. The Savannahs were full of Horſes, Bulls and Cows. The Spaniards ſeeing him coming run all away; fo he entered the Town without the leaſt oppoſition. This Town of Santa Pecaque ftands on a Plain, in a Savannah, by the ſide of a Wood,with many Fruit Trees about it. It is but a ſmall Town, but very regular, after the Spaniſh mode, with a Parade in the midft. The Houſes fronting the Parade had all Balconies: there were twoChurches, one againſt the Parade, the other at the end of the Town. It is inhabited moſt with Spaniards. Their chiefeſt occupation is Husbandry. There are alſo ſome Carriers, who are imployed by the Merchants of Compoſtella, to trade for them to, and from the Mines Compoſtella is a rich Town, about 2 1 leagues from hence. It is the chiefeſt in all this part of the King- dom, and is reported to have 70'white Families: which is a great matter in cheſe parts ; for it may be that ſuch a Town hath no leſs than soo Fami- lies of copper coloured People beſides the white. The Silver Mines are about 5 or 6 leagues from Sanct a Pecaque; where, as we were told, the Inha- bitants of Compoſtela had ſome hundreds of Slaves at work. The Silver here, and all over the King- dom of Mexico is faid to be finer and richer in pro- portion than that of Potoſi or Peru, cho the Oar be not ſo abundant; and the Carriers of this Town of Santa Pecaque carry the Oar to Compoſtella, where it is refined. Theſe Carriers or Sutlers alſo furniſh theSlaves at the Mines with Maiz,whereof here was great plenty now in the Town deſigned for that ule ; here was alſo Sugar, Salt, and Sale-Fiſh. Captain 270 Santa Pecaque pillaged. An. 1686 Captain Swan's only buſineſs at Santa Pecaque was to get Proviſion: therefore he ordered his Men to divide themſelves into two parts, and by turns carry down the Proviſion to the Canoas ; one half remaining in the Town to ſecure what they had taken, while the other half were going and co- ming. In the afternoon they caught fome Horſes, and the next morning, being the 17th day, 57 Men, and ſome Horſes, went laden with Maiz to the Canoas. They found them, and the Men left to guard them, in good order ; though the Spaniards had given them a ſmall diverſion, and wounded one Man: but our Men of the Canoas landed, and drove them away. Theſe chat came loaded to the Canoas left Men more there, ſo that now they were 30 Men to guard the Canoas. At night the other returned, and the 18th day in the morning that half which ſtaid the day before at the Town, took their curn of going wich every Man his bur- then, and 24 Horſes laden. Before they returned Captain Swan and his other Men at the Town caughe a Priſoner, who faid, that there were near a thouſand Men of all colours, Spaniards and Indians, Negroes and Mulattoes, in Arms, at a place called St. 7 ago, but 3 leagues off, the chief Town on this River, that the Spaniards were armed with Guns and Piſtols, and the copper-colour'd with Swords and Lances. Captain Swan, fearing the ill conſe- quence of ſeparating bis ſmall company, was re- folved the next day to march away with the whole party; and therefore he ordered bis Men to catch as many Horſes as they could, that they might carry the more Proviſion with them. Accordingly, the next day, being the 19th day of February; 1686, Captain Swan called our bis Men betimes to be gone, but they refuſed to go, and ſaid, that they would not leave the Town till all the Proviſion was in the Canoas : Therefore he was forced to 3 yield Fifty of their Men killed. 271 yield to them, and ſuffered half the company to go An.1686 as before : They had now 54 Horſes laden, which Capcain Swan ordered to be tied one to another, and the Men to go in two bodies, 25 before, and as many behind : but the Men would go at their own rate, every Man leading his Horſe. The Spaniards obſerved their manner of marching, and laid an Ambuſh about a mile from the Town,which they managed with ſuch ſucceſs, that falling on our body of Men, who were guarding the Corn to the Canoas, they kill'd them every one. Captain Swan hearing the report of their Guns, ordered his Men, who were then in the Town with him, to march out to their aſſiſtance : but ſome oppoſed him, de- ſpiſing their Enemies; till two of the Spaniards Horſes, that had loſt their Rides, came galloping into the Town in a great fright, both bridled and ſaddled, with each a pair of Holſters by their ſides, and one had a Carabine newly diſcharged : which was an apparent token chat our Men had been engaged, and that by Men better armed than they imagined they ſhould meer with. Therefore Caprain Swan immediacely marcht out of the Town, and his Men all followed bim; and when he came to the place where the Engagement had been, he ſaw all his Men that went out in the morn- ing lying dead. They were ſtript, and ſo cut and mangld, chat he ſcarce knew one Man. Captain Swan had not more Men then with him, than thoſe were who lay dead before him, yet the Spaniards never came to oppoſe him, but kept at a great di- ſtance ; for 'cis probable the Spaniards had not cuc off ſo many Men of ours, but with the loſs of a great many of their own. So he marched down to the Canoas, and came aboard the Ship with the Maiz that was already in the Canoas. We had about 50 Men killed, and among the reſt my inge- nious friend Mr. Ringrofe was one, who wrote that Part 272 Of the Gulf of California. An.1686 Part of the Hißory of the Buccaneers, which relates to Captain Sharp. He was at this time Cape Merchant, or Super-cargo of Captain Swan's Ship. He had no mind to this Voyage; but was neceffitated to en- gage in it, or farve. This loſs diſcouraged us from attempting any thing more hereabouts. Therefore Capcain Swan propoſed to go to Cape St. Lucas on California to careen. He had two reaſons for this: firſt, that he thought he could lie there ſecure from the Spaniards; and next, that if he could get a commerce with the Indians there, he might make a diſcovery in the Lake of California, and by their aſſiſtance try for ſome of the Plate of New Mexico. This Lake of California (for ſo the Sea, Channel or Streight, between that and the Continent, is called ) is buc liccle known to the Spaniards, by what I could ever learn; for their Drafts do not agree about it. Some of them do make California an INand, but give no manner of account of the Tides flowing in the Lake, or what depth of Water chere is, or of the Harbours, Rivers, or Creeks, that border on it: Whereas on the Weſt-lide of the Iſland, toward the Aſiatick Coaſt, their Pilot Book gives an account of the Coaſt from Cape St. Lucas to 40 d. N. Some of their Drafts newly made do make California to join to the Main. I do believe that the Spaniards do not care to have this Lake dif- covered, for fear left other European Nacions ſhould get knowledge of it, and by that means viſit the Mines of New Mexico. We heard that not long be- fore our arrival here that the Indians of the Province of New Mexico made an inſurrection, and deſtroy- ed moſt of the Spaniards there, but that ſome of them flying towards the Gulf or Lake of California, made Canoas in that Lake and got ſafe away ; ſo that the Indians of the Lake of California,ſeem to be at perfect enmity with the Spaniards. We had 10 an mong them. Kingdom of New-Mexico. . 273 an old intelligent Spaniard now aboard who faid An.1686 that he ſpoke with a Frier chat made his eſcape a- New Mexico,by report of ſeveral Engliſh Priſoners there, and Spaniards I have met with, lyerh N.W. from Old Mexico between 4 and 5oo leagues, and the biggeſt part of the Treaſure which is found in this Kingdom, is in that Provence; but without doubt there are plenty of Mines in other parts, as well as in this part of the Kingdom where we now were, as in other places ; and probably, on the Main, border- ing on the Lake of California; although not yet diſcovered by the Spaniards who have Mines enough, and therefore, as yet, have no reaſon to diſcover ; more. In my opinion, here might be very advantagious Diſcoveries made by any that would attempt it,for the Spaniards have more than they can well manage. I know yet, they would lie like the Dog in the Man- ger; alcho not able to eat themſelves, yet they would endeavour to hinder others. But the Voyage thither being ſo far, I take that to be one reaſon that hath hindered the Diſcoveries of theſe parts: yet it is poſſible, chat a man may find a nearer way hicher than we came; I mean by the North VVeft. I know there have been divers attempts made abour a North VVeſt Paſſage, and all unſucceſsful : yet I am of opinion, that ſuch a Paflage may be found. All our Countrymen that have gone to diſcover the N. W. paffage, have endeavoured to paſs to che Weſtward, beginning their ſearch along Davis's or Hudſons Bay. But if I was to go on this Diſcovery, I would go firſt into the South Seas, bend my courſe from thence along by California, and that way ſeek a paffage back into the West Seas: For as others have ſpent the Summer in firſt . ſearching on this more known fide nearer home, and ſo before they got through, the time of the T year 274 Of the North Weſt and North-Eaſt Paſages. An. 1686 year obliged them to give over their ſearch, and provide for a long courſe back again, for fear of being left in the Winter; on the contrary, I would ſearch firſt on the lefs known Coaſts of the South Sea fide, and then, as the year paſt away, I ſhould need no retreat, for I ſhould come farther into my knowledge, if I fucceeded in my artempt, and ſhould be withouc that dread and fear which the others muſt have in paſling from the known to the un- known; who for ought I know gave over their ſearch juſt as they were on the point of accompliſh- ing their delires. I would take the ſame method if I was to go to diſcover the North Eaſt paſſage. I would winter about Fapan, Corea, or the North Eaſt part of Chi- na; and taking the Spring and Summer before me, I would make my firit Trial on the Coaſt of Tarta- ry: wherein, if I ſucceeded, I ſhould come into ſome known parts; and have a great deal of time before me to reach Archangel or ſome other Port. Captain Wood indeed ſays, this North Eaſt Paffage is not to be found for Ice; but how often do we ſee that ſometimes deſigns have been given over as impoffi- ble, and at anocher cime, and by other ways, thoſe very things bave been accompliſhed? But enough of this. The next day after that fatal Skirmiſh near Santa Pecaque Captain Swan ordered all our Water to be fill'd, and to get ready to fail. The 2 iſt day we failed from hence, directing our courſe towards Ca- lifornia : we had the wind at N. W. and W. NW. a finall gale, with a great Sea out of the Weſt. We paſt by 3 INands called the Maria's. After we paſt theſe Thands we had much Wind ar N. N W. and N. W. and ar N. with chick rainy weather. We beat till the 6th day of February, but it was againſt a brisk Wind, and proved labour in vain. For we were now within reach of the Land Trade-wind, which The Maria's Iſlands. 275 which was oppoſite to us : but would we go to Ca. An.1686 lifornia upon any Diſcovery or otherwiſe, we ſhould bear 60 or 70 leagues off from ſhoar, where we fhould avoid the Land-winds, and have the benefit of the true Eafterly Trade-wind. Finding therefore that we got nothing, but ra- ther loft ground, being then in 21 d. 5 m. N. we ſteered away more to the Eaſtward again for the Inands Maria's, and the 7th day we came to an Anchor ar the Eaſt-end of the middle Idand, in 8 fathom Water, good clean Sand. The Maria's are three uninhabited Illands in lat. 21 d. 40 m. they are diſtant from Cape St. Lucas on California 40 leagues, bearing Eaſt South Eaſt, and they are diſtant from Cape Corrientes twency leagues, bearing upon the ſame points of the Com- paſs with Cape St. Lucas. They ſtretch N. W. and S. E. about 14 leagues. There are 2 or 3 ſmall high Rocks near them; the Weſtermoſt of them is the biggeſt Iſland of the three, and they are all three of an indifferent heighth. The ſoil is fony and dry; the land, in molt places, is covered with a ſhrubby fort of Wood, very thick and trouble- ſome to paſs through. In ſome places there is plen- ty of ſtraight large Cedars; though ſpeaking of the places where I have found Cedars, Chap. 3. I for- got to mention this place. The Spaniards make mention of them in other places : but I ſpeak of thoſe which I have ſeen. All round by the Sea ſide it is ſandy; and there is produced a green prickly Plant, whoſe leaves are much like the Penguin leaf, and the root like the root of a Sempervive, but much larger. This root being bak'd in an Oven is good to eat, and the Indians on California, as I have been informed, bave great part of their fubffence from theſe roots. We made an Oven in a fandy Bank, and baked of theſe Roots, and I eat of them, but none of us greatly cared for them. They caffe ex- T2 adaily 276 Prince George's Iſland. An. 1686 actly like the Roots of our Engliſh Burdocks boil'd, of which I have eaten. Here are plenty of Gua- noes and Raccoons (a large fort of Rat) and Indian Conies, and abundance of large Pigeons and Tur- tle. Doves. The Sea is alſo pretty well ſtored with Fiſh, and Turcle or Tortoiſe, and Seal. This is the ſecond place on this Coaſt where I did ſee any Seal: and this place belps to confirm what I have obſerved, that they are ſeldom feen but where there is plenty of Filh. Captain Swan gave the middle Irland the Name of Prince George's Ifland. The 8th day we run nearer the Ifland, and an- chored in s fathom, and moored Head and Stern, and unrigg'd both Ship and Bark in order to careen. Here Captain Swan propoſed to go into the Eaſt- Indies. Many were well pleaſed with the Voyage; but ſome thought, ſuch was their ignorance, that he would carry them out of the world; for about two thirds of our Men did not think there was any ſuch way to be found : but ar laft he gain'd their confents. At our firſt coming hither we did eat nothing but Seal; but after the first 2 or 3 days our Strikers brought aboard Turtle every day; on which we fed all the time that we lay here, and ſaved our Maiz for our Voyage. Here alſo we meaſured all our Maiz, and found we had abcur 80 Buſhels. This we divided into 3 parts; one for the Bark, and two for the Ship; our Men were divided alſo, 100 Men aboard the Ship, and 50 aboard the Bark, beſides 3 or 4 Slaves in each. I had been a long time fick of a Dropfie, a di- ftemper, whereof, as I ſaid before, many of our Men died; fo bere I was laid and covered all but my head in che hot Sand: I indured it near half an hour, and then was taken our and laid to ſweat in a Tent. I did ſweat exceedingly while I was in the Sand, and I do believe it did me much good, for I grew well ſoon after, We Of the Commerce of Mexico. 277 We ſtaid here till the 20th day, and then both An. 1686 Veſſels being clean, we failed to the Valley of Balder as to water, for we could not do it here now. In the wet Seaſon indeed here is Water enough, for the Brooks then run down plentifully ; but now, though there was Water, yet ic was bad filling, it being a great way to fetch ic from the holes where it lodged. The 28th day we anchored in the bottom of the Bay of the Valley of Balderas, right againſt the River, where we watered before : but this River was brackiſh now in the dry ſeaſon ; and therefore we went 2 or 3 leagues nearer Cape Corrientes, and anchored by a ſmall round Iſland, not half a Mile from the ſhoar. The Iſland is about 4 Leagues to the Northward of the Cape ; and the Brook, where we filled our water, is juſt within the Iſland, upon the Main. Here our Siri- kers ftruck 9 or 10 Few Fiſh; ſome we did eat, and the reſt we ſalted : and the 29ch day we filld 32 Tuns of very good water. Having thus provided our felves, we had nothing more to do, but to put in execution our intended Expedition to the Eaſt-Indies, in hopes of ſome bet- ter ſucceſs there, than we had met wich on this liccle frequented Coaſt. We came on it full of ex- pectations, for beſides the richneſs of the Country, and the probability of finding ſome Sea Ports worth vificing, we perſwaded our felves that there muſt needs be Shipping and Trade here, and that Aca- pulco, and La Vera Cruz, were to the Kingdom of Mexico, what Panama and Portobel are to that of Peru, viz. Marts for carrying on a conſtant Com- merce between the South and North Seas, as indeed they are. But whereas we expected that this Com- merce ſhould be managed by Sea, from the places along the Weſt Coaſt, we found our felves miſta- ken; that of Mexico being almoſt wholly a Land-Trade, and managed more by Mules than by Ships : 278 They leave the Mexican Goaſt. An.1686 Ships: So chat inſtead of profit, we met with little on this Coaſt, beſides fatigues, hardſhips and loſſes, and fo were the more eaſily induced to try what better fortune we might have in the Eaſt-Indies. Buc to do right to Captain Swan, he had no in- tention to be as a Privateer in the Eaft-Indies; but, as he hach often aſſured me with his own mouth, he reſolved to take the firſt opportunity of return- ing to England: So that he feigned a compliance with ſome of his Men, who were bent upon going to cruize at Manila, that he might have leiſure to take fome favourable opportunity of quitting the Privateer Trade. CHAP Their Proviſions for croſſing the S. Seas. 279 An. 1686 СНА Р. Х. > a > Their Departure from Cape Corrientes for the Ladrone Iſlands, and the Eaſt Indies. Their Courſe thither, and Accidents by the way : with a Table of each days Run, &c. Of the different accounts of the breadth of theſe Seas. Guam, one of the Ladrone hands. The Coco Nut Tree, Fruit, &c. The Toddi, or Arack that diſiils from it; with other Uſes that are made of it. Coire Cables. The Lime, or Grab Limon. The Bread-Fruit. The Na- tive Indians of Guam. Their Proe's, a re- markable fort of Boats: and of thoſe uſed in the Eaſt-Iddies. The State of Guam: and the Proviſions with which they were furniſh'd there. I Have given an account in the laſt Chapter of the Reſolutions we cook of going over to the Eaſt-Indies. But having more calmly conſidered on the length of our Voyage, from hence to Guam, one of the ladrone Iſlands, which is the firſt place that we could touch at, and there alſo being noc certain to find Proviſions, moſt of our Men were almoſt daunted at the choughts of it ; for we had nor 60 days Proviſion, at a liccle more than half a pint of Maiz a day for each Man, and no other Proviſion, except 3 Meals of falted Jew-fiſh; and we had a great many Racs aboard, which we could not hinder from eating part of our Maiz. Belide, the great diſtance between Cape Corrientes and Guam: which is variouſly ſer down. The Spa niards, T4 280 The Tediouſneſs of this Voyage. An. 1686 niards, who have che greateſt reaſon to know beſt, make it to be between 2300 and 2400 leagues ; our Books alſo reckon it differently, between 90 and 100 degrees, which all comes ſhort indeed of 2000 leagues, but even char was a Voyage enough to frighten us, conſidering our ſcanty Proviſions. Captain Swan, to encourage his Men to go with him, perſuaded them that the Engliſh Books did give the beſt account of the diſtance ; his rea- ions were many, although but weak. He urged among the reſt, that Sir Thomas Candiſh and Sir Fran- cis Drake, did run it in leſs than 50 days, and that he did not queſtion but that our Ships were better failers, than thoſe which were built in that Age, and that he did not doubt to get there in little more than 40 days: This being the beſt time in the Year for breezes, wbich undoubtedly is the reaſon that the Spaniards ſet out from Acapulco about this time, and that although they are 60 days in their Voyage, it is becauſe they are great Ships, deep laden, and very heavy failers; beſides, they wanting nothing, are in no great hafte in their way, but fail with a great deal of their uſual caution. And when they come near the Iſland Guam, they We by in the night for a week, before they make Land. In prudence we alſo ſhould have contriv'd to lie by in the night when we came near Land, for otherwiſe we mighe have run afhoar, or have outſailed the Iſlands, and loft fight of them before morning. But our bold Adventurers ſeldom pro- ceed with ſuch warineſs when in any ſtraights. But of all Captain Swan's Arguments, that which prevailed moſt with them was, bis promiſing them, as I have ſaid, to cruize off the Manila's. So he and his Men being now agreed, and they incouraged with the hope of gain, which works its way thro? all difficulties, we ſet out from Cape Corrientes March the 3 i ft, 1686. We were 2 Ships in company, Captain a The Courſe from Cape Corrientes to Guam. 281 Captain Swan's Ship, and a Bark commanded un- An. 1686 der Captain Swan, by Captain Teat, and we were 150 Men, ico aboard of the Ship, and 50 aboard the Bark, beſide flaves, as I ſaid. We had a ſmall Land-wind ac E.N. E. which carried us 3 or 4. leagues, then the Sea-wind came ar W. N. W. a freſh gale, ſo we ſteered away S.W. By 6 a clock in the evening we were about 9 leagues S. W. from the Cape, then we met a Land-wind which blew freſh all night, and the next morning about to a clock we had the Sea breeze at N.N.E. fo chat at noon we were 30 leagues from the Cape. It blew a frelh gale of Wind, which carried us off into the true Trade-wind, ( of the difference of which Trade-winds I ſhall ſpeak in the Chapter of Winds, in the Appendix ) for although the con- ftant Sea-breeze near the ſhoar is at W. N. W. yet the true Trade off at Sea, when you are clear of the Land-winds, is ac E. NE. Ac firſt we had ic at N. N E. ſo it came about Eaſterly, and then to the Eaſt as we run off. Ac 250 leagues diſtance from the ſhoar we had it at E. N. E. and there ic ſtood till we came within 40 leagues of Guam, When we had eaten up our 3 meals of ſalted Jem- . fiſh in ſo many days time, we had nothing but our 1mall allowance of Maiz. After the firſt day of March we made great runs every day, having very fair clear weather, and a freſh Trade-wind, which we made uſe of with all our Sails, and we made many good Obſervations of the Sun. At our firſt ſetting out, we ſteerd into the lac. of 13 degrees, which is near the lat. of Guam ; then we feered Weft keeping in that lac. By that time we had failed 20 days, our Men fee- ing we made ſuch great runs, and the Wind like to continue , repined becauſe they were kept at ſuch ſhort allowance. Captain Swan endeavoured to perſuade them to have a little patience; yer nothing 282 Occurrences during the Voyage. Am. 1686 nothing but an augmentation of their daily allow- ance would appeaſe them. Captain Swan, though with much reluctance, gave way to a ſmall en- largement of our commons, for now we had not above io ſpoonfuls of boild Maiz a Man, once a day, whereas before we had 8: I do believe that this ſhort allowance did me a great deal of good, though others were weakened by it ; for I found that my Strength increaſed, and my Dropfie wore off. Yet I drank 3 times every 24 hours ; but many of our Men did nor drink in 9 or 10 days time, and ſome noc in 12 days; one of our Men 3 did not drink in 17 days time, and ſaid he was not adry when he did drink; yet he made water every day more or leſs. One of our Men in the midít of theſe hardſhips was found guilty of theft, and condemned for the fame, to have 3 blows from each Man io che Ship, with a 2 inch and a half Rope on his bare back. Captain Swan began firſt, and ſtruck with a good will, whoſe example was followed by all of us. Ic was very ſtrange that in all this Voyage we did not ſee one Fich, not ſo much as a Flying-filh, nor any ſort of Fowl, but at one time, when we were by my account 4975 miles Weſt from Cape Corrientes, then we ſaw a great number of Boobies, which we ſuppoſed came from ſome Rocks not far from us, which were mentioned in ſome of our Sea-carts, but we did not ſee them. After we had run the 1900 leagues by our reck- oning which made the Engliſh account to Guam, the Men began to murmur againſt Captain Swan, for perſwading them to come this Voyage ; but he gave them fair words, and told them that the Spa- niſh account might probably be the trueſt, and fee- ing the gale was likely to continue, a ſhort time longer would end our troubles. a As The MOGULS BEN Place this at P. 282 GALA Bengala Canton Cou Afracam Pescador NTREY Surat (Pegfus Tono uh 01 Bombay BA Y of asustipatan 20 fukien CHI NA. Amoy Formosa I The Tropick of Cancer Domacao 1. Prata Do Baſhee I. Aina m 11. S. Iohn Bay of Tonquin I.Luconia SIAM THE PHILLIPPINE COCHIN- Praçėl Champa Philippine I, Cambodia Bay OTK Paragoya ISLANDS Siam I. St Lohn Pulo Condor 2 Pange vinam Manzila The BENGALE Goa Pallacat Sholej of Ladrone Siam CHINA Lepuerto so Malabar St George I. Guam Cunthere Pont cheri Porto Novo 1. Andeman Islands 10 MALL ACCO 1. Mindora Sibo GOD Cejlon I. pot of cam og Pulo uby Mindanas 10 bodia C. Comorin Colombo 1. Nicobar Streight 1. Panay of Bati o o 1. War čudda Achin co 00 Maldivas 1. Meangis PAJIS Malacca Borneo 1. of Hogs B. of Chambongo. THE SPICE w For Morcilolo Whats of Malacu ge I.S Diamond Point Palimbam a Borgheo Suckinį dana The Equator I Tidor 27 I. Najaan Indrapore 000 Bendar mas celebes ? o umatra Banca I.Tristes Ben could Afacaffe N. Boulon Guinea 01. Banda 1. Penart 1. Amboina call gasusung ( ISLANDS Iava I 0 Streight:of; Sundy Olores 1 :00 Ombo Bantam Batavia 10 THE INDIAN INDIAN SEA Baly I.Timor Cumbava 10 I. Cocos 20 NEW HOLLAND 20 The Tropick of Capricorn or TERRA AUSTRALIS 300 600 900 12.00 30 00 1500 Engliſh Miles A Map of the EAST INDIES 30 INCOGNITA. They arrive at Guam, one of the Ladrone Iſlands. 283 As we drew nigh the Iſland, we met with ſome An.1686 ſmall Rain, and the Clouds ſettling in the Weſt, were an apparent token that we were not far from Land; for in chefe Climates, between or near the Tropicks, where the Trade-wind blows conftant- ly, the Clouds, which fly ſwift over head, yet feem near the Limb of the Horizon to hang without much motion or alteration, where the Land is near. I have often taken notice of it, eſpecially if it is high Land, for you ſhall then have the Clouds hang about it without any viſible morion. The 20th day of May, our Bark being about 3 leagues a-head of our Ship, failed over a rocky ſhole, on which there was but 4 fathom water, and abundance of Fiſh ſwimming about the Rocks. They imagin'd by this, that the Land was nor far off; ſo they clapt on a Wind with the Barks bead to the North, and being paſt the ſhole lay by for us. When we came up with them, Captain Teat came aboard us, and related what he had ſeen. We were then in lat. 12 d. 55 m. ſteering Weft. The Iſland Guam is laid down in lac. 13 d. N. by the Spaniards, who are Maſters of ir, keeping it as a baiting place as they go to the Philippine Iſlands. Therefore we clapt on a Wind and food to the Northward, being ſomewhat troubled and doubiful whether we were righe, becauſe there is no ſhole laid down in the Spanish Drafts about the Iſland Guam. At 4 a clock, to our great joy, we ſaw the liland Guam, at about 8 leagues diſtance. It was well for Caprain Swan that we got fight of it before our Provifion was ſpent, of which we had but enough for 3 days more; for, as I was af- tewards informed, che Men bad contrived firſt to kill Captain Swan and eat him when the Victuals was gone; and after him, all of us who were acceſ- ſary in promoting the undertaking this Voyage. This made Captain Swan fay to me, after our ar- rival . 284 They anchor at Guam, An. 1686 rival at Guam, Ab! Dampier, you would bave made them but a poor Meal; for I was as lean as the Cap- tain was luſty and fleſhy. The Wind was ac E.N. E. and the Land bore at N. N E therefore we ſtood to the Northward, till we brought the Iland to bear Eaſt; and then we turned to get in to an Anchor. The Account I have given hitherto of our courſe from Cape Corrientes, in the Kingdom of Mexico, (for I have mentioned another Cape of that Name in Peru, South of the Bay of Panama) to Guam, one of the Ladrone Illands, hach been in the groſs. Buc for the ſatisfaction of thoſe who may think it fer- viceable to the fixing the Longitudes of theſe parts, or to any other uſe in Geography or Navigation, i have here ſubjoined a particular Table of every days run; which was as follows. March W 12 W 20 A Table of every days run to Guam. 285 March. An. 1686 Day Courſe. DiffS. W. Lat. Winds. 30 SW 50W 2717 _20 20: II WNW Ap 1 SW 5 W 106 68 81 R. 19:3NW:NNW 27 SW 1 W14298101 R 17: 25 N b.W W by S102 19 100 Ob.17: 6N 12_S140 2913606.16:37 N:NNE 20 S 16054150 Ob.15:43 N 6W 10 S 108|18|106 Ob.15:25 N E w 15 S 89 22 86 Ob.15: 2 NE:ENE 8 W 2 S 645 S 63 R. 14:57 ENE 9W 4S 6 93 Ob.14:51 ENE 10 W5S 13812,137 Ob.14:39 E NE II W5S 124101231Ob.14 29 ENE 12 W 5S 17014169 R. 14:15 ENE 13 W 5S W S 17014169 R. 14: IENE 14 W 180115177 R. 13:46 ENE 15 174 18172 R. 13:28 ENEcloudy 16 W6S 18219180R. 13: 9 ENE miſty 17 W 65 6S 216 22/2 14 R. 12:47 ENE Rain The Summ of the Weſtings hitherto is - 2283 which make Deg. of Longitude-_-39d. 5 m. From bence my Courſe is moſt Welt, ſometimes Southerly, ſometimes Northerly. Day Courſe. Dit N or SW. Lat. Winds. 18 W 192 1 29R. 12:47 Eby N 180 180 R. 12:47 Ecloudy 177 170 R. 12:47 ENE 21 W 171 171 R. 12:47 E NE 22 W 180 R. 12:47 Eby N R.W R. 12:47 23 ObW4N17011 N 168 Ob. 12:58 Eby N April met mogeligtig 94 5S W 6S O 19 W O 20 W Olo о 180 0 146 о 24 R. W 25W 26 W 0 27 W о 28 W W 2 N 172 1725 2N 30 'W OOOO MOTO о M 1 R. 13:12 ENE 5 S 1520b.13: 7 286 A Table of each days run to Guam. An. 1686 April. Day Courſe. Dift N or S/W Lat. Winds. 146R. 12:58 Eby N 146 146R. 12:58) Eby N 3 N 1859 N 1840b.13: 7 Eby N 140 140 05.13: 7 Eby N 67 167R. 13: 7 Eby N 29 17:06.13:12 E 173 17306. 13:12 ENE M: W 196 196R. 13:12. Eby N 2 W 160 160O5.13:12 Eby N W 154 154 R. 13:12 ENE R.W 4. Ob W25153 5 W 2 N 180 7 N 179 05.13:14 ENE 6 W3 N 1172 9 N 171 Ob.13:22 ENE Ε 160 160 Ob. 13:22) ENE 8 W3S 1497S 14806.13:15 Eby N : 9. W4S 133 Ob.13: 6 ENE 128 128 R. 13: 6 ENE 11 W5S 111 Ob. 12:57 ENE 128 128 R. 12:57 ENE 129 129 R. 12:57) ENE 14 W 128 R. 12:57 ENE 15 W 4 N 118 8 N 117 Ob.13: 5 ENE 16 W6S 11411S 113 Ob.12:54 ENE 17 W 35 109 5S 108 Ob.12:49 ENE 18 W 120 R. 12:49 ENE 137 137 R. 12:49 ENE 20 W 134 134 R. 12:50 E 21 NW7W 131 8N 10R. 12:59) ENE Sum of all the Weſtings 7323 Making Deg. of Longitude in all -~-125d. im 7 - 134/ 9S 10 W O II2 9 12 W 13 W a o OIO I 28 II 120 O 19 W Now The Table explained, 287 Now the Inand Guam bore N. N.E. 8 leagues An. 1686 dift. this gives 22 m. to my Lat. and takes 9 from my Meridian dift. ſo that the Iand is in Lat. 13.2 1. and the Meridian diſt. from Cape Corrientes 7302 miles;which reduced into degrees makes 125 d. 11 m. The Table confifts of 7 Columns. The firſt is of the days of the Month. The ad Column con- tains each days courſe, or the point of the Compaſs we ran upon. The 3d gives the diſtance or length of ſuch courſe in Italian or Geometrical miles, (ac the rate of 60 to a degree,) or the progreſs the Ship makes every day; and is reckoned always from noon to noon. But becauſe the courſe is not always made upon the fame Rhumb in a direct line, there- a fore the 4th and 5th Columns Thew how many miles we ran to the South every day, and how ma- ny to the Weſt, which laſt was our main run in this Voyage. By the 17th of April we were got pretty near into the latitude of Guam, and our courſe then lying along that parallel, our Northing and South- ing conſequently were but little, according as the Ship deviated from its direct courſe ; and ſuch devi. ation is thence forward expreſt by N. or S. in che 5th Column, and the Ships keeping ſtraight on the Weſt Rhumb, by o, that is to ſay by no Northing or Southing. The 6th Columo ſhews the lat. we were in every day, where R. fignifies the dead Rock- oning, by the ruoning of the Log, and Ob. ſhews the lar. by obſervation. The 7th Column News the Wind and VVeather. To thefe I would have added an 8th Column, to ſhew the Variation of the Needle; but as it was very ſmall in this courſe, ſo neither did we make any ob- ſervation of it, above once, after we were ſet our from the MexicanCoaſt. At our departure from Cape Corrientes, we found it to be 4 d. 28 m. Eaſterly ; and the obſervation we made of it afterwards, when we had gone about a third of the Voyage, Thewed 288 Of the breadth of the South-Sea. An. 1686 (hewed it to be decreaſing: Neither did we obſerve it ac Guam, for Captain Swar, who had the Infiru- menrs in bis Cabbin, did not ſeem much to regard ir: Yer I an inclined to think that at Guam, the Va- riation might be either none at all, or even increa- fing co the Weſtward. To conclude, May 2oth at noon (when we begio to call it 2 1 ft.)we were in lat. 12 d. 50 m. N. by R. having run ſince the noon before 134 miles directly Weft. We continued the fame courſe till 2 that af- noon, for which I allow 1o miles more, Weft ftill, and then finding the parallel we ran upon to be too much Southerly, we clapt on a Wind and failed di- rectly North till 5 in the afternoon, having in that time run 8 mile, and increaſed our latitude fo ma- ny minutes, making it 12 d. 58 m. We thenſaw the iſland of Guam bearing N. N E. diftant from us a- bout 8 leagues, which gives the laricude of the Iſland 13 d. 20 m. And according to the account fore- going, its longitude is 125 d. um Weſt from Cape Corrientes on the Coaſt of Mexico, allowing 58 and 59 Italian miles to a degree in theſe latitudes, at the common rate of 60 miles to a degree of the Equator as before computed.video DR As a Corollary from hence it will follow, that upon a ſuppoſal of the truth of the general allow- ance, Seamen make of 60 Italian miles to an Equinoctial degree that the South Sea muſt be of a greater breadth by 25 degrees than it's commonly reckoned by Hydrographers, who makes it only a- bout roo, more or leſs. For Gince we found (as I thall have occaſion to ſay) the diſtance from Guam to the Eaſtern parts of Aſia, to be much the ſame with common reckoning; it follows by way of neceſſary confequence from hence, that the 25 degrees of longitude, or thereabouts,which are un- der reckond in the diſtance between America and the Eaſt-Indies Weſtward, muſt be over reckoned in Of the Æthiopick and Atlantick Ocean. 289 in the breadth of Aſia and Africk, the Atlantick Sea An.1686 or the American Continent, or altogether; and ſo thac Tract of the Terraquious Globe, muſt be ſo much ſhortned. And for a further confirmation of the fact, I hall add, that as to the Æthiopick or Indi- An Sea, its breadth muſt be conſiderably leſs than 'cis generally calculaced to be ; if ic be true what have heard over and over, from ſeveral able Sea- men whom I have converſed with in thoſe parts, that Ships failing from the Cape of Good Hope or New-Holland, (as many Ships bound to Java, or thereabouts, keep thac lat.) find themſelves there, (and ſometimes to their coſt running a ground when they have thought themſelves to be a great way off; and 'ris from hence poffibly, that the Dutch call thac part of this Coaſt, the Land of Indraught, (as if it magnetically drew Ships too faſt to it) and give cau- tions to avoid it: Buc I racher chink'cis the nearneſs of the Land, than any Whirlpool, or the like, that furprizes them. As co the breadth of the Atlantick Sea. I am from good hands aſſured, chac it is over reckoned by 6,7,8, or 10. degrees; for beſides the concurrent Accounts of ſeveral experienc'd men who have confirmed the ſame to me; Mr Canby particularly, who hath failed as a Mace in a great many Voyages, from Cape Lopez on the coaſt of Guinea to Barbadoes, and is much eſteemed as a very ſenſible man, hath often told me, chac he conſtantly found the diſtance to be between 60 and 62 or 63 degrees; whereas its laid down in 68, 69, 70; and 72 degrees in the common draughts. As to the ſuppoſition ic ſelf which our Seamen make in che allowing but 60 miles to a degree, I am noc Ignorant how much this bach been canvaſed of late years eſpecially, and that the prevailing o- pinion bath been, chat about 70, or upwards ſhould be allowed. But till I can ſee ſome better grounds u for 3 290 Of the miles in a Deg. The Iſle of Guam. An. 1686 for the exactneſs of thoſe tryals, that have been made on Land by Mr. Norwood and others, con- fidering the inequality of the Earths ſurface, as well as the obliquity of the way; in their allow- ing for which I am ſomewhat doubtful of their meaſures: upon the whole matter, I cannot buc adhere to the general Sea Calculation, confirmed as to the main by daily experience till ſome more certain eſtimate ſhall be made, than thoſe hither- to attempted. For we find our ſelves when we fail North or Souch, to be brought to our intended place, in a time agreeable enough with what we expect upon the uſual ſuppoſicion ; making all rea- fonable allowance, for the little unavoidable devi- ations Eaft or Weſt : and there ſeems no reaſon why the ſame eſtimate ſhould not ſerve us in crof- ing the Meridians, which we find ſo true in failing under them. As to this courſe of ours to Guam particularly, we ſhould rather increaſe than ſhort- en our eftimare of the length of it, conſidering that the Eaſterly Wind and Current being ſo ſtrong, and bearing therefore our Log after us, as is uſual in ſuch cales; ſhould we therefore in caſting up the run of the Log,make allowance for ſo much ſpace as the Log itſelf drove after us (which is commonly 3 or 4 miles in 100 in ſo brisk a gale as this was) we muſt have reckoned more than 125 degrees, but in this Voyage we made no ſuch allowance : (though it be uſual to do it) ſo that how much fo- ever this computation of mine exceeds the common Draughts, yet is it of the ſhorteſt according to our experiment and calculation. But to proceed with our Voyage: The Iſland Guam or Guabon, (as the Native Indians pronounce it) is one of the Ladrone Inlands, belongs to the Spaniards, who have a ſmall Fort with 6 Guns in if, with a Govern ur and 20 or 30 Soldiers, They keepic for the revief and refrelhment of their Phi- lippine Iſle of Guam, or Maria. The Coco-nut. 291 lippine Ships, that touch here in their way from Aca. An.1686 pulco to Manila, but the Winds will not ſo eaſily let chem take this way back again. The Spaniards of late have named Guam, the Iſland Maria, it is about 12 leagues long and 4 broad, lying N. and S. It is a pretty high Champion Land. The 21ſt day of May 1686, at 11 a clock in the evening, we anchored near the middle of the Iſland Guam , on the Welt fide, a mile from the ſhore. At a diſtance it appears flat and even, but coming near it, you will find it ſtands ſhelving, and the Eaſt-ſide, which is much the higheſ, is fenced with ſteep Rocks, that oppoſe the violence of the Sea, which continually rage againſt ir, being driven with the conſtant Trade-wind, and on that fide there is no anchoring. The Weſt ſide is pretty low, and full of ſmall fandy Bays, divided with as many rocky points. The ſoil of the land is reddiſh, dry, and indifferent fruitful. The fruits are chiefly Rice, Pine-apples, Water-melons, Musk-melons, Oranges and Limes, Coco-nues, and a ſort of Fruit called by us Bread-fruit. The Coco-nut Trees grow by the Sea, on the Weſtern ſide in great groves,3 or 4 miles in lengths and a mile or 2 broad. This Treeis in ſhape like the Cabbage tree, and at a diſtance they are noe to be known each from other, only the Coconut Tree is fuller of Branches, but the Cabbage-tree generally is much higher, though the Coconut Trees in fome places are very high, The Nut or Fruicgrows at the head of the Trees among the Branches and in cluſters, 10 or 12 in a cluſter. The Branch co which they grow is about the bigneſs of a mans arm, and as long, running ſmall towards the end. It is of a yellow cofour, full of knots, and very tough. The Nut is gene. rally bigger than a mans head. The outer Rind is near 2 inches shick, before you come to the Shell the ac 292 The Coco-nut. An. 1686 the Shell ic ſelf is black, thick, and very hard. The Kernel in fome Nuts is near an inch thick, ſticking to the inſide of the Shell clear round, leaving a hol- low in the middle of it, which contains about a pint, more or leſs, according to the bigneſs of the Nuc; for ſome are much bigger than others. This Cavicy is full of ſweet, delicate, wholeſom, and refreſhing Water. While the Nuc is growing, all the inſide is full of this Water, without any Kernel at all; but as the Nut grows towards its maturity, the Kernel begins to gather and ſettle round on the inſide of the Shell, and is foft like Cream; and as the Nuc ripens, ic increaſech in ſubſtance and becomes hard. The ripe Kernel is ſweet enough, but very hard to digeſt, therefore ſeldom eaten except by ſtrangers, who know not the effects of it; but while it is young and ſoft like pap, ſome men will eat it, ſcraping it out with a ſpoon, after they have drunk the water that was within it. I like the water beſt when the Nur is almoſt ripe, for it is then ſweeteſt and briskeſt When theſe Nues are ripe and gathered, the out- fide rind becomes of a brown ruſty colour; ſo that one would think that they were dead and dry : yet they will ſprout our like Onions, after they have been hanging in the Sun 3 or 4 months, or thrown about in a Houſe or Ship, and if planted afterward in the Earch, they will grow up to a Tree. Before they thus ſprouc out, there is a ſmall ſpuogy round knob grows in the inſide, which we call an Apple : This is at firſt no bigger than the top of ones finger, buc increaſech daily, fucking up the Water till it is grown fo big as to fill up the Cavity of the Coco-nut; and then it be gins to ſprouc forch. By this time the Nuc that was hard, begins to grow oily and ſoft, thereby giving paſſage to the ſprout that ſprings from the Apple, a Toddy and Arack, Liquors made of the Coco-tree. 293 Apple, which Nature hath fo contrived, that it An.1686 points to the hole in the Shell, (of which there are 3, till it grows ripe, juſt where its faſtened by its Stalk to the Tree; but one of theſe holes remains open even when it is ripe,) through which it creeps and ſpreads forth ics Branches. You may let theſe teeming Nurs ſprout out a foot and half or 2 food high before you plant them, for they will grow a great while like an Onion out of their own ſub- Itance. Beſide the Liquor or Water in the Fruit, there is alſo a ſort of Wine drawn from the Tree called Toddy, which looks like Whey. It is ſweet and very pleaſant, but it is to be drunk within 24 hours after it is drawn, for afterwards it grows ſowre. Thoſe that have a great many Trees, draw a ſpirit from the lowre Wine, called Arack. Arack is di. ſtilled allo from Rice, and other things in the Eaſt-Indies; but none is ſo much eſteemed for ma- king Punch as this fort, made of Toddi, or the ſap of the Coco-nut Tree, for it makes moſt deli- cate Punch , but it muſt have a daſh of Brandy to hearten it, becauſe this Arack is not ſtrong enough to make good Punch of ic ſelf. This ſort of Li- quor is chiefly uſed about Goa; and therefore it has the name of Goa Arack. The way of draw- ing the Toddi from the Tree, is by curcing the top of a Branch that would bear Nurs; but before it has any Fruit : and from thence the Liquor which was to feed its Fruit, diftills into the hole of a Calabaſh that is hung upon it. This Branch con- tinues running almoſt as long as the Fruit would have been growing, and then it dries away. The Tree hach uſually 3 fruitful Branches, which if they all be capped thus, then the Tree bears no Fruit that year; but if one or two only be tap- ped, the other will bear fruic all the while. The Liquor which is thus drawn is emptied out of the Callabach 3 a U 3 a 294 The Uſes of the Coco-nut. An. 1686 Callabaih duly morning and evening, ſo long as it continues running, and is ſold every morning and evening in moſt Towns in the Eaſt-Indies, and great gains is produced from it even this way; but thoſe that diftill it and make Arack, reap the greateſt profit. There is alſo great profit made of the Fruit both of the Nut and of the Shell. The Kernel is much uſed in making Broath. When the Nur is dry they cake off the husk, and giving two good blows on the middle of the Nut, it breaks in two equal parts, lecting the Water fall on the ground; then with a ſmall iron Raſp made for the purpoſe, the Kernel or Nut is raíped out clean, which being put into a little freſh Water, makes it become white as Milk. In this Milky-water they boil a Fowl, or any ſort of Fleſh, and it makes very favory Broath. Engliſh Seamen put this into boi- led Rice, which they eat inſtead of Rice-milk carry- ing Nurs purpoſely to Sea with them. This they learn from the Natives. But the greateſt uſe of the Kernel is to make Oyl, both for burning and for frying. The way to make the Oyl is to grate or raſp the Kernel and ſteep it in freſh water; then boil ic and ſcum off the Oyl ac top as ic riſes : but the Nues that make the Oyl ought to be a long time gathered, ſo as that the Ker- nel may be turning ſoft and oily. The Shell of this Nut is uſed in the Eaſt-Indies for Cups, Dishes, Ladles, Spoons, and in a manner for all caring and drinking Veſſels. Well-ſhaped Nuts are often brought home to Europe, and much eſteem- ed. The husk of the Shell is of great uſe to make Cables; for the dry husk is full of ſmall ſirings and threads, which being bearen, become ſoft, and the other fubftance which was mixt among it falls away like Saw-duſt, leaving only the ftrings. Theſe are afterwards fpun into long yarns, and twiſted up into balls for convenience; and many of these Rope- The Profitableneſs of Coco-trees. 295 Rope yarns joined together make good Cables, An.1686 This Manufactory is chiefly uſed at the Maldive Iſlands, and the threads ſent in balls into all places chat trade thither, purpoſely for to make Cables. I made a Cable at Achin wich ſome of it. Theſe are called Coire Cables: they will laſt very well. But there is another ſort of Coire Cables (as they are called) that are black and more ſtrong and laſting; and are made of ſtrings chat grow, like Horle hair, ar che heads of certain Trees almof like the Coco- nur tree. This fort cornes moſt from the Iſland Ti. mor. In the South Seas the Spaniards do makeOakam to chalk their Ships with the husk of theCoco-nut, which is more ſerviceable than that made of Hemp, and they ſay it will never rot. I have been told by Capcain Knox, who wrote che Relation of Ceylon, that in ſome places of India they make a ſort of coarſe Cloath of the husk of Coco nut, which is uſed for Sails. I my ſelf have ſeen a ſort of coarſe Sail-cloath made of ſuch a kind of ſubſtance: buc whether the ſame or no I know not. I have been che longer on chis ſubject to give the Reader a particular Account of the uſe and profit of a Vegetable, which is poſſibly of all others the moſt generally ſerviceable to the conveniencies, as well as the neceſſities of humane Life. Yet this Tree that is of ſuch greac uſe, and eſteemed ſo much in the Eaſt-Indies, is ſcarce regarded in the Weſt-Indies for want of the knowledge of the bene- fit which it may produce. And 'tis partly for the fake of my Countrymen in our American Planta- tions that I have ſpoken ſo largely of it. For the hot climates there are very proper foil for ic : and indeed it is ſo hardy both in the railing it, and when grown, that it will thrive as well in dry ſandy ground as in rich land. I have found them grow- ing very well in low ſandy Mands (on the Weſt of Sumatra) that are overflowed with the Sea every U4 Spring- a 296 The Lime Tree and Fruit. Bread fruit. An. 1686 Spring-tide: and though the Nuts there are not very big, yer this is no lofs ; for the Kernel is thick and ſweet, and the Milk or Water in the inſide, is more plealant and ſweet than of the Nuts that grow in rich ground, which are commonly large indeed, but not very ſweet. Theſe at Guam grow- ing in Pry ground are of a middle ſize, and I think the ſweetett that I did ever cafte. Thus much for the Coco nut. The Lime is a ſort of baſtard or Crab-limon. The Tree or Buſh that bears it is prickly, like a Thorn, growing full of ſmall boughs. In Jamaica and other places, they make of the Lime Bush Fences about Gardens, or any other incloſure, by planting the ſeeds cloſe together, which growing up thick, ſpread abroad, and make a very good Hedge. The fruit is like a Lemon, but ſmaller ; the rind thin, and the inclofed fubfiance full of juice. The juice is very tart, yer of a pleaſant caſe if ſweetned with Sugar. It is chiefly uſed for making Punch both in the Eaſt and Weft-Indies, as well aſhore as at Sea, and much of it is for that pur- poſe yearly brought home to England from our Welt-India Plantations. It is alſo uſed for a particu- lar kind of Sauce, which is called Pepper-Sauce, and is made of Cod-pepper,commonly called Guinea pepper, boiled in water, and then pickled with Salt, and mixt with Lime juice to preſerve it. Limes grow plentifully in the Eaſt and Weſt Indies within the Tropicks. The Bread-fruit (as we call it) grows on a large Tree, as big and high as our largeft Apple trees. hath a ſpreading head full of branches, and dark leaves. The Fruit grows on the boughs like Ap- ples: it is as big as a Peony Loaf when Wheat is as fillings the Buſhel. It is of a round ſhape, and hath a thick tough rind. When the Fruit is ripe it is yellow and ſoft ; and the caſte is ſweet and 3 The Natives of Guam. 297 and pleaſant. The Natives of this Inand uſe it for An.1686 Bread: they gather it when full grown, while it is greeen and hard ; then they bake it in an Oven, which ſcorcheth the rind and makes it black: but they ſcrape off the outſide black cruſt, and there re- mains a tender thin cruft, and the inſide is ſoft, ten- der and white like the crumb of a Penny Loaf. There is neither feed ncr ſtone in the inſide, but all is of a pure ſubſtance like Bread; it muſt be eat- en new; for if its kept above 24 hours, it becomes ; dry, and ears harſh and choaky; but 'tis very plea- ſant before it is too ftale. This fruit lafts in ſeaſon 8 months in the year, during which time the Na- tives eat no other fort of food of Bread kind. I did never ſee of this fruit any where but here. The Na- tives told us, that there is plenty of this Fruit grow- ing on the reſt of the Ladrone Iſlands : and I did ne- ver hear of any of it any where elſe. They have here fome Rice alſo: but the Iſland being of a dry foil, and therefore not very proper for it, they do not low very much. Filh is ſcarce about this Iſland : yer on the ſhole that our Bark came over there was great plenty, and the Natives commonly go tbither to filh. The Nacives of this Iſland are ſtrong bodied, large limb'd and well ſhap'd. They are Copper- coloured like other Indians; their hair is black and long, their Eyes meanly proportioned ; they have pretty high Noſes ; their Lips are pretty full, and their Teeth indifferent whice. They are long viſag'd, and ſtern of countenance ; yet we found them to be affable and courteous. They are many of them troubled with a kind of a Leprofie. This diſtemper is very common at Mindanao: therefore I ſhall ſpeak more of it in my next Chapter. They of Guam are otherwiſe very healthy,eſpecially in the dry ſeaſon: but in the wet ſeaſon, which comes in in June, and holds cill O&tober, the air is more thick 3 298 Proes a fort of Indian Boats. An, 1686 thick and unwholſome ; which occaſions Fevers : buc the rains are not violent nor laſting. For the Inand lies ſo far Weſterly from the Phillipi ne Iſlands, or any other Land, that the Weſterly winds do ſel- dom blow ſo far; and when chey do, they do not laſt long: but che Eaſterly Winds do conſtantly blow here, which are dry and healthy; and this Inand is found to be very healthful, as we were informed while we lay by it. The natives are ve- ry ingenious beyond any people, in making Boats, or Proes, as they are called in the Eaft - Indies, and therein they cake great delight. Theſe are built ſharp at both ends; the bottom is of one piece, made like the botom of a liccle Canoa, very neatly dug, and left of a good ſubſtance. This botom part is inſtead of a Keel. It is about 26 or 28 foot Ic long; the under part of this Keel is made round, buc inclining to a wedge and ſmooth; and the upper part is almoſt fac,having a very gentle hollow, and is about a foot broad: from hence both ſides of the Boat are carryed up to about 5 foot high with nar- row plank, not above 4 or 5 inches broad, and each end of the Boat turns up round very pretti: ly. But what is very ſingular, one ſide of the Boat is made perpendicular like a Wall, while the o- ther ſide is rounding, made as other Veiſels are, with a pretty full belly. Juſt in the middle it is about 4 or 5 foor broad aloft, or more according to the length of the Boat. The Maft ſtands exactly in the middle, with a long yard that peeks up and down like a Mizen-yard. One end of it reachech down to the end or head of the Boat, where it is placed in a notch, that is made there purpoſely to receive it, and keep it faſt. The other end hangs over the ſtern: To this yard the fail is faſtened. At the foot of the ſail there is another ſmall yard, to keep the fail out ſquare, and to roll up the fail on when it blows hard: for it ſerves inſtead of a reef a Proes, or Indian Boats. 299 reef to take up the fail to what degree they pleaſe An.1686 according to the ſtrength of the Wind. Along the belly-ſide of the Boat, parallel with it at about 6 or 7 foot difiance, lies another ſmall Boat or Ca- noa, being a Log of very light Wood, almoſt as long as the great Boat, but not ſo wide, being not above a fooc and a half wide at the upper part, and very ſharp like a wedge at each end. And there are two Bamboas of about 8 or 10 foot long, and as big as ones Leg, placed over the great Boats ſide, one near each end of it, and reaching about 6 or 7 foot from the ſide of the Boat : by the help of which the little Boat is made firm and conti- guous to the other. Theſe are generally called by the Dutch, and by the Engliſh from them, Out- lagers. The uſe of them is to keep the great Boat upright from over-ſecting ; becauſe the Wind here being in a manner conſtantly Eaſt (or if it were at Weſt, it would be the ſame thing)and the Range of theſe Iſlands, where their buſineſs lies to and fro, being moſtly North and South, they turn the fiat ſide of the Boat againſt the Wind upon which they fail, and the Belly-lide, conſequently, with its little Boat, is upon the Lee: and the Veſſel having a Head at each end, ſo as to fail with either of them foremoſt (indifferently, they need not tack, or go about, as all our Vefſels do, but each end of the Boat ſerves either for head or ſtern as they pleaſe. When they ply to windward, and are minded to go about, he that fteers bears away a little from the Wind, by which means the ſtern comes to the Wind; which is now become the head only by ſhifting the end of the yard. This Boat is ſteered with a brcad Paddle, inſtead of a Rudder. I have been the more particular in deſcribing theſe Boars, becauſe I do believe they fail the beſt of any Boats in the world. I did here for my own fatiſ- faction try the ſwiftneſs of one of them: fail by 300 The ſtate of the Spaniards at Guam. An, 1686 by our Log, we had 12 knots on our reel, and ſhe run it all out before the half minute glaſs was half out; which, if it had been no more, is after the rate of 12 mile an hour; but I do believe ſhe would have run 24 mile an hour. It was very pleaſant to fee the little Boat running along ſo ſwift by the others ſide. The Native Indians are not leſs dexterous in ma- naging than in building theſe Boars. By report, they will go from hence to another of the Ladrone Inands about 30 leagues off, and there do their buſi- neſs, and recurn again in leſs than 12 hours. I was told that one of theſe Boars was ſent Expreſs to Manila, which is above 400 leagues, and perform- ed the Voyage in 4 days time. There are of theſe 4 Proes or Boats uſed in many places of the Eaſt-Indies, but with a Belly and a little Boat on each ſide. Only at Mindanao I ſaw one like theſe with the belly and liccle Boat only on one ſide, and the other flat, but not ſo neatly builc. The Indians of Guam have neat little Houſes, very handſomely thatch'd with Palmeto thatch. They in- habit together in Villages built by the Sea, on the Weſt fide, and have Spaniſh Prieſts co inſtruct them in the Chriſtian Religion. The Spaniards have a ſmall Fort on the Weſtſide near the Souch end, with 6 Guns in it. There is a Governour, and 20 or 30 Spaniſh Souldiers. There are no more Spaniards on the Hand, beſides 2 or 3 Prieſts. Noc long before we arrived here the Na- tives roſe on the Spansirds to deſtroy them, and did kill many: but the Governour with his Souldiers ac length prevailed, and drove them out of the Fort: So when they found themſelves diſappoint- ed of their intent, they deſtroyed the Plantations and ſtock, and then went away to other Iſlands. There were then 3 or 400 Indians on this Iſland ; but now there are not above 100; for all that were in ; Their treating for Proviſions. 301 in thisConſpiracy went away. As for theſe who yet An. 1686 remain, if they were not actually concerned in that broil, yer their hearts alſo are bent againſt the Spa- niards: for they offered to carry us to the Fort and aſſiſt us in the Conqueſt of the Inand , buc C. Swan was not for moleſting the Spaniards here. Before we came to an anchor here, one of the Prieſts came aboard in the night wich 3 Indians. They firſt hailed us to know from whence we came, and what we were ; to whom anſwer was made in Spariſh, that we were Spaniards, and that we came from Acapulco. It being dark they could not ſee the make of our Ship, nor very well diſcern what we were. Therefore they came aboard : buc percei- ving the miſtake they were in, in taking us for a Spaniſh Ship, they endeavoured to get from us again; but we held their Boat faſt, and made them come in. Captain Swan received the Priest with much civili- ty, and conducting him into the great Cabbin, de- clared, that the reaſon of our coming to this Iſland was want of Proviſion, and that he came not in any hoftile manner, but as a friend to purchaſe with his Money what he wanted ; and therefore deſired the Prieſt to write a Letter to the Governor, to ioform him what we were, and on what account we came. For having him now aboard,che Captain was willing to detain him as an Holtage, till we had proviſion. The Padre cold Captain Swan, thac Proviſion was now ſcarce on the Iſland: but he would engage that the Governor would do his utmoſt to furniſh us. In the morning the Indians, in whoſe Boat or Prow the Frier came aboard, were ſent to the Go- vernor with 2 Letters; one from the Frier, and another very obliging one from Captain Swan, and a Preſent of 4 yards of Scarlet-cloach, and a piece of broad Silver and Gold Lace. The Governor lives near the South end of the Illand on the Weſt fide; 302 The Governours Preſents to Captain Swan. An. 1686 Gide, which was about 5 leagues from the place where we were; therefore we did not expect an anſwer till the evening, not knowing then how nim- ble they were. Therefore when the Indian Canoa was diſpatched away to the Governor, we hoiſed out 2 of our Canoas, and ſent one a filing, and the o. ther aſhore forCoco-nuts. Our fiſhing Canoa got no. thing; but the Men that weat alhore for Coco-nuts came off laden. About II a clock, chat ſame morning, the Go- vernor of the Iſland ſent a Letter to Captain Swan, complementing bim for his Preſent, and promiſing to ſupport us with as much Proviſion as he could poffibly ſpare; and as a token of his gratitude, be ſene a preſent of 6 Hogs, of a ſmall fort, moſt ex- cellent Meat, the beſt, I think, that ever I eat : they are fed with Coco-nuts, and their flesh is hard as Brisket Beef. They were doubtleſs of that breed in America which came originally from Spain. He ſenc allo 12 Muskmelons, larger than ours in Eng- land, and as many Water-melons, both forts here being a very excellent Fruit; and ſent an order to the Indians that lived in a Village not far from our Ship, to bake every day as much of the Bread fruit as we defire, and to aſſiſt us in gercing as many dry Coco-nuts as we would have; which they ac- cordingly did, and brought off the Bread-fruit eve- ry day hot, as much as we could eat. After this the Governor fent every day a Canoa or two with Hogs and Fruit, and deſired for the ſame, Powder, Shot, and Arms, which was ſent according to his requeſt. We had a delicate large Engliſh Dog : which the Governor did deſire, and had it given him very freely by the Captain, though much a- gainſt the grain of many of his Men, who had a great value for that Dog. Captain Swan endea- voured to get this Governours Letter of Recom- mendation co fome Merchants at Manila, for he had The Acapulco Ship narrowly eſcapes them. 303 had then a deſign to go to Fort St. George, and from An. 1686 thence intended to trade at Manila: but this his de- ſign was concealed from the company. While we lay here the Acapulco Ship arrived in ſight of the Iſland, but did not come in fight of us : for the Governour ſent an Indian Proe with advice of our being here. Therefore ſhe ſtood off to the South- ward of the Iſland, and coming foul of the ſame fhole that our Bark had run over before, was in great danger of being loſt there; for ſhe ftruck off her Rudder, and with much ado got clear ; but not till after three days labour. For tho the ſhole be lo near the Iſland, and the Indians go off and fiſh there every day, yet the Maſter of the Acapulco Ship, who ſhould (one would think) know theſe parts, was ut- terly ignorant of it. This their ſtriking on the ſhole we heard afterward, when we were on the Coaſt of Manila ; but theſe Indians of Guam did ſpeak of her being in light of the land while we lay there : which put our men in a great heat to go out after her; but Captain Swan perſuaded them out of that humour, for he was now wholly averſe to any hof tile action. The 30th day of May the Governour ſent his laſt Preſent, which was ſome Hogs, a Jar of pickled Mangoes, a Jar of excellent pickled Fiſh, anda Jar of fine Rusk, or Bread of fine Wheat Flower , baked like Bisker, but not ſo hard. He ſent beſides 6 or 7 packs of Rice, defiring to be excuſed from fending any more Proviſion to us, ſaying, he had no more on the Inland that he could ſpare. He ſent word alſo that the Weſt Monſoon was at hand; that therefore it behoved us to be jogging from hence, unleſs we were reſolved to return back to America again. Captain Swan returned him thanks for his kindneſs and advice, and took his leave; and the same day ſent the Frier aſhore that was ſeized on at our firſt arrival, and gave him a large Braſs a 304 Their Proviſions for their Voyage. An. 1685 Braſs Clock, an Aftralobe, and a large Teleſcope : for which preſent the Frier ſent us aboard 6 Hogs and a roaſting Pig, 3 or 4 Buſhels of Potatoes, and sol. of Manila Tobacco. Then we prepared to be gone, being pretty well furniſhed with Proviſion to carry us to Mindanao, where we deſigned next to couch. We took aboard us as many Coco-nuts as we could well ſtow, and we had a good ſtock of Rice, and about so Hogs in Sale. СНАР. They deſign for Mindanao. 305 An.1686 C H A P. XI, They reſolve to go to Mindanao. Their depar- ture from Guam. Of the Philippine Iſlands. The Iſle Luconia, and its chief Town and Port, Manilo, Manila, or Manilbo. Of the rich Trade we might eſtabliſh with theſe Iſlands. St. Johns Iſland. They arrive at Mindanao. The Iſland deſcribed. Its Fertility. The Lib- by Trees, and the Sago made of them. The Plantain Tree, Fruit, Liquor, and Cloth. A ſmaller Plantain at Mindanao. The Bonano. Of the Glove-bark, Cloves and Nutmegs, and the Methods taken by the Dutch to Monopo- lize the Spices. The Betel-Nut, and Arek- Tree. The Durian, and the Jaca-Tree and Fruit. The Beaſts of Mindanao. Centapes or Forty Legs, a venemous Infeet, and others. Their Fowls, Fiſh, &c. The Temperature of the Climate, with the Courſe of the Winds, Tornadoes, Rain, and Temper of the Air through out the Year. VVHI Hile we lay at Guam, we took up a Reſo- lution of going to Mindanao, one of the Pbilippine Iſlands,being told by the Frier,and others, that it was exceedingly well ſtored with Provifi- ons; that the Natives were Mahomet ans, and that they had formerly a Commerce with the Spaniards, but that now they were at Wars with them. This Inand was therefore thought to be a convenient place for us to go to; for beſides that, it was in our X way 306 Departure from Guam. I. of St. John. An. 1686 way to the Eaſt-Indies, which we had reſolved to viſit ; and that the Weſterly Monſoon was at hand, which would oblige us co ſhelter ſomewhere in a ſhort time, and that we could not expect good Harbours in a better place than in ſo large an Iland as Mindanao: beſides all this, I ſay, the Inhabitants of Mindanao being then, as we were told (tho' falſly) at Wars with the Spaniards, our Men, who it thould ſeem were very ſqueamiſh of plundering without Licence, derived hopes from thence of gerring a Commiſſion there from the Prince of the Illand, co plunder the Spaniſh Ships about Manila,and fo to make Mindanao their common Rendezvous. And if Captain Swan was minded to go to an Eng- liſh Port, yes his Men, who thought he intended to leave them, hoped to get Veſſels and Pilots ac Mindanao fit for their curn, to cruize on the Coaſt of Manila. As for Captain Swan, he was willing enough to go thither, as beſt ſuiting his own de- fign: and therefore this Voyage was concluded on by general conſent. Accordingly June 2d, 1686. we left Guam, bound for Mindanao. We had fair weather, and a pretty ſmart gale of Wind at Eaſt, for 3 or 4 days, and then it ſhifced to the S. W. being rainy, but it foon came abouc again to the Eaſt, and blew a gentle gale ; yer it often ſhuffled about to the S.E. For though in the Eaſt-Indies the Winds thift in April, yer we found this to be the ſhifting ſeaſon for the Winds here; the other ſhifting ſeaſon being in O&tober, ſooner or later, all over India. As to our courſe from Guam to the Philippine Iands, we found it (as I incimated before) agreeable enough with the account of our common Draughts. The 21ſt day of June we arrived at the Inand St. John, which is one of the Philippine Iſlands. The Philippines are a great company of large Iſlands, ta- king up about 13 deg. of Lat. in length, reaching near : Philippine Iſlands. Luconia, Manilo. 309 near upon, from 5 d. of North Lat. to the 19th de- An. 1686 gree, and in breadth about 6 deg. of Longitude. They derive this Name from Philip the 2d. King of Spain ; and even now they do moſt of them belong to that Crown. The chiefeſt Inand in this range is Luconia, which lies on the North of them all. At this Iſland Magelan died in the Voyage that he was making round the World. For after he had paſt thoſe Streigbrs be- (ween the South-end of America and Terra del Fuego, which now bear his Name, and had ranged down in the South Seas on the back of America; from thence ſtretching over to the Eaft-Indies, he fell in with the Ladrone Iands, and from thence ſteering Eaſt fill, he fell in with theſe Philippine Iſlands, and anchored at Luconia; where he warr'd with the nacive Indi- ans, to bring them in obedience to his Maſter the King of Spain, and was by them killd with a poy. ſoned Arrow. It is now wholly under the Spani- ards, who have ſeveral Towns there. The chief is Manilo, which is a large Sea-port Town near the S. E. end, oppoſite to the Inland Mindora. It is a place of great ſtrength and trade: The two great Acapulco Ships before mentioned fetching from hence all ſorts of Eaft- India Commodities, which are brought hither by Foreigners, eſpecially by the Chineſe, and the Portugueſe. Sometimes the Engliſh Merchants of Fort St. George ſend their Ships hither as it were by ſtealth, under the charge of Portu gueſe Pilots and Mariners : for as yet we cannoc get the Spaniards chere to a commerce with us or the Dutch, although they have but few Ships of their own. This feems to ariſe from a jealouſie, or fear of diſcovering the Riches of theſe Mands; for moſt, if not all the Philippine Iſlands, are rich in Gold: and the Spaniards have no place of much ſtrength in all theſe Iſlands that I could ever bear of, beſides Manilo it ſelf Yet they have Villages X2 and 308 a Philippine Iſlands. Iſle of St. John. An. 1686 and Towns on ſeveral of the Iſlands, and Padres or Prieſts to inſtruct the native Indians, from whom they get their Gold. The Spaniſh Inhabitants, of the ſmaller Iſlands eſpecially, would willingly trade with us if the Go- vernment was not ſo ſevere againſt it ; for they have no Goods but what are brought from Manilo at an extraordinary dear rate. I am of the opini- on, that if any of our Nations would ſeek a Trade with them, they would not loſe their labour ; for the Spaniards can and will Smuggle ( as our Sea-men call Trading by ſtealth) as well as any Nation that I know; and our Jamaicans are to their profic fen- fible enough of it. And I have been informed, that Captain Goodlid of London, in a Voyage which he made from Mindanao to China, touch'd at ſome of theſe Iſlands, and was civilly treated by the Spa- niards, who bought fome of his Commodities, gi- ving him a very good price for the fame. There are about 12 or 14 more large Iands ly- ing to the Southwards of Luconia; moſt of which, as I ſaid before, are inhabited by the Spaniards. Be- fides theſe chere are an infinite number of ſmall Iſlands of no account, and even the great Wands, many of them, are withour Names; or at leaſt ſo variouſly ſet down, that I find the fame Iſlands named by divers Names. The Iſland St. John and Mindanao are the Sou- thernmoſt of all theſe Illands, and are the only Iſlands in all this Range that are not ſubject to che Spaniards. St. John's Iſland is on the Eaſt-ſide of the Minda- 97a0, and diſtant from it 3 or 4. leagues. It is in lac. abour 7 or 8 Norch. This Iſland is in length about 38 leagues, ſtretching N. N. W. and S. S. E. and it is in breadth about 24 leagues, in the middle of the Iſland. The Northermoft-end is broader, and the Southermoſt is narrower : This Iſand is of a good a Their arrival at Mindanao. 309 good heighth, and is full of many ſmall Hills. The An.1686 Land at the South-Eaſt end (where I was alhoar ) is of a black fac Mould; and the whole lfland ſeems to partake of the ſame fatneſs, by the vaſt number of large Trees that it produceth: for it looks all over like one great Grove. As we were paſſing by the S. E. end we ſaw a Canoa of the Natives under the thoar : therefore one of our Canoas went after to have ſpoken with her; but ſhe run away from us, ſeeing themſelves chaced, put their Canoa alhoar, leaving her,fed into the Woods ; nor would be allured to come to us, alcho' we did what we could to encice them: be- fides theſe Men, we ſaw no more here, nor ſign of any Inhabitants at this end. When we came aboard our Ship again, we ſteered away for the Iſland Mindanao, which was now fair in ſight of us : it being about 10 leagues diſtant from this part of St. John's. The 22d day we came within a league of the Eaſt-fide of the Iſland Min. danao, and having the Wind at S. E we ſteered toward the North-end,keeping on the Eaſt-ſide, till we came into the lat. of 7 d. 40 m. and there we anchored in a ſmall Bay, about a mile from the fhoar, in 10 fachom Water, rocky foul ground. Some of our Books gave us an account, chac Mindanao City and Iſle lies in 7 d. 40 m. we gueſt that the middle of the Iſland might lie in this lat. but we were at a great loſs where to find the City whecher on the Eaſt or Weſt-ſide. Indeed, had it been a ſmall Iſland, lying open to the Eaſtern Wind, we might probably have ſearched firſt on che Welt-fide; for commonly the Iſlands within the Tropicks, or within the bounds of the Trade- Winds, have their Harbours on the Weſt-fide,as beſt Cheltered: but the Iſland Mindanao being guarded on the Eaſt-ſide by St. John's Ifand, we might as rea- ſonably expect to find the Harbour and Çity on this a X 3 310 Iſle of Mindanao. Libby-trees, Sago. An. 1686 this ſide, as any where elſe: buc coming into the lac. in which we judg’d the City might be, found no Canoas, or People, that might give us any um- brage of a City, or place of Trade near at hand, though we coaſted within a league of the ſhoar. The Hand Mindanao is the biggeſt of all the Phi- lippine Iſlands, except Luconia. Ic is about 60 leagues long, and 40 or 50 broad. The South-end is in about 5 d. N. and the N. W. end reacheth almoſt to 8 d. N. It is a very mountainous Iſland, full of Hills and Vallies. The Mould in general is deep and black, and extraordinary fat and fruitful. The lides of the Hills are ftony, yet productive enough of very large call Trees: In the heart of the Coun- try there are ſome Mountains that yield good Gold. The Valleys are well moiſtned with plea- fanc Brooks, and fmall Rivers of delicate Water ; and have Trees of divers forts flouriſhing and green all the year. The Trees in general are very large, and moſt of them are of kinds unknown to us. There is one fort which deſerves particular no- cice ; called by the Natives Libby-Trees. Theſe grow wild in great Groves of 5 or 6 mile long, by the ſides of the Rivers. Of chefe Trees Sago is made, which che poor Country People ear inftead of Bread 3 or 4 months in the year. This Tree for its body and ſhape is much like che Palmeto Tree, or che Cabbage-Tree, but noe ſo call as the latter. The Bark and Wood is hard and thin like a She!), and full of white Pith, like the Pich of an Elder. This Tree chey cut down, and ſplit it in the mid- dle, and ſcrape out all the Pith; which they beaç loftily with a wooden Peſtle in a great Mortar or Trough, and then put into a Cloth or Strainer held over a Trough; and pouring Water in among the Pich, they fir it about in the Cloth: fo the Water carries all the fubftance of the Pith through the Cloth down into the Trough, leaving nothing in the 2 3 a Sago. The Plaintain-Tree or Shrub. 311 the Cloth but a light ſort of Husk, which they An.1686 throw away ; but that which falls into the Trough ſettles in a ſhort cime to the bottom like Mud ; and then they draw off the Water, and take up the muddy ſubſtance, wherewith they make Cakes ; which being baked proves very good Bread. The Mindanao People live 3 or 4 months of the year on this Food for their Bread kind. The Na- cive Indians of Teranate, and Tidore, and all the Spice Iſlands, have plenty of theſe Trees, and uſe them for Food in the ſame manner; as I have been in- form'd by Mr. Caril Rofy, who is now Commander of one of the King's Ships. He was one of our company at this time; and being left with Captain Swan at Mindanao, went afterwards to Teranate, and lived there among the Dutch a Year or two. The Sago which is traníported into other parts of the East Indies, is dried in ſmall pieces like little Seeds or Comfits, and commonly eaten with Milk of Almonds by thoſe that are troubled wich che Flux; for it is a great binder, and very good in that Diftemper. In ſome places of Mindanao there is plenty of Rice; but in the hilly Land they planc Yams, Po- tatoes, and Pumkins; all which thrive very well. The other Fruits of cbis and are Water-Melons, Musk.Melons, Plaintains, Bonanoes, Guava's, Nutmegs, Cloves, Betel-Nuts, Durians, Jacks, or Jaca's, Coco Nuts, Oranges, c. The Plaintain I cake to be the King of all Fruit, not except the Coco ic ſelf. The Tree that bears this Fruic is about 3 foot, or 3 foot and an balf round, and about 10 or 12 foor high. Theſe Trees are not raiſed from Seed (for chey ſeem not to have any) but from the roots of other old Trees. If chele young ſuckers are taken out of che ground, and planted in another place, it will be 15 months be- fore they bear, but if let ſtand in their own native Soil X 4 a a 3 312 The Plantain-Tree. An.1686 Soil they will bear in 12 months. As ſoon as the Fruit is ripe the Tree decays, but then there are many young ones growing up to ſupply its place. When this Tree firſt ſprings out of the ground, it comes up with two leaves, and by that time it is a fooc high,cwo more ſprings up in the inſide of them; and in a ſhort time after two more within them; and ſo on. By that time the Tree is a month old, you may perceive a ſmall body almoit as big as ones Arm, and then there are eight or ten leaves, ſome of them four or five foot high. The firſt leaves that it hoots forth are not above a fooc long, and half a foot broad; and the ftem that bears them no big- ger than ones finger ; but as the Tree grows bigher che leaves are larger. As the young leaves ſpring up in the inſide, ſo the old leaves ſpread off, and their tops droop downward, being of a greater length and breadth, by bow much they are nearer the root, and at laſt decay and rot off; bue ftill there are young leaves ſpring up out of the top, which makes the Tree look always green and Aouriſhing. When the Tree is full grown, the leaves are 7 or 8 foot long, and a foor and half broad; towards the end they are ſmaller, and end with a round poine. The item of the leaf is as big as a Man's Arm,almoſt round, and about a foot in length, becween the leaf and the body of the Tree. That part of the item which comes from the Tree, if it be the outſide leaf, ſeems to incloſe half the body, as it were with a chick hide, and right againſt it, on the other ſide of the Tree, is another ſuch anſwering to it. The next two leaves in the inſide of theſe, grow oppoſite to each other, in the ſame manner, but ſo that if the two outward grow North and Souch, cheſe grow Eaſt and Weft, and choſe fill within them keep the ſame order. Thus the body of this Tree ſeems to be made up of many thick skins, growing one over another, and when it is fall grown, there ſprings The Plantain-Fruit. 313 {prings out of the top a ſtrong ftem, harder in ſub- An. 1686 ſtance than any other part of the body. This ftem ſhoots forth at the heart of the Tree, is as big as a Man's Arm, and as long; and the Fruit grows in cluſters round it, firſt bloſſoming, and then ſhooting forth the Fruir. Ic is ſo excellent, chat che Spaniards give it the preheminence of all other Fruit, as moſt conducing to Life. It grows in a Cod about 6 or 7 inches long, and as big as a Man's Arm. The Shell, Rind or Cod, is foft, and of a yellow colour when ripe. It reſembles in ſhape a Hogs-gut Pudding. The incloſed Fruit is no harder than Butter in Winter, and is much of the colour of the pureft yellow Bur- ter. It is of a delicate taſte,and meles in ones mouch like Marmaler. It is all pure pulp without any Seed, Kernel or Stone. This Fruit is ſo much eſteemed by all Europeans that fectle in America, that when they make a new Plantation, they commonly begin with a good Plantain-walk, as they call it, or a Field of Plantains; and as their family increaſeth, ſo they augmeno che Plantain-walk, keeping one Man pur- poſely to prune the Trees, and gather the Fruit as he fees convenient. For the Trees continue bearing, ſome or other, moſt part of the Year; and this is many times the whole Food on which a whole Family fubfifts. They thrive only in rich fat ground, for poor ſandy will not bear them. The Spaniards in their Towns in America, as at Havana, Cartagena, Portabel, &c. have their Markets full of Plancains, it being the common Food for poor People : Their common price is half a Rial, or 3 d. a Dozen. When this Fruit is only uſed for Bread, it is roaſted or boiled when it's juſt full grown, buc not yet ripe, or corn'd yellow. Poor people, or Negroes, that have neither Fiſh nor Fleſh to eat with it, make Sauce with Cod-pepper, Salt and Lime joice, which makes it eat very ſavory; much better than a cruit of Bread alone. Sometimes for a a a 314 Plaint ain-Fruit and Drink. An. 1686 a change they eat a roaſted Plaintain, and a ripe raw Plaintain together, which is inſtead of Bread and Buccer. They eat very pleaſant ſo, and I have made many a good meal in this manner. Some- times our Engliſh cake 6 or 7 ripe Plaintains, and maihing them together, make them into a lump, and boil them inſtead of a Bag-pudding ; which they call a Buff-Jacket : and this is a very good Way for a change. This Fruic makes alſo very good Tarts; and the green Plaintains ſliced thin, and dried in the Sun, and grated, will make a fort of Flour which is very good to make Puddings. A ripe Plaintain ſliced and dried in the Sun may be preſerved a great while ; and then ears like Figs, very ſweet and pleaſant. The Darien Indians pre- ſerve them a long time, by drying them gently over the fire ; maſhing them firſt, and moulding them into lumps. The Moskito Indians will take a ripe Plaincain and roaſt it; then take a pint and half of Water in a Calabalh, and ſqueeze the Plaintain in pieces with their hands, mixing it with the Water ; then they drink ic all off together : This they call Miſhlaw, and it's pleaſant and ſweet, and nou- riſing ; ſomewhat like Lambs-wooll (as 'tis calld) inade with Apples and Ale : and of this Fruit alone many thouſands of Indian Families in the Weſt Indies have their whole ſubſiſtence. When they make drink with them, they cake io or 12 ripe Plaintains and maſh them well in a Trough: then they put 2 gallons of Water among them; and this in 2 hours time will ferment and froth like Wort. In 4 hours it is fit to drink; and then they bottle it, and drink it as they have occaſion: But this will not keep above 24 or 30 hours. Thoſe therefore that uſe this drink, brew ic in this manner every morning. When I went firſt to Jamaica I could reliſh no other drink they had there. It drinks brisk and cool, and is very pleaſant. This drink is windy, and ſo is the Fruic eaten raw; buc boyld Plantain Cloth. 315 boyld or roaſted it is not ſo. If this drink is kept An.1686 above 30 hours it grows ſharp: but if then it be put my out into the Sun, it will become very good Vine- gar. This Fruit grows all over the Weſt-Indies (in the proper Climares) at Guinea, and in the Eafl-Indies. As the Fruit of this Tree is of great uſe for food, fo is the Body no leſs ſerviceable co make Cloaths; but this I never knew till I came to this Iſland. The ordinary People of Mindanao do wear no other Cloch. The Tree never bearing but once, and ſo being felld when the Fruit is ripe; they cut it down cloſe by the ground, if they intend to make Cloth with it. One blow with a Macheat, or long Knife, will ſtrike it aſunder : then they cut off the cop,leaving the Trunk 8 or 10 fooc long, ſtripping off the outer Rind,which is thickeſt towards the lower end; having ſtript 2 or 3 of theſe Rinds, the Trunk becomes in a manner all of one bigneſs, and of a wbitiſh colour: Then they ſplit the Trunk in the middle ; which being done, they ſplit the two halves again, as near the middle as they can. This they leave in the Sun 2 or 3 days, in which time part of the juicy ſubſtance of the Tree dries away, and then the ends will appear full of ſmall threads. The Women, whoſe employment it is to make the Cloch, take hold of thoſe threads one by one, which rend away eaſily from one end of the Trunk to the other, in bigneſs like whited brown thread, for the threads are naturally of a determi. nate bigners, as I obſerved their Cloth to be all of one ſubſtance and equal finenefs ; but'cis ftubborn when new, wears out ſoon, and when wet, feels a liccle flimy. They make their pieces 7 or 8 yards long, their warp and woof all one thickneſs and ſubltance. There is another fort of Plantains in that Iſand, which are ſhorter and leſs than the others, which I never ſaw any where buc here. Theſe are full of 3 316 Bonano's, Clove-Bark, Cloves, Nutmegs. An.1686 of black Seeds mixt quite through the Fruit. They are binding, and are much eaten by thoſe that have Fluxes. The Country people gave them us for that uſe, and wich good ſucceſs. The Bonano Tree is exactly like the Plantain for Shape and bigneſs, nor eaſily diftinguiſhable from it but by its Fruit, which is a great deal ſmaller, and not above half ſo long as a Plantain, being allo more mellow and ſoft, leſs luſcious, yet of a more delicate rafte. They uſe this for the making Drink oftner than Plantains, and it is beſt when uſed for Drink, or eaten as Fruit ; but it is not ſo good for Bread, nor doch it eat well ac all when roaſted or boiled; ſo 'tis only neceſſity that makes any uſe is this way. They grow generally where Plantains do, being ſet intermixt with them purpoſely in their Plancain-walks. They have plenty of Clove- bark, of which I ſaw a Ship load; and as for Cloves, Raja Laut, whom I ſhall have occaſion to mention, told me, chat if the Engliſle would ſeccle there, they could order matters ſo in a licele time, as to ſend a Ship-load of Cloves from thence every year. I have been informed that they grow on the boughs of a Tree about as big as a Plumb-tree, but I ne- ver happened to ſee any of them. I have not ſeen the Nutmeg trees any where ; but che Nutmegs chis Iſland produces are fair and large, yer they have no great ftore of them, being unwil ling to propagate chem or the Cloves, for fear that ſhould invite the Dutch to viſit them, and bring them into fubjection, as they have done che reſt of the neighbouring Hands where they grow. For the Dutch being feated among the Spice-Idlands, have monopolized all the Trade into their own hands, and will not ſuffer any of the Nacives to diſpoſe of it, but to themſelves alone. Nay, they are ſo careful to preſerve is in their own hands, that they will not ſuffer the Spice to grow in the a un- The Dutch monopolize the Spice. 317 uninhabited inands, buc fend Soldiers to cut the An.1686 Trees down. Caprain Rofy told me, that while he lived with the Dutch, he was ſent with other Men to cut down the Spice-Trees; and that he himſelf did at ſeveral times cut down 7 or 800 Trees. Yet altho' the Dutch take ſuch care to deſtroy chem.chere are many uninhabited Iſlands that have great plenty of Spice-Trees, as I have been informed by Dutch Men that have been there, particularly by a Cap- tain of a Dutch Ship that I mer with ac Achin, who told me, that near the Iſland Banda there is an Iſland where the Cloyes falling from the Trees do lie and rot on the ground, and they are at the time when the Fruit falls, 3 or 4 inches chick under the 3 Trees. He and ſome others told me, that ic would not be a hard matter for an Engliſh Vefſel to pur- chaſe a Ships Cargo of Spice, of the Natives of ſome of theſe Spice Iands. He was a free Merchant that told me this. For by chat name the Dutch and Engliſh in the Eaſt-In- dies, diſtinguiſh thoſe Merchants who are not Ser- vants to the Company. The free Merchants are not fuffered to Trade to the Spice Iſlands, nor to many other places where the Dutch have Factories; but on the other hand, they are ſuffered to Trade co ſome places where the Dutch Company them- felves may not Trade, as to Achin particularly, for there are ſome Princes in the Indies, who will not Trade with the Company for fear of them. The Sea-men that go to che Spice Iſlands are obliged to bring no Spice from thence for themſelves, excepc a ſmall matter for their own uſe, about a pound or two. Yet the Maſters of thoſe Ships do common- ly ſo order their buſineſs, that they often ſecure a good quantity, and ſend it afhoar to ſome place near Batavia, before they come into chat Harbour, (for it is always brought thither first before it's ſenc to Europe,) and if they meet any Veſſel at Sea that will 318 The Betel-Tree and Nut. An.1686 will buy their Cloves, they will ſell 10 or 15 Tuns our of 100, and yet ſeemingly carry their comple- ment to Batavia ; for they will pour water among the remaining part of their Cargo, which will ſwell them to that degree, that the Ships Hold will be as full again, as it was before any were ſold. This trich they uſe whenever they diſpoſe of any clan- deſtinely, for the Cloves when they firſt take them in are extraordinary dry; and ſo will imbibe a great deal of moiſture. This is but one inſtance, of many hundreds of little deceitful Arts the Dutch Sea-men in theſe parts have among them, of which I have both ſeen and heard ſeveral. I believe there are no where greater Thieves; and nothing will perſuade them to diſcover one another; for ſhould any do it, the reſt would certainly knock him on the head. But to return to the Products of Min- danao. The Betel-Nut is much eſteemed here, as it is in moſt places of the Eaſt-Indies. The Becel-Tree grows like the Cabbage-Tree, but it is not ſo big, nor ſo high. The body grows ſtraight, about 12 or 14 foot high, without Leaf or Brance, except at the head: There it ſpreads forch long Bran- ches, like other Trees of the like nature, as the Cabbage- Tree, the Coco-Nut Tree, and the Palm. Theſe Branches are about 10 or 12 foot long, and their fiems near the head of the Tree, as big as a Man's Arm. On the top of the Tree among the Branches, the Becel-Nut grows on a tough ftem, as big as a man's Finger, in cluſters much as the Coco-Nuts do, and they grow 40 or 50 in a cluſter. This Fruit is begger than a Nutmeg, and is much like ir, but rounder. It is much uſed all over the Eaſt-Indies. The way is to cut it in four pieces, and wrap one of them up in an Areck- leaf, which they ſpread with a foft paſte made of Lime or Plaifter, and then chew ic altogether. a Every 3 Betel and ArekDurians, Tree and Fruit. 319 Every Man in theſe parts carries his Lime-Box by An. 1686 his fide, and dipping his Finger into it, ſpreads his Betel and Arek leaf with it. The Arek is a ſmall Tree or Shrub, of a green Bark, and the Leaf is long and broader than a Willow. They are packo up to fell into parts that have them not, to chew with the Betel. The Betel. Nur is moſt eſteem'd when it is young, and before ic grows hard, and then they cut it only in two pieces with the green husk or ſhell on it. It is then exceeding juicy, and therefore makes them ſpit much. It caftes rough in the Mouth, and dies the Lips red, and makes the Teeth black, but it preſerves them, and cleanſech the Gums. It is alſo accounted very wholſom for che Stomach; but ſometimes it will cauſe great giddineſs in the Head of thoſe that are not us'd to chew it. But this is the effect only of the old Nur, for the young Nuts will not do it. I ſpeak of my own Experience. This Iand producech allo Durians and Jacks. The Trees that bear the Durians, are as big as Ap- ple-Trees, full of Boughs. The Rind is chick and rough; the Fruit is ſo large that they grow only abouc che Podies, or on the Limbs near The Body, like the Cacao. The Fruit is about the bigneſs of a large Pumkin, covered with a thick green rough Rind. When it is ripe, the Rind begins to turn yellow, but ic is not fit to eat till it opens at the top. Then the Fruit in che inſide is ripe, and ſends forth an excellent ſcenc. When the Rind is opened, the Fruit may be ſplit into 4 quarters ; each quarter hath ſeveral ſmall cells, that incloſe a certain quantity of the Fruir, according to the bignels of the cell, for ſome are larger than others. The largeſt of the Fruit may be as big as a Pollers Egg: 'Tis as white as Milk, and as ſoft as Cream, and the talte very delicious to thoſe chat are ac- cuſtomed to them, but thoſe who have not been uſed 320 Faca-Tree and Fruit. The Animals here. An. 1686 uſed to eat them, will diſlike them at firſt, becauſe they ſmell like roaſted Onions. This Fruit muſt be eaten in its prime, (for there is no eacing of it before it is ripe) and even then 'twill not keep a- bove a day or two before it putrifies, and turns black or of a dark colour, and ihen it is not good. Within the Fruit there is a ſtone as big as a ſmall Bean, which hath a thin ſhell over it. Thoſe that are minded to eat the Scones or Nuts, roaſt chem, and then a chin ſhell comes off, which incloſes the Nut; and it eats like a Cheſnut. The Jack or Jaca is much like the Durian, both in bizneſs and ſhape. The Trees that bear them alſo are much alike, and ſo is their manner of the Fruits growing. But the inſide is different ; for the Fruit of the Durian is white, that of the Jack is yellow, and fuller of Stones. The Durian is moſt eſteemed; yer the Jack is very pleaſant Fruit, and the Stones or Kernels are good roaſted. There are many other forts of Grain, Roots and Fruits, in this Iſland, which to give a particular de- fcription of would fill up a large Volume. In this and are alſo many ſorts of Beaſts, both wild and came; as Horſes, Buils, and Cows, Buf- faloes, Goats, Wild Hogs, Deer, Monkies, Gua- no's, Lizards, Snakes, ác, I never faw or heard of any Beaſts of Prey here, as in many other places. The Hogs are ugly Creatures; they have all great Knobs growing over their Eyes, and there are mul- citudes of them in the Woods. They are com- monly very poor, yet ſweet. Deer are here very plentiful in ſome places, where they are not di- fturbed. Of the venomous kind of Creatures here are Scor- pions, whoſe ſting is in their Tail; and Centapees, call'd by the Engliſh 40 Legs, both which are alſo com- mon in the Weſt-Indies, in Jamaica, and elſewhere. Theſe Cencapees are 4 or 5 inches long, as big as a a a Fowl, Fiſh, Rivers and Air. 321 a Gooſe quill, but fattiſh ; of a dun or reddiſh co- An.1686 lour on the back, buc belly whiciſh, and full of Legs on each ſide the belly. Their ſting or bite is more raging than the Scorpion. They lie in old Houſes, and dry Timber. There are ſeveral forts of Snakes; ſome very poiſonous. There is another fort of Creature like a Guano both in colour and ſhape, but 4 times as big, whoſe Tongue is like a ſmall Harpoon, having two beards like the beards of a Fiſh-hook. They are ſaid to be very vene- mous, but I know not their names. I have ſeen them in other places alſo, as at Pulo Condore, or the Inand Condore, and at Achin, and have been told that they are in the Bay of Bengal. The Fowls of this Country are Ducks and Hens : Other tame Fowl I have not ſeen, nor heard of any. The wild Fowl are Pidgeons, Parrors, Pa- rakits, Turcle-dove, and abundance of (mall Fowls. There are Bats as big as a Kite. There are a great many Harbours, Creeks, and good Bays for Ships to ride in ; and Rivers Navi- gable for Canoas, Proes or Barks, which are all plentifully ſtored with Fiſh of divers fores; fo is al- ſo the adjacent Sea. The chiefeſt Fiſh are Bonecas, Snooks, Cavally's, Bremes, Mullers, Io Pown- ders, &c. Here are alſo plenty of Sea Turtle, and Imall Manatee, which are not near ſo big as thoſe in the Weſt-Indies. The biggeſt that I ſaw would not weigh above 600 1. but the Aeth both of the Turtle and Manatee are very ſweet. The weather at Mindanco is temperate enough as to heat, for all it lies ſo near the Equa coi'; and eſpecially on the borders near the Sea. There they commonly enjoy the breezes by day, and cooling Land-winds at night. The Winds are Eaſterly one part of the year, and Weſterly the other. The Eaſterly winds begin to blow in Otober, and it is the middle of November before they are ſeceled. Y Theſe 322 The Winds and Weather. An. 1686 Theſe Winds bring fair weather. The Weſterly Winds begin to blow in May, but are not ſettled till a month afterwards. The Weſt Winds always bring Rain, Tornadoes, and very cempeſtuous Weather. At the firſt coming in of theſe Winds they blow but faintly; but then the Tornadoes riſe one in a day, ſometimes two. Theſe are Thunder-ſhowers which commonly come againſt the Wind, bringing with them a contrary Wind to what did blow before. After the Tornadoes are over, the Wind ſhifts about again, and the Sky becomes clear ; yer then in the Valleys, and the ſides of the Mountains, there riſeth a thick fog, which covers the Land. The Tornadoes continue thus for a week or more; then they come thicker, 2 or 3 in a day, bringing violent gufts of wind, and terrible claps of Thunder. At laſt they come ſo faft, that the wind remains in the quarter from whence theſe Tornadoes do riſe, which is out of the Weſt, and there it ſertles till O&tober or Novemo ber. When theſe Weſtward Winds are thus feteled, the Sky is all in Mourning, being covered with black Clouds, pouring down exceſſive Rains, ſometimes mixt with Thunder and Lightning, that nothing can be more diſmal; the Winds raging to that degree, that the biggeſt Trees are torn up by the Roots, and the Rivers (well and overflow their Banks, and drown the low Land, carrying great Trees into the Sea. Thus it continues fometimes a Week together, before che Sun or Stars appear. The fierceſt of this weather is in the lacrer end of July and in Auguſ, for then the Towns ſeem to ſtand in a great Pond, and they go from one Houſe to another in Canaos. At this time the water car- ries away all the filth and naſtineſs from under their Houſes. Whilft this tempeſtuous ſeaſon laſts, the weather is cold and chilly. In September the wea- ther is more moderate, and the Winds are not ſo fierce, The Wind and Weather. 323 fierce, nor the Rain fo violent. The Air thence- An. 1686 forward begins to be more clear and delightfome; but then it the morning there are chick Fogs, con- tinuing till 10 or 11 a Clock before the Sun ſhines out, eſpecially when it has rained in the night. In O&tober the Eaſterly Winds begin to blow again, and bring fair Weather till April . Thus much con cerning the natural ſtate of Mindanao. cookies Y 2 CHAP 324 An.1686 CHA P. XII. nao. > Of the inhabitants, and Givil State of the Iſle of Mindanao. The Mindanayans, Hilanoones, Sologues, and Alfoorees. Of the Minda- nayans, properly ſo called : Their Manners and Habits. The Habits and Manners of their Women. A Comical Guſtom at Minda- Their Houſes, their Diet, and Wash- ings. The Languages Spoken there, and trans- ačtions with the Spaniards. Their fear of the Dutch, and ſeeming defire of the Engliſh. Their Handy-crafts, and peculiar fort of Smiths Bellows. Their Shipping, Commodities, and Trade. The Mindanao and Manila To- bacco. A fort of Leproſie there, and other Di- ſtempers. Their Marriages. The Sultan of Mindanao ; his Poverty, Power, Family, &c. The Proes or Boats here. Raja Laut the Ge- neral, Brother to the Sultan, and his Family. Their way of Fighting. Their Religion. Raja Laut's Devotion. A Clock or Drum in their Moſques. Of their Circumciſion, and the So- lemnity then uſed. Of other their Religious ob- ſervations and Superſtitions. Their abhorrence of Swines Fleſh, &c. THE His Iſland is not ſubject to one Prince, nei- ther is the Language one and che fame; but the People are much alike, in colour, ſtrength, and ftature. They are all or moſt of them of one Of the People of this iſand. 325 one Religion, which is Mahomecaniſm, and their An. 1686 cuſtoms and manner of living are alike. The Min- danao People more particularly ſo called, are the greateſt Nation in the Iand, and trading by Sea with other Nations, they are therefore the more civil. I ſhall ſay but little of the reſt, being leſs known to me, but ſo much as hach come to my knowledge, cake as follows. There are beſides the Mindanayans, the Hilanoones, (as they call them) or the Mount aniers, the Sologues, and Alfoores. The Hilanoones live in the heart of the Country: They have little or no commerce by Sea, yet they have Proe's that row with 12 or 14 Oars apiece. They enjoy the benefit of the Gold Mines; and with their Gold buy Foreign Commodities of the Mindanao People. They have alſo plenty of Bees- Wax, which they exchange for other Commodi- ties. The Sologues inhabit the N. W.end of the Iſland. They are the leaſt Nation of all; they Trade to Manila in Proe's, and to ſome of the neighbour- ing Iſlands, buc have no commerce with the Min- danao People. The Alfoorees are the ſame with the Mindanayans, and were formerly under the ſubjection of the Sultan of Mindanao, but were divided between the Sultan's Children, and have of late had a Sultan of cheir own; but having by Marriage contracted an Alliance with the Sultan of Mindanao, this has occafioned that Prince to claim them again as his Subjects; and he made War with them a little af- ter we went away, as I afterwards underſtood. The Mindanayans, properly ſo called, are Men of mean ftatures ; ſmall Limbs, ſtraight Bodies, and little Heads. Their Faces are oval, their Fore- heads flat, with black ſmall Eyes, ſhort low No- fes, pretty large Mouchs ; their Lips thin and red, their Teeth black, yer very found, their Hair black a Y3 326 Of the People of the iſland. An. 1686 black and ſtraight, the colour of their Skin taw- ney, but inclining to a brighter yellow than ſome other Indians, eſpecially the Women. They have a cuſtom to wear their Thumb-Nails very long, eſpecially that on their left Thumb, for they do never cut it buc ſcrape it often. They are indued with good natural Wits, are ingenious, nimble, and active, when they are minded; but generally very lazy and thievish, and will not work except forced by hunger. This lazineſs is natural co moft 1n- dians; but theſe people's lazineſs ſeems rather to proceed not ſo much from their natural inclinati- ons, as from the ſeverity of their Prince, of whom they Itand in great awe: For he dealing with them very arbitrarily, and taking from them what they get, this damps their Induſtry, ſo they never ſtrive to have any thing but from hand to mouth. They are generally proud, and walk yery ſtately. They are civil enough to ſtrangers, and will eaſily be acquainted with them, and entertain them with great freedom; but they are implacable to their Enemies, and very revengeful if they are injured, frequently poiſoning ſecretly thoſe that have af fronted them They wear but few Cloaths; their Heads are circled with a ſhort Turbat, fringed or laced at both ends ; ic goes once about the Head, and is tied in a knot, the laced ends hanging down. They wear Frocks and Breeches, but no Stockings nor Shoocs. The Wome are fairer than the Men; and their Hair is black and long: which they tie in a knot, thar hangs back in their poles. They are more round vilaged than che Men, and generally well featured; only their Noſes are very ſmall, and ſo low between their Eyes, thac in ſome of the Fe- male Children the riſing that ſhould be between the Eyes is ícarce diſcernable; neither is chere any ſenſible 3 3 Their Habits. 327 ſenſible riſing in their foreheads. At a diſtance An. 1686 they appear very well ; but being nigh, theſe In- pediments are very obvious. They have very ſmall Limbs. They wear but two Garments; a Frock, and a ſort of Petticoat : the Petticoat is only a piece of Cloth fewed both ends togecher : but it is made 2 foot too big for their Waftes, ſo that they may wear either end uppermoſt: that part that comes up to their Waftes, becauſe it is ſo much too big, they gather it in their Hands, and cwiſt it till ic firs cloſe to their Waftes, fucking in the twiſted part between their Waſte and the edge of the Petticoat, which keeps it cloſe. The Frock fits looſe about them, and reaches down a little below the Waſte. The Sleeves are a great deal longer than their Arms, and ſo ſmall at the end, that their Hands will ſcarce go through. Being on, the Sleeve fits in folds about the Wriſt ; wherein they take great pride. The better ſort of people have their garments made of long Cloth; but the ordinary ſort wear Cloch made of Plantain-Tree, which they call Sag- gen; by which Name they call the Plantain. They have neither Stocking nor Shoe, and the Women have very ſmall Feer. The Women are very deſirous of the company of Strangers, eſpecially of White Men; and doubtleſs would be very familiar, if the Cuſtom of the Country did not debar them from that freedom, which ſeems coveted by them. Yec from the high- eſt co the loweft, they are allowed liberty to con- verſe with, or treat Strangers, in the fight of their Husbands There is a kind of begging Cuſtom ar Mindanao, that I have nor met elſewhere with in all my Tra- vels, and which I believe is owing to the little Trade they have. Which is thus : When Strangers arrive here, the Mindanao Men will come aboard, and Y 4 328 How they treat Strangers. An.1686 and invite them to their Houſes, and inquire who N has a Comrade, (which word I believe they have from the Spaniards) or a Pegally, and who has noc. A Comrade is a familiar Male-friend; a Pagally is an innocent Placonick Friend of the other Sex. All ſtrangers are in a manner oblig'd to accept of this Acquaintance and Familiarity, which muſt be firſt purchaſed with a ſmall Preſent, and afterwards confirmed with ſome Gift or other to continue the Acquaintance : and as often as the ſtranger goes alhoar, he is welcome to his Comrade or Pagally's Houſe, where he may be entertained for his Mo- ney, to eat, drink, or ſleep; and complimented, as often as he comes afhoar, with Tobacco and Becel-Nur, which is all the Entertainment he muſt expect gratis. The richeſt Mens Wives are allow- ed the freedom to converſe with her Pagally in publick, and may give or receive Preſents from him. Even the Saltans and the Generals Wives, who are always coopt up, will yet look out of their Cages when a ſtranger paffech by, and demand of him if he wants a Pagally: and to invite him to their Friendſhip, will ſend a Preſent of Tobacco and Betel Nut to bim by their Servants. The chiefeſt City on this Iſland is called by the fame Name of Mindanao. It is feated on the Souch ſide of the Iſland, in lat. 7 d. 20 m. N. on the banks of a fmall River, about two mile from the Sea. The manner of building is ſomewhat ftrange ; yet generally uſed in this part of the Eaſt-Indies. Their Houſes are all built on Poſts, about 14, 16, 18, or 20 foot high. Theſe Ports are bigger or leſs, ac- cording to the intended Magnificence of the Super- ſtructure. They have but one floor, but many par- titions, or rooms, and a ladder or ſtairs to go up out of the ſtreets. The roof is large, and covered with Palmero or Palm-leaves. So there is a clear paſſage like a Piazza (but a filohy one) under the Houſe, a Of their Houſes and Buildings. 329 Houſe. Some of the poorer People that keep An. 1686 Ducks or Hens, have a fence made round the Poſts of their Houſes, with a door to go in and out ; and this under-room ſerves for no other uſe. Some uſe this place for the common draught of their Houſes; but building moſtly cloſe by the River in all parts of the Indies, they make the River receive all the filth of their Houſes; and at the time of the Land- floods, all is waſhed very clean. The Sulcan's Houſe is much bigger than any of the reſt. It ſtands on about 180 great Poſts or Trees, a great deal higher than the common Build- ing, with great broad ſtairs made to go up. In the firſt room he hath about 20 Iron Guns, all Saker and Minion, placed on Field-Carriages. The General, and other great Men, have ſome Guns alſo in their Houſes. About 20 paces from the Sultan's Houſe, there is a ſmall low Houſe, built purpoſely for the Reception of Ambaſſadors, or Merchant ſtrangers. This alſo ſtands on Pofts, but the floor is not raiſed above 3 or 4 foot above the ground, and is nearly Mateed purpoſely for the Sultan and his Council to fit on; for they uſe no Chairs, but fic croſs- legg'd like Taylors on the floor. The common Food at Mindanao is Rice, or Sago, and a ſmall Filh or two. The better fort eat Buffa- lo, or Fowls ill dreſt, and abundance of Rice with it. They uſe no Spoons to eat their Rice, but every Man cakes a handful out of the Platter, and by wetting his Hand in Water, that it may not ſtick to his Hand, ſqueezes it into a lump, as hard as poffibly he can make it, and then crams it into his Mouth. They all ſtrive to make theſe lumps as big as their mouths can receive them, and ſeem to vye with each other, and glory in taking in the biggeſt lump; ſo that ſometimes they almoſt choak them- ſelves. They always waſh after meals, or if they touch any thing that is unclean; for which reaſon they а. 330 Of the Honfes, &c. An. 1686 they ſpend abundance of Water in their Houſes. This Water, with the waſhing of their Diſhes, and what other filch they make, they pour down near their Fire-place; for their Chambers are not board- ed, bur floored with ſplit Bamboos, like Lachs, ſo that the Water preſently falls underneath their dwel- ling rooms, where it breeds Maggots, and makes a prodigious ſtink. Beſides this filthineſs, the ſick people eaſe themſelves, and make water in their Chambers, there being a ſmall hole made purpoſely in the floor to let it drop through. Buc healthy ſound people commonly eaſe themſelves, and make water in the River. For that reaſon you ſhall al- ways ſee abundance of people, of both Sexes, in the River, from morning till night ; ſome eaſing them- felves, ochers waſhing their Bodies or Cloaths. If they come into the River purpoſely to waſh their Cloachs, they ftrip and ſtand naked till they have done ; then put them on, and march out again. Both Men and Women take greac delight in ſwimming and walhing themſelves, being bred to it from their Infancy. I do believe it is very wholſome to waſh Mornings and Evenings in theſe bot Countries, at leat 3 or 4 days in the Week; for I did uſe my felf to it when I lived afterwards at Ben-cooly, and found it very refreſhing and comfortable. It is very good for thoſe chaç have Fluxes, to waſh and fand in the River Mornings and Evenings. I ſpeak ic experimentally, for I was brought very low with char Diffemper at Achin; but by waſhing conſtant- ly, Mornings and Evenings, I found great benefit, and was quickly cured by it. In the City of Mindanao they ſpake two Lan- guages indifferently, their own Mindanao Lan- guage, and the Malaya: but in ocher parts of the inand they ſpeak only their proper Language, ha- ving liccle Commerce abroad. They have Schools, and inſtruct the Children to read and write, and bring 33.1 3 Their good opinion of the Engliſh. bring them up in the Mahomet an Religion. There An. 1686 fore many of the words, eſpecially their Prayers, are in Arabick; and many of the words of civility, the ſame as in Turkey: and eſpecially when they meer in the morning, or take leave of each other, they expreſs themſelves in that Language. Many of the old people both Men and Women can ſpeak Spaniſh, for the Spaniards were formerly ſeccled among them, and had ſeveral Forts on this Inland ; and then they ſent two Friers to this City, to convert the Sultan of Mindanao and his people. At that time theſe People began to learn Spaniſh, and the Spaniards incroached on them and endea- voured to bring them into ſubjection; and proba- bly before this time had brought them all under their Yoak, if they themſelves had not been drawn off from this Iſland to Manila, to reſiſt the Chineſe, who threatened to invade them there. When the Spaniards were gone, the old Sultan of Mindanao, Father to the preſent, in whoſe time it was, razed and demoliſhed their Forts, brought away their Guns, and ſent away the Friers; and, ſince that time will not ſuffer the Spaniards to fercle on the Inands. They are now moſt afraid of the Dutch, being ſenſible how they have inflaved many of the neighbouring Iſands. For that reaſon they have a long time delired the Engliſh to ſettle among them, and have offered them any convenient place to build a Fort in, as the General himſelf cold us ; giving this reaſon, that they do not find the Engliſh to incroaching as the Dutch or Spaniſh. The Dutch are no leſs jealous of their admitting the Engliſh, for they are fenfible what detriment it woud be to them if the Engliſh ſhould fercle here. There are but few Tradeſmen at the City of Mindanao. The chiefert Trades are Goldſmiths, Blackſmiths, and Carpenters. There are buc 2 or 3 a a 332 Their Trades. An.1686 3 Goldſmiths; theſe will work in Gold or Silver, and make any thing that you deſire: but they have no Shop furniſhed with Ware ready made for Sale. Here are ſeveral Blackſmiths who work very well, conſidering the Tools that they work with. Their Bellows are much different from ours. They are made of a wooden Cylinder, the Trunk of a Tree, about 3 foot long, bored hollow like a Pump, and ſer upright on the ground, on which the Fire ic ſelf is made. Near the lower-end there is a ſmall hole, in the ſide of the Trunk next the Fire, made to re- ceive a Pipe, through which the Wind is driven to the Fire, by a great bunch of fine Feathers faftned to one end of a ſtick, which cloſing up the inſide of the Cylinder, drives the Air out of the Cylin- der through the Pipe : Two of theſe Trunks or Cylinders are placed ſo nigh together, that a Man ſtanding between them may work them both ac once, alternately, one with each Hand. They have neither Vicenor Anvil, but a great hard Stone, or a piece of an old Gun, to hammer upon : yec they will perform their work,making both common Utenſils, and Iron-works abour Ships to admiration. They work altogether with Charcoal. Every Man almoſt is à Carpenter, for they can all work with the Ax and Ads. Their Axis but ſmall, and ſo made, that they can take it out of the Helve, and by turn- ing it, make an Ads of it. They have no Saws; bur, when they make Plank, they ſplit che Tree in two, and make a Plank of each part, planing ic with the Ax and Ads. This requires much pains, and takes up a great deal of time; but they work cheap, and the goodneſs of the Plank thus hewed, which hath its Grain preſerv'd entire, makes amends for their coſt and pains. They build good and ſerviceable Ships or Barks for the Sea ; ſome for Trade, others for Pleaſure; and ſome Ships of War. Their trading Veſſels they ſend Bees-Wax and Tobacco. 333 ſend chiefly to Manila. Thither they tranſport Bees- An.1686 wax, which, I think, is the only Commodity, be- fides Gold, that they vend there. The Inhabitants of the City of Mindanao get a great deal of Bees- wax themſelves: but the greateſt quantity they purchaſe is of the Mountaneers, from whom they alſo get the Gold which they ſend to Manila; and with theſe they buy there Calicoes, Mullins, and China Silk. They ſend ſometimes their Barks to Borneo and other Iſlands; but what they tranſport thicher, or import from thence, I know nor. The Dutch come hither in Sloops from Ternate and Tidore, and buy Rice, Bees-wax, and Tobacco : for here is a great deal of Tobacco grows on this Ifand, more than in any Inand or Country in the Eaſt- Indies, that I know of, Manila only excepted. Ic is an excellent fort of Tobacco; but theſe People have not the Art of managing this Trade to their beſt advantage, as the Spaniards have at Manila. I do believe the Seeds were firſt brought hither from Manila by the Spaniards, and even thither, in all probability, from America : the difference between the Mindanao and Manila Tobacco is, that the Min- danao Tobacco is of a darker colour, and the Leaf larger and groſſer than the Manila Tobacco, being propagated or planted in a facter Soil. The Man nila Tobacco is of a bright yellow colour, of an in- different fize, not ſtrong, but pleaſant to ſmoak. The Spaniards at Manila are very curious about this Tobacco, having a peculiar way of makiug it up neatly in the Leaf. For they take 2 little ſticks, each about a foot long and flat , and placing the ftalks of the Tobacco-leaves in a row, 40 or 50 of them between che two ſticks, they bind them hard together, to that the Leaves hang dangling down. One of theſe bundles is fold for a Rial ac Fort St George : but you may have 10 or 12 pound of Tobacco at Mindanao for a Rial, and the Tobacco is a 2 as 334 The Leprofie. An. 1686 as good, or rather better than the Manila Tobacco, buc they have not that vent for it as the Spaniards have The Mindano People are much troubled with a ſort of Leprofie, the ſame as we obſerved at Guam, This Diftemper runs with a dry Scurf all over their Bodies, and cauſeth great itching in thoſe that have ic, making them frequencly ſcratch and ſcrub them- felves, which raiſeth the outer Skin in ſmall whitiſh flakes, like the ſcales of little Fiſh, when they are raiſed on end with a knife. This makes their skin extraordinary rough; and in fome you ſhall ſee broad white ſpors in ſeveral parts of their Body. I judge ſuch have had it, but are cured; for their skins were ſmooth, and I did not perceive them to ſcrub themſelves : yet I have learnt from their own mouths that theſe ſpots were from this Diftemper. Whether they uſe any means to cure themſelves, or whether it goes away of it felf, I know not: buc I did pot perceive that they made any great matcer of it, for they did never refrain any company for it; none of our people caught it of them, for we were afraid of ic and kept off. They are ſome times troubled with the Small-Pox, but their ordi- nary Diſtempers are Fevers, Agues, Fluxes, with great Pains, and gripings in their Guts. The Coun- try affords a great many Drugs and Medicinal Herbs, whoſe Virtues are not unknown to ſome of them that pretend to cure the fick. The Mindanao Men have many Wives: but what Ceremonies are uſed when they marry I know not. There is commonly a great Feaſt made by the Bridegroom to entertain his Friends, and the moſt part of the night is ſpent in Mirth. The Sultan is abſolute in his Power over all bis Subje&s. He is but a poor Prince; for, as I men- tioned before, they have but little Trade, and therefore cannot be rich. If the Sultan underſtands that Of the Sultan and his Family, 335 that any Man has Money, if it be but 20 Dollars, An.1686 which is a great matter among them, he will ſend to borrow fo much Money, pretending urgent oc- cafions for it ; and they dare not deny him. Some- times he will ſend to ſell one thing or another that he hach to diſpoſe of, to ſuch whom he knows to have Money, and they muſt buy it, and give him his price ; and if afterward he hath occafion for the ſame thing, he muſt have it if he fends for it. He is but a little Man, between 50 and 60 years old, and by relacion very good natur'd; but over-ruled by thoſe about him. He has a Queen, and keeps about 20 Women, or Wives more, in whoſe com- pany he ſpends moſt of his time. He has one Daughter by his Sultaneſs or Queen, and a great many Sons and Daughters by the reſt. Theſe walk about the ſtreets, and would be always beg- ging things of us ; but it is reported, that the young Princeſs is kept in a room, and never ſtirs out, and that ſhe did never ſee any Man but her father and Raja Laut her uncle, being then about 14 years old. When the Sultan viſits his Friends, he is carried in a ſmall Couch on 4 Mens ſhoulders, with 8 or 10 armed Men ro guard him ; buc he never goes far this way: for the Country is very woody, and they have bue little paths, which renders it che leſs commodious. When he takes his pleaſure by Wa- ter, he carries fome of his Wives along with him. The Proes that are built for this purpoſe, are large enough to entertain so or 60 perſons, or more. The Hall is neatly built, with a round head and fern, and over the Hull there is a ſmall flight Houſe built with Bamboes; the ſides are made up with ſplit Bamboes about 4 foot high, with little Windows in them of the fame, to open and ſhut at their pleaſure. The roof is almoſt flar neatly thatched with Palmeto leaves. This Houſe is di- vided 2 2 336 a Of their Proes. An. 1686 vided into 2 or 3 ſmall Partitions or Chambers, one particularly for himſelf. This is neatly Matted un- derneach, and round the ſides; and there is a Car pit and Pillows for him to ſleep on. The ſecond Room is for his Women, much like the former. The third is for the Servants, who tend them with Tobacco and Betel-Nut; for they are always chew- ing or ſmoaking. The fore and after parts of the Vefſel are for the Mariners to fit and Row. Be- ſides this, they have Ouclayers, ſuch as thoſe I de- ſcribed at Guam, only the Boats and Outlayers here are larger. Theſe Boats are more round, like the Half-Moon almoſt ; and the Bamboes, or Outlayers, that reach from the Boat, are alſo crooked. Be- fides, the Boat is not flat on one ſide here, as ac Guam, but hath a Belly and Outlayers on each ſide: and whereas ar Guam there is a little Boat faſten'd to the Ouclayers, that lies in the Water, the Beams or Bamboes here are faſtened traverſe-wiſe to the Outlayers on each ſide, and touch not the Water like Boacs, but one, three or four foot above the Water, and ſerve for the Barge-men to fir and row and paddle on ; the inſide of the Veſſel, except on- ly juſt afore and abafr, being taken up with the Apartments for the Paſſengers. There run acroſs the Ouclayers two tire of Beams for the Paddlers to fit on, on each ſide the Vefſel. The lower tire of theſe Beams is not above a foot from the Water ; ſo that upon any the leaſt reeling of the Veſſel, the Beams are dipt in the water, and the Men that fit are wet up to their waſte; their feet ſeldom eſca- ping the water. And thus, as all our Veſſels are Rowed from within, theſe are Paddled from with- The Sultan hath a Brother called Raja Lant, a brave Man: He is the ſecond Man in the Kingdom. All ſtrangers that come hither to Trade muſt make their addreſs to him, for all Sea Affairs belong to a OUT. : him. 8 a The Mindanaian General, Wars, &c. 337 him. He licencech ſtrangers to import or export An. 1686 any Commodity, and 'tis by his permiſſion chac the Natives themſelves are ſuffered to trade : Nay the very Fiſhermen muſt take a permit from him : ſo that there is no man can come into the River or go out but by his leave. He is 2 or 3 years . younger than the Sultan, and a little man like him. He has 8 Women, by ſome of whom he hath Iffue. He hath only one Son, about 12 or 14 years old, who was circumciſed while we were there. His eldeſt Son died a little before we came hither, for whom he was ſtill in great heavineſs. If he had lived a little longer he ſhould have mar, ried the young Princeſs, but whether this ſecond Son muſt have her I know not, for I did never hear any diſcourſe about it. Raja Lent is a very ſharp man; he ſpeaks and writes Spaniſh, which he learned in his youth. He has by often converſing with Strangers, got a great inſight into the Cuſtoms of other Nations, and by Spaniſh Books has fome knowledge of Europe. He is General of the Mindaa naians, and is accounted an expert Soldier,and a ve- ry ſtout man; and the Women in their dances, fings many Songs in his praiſe. The Sultan of Mindanao fometimes makes War with his Neighbours the Mountaneers or Alfoors; Their Weapons are Swords, Lances and ſome hand Creflets. The Creffer is a ſmall thing like a Baggoner, which they always wear in War or Peace, at work or play, from the greateſt of them to the pooreſt, and meaneſt perſons. They do nea ver meet each other ſo as to have a piccht Barcle, but they build ſmall Works or Forts of Timber, wherein they plaat ligele Guns, and lye in ſight of each other 2 of 3 months, skirmiſhing every day is {mall Parties, and ſometimes ſurprizing a Breſt- works and whatever ſide is like to be worſted, if they have no probability to eſcape by flight, they Z fell 338 Their Religion. A Gong. An. 1686 ſell their Lives as dear as they can; for there is fel- dom any quarter given, but the Conquerour curs and hacks his Enemies to pieces. The Religion of theſe people is Mahometaniſm. Friday is their Sabbath ; but I did never ſee any difference that they make between this day and a- ny other day, only the Sultan himſelf goes then to his Moſque twice. Raja Lant never goes to the Moſque but prays at certain hours, 8 or 10 times in a day; where ever he is, he is very punctual to his Canonical hours, and if he be aboard will go a- fhore, on purpoſe to pray. For no buſineſs nor company hinders him from his Ducy. Whether he is at home or abroad, in a houſe or in the field, he leaves all his Company and goes about 100 yards off, and there kneels down to his Devotion, He firſt kiſſes the ground, then prays aloud, and divers times in his Prayers he kiſſes the ground, and does the ſame when he leaves off : His Servants, and his VVives and Children talk and fing, or play how they pleaſe all the time, but himſelf is very ſerious. The meaner fort of people have little Devotion : I did never ſee any of them at their Prayers, or go into a Moſque. In the Sultans Moſque there is a great Drum with bucope head, called a Gong; which is in- ſtead of a Clock. This Gong is beaten at 52 a Clock, at 3,6, and 9; a man being appointed for that ſervice. He has a ſtick as big as a mans arm, with a great knob at the end, bigger than a mans fift, made wich Cocton, bound faſt with ſmall Cords: VVich this he ſtrikes the Gong as hard as he can, about 20 ftrokes ; beginning to ſtrike leiſurely the firſt 5 or 6 ſtrokes; then he ſtrikes faſter, and at laſt Itrikes as faſt as he can : and then he ſtrikes a- gain flower and flower ſo many more ſtrokes: thus he riſes and falls 3 times, and then leaves off till 3 hours after. This is done night and day. They ก Circumcifion. A Mock-fight. 339 They circumciſe the Males at 11 or 12 years of 4n.1686 Age or older; and many are circumciſed at once. This Ceremony is performed with a great deal of Solemnicy. There had been no Circumciſion for ſome years before our being bere ; and then there was one for Raja Laut's Son. They chuſe to have a general Circumcifion when the Sultan or Ge- neral, or ſome other great perſon hach a Son fic to be circumciſed ; for with him a great many more are circumciſed. There is notice given about 8 or 10 days before for all men to appear in Arms, and great preparation is made againſt the folemn day. In the morning before the Boys are circum- ciſed, Preſents are ſent to the Father of the Child, that keeps the Feaſt; which, as I ſaid before, is either the Sultan, or ſome great perſon: and about io or II a clock the Mahometan Prieſt does bis Of- fice. He takes hold of the fore-skin with two ſticks and with a pair of Scizzars ſnips it off. After cbis moſt of the Men, both in City and Country being in Arms before the Houſe, begin to act as if they were engaged with an Enemy, having ſuch Arms as I deſcribed. Onely one acts at a time, the reſt make a great Ring of 2 or 300 yards round about him. He that is to exerciſe comes into the Ring with a great thriek or two, and a horrid look; then he fetches two or three large facely ſtrides, and falis to work. He holds his broad Sword in one hand, and his Lance in the other, and traverſes his ground, leaping from one ſide of the Ring to the ocher; and in a menacing poſture and look, bids de- fiance to the Enemy,whom his fancy frames to him for there is nothing but air co oppoſe him. Then he ftamps and ſhakes his Head, and grinning with his Teech makes many ruful faces. Then he throws his Lance, and nimbly ſnatches out bis Creſſer, wich which he hacks and hews the air like a mad man, often ſhrieking. At laſt being almoſt cired with 22 mocion 340 Solemnities at Circumcifions. An.1686 motion, he flies to the middle of the Ring, where he ſeems to have bis Enemy at his mercy; and with 2 or 3 blows cuts on the ground as if he was cuccing off his Enemy's Head. By this time he is all of a ſweat, and withdraws triumphantly out of the Ring, and preſently another enters with the like ſhrieks and geſtures . Thus they continue com- baring their imaginary Enemy all the reſt of the day ; towards the concluſion of which the richeſt ; men act, and at laſt the General, and then the Sultan concludes this Ceremony: He and the Ge- neral with ſome other great Men, are in Armour, but the reſt have none. After this the Sultan re- turns home, accompanied with abundance of peo- ple, who wait on him there till they are diſmiſt. But at the time when we were there, there was an after-game to be played; for the General's Son being then Circumciſed, the Sultan intended to give him a ſecond viſit in the night ; ſo they all waited to attend him thither. The General alſo pro- vided to meet him in the beſt manner, and there- fore deſired Captain Swan with his men to attend himn. Accordingly Captain Swan ordered us to get our Guns, and wait at the Generals houſe till fur- ther orders. So about 40 of us waited till 8 a clock in the evening : When the General with Captain Swan, and about 1000 men, went to meet the Sultan, wich abundance of Torches that made it as light day. The manner of the march was thus : Firſt of all there was a Pageant, and upon it two dancing Women gorgeouſly apparelled, with Co- roners on their Heads, full of gliſtering Spangles, and Pendants of the fame, hanging down over their Breaſt and Shoulders. Theſe are Women bred up purpoſely for dancing : Their Feet and Legs are buc liccle imployed, except ſometimes to turn round very gently; but their Hands, Arms, Head, and Body are in continual motion, eſpeci- ally A Proceſſion at a Circumcifion. 341 ally their Arms, which they turn and twiſt ſo An.1686 ſtrangely, that you would think them to be made without Bones. Beſides the two dancing Women, there were two old Women in the Pageant hold- ing each a lighted Torch in their Hands, cloſe by the two dancing Women, by which light the glic- tering Spangles appeared very gloriouſly. This Pageant was carried by fix luſty men : Then came 6 or 7 Torches, lighting the General and Cap- tain Swan who marched fide by ſide next, and we that attended Captain Swan followed cloſe after, marching in order 6 and 6 abreaſt, with each man bis Gun on his Shoulder, and Torches on each ſide. After us came 12 of the Generals men with old Spaniſh march-locks, marching 4 in a row. After them about 40 Lances, and behind them as many with grear Swords, marching all in order. After them came abundance only with Creſſers by their fides, who marched up cloſe without any order. When we came near the Sultans houſe, che Sultan and his men met us, and we wheeled off to let them paſs. The Sultan had 3 Pageants went before him: In the firſt Pageant were 4 of his Sons, who were about 10 or 11 years old. They had gotten abundance of ſmall Scones, which they roguilhly threw about on the Peoples heads. In the next were 4 young Maidens, Nieces to the Sultan, being his Siſters Daughters ; and in the 3d, there were 3 of the Sultans Children, not above 6 years old. The Sultan himſelf followed next, being carried in his Couch, which was not like your Indian l'alankins, but open, and very little and ordinary. A multicude of People came after, with- out any order : but as ſoon as he was paſt by, the General and Captain Swan, and all our men, clo- ſed in juſt behind the Sultan, and ſo all marched together to the Generals houſe. We came thither between 10 and 11 a clock, where the biggeſt part 2.3 of 342 Muſical Bells. The Ladies. An. 1686 of the company were immediately diſmiſt; but the Sultan and his Children, and his Nieces, and ſome ocher Perſons of Quality, entered the Generals houſe. They were mer at the head of the Stairs by the Generals women, who wich a great deal of reſpect conducted them into the houſe. Captain Swan, and we chat were with him followed after. It was not long before the General cauſed his dancing Women to enter the Room and divert che company with thac paftime. I had forgot to tell you chac they have none but vocal Muſick here, by what I could learn, except only a row of a kind of Bells withouc clappers, 16 in number, and their weight increaſing gradually from about 3 to 10 pound weight. Theſe were ſet in a row on a a Tabie in the Generals Houſe, where for 7 or 8 days together before che Circumciſion day, they were truck each with a litele ſtick, for the biggeſt part of the day,making a great noiſe, and they ceaſed that morning. So theſe dancing Women ſung them- Selves and danced to their own Muſick. After chis the General's Women, and the Sultan's Sons, and his Nieces danced. Two of the Sultan's Nieces were about 18 or 19 years old, the other two were 3 or 4. years younger. Theſe young Ladies were very richly dreſt, with looſe Garments of Silk, and ſmall Coronets on their Heads. They were much fairer than any. Women thar I did ever ſee there, and very well featured; and their Noſes, tho but Imall, yer higher than the other Womens, and very well proportioned. When the Ladies had very well diverted themſelves and the company with dancing, the General cauſed us to fire ſome Sky-rockets, that were made by his and Captain Swan's order, purpoſely for this nights folemnicy; and after that the Sultan and his retinue went a- way with a few attendants, and we all broke up: and thus ended this days folemnicy : but the Boys 8 being 343 2 The Ramdam. Abhorrence of Swine. being fore with their Amputation, went ſtraddling for a fortnight. They are not, as I ſaid before, very curious, or ftrict in obſerving any days, or times of particular Devotions, excepc ic be the Remdam cime, as we call it. The Ramdam time was then in Auguſt, as I take it, for it was ſhortly after our arrival here. In this time they faſt all day, and about 7 a clock in the evening, they ſpend near an hour in Prayer. Towards the latter end of their Prayer, they loudly invoke their Propher, for about a quarter of an hour, both old and young bawling out very ſtrangely, as if they intended to fright him out of his ſleepi- neſs or neglect of them. After their Prayer is ended, they ſpend ſome time in feaſting before they take their repoſe. Thus they do every day for a whole month at leaſt; for ſometimes 'tis 2 or 3 days long- er before the Ramdam ends: for it begins at the new-Moon, and laſts cill they ſee the next new- Moon, which ſometimes in thick bazy V Veather is not till 3 or 4 days after the change, as it happen'd 3 while I was at Achin, where they continued the Ramdam till the new-Moons appearance. The next day after they have ſeen che new-Moon, the Guns are all diſcharged about noon, and then the time ends: A main part of their Religion conſiſts in walbing often, to keep themſelves from being defiled; or after they are defiled to cleanſe themſelves again. They alſo take great care to keep themſelves from being polluted, by taſting or touching any thing that is accounted unclean ; therefore Swines fleſh is very abominable to them; nay any one that hath ei- ther taſted of Swines fleſh, or touched choſeCreatures is not permitted to come into their houſes in many days after, and there is nothing will ſcare them more than a Swine. Yet there are wild Hogs in the Illand, and thoſe fo plentiful, that they will 3 24 come 344 Shoes Spoiled with Hogs briſtles. 99.1686 come in Troops out of the Woods in the night in- to the very City, and come under their Houſes, to romage up and down the filth that they find there. The Nacives therefore would even defire us to lye in wait for the Hogs, to deſtroy them, which we did frequently, by ſhooting them and carrying them preſenely on board, but were prohibited their Hou- ſes afterwards. And now I am on this ſubject, I cannot omit a ſtory concerning the General. He once deſired to have a pair of Shoes made after the Engliſh faſhion, tho he did very ſeldom wear any: So one of our men made him a pair, which the General liked ve- ry well. Afterwards fome body told him, that the Thread wherewith the Shoes were fowed, were pointed with Hogs briſtles. This put him into a great paffion; ſo he ſent the Shoes to the man that made chem, and ſent him withal more Leather to make another pair, wich Threads pointed with ſome other hair, which was immediately done, and then he was well pleaſed. CH A P. 345 An.1686 CHAP. XIII Their coafting along the Iſle of Mindanao, from a Bay on the Eaſt ſide to another at the S. E. end. Tornadoes and boiſterous Weather. The S. E. Coast, and its Savannah and plenty of Deer. They coaſt along the Southſide to the River of Mindanao City, and anchor there. The Sultans Brother and Son come aboard them, and invite them to ſettle there. Of the Feaſibleneſs and probable Advantage of ſuch a Settlement, from the Neighbouring Gold and Spice Iſlands. Of the beſt way to Mindanao by the South Sea and Terra Auſtralis , and of an accidental diſcovery there by Captain Davis, and a probability of a greater. The capacity they were in to ſettle here. The Min- danaians meaſure their Ship. Captain Swan's Preſent to the Sultan: his Reception of it, and Audience given to Captain Swan, with Raja Laut, the Sultans Brother's Entertain- ment of him. The Contents of 2 Engliſh Letters Sewn them by the Sultan of Minda- nao. Of the Commodities and the Puniſhment there. The Generals Caution how to demean themſelves : at his Perfuafion they lay up their Ships in the River. The Mindinaians Careſſes. The great Rains and Floods at the City. The Mindanaians have Chineſe Accomptants. How their Women dance. A Story of one John Thacker. Their Bark eaten up, and their Ship indanger'd by the Worm. Of th Worms 346 Two Iſlands at the S. E. of Mindanao An.1686 Worms here and elſewhere. Of Captain Swan. Raja Laut, The General's Deceitfulneſs . Húnting wild Kine. The Prodigality of ſome of the Engliſh. Captain Swan treats with a young Indian of a Spice Iſland. A Hunting Voyage with the General . His puniſhing a ſer- a vant of his. Of his Wives and Women. A fort of ſtrong Rice Drink The Generals foul Deal- ing and Exačtions. Captain Swan's Uneaſi- neſs and indiſcreet Management His Men mutiny. Of a Snake twiſting about one of their . Necks. The main part of the Crew go away with the Ship, leaving Captain Swan and ſome of his Men: ſeveral others poiſoned there. H Aving in the two laſt Chapters given fome account of the Natural, Civil, and Religious State of Mindanao, I ſhall now go on with the pro- ſecution of our affairs during our ſtay there. 'Twas in a Bay on the N. Eaſt fide of the Iſland that we came to an anchor, as hath been ſaid. We lay in this Bay but one night, and part of the next day. Yet there we goc Speech with ſome of the Natives, who by ſigns made us underſtand, that the City Mindanao was on the Weſt ſide of the Inand. We endeavoured to perſuade one of them to go with us to be our Pilot, but he would not : Therefore in the Afrernoon we looſed from hence, ſteering again to the South Eaſt, having the Wind ar S. W. When we came to the S. E. end of the Iſland Mindanao, we ſaw two ſmall Iſlands about 3 leagues diſtant from it. We might have paſſed between them and the main Iſland, as we learnt ſince, but not knowing them nor what dangers we might encounter there ; we choſe rather to fail to the Eaſtward of them. But meeting very ſtrong Weſterly Winds, we got nothing forward in many days. a 4 The Bay of Deer. 347 days. In this time we firſt ſaw the Iſlands Meangis, An.1686 which are about 16 leagues diſtant from the Minda- nao, bearing S. E. I ſhall have occaſion to ſpeak more of them hereafter. The 4th day of July we got into a deep Bay, 4 leagues N. W. from the two ſmall Iſlands before mentioned. But the night before, in a violent Tornado, our Bark being unable to beat any long- er, bore away, which put us in ſome pain for fear ſhe was overler, as we had like to have been oor ſelves. We anchored on the South Weft ſide of the Bay, in 15 fathom Water, about a Cables length from the ſhore. Here we were forced to ſhelter our ſelves from the violence of the Weather, which was ſo boiſterous with Rains, and Tornadoes, and a ftrong Weſterly Wind, that we were very glad to find this place to anchor in, being the only thel- ter on this ſide from the Weſt Winds. This Bay is not above two mile wide at the mouth, but farther in it is three leagues wide, and 7 leagues deep, running in N. N. W. There is a good depth of Water about 4 or 5 leagues in, but rocky foul ground for above 2 leagues in, from the mouth on both fides of the Bay, except only in that place where we lay. About 3 leagues in from the mouth, on the Eaſtern ſide, there are fair fandy Bays, and very good anchoring in 4, 5, and 6 fa- thom. The Land on the Eaſt fide is high, mountainous, and woody, yer very well watered wirb ſmall Brooks, and there is one River large e- nough for Canoas to enter. On the Weſt ſide of the Bay the Land is of a mean heighth with a large Savannah, bordering on the Sea, and ſtretching from the mouth of the Bay, a great way to the Weſt- ward. This Savannah abounds with long Graſs, and it is plentifully ſtockt with Deer. The adjacent Woods are a covert for them in the heat of the day: but mornings 9 348 They arrive at Mindanao River. An. 1686 mornings and evenings they feed in the open Plains, as thick as in our Parks in England. I never ſaw a- ny where ſuch plenty of wild Deer, tho I have mer with them in ſeveral Parts of America, both in the North and Souch Seas. The Deer live here pretty peaceably and unmo- leſted; for there are no Iobabitants on that ſide of the Bay. We viſited this Savannah every morning, and killed as many Deer as we pleaſed, ſometimes 16 or 18 in a day; and we did eat nothing but Ve- niſon all the cime we ſtaid here. We ſaw a great many Plantations by the ſides of the Mountains, on the Eaſt ſide of the Bay, and we went to one of them, in hopes to learn of the Inhabitants whereabouts the City was, that we might not over fail it in the night: but they fled from us. We lay here till ther2day before thewinds abated of their fury, and then we failed from hence, direct- ing our coarſe to the Weſtward. In the morning we had a Land wind at North. At in a clock the Sea breeze came at Weſt, juſt in our Teeth, but it being fair Weather, we kept on our way, turning and taking the advantage of the Land breezes by night, and the Sea breezes by day. Being now paſt the S. E. part of the Iſland, we coaſted down on the Souch ſide, and we ſaw abun- dance of Canoas a fiſhing, and now and then a Imall Village. Neither were theſe Inhabitants afraid of us (as che former) but came aboard ; yet we could noc underſtand them, nor they us, but by ſigns: and when we mentioned the word Mindanao,they would point towards it. Ehe 18th day of July we arrived before the Ri- ver of Mindanao ; the mouth of which lies in lat. 6 d. 22 m. North, and is laid in 231 d. 12 m. Longi- tude Weſt, from the Lizard in England. We anchor- əd right againſt the River in 15 fathom water, clear hard Their Reception by the Mindanaians. 349 hard Sand ; about 2 miles from the ſhore, and 3 or An.1686 4 miles from a ſmall Iſland, that lay without us to the Southward. We fired 7 or 9 Guns, I remem- ber not well which; and were anſwered again with 3 from the ſhore; for which he gave one again. Immediately after our coming to an anchor Raja Laut, and one of the Sultans Sons came off in a Canoa, being rowed with 10 Oars, and demanded in Spaniſh what we were? and from whence we came ? Mr. Smith (he who was taken Priſoner ac Leon in Mexico) anſwered in the ſame Language, that we were Engliſh, that we had been a great while out of England. They told us that we were welcom, and asked us a great many queſtions a- bout England ; eſpecially concerning our Eaſt-India Merchants; and whether we were ſent by them to 9 ſetele a Factory here ? Mr. Smith told them that we came hither only to buy Proviſion. They ſeemed a little diſcontented when they underſtood that we were not come to ſettle among them: for they had heard of our arrival on the Eaſt-Gide of the Iſland a great while before, and encertained hopes that we were ſent purpoſely out of England hither to ſettle a trade with them;which it ſhould ſeem they are very deſirous of. For Captain Goodlud had been here not long before to treat with them about it ; and when he went away told them (as they ſaid that in a ſhort time they might expect an Ambaffadour from England, to make a full bargain with them. Indeed upon mature thoughts, I ſhould think we could not have done better, than to have com- plied with the deſire they ſeemed to have of our ſectling here ; and to have taken up our quarters among them. For as thereby we might better have conſulted our own profic and ſatisfaction, than by the other looſe roving way of life ; fois might probably bave proved of publick benefic to par Nacion, and been a means of introducing an Engliſh a a 350 Advantages of a Settlement bere. An. 1686 Engliſh Settlement and Trade, not only here, buc through ſeveral of the Spice Iſlands, which lye in its neighbourhood. For the Ilands Meangis, which I mentioned in the beginning of this Chapter, lye within 20 leagues of Mindanao. Theſe are 3 ſmall Inands that abound with Gold and Cloves, if I may credit my Author Prince Jeoly, who was born on one of them, and was at this time a Slave in the City of Mindanao. He mighc have been purchaſed by us of his Maſter for a finall matter, as he was afterwards by Mr. Moody, (who came hicher to Trade and laded a Ship with Clove Bark) and by tranſ- porting him home to his own Country, we might have goccen a Trade there. But of Prince Jeoly I Shall ſpeak more hereafter. Theſe Iands are as yer probably unknown to the Dutch, who as I ſaid before, indeavour to ingrofs all the Spice into their own hands. There was another opportunity offered us here of ſeccling on another Spice Iſland that was very well inhabited : for the Inhabitants fearing the Dutch, and underſtanding that the Engliſh were ſettling at Mindanao, their Sultan ſent his Nephew to Mindanao while we were chere to invite us chicher : Captain Swan conferr'd with him abouc it divers times, and I do believe he had ſome inclination to accept the offer; and I am ſure moſt of the men were for it ; but this never came to a head, for want of a true underſtanding between Captain Swan and his Men, as mav be declared hereafter. Beſide the benefit which might accrue from this Trade with Meangis, and other the Spice Iſlands, the Phillipine Inands themſelves, by a little care and induſtry, might have afforded us a very bene- ficial Trade, and all theſe Trades might have been managed from Mindanao, by fetcling there firſt. For chat Iſland lyeth very convenient for Trading either The beſt way to the Phillipine Iſlands. 351 either to the Spice Iſlands, or to the reſt of the An.1686 Phillipine Iſlands ; fince as its ſoil is much of the fame nature with either of them, ſo it lies as it were in the Center of the Gold and Spice Trade in theſe parts: the Iſlands North of Mindanao abounding moſt in Gold, and thoſe South of Meangis in Spice. As the Illand Mindanao lies very convenient for Trade, lo conſidering its diſtance, the way thither may not be over long and tireſome. The courſe that I would chooſe ſhould be to ſet out of England about the latter end of Auguſt, and to paſs round Terra del Fuego, and ſo ftretching over to- wards New Holland, coaſt it along that ſhore till I came near to Mindanao; or firſt I would coaſt down near the American ſhore, as far as I found convenient and then direct my courſe according- ly for the Iſland. By this I ſhould avoid coming near any of the Dutch ſettlements, and be ſure to meet always with a conſtanc brisk Eaſterly Trade Wind, after I was once paſt Terra del Fuego. Whereas in paſſing about the Cape of Good Hope, after you are Thor over the Eaft-Indian Ocean, and are come to the Iſlands, you muſt paſt throʻ the Streights of Malacca or Sundy, or elſe ſome other Streights Eaſt from Java, where you will be fure to meet with Counter-winds, go on which ſide of the Equator you pleaſe ; and this would require ordinarily 7 or 8 months for the Voyage, but the other I ſhould hope to perform in 6 or 7 at moſt. In your return from thence alſo you muſt obſerve the ſame Rule as the Spaniards do in going from Manila to Acapulco; only as they run towards the North Pole for variable Winds, ſo you muſt run to the South- ward, till you meer with a Wind that will carry you over to Terra del Fuego. There are places e- nough to touch at for Refreſhments, either going or coming. You may touch going thither on ei- ther 352 Davis's diſcovery of Terra Auſtralis. A1.1686 ther ſide of Terra Patagonica ; or, if you pleaſe, at the Gallapagoes Iſlands, where there is Refreſhment enough ; and returning you may probably touch ſomewhere on New-Holland, and ſo make ſome pro- fitable diſcovery in theſe places without going out of your way. And to ſpeak my thoughts freely, I believe 'cis owing to the neglect of this eaſy way that all that vaſt Tract of Terra Auſtralis which bounds the South Sea is yet undiſcovered : thoſe that croſs that Sea ſeeming to deſign ſome buſineſs on the Peruvian or Mexican Coaſt, and ſo lea- ving that at a diſtance. To confirm which, I ſhall add what Capcain Davis told me lately, that after his Departure from us at the Haven of Rea Lejo ( as is mentioned in the 8th Chap.) he went after ſeve- ral Traverſes, to the Gallapagoes, and that ſtanding thence Southward for Wind, ro bring him about Terra del Fuego, in the lat. of 27 Souch, about 500 leagues from Copayapo, on the Coaſt of Chili, he ſaw a ſmall fandy Iſland juſt by him, and that they 3 ſaw to the Weſtward of it a long tract of pretty high Land, tending away toward the North Weſt out of ſight. This might probably be the Coaſt of Terra Auſtralis Iecognita. But to recurn to Mindanao; as to the capacity w were then in, of feceling our felves at Mindanao, al- though we were not ſent out of any ſuch deſign of ſeccling, yet we were as well provided, or becter, conſidering all circumſtances, than if we had. For chere was ſcarce any uſeful Trade, but ſome or others of us underſtood it. We had Sawyers, Car- pencers, Joiners, Brickmakers, Bricklayers, Shoe- makers, Taylors, &c. we only wanted a good Smith for great work; which we might have had ar Mindanao. We were very well provided with Iron, Lead, and all ſorts of Tools, as Saws, Axes, Hammers, &c. We had Powder and Shot enough, and very good Imall Arns. If we had deſigned to build Raja Laut invites them aſboar. 353 build a Fort, we could have ſpared 8 or 10 Guns An: 1686 out of our Ship, and Men enough to have ma- naged it, and any Affair of Trade befide. We had alſo a great advantage above raw Men that are ſent out of England into theſe places, who proceed uſually too cautiouſly, coldly and formally, to com- paſs any conſiderable Deſign, which Experience better teaches than any Rules whatſoever ; beſides the danger of their Lives in fo great and ſudden a change of Air : whereas we were all inured co hot Climates, hardned by many Facigues, and in general, daring Men, and ſuch as would not be eafily Baffled. To add one thing more, our Men were almoſt cired, and began to defire a quietus eſt s and therefore they would gladly have feated them- felves any where. We had a good Ship too, and enough of us (beſide what might have been ſpared to manage our new Settlement) to bring the News with the Effects to the Owners in England : for Captain Sman had already 5000 l. in Gold, whichi he and bis Merchants received for Goods ſold moff- ly to Captain Harris and his Men; which if he had laid buc part of ic our in Spice, as probably he might have done, would have ſatisfy'd the Mer- chants to their hearts content. So much by way of digreſſion. To proceed therefore with our firſt Reception as Mindanao, Raja Laut and his Nephew fat fill in their Canoa, and would not come aboard us, becauſe, as they ſaid, they had no Orders for it from the Sulran. After about half an hours diſcourſe, they took their leaves, firſt inviting Captain Swan athoar, and pro- miſing him to aſſiſt him in getting Proviſion, which they ſaid at preſent was ſcarce, but in three or four Months time the Rice would be gathered in, and then he might have as much as he pleaſed ; and that in the mean time, he might ſecure his Ship in fome convenient place, for fear of the Weſterly Aa winds, 354 Their Preſents and Audience of the Sultan. in. 1686 winds, which they ſaid would be very violent ac the latter end of this month, and all the next, as we found them We did not know the quality of theſe two per- fons till after they were gone, elſe we ſhould have fir'd ſome Guns at their departure: When they were gone, a certain Officer under the Sultan came aboard, and meaſured our Ship; a Cuſtom derived from the Chineſe, who always meaſure the length and breadth, and the depth of the Hold, of all Ships that come to load there 3 by which means they know how much each Ship will carry. Buc for what reafon this Cuſtom is uſed either by the Chineſe, or Mindanao-Men, I could never learn, unleſs the Mindanaians deſign by this means to im- prove their skill in Shipping, againſt they have a Trade. Capcain Swan, conſidering that the ſeaſon of the year would oblige us to ſpend ſome time at this Iſland, thought it convenient to make whar inte- reft he could with the Sultan ; who might after- wards either obſtruct, or advance his deſigns. He therefore immediately provided a preſent to ſend a- ſhoar to the Sultan, viz. 3 Yards of Scarlet Cloch, 3 Yards of broad Gold Lace, a Turkiſh Scimiter, and a pair of Piſtols : and to Raja Laut he ſent 3 Yards of Scarlet Cloth, and 3 Yards of ſilver Lace. This 3 Preſent was carried by Mr. Henry More in the Eve- ning. He was firſt conducted to Raja Laut's Houſe, where he remained till report thereof was made to the Sultan, who immediately gave order for all things to be made ready to receive him, About 9 a Clock at Night, a Meſſenger came from the Sultan to bring the Preſent away. Then Mr. More was conducted all the way, with Torch es and Armed Men, till he came to the Houſe where the Sultan was. The Sultan, with eight or ten Men of his Council, were ſeared on Carpets, waiting his 9 Iwo Engliſh Letters found at Mindanao, 355. his coming. The Preſent that Mr. More brought An. 168€ was laid down before them, and was very kindly accepted by the Sultan, who cauſed Mr. More to fit down by them, and asked a great many Queſtions of him. The diſcourſe was in Spaniſh by an In- terpreter. This Conference laſted about an hour, and then he was diſmiſt, and returned again to Raja Laut's Houſe. There was a Supper provided for him, and the Boats-Crew; after which he re- turned aboard. The next day the Sultan fent for Captain Swan: He immediately went alhoar with a Flag Flying in the Boats-Head, and two Trumpets founding all the way. When he came alhoar, he was met ac his landing by two principal Officers, guarded along with Soldiers, and abundance of People gazing to ſee him. The Sultan waited for him in his Cham- ber of Audience, where Captain Swan was treated with Tobacco and Betel, which was all his Enter- tainment. The Sultan ſent for two Engliſh Letters for Cap- tain Swan to read, purpoſely to lec him know, that our East-India Merchants did deſign to ſettle here, and that they had already ſent a Ship hi- ther. One of theſe Letters was ſent to the Sultan from England, by the Eaſt-India Merchants. The chiefeſt things contained in it, as I remember, for I ſaw it afterwards in the Secretaries Hand, who was very proud to ſhew it to us, was to defire ſome Priviledges, in order to the building of a Fort there. This Letter was written in a very fair Hand, and between each Line, there was a Gold-Line drawn. The other Letter was left by . Captain Goodlud, directed to any Engliſh Men who ſhould happen to come thither. This related wholly to Trade, giving an account, at what rate he had agreed with them for Goods of the Iſland, and how European Goods ſhould be ſold to them, Аа 2 with 356 3 A Mindanayan Puniſhment. An.1686 with an account of their Weight and Meaſures and their difference from ours. The Rate agreed on for Mindanao Gold, was 14 Spaniſh Dollars, (which is a current Coin all over India) the Engliſh Ounce, and 18 Dollars the Min- danao Ounce. Buc for Bees-Wax and Clove-Bark, I do not remember the Rate ; neither do I well re- member the Rates of Europe Commodities ; but, I think, the Rate of Iron was not above 4 Dollars a hundred. Captain Goodlud's Letter concluded thos. Truſt none of them, for they are all Thieves; but Tace is Latin for a Candle. We underſtood afterwards that Captain Goodlud was robb'd of ſome Goods by one of the General's Men, and that he that robb'd him was fled into the Mountains, and could not be found while Captain Goodlud was here. But the Fellow returning back to che City fome time after our arrival here, Raja Laut brought him bound to Captain Swan, and told him what he had done, de- firing him to puniſh him for it as he pleaſed ; but Captain Swan excuſed himſelf, and ſaid it did not belong to him, therefore he would have nothing to do with it. However, che General Raja Laut, would not pardon him, but punished him according to their own Cuſtom, which I did never ſee but at this time. He was ſtripe ſtark naked in the morning at Sun- riſing, and bound to a Poft, fo that he could not ftir Hand nor Foot, but as he was moved, and was placed with his Face Eaſtward againſt the Sun. In the afternoon they turn'd his Face towards the Weſt, that the Sun might ftill be in his Face; and thus he ſtood all day, parcht in the Sun ( which ſhines here exceſſively hot) and tormented with the Moskito's or Gnars : After this the General would have kill'd him, if Captain Swan had conſenced to it. I did never ſee any put to Death; but, I believe, they are barbarous enough in it: The General cold us him- felt 3 Raja Laut entertains Captain Swan. 357 ſelf that he put two Men to death in a Town An.1686 where ſome of us were with him; but I heard noc the manner of it. Their common way of puniſh- ing is to ſtrip them in this manner, and place them in the Son; but ſometimes they lay them flat on their backs on the Sand, which is very hot; where they remain a whole day in the ſcorching Sun, with the Moskito's biting them all the time. This Action of the General in offering Capcain Swan the puniſhment of the Thief, caus'd Captain Sman afterwards to make him the fame offer of his Men, when any had offended the Mindanao Men: but the General lefc fuch offenders to be puniſhed by Caprain Swan, as he thoughe convenient. So that for the leaſt offence Captain Swan puniſhed his Men, and that in the fight of the Mindanayans; and I think ſometimes only for revenge: as he did once punilh his chief Mate Mr. Teat, he that came Cap- tain of the Bark to Mindanao. Indeed at that time Captain Swan had his Men as much under command as if he had been in a King's Ship: and had he known how to uſe his Authority, he might have led them to any Settlement, and have brought them to aſſiſt him in any deſign he had pleaſed. Captain Swan being diſmift from the Sultan, with abundance of civility, after about two hours diſcourſe with him, went thence to Raja Laut's Houſe. Raja Laut had then ſome difference with the Sultan, and therefore he was not preſent at the Sultan's reception of our Captain; but waited his return, and treated him and all his Men with boi- led Rice and Fowls. He then told Captain Swan again, and urged it to him, that it would be beſt to get his Ship into the River as ſoon as he could, becauſe of the uſual cempefuous Weather at this time of the year: and that he ſhould want no af- ſiſtance to further him in any thing. He told him alſo, that as we inuſt of neceſſity fay here ſome time, Аа 3 2 358 They dram their Ship up the River. An. 1686 time, ſo our Men would often come afhoar; and he therefore deſired him to warn bis Men to be careful to give no affront to the Natives, wbo, he ſaid, were very revengeful. Tbat their Cuſtoms being different from ours, he feared thae Captain Swan's Men might ſome time or other offend them, though ignorantly; that therefore he gave him this friendly warning, to prevenc it: that his Houſe ſhould always be open to receive him, or any of his Men ; and that he knowing our Cuſtoins, would never be offended at any thing. After a great deal of ſuch diſcourſe, he diſmiſt the Captain and his Company, who took their leave and came aboard. Captain Swan having ſeen the two Letters, did not doube but that the Engliſh did deſign to fetele a Factory here : therefore he did not much ſcruple the honeſty of theſe People, but immediately or- dered us to get the Ship into the River. The Ri- ver upon which the City of Mindanao ſtands is buc ſmall, and hath not above ro or II foot water on the Bar at a Spring-ride : therefore we ligbined our Ship, and the Spring coming on, we wich much ado got her into the River, being affitted by 50 or 60 Mindanian Filhermen, who lived at the mouth of the River ; Raja Laut himſelf being a- board our Ship to direct them. We carried her about a quarter of a mile up, within the mouth of the River, and there Moored her head and ſtern in a hole, where we always rode afloat. After this the Citizens of Mindanao came frequently a- board, to invite our Men to their Houſes, and to offer us Pagallies. 'Twas a long time ſince any of us had received ſuch Friendſhip, and therefore we were the more eaſily drawn to accept of their kindneſſes; and in a very ſhort time moſt of our Men gora Comrade or two, and as many Pagal- lies; eſpecially fuch of us as had good Cloaths, and Lore of Gold, as many had, who were of the number The Natives careſs theme, 359 number of thoſe that accompanied Captain Harris An. 1686 over the Ifthmus of Darien, the reſt of us being poor enough. Nay, the very pooreſt and meaneft of us could hardly paſs the Streets, but we were even haľd by force into their Houſes, to be treated by them; altho' their Treats were but mean, viz. Tobacco, or Betel-Nat, or a little ſweet ſpiced Wa- ter. Yet their feeming ſincerity, fimplicity, and the manner of beſtowing theſe Gifts, made them very acceptable. When we came to their Houſes they would always be praiſing the Engliſh, as decla- ring that the Engliſh and Mindanaians were all one. This they exprels'd by putting their two fore-fingers cloſe cogether, and ſaying that the Engliſh and Min- danajans were ſamo, Samo ; that is, All One. Then they would draw their fore-fingers half a foot aſun- der, and ſay, The Dutch and they were Bugeto, which ſignifies ſo That they were at ſuch diſtance in point of Friendſhip. And for the Spaniards, chey would make a greater repreſentation of diſtance than for the Dutch; fearing theſe, but having felt and ſmart- ed from the Spaniards, who had once almoſt brought them under. Captain Swan did feldom go into any Houſe at firſt butinto Raja Laut's; there he Dined common- ly every day: and as many of his Men as were alhoar, and had no Money to entertain themſelves, reſorted thither about 12 a Clock, where they had Rice enough boiled and well dreſt, and ſome ſcraps of Fowls, or bits of Buffaloe, dreft very naſtily. Cap- tain Swan was ſerved a little better, and his two Trumpeters founded all the cime that he was at Din- ner. After Dinner Raja Laut would fit and dif- courſe with him moſt part of the Afternoon. It was now che Ramdam cime, therefore the General ex- cuſed himſelf that he could not entertain our Captain with Dances, and other Paſtimes, as he intended to do when this folemn cime was paſt ; beſides, A 2 4 360 Violent Rains and Floods. 49,1686 beſides, it was the very heighth of the wet Seaſon, and therefore not ſo proper for paſtimes. We had now very tempeſtuous Weather, and exceſſive Rains, which ſo ſwelld the River that it overflowed its Banks; ſo that we had much ado to keep our Ship ſafe, for every now and then we 1hould have a great Tree come floating down the River, and ſometimes lodge againſt our Bows, to the endangering the breaking our Cables, and either the driving us in over the Banks, or carry- ing us out to Sea ; both which would have been very dangerous to us, eſpecially being without Ballaſt. The City is about a mile long, (of no great breadth) winding with the Banks of the River on the Right Hand going up, tho' ic hath many Houſes on the other fide too. But at this time it ſeemed to ſtand as in a Pond, and there was no paſſing from one Houſe to another buc in Canoas. This tem- peſtuous rainy Weacher happened the latter end of July, and laſted moſt part of Auguſt. When the bad Weather was a liccle affwaged, Captain Sman hired a Houſe to put our Sails and Goods in, while we careen'd our Ship. We had a great deal of Iron and Lead, which was brought aihoar into this Houſe. Of iheſe Commodities, Captain Sman ſold to the Sultan and General eight or ten Tuns, ac the Rates agreed on by Captain Goodlud, to be paid in Rice The Mindanajans are no good Accomprants, therefore the Chineſe that live here do caft up their Accompts for them. After this, Captain Sman bought Timber-Trees of the General, and ſet ſome of our Men to Saw ghem into Plankas, to theach the Ships bottom. He had cwo Whip-Saws on Board, which he brought out of England, and four or five Men that knew the uſe of them, for they had been Sawyers in Jamaica. When Their Dances. A Story of J. Thacker. 361 When the Ramdam time was over, and the dry An.1686 time ſet in a liccle, the General, to oblige Captain Swan, entertained him every Night with Dances. The Dancing-Women that are purpoſely bred up to it, and make it their Trade, I have already defcri- bed. But beſide them, all the Women in general are much addicted to Dancing. They Dance 40 or 5o at once; and that ſtanding all round in a Ring joined Hand in Hand, and Singing and keep- ing Time. But they never budge out of their pla- ces, nor make any motion till the Chorus is ſung ; then all at once chey throw out one Leg, and bawl out aloud; and fomecimes they only clap their hands when the Chorus is ſung. Captain Swan, to reta- liate the Generals favours, ſent for his Violins, and ſome that could Dance English Dances; wherewich the General was very well pleaſed. They common- ly ſpent the biggeſt part of the Nights in theſe fort of Paſtimes. Among the reſt of our Men that did uſe to Dance thus before the General, there was one John Thacker, who was a Seaman bred, and could neither wrice nor read, buc had formerly learot to Dance in the Muſick-Houſes about Wapping : This Man came in- to the South Seas with Captain Harris, and getting with him a good quantity of Gold, and being a pretty good Husband of bis hare, had fill fome left, beſides what he laid out in a very good Suit of Cloathes. The General ſuppoſed by his Garb and his Dancing, that he had been of Noble Ex- traction ; and to be facisfy'd of his Quality, asked of one of our Men if he did nor gueſs aright of him: The Man, of whom the General asked this queſtion, told him he was much in the right, and that moſt of our Ships company were of the like Extraction, eſpecially all thoſe that had fine Cloathes, and that they came abroad only to ſee the World, having Money enough to bear their expences : : 362 The Generals Treachery. An.1686 expences where ever they came; buc that for the relt, thoſe that had buc mean Cloachs, they were only common Sea-men. After this the General ſhew'd a great deal of reſpect to all that had good Cloaths, but eſpecially to John Thacker, till Captain Swan came to know the buſineſs, and marr'd all, undeceiving the General, and drubbing the Noble-man : for he was ſo much incenſed againſt Fohn Thacker, that he could never endure him afterwards ; cho' the poor Fellow knew no- thing of the matter About the middle of November we began to work on our Ships bottom, which we found very much eaten with the Worm ; for this is a horrid place for Worms. We did not know this cill after we had been in the River a month; and then we found our Canoas bottoms eaten like Honey-combs ; our Bark, which was a ſingle botcom, was eaten thro'; ſo that ſhe could not ſwim. But our Ship was fheach- ed, and the Worm came no farther than the Hair between the ſheaching Plank and the main Plank. We did not miſtruſt the Generals Knavery till now: for when he came down to our Ship, and found us ripping off the ſheaching Plank, and ſaw the firm bottom anderneath, he ihook his Head, and ſeem- ed to be diſcontented, ſaying, He did never ſee a Ship with two bottoms before. We were told that in this place, where we now lay, a Dutch Ship was eaten up in 2 months time, and the General had all her Guns ; and it is probable he did expect to have had ours : which I do believe was the main reaſon thac made him ſo forward in aſſiſting us to get our Ship into the River, for when we went out again we had no aſſiſtance from him. We had no Worms till we came to this place : for when we careen'd at the Marias, the Worm had not couch'd us; nor ar Guam, for there we ſcrubb'd; nor after we came to the Illand Mindanao; for ac che S. E. end of the Iſland Ship-Worms. 363 Illand we beeld and ſcrubb'd alſo. The Mindanai. An. 1686 ans are ſo ſenſible of theſe deſtructive Inſects, thar whenever they come from Sea, they immediately hale their Ships into a dry Dock, and burn her bor- tom, and there let her lie dry, till they are ready to go to Sea again. The Canoas or Proes they hale up dry, and never ſuffer them to be long in the water. It is reported that thoſe Worms which ged into a Ships bottom in the ſalt water, will dye in the freſh water ; and that the freſh water Worms will dye in ſalt water ; but in brackiſh water boch forts will increaſe prodigiouſly. Now this place where we lay was ſometimes brackiih water, yec commonly freſh; but what ſort of Worm this was I know not. Some Men are of opinion, that theſe Worms breed in the Plank, but I am perſwaded they breed in the Sea, for I have ſeen Millions of them ſwimming in the water, particularly in the Bay of Panama; for there Captaio Davis, Caprain Swan, and my ſelf, and moſt of our Men, did cake notice of them divers cimes, which was the reaſon of our cleaning ſo often while we were there: and theſe were the largeſt Worms that I did ever fee. I have alſo ſeen them in Virginia, and in the Bay of Campeachy; in the latter of which places the Worm eats prodigiouſly. They are always in Bays, Creeks, mouths of Rivers, and ſuch places as are near the Thoar, being never found far our at Sea that I could ever learn ; yer a Ship will bring chem lodgʻd in its Plank for a great way. Having thus ript off all our Worm-eaten Plank, and clapt on new, by the beginning of December, 1686. our Ships bottom was ſheached and callowed and the 10th day we went over the Bar, and cook aboard the Iron and Lead that we could not ſell, and began to fill our Water, and fetch aboard Rice for our Voyage: but C. Swan remain'd alhoar ſtill, and was not yet determin'd when to fail, or whither. Buc 364 The General tricks them. An. 1686 But I am well aſſured that he did never intend to cruize about Manila, as his Crew deſign'd ; for I did once ask him, and he told me, that what he had already done of that kind he was forc'd to; but now, being ac liberty, he would never more en- gage in any ſuch deſign : For, faid he, there is no Prince on Earth is able to wipe off the ſtain of ſuch Actions. What other deſigns he had I know not ; for he was commonly very croſs, yet he did never pro- poſe doing any ching elſe, but only ordered the Pro- viſion to be got aboard in order to fail; and I am confident if he had made a motion to go to any Engliſh Factory, moſt of his Men would have con- ſented to it, tho' probably, ſome would have ſtill oppoſed it. However, his Authority mighe ſoon have over-ſwayed thoſe that were refractory; for it was very ſtrange to ſee the Awe that theſe Men were in of him, for he punilhed the moſt ſtubborn and daring of his Men. Yet when we had brought the Ship out into the Road, they were not alto- gether lo ſubmiffive, as while it lay in the River, though even then it was that he puniſhed Captain Teat. I was at that time a hunting with the General for Beef, which he had a long time promiſed us. But now I ſaw that there was no credit to be gi- ven to his word; for I was a week out with him and faw but four Cows, which were ſo wild, that we did not get one. There were five or fix more of our Company with me : theſe who were young Men, and had Dalilabs there, which made them fond of the place, all agreed with the General to tell Capcain Swan, that there were Beeves enough, only they were wild. But I told him the truth, and adviſed him not to be too credulous of the Gene- rals promiſes. He ſeemed to be very angry, and ſtormed behind the Generals back, but in his pre- fence was very mute,being a Man of ſmall Courage. IC The Prodigality of the Engliſh Sea-men. 365 It was about the 20th day of December when we An. 1686 recurned from hunting, and the General deſigned to go again to another place to hunt for Beef, buc he ſtayed cill after Chriſtmas-Day, becauſe ſome of us deſigned to go with him ; and Captain Swan had deſired all his Men to be aboard that day, thac we might keep it ſolemnly together : And accord- ingly he ſent aboard a Buffaloe the day before, that we might have a good Dinner. So the 25th day about 10 a Clock, Captain Swan came aboard, and all his Men who were alhoar : For you muſt underſtand that near a third of our Men lived con- ftantly aſhoar, with their Comrades and Pagallies, and ſome with Women-ſervants, whom they hired of their Maſters for Concubines. Some of our Men alſo had Houſes, which they hired or bought, for Houſes are very cheap, for five or fix Dollars. For many of them having more Money than they knew what to do with, eaſed themſelves here of the trouble of telling it, ſpending it very laviſhly, their Prodigalicy making the people impoſe upon chem, to the making the reſt of us pay the dearer for what we bought, and to the endangering the like Impofitions upon ſuch Engliſh Men as may come here hereafter. For the Mindanayans knew how to get our Squires Gold from them, (for we had no Silver,) and when our Men wanted Silver, they would change now and then an Ounce of Gold, and could get for it no more than 10 or 11 Dollars for a Mindanao Ounce, which they would not part with again under 18 Dollars. Yet this , and the great Prices the Mindanayans ſet on their Goods, were not the only way to leſſen their ſtocks; for their Pagallies and Comrades would often be begging ſomewhat of them, and our Men were generous enough, and would beſtow half an Ounce of Gold at a time, in a Ring for their Pagallies, or in a Silver Wrift-band, or Hoop to come about their Arms, 366 Captain Swan's ill Conduct. An. 1686 Arms, in hopes to get a Nights Lodging with them. When we were all aboard on Chriſtmas-Day,Cap- tain Swan and his two Merchants, I did expect that Captain Swan would have made fome Pro- porals, or have told us his Deſigns; but he only dined and went afhoar again , without ſpeaking any thing of his Mind. Yet, even then, I do think, that he was driving on a Deſign, of going to one of the Spice Iſlands, to load with Spice; for the young Man, before mentioned, who I ſaid was ſent by his uncle, the Sultan of a Spice Iſland near Ternate, to invite the Engliſh to their INand, came aboard at this time, and after ſome private dif- courſe with Captain Swan, they both went ahoar together. This young Man did not care that the Mindanayans ſhould be privy to what he ſaid. I have heard Captain Swan fay, Thac he offered to load his Ship with Spice, provided he would build a ſmall Fort, and leave fome Men to ſecure the Inand from the Dutch; but I am fince informed, that the Dutch have now goc poſſeſſion of the Iſland. The next day after Chriſtmas the General went away again, and 5 or 6 Engliſh Men with him, of whom I was one, under prerence of going a hunt- ing; and we all went together by Water in his Proe, together with his Women and Servants, to the hunting place. The General always carried his Wives and Children, his Servants, his Money and Goods with bim: ſo we all imbarked in the morning, and arrived there before night. I have already deſcribed the faſhion of their Proes, and the Rooms made in them. We were entertained in the Generals Room or Cabbin. Our Voyage was not ſo far, but that we reached our Port be- fore night. At The Generals Seraglio. 367 At this time one of the Generals Servants had An. 1686 offended, and was puniſhed in this manner : He was bound faſt flat on his Belly, on a Bambou belong- ing to the Proe, which was ſo near the Water, that by the Veſſels motion is frequently delved un- der water, and the Man along with ic ; and ſome- time when hoifted up, he had ſcarce time to blow before he would be carried under Water again. When we had Rowed about two leagues, ween- tered a pretty large deep River, and Rowed up a league further ; the Water ſalt all the way. There was a pretty large Village, the Houſes built after the Country faſhion. We landed at this place, where there was a Houſe made ready immediately for us. The General and his Women lay at one end of the Houſe, and we at the other end, and in the Evening all the Women in the Village danced before the General. While he ſtaid here, the General with his Men went out every Morning becimes, and did not re- turn till four or five à Clock in the Afternoon; and he would often complement us, by telling us what good Truſt and Confidence he had in us, ſay- ing, Thac he left his Women and Goods under our Protection, and that he thought them as ſe- cure with us fix, (for we had all our Arms with us) as if he had left a hundred of his own Men to Guard them. Yet for all this great confidence, he always left one of his principal Men, for fear fome of us should be too familiar with his Wo. men They did never fir out of their own Room when the General was at home, but as ſoon as he was gone out, they would prelently come into our Room, and fit with us all day, and ask a thou- fand queſtions of us concerning our Engliſh Wo- men, and our Cuſtoms. You may imagine, that be- fore this time, fome of us had attained ſo much of their 368 Their Converſe with the Generals Women. An. 1686 their Language as to underſtand them, and give them anſwers to their demands. I remember that one day they asked how many Wives the King of England had ? we told them but one, and that our Engliſh Laws did not allow of any more. They ſaid it was a very ſtrange Cuſtom, that a Man ſhould be confined to one Woman; ſome of them ſaid it was a very bad Law, but others again ſaid it was a good Law; ſo there was a great diſpute among them about it. But one of the Generals Women faid policively, that our Law was better than theirs, and made them all ſilent by the reafon which ſhe gave for it. This was the War. Queen, as we called her, for ſhe did always accompany the General when ever he was called out to engage bis Enemies, but the reſt did nor. By this familiarity among the Women, and by often diſcourſing chem, we came to be acquainted with their Cuſtoms and Priviledges. The General lies with bis Wives by curns, but ſhe by whom he had the firſt son has a double portion of his compa- ny ; for when it comes to her turn, ſhe has him two Nights, whereas che reſt have him but one. She wich whom he is to lie at Night, ſeems to have a particular reſpect ſhewn her by the reſt all the pre- cedene Day, and for a Mark of diſtinction, wears a ſtriped filk Handkerchief about her Neck, by which we knew who was Queen that Day. We lay here about five or ſix days, but did never in all that time ſee che leaſt ſign of any Beef, which was the buſineſs we came about ; neither were we ſuffered to go out with the General co ſee the wild Kine, but we wanted for nothing elſe: However this did not pleaſe us, and we often importuned him to lec us go out among the Cattle. Ac laft he cold us, that he had provided a Jar of Rice-drink to be Merry with us, and after that we fould go with him. This Rice-Drink 369 This Rice-Drink is made of Rice boiled and An. 1686 put into a Jar, where it remains a long time ſteep- ing in Water. I know not the manner of making it, but it is very ſtrong pleaſant Drink. The evening when the General deſigned to be merry, he cauſed a Jar of this Drink to be brought into our Room, and he began to drink firſt himſelf, then afterwards bis Men; ſo they took turns till 9 they were all as drunk as Swine, before they ſuf- fered us to drink. After they had enough, then we drank, and they drank no more, for they will not drink after us. The General leapt about our Room a little while ; but, having his Load, foon went to ſleep. The next day we went out with the General into the Savannah, where he had near 100 Men, making of a large Pen to drive the Cattle into. For that is the manner of their Hunting, having no Dogs. But I ſaw nor above 8 or 10 Cows, and thoſe as wild as Deer, ſo that we got none chis day: yer the next day ſome of his Men brought in 3 Heifers, which they kill'd in the Savannah. With theſe we recurned aboard, they being all that we got there. Captain Swan was much vext at the Generals actions; for he promiſed to ſupply us with as much Beef as we ſhould want, but now either could nor, or would not make good bis promiſe. Beſides, he failed to perform his promiſe in a bargain of Rice, that we were to have for the Iron which he ſold him, but be put us off ſtill from time to time, and would not come to any Account. Neither were cheſe all his Tricks, for a licele before his Son was circumciſed, (of which I (pake in the fore- going Chapter ) he pretended a great ſtraight for Money, to defray the Charges of that day, and therefore defired Captain Swan to lend him about 20 Ounces of Gold; for he knew that Captain Bb Swan 3 370 Raja Laut's uneaſineſs to Capt. Swan. An. 1687 Swan had a conſiderable quantity of Gold in his poffeffion, which the General thought was his own, buc indeed had none but what belonged to the Merchants. However, he lent it the General, but when he came to an Account with Captain Swan, he told him, that it was uſual at ſuch fo- lemn times to make Preſents, and that he received it as a Gift. He alſo demanded payment for the Vi&tuals that our Caprain and his Men did eat at his Houſe. Theſe things ſtartled Captain Swan, yec how to help himſelf he knew not. But all this, with other inward troubles lay hard on our Cap- tains Spirits, and put him very much out of Hu- mour ; for his own Company alſo were preſling him every day to be gone, becauſe now was the heighth of the Eaſterly Monſoon, the only Wind to carry us farther into the Indies. About this time fome of our Men, who were weary and tired with wandring, ran away into the Country and abſconded, they being affifted, as was generally believed, by Raja Laut. There were others alſo, who fearing we ſhould not go to an Engliſh Port, bought a Canoa, and deſigned to go in her to Borneo: For not long before a Mindanao Veſſel came from thence, and brought a Lecter di- rected to the Chief of the Engliſh Factory at Min- danao. This Letter the General would have Cap- tain Sman to have opened, but he thought it might come from ſome of the Eaſt-India Merchants,whoſe Affairs he would not intermeddle with, and there- fore did not open it. I fince met with Caprain Borory at Achin, and telling him this ſtory, he ſaid that he ſent that Letrer, ſuppoſing that the En- gliſh were ſettled there at Mindanao ; and by this Lercer we alſo thought that there was an Engliſh Factory at Borneo : ſo here was a miſtake on both fides. Buc this Canoa wherewith ſome of them thought to go to Borneo, Captain Swan cook from them, 5 9 The Diſorders among the Ships Crew. 371 them, and threatned the undertakers very hardly. An. 1687 However, this did not ſo far diſcourage them, for they ſecretly bought another ; but their deſigns taking air, they were again fruſtrated by Captain Swan, The whole Crew were at this time under a ge- 'neral diſaffection, and full of very different Pro- jects; and all for want of action. The main divi- fion was between choſe that had Money, and thole that had none. There was a great difference in the bumours of theſe ; for they that had Money liv'd a- fhoar, and did not care for leaving Mindanao, wbilft thoſe that were poor liv'd aboard, and urg'd Cap- tain Swan to go to Sea. Theſe began to be unruly as well as diffatisfy'd, and fenc alhoar the Merchants Iron to fell for Rack and Honey, to make Punch, wherewich they grew drunk and quarrellome; which diſorderly actions deterr'd me from going aboard, for I did ever abhor Drunkenneſs, which now our Men chat were aboard addicted themſelves wholly to Yet theſe diſorders might have been cruſht, if Captain Swan had uſed his Authority to fuppreſs them : But he, with his Merchants, living always ahoar, there was no command, and therefore eve- ry Man did what he pleaſed, and encourag'd each ocher in his Villanies. Now Mr. Hartbop, who was one of Captain Swan's Merchants, did very much importune bim to ſettle his reſolutions, and declare his Mind to his Men; which at laſt he conſented to do: Therefore he gave warning to all his Men to come aboard the 13th day of Fantary 1687 We did all earneſtly expect to hear what Cap- tain Swan would propoſe, and cherefore were very willing to go aboard, but unluckily for him. Two days before this meeting was to be, Captain Swan ſent aboard his Gunner, to fetch fomeching afhoar out of his Cabbin; the Gunner rummaging ro B b 2 find 372 The Crew diſgusted at their Captain. An.168 7 find what he was ſent for, among other things took out the Captains Journal, from America to the Iſland Guam, and laid ic down by him. This Journal was taken up by one John Reed, a Bristol Man, whom I have mentioned in my 4th Chapter. He was a pretty ingenious young man, and of a very civil carriage and behaviour. He was alſo accounted a good Artiſt, and kept a Journal, and was now prompted by his curioſity to peep into Captain Swan's Journal, to ſee how it agreed with his own; a thing very uſual among Sea-men thac keep Journals, when they have an opportunity, and eſpecially young men, who have no great Ex- perience. At the firſt opening of the Book, he light on a place in which Captain Swan bad inveighed bitterly againſt moſt of his Men, eſpecially againſt another John Reed, a Famaica-Man. This was ſuch ſtuff as he did not ſeek after ; but hitting ſo pat on this ſubject, his curioſity led him to pry farther; and therefore while the Gunner was buſie, he convey'd the Book away, to look over it at his leiſure. The Gunner having diſpatch'd his buſineſs, lock'd up the Cabbin-door, not miſſing the Book, and went aſhoar; chen John Reed ſhewd it to his Name- fake, and to the reſt that were aboard, who were by this time the biggeſt part of them ripe for miſchief, only wanting ſome fair precence to ſec themſelves to work about it. Therefore looking on what was written in this Journal to be matter ſufficient for them to accomplish their ends, Cap- tain Teat, who, as I ſaid before, had been abuled by Capcain Swan, laid hold on this opportunity to be revenged for his injuries, and aggravated the matter to the heighth, perſwading the Men co turn out Captain Swan from being Commander, in hopes to have commanded the Ship himſelf. As for the Sea-men, they were eaſily perſwaded to any thing, for they were quite tired with chis long and tedious 373 A Snake about a Mans Neck. tedious Voyage, and moſt of them deſpaired of An. 1687 ever getting home, and therefore did not care what they did, or whicher they went. It was only want of being buſied in ſome action that made them ſo uneafie ; therefore they conſented to whac Teat propoſed, and immediately all that were aboard bound themſelves by Oach to turn Caprain Swan out, and to conceal this defign from thoſe that were alhoar, until the Ship was under fail; which would have been preſently, if the Surgeon or his Mate had been aboard: but they were both aſhoar, and they thought ic no prudence to go to Sea with- out a Surgeon. Therefore the next morning they fent alhoar one John Cookworthy, to haſten off either the Surgeon or bis Mare, by pretending thac one of the Men in the Night broke his Leg by falling into the Hold. The Surgeon told him that he in- tended to come aboard the next day with the Cap- tain, and would not come before, but ſent his Mate Herman Coppinger. This man, ſome time before this, was ſleeping at his Pagallies, and a Snake twiſted himſelf about his Neck; but afterwards went away withouc hurting him. In this Country it is uſual to bave the Snakes come into the Houſes, and into the Ships too; for we had ſeveral came aboard our Ship when we lay in the River. But to proceed, Herman Coppinger provided to go aboard; and the next day, being the time appointed for Captain Swan and all his men to meet aboard, I went aboard with bim, nei- ther of us miſtruſting what was deſigned by thoſe aboard till we came thither. Then we found it was only a Trick to get the Surgeon off; for now, having obtained their deſires, the Canoa was ſent aſhoar again immediately, to defire as many as they could meet to come aboard; but not to tell the reaſon, leſt Captain Swan ſhould come to hear of it. Bb 3 The a 374 They leave Captain Swan behind. An. 1687 The 13th day in the morning they weighed, and fired a Gun: Captain Swan immediately fene aboard Mr. Nelly, who was now his chief Mate, to ſee what the matter was : To him they told all their grievances, and ſhewd him the Journal. He per- ſwaded them to ſtay till the next day, for an anſwer from Captain Swan and the Merchants ; ſo they came to an Anchor again, and the next morning Mr. Harthop came aboard : He perſwaded them to be reconciled again, or at leaſt to ſtay and get more Rice; buc they were deaf to it, and weighed again while he was aboard. Yet ac Mr. Harthop's per- ſwaſion, they promiſed to ſtay till Two a Clock in the Afternoon for Captain Swan, and the reſt of the men, if they would come aboard; but they ſuffer- ed no man to go aſhoar, except one William Williams that had a Wooden Leg, and another that was a Sawyer. Il Captain Sman had yet come aboard, he might have dalh'd all their deſigns ; buc he neither came himſelf, as a Captain of any Prudence and Cou- rage would have done, nor fene till the time was expired. So we left Captain Swan, and about 36 men afhoar in che City, and 6 or 8 chat run away; and about 16 we had buried there; the moſt of which died by Poyfon. The Natives are very ex- pert at Poyſoning, and do it upon ſmall occalions : nor did our Men want for giving offence, through their general Rogueries, and ſometinits by dallying too familiarly with their Women, even before their faces. Some of their Poyſons are flow and lingering ; for we had ſome now aboard who were Poyroned there, buc died noc till ſome months 3 after СНАР. 375 An. 1687 CH A P. XIV. They depart from the River of Mindanao. Of the time lost or gain'd in Sailing round the World : With a Caution to Sea-men, about the allowance they are to make for the difference of the Sun's Declination. The South Coaſt of Mindanao. Chambongo Town and Harbour, with its Neighbouring Keys. Green Turtle. Ruins of a Spaniſh Fort. The Weſtermoft Point of Mindanao. Two Proes of the So- logues laden from Manila. An Iſle to the Weſt of Sebo. Walking-Canes. Iſle of Batts, ve- ry large : and numerous Turtle and Manatee. A dangerous Shoal. They ſail by Panay, be- longing to the Spaniards, and others of the Philippine Iſlands. Iſle of Mindora. Two Barks taken. A further Account of the Iſle Luconia, and the City and Harbour of Ma- nila. They go for Pulo Condore to lie there. The Shoals of Pracel, &c. Pulo Condore. The Tar-Tree. The Mango. Grape-Tree. The Wild or Baſtard-Nutmeg. Their Animals. of the Migration of the Turtle from place to place. Of the Commodious Situation of Pulo Condore; its Water, and its Cochinchineſe Inhabitants. Of the Malayan Tongue. The Guſtom of proſtituting their Women in theſe Countries, and in Guinea. The Idolatry here, at Tunquin, and among the Chineſe Sea- men, and of a Proceſſion at Fort St. George. They Bb 4 376 Change of time in compaſſing the World. An.1637 They refit their Ship. Two of them die of Poy- ſon they took at Mindanao. They take in Wa- ter, and a Pilot for the Bay of Siam. Pulo Uby, and Point of Cambodia. Two Cambo- dian Veſſels. Ifles in the Bay of Siam. The tight Veſſels and Sea-men of the Kingdom of Champa. Storms. A Chineſe Fonk from Palimbam in Sumatra. They come again to Pulo Condore. A bloody Fray with a Ma- layan Veſſel. The Surgeon's and the Author's deſires of leaving their Grem. 9 THE 24th day of January 1687, at 3 of the 14ch in failed from the R ver of Mindanao, deſigning to cruize before Manila. It was during our ſtay at Mindanao, that we were firſt made ſenſible of the change of Time, in the courſe of our Voyage. For having travelld ſo far Weſtward, keeping the ſame courſe with the Sun, we muſt conſequently have gain'd fome- thing inſenſibly in the length of the particular days, but have loſt in the tale, the bulk, or num- ber of the days or hours. According to the diffe- rent Longitudes of England and Mindanao, this ile being Weſt from the Lizzard, by common computation, about 210 degrees, the difference of Time at our arrival at Mindanao ought to be about 14 hours: and ſo much we ſhould have anticipated our reckoning, having gained it by bearing the Sun company. Now the nacural Day in every par- ticular place muſt be conſonant to it felf: but this going about with, or againſt the Sun's courſe, will of neceſſity make a difference in the calculation of the civil Day between any two places. Accord- ingly, at Mindanao, and all other places in the Eaſt- Indies The neceſſity of allowing for change of Time. 377 Indies, we found them reckoning a Day before us, An 1687 both Natives and Europeans; for the Europeans coming Eaſtward by the Cape of Good Hope, in a courſe contrary to the Sun and us, where ever we mec they were a full Day before us in cheir AC- counts. So among the Indian Mahometans here, their Friday, the day of their Sultan's going to their Moſques, was Thurſday with us ; though it were Friday alſo with thoſe who came Eaſtward from Europe. Yer at the Ladrone Iſlands, we found the Spaniards of Guem keeping the ſame computation with our felves; the reaſon of which I take to be, that they ſettled that Colony by a courſe Weſtward from Spain ; the Spaniards going firſt to America, and thence to the Ladrones and Philippines. Buc how the reckoning was at Manila, and the reſt of the Spaniſh Colonies in the Philippine Iſlands, I know not: whether they keep it as they brought it, or corrected it by the Accounts of the Natives, and of the Portugueſe, Dutch and Engliſh, coming the contra- ry way from Europe. One great Reaſon why Sea-men ought to keep the difference of Time as exact as they can, is, that they may be the more exact in cheir Latitudes. For our Tables of the Sun's declination, being cal- culated for the Meridians of the places in which they were made , differ about 12 minutes from choſe parts of the World, that lie on their oppo- ſite Meridians, in the Months of March and 'Sep- tember ; and in proportion to the Sun's declination, at other times of the Year alſo. And ſhould they run farther, as we did, the difference would ſtill increaſe upon them, and be an occaſion of great Errors. Yet even able Sea men in theſe Voyages are hardly made ſenſible of this, tho' ſo neceſſary to be obſerved, for want of duly attending to the Reaſon of it, as it happened among thoſe of our Crew, who, after we had paſt 180 degrees, began to 378 a 3 Town of Chanbongo, Iſlands, &c. An.1687 to decreaſe the difference of declination, whereas they ought ftill to have increaſed it, for it all the way increaſed upon us. We had the Wind at N. N. E. fair clear Wea- ther, and a brisk gale. We coafted to the Weſt- ward, on the South-ſide of the Inand Mindanao, keeping within 4 or 5 Leagues of the ſhoar. The Land from hence trends away W. by S. It is of a good heighth by the Sea, and very Woody, and in the Country we ſaw high Hills. The next day we were abreſt off Chambongo; a Town in this Iſland, and 30 Leagues from the Ri- ver of Mindanao. Here is ſaid to be a good Har- bour, and a great Secclement, with plenty of Beef and Buffaloe. It is reported that the Spaniards were formerly fortified here alſo: There are 2 ſhoals lie off this place , 2 or 3 Leagues from che foar: From hence the Land is more low and even ; yet there are ſome Hills in the Country. About 6 Leagues before we came to the Weſt- end of the Inland Mindanao, we fell in with a great many ſmall low Hands or Keys, and about 2 or 3 Leagues to the Southward of theſe Keys, there is a long Iſland ſtretching N. E. and S. W. about 12 Leagues. This Iſland is low by the Sea on the North ſide, and has a ridge of Hills in the middle, running from one end to the other. Be- tween this Iſland and che ſmall Keys, there is a good large Channel: Among the Keys alſo there is good depth of Water, and a violent Tide; but on what point of the Compaſs it flows, I know not, nor how much it rifeth and falls. The 17th day we anchored on the Eaft-Gide of all theſe Keys, in 8 fathom Water, clean Sand. Here are plenty of green Turcle, whoſe Fleſh is as ſweet as any in the West-Indies: but they are very ſhy. A little to the Weſtward of theſe Keys, on the Iſland Mindanao, we ſaw abundance of Coco-Nar Trees : Therefore Ruins of a Spaniſh Fort. The Coasts, &c. 379 Therefore we fent our Canoa alhoar, thinking to An 1687 find Inhabitants, but found none, nor ſign of any, buc great tracks of Hogs, and great Carcle; and cloſe by the Sea there were the ruins of an old Fort, the Walls thereof were of a good heighth, built with Stone and Lime, and by the Workmanſhip ſeem'd to be Spaniſhe From this place the Land trends W.N. W. and is of an indifferent heighth by the Sea. It run on this point of the Compaſs four or five Leagues, and then the Land trends away N. N. W. five or fix Leagues farcher, making with many bluff points. We weigh'd again the 14th day, and went thro' between the Keys, but mer ſuch uncertain Tydes that we were forced to Anchor again. The 22d day, we got about the Weſtermoſt point of all Mindanao, and food to the Northward, plying under the ſhoar, and having the Wind at N. N. E. a freſh gale. As we failed along further, we found the Land to trend N. N. E. On this part of the Iand the Land is bigh by the Sea, with full bluff points, and very Woody. There are ſome ſmall ſandy Bays, which afford ſtreams of freſh Wa- ter Here we met with two Proes belonging to che Sologues, one of the Mindanaian Nations before- mentioned. They came from Manila laden with Silks and Calicoes. We kept on this Weſtern part of the Iſand ſteering Northerly, till we came abreſt of ſome other of the Philippine Iſlands, that lay to the Northward of us; then ſteered away towards them, but ſtill keeping on the Weſt-fide of them, and we had the Winds at N.N.E. The 3d of February we Anchored in a good Bay on the Weſt-ſide of an Iſland, in lat. 9 d. 55 m. where we had 13 fathom Water, good fofc oaze. This Iſland hath no Name that we conld find in any Book, but liech on the Weſt-lide of Iſland Sebo. 380 Canes. Iſle of Batts. An.1687 Sebo. It is about 8 or 10 Leagues long, Mountain- ous and Woody. At this place Captain Read, who was the ſame Captain Swan had ſo much railed a- gainſt in his Journal, and was now made Captain in his room (as Captain Teat was made Maſter, and Mr. Henry More Quarter-maſter) ordered the Carpenters to cut down our Quarter-Deck, to make the Ship ſnug, and the fiteer for failing. When that was done we heeled her, ſcrubbed her borcom and tallowed it : Then we fill'd all our Water, for here is a delicate ſmall run of Water. The Land was pretty low in this Bay, the Mould black and fat, and the Trees of ſeveral kinds, very thick and tall. In ſome places we found plenty of Canes, ſuch as we uſe in England for Walking-canes. Theſe were ſhort jointed, not above cwo foot and a balf, or two foot ten inches the longeſt, and moſt of them not above two foor. They run along on the ground like a Vine ; or taking hold of the Trees, they climb up to their very tops. They are 15 or 20 fathom long, and much of a bigneſs from the root, till within 5 or 6 fathom of the end. They are of a pale green colour, cloached over with a coat of a fhorc chick hairy ſubſtance, of a dun colour ; but it comes off by only drawing the Cane through your hand. We did cut many of them, and they proved very tough heavy Canes. We ſaw no Houſes, nor ſign of Inhabitants ; but while we lay here, there was a Canoa with fix men came into this Bay ; but whether they were bound, or from whence they came, I know not. They were Indians, and we could not underſtand them. In the middle of this Bay, about a mile from the ſhoar, there is a ſmall low woody Inand, noc above a mile in circumference; our Ship rode a- bout a mile from it. This Iſland was the habita- tion Vaſt numbers of monstrous Batis. 381 tion of an incredible number of great Batts, with An. 1687 bodies as big as Ducks, or larger Fowl, and with vaſt Wings : For I ſaw at Mindanao one of this fort, and I judge that the Wings ſtretcht out in length, could not be leſs aſunder than 7 or 8 foot from tip to tip, for it was much more than any of us could fathom with our Arms; extended to the utmoſt. The Wings are for ſubſtance like thoſe of other Batts, of a Dun or Mouſe colour. The Skin or Leather of them hach Ribs running a- long it, and draws up in 3 or 4 folds; and at the joints of thoſe Ribs, and the extremities of the Wings, there are ſharp crooked Claws, by which they may hang on any thing. In the Evening, as ſoon as the Sun was ſet, theſe Creatures would be- gin to take their flight from this Iſland, in ſwarms like Bees, directing their flight over to the main Illand; and whicher afterwards I know not. Thus we ſhould ſee them riſing up from the Iſland till Night hindred our fight; and in the Morning, as foon as it was light, we ſhould ſee them returning again like a Cloud to the ſmall Illand, till Sun riſing. This courſe they kept conſtantly, while we lay here, affording us every Morning and Evening an hours diverſion in gazing at them, and talking about them ; but our curioſity did not prevail with us to go afhoar to them, our ſelves and Canoas be- ing all the day time taken up in buſineſs about our Ship. At this ifle alſo we found plenty of Tartle and Manatee, but no Filh. We ſtaid bere till the joth of February 1687, and then having compleated our buſineſs, we failed hence with the Wind ac North; but going out we firuck on a Rock, where we lay two hours. It was very ſmooth water, and the Tide of Flood, or elle we ſhould there have loſt our Ship. We ftruck off a great piece of our Rudder, which was all the damage that we received, but we more narrow- ly 382 Iſle of Panay. Iſle of Mindora. A%.1687 ly miſt loſing our Ship this time, than in any other in the whole Voyage. This is a very dangerous Shoal, becauſe it does not break, unleſs probably it may appear in foul weather. It lies about two mile to the Weſtward, without the ſmall Bace Iſland. Here we found the Tide of Flood ſetting to the Southward, and the Ebb to the North- ward. After we were paſt chis Shoal, we coaſed along by the reſt of the Philippine Iſlands, keeping on the Weſt-ſide of them. Some of them appeared to be very Mountainous dry Land. We ſaw many fires in the Night as we paſſed by Panay, a great Mand ſettled by Spaniards, and by the fires up and down, it ſeems to be well ſertled by chem ; for chis is a Spaniſh cuſtom, whereby they give notice of any danger, or the like, from Sea ; and 'tis probable they had ſeen our Ship the day before. This is an unfrequenced Coaſt, and 'cis rare to have any Ship ſeen there. We touched not at Panay, nor any where elle, cho' we ſaw a great many ſmall Inands to the Weſtward of us, and ſome Shoals, but none of them laid down in our Draughts. The 18th day of Feb. we Anchored at the N.W. end of the Idland Mindora, in ten fachom Water, about 3 quarters of a mile from the ſhoar. Mindora is a large Iſland, the middle of ic lying in lat. 13, about 40 Leagues long, ftretching N W. and S. É. It is high and Mountainous, and not very woody. At this place where we Anchored the Land was neither very high nor low. There was a ſmall Brook of Water, and the Land by the Sea was very woody, and the Trees high and tall, but a League or two farther in, the Woods are very thin and ſmall. Here we ſaw great tracks of Hogs and Beef, and we ſaw ſome of each, and Hunted them ; but they were wild, and we could kill none. While They cruize off Manila. 383 While we lay here, there was a Canoa with 4. An. 1687 Indians came from Manila. They were very ſhie of us a while: but at lait, hearing us fpeak Spaniſh, they came to us, and told us, that they were go- ing to a Frier, that liv'd at an Indian Village to- wards the S. E. end of the Iſland. They told us alſo, that the Harbour of Manila is ſeldom or ne- ver without 20 or 30 Sail of Vefſels, moſt Chineſe, fome Portugueze, and ſome few the Spaniards have of their own. They ſaid that when they had done their buſineſs with the Frier they would return to Manila, and hoped to be back again at this place in 4 days time. We told them, that we came for a Trade with the Spaniards at Manila, and ſhould be glad if they would carry a Letter to fome Merchant there, which they promiſed to do. But this was only a pretence of oors, to get out of them what Intelligence we could as to their Shipping, Strength, and the like, under colour of ſeeking a Trade: for our buſineſs was to pillage. Now if we had really deſigned to have traded here, this was as fair an op- portunity as Men could have deſired : for theſe Men could have brought us to the Frier that they were going to, and a ſmall Preſent to him would have engaged him to do any kindneſs for us in the way of Trade: for the Spaniſh Governors do not allow of it, and we muſt Trade by fealth. The 21ſt day we went from hence with the Wind ac E. N. E. a ſmall gale. The 23d day in the morning we were fair by the S. E. end of the Iſland Luconia, the place that had been ſo long de- fired by us. We preſently law a Sail coming from the Northward, and making after her, we took her in 2 hours time. She was a Spaniſh Bark, that came from a place called Pangaſanam, a ſmall Town on the N. end of Luconia, as they told us; probably the fame with Pongaſſinay, which lies on a Bay at the N. W. fide of the land. She was bound to Manila, buc 384 Of the Acapulco Ship, and Iſle of Luconia. An. 1687 but had no Goods aboard; and therefore we turned her away The 23d we took another Spaniſh Veſſel that came from the ſame place as the other. She was laden with Rice and Cotton-Cloth, and bound for Manila alfo. Theſe Goods were purpoſely for the Acapulco Ship: the Rice was for the Men to live on while they lay chere, and in their return; and the Cotton-Cloth was to make Sails. The Matter of this Prize was Boatſwain of the Acapulco Ship which eſcaped us at Guam, and was now at Manila. It was this Man chat gave us the relation of what ſtrength it had, how they were afraid of us there, and of the accident that happen'd to them, as is before men- tioned in the roch Chapter. We took theſe two Veſſels within 7 or 8 Leagues of Manila. . Luconia I have ſpoken of already: but I ſhall now add this further Account of it. It is a great land, taking up becween 6 and 7 degrees of Lat. in length, and ies breadth near the middle is about 60 leagues, but the ends are narrow. The North-end lies in about 19 d. North Lat. and the S. end in about 12 d. 30 m. This great Iſland hath abundance of ſmall Keys or Iſlands lying about it; eſpecially at the North end. The South-fide fronts towards the reſt of the Philippine Idands : of theſe that are its nearelt Neighbours, Mindoro, lately mentioned, is the chief, and gives Name to the Sea or Streight that parts it and the other Iſlands from Luconia ; being called the Streights of Mindora. The body of the iſland Luconia is compoſed of many ſpacious plain Savannahs, and large Moun tains. The Norch-end ſeems to be more plain and even, I mean freer from Hills, than the South-end: but the Land is all along of a good heighth. It does not appear fo flourishing and green as ſome of the other Inlands in this Range; eſpecially that of St. John, Mindanao, Bait Iand, &c yet in ſome places Place this at p. 384 A Prospect of ý coaft of 5 1. Luconia near : Manila, at offshore, y higheft Pike bearing Eaft. p. 389 Thus the Islands Pulo Condor appear : at 81. distance bearing South'. The Great p.390 Island The Harbour f The Pulo Condore 6. 10' Leffer Iſland A Rock p. 4.21 The BASHEE INand's 15 The first coming in Grajton Isle 2.里 ​Orange Iſland L Bashee Isle Goat Isle Monmouth Igle iſle Luconia. Manila city and Harbour. 387 places it is very woody. Some of the Mountains of An.1687 this Iſland afford Gold, and the Savannahs are well ſtocke with herds of Cattle,eſpecially Buffaloes. Theſe Cattle are in great plency all over the Eaſt Indies; and therefore 'tis very probable that there were many of theſe here, even before the Spaniards came hither. But now there are alſo plenty of other Catile , as I have been told , as Bullocks, Horſes, Sheep, Goats , Hogs, &c. brought hither by the Spaniards. It is pretty well inhabited with Indians, moſt of them, if not all, under the Spaniards, who now are maſters of it. The Native Indians do live together in Towns; and they have Prieſts among them to inſtruct them in the Spaniſh Religion. Malina , the chief, or perhaps only City, lies ac the foot of a ridge of high Hills, facing upon a ſpacious harbour near the S. W. point of the Iſland, in about the Lat. of 14. d. North. It is environ'd with a high ſtrong Wall, and very well fortify'd wich Forts and Breaft-works. The Houſes are large, ſtrongly built, and covered with Pan-tile. The Streets are large, and pretty regular ; with a Pa- rade in the midſt, after the Spaniſh faſhion. There are a great many fair Buildings, beſides Churches and other Religious Houſes ; of which there are not a few. The Harbour is ſo large, that ſome hundreds of Ships may ride here : and is never without many, both of their own, and ſtrangers. I have already given you an account of the two Ships going and coming between this place and Acapulto. Beſides them, they have ſome ſmall Veffels of their own; and they do allow the Portugueſe to Trade here, buc the Chineſe are the chiefeſt Merchants,and they drive the greateſt Trade; for they have commonly 20 or žo, or 40 Jonks in the Harbour at a time,and a great many Merchants conſtantly reſiding in the City, Сс beſide 388 John Fitz-Gerald an Iriſhman. An 1687 beſide Shop keepers, and Handy-crafts men in a- bundance. Small Veſſels run up near the Town, but the Acapulco Ships, and others of greater bur- then, lye a league ſhort of it, where there is a ftrong Fort alſo, and Store-houſes to put Goods in. I had the major part of this relation 2 or 3 years after this time, from Mr. Coppinger our Surgeon, for he made a Voyage hither from Porta Nova, a Town on the Coaſt of Coromandel, in a Portugueze Ship, as I think. Here he found 10 or 12 of Cap- tain Swan's men; ſome of thoſe that we left at Mindanao. For after we came from thence, they bought a Proe there, by the inſtigation of an Iriſ- man, who went by the name of John Fitz-Gerald, a perſon that ſpoke Spaniſh very well, and ſo in this their Proe they came hither. They had been here but 18 months when Mr. Coppinger arrived here,and Mr. Fitz-Gerald had in this time gotten a Spaniſh Mufteſa Woman to Wife, and a good Dowry with her. He then profeſſed Phyſick and Surgery, and was highly eſteemed among the Spaniards for his ſuppoſed Knowledge in thoſe Arts: For being al- ways troubled with ſore Shins while he was with he kept ſome Plaiſters and Salves by him; and with theſe he fet up, upon his bare natural ſtock of knowledge, and his Experience in Kibes. Buc then he had a very great ſtock of confidence with- al, to help out the other, and being an Iriſh Roman Catholick, and having the Spaniſh Language, he had a great advantage of all his Conſorts; and he alone lived well there of them all. We were not within ſight of this Town, but I was ſhewn the Hills that over-looked it, and drew a draft of them as we lay off at Sea; which I have cauſed to be engraven among a few other chat I took my ſelf : See the Table. LIS, The our own. They arrive, at Pulo Condore. le 389 The time of the year being now too far ſpent An. 1687 to do any thing here, it was concluded to fail from hence to Palo Condore, a little parcel of Iſlands on the Coaſt of Cambodia , and carry this prize with us, and there careen if we could find any conve- , nient place for it, deſigning to return hither again by the latter end of May, and wait for the Aca- pulco Ship that comes about that time. By our Drafts (which we were guided by, being ſtran- gers to theſe parts ) this ſeemed to us then to be a place out of the way, where we might lye ſnug for a while, and wait the time of returning for our prey. For we avoided as much as we could the going to lye by at any great place of Com- merce, left we ſhould become too much expoſed, and perhaps be aflaulced by a force greater than So having ſet our Priſoners aſhore, we failed from Luconia the 26th day of Feb. with the Wind E. N. E. and fair weather, and brisk gale. We were in lat. 14d. N. when we began to ſteer away for Pulo Condore, and we ſteered S. by W. In our way thither we went pretty near the Shoals of Pracel, and other Shoals which are very dange- rous. We were very much afraid of them, buc . eſcaped them without ſo much as ſeeing them, on- ly at the very South end of the Pracel Shoals we ſaw 3 little fandy Illands or Spots of Sand, ſtanding juſt above water within a mile of us. It was the 13th day of March before we came in fight of Pulo Condore, or the Iſland Condore, as Fulo fignifies. The 14th day about noon we anchored on the North ſide of the Iſland, againſt a fandy Bay two mile from the ſhore, in 1o fathom clean hard Sand, with both Ship and Prize. Pulo Gondore is the principal of a heap of Iſlands, and the only inhabited one of them. They lye in lat. . 8 d. 40, m. North, and about 20 leagues South and Сс 2 by 390 Iſles of Condore. The Tay-tree. An 1687 by Eaſt from the mouth of the River of Cambodia, Theſe Iſlands lye ſo near together, that ac a dia ftance they appear to be but one Iſland. Two of theſe Iſands are pretty large, and of a good heighth; they may be ſeen 14 or 15 leagues at Sea, the reſt are but little Spots. The biggeſt of the two (which is the inhabited one ) is about 4 or s leagues long, and lies Eaſt and Weſt. It is not above 3 mile broad at the broadeſt place, in moſt places not above a mile wide. The other large Iſland is about 3 mile long, and half a mile wide. This Iſland ſtretcheth North and South. It is fo conveniently placed at the Weſt end of the biggeſt Ifland, that between both there is formed a very commodious Harbour. The entrance of this Har- bour is on the North ſide, where the two Iſlands are near a mile aſunder. There are 3 or 4 ſmall Keys, and a good deep Channel between them and the biggeft Iſland. Towards the South end of the Harbour the two Iſlands do in a manner cloſe up, leaving only a ſmall paffage for Boats and Canoas. There are no more Iſlands on the North ſide, but s or 6 on the South ſide of the great Illand. See the Table, The Mold of theſe Iſlands for the biggeſt part is blackiſh, and pretty deep ; only the Hills are ſomewhac ftony. The Eaſtern part of the biggeſt Iland is fandy, yet all cloathed with Trees of di- vers forts. The Trees do not grow ſo thick as I have ſeen them in ſome places, but they are gene- rally large and tall, and fit for any uſes. There is one fort of Tree much larger than any other on this Iſland, and which I have not ſeen any where elſe. It is about 3 or 4 foot diameter in the Body, from whence is drawn a ſort of clam- my juice, which being boiled a little becomes per- fect Tar; and if you boil it much it will become hard as Pitch. It may be put to either uſe; we uſed a a Mangoes, Achar of ſeveral forts. . 391 uſed it both ways, and found it to be very ſervice. An 1687 able. The way that they get this juice, is by cut- ting a great gap horizontally in the body of the Tree half through, and about a foot from the ground : and then cutting the upper part of the body allope inwardly downward, till in the mid- dle of the Tree it meet with the traverſe cutting, or plain. In this plain horizontal ſemicircular ftumpe, they make a hallow like a Baſon that may contain a quart or two. Into this hole the juice which drains from the wounded upper part of the Tree falls: from whence you muſt empty it every day. It will run thus for ſome months, and then dry away, and the Tree will recover again. The Fruit-trees that nature hath beſtowed on theſe Illes are Mangoes ; and Trees bearing a ſort of Grape, and other Trees bearing a kind of wild or baſtard Nutmegs. Theſe all grow wild in the Woods, and in very great plenty. The Mangoes here grow on Trees as big as Ap- ple-trees? Thoſe at Fort St. George are not ſo large. The fruit of theſe is as big as a ſmall Peach ; but long and ſmaller towards the top? It is of a yellow- iſh colour when ripe; it is very juicy, and of a pleaſant ſmell, and delicate taſte. When the Mango is young, they cut them in two pieces, and pickle them with Salt and Vinegar, in which they put ſome Cloves and Garlick. This is an excellent fawce, and much eſteemed; it is called Mango Achar. Achar, I preſume, ſignifies Sawce. They make in the Eaſt Indies eſpecially at Siam and Pegu, ſeveral ſorts of Achar, is of the young tops of Bamboes, ÔC. Bambo- Achar, and Mango-Acbar are moſt uſed. The Mangoes were ripe when we were there, (as were alſo the reſt of theſe Fruits) and they have then ſo delicate a fragrancy, that we could ſmell them in the chick Woods, if we had but the wind of them, while we were a good way from them and could Сс 3 . of a រ 392 wild Grape tree. wild Nutmeg, An. 1687 could not ſee them: and we generally found them out this way, Mangoes are . Mangoes are common in many places of the Eaſt-Indies ; but I did never know any grow wild only at this place. Theſe, though not ſo big as thoſe I have ſeen at Achin and at Maderus, or Fort St. George, are yet every whit as pleaſant as the beſt fort of their Garden Mangoes. The Grape-tree grows with a ſtrait body, Diameter about a foot or more, and hath but few Limbs or Boughs. The Fruit grows in Cluſters, all about the body of the Tree, like the Jack, Du- rian, and Cacao Fruits. There are of them both red and white. They are much like ſuch Grapes as grow on our Vines, both in ſhape and colour, and they are of a very pleaſant Winy taſte. I never ſaw theſe but on the two biggeſt of theſe Iſlands the reſt had no Tar-trees, Mango's , Grape-trees, nor Wild Nutmegs. The Wild Nutmeg-tree is as big as a Walnut- but it does not ſpread ſo much. The Boughs are groſs, and the Fruit grows among the Boughs as the Wallnut, aad other Fruits. This Nutmeg is much ſmaller than the true Nutmeg, and longer alſo. It is incloſed with a thin Shell, and a ſort of Mace, encircling the Nut, within the Shell. This baſtard Nutmeg is ſo much like the true Nutmeg in ſhape, that at our firſt arrival here we thought it to be the true one ; but it has no manner of ſinell nor taſte. oro The Animals of theſe Iſlands are ſome Hogs, Li- zards, and Guanoes; and ſome of thoſe Creatures mentioned in Chap. XI, which are like, but much bigger than the Guano. Here are many ſorts of Birds, as Parrots, Para- kites, Doves and Pigeons, Here are alſo a ſort of wild Cocks and Hens : They are much like our tame Fowl of that kind ; but a great deal leſs: for they are about the bigneſs of a Crow. The Cocks do Crow tree ; of the Turtles moving from Sea to Sea. 393 crow like ours, but much more ſmall and ſhrill; and An. 1687 by their crowing we do firſt find them out in the Woods, where we ſhoot them. Their Fleſh is very white and ſweer. There are a great many Limepits,and Muſcles and plenty of green Turtle. And upon this mention of Turtle again, I think it not amiſs to add ſome reaſons to ſtrengthen the opinion that I have given concerning theſe Crea- tures removing from place to place. I have ſaid in Chapter sth. that they leave their common feeding places, and go to places a great way from thence to lay, as particularly to the Ifland Aſcention. Now I have diſcourſed with ſome ſince that ſubject was printed, who are of opinion, that when the lay- ing time is over, they never go from thence, but lye ſomewhere in the Sea about the Iſland, which, I think, is very improbable: For, there can be no Food for them there, as I could ſoon make appear; as particularly from hence, that the Sea about the Ine of Aſcention is ſo deep as to admit of no Anchor- ing but at one place, where there is no ſign of Graſs: And we never bring up with our ſounding Lead, any Graſs or Weeds out of the very deep Seas, but Sand or the like only. But if this be granted, that there is Food for them, yet I have a great deal of reaſon to believe that the Turtle go from hence; for after the laying time you ſhall never ſee them, and wherever Turtle are, you will ſee them riſe, and hold their Head above Water to breath, once in 7 or 8 minutes, or at longelt, in ro or 12. And any Man does but conſider, how Fiſh take their certain ſeaſons of the year, to go from one Sea to another, this would not ſeem ſtrange; even Fowls alſo having their ſeaſons to remove from one place to another. Theſe Illands are pretty well watered with ſmall Brooks of freſh Water, that run fluſh into the if Сс 4 រំ 394 The convenient site of Pulo Condore An. 1687 the Sea for 10 Months in the Years. The latte end of March they begin to dry away, and in April you ſhall have none in the Brooks, but what is lodged in deep holes; but you may dig Wells in ſome places. In May, when the Rain comes, the Land is again repleniſhed with Water and the Brooks run out into the Sea. Theſe Illands lye very commodiouſly in the way to and from Japan, China, Manila, Tunquin, Co- chinchina, and in general all this moft Eaſterly Coaſt of the Indian Continent; whether you go through the Streights of Malacca, or the Streights of Sunday, between Sumatra and fava; and one of them you muſt paſs in the common way from Eu- rope, or other parts of the Eaſt-Indies; unleſs you mean to ferch a great compaſs round moſt of the Eaſt- India Iſlands, as we did. Any Ship in diſtreſs may be refreſhed and recruited here very conve- niently; and beſides ordinary accommodations, be furniſhed with Mafts, Yards, Pitch and Tar. It might alſo be a convenient place to uſher in a Commerce with che Neighbouring Country of Cochinchina, and Forts might be built to ſecure a Fa. Etory; particularly at the Harbour, which is capable of being well fortified. This place therefore being upon all theſe accounts fo valuable,and withal ſo lit- tle known, I have here inſerted a draft of it, which I took during our ſtay there. The Inhabitants of this Iſland are by Nation Cochinchineſe, as they told us, for one of them ſpake good Malayon; which Language we learnt a ſmar- tering of, and ſome of us ſo as to ſpeak ic pretty well while we lay at Mindanao, and this is the com- mon Tongue of Trade and Commerce (though it bę not in ſeveral of them the Native Language) in moſt of the Eaſt-India Iſlands, being the Lingua Franca, as it were, of theſe parts, I believe 'tische vulgar Tongue at Malacca, Sumatra, Java, and Borneo j a ; The inhabitants. Proſtituting of women. 395 Borneo; but at Celebes the Philipine Iſland and the An. 1687 Spice Iands, it ſeems borrowed for the carrying of Trade. The Inhabitants of Pulo Condore are but a ſmall People in ftature, well enough ſhaped, and of a darker colour than the Midanayans. They are pretty long viſag'd; their Hair is black and ſtreight, their Eyes are but ſmall and black, their Noſes of a mean bigneſs and pretty high, their Lips thin, their Teeth white, and licele Mouths. They are very civil People, but extraordinary poor. Their chiefeſt employment is to draw the juice of thoſe Trees that I have deſcribed, to make Tar. They preſerve it in wooden Troughs, and when they have their Cargo they cranſport it to Cochinchina, their Mother Country. Some others of them em- ploy themſelves to catch Turtle, and boil up their Fatto Oil, which they alſo tranſport home. Theſe People have great large Nets, with wide maſhes to catch the Turtle. The famaica Turtlers have ſuch; and I did never ſee the like Nets but at famaica and here. They are ſo free of their Women, that they would bring them aboard, and offer them to us; and many of our Men hired them for a ſmall mat- ter. This is cuſtome a uſed by ſeveral Nations in the Eaſt-Indies; as at Pegu, Siam, Cochinchina, and Cambodia, as I have been told. It is uſed at Tunquin alſo to my knowledge, for I did afterward make a Voyage thither, and moſt of our Men had Women aboard, all the time of our abode there. In Africa alſo, on the Coaſt of Guinea, our Merchants, Fa- ctors, and Seamen that reſide there, have their black Miſſes. It is accounted a piece of policy to do it, for the chief Factors and Captains of Ships have the great Mens Daughters offer'd them, the Mandarins or Noblemens at Tunguin, and even the Kings Wives in Guinea, and by this ſort of Alliance the 396 An Idol Temple, Chineſe Idols. An 1687 the Country people are engaged to a greater friend- ſhip: And if there ſhould ariſe any difference about Trade, or any thing elſe, which might provoke the Natives to ſeek ſome treacherous revenge, (to which all theſe Heathen Nations are very prone) then theſe Dalilabs would certainly declare it to their white friends, and ſo hinder their Country- mens deſigns. Theſe People are Idolaters; but their manner of Worſhip I know not. There are a few ſcattering Houſes and Plantations on the great Iſland, and a ſmall Village on the South ſide of it; where there is a little Idol Temple, and an Image of an Ele- phant, about 5 foot high, and in bigneſs propor- tionable, placed on one ſide of the Temple; and a Horſe, not ſo big, placed on the other ſide of it; both ftanding with their Heads towards the South. The Temple it ſelf was low and ordinary, built of Wood, and thatched, like one of their Houſes ; which are but very meanly. The Images of the Horſe and the Elephant were the moſt general Idols that I obſerv'd in the Tem- ple of Tunguin, when I travelld there. There were other Images alſo, of Beaſts, Birds, and Fiſh : I I do not remember I ſaw any humane ſhape there; nor any ſuch monſtrous Repreſentations as I have ſeen among the Chineſe.Wherever the Chineſe Seamen or Merchants come (and they are very numerous all over the Seas) they have always hidious Idols on board their Jonks or Ships, with Altars, and Images burning before them. Theſe Idols they bring a- fhore with them: And beſides thoſe they have in common; every Man hath one in his own Houſe. Upon fome particular folemn days I have ſeen their Bonzies, or Prieſts, bring whole armfuls of painted Papers, and burn them with a great deal of Ceremony, being very careful to let no piece eſcape them. The ſame day they kill'd a Goat, which A Proceſſion of the Idolaters at Maderas. 397 which had been purpoſely fatting a month before: An. 1687 this they offer or preſent before their Idol, and then dreſs ir and feaſt themſelves with it. I have ſeen them do this in Tunquin, where I have at the ſame time been invited to their Feafts: and at Ban- couli, in the Iſle of Sumatra, they ſent a Shoulder of the Sacrific'd Goat to the Engliſh, who eat of it, and ask'd me to do ſo roo; but I refuſed. When I was at Maderas, or Fort St. George, I took notice of a great Ceremony uſed for ſeveral nights ſucceſſively by the Idolaters inhabiting the Suburbs: Both Men and Women (theſe very well clad) in a great multitude went in folemn Proceſſion with lighted Torches, carrying their Idols about with them. I knew not the meaning of it. I obſerv'd ſome went purpoſely carrying Oyl to ſprinkle into the Lamps, to make them burn the brighter. They began their round about in a clock at night, and having paced it gravely about the ſtreets till 2 or 3 a clock in the morning, their Idols were carry'd with much Ceremony into the Temple by the chief of the Proceffion, and ſome of the Women I ſaw enter the Temple, particularly. Their Idols were different from thoſe of Tunquin, Cambodia, &c. being in humane Shape. I have ſaid already that we arrived at theſe Iſands the 14th day of March 1687. The next day we ſearched about for a place ro careen in ; and the 16th day we entered the Harbour, and imme- diately provided to careen. Some Men were ſet to fell great Trees to faw into Plank ; others went to unrigging the Ship: ſome made a Houſe to put our Goods in, and for the Sailmaker to work in. The Country People reſorted to us, and brought us of the Fruits of the Iſland, with Hogs, and ſometimes Turtle ; for which they received Rice in exchange, which we had a Ship load of, taken at Manila. We bought of them alſo a good quantity of their picchy 398 2 Two Men poyſoned at Mindanoa dye here, An. 1687 pitchy Liquor, which we boyled , and uſed about our Ships bottom. We mixed it firſt with Lime, which we made here ; and it made an excellent coat, and fuck on very well. We ſtaid in this Harbour from the 16th day of March till the 16th day of April; in which time we made a new Suit of Sails of the Cloach that was taken in the Prize. Wecut a ſpare Main-top-maft, and fawed Plank to ſheath the Ships bottom; for ſhe was not ſheathed all over at Mindanoa, and that old Plank that was left on then we now ript off, and clapt on new. While we lay here 2 of our Men dyed; who were poyſoned at Mindanoa : they told us of it, when they found themſelves poyſon'd, and had lingred ever ſince. They were open'd by our Doctor, accord- ing to their own requeſt before they dyed, and their Livers were black, light and dry, like pieces of Cork. Our buſineſs being finiſhed here, we left the Spaniſh Prize taken at Manila, and moſt of the Rice, taking out enough for our felves: and on the 17th day we went from hence to the place where we firſt Anchored, on the North ſide of the great Illand, purpoſely to water; for there was a great Bream, when we firſt come to the Iſland, and we thought it was ſo now. But we found it dryed up, . only it ſtood in holes, 2 or 3 Hogſheads, or a Tun in a hole : Therefore we did immediately cut Bamboos , and made Spouts, through which we conveyed the Water down to the Sea-ſide ; by ta- king it up in Bowls, and pouring it into theſe Spouts or Troughs. We conveyed ſome of it thus near half a mile. While we were filling our Wa- ter, Captain Read engaged an old Man, one of the Inhabitants of this Iſand, the ſame, who, I ſaid, çould ſpeak the Malayan Language, to be his Pilot to the Bay of Siam: for he had often been telling us, a to eat. Pulo Uby. 399 us, that he was well acquainted there, and that he An.1687 knew ſome Iſlands there, where there were Fiſher- men lived, who he thought could ſupply us with Salt-fiſh to eat at Sea; for we had nothing but Rice The Eaſterly Monſoon was not yet done ; therefore it was concluded to ſpend ſome time there, and then take the advantage of the begin- ning of the Weſtern Monſoon, to return to Manila again. The 21ſt day of April 1689. we ſailed from Pu- lo Condore, directing our courſe W. by S. for the Bay of Siam. We had fair weather, and a fine moderate gale of Wind at E. N. E. The 23th day we arrived at Pulo Uby, or the Iſland Uby. This Iland is about 40 leagues to the Weſtward of Pulo Condore; it lies juſt at the en- trance of the Bay of Siam, and the S. W. point of Land, that makes the Bay; namely, the point of Cambodia. This Iand is about 7 or 8 leagues round, and it is higher Land than any of Pulo Condore Illes. Againſt the South Eaſt part of it there is a ſmall Key, about a Cables length from the main Iſland. This Pulo Uby is very woody, and it has good Water on the North ſide, where you may Anchor ; but the beſt Anchoring is on the Eaſt fide againſt a ſmall Bay ; then you will have the little Iſland to the Southward of you. At Pulo Uby we found two ſmall Barks laden with Rice. They belonged to Cambodia , from whence they came nor above two or three days before; and they touched here to fill Water. Rice is the general food of all theſe Countries, therefore it is tranſported by Sea from one Country to another, as Corn is in theſe parts of the World. For in ſome Countries they produce more than enough for themſelves, and ſend what they can ſpare to thoſe places where there is but little, The a 400 The Seamen of Champa. An.1687 The 24th day we went into the Bay of Siam : This is a large deep Bay, of which and of this Kingdom I ſhall at preſent ſpeak but little, becauſe 1 deſign a more particular account of all this Coaft, to wit , of Tunquin , Cochinchina , Siam, Champa, Cambodia, and Malacca, making all the moſt Eaſterly part of the Continent of Aſia, lying South of China ; but to do it in the courſe of this Voyage, would too much ſwell this Volume, and I ſhall chuſe therefore to give a ſeparate Relation of what I know or have learnt of them, together with the Neighbouring parts of Sumatra, Java, &c. where I have ſpent ſome time. We run down into the Bay of Siam, till we came to the Iſlands that our Pælo Condore Pilot told us of, which lye about the middle of the Bay ; but as good a Pilot as he was he run us aground; yet we had no damage. Captain Read went aſhore at there Iſlands, where he found a ſmall Town of Filhermen, but they had no Fiſh to ſell, and ſo we returned empty. We had yet fair weather and very little winds ſo that being often becalmed, we were till the 13th day of May before we got to Pulo vby again. There we found two ſmall Veſſels at an Anchor on the Eaſt ſide: They were laden wich Rice and Laquer, which is uſed in Japaning of Cabinets. One of theſe come from Champa, bound to the Town of Malacca , which belong to the Dutch, who took it from the Portugueſe : and this thews that they have a Trade with Champa. This was a very pretty neat Veffel, her bottom very clean and curiouſly coated, ſhe had about 40 Men all armed with Cortans, or broad Swords, Lances, and ſome Giins, that went with a ſwivel upon their Gun- nals. They were of the Idolaters, Natives of Cham. pa, and ſome of the briskeft, moſt ſociable, with- out fearfulneſs or ſhyneſs, and the moſt neat and dexterous S. A Fonk from Palimbam or Sumatra. 401 g dexterous about their Shipping, of any ſuch I A. 1687 have met with in all my Travels. The other Veſſel came from the River of Cambodia, and was bound towards the Streights of Malacca. Both of them ſtopt here, for the Weſterly winds now began to blow, which were againſt them, being fome- what belated. We Anchored alſo on the Eaſt fide, intending to fill Water. While we lay here we had very violent Winds S. W. and a ſtrong current ſetting right to Windward. The fiercer the Wind blew the more ſtrong the current ſet againſt it. This ſtorm lafted till the 20th day, and then it began to abate. The 21ſt day of May we went back from hence towards Pulo Condore. In our way we over- took a great Jonk that came from Palimbam, a Town on the Iſland Sumatra : She was full laden with Pepper which they bought there, and was bound to Siam: but it blowing ſo hard, ſhe was afraid to venture into that Bay, and therefore came to Pulo Condore with us, where we both an- chored May the 24th. This Veffel was of the Chineſe make, full of little Rooms or partitions like our Well-boats. I ſhall deſcribe them in the next Chapter. The Men of this Jonk told us, that the Engliſh were ſettled on the Iſland Samatra, at a place called Sillabar: and the firſt knowledge we had that the Engliſh had any ſettlement on Samatra was from theſe. When we came to an Anchor, we ſaw a ſmall Bark at an Anchor near the ſhore ; therefore Cap- tain Read ſent a Canoa aboard her, to know from whence they came ; and ſuppoſing that it was a Malaya Veſſel, he ordered the Men not to go aboard, for they are accounted deſperate fel- lows, and their Veſſels are commonly full of Men, who all wear Creſſers, or listle Daggers by their ſides. 402 A bloody Fray with a Malayan veſſel. An. 1687 fides. The Canoas crew, not minding the Capa tains orders, went aboard, all but one Man that Atay'd in the Canoa, The Malayans, who were about 20 of them, ſeeing our Men all armed, thought that they came to take their Veſſel: therefore at once, on a ſignal given, they drew out their Creſſers, and ſtabbed s or 6 of our Men before they new what the matter was. The reſt of our Men leapt over-board, ſome into the Canoa, and ſome into the Sea, and ſo got a- way. Among the reſt, one Daniel Wallis leapt into the Sea, who could never ſwim before nor fince: yet now he ſwam very well, a good while before he was taken up. When the Canoas came aboard, Captain Read manned two Canoas, and went to be revenged on the Malayans : but they ſeeing him coming, did cur a hole in their Vefleis bottom, and went aſhore in their Boat. Cap- tain Read followed them, but they run into the Woods and hid themſelves. Here we ſtayed ten or eleven days, for it blew very hard all the time. While we ſtayed here, Herman Coppin- ger our Surgeon went aſhore, intending to live here : But Captain Read ſent ſome Men, and fetcht him again. I had the ſame thoughts, and would have gone aſhore too, but waited for a more convenient place. For neither he nor 1, when we went laſt on board at Mindanao, had any knowledge of the Plot that was laid to leave Captain Sman, and run away with the Ship ; and being fufficiently weary of this mad Crew, we were willing to give them the ſlip at any place from whence we might hope to get a paſſage to an Engliſh Factory. There was nothing elſe of moment happened whilſt we ſtayed here, CHAP 403 An.1687 CHA P. XV. They leave Pulo Condore, deſigning for Mani- la, but are driven off from thence, and from the Iſle of Prata, by the winds, and brought upon the coaſt of China. iſle of St. John, on the coaſt of the Province of Canton; its ſoil and productions, China Hogs, &c. The Inhabitants; and of the Tartars forcing the Chineſe to cut off their Hair. Their Habits, and the little Feet of their women. China- ware, China-roots, Tea, &c. A Village at St. John's iſland, and of the Husbandry of their Rice, A ſtory of a Chineſe Pagoda, or Idol-Temple, and image. Of the China Fonks, and their Rigging. They leave St. John's and the coaſt of China. A moſt out- ragious Storm: Corpus Sant, a Light, or Meteor appearing in Storms. The Piſcadores, or Fiſhers iſlands near Formoſa : A Tarta- rian Garriſon, and Chineſe Town on one of theſe ipands. They anchor in the Harbour near the Tartars Garriſon, and treat with the Governor. Of Amoy in the Province of Fo- kieu, and Macao a Chineſe and Portugueſe Town near Canton in China. The Habits of a Tartarian Officer and his Retinue. Their preſents, excellent Beef. Samciu, a fort of Chineſe Arack, and Hocciu a kind of Chi- neſe Mum, and the Fars it is bottled in. of the Iſle of Formoſa, and the s Iſlands : to Ꭰd which 404 An. 1687 Their Departure from Pulo Condor. which they give the Names of Orange, Mon- mouth, Grafton, Baſhee , and Goat-iſlands, in general, the Balhee iſlands. A digreſſion concerning the different depths of the sea near high or low Lands. The soil, &c. as before. The soil, Fruits, and Animals of theſe iſlands: The inhabitants and their Cloathing. Rings of a yellow Metal like Gold. Their Houſes built on remarkable precipices. Their Boats and Employments. Their food, of Goat Skins, Entrails, &c. Parcht Locuſts. Baſhee, or Sugar-cane drink. Of their Language and Original, Launces and Buffaloe Coats. No Idols, nor Civil form of Government. young Man buried alive by them; ſisppoſed to be for Theft. Their wives and children, and Husbandry. Their Manners, Entertainments, and Traffick. Of the ships firſt Entercourſe of with theſe people, and bartering with them. Their Courſe among the iſlands; their ſtay there, and proviſion to depart . They are driven off by a violent Storm, and return. The Na- tives kindneſs to 6 of them left behind. The Crew diſcouraged by thoſe stormis, quit their deſign of Cruiſing of Manila for the Aca- pulco ship: and 'tis veſolved to fetch & Com- Pufs to Cape Comorin, and for the Red- Sea. A 1 Having fill'd our Water, cut our Wood, and got our Ship in a ſailing poſture, while the bluftring hard Winds lafted, we took the firſt op- portunity of a ſettled gale to fail towards Manila. Accordingly fune the 4th, 1687, we looſed from Pulo 3 Shoals of Pracelifles and Rocks of Prata. 405 Pulo Condore, with the Wind at S. W. fair weather An. 1687 at a brisk gale. The Pepper Jonk bound to Siam remained there, waiting for an Eaſterly wind ; buc one of his Men, a kind of a baſtard Portugueſe, came aboard our Ship, and was entertained for the ſake of his knowledge in the ſeveral Languages of theſe Countries. The Wind continued in the S. W. but 24 hours, or a little more, and then came about to the North, and then to the N. E. and the Sky became exceeding clear. Then the Wind came at Eaſt, and laſted betwixt E. and S. E. for 8 or 10 days. Yet we continued plying to Windward, ex- pečting every day a ſhift of Wind, becauſe theſe Winds were not according to the ſeaſon of the year. We were now afraid left the Currents might de- ceive us, and carry us on the ſhoals of Pracel, which were near us, a little to the N. W. but we paſſed on to the Eaſtward, without ſeeing any ſign of them; yet we were kept much to the Northward of our intended courſe and the Eaſterly Winds : ſtill continuing, we deſpaired of getting to Manila; and therefore began to project ſome new deſign; and the reſult was, to viſit the Iſland Prata, about the Lat. of 20 deg. 40 min. North; and not far from us at this time. It is a ſmall low Iſland, environed with Rocks clear round it, by report. It lyeth fo in the way between Manila and Canton, the head of a Province, and a Town of great crade in China, that the Chi- neſe do dread the Rocks about it, more than the Spaniards did formerly dread Bermudas : for many of their Jonks coming from Malina have been loft there, and with abundance of Treaſure in chem ; as we were informed by all the Spaniards that ever we converſt with in theſe parts. They told us al- ſo, that in theſe wrecks moſt of the Men were drowned, and that the Chineſe did never go thi- Dd 2 ther > 406 2 St. John's iſland on the coaf of China. 1n.1687 ther to take up any of the Treaſure that was loſt there, for fear of being loſt themſelves. But the danger of the place did not daunt us ; for we were reſolved to try our fortunes there, if the Winds would permit; and we did beat for it s or 6 days: but at laſt were forced to leave that deſign alſo tor want of Winds; for the S. E. Winds con- tinuing, forced us on the Coaſt of China. It was the 25th day of June when we made the Land; and running in towards the ſhore we came to an Anchor the ſame day, on the N. E. end of St. John's Iſland, This Iſland is in Lat, about 22d. 30 min. North, lying on the S. Coaſt of the Province of Quantung or Canton in China. It is of an indifferent heighth, and pretty plain, and the Soil fertile enough. It is partly woody, partly Savannahs or Paſturage for Cattle; and there is ſome moiſt arable Land for Rice. The skirts or outer part of the Iſand, eſpe- cially that part of it which borders on the main Sea, is woody? The middle part of it is good thick graffy Paſture, with ſome groves of Trees; and that which is cultivated Land is low wet Land, yielding plentiful Crops of Rice; the only grain that I did ſee here. The tame Cattle which this Iſland affords, are China Hogs, Goats, Buffaloes, and ſome Bullocks. The Hogs of this Ifland are all black ; they but ſmall Heads, very ſhore thick Necks, great Bellies, commonly touching the ground, and ſhort Legs. They eat but little food, yet they are moſt of them very fat; probably be- cauſe they ſleep much. The tame Fowls are Ducks, and Cocks and Hens. I ſaw no wild Fowl but a few ſmall Birds. The Natives of this Iſland are Chineſe. They are ſubject to the Crown of China, and conſequently at this time to the Tartars. The Chineſe in general are call, ſtrait-bodied, Raw-boned Men. They are The Chineſe compelled to cut their Hair. 407 are long Viſaged, and their Foreheads are high; An. 1687 but they have little Eyes. Their Noſes are pretty large, with a riſing in the middle. Their Mouths are of a mean fize, pretty thin Lips. They are of an aſhy complexion; their Hair is black, and their Beards thin and long, for they pluck the hair out by the roots, ſuffering only fome few very long ftraggling Hairs to grow about their Chin, in which they take great pride, often combing them, and ſometimes tying them up in a knot, and they have ſuch Hairs too growing down from each fide of their upper Lip like Whiskers. The ancient Chineſe were very proud of the Hair of their Heads, letting it grow very long, and ſtroking it back with their Hands curiouſly, and then winding the plats all together round a Bodkin, thruſt through it at the hinder part of the Head; and both Men and Women did thus. But when the Tartars con- quer'd them, they broke them of this cuſtom they were fond of, by main force; inſomuch that they reſented this impoſition worſe than their ſubjecti- on, and rebelled upon it: but being ſtill worſted, were forc'd to acquieſce; and to this day they follow the faſhion of their Maſters the Tartars, and fhave all their Heads,only reſerving one Lock; which ſome tye up, others let it hang down to a great or ſmall length as they pleaſe. The Chineſe in other Countries ſtill keep their old cuſtom, but if any of the Chineſe is found wearing long Hair in China, he forfeits his Head; and many of them have abandoned their Country to preſerve their liberty of wearing their Hair, as I have been told by themſelves. The Chineſe have no Hars, Caps, or Turbans ; but when they walk abroad, they carry a ſmall Umbrello in their hands, where with they fence their heads from the Sun or the Rain, by holding it over their heads. If they walk but a little way, they Dd 3 408 The Chineſe womens little Feet. n.1687 they carry only a large Fan made of Paper, or Silk, of the ſame faſhion as thoſe our Ladies have, and many of them are brought over hither: one of theſe every Man carries in his hand if, he do but croſs the ſtreet, skreening his head with, it if he hath not an Umbrello with him. The common apparrel of the Men, is a looſe Frock and Breeches. They ſeldom wear Stock- ings, but they have Shoes, for a ſort of Slippers ra- ther. The Mens Shoes are made diverfly: The Women have very ſmall Feet, and conſequently but little Shoes; for from their Infancy their Feet are kept ſwathed up with bands , as hard as they can poſſibly endure them; and from the time they can go till they have done growing they bind them up every night. This they do purpoſely to hin- der them from growing, eſteeming little Feet to be a great Beauty. But by this unreaſonable cuſtom they do in a manner loſe the uſe of their Feet, and inſtead of going they only ſtumble about their Houſes, and preſently ſquat down on their Breeches again, being, as it were con- fined to fitting all days of their lives. They ſel- dom ftir abroad, and one would be apt to think, that, as ſome have conjectured, their keeping up their fondneſs for this faſhion were a fratagem of the mens, to keep them from gadding and goſſip- ping about, and confine them at home. They are kept conſtantly to their work, being fine Needle- Women, and making many curious Embroideries, and they make their own Shoes: but if any Stran- ger be deſirous to bring away any for Novelty's ſake, he muſt be a great Favourite to get a pair of Shoes of them, tho he give twice their value. The poorer ſort of Women trudge abour ſtreets, and to the Market, without Shoes or Stockings : and theſe cannot afford to have little Feet, being to get their living with them. The 1 ton. China ware. China Root. Tea. 409 The Chineſe, both Men and Women, are very in- An. 1687 genious; as may appear by the many curious things that are brought from thence, eſpecially the Porcea Laine or China Earthen Ware. The Spaniards of Manila, that we took on the Coaſt of Laconia, told me, that this Commodity is made of Conch-ſhells; the inſide of which looks like Mother of Pearl. Bue the Portugueſe lately mentioned, who had lived in China , and ſpoke that and the Neighbouring Lan- guages very well, ſaid, that is was made of a fine ſort of Clay that was dug in the Province of Can- I have often made enquiry about it, but could never be well fatisfied in it: but while I was on the Coaſt of Canton I forgot to enquire about it. They make very fine Lacquer Ware alſo, and good Silks ; and they are curious at Painting and Carving. China affords Drugs in great abundance, eſpeci- ally China Root; but this is not peculiar to that Country alone ; for there is much of this Root growing in Jamaica , particularly at 16 mile walk; and in the Bay of Handuras it is very plentiful. There is a great ſtore of Sugar made in this Coun- try; and Tea in abundance is brought from theice; being much uſed there, and in Tunquin and Cocbin- china as common drinking; Women ſitting in the Streets, and ſelling Diſhes of Tea hot and ready made: they callit Chau, and even the pooreſt People ſip it. But the Tea at Tunquin or Cochinchina ſeems not ſo good, or of fo pleaſant a bitter, or of fo fine a colour, or ſuch virtue as this in China; for ! have drank of it in theſe Countries: unleſs the fault be in their way of making it, for I made none there my felf: and by the high red colour it looks as if they made a Decoction ofit, or kept it ftale. Yet at fapan I was told there is a great deal of pure Tea, very good. The Chineſe are very great Gameſters, and they will never be tired with it, playing night and day, till Dd4 a 410 The Produkt and inhabitants of St. Johns. An. 1687 till they have loſt all their Eſtates; then it is uſu- al with them to hang themſelves. This was fre quently done by the Chineſe Factor at Manlia, as I was told by Spaniards that lived there. The Spani- ards themſelves are much addicted to gaming, and are very expert at it; but the Chineſe are too ſubile for them, being in general a very cunning people. But a particular account of them and their Country would fill a Volumn; nor doth my ſhore experience of them qualify me to ſay much of them. Wherefore to confine my ſelf chiefly to what I obſerv'd at St. John's Iſland, where we lay ſome time, and viſited the ſhore every day to buy Proviſion, as Hogs, Fowl, and Buffaloe. Here was a ſmall Town ſtanding in a wet ſwampy ground, with many filthy Ponds amongſt the Houſes, which were built on the ground as ours are, not on poſts as at Mindanao. In theſe Ponds were plenty of Ducks; the Houſes were ſmall and low, and covered with Thatch, and the inſide were but ill furniſhed, and kept naftily: and I have been told by one who was there, that moſt of the Houſes in the City of Canton it ſelfare but poor and irregular. The Inhabitants of this Village ſeem to be moſt Husbandmen: They were at this time very buſy in Sowing their Rice, which is their chiefeſt Com- modity. The Land in which they chooſe to Sow the Rice is low and wer, and when Plowed, the Earth was like a maſs of Mud. They plow their Land with a ſmall Plow, drawn by one Buffaloe, and one man both holds the Plow, and drives the Beaft. When the Rice is ripe and gathered in, they tread it out of the Ear with Buffaloes, in a large round place made with a hard floor fic for that purpoſe, where they chain 3 or 4 of theſe Beaſts, one at the tale of the other, and driving them round in a ring, as in a Horſe-rnill, they ſo order it a a a a A Chineſe Idol Temple and Image. 411 it that the Buffaloes may tread upon it all. An 1687 I was once aſhore at this Iſland, with 7 or 8 En- gliſh Men more, and having occaſion to ſtay fome time, we killed a ſmall Shore, or young Porker, and roaſted it for our Dinners. While we were buſy dreſſing of our Pork, one of the Natives came and ſat down by us, and when our Dinner was ready, we cut a good piece and gave it him, which he willingly received. But by figns he begged more, and withal pointed into the Woods : yet we did not underſtand his meaning, nor much mind him, till our Hunger was pretty well afſwaged ; although he did ftill make ſigns, and walking a little way from us, he beckoned to us to come to him; which at laſt I did, and 2 or 3 more. He going before, led the way in a ſmall blind path, through a thicker, into a ſmall grove of Trees, in which there was an old Idol Temple about so foot ſquare: The Walls of it were about 9 foot high, and two foot thick, made of Bricks. The floor was paved with broad Bricks, and in the middle of the floor ſtood an old ruſty Iron Bell on its brims. This Bell was about two foot high, ſtanding flat on the ground; the brims on which it ſtood were about 16 inches diameter. From the brims it did taper away a litele towards the head, much like our Bells; but that the brims did not turn out ſo much as ours do. On the head of the Bell there were 3 Iron bars as big as a Mans Arm, and about to inches long from the top of the Bell, where the ends join'd as in a center, and ſeemed of one Maſs with the Bell, as if caſt toge- ther. Theſe bars ſtood all parallel to the ground, and their further ends, which ſtood triangularly and opening from each other at equal diſtances, like the flyers of our Kitchen Jacks, were made exactly in the ſhape of the paw of ſome mon- ftrous Beaſt, having ſharp claws on it. This ic ſeems was their God : for as ſoon as our zealous Guide 2 > 412 China Fonks, like well-boats, A1.1687 Guide came before the Bell, he fell flat on his face, and beck'ned to us, ſeeming very deſirous to have us do the like. At the inner fide of the Temple againſt the Walls, there was an Altar of white hewn Stone. The Table of the Altar was about three foot long, 16 inches broad, and 3 inches thick. It was raiſed about two foot from the ground, and ſupported by 3 ſmall Pillars of the ſame white Stone. On this Altar there were ſeveral ſmall Earthen Veflels; one of them was full of ſmall fticks that had been burned at one end. Our Guide made a great many ſigns for us to fetch and to leave ſome of our meat there, and ſeemed very importunate , but we refuſed. We left him there, and went aboard; I did ſee no other Tem- ple nor Idol here. While we lay at this place, we ſaw ſeveral ſmall China Jonks, ſailing in the Lagane between the Iſlands and the Main, one came and Anchored by us. I and ſome more of our Men went aboard to view her: She was built with a ſquare flat Head as well as Stern, only the head or fore part was not ſo broad as the Stern. On her Deck ſhe had little tharche Houſes like Hovels, covered with Palmeto Leaves, and raiſed about 3 foot high, for the Sea- men to creep into. She had a pretty large Cabin, wherein there was an Alcar and a Lamp burning, I did but juſt look in, and ſaw not the Idol. The Hold was divided in many ſmall particions, all of them made fo tighe , that if a leak ſhould ſpring up in any one of them, it could go no farther, and fo could do but liccle damage, but only to the Goods in the bottom of that room where the leak ſprings up. Each of theſe rooms belong to one or {wo Merchants, or more, and every Man freights his Goods in his own room ; and probably lodges there, if he be on board himſelf. Theſe Jonks have only cwo Mafts, a Main-maſt and a Fore maſt. The Fore- a Great Mafts. They leave China. 413 Fore.maft has a ſquare Yard and a ſquare Sail, but An. 1687 the Main-maſt has a Sail narrow aloft, like a Sloops Sail, and in fair weather they uſe a Top fail, which is to hale down on the Deck in foul weather, Yard and all ; for they do not go up to furl it. The Main-maft in their biggeſt Jonks ſeemed to me as big as any third rate Man of Wars Maſt in England, and yet not pieced as ours, but made of one grown Tree: and in all my Travels I never ſaw any ſingle Tree-Mafts fo big in the body, and ſo long, and yet ſo well tapered, as I have ſeen in the Chineſe Jonks. Some of our Men went over to a pretty large Town on the Continent of China, where we might haye furniſhed our felves with Proviſion, which was a thing we were always in want of, and was our chief buſineſs here : but we were afraid to lye in this place any longer, for we had ſome ſigns of an approaching Storm; this being the time of the year in which Storms are expected on this Coaſt and here was no ſafe Riding. It was now the time of the year for the S. W. Mon-loon, but the Wind had been whiffling about from one part of the Compaſs to another for cwo or three days, and ſometimes it would be quite calm. This cauſed us to put to Sea, that we might have Sea-room at leaſt, for ſuch flattering weather is commonly the fore-runner of a Tempeft. Accordingly we weighed Anchor, and ſet out: yet we had very little Wind all the next night. But the day enſuing, which was the 4th day of July, about 4 a clock in the afternoon, the Wind came to the N. E. and freſh'ned upon us, and the Sky look'd very black in that quarter, and the black clouds began to riſe apace and move towards us; having hung all the morning in the Horizon. This made us take in our Top-fails, and the Wind ſtill increa ſing, about 9 a clock we rift our Main fail and Fore. fail : 3 414 A moſt dreadful Storm, Corpus Sant. An. 1687 fail; at 10 we furl'd our Fore fail, keeping under a Main-failand Mizen. At 11 a clock we furld our Main-fail, and ballafted our Mizen: at which time it began to rain, and by 12 a clock at night it blew exceeding hard, and the Rain poured down as through a Sieve. It thundered and lightned pro- digiouſly, and the Sea feemed all of a Fire about us : for every Sea that broke ſparkled like Ligh- ning. The violent Wind raiſed the Sea preſently to a great heighth, and it ran very ſhort, and be gan to break in on our Deck. One Sea ſtruck a- way the Rails of our Head, and our Sheet Anchor, which was ſtowed with one Flock or bending of the Iron, over the Ships Gunal, and laſht very well down to the ſide, was violently waſht off, and had like to have ſtruck a hole in our Bow, as it lay beating againſt it. Then we were forced to put right before the Wind to ſtow our Anchor again : which we did with much ado: but afterwards we durft not adventure to bring our Ship to the wind again, for fear of foundring, for the turning the Ship either to or from the Wind is dangerous in ſuch violent Storms. The fierceneſs of the weather con- tinued till four a clock that morning; in which time we did cut away two Canoas that were towing aftern. After four a clock the Thunder and the Rain abated, and then we ſaw a Corpus Sant at our Main- top-maft head, on the very top of the truck of cho Spindle. This ſight rejoyed our Men exceedingly, for the height of the Storm is commonly over when the Corpus Sant is ſeen aloft ; but when they are leen lying on the Deck, it is generally accounted a bad ſign. A Corpus Sant is a certain ſmall glittering light:when it appears as this did, on the very top of the Main- mait or at a Yard-arm, it is like a Star; but when it appears on the Deck, it reſembles a great Glow- 2 worm. A Storm. 415 worm. The Spaniards have another Name for it, An.1687 though I take even this to be a Spaniſh or Portugueſe Name, and a corruption only of Corpus Sanctum ) and I have been told that when they ſee them, they preſently go to Prayers, and bleſs themſelves for the happy fight. I have heard ſome ignorant Sea- men diſcourſing how they have ſeen them creep, or as they ſay, travel about in the Scuppers, telling many diſmal ſtories that hapned at ſuch times : but I did never ſee any one ftir out of the place where it firſt was fixt, except upon Deck, where every Sea waſheth it about. Neither did I ever ſee any, but when we have had hard rain as well as wind; and therefore do believe it is ſome Jelly: buc enough of this. We continued ſcudding right before wind and ſea from 2 till 7 a clock in the morning, and then the wind being much abated, we ſet our Mizen again, and brought our Ship to the wind, and lay under a Mizen till 11. Then it fell flat calm, and it continued ſo for about 2 hours : but the Sky looked very black and rueful, eſpecially in the S. W. and the Sea toſſed us about like an Egg-ſhell, for want of wind. About one a clock in the after- noon the wind ſprung up at S. W. out of the quar- ter from whence we did expect it: therefore, we preſently brail'd up our Mizen, and wore our Ship: but we had no ſooner put our Ship before the wind, but it blew a Storm again, and it rain'd very hard; though not fo violently as the night before : but the wind was altogether as boyſterous, and ſo continued till 10 or in a clock at night. All which time we ſcudded, or run before the wind very ſwift, tho only with our bare Poles, that is, with- out any Sail abroad. Afterwards the Wind died away by degrees, and before day we had but little wind, and fine clear weather, a 416 The Piſcador Iſlands near Formoſa. A2.1687 I was never in ſuch a violent Storm in all my life ſo ſaid all the company. This was near the change of the Moon : it was 2 or 3 days before the change. The 6th day in the morning, having fine handſome weather, we got up our Yards again, and began to dry our ſelves and our cloaths, for we were all well fopt. This Storm had deadned the hearts of our Men ſo much, that inſtead of going to buy more Proviſion at the ſame place from whence we came before the Storm , or of ſeeking any more for the Inand Prata , they thought of going ſomewhere to ſhelter before the Full Moon, for fear of another luch Storm at that time : For commonly, if there is any very bad weather in the month, it is about 2 or 3 days before or after the Full, or Change of the Moon. Theſe thoughts, I ſay, put our Men on thinking where to go, and the Drafts or Sea-plats being firft conſulted, it was concluded to go to certain Iſlands lying in lat. 23 d. N. called Piſcadores. For there was not a Man aboard that was any thing acquaint- ed on theſe Coaſts; and therefore all our depen- dance was on the Drafts, which only pointed out to us where ſuch and ſuch Places or Iſlands were, without giving us any account, what Harbour, Roads, or Bays there were; or the produce, ftrength, or trade of them : theſe we were forced to ſeek after our ſelves, The Piſcadores are a great many inhabited Iſlands, lying near the Iſland Formoſa, between it and China, in or near the lat. of 23 deg. N. lat. almoſt as high as the Tropick of Cancer. Theſe Piſc adore Iſlands are moderately high, and appear much like our Dorſet. Mire and Wiltſhire Downs in England. They produce chick ſhort Graſs, and a few Trees. They are pretty well watered, and they feed abundance of Goats, and ſome great Cattle. There are abun- dance of Mounts and old Fortifications on them. bus a a A Tartar Garriſon at the Piſcadores. 417 but of no uſe now, whatever they have been. An. 1687 Between the 2 Eaſtermoſt Iſlands there is a very good Harbour, which is never without Jonks ri- ding in it: and on the Weſt ſide of the Eaſternmoſt Mand there is a large Town and Fort commanding the Harbour. The Houſes are but low, yet well built: and the Town makes a fine proſpect. This is a Garriſon of the Tartars, wherein are alſo 3 or 400 Soldiers; who live here 3 years, and then they are removed to ſome other place. On the Iſland, on the Weſt ſide of the Harbour, cloſe by the Sea, there is a ſmall Town of Chineſe, and moſt of the other Illands have ſome Chineſe li- ving on them, more or leſs. Having as I ſaid before, concluded to go to theſe Iſlands, we ſteered away for them, having the Wind at W. S. W. a ſmall gale. The 20th day of July we had firſt fight of them, and ſteered in among them ; finding no place to Anchor in till we came into the Harbour before-mentioned. We blundered in, knowing little of our way, and we ad- mired to ſee ſo many Jonks going and coming, and ſome at an Anchor, and ſo great a Town as the Neighbouring Eaſtermoft Town, the Tartarian Garriſon; for we did not expect, nor deſire, to have ſeen any people, being in care to lye conceald in theſe Seas, however, ſeeing we were here, we boldly run into the Harbour, and preſently fenc aſhore our Canoa to the Town. Our people were met by an Officer at their landing, and our Quarter-maſter, who was the chiefeſt Man in the Boat, was conducted before the Governour and examined, of what Nation we were, and what was our buſineſs here. He an- ſwered that we were Engliſh, and were bound to Amoy, or Anhay, which is a City ſtanding on a Na- vigable River in the Province of Fokien in China, and is a place of vaſt Trade, there being a huge multi- rude 418 Cities of Amoy and Macao in China, An.1687 titude of Ships there, and in general on all theſe Coafts, as I have heard of ſeveral that have been there. He ſaid alſo, that having received fome damage by a ſtorm, we therefore put in bere to refit, before we would adventure to go farther; and that we did intend to lye here till after the full Moon, for fear of another ſtorm. The Go- vernour told him, that we might better refit our Ship at Amoy than here, and that he heard that (wo Engliſh Veſſels were arrived there already; and that he ſhould be very ready to aſſiſt us in any thing, but we muſt not expect to Trade there, but muſt go to the places allowed to entertain Merchant Strangers, which were Amoy and Macao. Macao is a Town of great Trade alſo, lying in an Island at the very mouth of the River of Canto%. 'Tis fortified and garriſoned by a large Portugueſe Colony, but yet under the Chineſe Governour, whoſe people inhabit one moyety of the Town, and lay on the Portugueſe what Tax they pleale ; for they dare not diſoblige the Chineſe, for fear of loſing their Trade. However, the Governour very kindly told our Quarter-maſter, that whatſoever we wanted, if that place could furniſh us, we ſhould have it. Yet that we muſt not come aſhore on that Illand, but he would ſend aboard ſome of his Men, to know what we wanted, and they ſhould alſo bring it off to us. That nevertheleſs we might go on ſhore on the other Iſlands to buy refreſhments of the Chineſe. After the diſcourſe was ended, the Governour diſmiſt him, with a ſmall jar of Flower, and 3 or 4 large Cakes of very fine Eread, and about a dozen Pine-apples and Water-melons, ( all very good in their kind) as a Preſent to the Captain. The next day an eminent Officer came aboard, with a great many Attendants. He wore a black Silk Cap of a particular make, with a plume of black Sam Shu and Hoc Shu, Chineſe Liquorsa 419 black and white Feathers, ſtanding up almoſt An. 1687 round his head behind, and all his outſide Cloaths were black Silk. He had a looſe black Coar, which reached to his Knees, and his Breeches were of the ſame ; and underneath his Coat he had two Garments more, of other coloured Silk. His Legs were covered with ſmall black limber Boots. All his Attendants were in a very handſom garb of black Silk, all wearing thoſe ſmall black Boots and Caps. Theſe Gaps were like the Crown of a Hat made of Palmeto-leaves, like our Straw-hats; but without brims, and coming down but to their Ears. Theſe had no Feathers, but had an oblong Button on the top, and from between the Button and the Cap, there fell down all round their Head as low as the Cap reached , a ſort of courſe Hair like Horſe-hair, dyed (as I ſuppoſe ) of a light red colour. The Officer brought aboard, as a preſent from the Governour, a young Heifer, the fatteſt and a kindlieft Beef, that I did ever taſte in any foreign Country: 'Twas ſmall yet full grown ; two large Hogs, 4 Goats, 2 Baskets of fine Flower, 20 great flat Cakes of fine well taſted Bread , 2 great Jars of Arack, (made of Rice as I judged) called by the Chineſe, Sam Sou; and 55 Jars of Hog Shu, as they call it, and our Europeans from them. This is a ſtrong Liquor, made of Wheat as I have been told. It looks like Mum, and taſtes much like it, and is very pleaſant and hearty. Our Seamen love it mightily,and will lick their Lips with it: for ſcarce a Ship goes to China, but the Men come home fat with ſoaking this Liquor, and bring ſtore of Jars of it home with them. It is put into ſinall white thick Jars, that hold near a quart: The double Jars hold about two quarts. Theſe Jars are ſmall below, and thence riſe up with a pretty full belly, cloſing in pretty Mort at top, with a ſmall thick mouth, Over Ee the 420 They leave the Pilcadores. 4n.1687 the mouth of the Jar they put a thin chip cuc round, juſt ſo as to cover the mouth, over that a piece of paper , and over that they put a great Jump of clay, almoſt as big as the Bottle or Jar ie ſelf, with a hollow in it, to admit the neck of the Bortle, made round and about four inches long; this is to preſerve the Liquor. If the Liquor cake any vent it will be fowre preſently, ſo that when we buy any of it, of the Ships from China returning to Maderas, or Fort St. George, where it is then fold, or of the Chineſe themſelves, of whom I have bought it at Achin, and Bancouli in Sumatra , if the clay be crackt, or the Liquor mothery, we make them take it again. A quart Jar there is worth Sixpence, Be- fides this preſent from the Governour, there was a Captain of a Jonk ſent two Jars of Arack, and abundance of Pine-apples, and Water-melons. Captain Read ſent alhore, as a Preſent to the Governour, a curious Spaniſh Silver-hilted Rapier, an Engliſis Carbine, and a Gold Chain, and when the Officer went aſhore, three Guns were fired. In the afternoon the Governour fent off the ſame Officer again, to complement the Captain for his civility, and promiſed to retaliate his kindneſs before we departed ; but we had ſuch bluftring weather afterward, that no Boat could come a. board. We ſtayed here till the 29th day, and then failed from hence with the wind at S. W. and pretty fair weather. We now directed our courſe for fome Illands we had choſen to go to, that lye be- tween Formofa and Luconia. They are laid down in our plots without any name, only with a figure of s, denoting the number of them. It was ſup- poſed by us, that theſe Iſlands had no Inhabitants, becauſe they had not any name, by our Hydogra- phers. Therefore we thought to lye there ſecure, and be pretty near the Iſland Luconis , which we did till intend to viſit, In 421 Iſle of Formoſa. Orange iſland. In going to them we failed by the South Weſt An. 1687 end of Formoſa, leaving it on our larboard ſide. This is a large Iſland, the South end is in lat. 21. d.20 m. and the North end in 25 d. įo. m. North lat. the longitude of this Ille is laid down from 142. d. 5. m. to 143 d. 16 m. reckoning Eaſt from the pike of Tenariff; ſo that 'tis but narrow ; and the Tropick of Cancer croſſes it. It is a high and woody Iſland, and was formerly well inhabited by the Chineſe, and was then frequently viſited by Engliſh Mer- chants, there being a very good Harbour to ſecure their Ships. But fince the Tartars have conquered China, they have ſpoiled the Harbour, ( as I have been informed to hinder the Chineſe that were then in Rebellion, from fortifying themſelves there ; and ordered the foreign Merchants to come and trade on the Main. The 6th day of Auguſt we arrived at the five Iſlands that we were bound to, and Anchored on the Eaſt ſide of the Northermoſt Iſland, in 15 fa- thom, a Cables length from the ſhore. Here, con- trary to our expectation, we found abundance of Inhabitants in fight; for there were 3 large Towns all within a league of the Sea, and another larger Town than any of the three, on the back ſide of a ſmall hill cloſe by alſo, as we found afterwards. Theſe Iſlands lye in lat. 20 d. 20 m. North lat. by my obſervation, for I took it there, and I find their Longitude according to our Drafts, to be 141 d. som. Theſe Iſlands having no particular Names in the Drafts, ſome or other of us made uſe of the Seamens priviledge, to give them what names we pleaſed. Three of the Iſands were pretty large ; the Weſterinoſt is the biggeſt. This the Dutch Men who were among us called the Prince of Orange's Iſland, in honour of his preſent Ma- jeſty. It is about 7 or 8 leagues long, and abouc 3 leagues wide ; and it lies almoſt N. and S. Еe 2 The 422 Grafton, Monmouth, Baſhee, Goat ifles. An.1687 The other two great Iſlands are about 4 or s leagues to the Eaſtward of this. The Northermoſt of them, where we firſt Anchored, I call the Duck of Grafton's Iſle, as ſoon as we landed on it: ha- ving married my Wife out of his Dutcheſs's Fami- ly, and leaving her at Arlington houſe, at my going abroad. This Ifle is about 4 leagues long, and one league and a half wide, ftretching North and South. The other great Iſle our Seamen called the Duke of Monmouth's Iſland. This is about a league to the Southward of Grafton Iſle. It is about 3 leagues long, and a league wide , lying as the other. Between Monmouth and the South end of Orange Iſland, there are two ſmall Iſlands of a roundiſh form, lying Eaſt and Weſt. The Eaſter- moſt Iſland of the two , our Men unanimouſly called Baſhee Iſland, from a Liquor which we drank there plentifully every day, after we came to an Anchor at it. The other which is the ſmalleſt of all, we called Goat Iſland, from the great number of Goats there: and to the Northward of them all, are two high Rocks. Orange Iſland, which is the biggeſt of them all, is not inhabited. It is high Land, flat , and even on the top, with ſteep cliffs againſt the Sea: for which reaſon we could not go aſhore there, as we did on all the reſt. I have made it my general obſervation, that where the Land is fenced with ſteep Rocks and Cliffs againſt the Sea, there the Sea is very deep, and feldom affords Anchor ground; and on the other ſide where the Land falls away with a de- clivity into the Sea, (altho the Land be extraordi- nary high within, yet) there are commonly good ſoundings, and conſequently Anchoring; and as the viſible declivity of the Land appears near , or at the edge of the Water, whether pretty feep, or more floping, ſo we commonly find our Anchor ground j a Deep Seas near high Lands, 423 ground to be, more or leſs deep or ſteep; there. An. 1687 fore we come nearer the ſhore, or Anchor farther off, as we ſee convenient; for there is no Coaſt in the World, that I know, or have heard of, where the Land is of a continual heighth, without r fome ſmall Valleys or declivities, which lye inter- mixt with the high Land. They are theſe ſubfi- dings of Valleys or low Lands, that make dents in the thore, and Creeks, ſmall Bays, and Harbours, or little Coves, óc. which afford good Anchoring, the ſurface of the Earth being there lodged deep under Water. Thus we find many good Harbours on ſuch Coaſts, where the Land bounds the Sea with ſteep Cliffs, by reaſon of the Declivities, or ſubſiding of the Land between theſe Cliffs: But where the Declenſion from the Hills, or Cliffs, is not within Land between Hill and Hill, but, as on the Coaſt of Chili and Pers, the Declivity is to- ward the Main Sea, or into it, the Coaſt being perpendicular, or very ſteep from the neighbouring Hills, as in thoſe Countries from the Andes, that run along the ſhore, there is a deep Sea, and few or no Harbours, or Creeks. All that Coaſt is too ſteep for Anchoring, and hath the feweſt Roads fit for Ships of any Coaſt I know. The Coaſts of Gallicia, Portugal, Norway, and Newfoundland, óc. are Coaſts like the Peruvian, and the high Iſlands of the Archipelago; but yet not ſo i cany of good Harbours: for where there are ſhort judges of Land, there are good Bays at the extremities of thoſe Ridges, where they plunge into the Sea ; as on the Coaſt of Caraccos, O C. The Illand of John Fernando, and the Iſland St. Helena , 6c. are iuch high Land with deep fhore : and in general, the plunging of any Land under Water, ſeems to be in proportion to the riſing of its continuous part above Water, more or leſs ſteep: and it must be a bottom almoſt level, or very gently declining, 9 that E e 3 3 424 High Shores and deep Seas. 1.1 687 that affords good anchoring, Ships being ſoon driven from their Moorings on a ſteep bank : a Therefore we never ftrive to Anchor where we ſee the Land high, and bounding the Sea with ſteep Cliffs; and for this reaſon, when we came in ſight of States Iſland near Terra del Fuego, before we entered into the South Seas, we did not ſo much as think of Anchoring after we ſaw what Land it was, becauſe of the ſteep Cliffs which appear'd a- gainſt the Sea: Yer there might be little Harbours or Coves for Shallops, or the like, to Anchor in, which we did not ſee nor ſearch after. As high ſteep Cliffs bounding on the Sea have this ill conſequence, that they ſeldom afford an- choring ; ſo they have this benefit, thac we can ſee them far off, and fail cloſe to them, without dan- ger : for which reaſon we call them Bold Shores. Whereas low Land, on the contrary, is ſeen but a little way, and in many places we dare not come near it, for fear of running aground before we fee it. Beſides, there are in many places ſhoals thrown out by the courſe of great Rivers, that from the low Land fall into the Sea. This which I have ſaid, that there is uſually good Anchoring near low Lands, may be illuſtra- ted by ſeveral inſtances. Thus on the South ſide of the Bay of Campeachy, there is moftly low Land, and there alſo is good Anchoring all along aſhore; and in ſome places to the Eaſtward of the Town of Campeachy, we ſhall have ſo many fathom as we are leagues off from Land; that is, from 9 or 10 leagues diſtance, till you come within 4 leagues : and from thence to Land it grows but ſhallower. The Bay of Honduras alſo is low Land, and con- tinues moftly ſo, as we paſt along from thence to the Coaſts of Portobel, and Cartagena , till we came as high as Santa Martha; afterwards the Land is law again, till you come towards the Coaſt of Caracços, 18 Low shore, and ſhallow seas. 425 Caraccos, which is a high Coaſt and bold ſhore. An. 1687 The Land about Surinam on the ſame Coaſt is low and good Anchoring, and that over on the Coaſt of Guinea is ſuch alſo. And ſuch too is the Bay of Panama, where the Piloc book orders the Pilot always to ſound, and not to come within ſuch a depth, be it by night or day. In the fame Seas, from the high Land of Guatim ala in Mexico, to California, there is moſtly low Land and good an- choring. In the Main of Aſia, the Coaſt of China, the Bays of Siam and Bengal , and all the Coaſt, of Coromandel, and the Coaſt about Malacca, and againſt it the Iſland Sumatra, on that ſide, are moftly low Anchoring ſhores. But on the Weſt fide of Sumatra, the ſhore his high and bold; fo moſt of the lilands laying to the Eaſtward of Su- matra; as the Iſlands Borneo, Celebes , Gilelo, and a- bundance of Illand of leſs note, lying ſcattering up and down thoſe Seas, are low Land and have good Anchoring about them, with many ſhoals ſcattered to and fro among them ; but the Iſlands lying againſt the Eaſt Indian Ocean, eſpecially the Welt ſides of them, are high Land and ſteep, par- ticularly the Weſt paris, not only of Sumatra, buc , alſo of fava, Timor, &c. Particulars are endleſs ; but in general, 'tis ſeldom buc high Shores and deep Waters, and on the other fide, low Land and ſhallow Seas, are found together. But to return from this digreſſion, to ſpeak of the reſt of theſe Iſlands. Monmoogst h and Grafron Illes are very hilly, with many of thoſe ſteep in- habited Principices on them, that I ſhall deſcribe particularly. The two ſmall Ifards are flat and even; only the Bappee Illand hath one ſteep ſcrag- gy Hill, but Goat-Iſland is all flat and very e- ven. The mold of theſe iſlands in the Valleys, is Llackiſh in ſome places, but in moſt red. The Hills Ee 4 426 The Product and Inhabitants of the Bahee iſles. 1n.1687 Hills are very rocky: The Valleys are well wa- tered with Brooks of freſh water, which run into the Sea in many different places. The Soil is in- different fruitful, eſpecially in the Valleys; pro- ducing pretty great plenty of Trees (tho not very big) and thick Graſs. The ſides of the Mountains have alſo ſhort Graſs; and ſome of the Mountains þave Mines within them, for the Națives told us, that the yellow Metal they ſhew'd us, (as I ſhall ſpeak more particularly) came from theſe Moun- tains ; for when they held it up they would point towards them. The fruit of the Iſlands are a few Plantains, Bonanoes, Pine apples, Pumkins, Sugar-canes, &c. and there might be more if the Natives would, for the ground ſeems fertile enough. Here are great plenty of Potatoes, and Yames, which is the common food for the Natives, for bread kind: for thoſe few Plantains they have, are only uſed as Fruit. They have ſome Cotton growing here of the ſmall plants. Here are plenty of Goats, and abundance of Hogs; and few Fowls either wild or tame. For this I have always obſerved in my Travels. both in the Eaſt and Weſt-Indies, that in thoſe places where there is plenty of Grain, that is, of Rice in the one, and Maiz in the other, there are alſo found great abundance of Fowls; but on the contrary, few Fowls in thoſe Countries, where the Inhabitants feed on Fruits and Roots only. The few wild Fowls that are here, are Parakites, and ſome other ſmall Birds. Their tame Fowlare only a few Cocks and Hens. Monmouth and Grafton Ilands are very thick in- habited : and Baſhee Iſland hath one Town on it. The Natives of theſe Iſlands are ſhort ſquat People ; they are generally round viſaged, with low Fore- heads, and thick Eye-brows; their Eyes of a ha- zel Their Habit, and Rings of yellowp Metal. 427 zel colour, and ſmall, yet bigger than the Chineſe ; An. 1687 ſhort low Noſes, and their Lips and Mouths mid- dle proportioned. Their Teeth are white; their Hair is black, and thick, and lank, which they were but ſhort; it will juſt cover their Ears, and ſo it is cut round very even, Their Skins are of a very dark copper colour. They wear no Hat, Cap, nor Turbat, nor any thing to keep off the Sun. The men for the big- geſt part have only a ſmall clour to cover their Nakedneſs; ſome of them have Jackets made of Plantain leaves, which were as rough as any Bears Skin: I never ſaw ſuch rugged things. The Wo- men have a ſhort Petticoat made of Cotten, which comes a little below their knees. It is a thick fort of ſtubborn Cloath, which they make themſelves of their Cotton. Both Men and Women do wear large Ear-rings, made of that yellow Metal before mention'd. Whether it were Gold or no I cannot poſitively ſay: I took it to be fo, it was heavy, and of the colour of our paler Gold. I would fain have brought away ſome to have ſatisfied my curioſity : but I had nothing wherewith to buy any. Captain Read bought 2 of theſe Rings with ſome Iron, cf which the people are very greedy: and he would have bought more, thinking he was come to a very fair Market; but that the paleneſs of the Metal made him and his crew diſtruſt its being right Gold. For ny part, I ſhould have ventur'd on the purchaſe of ſome: But having no property in the Iron, of which we had great ſtore on board, ſent from England by the Merchants along with Cap- tain Swan, I durft not barter it away. Theſe Rings when firſt poliſhed look very glo- riouſly, but rime makes them fade, and turn to a pale yellow. Then they make a fofc paſte of red Earth, and ſmearing it over their Rings, they caſt them into a quick fire, where they remain till they be 428 Building on the ſides of Præcipices, An.1687 be red hot: then they take them out and cool them in water, and rub off the paſte; and they look again of a glorious colour and luftre. Theſe people make but ſmall low Houſes. The fides, which are made of ſmall poſts, wacled with boughs, are not above 4 foot and an half high: the ridge pole is about 7 or 8 foot high. They have a fire-place at one end of their Houſes, and boards placed on the ground to lye on. They inhabit to- gether in ſmall Villages, built on the ſides and tops of rocky hills ; 3 or 4 rows of Houſes one a- bove another, and on ſuch ſteep præcipices, that they go up to the firſt row with a wooden Ladder, and fo with a Ladder ſtill from every ſtory up to that above it, there being no way to aſcend. The Plain on the firſt præcipice may be ſo wide, as to have room both for a row of Houſes that ſtand all along on the edge or brink of it, and a very narrow ſtreer running along before their doors, between the row of Houſes and the foot of the next præci- pice; the plains of which is in a manner level to the tops of the Houſes below, and ſo for the reſt. The common Ladder to each row or ftreer comes up at a narrow paſſage lefc purpoſely about the middle of it, and the ftreet-being bounded with a præcipice alſo at each end, 'tis but drawing up the Ladder, if they be aſſaulted, and then there is no coming at them from below, but by climbing up as againſt a perpendicular wall: and that they may not be aſſaulted from above, they take care to build on the ſide of ſuch a hill, whoſe backtide hangs over the Sea, or is ſome high, ſteep, per- pendicular præcipice, altogether inacceſſible. Theſe præcipices are natural; for the Rocks ſeem too hard to work on; nor is there any ſign that Arc hath been employed about them. On Baſhee Illand there is one ſuch, and built upon, with its back next the Sea. Grafton and Monmuth Iſles are very thick 3 Their Boats, Fiſhing, Food. 429 thick ſet with theſe Hills and Towns: and the Na- An. 1687 tives, whether for fear of Pyrates, or Foreign m Enemies, or Factions among their own Clans, care not for building but in theſe Faſtneffes : which I take to be the reaſon that Orange Iſle, though the largelt, and as fertile as any, yet being level, and expoſed, hath no Inhabitants. "I never ſaw the like Præci- . pices and Towns. Theſe People are pretty ingenious alſo in build- ing Boats. Their ſmall Boars are much like our Deal Yalls, but not ſo big ; and they are built with very narrow Plank, pinn'd with Wooden Pins, and ſome Nails. They have alſo ſome prerry large Boats, which wil carry 40 or so Men. "Theſe they row with 12 or 14 Oars of a fide. They are built much like the ſmall ones, and they row do!l- ble banked ; that is, two Men ſetting on one Bench, but one rowing on one ſide, the other on the other ſide of the Boat. They underſtand the uſe of Iron, and work it themſelves. Their Belo lows are like thoſe at Mindanao. The common imployment for the Men is Fiſh- ing; but I did never ſee them catch much : whe- ther it is more plenty at other times of the year I know nor, The Women do manage their Planta- tions. I did never ſee them kill any of their Goats or Hogs for themſelves, yet they would beg the Paunches of the Goats that they themſelves did fell to us: and if any of our ſurly Seamen did heave them into the Sea, they would take them up again, and the Skins of the Goats alſo. They would not . meddle with Hogs-guts; ifour Men threw away any beſide waat they made Chitterling and Sauſages of. The Goars-skins theſe people would carry alhore, and making a fire they would finge off all the hair, and afterwards let the skin lye and parch on the coals, till they thought it eatable : and then they would 430 Goats Maws cookt, and Locuſts, An. 1687 would gnaw it, and tear it in pieces with their Teeth, and at laſt (wallow it. The Paunches of the Goats would make them an excellent diſh: They drejt it in this manner. They would turn out all the chopt graſs and crudities found in the Maw in- to their Pots, and ſet it over the fire, and ſtir it about often: This would ſmoak, and puff, and heave up as it was boyling; wind breaking our of the ferment, and making a very ſavory ſtink. While this was doing, if they had any Fiſh, as com- monly they had 2 or 3 ſmall Filh, theſe they would make very clean (as hating Naſtineſs belike ) and cut the fleſh from the bone, and then mince the fleſh as ſmall as poſſibly they could, and when that in the Pot was well boild, they would take it up, and ſtrewing a little Salt into it, they would eat it, mixt with their raw minc'd fiſh. The dung in the Maw would look like ſo much boild Herbs minc'd very ſmall; and they took up their meſs with their fingers, as the Moors do their Pilaw, uſing no Spoons. They had another diſh made of a ſort of Locuſts, whoſe bodies were about an inch and an half long, and as thick as the top of one's little finger; with 13 large thin Wings, and long and ſmall Legs. At this time of the year theſe creatures came in great fwarms to devour their Potato-leaves, and other Herbs; and the Natives would go out with ſmall Nets, and take a quart at one ſweep. When they had enough, they would carry them home, and parch them over the fire in an earthen Pan; and then their Wings and Legs would fall off, and their Heads and Backs would turn red like boild Shrimps, being before browniſh. Their bodies being full would eat very moiſt, their heads would crackle in opes Teeth. I did once eat of this Diſh, and liked it well enough: buc cheir other Diſh my ſtomach would not take. g Their The Baſhee Liquor: their Language. 431 Their common drink is Water; as it is of all An. 1687' other Indians: Beſides which they make a fort of drink with the juice of the Sugar-cane, which they boyl, and put ſome ſmall black fort of Berries among it. When it is well boyled, they put it into great Jars, and let it ſtand 3 or 4 days, and work. Then it ſettles, and becomes clear, and is preſent- ly fit to drink. This is an excellent Liquor, and very much like Engliſh Beer, both in colour and taſte. Ic is very ſtrong, and I do believe very wholeſome: for our men who drank briskly of it all day for ſeveral weeks, were frequently drunk with it,and never fick after it. The Natives brought a vaſt deal of it every day to thoſe aboard and aſhore: for ſome of our men were aſhore at work on Baſkee Iſland; which Iſland they gave that name to from their drinking this Liquor there; that be- ing the name which the Natives call'd this Liquor by: and as they ſold it to our men very cheap, lo they did not ſpare to drink it as freely. And in- deed from the plenty of this Liquor, and their plen- tiful uſe of it, our Men call'd all theſe Iflands the Bafbee Iſlands. What Language theſe people do ſpeak I know not: for it had no affinity in found to the Chineſe, which is ſpoke much through the Teeth ; nor yet to the Malayan Language. They called the Metal that their Ear-rings were made of Bullawan, which is the Mindanao word for Gold; therefore probably they may be related to the Philippine Indies: for that is the general Name for Gold among all thoſe Indians, I could not learn from whence they have their Iron: but it is moſt likely they go in their great Boats to the North end of Luconia, and trade with the Indians of that Iſland for it. Neither did I ſee any thing beſide Iron, and pieces of Buffaloes Hides, which I could judge that they bought of Strangers: Their Cloaths were of their own growth and manufacture, Thele 432 Their Ammunition, Politie , &c. An.1687 Theſe Men had Wooden Lances, and a few Lances headed with Iron; which are all the Wea- pons that they have. Their Armour is a piece of Buffaloe-hide , ſhaped like our Carters Frocks, be ing without Sleeves, and fowed both ſides toge- ther, with holes for the Head and the Arms to come forth. This Buff-Coat reaches down to their Knees: It is cloſe about their Shoulders, but below it is 3 foot wide, and as thick as a Board. I could never perceive them to worſhip any thing, neither had they any Idols : neither did they ſeem to obſerve any one day more than other. I could never perceive that one Man was of greater power than another ; but they ſeemed to be all equal : only every Man ruling in his own Houſe, and the Children reſpecting and honouring their Parents. Yet tis probable that they have ſome Law, or Cuſtom, by which they are governed: for while we lay here we ſaw a young Man buried alive in the Earth ; and 'twas for Theft, as far as we could underſtand from them. There was a great deep hole dug, and abundance of people came to the place to take their laſt farewel of him : Among the reſt, there was one woman who made great lamentation, and took off the condemned perſons Ear-rings. We ſuppoſed her to be his Mother. After he had taken bis leave of her and ſome others, he was put into the pit , and covered over with Earth. He did not ſtruggle, but yielded very qui- etly to his puniſhment : and they cramm'd the Earth cloſe upon him, and ſtifled him. They have buc one Wife, with whom they live and agree very well, and their Children live very obediently under them. The Boy's go out a Fiſh- ing with their Fathers, and the Grls live at home with their Mothers : and when the Girls are growi Preccy ſtrong, they ſend them to their Plantations, រ The Manners of the Balheans. 433 to did Yames and Potatoes; of which they bring An. 1687 home on their heads every day enough to ſerve the whole family for they have no Rice nor Maiz. Their Plantations are in the Valleys, at a good diſtance from their Houſes: where every Man has a certain ſpot of Land, which is properly bis own. This he manageth himſelf for his own uſe; and provides enough, that he may not be beholding to his neighbour. Notwithſtanding the ſeeming naſtineſs of their Diſh of Goats Maw, they are in their Perſons a very neat cleanly people, both Men and Women : And they are withal the quieteſt and civileſt people that I did ever meet with. I could never perceive them to be angry with one another. I have admired to ſee 20 or 30 Boats aboard our Ship at a time, and yer no difference among them; but all civil and quier , endeavouring to help each other on occaſi- on: No noiſe, nor appearance of diftaſte: and al- though ſometimes croſs accidents would happen, which might have ſet other Men together by the ears, yet they were not moved by them. Some- times they will alſo drink freely, and warm them- ſelves with their drink; yet neither then could I ever perceive them out of humour. They are not only thus civil among themſelves, but very obliging and kind to ſtrangers : nor were their Children rude to us, as is uſual. Indeed the Women, when we came to their houſes, would modeſtly beg any Rags, or ſmall pieces of Cloath, to ſwaddle their young ones in; holding out their Children to us : and begging is uſualamong all theſe wild Nations, Yet neither did they beg ſo importunately as in other places ; nor did the Men ever beg any thing at all. Neither, except once at the firſt time that we came to an Anchor, ( as I ſhall relate) did they ſteal any thing; but deal juftly, and with great fincerity with us: and make us very welcome to their 434 Their Entertainments, Trading, &c. An. 1687 their Houſes with Baſbee drink. If they had none of this Liquor themſelves, they would buy a Jar of Drink of their Neighbours, and ſit down with us: for we could ſee them go and give a piece or two of their Gold for ſome Jars of Baſbee. And indeed among Wild Indians, as theſe ſeem to be, I wonder'd to ſee buying and ſelling, which is not ſo uſual; nor to converſe ſo freely, as to go aboard ftrangers Ships with ſo little caution: Yet their own ſmall Trading may have brought them to this. At theſe Entertainments, they and their family, Wife and Children, drank out of ſmall Callabaſhes : and when by themſelves, they drink about from one to another, but when any of us came among them, then they would always drink to one of us. They have no ſort of Coin: but they have fmall crumbs of the Metal before deſcribed, which they bind up very ſafe in Plantain Leaves, or the like. This Metal they exchange for what they want, giving a ſmall quantity of it, about 2 or 3 grains for a Jar of Drink, that would hold , or 6 Gallons. They have no Scales, but give ic by gueſs. Thus much in general. To proceed therefore with our affairs, I have ſaid before, that we anchored here the 6th day of Auguft. While we were furling our Sails there came near roo Boats of the Natives aboard, with 3 or 4 Men in each; ſo that our Deck was full of Men. We were at firſt afraid of them, and there- fore got up 20 or 30 ſmall Arms on our Poop, and kept 3 or 4 Men as Centinels, with Guns in their hands, ready to fire on them if they had offered to moleft us. But they were pretty quiet, only they pickt up ſuch old Iron that they found on our Deck, and they alſo took out our Pump Bolts, and Linch- Pins out of the Carriages of our Guns, before we perceived them. At laſt, one of our Men per- ceived Their Traffick with the Baſlieans. 435 ceived one of them very buſie getting out one of our An.1687 Linch Pins; and took hold of the fellow, who imme- diately bawld out, and all the reſt preſently leaped over-board, ſome into their Boats, others into the Sea; and they all made away for the ſhore. But when we perceived their fright we made much of him that was in hold, who ſtood trembling all the while; and at laſt we gave him a ſmall piece of Iron, with which he immediately leapt over-board, and ſwam to his Conſorcs; who hovered about our Ship to ſee the iſſue. Then we beckned to them to come aboard again, being very loth to loſe a commerce with them. Some of the Boats came a- board again, and they were always very honeſt and civilafterwards. We preſently after this ſent a Canoa aſhore, to ſee their manner of living, and what Proviſion they had: The Canoas Crew were made very welcome with Baſhee drink, and ſaw abundance of Hogs ; ſome of which they bought, and returned aboard. Afrer this the Natives brought aboard both Hogs and Goats to us in their own Boats: and every day we ſhould have is or 20 Hogs and Goats in Boats aboard by our fide. Theſe we bought for a fmall matter: We could buy a good fat Goat for an old Iron Hoop, and a Hog of 70 or 80 pound weight for 2 or 3 pound of Iron. Their Drink alſo they brought off in Jars, which we bought for old Nails, Spikes, and leaden Ballers. Beſide the forementioned Commodities, they brought aboard great quantities of Yams and Potatoes; which we purchaſed for Nails, Spikes, or Bullets. It was one Man's work to be all day cutting out Bars of Iron into ſmall pieces with a cold Chiſel: and theſe were for the great purchaſes of Hogs and Goats, which they would not fell for Nails, as their Drink and Roots. We never let them know what fore we had, that they might value is the more. Every a 436 Their ſtay and buſineſs at thee ifles. An.1687 Every morning, aſſoon as it was light, they would thus corne aboard with their commodities, which we bought as we had occaſion. We did commonly furniſh our ſelyes with as many Goats and Roots as ſerved us all the day; and their Hogs we bought in large quantities, as we thought convenient ; for weſalted them. Their Hogs were very ſweet : but I never ſaw ſo many meazled ones. We filled all our Water at a curious Brook cloſe by us in Grafton's Ille, where we firft anchored. We ſtayed there about 3 or 4 days, before we went to other Iſlands. We failed to the South- ward, paſſing on the Eaſt ſide of Grafton Illand, and then paſſed thro between that and Monmouth Irland; but we found no anchoring till we came to the North end of Monmouth Iſland, and there we ſtope during one Tide, The Tide runs very ſtrong here, and ſometimes makes a ſhort chop- ping Sea. Its courſe amongſt theſe Hands is S. by E. and N. by W. The flood fets to the North, and ebb to the South, and it riſeth and falleth 8 foot. When we went from hence, we coafted about 2 leagues to the Southward, on the Weſt ſide of Monmouth Iſland, and finding no anchor ground, we ſtood over to Baſbee Iſland, and came to an anchor on the North Eaſt part of it, againſt a ſmall ſandy Bay, in 7 fathom clean hard fand, and about a quarter of a mile from the ſhore. Here is a pretty wide Channel between theſe two Iſlands, and ancho- ring all over ic. The depth of Water is 12, 14, and 36 fathom. We preſently built a Tent alhore, to mend our Sails in, and itay'd all the reſt of our time here, viz. from the 13th day of Auguſt till the 26 day of September. In which time we mended our Sails, and ſcrubb'd our Ships bottom very well: and eve- ry day ſome of us went to their Towns, and were kirdly a A fierce Storm 437 kindly entertained by them. Their Boats alſo An. 1689 came aboard with their Merchandiſe to ſell, and lay aboard all day; and if we did not take it off their hands one day, they would bring the ſame a- gain the next. We had yet the Winds at S. W. and S. S. W. moſtly fair weather. In O&tober we did expect the Winds to ſhift to the N. E. and therefore we pro- vided to fail (as ſoon as the Eaſtern Monſoon was ſettled) to cruiſe off of Manila. Accordingly we pro- vided a ſtock of Proviſion. We ſalted 70 or go good fat Hogs, and bought Yams and Potatoes good ſtore to eat at Sea. About the 24th day of September, the Winds ſhifred about to the Eaſt, and from thence to the N. E. fine fair weather. The 25th it came at N. and began to grow freſh, and the Sky began to be clouded; and the Wind freſhned on us. At 12 of the clock at night it blew a very fierce ſtorm. We were then riding with our beſt Bower a head and thoughour Yards and Topmaft were down, yet we drove. This obliged us to let go our Sheet Anchor, veering out a good ſcope of Cable, which ſtopt us till 10 or 1 1 of the clock the next day. Then the Wind came on fo fierce, that ſhe drove again, with both Anchors a head. The Wind was now at N. by W.and we kept driving till 3 or 4 of the clock in the afternoon: and it was well for us that there were no Iſlands, Rocks, or Sands in our way, for if there had, we muſt have been driven upon them. We uſed our utmoſt endea- vours to ſtop her, being loath to go to Sea, be- cauſe we had 6 of our Men alhore, who could not get off now. At laſt we were driven out into deep Water, and then it was in vain to wait any longer : Therefore we hove in our Sheer Cable , and got up our Sheet Anchor, and cut away our beſt Bower, for to have heav'd her up then would Ff 2 have 3 438 of 6 Engliſhmen left aſhore. An. 1687 have gone near to have foundered us) and ſo put to Sea. We had very violent weather the night en- ſuing, with very hard Rain, and we were forced to ſcud with our bare Poles till 3 a clock in the morning. Then the Wind flacken'd, and we brought our Ship to, under a mizen, and lay with our head to the Weſtward. The 27th day the Wind abated much, but it rained very hard all day, and the night enſuing, The 28th day the Wind came about to the N. E. and it cleared up, and blew a hard gale, but it ſtood not there, for it fhifced about the Eaſward, thence to the S. E. then to the South, and at laſt it fettled at S. W. and chen we had a moderate gale and fair wea- ther. It was the 29th. day when the Wind came to the S. W. Then we made all the fail we could for the Iſland again. The 30th day we had the Wind at Weſt, and ſaw the Iſlands; but could not get in before night. Therefore we ſtood off to the Southward till 2 of the clock in the morning; then we tackt, and ſtood in all the morning, and and about 12 of the clock, the iſt day of Otober we anchored again at the place from whence we were driven. Then our 6 Men were brought aboard by the Natives, to whom we gave 3 whole bars of Iron, for their kindneſs and civility, which was an ex- traordinary preſent to them. Mr. Robert Hall, was one of the men that was left alhore. I ſhall ſpeak more of him hereafter. He and the reſt of them told me, that after the Ship was out of ſight, the Natives began to be more kind to them than they had been before, and perſwaded them to cut their Hair ſhort, as theirs was, offering to each of them if they would do is, a young Woman to Wife , and a ſmall Hatcher, and other bron Utenſils, fic for a Planter, in Dowry; and withal ſhewed them The Crew go upon new ProjeEts. 439 them a piece of Land for them to manage. They An. 1687 were courted thus by ſeveral of the Town where they then were: but they took up their head-quar- ters at the houſe of him with whom they firſt went aſhore. When the Ship appeared in fight again, then they importuned them for ſome Iron, which is the chief ching that they cover, oven above their Ear-rings. We might have bought all their Ear- rings, or other Gold they had, with our Iron-bars, had we been aſſur'd of its goodneſs: and yet when it was touch'd, and compared with other Gold, we could not diſcern any difference, tho it look'd ſo pale in the lump : but the ſeeing them polith it ſo often, was a new diſcouragement. This laſt Storm put our Men quite out of heart: for although it was not altogether fo fierce as that which we were in on the Coaſt of China , which was ſtill freſh in memory, yet it wrought more powerfully, and frighted them from their deſign of cruiſing before Manila, fearing another Storm there, Now every Man wiſhe himſelf at home, as they had done an hundred times before: but Captain Reed, and Captain Teat the Maſter, perſwaded then to go towards Cape Comorin, and then they would tell them more of their minds, intending doubtleſs to cruiſe in the Red-Sea : and they eaſily prevailed with the Crew, The Eaſtern Monſoon was now at hand, and the beit way had been to go through the Streights of Malacca : but Caprain Teat ſaid it was dangerous, by reaſon of many Iſlands and Shoals there, with which none of us were acquainted. Therefore he thought it beft to go round on the Eait fide of all the Philippine Ilands, and ſo keeping South toward che Spice Iſlands, to paſs out into the Eaſt-Indian Ocean about the Iſland Timor, Ff3 This 440 The Author's Reſolutions. An. 1687 This ſeemed to be a very tedious way about, and as dangerous altogether for Sholes; but not for meeting with Engliſor Dutch Ships, which was their greateſt fear. I was well enough ſatisfied, know- ing that the farther we went, the more Knowledge and Experience I ſhould get, which was the main thing that I regarded ; and ſhould alſo have the more variety of places to attempt an Eſcape frorn them, being fully reſolv'd to take the firſt oppor tunity of giving them the flip. СНАР. 441 An.1687 CH A P. XVI. They depart from the Baſhee Ipands, and pasſing by ſome others, and the N. End of Luconia, S. John's Ille, and other of the Philippines, they ſtop at the tivo Ifes near Mindanoa; where they re-fit their ship, and make a Pump after the Spaniſh faſhion. By the young Prince of the spice and they have News of Captain Swan, and his Men, left at Mindanao: The Author proposes to the crew to return to him; but in vain: the ſtory of his Murder at Min- danao. The Clove iſlands, Ternate, Tie dore, Cic. The afand Celebes, and Dutch Town of Macalier. They coalf along the Eft-lide of Celebes, and between it and other Iſlands and sholes, with great Difficulty. Shy Turtle. Val Cockles. A wild vine of great Virtue for sores. Great Trees; one excelſive- Ly big. Beacons inſtead of Buoys on the sholes. A Spout: a Deſcription of them, with a ſtory of one. Uncertain Tarnadoes. Turtle. The iland Bouton, and its chief Town and Har- bour, Collafufung. The inhabitants. Viſits given and receiv'd by the Sultan. His De- vice in the Flag of his proe : His Guards, Habit, and children. Their Commerce. Their different eſteem as they pretend) of the En- gliſh and Dutch. Maritime Indians fell others for slaves. Their Reception in the Town. 2 Ef 4 9 442 An.1687 2 N. E. end of Luconia, and Iſle of St. John, Town. A Boy with 4 Rows of Teeth. Para- kites. Crockedores, a ſort of white Parrots, They paſs among other Inhabited iſlands. Om- ba, Peptare, Timor, &c. sholes. New- Holland : laid down too much Northward. It's şoil, and Dragon trees. The poor Winking inhabitants: their Features, Habit, Food, Arms, &c. The way of fetching Fire out of wood. The inhabitants on the iſlands. Their Habitations, Unfitneſs for Labour, &c. The great Tides here. They deſign for the iſland Cacos, and Cape Comorin, > T: HE third day of O&tober 1687. we failed from theſe Iſlands, ſtanding to the Southward ; incending to fail through among the Spice Inaods. We had fair weather, and the wind at Weft. We firſt ſteered S. S. W. and paſſed cloſe by certain ſmall Iſlands that lye juſt by the North end of the Island Laconia. We left them all on the Weſt of us , , and paft on the Eaſt ſide of it, and the reſt of the Phim lippine Iſlands, coaſting to the Southward. The N. Eaſtend of the Iſland Laconia appears to be good Champion Land, of an indifferenc heighth, plain and even for many leagues: only it has ſome pretty high Hills ſtanding upright by chemſelves in theſe Plains ; but no ridges of Hills, or chains of Mountains joyning one to another. The Land on this fide ſeems to be moft Savannah, or Pafture: The S. E. part is more Mountainous and Woody. Leaving the Iſland Luconia, and with it our Gol- den projects, we failed on the Southward, paſſing on the Eaſt ſide of the reſt of the Philippine Iſlands, Theſe appear to be more Mountainous, and leſs Woody, till we came in ſight of the lſland St. John; the firſt of that name I mentioned : the other I fake ៦ weſt ſide of Mindanao, Spaniſh Pumps. 443 ſpake of on the coaſt of China. This I have alrea. An. 1687 dy deſcribed to be a very wocdy llland. Here the Wind coming Soucherly, forced us to keep farther from the Illands. The 14th. day of Otober we came cloſe by a ſmall low Woody Iſland, that lyeth Eat from the S. E. end of Mindanao, diſtant from it about 20 leagues, I do not find it ſet down in any Sea-Chart. The 15th. day we had the Wind at N. E. and we fteered Weſt for thelfland Mindanao, and arri- ved at the S. E.end again on the 16th day. There we went in and Anchored between two ſmall Ilands, which lye in about 5 d. 10 m. N. Lat. I mentioned them when we firſt cime on this Coaſt, Here we found a fine ſmall Cove, on the N. W. end of the Eaſtermoſt Iſland, fit to Careen in, or hale aſhore: fo we went in there, and pre- ſently unrigged our Ship, and provided to hale our Ship aſhore, to clean her bottom. Theſe Iſands are about 3 or 4 leazues from the Inand Mindanao : they are about 4 or 5 miles in circumference, and of a pretty good heighth. The mold is black and deep; and there are two ſmall Brooks of freſh Water. They are both plentifully ſtored with great high Trees: therefore our Carpenters were ſent aſhore to cut down ſome of them for our uſe ; for here they made a new Boltſprit, which we did fet here allo, our old one being very faulty. They made a new Fore-Yard too, and a Fore Top Mait: and our Pumps being faulty, and not ſerviceable, they did cut a Tree to make a Pump. They firſt ſqua- red it, then ſawed it in the middle, and then hol- lowed each ſide exactly. The two hollow fides were made big enough to contain a Pump-box in the midſt of them both, when they were joyned together: and it required their utmoſt skill to cloſe them exactly to the making a tight Cylinder for the Pump- 444 A Prince of a Spice Iſland. A1.1687 Pump-box ; being unaccuſtomed to ſuch work. We learnt this way of Pump making from the Spani- ards; who make their Pumps that they uſe in their Ships in the South Seas after this manner : and I am confident that there are no better Hand-pumps in the world than they have. While we lay here, the young Prince that I mentioned in Chapter the 13th, came aboard. He underſtanding that we were bound farther to the Southward, defired us to tranſport him and his Men to his own Iſland. He ſhewed it to us in our Draft, and told us the Name of it: which we put down in our Draft, for it was not named there : but I quite forgot to put it into my Journal. This Man told us, that not above 6 days before this, he ſaw Captain Swan, and ſeveral of his Men that we left there, and named the Names of fome of them, who, he ſaid, were all well, and that now they were at the City of Mindanao : but that they had been all of them out with Raja Laut, fighting under him in his Wars againſt his Enemies the Al- foores : and that moſt of them fought with un- daunted Courage ; for which they were highly honored and eſteemed, as well by the Sultan, as by the General Raja Laut: That now Captain Swan intended to go with his Men to Fort St. George, and that in order thereto, he had profered 40 ounces of Gold for a Ship; but the Owner and he were not yer agreed: and that he feared thac the Sultan would not let him go away till the Wars were ended. All this the Prince told us in the Malayan tongue, which many of us had learnt; and when he went away he promiſed to return to us again in 3 days 3 time, and ſo long Captain Read promiſed to ſtay for him (for we had now almoſt finiſhed our buſi- neſs) and he ſeem'd very glad of the opportunity of going with us. After The Murder of C. Swan at Mindanao. 445 After this I endeavoured to perſwade our Men, An. 1687 ço return with the Ship to the River of Mindanao, and offer their ſervice again to Captain Swan. I took an opportunity when they were filling of Water, there being then half the Ships Company aſhore: and I found theſe all very willing to do it. I defired them to ſay nothing, till I had tried the minds of the other half, which I intended to do the next day; it being their turn to fill Water then: but one of theſe Men, who ſeemed moſt forward to invite back Captain Swan, told Captain Read and Captain Teat of the project, and they preſently difiwaded the Men from any ſuch deſigns, Yer fearing the worſt, they made all poffible haſte to be gone. I have ſince been informed, that Captain Swan and his Men ſtayed there a great while afterward: and that many of the Men got paffage from thence in Dutch Sloops to Ternate, particularly Mr. Rofy, and Mr. Nelly. There they remained a great while, and at laſt got to Batavia (where the Dutch took their Journals from them) and ſo to Europe ; and that ſome of Captain Swan's Men died at Mindando; of which number Mr. Harthope, and Mr. Emith, Cap- tain Swan's Merchants were two. At laſt Captain Swan and his Surgeon going in a ſmall Canoa aboard of a Dutch Ship then in the Road, in order to get paſſage to Europe, were overſer by the Na- rives at the Mouth of the River; who waited their coming purpoſely to do it, but unſuſpected by them : where they both were killd in the Water, This was done by the General's Order, as fome think, to get his Gold, which he did immediately feize on. Others ſay, it was becauſe the General's Houſe was burnt a little before, and Captain wan was ſuſpected to be the Author of it, and others ſay, that it was Captain Swan's Threats occafioned his own Ruine; for he would often fay paſſionate- ly, 446 They arrive at the iſland Celebes. An. 1687 ly, that he had been abuſed by the General, and that he would have fatisfaction for it ; ſaying alfo that now he was well acquainted with their Rivers, and knew how to come in at any time; that he alſo knew their manner of fighting, and the Weakneſs of their Country, and therefore he wou'd go a. way, and get a Band of Men to aſſiſt him, and re- turning thither again, he would ſpoil and take all that they had, and their Country too. When the General has been informed of theſe diſcourſes, he would ſay, What, is Captain Swan made of Iron, and able to refift a whole Kingdom ? Or does he think that we are afraid of him, that he ſpeaks thus? Yer did he never touch him, till now the Mindanayans kill'd him. It is very probable there might be ſomewhat of truth in all of this; for the Captain was paſſionate, and the General greedy of Gold. But whatever was the occaſion, ſo he was killd, as ſeveral have aſſured me, and his Gold ſeiz'd on, and all his things, and his Journal alſo from England, as far as Cape Corrientes on the Coaſt of Mexico. This Journal was afterwards ſent away from thence by Mr. Moody (who was there both a little before and a little after the Murder) and he ſent into Engband by Mr. Goddard, Chief Mate of the Defence. But to our purpoſe ; ſeeing I could not perſwade them to go to Captain Swan again, I had a great deſire to have had the Prince's company : but Captain Read was afraid to let his fickie crew lye long. That very day that the Prince had promiſed to return to us, which was November 2. 1687. We failed hence, directing our courſe South Weſt, and having the Wind at N. W. This Wind continued till we came in ſight of the Island Celebes; then it veered about to the W. and to the Southward of the Weft. We came up with the N, E, end of the Iſland Celebes the 9th. day, . I 1. Gilolo. Ternate, Tidor, &c. Macaſſer. 447 day, and there we found the current ſerting to the An. 1687 Weſtward ſo ſtrongly, that we could hardly get on the Eaſt ſide of that Iſland. The Iſland Celebes is a very large Iſland, ex- tended in length from North to South, about 7 degrees of lat. and in breadth it is about 3 de- grees. It lies under the Equator, the North end being in lat. I d. 30 m. North, and the South end in lat. 5 d. 30 m. South, and by com- mon account the buik of this Iſland, lies neareſt North and South, but at the North Eaſt end there runs out a long narrow point, ſtretching N. E. a- bout 30 leagues: and about 30 leagues to the Eaſt- ward of this long Slipe, is the INand Gilolo, on the Weſt ſide of which are 4 ſmall iſlands, cloſe by it, which are very well ſtored with Cloves. The two chiefeſt are Ternate and Tidore; and as the Ile of Ceylon is reckoned the only place for Cin- namon, and that of Banda for Nutmegs, ſo theſe are thought by ſome to be the only Clove Iſlands in the World; but this is a great error, as I have already ſhewn. At the South end of the Iſland Celebes there is a Sea or Gulph, of about 7 or 8 leagues wide, and 40 or so long, which runs up the Country al- moſt directly to the North; and this Gulph hath ſeveral ſmall Illands along the middle of it. On the Weſt ſide of the Iſland almoſt at the South end of it, the Town of Macaſſer is ſeated. A Town of great Strength and Trade, belonging to the Durch There are great Inlets and Lakes on the Eaſt ſide of the Iſland; as alſo abundance of ſmall Illands and Shoals lying ſcattered about it. We ſaw a high peeked Hill at the N. end: but the Land on the Eaſt ſide is low all along; for we cruized almoſt the length of it. The mold on this ſide is black and deep, and extraordinary fat and rich, and 448 : They coafi along the Iſle of Celebes. An. 1687 are full of Trees and there are many Brooks of Water run out into the Sea, Indeed all chis Eaft ſide of the Iſland ſeems to be but one large Grove of ex- traordinary great high Trees. Having with much ado got on this Eaſt fide, coafting along to the Southward, and yet having but little Wind, and even that little againſt us, at S.S. W. and ſometimes Calm, we were a long time going about the Iſland. The 22d day we were in Lat. 1 d. 20 m. South, and being about 3 leagues from the Illand ſtanding to the Southward, with a very gentle Land wind, about 2 or 3 of the clock in the morning, we heard claſhing in the Water, like Boats rowing: and fearing ſome ſudden attack, we got up all our Arms, and ſtood ready to defend our ſelves. As ſoon as it was day, we ſaw a great Proe, built like the Mindanayan Proe's with about 60 men in her ; and 6 ſmaller Proes. They lay ftill about a mile to Windward of us, to view us; and probably deſign'd to make a prey of us, when they firſt came our: buc they were now afraid to venture on us. At laſt we ſhewed them Dutch Colours, thinking thereby to allure them to come to us; for we could not go to them, but they preſently rowed in toward the Illand, and went into a large opening; and we faw them no more; nor did we ever ſee any other Boats, or Men, but only one fiſhing Canoa, while we were about this Iſland; neither did we ſee any Houſe on all the Coaſt. About 5 or 6 leagues to the South of this place, there is a great Range of both large and ſmall Iſlands: and many ſhoals alſo that are not laid down in our Drafts; which made it extreamly trouble- ſome for us to get through, But we paſt between them all and the Iſland Celebes, and anchored againſt a ſandy Bay in 8 fathom ſandy ground, about half a mile from the main Illand: being then in lat. idi Som South. Here g sky Turtles. Vaſt Cockles. A Drug. 449 Here we ſtayed ſeveral days, and ſent out our An.1687 Canoas a ſtriking of Turtle every day; for here is great plenty of them, but they were very ſhy, as they were generally where ever we found them in the Eaſt - india Seas. I know not the reaſon of it, unleſs the Natives go very much a ſtriking here: for even in the Weſt-Indies they are ſhy in places that are much difturbed; and yet on New Holland we found them ſhy, as I ſhall relate; though the Natives there do not moleft them. On the ſholes without us we went and gathered Shell-fiſh at low water. There were a monſtrous ſort of Cockles; the Meat of one of them would ſuffice 7 or 8 Men. It was very good wholſome Meat, We did alſo beat about in the Woods on the Iſland, but found no game. One of our Men, who was always troubled with fore Legs, found a certain Vine that ſupported it ſelf by climbing about other Trees. The leaves reach'd 6 or 7 foot high, but the ſtrings or branches II or 12. It had a very green leaf, pretty broad and roundiſh, and of a thick fubftance. Theſe leave pounded ſmall, and boiled with Hogs Lard, make an excellent Salve. Our Men, knowing the vertues of it, , ftockt themſelves here: there was ſcarce a Man in the Ship but got a pound or two of it; eſpecially ſuch as were troubled with old Ulcers, who found great benefit by it. This Man that diſcovered there leaves here had this firſt Knowledge of them in the Iſthmus of Darien, he having had this Receipt from one of the Indians there: and he had been aſhore in divers places ſince, purpoſely to ſeek theſe leaves, but did never find any but here. Among the ma- ny vaft Trees hereabouts, there was one exceeded all the reſt. This Captain Read cauſed to be cuc down, in order to make a Canoa, having loft our Boats, all but one ſmall one, in the late Storms 3 ſo 6 luſty Men, who had been Logwood cutters in the 450 A great Tree. Beacons ſet on sholes. An 1687 the Bays of Campeachy and Honduras (as Captain Read himſelf, and many more of us had) and ſo were very expert at this work, undertook to fell it, taking their turns, 3 always cutting together: and they were one whole day, and half the next, be- fore they got it down. This Tree, though it grew in a Wood, was yet 18 foot in circumference, and 44 foot of clean body, without knot or brance : and even there it had no more than one or two branches, and then ran clean again io foot higher ; there is ſpread it ſelf into many great limbs and branches like an Oak, very green and flouriſhing : yet it was perihht at the heart, which marr'd it for the ſervice intended. So leaving it, and having no more buſineſs here, we weighed, and went from hence the next day, it being the 29th day of November. While we lay here we had ſome Tornadoes, one or two every day, and pretty freſh Land winds which were at Weſt. The Sea breezes were ſmall and uncertain, fometimes out of the N. E. and ſo veering about to the Eaſt and South Eaſt. We had the Wind at North Eaſt when we weighed, and we ſteered off S. S. W. In the afternoon we ſaw a fhole a head of us, and altered our courſe to the S. S. E. In the evening, at 4 of the clock, we were clofe by another great ſhole: therefore we tackt, and ſtood in for the Iſland Celebes again; for fear of running on ſome of the ſholes in the night. By day a Man might avoid them well enough, for they had all Beacons on them, like Huts built on tall Pofts, 'above high-water mark, probably ſet up by the Natives of the Iand Celebes, or thoſe of ſome other neighbouring Iſlands; and I never faw any ſuch elſewhere. In the night 'we had a violent Tornado out of the S. W. which laſted about an hour. 2 Or Shoals near Celebes. A Tornado and Spout. 451 The 3 oth day we had a freſh Land VVind, and An. 1687 freered away South , paſſing between the 2 Shoals, which we ſaw the day before. Theſe Shoals lye in lat. 3 d. South, and about 10 leagues from the Illand Celebes. Being paſt them, the VVind died away, and we lay becalmed till the afternoon: Then we had a hard Tornado out of the South V Veſt, and towards the evening we ſaw two or three Spouts, the firſt I had ſeen ſince I came into the Eaſt-Indies ; in the Weſt-Indies I had often mec with them. A Spout is a ſmall ragged piece, or part of a Cloud, hanging down abour a yard, ſeemingly from the blackeſt pare thereof. Com- monly it hangs down ſloping from thence, or ſometimes appearing with a ſmall bending elbow in the middle. I never ſaw any hang per- pendicularly down. It is ſmall at the lower end, 1eeming no bigger than ones Arm, but 'tis fuller towards the Cloud , from whence ic proceeds. VVhen the ſurface of the Sea begins to work, you ſhall ſee the VVater, for about roo paces in circumference, foam and move gently round till the whirling motion increaſes : and then it flies upward in a pillar, about 100 paces in compaſs at the bottom, but leſſening gradually upwards to the ſmallneſs of the Spout it ſelf, there where it reacheth the lower end of the Spout; through which the riſing Sea-water ſeems to be conveyed into the Clouds. This viſibly appears by the Clouds increaſing in bulk and blackneſs. Then you ſhall preſently ſee the Cloud drive along, al- though before it ſeemed to be without any mo- tion, the Spout alſo keeping the ſame courſe with the Cloud, and ſtill ſucking up the water as it goes along, and they make a Wind as they go. Thus it continues for the ſpace of half an hour, more or leſs, until the fucking is ſpent, and then breaking off, all the Water which was below Gg the 3 P 452 Of a Spout on the coaſt of Guinea. An. 1687 the Spout, or pendulous piece of Cloud, falls down again into the Sea , making a great noiſe with its fall, and claſhing motion in the Sea. It is very dangerous for a Ship to be under a Spout when ic breaks, therefore we always en- deavoured to fhun it, by keeping at a diſtance, if poſſibly we can. But for want of Wind to carry us away, we are often in great fear and danger ; for it is uſually calm when Spouts are at work, except only juft where they are. Therefore Men at Sea, when they ſee a Spout coming, and know not how to avoid it, do ſometimes fire ſhot out of their great Guns into it, to give it air or vent, that ſo it may break; but I did never hear that it proved to be of any benefit. And now being on this ſubject, I think it not amiſs to give you an account of an accident that happened to a Ship once on the coaſt of Guinea, ſome time in or about the year 1674. One Cap- tain Records of London, bound for the Coaſt of Guinea , in a Ship of 300 Tuns, and 16 Guns, called the Bleſſing : when he came into the lat. 7 or 8 degrees North, he ſaw ſeveral Spouts, one of which came directly towards the Ship, and he having no Wind to get out of the way of the Spout, made ready to receive it by furling his fails. It came on very Swift, and broke, a little before it reached the Ship; making a great noiſe, and raiſing the Sea round it, as if a great houſe, or ſome ſuch thing, had been caſt into the Sea. The fury of the Wind fill lafted, and took the Ship on the Starboard bow with ſuch violence, that ic ſnapt off the Boltſpric and Fore-maſt both at once, and blew the Ship all along, ready to over- ſet it, but the Ship did preſently right again, and the Wind whirling round, took the Ship a ſecond time with the like fury as before, but on the contrary fide, and was again like to overſet her the other way. The Iſle of Bouton. Fickle weather 453 The Mizen-maſt felt the fury of this ſecond blaft, An.1687 and was ſnapt ſhort off, as the Fore-maſt and Bolt- ſprit had been before. The Main-maſt, and Main- top-maſt received no damage, for the fury of the Wind, (which was preſently over) did not reach them. Three Men were in the Fore-top when the Fore-maſt broke, and one on the Boltſprit, and fell with them into the Sea , but all of them were ſaved. I had this relation from Mr. John Canby, who was then Quarter-maſter and Steward of her, one Abrakam Wife, was chief Mace, and Leonard Fefferies ſecond Mate, We are uſually very much afraid of them: yet this was the only damage that ever I heard done by them. They ſeem terrible enough : the rather becauſe they come upon you while you lie becalm'd like a Log in the Sea, and cannot get out of their way: but though I have ſeen, and been beſet by them often, yet the fright was always the greateſt of the harm. December the ift. we had a gentle gale at E.S.E. we ſteered South; and at noon I was by Obſerva- tion in lat. 3 d. 34 m. South. Then we ſaw the . Iſland Bouton, bearing South Weſt, and about 10 leagues diſtant. We had very uncertain and un- conſtant winds: The Tornadoes came out of the S. VV. which was againſt us; and what other VVinds we had were fo faint, that they did us little kindneſs; but we took the advantage of the ſmalleſt gale, and got a little way every day. The 4th. day at noon I was by Obſervation in Lat. 4d. 30 m. South. The sth day we got cloſe by the N. VV. end of the Iſland Boston, and in the evening, it being fair weather, we hoiſed out our Canoa, and ſent the Moskito Men, of whom we had 2 or 3 , to ftrike Turtle, for here are plenty of them : but they be- ing ſy, we choſe to ſtrike them in the night (which Gg 2 is 454 Iſle of Bouton, and its City Callaſuſung. An. 1687 is cuſtomary in the Weſt-Indies alſo) For every time they come up to breathe, which is once in 8 or 10 minutes, they blow ſo hard, that one may hear them at 30 or 40 yards diſtance; by which means the Striker knows where they are, and may more eaſily approach them than in the day : for the Tur- tle fees better than he hears : but, on the contra- ry, the Manatee's hearing is quickeſt. In the morning they returned with a very large Turtle, which they took near the ſhore ; and with- al an Indian of the Iſland came aboard with them. He ſpake the Malayan Language ; by which we did un- derſtand him. He told us, that two leagues farther to the Southward of us, there was a good Harbour, in which we might Anchor : So having a fair Wind, we got thither by noon. This Harbour is in Lat. 4 d. 54 m. South: lying on the Eaſt ſide of the Illand Bouton. Which Iſland lyes near the S. E. end of the Iſland Celebes, diſtant from ic about 3 or 4 leagues. It is of a long form, ftretching S. W. and N. E. about 25 leagues long, and 10 broad. It is prerry high Land, and appears pretty even, and flat, and very woody. There is a large Town within a league of the Anchoring place, called Callaſuſung, being the chief if there were more; which we knew not. It is about a mile from the Sea, on the top of a ſmall Hill, in a very fair Plain, incompaſſed with Coco- nur Trees. VVithout the Trees there is a ſtrong Stone VVall, clear round the Town. The Houſes are built like the Houſes at Mindanoa ; but more neat: and the whole Town was very clean and delightſome. The Inhabitants are ſmall, and well ſhaped. They are much like the Mindanayans in ſhape, co- lour, and habit; but more neat and tight. They ſpeak the Malayan Language, and are all Mabome- tans. They are very obedient to the Sultan, who is The Sultan of Bouton; his Device and Guards. 455 is a licele Man, about 40 or 50 years old, and hath An.1687 a great many VVives and Children. About an hour after we came to an Anchor, the Sulcan ſent a Meſſenger aboard, to know what we were, and what our buſineſs. We gave him an ac- count, and he returned aſhore, and in a ſhort time after he came aboard again, and told us, that the Sultan was very well pleaſed when he heard that we were Engliſ; and ſaid, that we ſhould have any thing that the Iſland afforded ; and that he himſelf would come aboard in the morning. Therefore the Ship was made clean, and every thing put in the beſt order to receive him. The 6th day, in the morning betimes, a great ma- ny Boats and Canoas came aboard with Fowls,Eggs, Plantains, Potatoes, &c. but they would diſpoſe of none till they had order for it from the Sultan, at his coming About ro of the clock the Sultan came aboard in a very neat Proe, built after the Mindanao faſhion. There was a large white ſilk Flag at the head of the Maſt, edged round with a deep red for about 2 or 3 inches broad, and in the 3 middle there was neatly drawn a Green Griffon, trampling on a winged Serpent, that ſeemed to ſtruggle to get up, and threatned his Adverfary with open mouth, and with a long Sting that was ready to be darted into his Legs. Other Eaſt-Indian Princes have their Devices alſo. The Sultan with 3 or 4 of his Nobles, and 3 of his Sons, fat in the Houſe of the Proe. His Guards were 1o Muſqueteers, s ſtanding on one ſide of the Proe, and 5 on the other ſide, and be- fore the door of the Proe houſe ſtood one with a great broad Sword, and a Target, and 2 more ſuch at the after part of the Houſe; and in the head and ſtern of the Proe ſtood 4 Muſqueteers more, 2 at each end. Gg3 The 456 The Sultans Habit. Selling of slaves, An. 1687 The Sultan had a Silk Turbat, laced with narrow Gold Lace by the ſides, and broad lace at the end : which hung down on one ſide the head, after the Mindanayan faſhion. He had a Sky-colour'd Silk pair of Breeches, and a piece of red Silk thrown croſs his ſhoulders, and hanging loſe about him ; the grea- teſt part of his back and waſte appearing naked. He had neither Stocking nor Shoe. One of his Sons was about is or 16 years old ; the other two were young things: and they were always in the arms of one or other of his Attendants. Captain Read met him at the ſide, and led him into his ſmall Cabbin, and fired s Guns for his welcome. Afſoon as he came aboard he gave leave to his Subjects to traffick with us: and then our People bought what they had a mind to. The Sultan ſeemed very well pleaſed to be viſited by the Engliſh; and ſaid, he had coveted to have a ſight of Engliſhmen, having heard extraordinary characters of their juft and honourable dealings: but he ex- claimed againſt the Dutch (as all the Mindanayans, and all the Indians we met with do) and wiſhe them at a greater diſtance. For Macaller is not very far from hence, one of the chiefeſt Towns that the Dutch have in thoſe parts. From thence the Dutch come ſometimes hi- ther to purchaſe Slaves. The Slaves that theſe Peo- ple get here and ſell to the Dutch, are ſome of the idolatrous Natives of the Iſland, who not being under the Sultan, and having no head, live ſtrag- gling in the Country, flying from one place to ano- ther to preſerve themſelves from this Prince and his Subjects, who hunt after them to make them Slaves. For the civilizing Indians of the maritime places, who trade with Foreigners, if they can- not reduce the inland people to the Obedience of their Prince, they catch all they can of them and ſell them for Slaves; accounting them to be but as The Sultan entertains them at Callaſuſung. 457 as Savages, juſt as the Spaniards do the poor A- An. 1687 mericans. After two or three hours diſcourſe the Sultan went aſhore again, and s Guns were fired at his departure alſo. The next day he ſent for Captain Read to come aſhore, and he, with 7 or 8 Men, went to wait on the Sultan. I could not ſlip an opportunity of ſeeing the place; and ſo accom- panied them. We were met at the landing place by two of the chief Men, and guided to a pretty near Houſe, where the Sultan waired our coming. The Houſe ſtood at the farther end of all the Town before mention'd, which we paſt through; and abundance of people were gazing on us as we paſt by. When we came near the Houſe, there were 40 poor naked Soldiers with Muſquets made a Lane for us to paſs through. This Houſe was not built on Poſts, as the reſt were, after the Mindanayan way; but the room in which we were enter- tained was on the ground, covered with Mats to ſiton. Our Entertainment was Tobacco and Betel- nut, and young Coco-nuts; and the Houſe was beſer with Men, Women and Children, who thronged to get near the Windows to look on a Us, We did not tarry above an hour before we took our leaves and departed. This Town ftands in a fandy foil: but what the reſt of the Iſland is I know not, for none of us were aſhore but at this place. The next day the Sultan caine aboard again, and preſented Captain Reed with a little Boy, but he was too ſmall to be ſerviceable on board ; and ſo Captain Read recurned thanks, and tol him he was too little for him. Then the Sultan fent for a bigger Boy, which the Captain accepted. This Boy was a very pretty tractable Boy; but what was wonderful in him, he had two rows of Teeth, a Gg 4 one 458 The Crockadore. Neat Proes. iſlands. An. 1687 one within another, on each Jaw. None of the other people were ſo, nor did I ever ſee the like. The Captain was preſented alſo with two He.goats, and was promiſed fome Buffaloe, but I do believe that they have but few of either on the Iſland. We did not ſee any Buffaloe, nor many Goats, neither have they much Rice, but their chiefeſt food is Roots. We bought here about a thouſand pound weight of Potatoes. Here our men bought alſo abun- dance of Crockadores,and fine large Parakites,curi - puſly calour'd, and ſome of the fineſt I ever ſaw. The Crockadore is as big as a Parrot, and ſhaped much like it, with ſuch a Bill; but is as white as Milk, and hath a bunch of Feathers on his head like a Crown. At this place we bought a Proe alſo of the Mindanayan make, for our own uſe, which our Carpenters afterwards altered, and made a delicate Boat fit for any ſervice. She was ſharp at both ends, but we fawd off one, and made that end flat, faſtening a Rudder to it, and ſhe rowed and failed incomparably. We ſtayed here but till the 12th day, becauſe it was a bad Harbour and foul Ground, and a bad time of the year too, for the Tornadoes began to come in thick, and ſtrong. ſtrong. When we went to weigh our Anchor, it was hooked in a Rock , and we broke our Cable, and could not get our Anchor, though we ſtrove hard for it; fo we went away and left it there. We had the Wind at N.N.E, and we ſteered towards the S. E. and fell in with 4 or 5 ſmall Iſlands, that lye in şd. 49 m. South lat. and about 5 or 6 leagues S from Callaſuſung Harbour. Theſe Iſlands appeared very green with Coco-nut Trees, and we ſaw two or three Towns on them, and heard a Drum all night; for we were goe in among ſhoals, and could not get out again till the next day. We know not whether the Drum were for fear of us Of ijles of Timor, Omba, and Pentare. 459 or that they were making merry as 'tis uſual in An. 1687 theſe pares to do all the night, finging and dancing till morning We found a pretty ſtrong Tide here, the flood fetting to the Soutward, and the ebb to the North- ward. Theſe ſhoals, and many other that are not laid down in our Drafts, lye on the South Weſt ſide of the Iſlands where we heard the Drum, a- bout a league from them. At laſt we paſt be- tween the iſlands, and tried for a paſſage on the Eaſt fide. We met with divers ſhoals on this ſide alſo, but found Channels to paſs through; ſo we feered away for the Iſland Timor, irtending to paſs out by it. We had the winds commonly at W.S.W. and S. W. hard gales, and rainy weather. The 16th day, we got clear of the ſhoals, and ſtee- red S.by E. with the V Vind at VV.S.VV. but veering every half hour, ſometimes at S. VV.and then again ac VV, and ſometimes at N. N.VV. bringing much Rain, with Thunder and Lightening. The 20th day we paſſed by the Iſland Omba,which is a pretty high Iſland, lying in lat. 8 d. 20 m.and not above 5 or 6 leagues from the N. E. part of the Iſland Timor. It is about 13 or 14 leagues long, and ş or 6 leagues wide. About 7 or 8 leagues to the VVeſt of Omba, is a- nother pretty large Iſland, but it had no name in our plats; yer by the ſituation it ſhould be that, which in ſome Maps is called Pentare. We ſaw on it abun- dance of ſmoaks by day, and fires by night, and a large Town on the North ſide of it, not far from the Sea; but it was ſuch bad weather that we did not go aſhore. Between Omba and Pentare, and in the mid Channel, there is a ſmall low ſandy Iſland, with great ſhọals on either ſides bue there is a very good Channel cloſe by Pentare, between them and the ſhoals about the ſmall Ille. We were three days beating off and on, not having 460 tare. came A difficult paſſage. Timor and other iſles. An. 1687 having a wind, for it was at South South Weſt. The 23d day in the evening, having a ſmall gale at North, we got through, keeping cloſe by Pen- The Tide of ebb here ſet out to the South- ward, by which we were helped through, for we had but little wind, but this Tide, which did us a kindneſs in ſetting us through, had like to have ruined us afterwards, for there are two ſmall Iſlands lying at the South end of the Channel we came through, and towards theſe Iſlands the Tide hurried ſo ſwifily, that we very narrow- ly eſcaped being driven aſhore ; for the little wind we had before at North dyed away, we had not one breath of wind when we there, neither was there an anchor ground. But we got out our Oars and rowed, yet all in vain : for the Tide ſet wholly on one of the ſmall Inands, that we were forced by might and main ſtrength to bear off the Ship, by thruſting with our Oars againſt the ſhore, which was a ſteep bank, and by this means we preſently drove away, clear of Danger; and having a little wind in the night at North, we fteered away S. S.W. In the morning again we had the wind at W. S. W. and ſteered S. and the wind coming to the W.N.W. we ſteered S. W, to get clear of the S. W. end of the Iſland Timor. The 26th day we ſaw the N. W. point of Timer, S. E. by E. diſtant about 8 leagues. Timor is a long high mountainous Ifand, ſtretch- ing N. E. and S. W. It is about 70 leagues long,and 15 or 16 wide: the middle of the Iſland is in Lat. a- bout 9 d. South. I have been informed that the Portugueſe do trade to this Iſland: buc I know nothing of its produce beſides Coire, for making Cables; of which there is mention Chap. X. The 27th day we ſaw two ſmall Iſlands which lye near the S. W. end of Timor: They bear from us S. E. We had very hard gales of wind, and ſtill A Shoal near Timor, paſt with difficulty. 461 ſtill with a great deal of Rain: the Wind at W. An. 1687 and W. S.W. Being now clear of all the Illands, we ſtood off South, intending to touch at New Holland, a part of Terra Auſtralis Incognita, to ſee what that Country would afford us. Indeed, as the Winds were, we could not now keep our intended courſe (which was firſt Weſterly, and then Northerly) without going to New Holland, unleſs we had gone back again a- mong the Iſlands : but this was not a good time of the year to be among any Iſlands to the South of the E- quator, unleſs in a good Harbour. The 31ſt day we were in lac. 13 d. 20 m. ſtill franding to the Southward, the wind bearing com- monly very hard at W. and we keeping upon it under 2 courſes, and our Mizen, and ſometimes a Main-top-fail rift. About 10 of the clock at night we tackt and ſtood to the Northward, for fear of run- ning on a ſhoal, which is laid down in our Drafts in lat. 13 d. som. or thereabouts: ic bearing S by W. from the Eaſt end of Timor: and ſo the Iſland bora from us, by our judgments and recko- ning. At 3 of the clock we tacke again, and ſtood S. by W. and S. S.W. In the morning afſoon as it was day, we ſaw the ſhoal right ahead; it lies in 13 d. so m. by all our reckonings. It is a ſmall ſpit of hand, juſt ap- pearing above the waters edge, with ſeveral Rocks about it, 8 or to foot high above water. It lies in a triangular form; each ſide being about a league and half. We ftemm'd right with the middle of it, and ſtood within half a mile of the Rocks, and ſounded, but found no ground. Then we went abour and food to the North 2 hours; and then tackt and food to the Southward again, thinking to weather it; but could not. So we bore away on the North ſide, till we came to the Eaſt point, giving the Rocks a ſmall birth: then we trimb'd ſharp a 3 462 An Error of the Hydrographers. New Holland. An, 1688 ſharp, and ſtood to the Southward, paſſing cloſe it, and founded again ; but found no ground. This ſhoal is laid down in our Drafts not above 16 or 20 leagues from New Holland; but we did run afterwards 60 leagues due South before we fell in with it: and I am very confident, that no part of New Holland hereabouts lyes ſo far Northerly by 40 leagues, as it is laid down in our Drafts. For if New Holland were laid down true, we muſt of ne- cefficy have been driven near 40 leagues to the Weſtward of our courſe; but this is very impro- bable, that the Current ſhould ſet ſo ſtrong to the V Veſtward, ſeeing we had ſuch a conſtant VVeſterly V Vind. I grant that when the Monſoon ſhifts firſt, the Current does not preſently ſhift, but runs afrer. wards near a Month, but the Monſoon had been ſhifted at leaſt two Months now. But of the Mon- ſoons and other V Vinds, and of the Currents, elſe- where, in their proper place. As to theſe here, I do rather believe that the Land is not laid down true, than that the Current deceived us; for it was more probable we ſhould have been deceived before we met with the ſhoal, than afterward: for on the Coaſt of New Holland we found the Tides keeping their conſtant courſe; the Flood running N. by E. and the Ebb S. by VV. The 4th day of January 1688, we fell in with the Land of New Holland in the Lat. of 16 d. som. having, as I ſaid before, made our courſe due South from the ſhoal that we paſt by the 31ſt day of December. VVeran in cloſe by it, and finding no convenient anchoring, becauſe it lies open to the N. VV. we ran along ſhore to the Eaſtward, ſteer- ing N. E. by E. for ſo the Land lies. VVe ſteered thus about 12 leagues; and then came to a point of Land, from whence the Land trends Eaſt and Southerly, for 10 or 12 leagues: but how afterwards I know not, About 3 leagues to the Eaſtward of this New Holland. Dragon-trees. The Animals. 463 this point , there is a pretty deep Bay, with abun-An. 1688 dance of Iſlands in it, and a very good place to m Anchor in, or to hale aſhore. About a league to the Eaſtward of that point we Anchored January the sth. 1688. 2 mile from the ſhore, in 29 fathom, good hard fand, and clean ground. New Holland is a very large tract of Land. It is not yet determined whether it is an Iſland or a main Continent ; but I am certain that it joyns neither to Aſia, Africa, nor America. This part of it that we ſaw is all low even Land, with ſandy Banks againſt the Sea, only the points are rocky, and ſo are ſome of the Iſlands in this Bay. The Land is of a dry ſandy ſoil, deſtitute of Water', except you make Wells: yec producing divers ſorts of Trees: but the Woods are not thick, nor the Trees very big. Moſt of the Trees that we ſaw are Dragon-trees as we ſuppoſed; and theſe too are the largeſt Trees of any there. They are about the bigneſs of our large Apple Trees, and about the ſame heighth: and the rind is blackiſh, and ſomewhat rough. The leaves are of a dark colour ; the Gum diftills out of the knots or cracks that are in the bodies of the Trees. We compared . it with ſome Gum-Dragon, or Dragons Blood, that was aboard; and it was of the ſame colour and tafte. The other ſorts of Trees were not known by any of us. There was pretty long graſs growing under the Trees ; but it was very thin. We ſaw no Trees that bore Fruit or Berries. We ſaw no ſort of Animal, nor any track of Beaſt, but once; and that ſeemed to be the tread of a Beaſt as big as a great Maſtiff Dog. Here are a few ſmall Land-birds, but none bigger than a Blackbird : and but few Sea-fowls. Neither is the Sea very plentifully ftored with Fiſh, unleſs you reckon the Manate and Turtle as ſuch. Of theſe creatures there is plenty; but they are extraordinary Thy 464 The poor winking People of New Holland. An.1688 ſhy; though the Inhabitants cannot trouble them much, having neither Boats nor Iron. The Inhabitants of this Country are the miſera- bleſt People in the world. The Hodmadods of Mo- nomat apa, though a naſty People, yet for Wealth are Gentlemen to theſe; who have no Houſes and Skin Garmenrs, Sheep, Poultry, and Fruits of the Earth, Oſtrich Eggs, &c. as the Hod madods have: and ſetting aſide their humane ſhape, they differ but little from Brutes. They are tall, ſtrait bo- died, and thin, with ſmall long Linibs. They have great Heads, round Foreheads, and great Brows. Their Eye-lids are always half cloſed, to keep the Flies out of their Eyes: they being ſo troubleſome here, that no fanning will keep them from coming to ones Face; and without the aſſiſtance of both hands to keep them off, they will creep into ones Nostrils; and Mouth too, if the Lips are not ſhuc very cloſe. So chat from their Infancy being thus annoyed with theſe Inſects, they do never open their Eyes, as other People : and therefore they cannot ſee far, unleſs they hold up their Heads, as if they were looking at ſomewhat over them. They have great Bottle noſes, pretty full lips, and wide mouths. The two fore teech of their up- per Jaw are wanting in all of them, Men and Wo- inen, old and young: whether they draw them out, I know not: Neither have they any Beards. . They are long viſaged, and of a very unpleaſing aſpect ; having no one graceful feature in their faces. Their Hair is black, thort and curld, like that of the Negroes: and not long and lank like the common Indians. The colour of their skins, both of their faces and the reſt of their body, is coal black, like that of the Negrocs of Guinea. They have no ſort of Cloaths; but a pieee of the rind of a Tree oy d like a Girdle about their waſtes, and a handful of long Graſs, or 3 or 4 ſmail 465 Their living on Small Fiſh left aground. ſmall green Boughs , full of Leaves, thruft under An. 1688 their Girdle, to cover their nakedneſs. They have no Houſes, but lye in the open Air, without any covering ; the Earth being their Bed, and the Heaven their Canopy. Whether they co- habit one Man co one Woman, or promiſcuouſly, I know not : but they do live in Companies, 20 or 30 Men, Women, and Children together. Their only food is a ſmall ſort of Fiſh, which they gec by making Wares of ſtone , acroſs little Coves, or branches of the Sea : every Tide bringing in the ſmall Fiſh, and there leaving them for a prey to theſe people, who conſtantly attend there, to ſearch for them at low water. This ſmall Fry I take to be the top of their Fiſhery: they have no Inſtru- ments to catch great Fiſh, ſhould they come ; and ſuch ſeldom ſtay to be left behind at low water : nor could we carch any Fiſh with our Hooks and Lines all the while we lay there. In other places at low water they ſeek for Cockles, Muſcles, and Periwincles : Of theſe Shell- fiſh there are fewer ſtill; ſo that their chiefeſt dependance is upon whać the Sea leaves in their Wares; which, be it much or little they gather up, and march to the places of their abode. There the old People, that are not able to ſtir abroad, by reaſon of their Age, and the tender Infants, wait their return; and what Providence has beſtowed on them, they preſently broil on the Coals, and eat it in common. Some- times they get as many Fiſh as makes them a plenti- ful Banquet ; and at other times they ſcarce get every one a taſte: but be it little or much that they get, every one has his part, as well the young and tender, as the old and feeble, who are not able tơ go abroad, as the ſtrong and lufty. When they have eaten they lie down till the next low water, and then all that are able to march out, be it night or day, rain, or ſhine, 'cis all one : they muſt attend the Wares, 466 Their Arms. How Indians get Fire. An. 1688 Wares, or elſe they muſt faſt: For the Earth afford them no food at all. There is neither Herb, Root, Pulſe, or any ſort of Grain, for them to eat, that we ſaw: nor any ſort of Bird, or Beaſt that they can catch, having no Inſtruments where- withal co do ſo. I did not perceive that they did worſhip any thing. Theſe poor creatures have a ſort of Wea- pon to defend their Ware, or fight with their Ene- mies, if they have any that will interfere with their poor Filhery. They did at firſt endeavour with their Weapons to frighten us, who lying aſhore de- terr'd them from one of their Fiſhing places. Some of them had Wooden Swords, others had a ſort of Lances. The Sword is a peace of Wood, ſhaped ſomewhat like a Cutlaſs. The Lance is a long ſtrait pole, ſharp at one end, and hardened after- wards by heat. I ſaw no Iron, nor any other ſort of Metal: therefore it is probable they uſe Stone- Hatchets, as ſome Indians in America do , der- cribed in Chap. IV. How they get their Fire, I know not: but, pro- bably, as Indians do, out of Wood. I have ſeen the Indians of Bun- Airy do it, and have my ſelf tryed the experiment : They take a flat piece of Wood, that is pretty ſoft, and make a ſmall dent in one fide of it: then they take another hard round ſtick, about the bigneſs of ones little finger, and ſharp- ing it at one end like a Pencil, they put that ſharp end in the hole or dent of the flat ſoft piece; and then rubbing or twirling the hard piece between the palms of their hands, they drill the ſoft piece till it ſmoaks, and at laſt takes fire. Theſe people ſpeak ſomewhat through the throat; but we could not underſtand one word that they ſaid. We Anchored, as I ſaid before , fangary the 5th, and ſeeing Men walking on the ſhore, we preſently ſent a Canoa to get ſome acquaintance With > The People on the Iſlands. 467 with them : For we were in hopes to get ſome Pro- An. 1688. viſion among them. But the Inhabitants, ſeeing our Boat coming, run away and hid themſelves. We ſearched afterwards three days, in hopes to find their Houſes, but found none : Yet we ſaw many places where they had made Fires. At laſt, being out of hopes to find their Habitations, we ſearched no farther ; but left a great many Toys aſhore, in ſuch places where we thought that they would come. In all our ſearch we found no Water, but old Wells on the Sandy Bays. At laſt, we went over to the Iſlands, and there we found a great many of the Natives : Í do believe there were 40 on one Iſland, Men, Women, and Children. The Men, at our firſt coming aſhore threatened us with their Lances and Swords; but they were frighted by firing one Gun, which we fired purpoſely to ſcare them. The Iſland was ſo ſmall, that they could not hide themſelves : But they were much diſordered at our Landing, eſpecially the Women and Children; for we went directly to their Camp. The luftieft of the Women ſnatching up their Infants ran away howling, and the little Children run after ſqueaking and bawling ; but the Men ſtood ftill. Some of the Women, and ſuch People as could not go from us, lay ſtill by a Fire, making a doleful noiſe, as if we had been coming to devour thein : But when they ſaw we did not intend to harm them, they were pretty quiet, and the reſt chat fled from us at our firft coming, re- turned again. This their Place of Dwelling was only a Fire, with a few Boughs before it, ſet up on that ſide the Wind was of. After we had been here a little while, the Men began to be familiar, and we cloathed ſome of them, deſigning to have had ſome Service of them for it: For we found ſome Wells of Water here.and intended to carry cwo or three Barrels of ic aboard. Hh Buc . 468 The New-Hollander's not curious. A».1688. But it being ſomewhat troubleſom to carry to the Canoas, we thought to have made theſe Men to have carried it for us, and therefore we gave them ſome Cloaths; to one an old pair of Breeches, to another a ragged Shirt, to a third a Jacket that was ſcarce worth owning; which yer would have been very acceptable at ſome Places where we had been, and ſo we thought they might have been with theſe People. We put them on them, think- ing that this finery would have brought them to work heartily for us; and our Water being filled in ſmall long Barrels, about ſix Gallons in each , which were made purpoſely to carry Water in, we brought theſe our new Servants to the Weils, and put a Barrel on each of their Shoulders for them to carry to the Canoa. But all the ſigns we could make were to no purpoſe, for they ſtood like Statues, without motion, but grinn'd like ſo many Monkeys, ſtaring one upon another : For theſe poor Creatures ſeein not accuſtomed to carry Burthens; and I believe that one of our Ship-boys of Ten Years old, would carry as much as one of them. So we were forced to carry our Water our felves, and they very fairly put the Cloaths off again, and laid them down, as if Cloaths were only to work in. I did not perceive that they had any great liking to them at firſt, neither did they ſeem to admire any thing that we had. At another time our Canoa being among theſe Iſands ſeeking for Game, eſpyd a drove of theſe Men ſwimming from one Iſland to another ; for they have no Boats, Canoas, or Bark-logs. They took up four of them, and brought them aboard; two of them were middle aged, the other two were Young Men about 18 or 20 Years old. To theſe we gave boiled Rice, and with it Turtle and Manatee boiled. They did greedily devour what we gave them, but took no notice of the Ship, or any Their Shieneſs. The Tides here. 469 any thing in it, and when they were ſet on Land An. 1688. again, they ran away as faſt as they could. At our firſt coming, before we were acquainted with them, or they with us, a Company of them who liv'd on the Main, came juſt againſt our Ship, and ſtanding on a pretty high Bank, threatned us with their Swords and Lances, by ſhaking them at us; at laſt the Captain ordered the Drum to be beaten, which was done of a ſudden with much vigour, purpoſely to ſcare the poor Creatures. They hear- ing the noiſe, ran away as faſt as they could drive, and when they ran away in haſte, they would cry, Gurry, Garry, ſpeaking deep in the Throar. Thoſe Inhabitants alſo that live on the Main, would al- ways run away from us; yet we took ſeveral of chem. For, as I have already obſerved, they had fuch bad Eyes, that they could not ſee us till we came cloſe to them. We did always give them Vi- ctuals, and let them go again; but the Iſlanders, after our firſt time of being among them, did not ftir for us. When we had been here about a Week, we hald our Ship into a Imall Sandy Cove, at a Spring- tide, as far as ſhe would float; and at low Water ſhe was left dry, and the Sand dry without us near half a Mile ; for the Sea riſeth and failech here about five Fathom. The Flood runs North by Eaſt, and the Ebb South by Weſt. All the Neep-cides we lay wholly a-ground, for the Sea did not come near us by about a hundred Yards. We had therefore time enough to clean our Ship's bottom, which we did very well. Moſt of our Men lay aſhore in a Tent, where our Sails were mending; and our Strikers brought home Turtle and Manatee every day, which was our conſtant Food. While we lay here, I did endeavour to perſwade our Men to go to fome Engliſh Factory; but was chreatened to be turned alhore, and left here for Hh2 is. a a 3 470 They deſign for Cocos, and Cape Comorin. An.1688. it. This made me defift, and patiently wait for ſome more convenient Place and Opportunity to leave them, than here : Which I did hope I ſhould accompliſh in a ſhort time; becauſe they did in- tend, when they went from hence, to bear down towards Cape Comorin. In their way thither they deſign'd alſo to viſit the Illand Cocos, which liech in Lat. 12 d. 12 m. North, by our Drafts : Hoping there to find of that Fruit; the Iſland having its Name from thence. fed doo - Wod was bas baw C H A P. Solo SIIS COM Lo hanno 471 An.1688. 9 СНАР C H A P. XVII. Leaving New-Holland, they paſs by the Iſland Cocos, and touch at Another Woody Iſland near it A Land Animal like large Cram- fiſh. Coco-Nuts floating in the Sea. The Ipand Triſte, bearing Coco's, get over-flown every Spring-tide. They Anchor at a ſmall Illand near that of Naſſaw. Hog Tjland, and others. A Proe taken, belonging to Achin. Nicobar Iſland, and the reſt called by that Name. Ambergreaſe, good and bad. The manners of the Inhabitants of theſe iſlands. They Anchor at Nicobar Iſle. Its Situation, Soil , and pleaſant Mixture of its Bays, Trees, &c. The Melory-Tree and Fruit, ufid for Bread. The Natives of Nicobar Iſland, their Form, Habit, Language, Habitations ; no form of Religion or Government : Their Food and Canoas. They clean the Ship. The Au- thor projects and gets leave to stay aſhore here, and with him two Engliſhmen more, the Por- tugueſe, and four Malayans of Achin. Their firſt Rencounters with the Natives. Of the common Traditions concerning Cannibals, or Man-Eaters. Their Entertainment afbore. They buy a Canoa, to Tranſport them over to Achin; but over fet her at firſt going out. Having recruited and improved her, they ſet out again for the Eaſt-ſide of the Iſland. They bave Hh3 472 An.1688. They in vain try fir the Ife Cocos. bave a War with the Iſlanders : But Peace be- ing re-eſtabliſhed, they lay in ſtores, and make Preparations for their Voyage. M4 , Arch the 12th. 1688. we ſailed from New- Holland, with the Wind at NNW. and fair Weather. We directed our Courſe to the North- ward, intending, as I ſaid, to touch at the Illand Cocos : But we met with the Winds at N. W. W.N. W. and N. N. W. for ſeveral days ; which obliged us to keep a more Eaſterly courſe than was convenient to find that Iſland. We had ſoon after our ſetting out very bad Weather, with much Thunder and Lightning, Rain, and high bluftring Winds. It was the 26th. day of March before we were in the Lat. of the Iſland Cocos, which is in 12 d. 12 m. , and then, by judgment, we were 40 or 5o Leagues to the Eaſt of it; and the Wind was now at S. W. Therefore we did rather chuſe to bear away to- wards fome Iſlands on the Weſt ſide of Sumatra, than to beat againſt the Wind for the Iſland Cocos. I was very glad of this ; being in hopes to make my eſcape from them to Sumatra , or ſome other Place. We met nothing of Remark in this Voyage, beſide the catching two great Sharks, till the 28th. day. Then we fell in with a ſmall Woody Iſland, in Lat. 10 d. 30 m. Its Longitude from New-Holland, from whence we came, was, by my Account, 12 d. 6m. Weft. It was deep Water about the iſland, and therefore no Anchoring : But we ſent two Canoas aſhore; one of them with the Carpenters, to cut a Tree to make another Pump; the other Canoa went to ſearch for freſh Water, and found a fine ſmall Brook near the S. W. Point of the Iſand; but there the Sea fell in on the Shore ſo high, that they 2 A Land Animal like Craw-fiſh. 473 they could not get it off. At Noon both our Ca- An.1688. noas returned aboard: And the Carpenters brought aboard a good Tree, which they afterwards made a Pump with, ſuch a one as they made at Mindanao. The other Canoa brought aboard as many Boobies, and Men of War Birds, as ſufficed all the Ship’s Company, when they were boiled They got alſo a fort of Land Animal, ſomewhat reſembling a large Craw-fish, without its great Claws. Theſe Crea- tures lived in holes in the dry Sandy Ground, like Rabbits. Sir Francis Drake, in his Voyage round the World, makes mention of ſuch that he found at Ter- nate, or ſome other of the Spice Iſlands, or near them. They were very good ſweet Meat, and ſo large, that two of them were more than a Man could eat; being almoſt as thick as ones Leg. Their Shells were of a dark brown, but red when boiled. This Iſland is of a good heighth, with ſteep Cliffs againſt the S. and S. W. and a Sandy Bay on the North ſide; but very deep Water ſteep to the ſhore. The Mold is blackiſh, the Soil fat, producing large Trees of divers forts. About One a Clock in the Afternoon we made Sail from this Iſland, with the Wind at S. W. and we ſteered N. W. Afterwards the Winds came about at N. W. and continued between the W.N.W. and the N. N. W. ſeveral days. I obſerved, that the Winds blew for the moſt part out of the Weſt, or N. W. and then we had always Rainy Weather , with Tornadoes, and much Thunder and Light- ning: But when the Wind came any way to the Southward, it blew but faint, and brought fair Weather. We met nothing of Remark till the 7th day of April, and then, being in Lat. 7 d. S. we ſaw the Land of Sumatra at a great diſtance, bearing North. The Sth. day we ſaw the Eaſt end of the Iſland Sumatra Hh 4 474 Triſte, an Iſle near Sumatra. An. 1688. Sumatra very plainly : We being then in Lat. 6 d. S. The roth. day, being in Lat. 5 d. 1 m. and about . 7 or 8 Leagues from the Iſland Sumatra, on the Weſt ſide of it, we ſaw abundance of Coco-Nuts ſwim- ming in the Sea; and we hoiſed out our Boat, and took up ſome of them; as alſo a ſmall Hatch, or Scuttle rather, belonging to ſome Bark. The Nuts were very ſound, and the Kernel ſweet, and in ſome the Milk or Water in them was yet ſweet and good. The 13th. day we came to a ſmall Ifand, called Triſte, in Lat. (by Obſervation ) 4 d. South : It is about 14 or is Leagues to the Weſt of the Inand Sumatra. From hence to the Northward there are a great many ſmall uninhabited Iſlands, lying much at the ſame diſtance from Sumatra. This Iſand Triſte is not a Mile round, and ſo low, that the Tide flows clear over it. It is of a Sandy Soil , and full of Coco-Nut Trees. The Nuts are but ſmall, yet ſweet enough, full , and more ponderous than I ever felt any of that bigneſs; notwithſtand- ing that every Spring.tide the Salt Water goes clear over the Iſland. We fent afhore our Canoas for Coco-Nuts, and they return'd aboard laden with them three times. Our Strikers alſo went out and ſtruck ſome Fiſh, which was boiled for Supper. They alſo killed two young Aligators, which we falted for the next day. I had no Opportunity at this place to make my Eſcape, as I would have done, and gone over hence to Sumatra, could I have kept a Boat with me. But there was no compaſſing this: And ſo the asth. day we went from hence, ſteering to the Northward on the Weſt ſide of Sumatra. Our Food now was Rice, and the Meat of the Coco-Nuts raſped, and ſteeped in Water ; which made a ſort of Milk, into which we did put our Rice, making a pleaſant Meſs Iſle Naſſau. Hog-ifle, &c. A Proe taken. 475 Meſs enough. After we parted from Triſte, we ſaw An. 1688. other ſmall Iſlands, that were alſo full of Coco-Nut Trees. The 19th. Day, being in Lat. 3 d. 25 m. S. the S. W. Point of the Iſland Naſſau bore N. about S miles dift. This is a pretty large uninhabited Iſland; in Lat. 3 d. 20 m. S. and is full of high Trees. A- bout a mile from the Iſland Naſſau there is a ſmall Iland full of Coco-Nut Trees. There we anchored the 20th day to repleniſh our ſtock of Coco-Nuts. A Riff of 'Rocks lies almoſt round this Iſland, ſo that our Boats could not go aſhore, nor come aboard at low Water ; yet we got aboard four Boat loads of Nues. This Iſland is low like Triſte, and the Anchoring is on the North ſide; where you have fourteen Fathom, a Mile from ſhore, clean Sand. The 21ſt. day we went from hence, and kept to the Northward, coaſting ſtill on the Weft ſide of the Iſland Sumatra ; and having the Winds between the W. and S. S. W. with unſettled Weather: Some- times Rains and Tornadoes, and ſometimes fair Weather. The 25th. day we croſs'd the Equator, ſtill coaſt- ing to the Northward, between the Iſland Sumatra, and a Range of ſmall Iſlands, lying 14 or 15 Leagues off it. Among all theſe Iſlands, Hog Iſland is the moſt conſiderable. In lies in lat. 3 d. North. It is pretty high even Land, cloathed with tall flouriſhing Trees; we paſt by it the 28th. day The 29th. we ſaw a Sail to the North of us which we chaſed : But it being little Wind, we did not come up with her till the zoth. day. Then, being within a League of her, Captain Read went in a Canoa and took her, and brought her aboard. She was a Proe with four Men in her, be- Jonging to Achin , whither ſhe was bound. She 40m. 9 Game 476 The W. Coast. Achin Harbour. An.1688. came from one of theſe Coco-Nut Ilands that we paſt by, and was laden with Coco-Nuts, and Coco- Nut Oyl. Captain Read ordered his Men to take aboard all the Nuts, and as much of the Oyl as he thought convenient, and then cut a hole in the bot- tom of the Proe, and turned her looſe, keeping the Men Priſoners It was not for the lucre of the Cargo, that Cap- tain Read took this Boat, but to hinder me and ſome others from going alhore; for he knew that we were ready to make our eſcapes, if an Opportunity preſented it ſelf; and he thought, that by his abu- ſing and robbing the Natives, we ſhould be afraid to truſt our felves among them. But yet this proceed- ing of his turned to our great Advantage, as ſhall be declared hereafter. May the ift. we ran down by the North Weſt end of the Iſland Sumatra, within 7 or 8 Leagues of the ſhore. All this Welt ſide of Sumatra which we thus coafted along, our Engliſhmen at Fort St. George, call the Weſt Coaſt, ſimply; without adding the name of Sumatra. The Priſoners who were taken the day before, Shewed us the Iſlands that lie off of Achin Harbour, and the Channels through which Ships go in; and told us alſo, that there was an Engliſh Factory at Achin. I wiſh'd my ſelf there, but was forced to wait with Patience till my time was come. We were now directing our courſe towards the Nicobar Iſands, intending there to clean the Ship’s bottom, in order to make her Sail well. The 4th. day in the Evening, we had ſight of one of the Nicobar Ilands. The Southermoſt of them lies about 40 Leagues N.N. W. from the N. W. end of the Idland Sumatra. This moft Southerly of them is Nicobar it ſelf, but all the cluſter of Iſlands lying South of the Andeman Iſlands, are called by our Seamen the Nicobar Iſlands, The . The Nicobar Iſlands. Ambergreafe. 477 The Inhabitants of theſe Iſlands have no certain An. 1688. converſe with any Nation; but as Ships paſs by them, they will come aboard in their Proes, and offer their Commodities to fale, never enquiring of what Nation they are; for all white People are alike to them. Their chiefeſt Commodities are Ambergreaſe and Fruits. Ambergreaſe is often found by the Native In- dians of theſe Ilands, who know it very well; as alſo know how to cheat ignorant Strangers with a certain mixture like it. Several of our Men bought ſuch of them for a ſmall purchaſe. Cap- tain Weldon alſo about this time touched at ſome of theſe Iſland, to the North of the Iſland where we lay : And I ſaw a great deal of ſuch Ambergreaſe, that one of his Men bought there ; but it was not good, having no ſmell at all. Yet I ſaw ſome there very good and fragrant. At that Iſland where Captain Weldon was, there were two Fryers fent thither to convert the Indians. One of them came away with Captain Weldors, the other remained there ftill. He that came away with Captain Weldon gave a very good Character of the Inhabitants of that Ifland, viz. that they were very honeft, civil, harmleſs People : That they were not addicted to Quarrelling, Theft, or Mur- der ; that they did Marry, or at leaſt live as Man and Wife, one Man with one Woman, never chan- ging till Death made the ſeparation : That they were punctual and honeſt in performing their Bargains : And that they were inclined to receive the Chri- ftian Religion. This Relation I had afterwards from the mouth of a Prieſt at Tongueen, who told me, that he received this Information by a Letter from the Fryer that Captain Weldon brought away from thence. But to proceed. isto to The sth. day of May we ran down on the Weſt ſide of the Iland Nicobar, properly ſo called, and anchored a 478 Nicobar Iſle. The Melory Tree and Fruit. An.1688. anchored at the N. W. end of it, in a ſmall Bay, in 8 Fathom Water, not half Mile from the ſhore. The body of this Iſand is in 7 d. 30 m. North Lat. it is about twelve Leagues long, and three or four broad. The South-end of it is pretty high, with ſteep Cliffs againſt the Sea : The reſt of the Illand low, flat, and even. The mold of it is black, and deep; and it is very well watered with ſmall run- ning Streams. It produceth abundance of tall Trees, fit for any uſes : For the whole bulk of it ſeems to be but one entire Grove. But that which adds moſt to its beauty off at Sea, are the many ſpots of Coco- Nut Trees which grow round it in every ſmall Bay, The Bays are half a Mile, or a Mile long, more or leſs; and theſe Bays are intercepted, or divided from each other, with as many little Rocky Points of Woodland. As the Coco-Nut Trees do thus grow in Groves, fronting to the Sea, in the Bays, ſo there is another ſort of Fruit-Tree in the Bays bordering on the back-ſide of the Coco-Trees, farther from the Sea. It is called by the Natives a Melory Tree. This Tree is as big as our large Apple-Trees, and as high. It hath a blackiſh Rind, and a pretty broad Leaf. The Fruit is as big as the Bread-fruit at Guam, de- ſcribed in Chapter X. or a large Penny Loaf. It is ſhaped like a Pear, and hath a pretty tough ſmooth Rind, of a light green colour. The infide of the Fruit is in ſubſtance much like an Apple; but full of ſmall ſtrings, as big as a brown thread. I did never ſee of theſe Trees any where but here. The Natives of this Iſland are tall, well-limb'd Men: Pretty long viſaged, with black Eyes; their Noſes middle proportioned, and the whole Sym- metry of their Faces agreeing very well. Their Hair is black and lank, and their Skins of a dark Copper colour. The Women have no Hair on their > a а a a The Natives: Their Language, Houſes, &c. 479 their Eye-brows. I do believe it is pluckt up by the An. 1688. Roots; for the Men had Hair growing on their Eye-brows, as other People. The Men go all naked ſave only a long narrow piece of Cloath, or Saſh, which going round their Waftes, and thence down between their Thighs, is brought up behind, and tuckt in at that part which goes about the Waſte. The Women have a kind of a ſhort Petticoat reaching from their Waſte to their Knees. Their Language was different from any that I had ever heard before; yet they had ſome few Ma- layan words, and ſome of them had a word or two of Portugueſe : Which probably they might learn aboard of their Ships, paſſing by this Place : For when theſe Men ſee a Sail, they do preſently go aboard of them in their Canoas. I did not per- ceive any Form of Religion that they had : They had neither Temple, nor Idol, nor any manner of outward Veneration to any Deity, that I did ſee. They inhabit all round the Inand by the Sea-ſide, in the Bays; there being four or five Houſes, more or leſs, in each Bay. Their Houſes are built on Pofts, as the Mindanaians are. They are ſmall, low, and of a ſquare Form. There is but one Room in each Houſe, and this Room is about Eight Foot from the Ground : And from thence the Roof is raiſed about Eight Foot higher. But inſtead of a ſharp ridge, the top is exceeding neatly arched with ſmall Rafters about the bigneſs of a Man's Arm, bent round like a Half-Moon, and very curiouſly thatched with Palmeto-leaves. They live under no Government that I could perceive; for they ſeem to be equal, without any diſtinction; every Man Ruling in his own Houſe. Their Plantations are only thoſe Coco-Nut Trees which grow by the Sea-ſide ; there being no cleared Land farther in on the Iſland: For I obſerved that when 480 Their dreſsing their Melory. Their Canoas. An. 1688. when paſt the Fruit-Trees, there were no Paths to be ſeen going into the Woods. The greateſt uſe which they make of their Coco-Trees, is to draw Toddy from them, of which they are very fond. The Melory Trees ſeem to grow wild: They have great Earthen Pots to boil the Melory Fruit in, which will hold 12 or 14 Gallons. Theſe Pots they fill with the Fruit, and putting in a little Water, they cover the mouth of the Pot with Leaves, to keep in the ſteam, while it boils. When the Fruit is ſoft, they peel off the Rind, and ſcrape the Pulp from the ſtrings with a flat ſtick made like a Knife ; and then make it up in great lumps, as big as a Holland Cheeſe ; and then it will keep ſix or ſeven days. It looks yellow, and taſtes well, and is their chiefeſt Food : For they have no Yams, Potatoes, Rice, nor Plantains (except a very few ;) yet they have a few ſmall Hogs, and a very few Cocks and Hens like ours. The Men employ themſelves in Fiſhing ; but I did not ſee much Fiſh that they got : Every Houſe hath at leaſt two or three Canoas be- longing to it, which they draw up alhore. The Canoas that they go a Fiſhing in, are ſharp at both ends; and both the ſides and the bottom are very thin and ſmooth. They are ſhaped ſomewhat like the Proes at Guam, with one ſide fiattiſh, and the other with a pretty big belly : And they have ſmall flight Outlagers on one ſide. Being thus thin and light, they are better managed with Oars than with Sails ; yet they Sail well enough, and are ſteered with a Paddle. There commonly go Twenty or Thirty Men in one of theſe Canoas, and feldom fewer than Nine or Ten. Their Oars are ſhort, and they do not paddle, but row with them, as we do. The Benches they ſit on, when they row, are made of ſplit Bambo's, laid a-croſs, and ſo near together, that they look like a Deck The Bam- bo's lie moveable; ſo that when any go in to row, they The Author's reaſons for ſtaying here. 481 they take up a Bambo in the place where they would An. 1688. fit, and lay it by to make room for their Legs. The Canoas of thoſe of the reſt of theſe Ilands were like thoſe of Nicobar : And probably they were alike in other things ; for we ſaw no difference at all in the Natives of them, who came hither while we were here. But to proceed with our Affairs : It was, as I ſaid before, the sth. day of May, about Ten in the Morn- ing, when we anchored at this Iſand: Captain Read immediately ordered his Men to heel the Ship, in order to clean her; which was done this day and the next. All the Water Veſſels were fill'd, they in- tending to go to Sea at Night : For the Winds being yet at N. N. E. the Captain was in hopes to get over to Cape Comorin before the Wind ſhifted. Other- wiſe it would have been ſomewhat difficult for him to get thither ; becauſe the Wefterly Monſoon was now at hand. I thought now was my time to make my Eſcape, by getting leave, if poſſible, to ſtay here : For it ſeem'd not very feazable to do it by ſtealth ; and I had no reaſon to deſpair of getting leave: This being a place where my ſtay could, probably, do our Crew no harm, ſhould I deſign it. Indeed one reaſon that put me on the thoughts of ſtaying at this particular place, beſides the preſent Oppor- tunity of leaving Captain Read, which I did al- ways intend to do as ſoon as I could, was, that I had here alſo a Proſpect of advancing a profitable Trade for Ambergreaſe with theſe People, and of gaining a conſiderable Fortune to my ſelf: For in a fhort time I might have learned their Language, and by accuſtoming my ſelf to row with them in the Proes or Canoas, eſpecially by conforming my ſelf to their Cuſtoms and Manners of Living, I fhould have ſeen how they got their Ambergreaſe, and have known what quantities they get, and che 482 The Author leaves the ship, and goes aſhore. n. 1688. the time of the Year when moſt is found. And then afterwards I thought it would be eaſie for me to have tranſported my ſelf from thence, ei- cher in fome Ship that paſt this way, whether Engliſh, Dutch, or Portugueſe, or elſe to have gotten ſome of the Young Men of the Iſland to have gone with me in one of their Canoas to Achin; and there to have furniſhed my ſelf with ſuch Commodities, as I found moſt coveted by them; and therewith, at my return, to have bought their Ambergreaſe. I had, till this time, made no open ſhew of go- ing aſhore here : But now, the Water being filld, and the Ship in a readineſs to Sail, I deſired Cap- tain Read to ſet me aſhore on this Iſland. He, fup- poſing that I could not go aſhore in a place leſs frequented by Ships than this, gave me leave; which probably he would have refuſed to have done, if he thought I ſhould have gotten from hence in any ſhort time; for fear of my giving an Account of him to the Engliſh or Dutch. I foon got up my Cheft and Bedding, and immediately got ſome to row me aſhore ; for fear left his mind ſhould change again. The Canoa that brought me aſhore, landed me on a ſmall Sandy Bay, where there were cwo Houſes, but no Perſon in thein. For the Inhabitants were removed to fome other Houſe, probably, for fear of us; becauſe the Ship was cloſe by: And yec both Men and Women came aboard the Ship without any ſign of fear. When our Ship’s Canoa was going aboard again, they met the Owner of the Houſes coming alhore in his Boat. He made a great many figns to them to fetch me off again : But they would not underſtand him. Then he came to me, and offered his Boat to carry me off: But I refuſed it. Then he made ſigns for me to go up into the Houſe, and, according as I did under- ſtand him by his ſigns, and a few Malayan words that The Author goes aſhore. 483 that he uſed, he intimated that ſomewhat would An.1688. come out of the Woods in the Night, when I was aſleep, and kill me, meaning probably ſome Wild Beaſt. Then I carried my Cheſt and Cloaths up into the Houſe. I had not been aſhore an hour before Captain Teat and one John Damarell, with three or four armed Men more came to fetch me aboard again. They need not have ſent an armed Poſle for me; for had they but ſent the Cabbin-Boy aſhore for me, I would not have denied going aboard. For though I could have hid my ſelf in the Woods, yet then they would have abuſed, or have kill'd ſome of the Natives, purpoſely to incenſe them againſt me. I told them therefore, that I was ready to go with them, and went aboard with all my things. When I came aboard I found the Ship in an up- roar : For there were three Men more, who taking courage by my Example, deſired leave alſo to ac- company me. One of them was the Surgeon Mr. Coppenger, the other were Mr. Robert Hall, and one named Ambroſe ; I have forgot his Sir-name. Theſe Men had always harboured the ſame Deſigns as I had. The two laſt were not much oppoſed; but Captain Read and his Crew would not part with the Surgeon. At laſt the Surgeon leapt into the Canoa, and taking up my Gun, ſwore he would go aſhore, and that if any Man did oppoſe it, he would ſhoot him : But John Oliver, who was then Quarter-Maſter, leapt into the Canoa, taking hold of him, took away the Gun, and with the help of two or three more, they dragg’d him again into the Ship. Then Mr. Hall, and Ambroſe, and I were again ſet alhore; and one of the Men chat rowed us alhore ſtole an Ax, and gave it to us, knowing it was a good Commodity with the Indians. It was now dark, therefore we lighted a Candle, and I Ii being 484 Others fet albore with him. An.1688. being the oldeſt ſtander in our new Country, conducted them into one of the Houſes, where we did preſently hang up cur Hammocks. We had ſcarce done this, before the Canoa came alhore a- gain, and brought the four Malaga Men belonging to Achin, (which we took in the Proe we took off of Sumatra) and the Portugueſe that came to our Ship out of the Siam Jonk at Pulo Condore : The Crew having no occaſion for theſe, being leaving the Malayan Parts, where the Portugueſe Spark ſerved as an Inter- preter; and not fearing now that the Achineſe could be ſerviceable to us in bringing us over to their Country, 40 Leagues off: Nor imagining that we durft make ſuch an Attempt; as indeed it was a bold one. Now we were Men enough to defend our felves againſt the Natives of this Iſland, if they Thould prove our Enemies : Though if none of theſe Men had come aſhore to me, I ſhould not have feared any danger. Nay, perhaps leſs, becauſe I ſhould have been cautious of giving any Offence to the Natives : And I am of the Opinion, that there are no People in the World ſo Barbarous, as to kill a ſingle Perfon that falls accidentally into their hands, or comes to live among them ; except they have before been injured, by fome outrage, or vio- lence committed againſt them. Yet even then, or afterwards, if a Man could but preſerve his Life from their firſt Rage, and come to treat with them (which is the hardeſt thing, becauſe their way is uſually to abfcond, and ruſhing fuddenly upon their Enemy to kill him at unawares ) one might, by ſome ſlight, inſinuate onés ſelf into their favours again. Eſpecially by ſhewing ſome Toy, or Knack, that they did never fee before ; which any European, that has ſeen the World, might foon contrive to amuſe them withal: As might be done, generally, even with a little Fire ftruck with a Flint and Steel. As Of the Reports about Cannibals. 485 As for the common Opinion of Anthropophagi, or An.1688. Man-eaters, I did never meet with any ſuch Peo- ple : All Nations or Families in the World, that I have ſeen or heard of, having ſome ſort of Food to live on, either Fruit, Grain, Pulſe, or Roots; which grow naturally, or elſe planted by them; if not Fiſh, and Land-Animals beſides ; (yea, even the People of New-Holland, had Fiſh amidit all their Penury) would ſcarce kill a Man purpoſely to eat him. I know not what Barbarous Cuſtoms may formerly have been in the World: And to Sacrifice their Enemies to their Gods, is a thing hath been much talk'd of with relation to the Sa- vages of America. I am a ſtranger to that alſo, if it be, or have been Cuſtomary in any Nation there; and yet, if they Sacrifice their Enemies, it is not neceſſary they ſhould eat them too. After all, I will not be peremptory in the Negative, but I ſpeak as to the compaſs of my own Knowledge, and know ſome of theſe Cannibal ſtories to be falſe, and many of them have been diſproved ſince I firſt went to the Weſt-Indies. At that time how barba- rous were the poor Florida Indians accounted, which now we find to be civil enough? What ſtrange ſtories have we heard of the Indians, whoſe Iſlands were called the Illes of Cannibals? Yet we find that they do Trade very civilly with the French and Spaniards; and have done ſo with us. I do own that they have formerly endeavoured to deſtroy our Plantations at Barbadoes, and have ſince hindred us from ſettling the Iſland Santa Lucia, by deftroying two or three Colonies ſucceſſively of thoſe that were ſettled there, and even the Iſland Tabago has been often annoyed and ravaged by them, when ſettled by the Dutch, and ſtill lies waſte (though a delicate fruitful Iſland) as being too near the Caribbees on the Continent, who viſit it every Year. But this was to preſerve their own Right, by Ii 2 endea- 486 The Ship departs, and leaves them. "An.1688. endeavouring to keep ott any that would ſettle themſelves on thoſe Iſlands, where they had planted themſelves; yet, even theſe people would not hurt a ſingle Perſon, as I have been told by ſome that have been Priſoners among them. I could inſtance alſo in the Indians of Bocca Toro, and Bocca Drago, and many other Places where they do live, as the Spaniards call it, Wild and Salvage ; yet there they have been familiar with Privateers, but by Abuſes have withdrawn their Friendſhip again. As for theſe Nicobar People, I found them Affable enough, and therefore did not fear them; but I did not much care whether I had gotten any more Company or no. But however, I was very well ſatisfied, and the rather becauſe we were now Men enough to row our felves over to the Iſland Sumatra ; and accord- ingly we preſently conſulted how to Purchafe a Canoa of the Natives. It was a fine clear Moon-light Night, in which we were left afhore. Therefore we walked on the Sandy Bay, to watch when the Ship would weigh and be gone, not thinking our felves ſecure in our new.gotten Liberty till then. About us or 12 a Clock we ſaw her under Sail, and then we returned to our Chamber, and fo to ſleep. This was the 6th. of May. The next Morning betimes, our Landlord, with four or five of his Friends came to ſee his new Gueſts, and was ſomewhat ſurprized to ſee ſo many of us, for he knew of no more but my felf. Yet he feemed to be very well pleaſed, and entertained us with a large Calabalh of Toddy, which he brought with him. Before he went away again, (for whereſoever we came, they left their Houſes to us, but whether out of Fear or Superſtition, I know not;) we bought a Canoa of him for an Ax, and we did preſently put our Cheſts and Cloaths in > They ſet out in a Bost, and coift along. 487 in it, deſigning to go to the South-end of the An.1688. Iſland, and lie there till the Monſoon ſhifted, which we expected every day. When our Things were ſtowed away, we wich the Achineſe entered with joy into our new Frigot, and launched off from the ſhore. We were no fooner off, but our Canoa overſet, bottom up- wards. We preſerved our Lives well enough by ſwimming, and dragg'd alſo our Cheſts and Cloaths alhore; but all our things were wet. I had no- thing of value but my Journal, and {ome Drafts of Land, of my own taking, which I much prized, and which I had hitherto carefully preſerved. Mr. Hall had alſo ſuch another Cargo of Books and Drafts, which were now like to periſh. But we preſently opened our Cheſts, and took out our Books, which, with much ado, we did afterwards dry; but fome of our Drafts that lay looſe in our Cheſts, were ſpoiled. Welay here afterwards three days, making great Fires to dry our Books. The Achineſe in the mean time fixt our Canoa with Outlagers on each ſide ; and they alſo cut a good Maft for her, and made a ſubſtantial Sail with Mats. The Canoa being now very well fixt, and our Books and Cloaths dry, we launched out the fe- cond time, and rowed towards the Eaſt ſide of the INand, leaving many Inands to the North of us. The Indians of the Inand accompanied us with 8 or ro Canoas againſt our deſire; for we thought that theſe Men would make Proviſion dearer ac that ſide of the INand we were going to, by giving an Account whac Rates we gave for it at the Place from whence we came, which was owing to the Ship's being there ; for the Ship’s Crew were not ſo thrifty in bargaining (as they ſeldom are ) as ſingle Perſons, or a few Men might be apt to be, who would keep to one Bargain. Therefore to hinder li 488 They have War with the Nicobarians. An.1688. hinder them from going with us, Mr. Hall ſcared one Canoa's Crew, by firing a ſhot over them. They all leapt over board, and cried out, but fee- ing us row away, they got into their Canoa again, and came after us. The firing of that Gun made all the Inhabitants of the Iſland to be our Enemies. For preſently af- ter this we put alhore, at a Bay where were four Houſes, and a great many Canoas : But they all went away, and came near us no more, for ſeveral days. We had then a great Loaf of Melory, which was our conſtant Food; and if we had a mind to Coco-Nuts, or Toddy, our Malayans of Achin would climb the Trees, and fetch as many Nuts as we would have, and a good Pot of Toddy every Morn- ing. Thus we lived till our Melory was almoſt ſpent; being ſtill in hopes that the Natives would come to us, and ſell it as they had formerly done. But they came not to us; nay, they oppoſed us where-ever we came, and often thaking their Lances at us, made all the fhew of hatred that they could invent. At laſt, when we ſaw that they ſtood in oppo- ſition to us, we reſolved to uſe Force to get ſome of their Food, if we could not get it other ways. With this Reſolution, we went in our Canoa to a ſmall Bay, on the North part of the Iſland; becauſe it was ſmooth Water there, and good Landing, but on the other ſide, the Wind being yet on that quar- ter, we could not land without Jeopardy of over- ſetting our Canoa, and wetting our Arms, and then we muſt have lain at the Mercy of our Enemies, who ſtood 2 or 300 Men in every Bay, where they faw us coming, to keep us off. When we ſet out, we rowed directly to the North end, and preſently were followed by 7 or 8 of their Canoas. They keeping at a diſtance , rowed away fafter than we did, and got to the Bay But t come to an Agreement with them. . 489 Bay before us: And there, with about 20 more Ca. A1.1688. noas, full of Men, they all landed, and ſtood to hinder us from Landing. But we rowed in, within a hundred yards of them: Then we lay ſtill , and I took my Gun, and preſented at them : At which they all fell down flat on the ground. But I turn'd my ſelf about, and to ſhew that we did not intend to harm them, I fired my Gun off to Sea, ſo that they might ſee the Shot graze on the Water. As ſoon as my Gun was loaded again, we rowed gently in ; at which ſome of them withdrew. The reſt ſtand- ing up, did ſtill cut and hew the Air, making ſigris of their hatred; till I once more frighted them with my Gun, and diſcharg'd it as before. Then more of them ſneak'd away, leaving only five or fix Men on the Bay. Then we rowed in again, and Mr. Hall, taking his Sword in his hand, leapt alhore; and I ſtood ready with my Gun to fire at the Indians, if they had injured him : But they did not ftir, till he came to them, and faluted them. He ſhook them by the hand, and by ſuch ſigns of Friendlhip as he made, the Peace was concluded, ratified and confirmed by all that were preſent: And others that were gone, were again call'd back, and they all very joyfully accepted of a Peace. This became universal over all the Iſland, to the great joy of the Inhabitants . There was no ringing of Bells, nor Bonfires made, for that is not the Cuſtom here; but gladneſs appeared in their Countenances, for now they could go out and Fiſh again, without fear of being taken. This Peace was not more welcom to them than to us ; for now the Inhabitants brought their Melory again to us; which we bought for old Rags, and ſmall ftripes of Cloath, about as broad as the Palm of ones hand. I did not ſee above five or fix Hens, for they have but few on the Iſland. At ſome places we ſaw ſome ſmall Hogs, which we could have bought Ti tans. 490 They deſign for Achin with their Boat. An. 1688. bought of them reaſonably ; but we would not offend our Achineſe Friends, who were Mahome- We ſtayed here two or three days, and then rowed toward the South-end of the Iſand, keeping on the Eaſt ſide, and we were kindly received by the Natives, where ever we came. When we ar- rived at the South-end of the Iſland, we fitted our ſelves with Melory and Water. We bought three or four Loaves of Melory, and about twelve large Coco-Nut-ſhells, that had all the Kernel taken out, yet were preſerved whole, except only a ſmall hole at one end; and all theſe held for us about three Gallons and a half of Water. We bought alſo two or three Bambo's, that held about four or five Gallons more: This was our Sea-ſtore. We now deſigned to go to Achin, a Town on the N. W. end of the Iſland Sumatra, diſtant from hence about 40 Leagues, bearing South South-Eaſt. . We only waited for the Weſtern Monſoon, which we had expected a great while, and now it ſeemed to be at hand; for the Clouds began to hang their heads to the Eaſtward, and at laſt moved gently that way, and though the Wind was ſtill at Eaſt, yet this was an infallible ſign that the Weſtern Monſoon was nigh. CHAP 491 *An. 1688. CHA P. XVIII. The Author with ſome other puts to Sea in an open Boat , deſigning for Achin. Their Ac- commodations for their Voyage. Change of Weather; a Halo about the Sun, and a vio- lent Storm. Their great danger and diſtreſs. Cudda a Town and Harbour on the coaſt of Malacca. Pulo Way. Golden Mountain on the Iſle of Sumatra : River and Town of Paſſenge-Jonca, on Sumatra, near Diamond- point ; where they go aſhore very fick, and are kindly entertained by the Oromkay, and Inbabitants. They go thence to Achin. The Author is examined before the Shabander; and takes Phyſick of a Malayan Doctor. His long illneſs. He ſets out towards Nicobar again, but returns ſuddenly to Achin Road. He makes ſeveral Voyages thence, to Ton- queen, to Malacca, to Fort St. George, and to Bencouli, an Engliſh Factory on Sumatra. An Account of the ship's Crewv, who ſet the Author aſhore at Nicobar. Some go to Tran- gambar, a Daniſh Fort on Coromandel; others to Fort St. George ; many to the Mo- guľs Camp. Of the Peuns; and how John Oliver made himſelf a Captain. Captain Read with the reſt, having plundered . Rich Portu- gueſe Ship near Ceylon, goes to Madagaſcar, and Ships himſelf off thence in a New-York Ship. The Traverſes of the reſt to Johanna, &c. A 2 492 The state of their little Veſſel. An. 1688. &c. Their Ship, the Cygnet of London, now lies funk in Auguſtin Bay at Mada- gaſcar. Of Prince Jeoly, the Painted Man, whom the Author brought with him to Eng- land, and who died at Oxford. Of his Country the Iſle of Meangis; the Cloves there, &c. The Author is made Gunner of Ben- couli, but is forced to ſlip away from thence , to come for England. I T was the 15th day of May, 1688. about Four a Clock in the Afternoon, when we left Nicobar Iſland, directing our Courſe toward Achin, being 8 Men of us in Company, viz. 3 English, 4 Ma- layans, who were born at Achin, and the Mungrel Portugueſe. Our Veffel, the Nicobar Canoa, was not one of the biggeſt, nor of the leaſt ſize: She was much about the Burthen of one of our London Wherrys below Bridge; and built ſharp at both ends, like the fore-part of a Wherry. She was deeper than a Wherry, but not fo broad, and was ſo thin and light, that when empty, four Men could launch her, or hale her aſhore on a Sandy Bay. We had a good fubftantial Maft, and a Mat Sail, and good Outlagers laſht very faſt and firm on each ſide the Veſſel, being made of ſtrong Poles . So that while theſe continued firm, the Veſſel could not overſet , which ſhe would eaſily have done without them; and with them too, had they not been made very ſtrong; and we were therefore much beholding our Achineſe Companions for this Contri- Theſe Men were none of them ſo ſenſible of the danger as Mr. Hall and my felf, for they all con- fided ſo much in us, that they did not fo much as ſcruple any thing that we did approve of. Neither to yance. . was They proceed on their Voyage. 493 was Mr. Hall ſo well provided as I was, for before An. 1688. we left the Ship, I had purpoſely conſulted our Draft of the Eaſt-Indies, (for we had but one in the Ship) and out of that I had written in my Pocket- book an Account of the bearing and diſtance of all the Malacca Coaſt, and that of Sumatra, Pegu, and Siam, and alſo brought away with me a Pocket Com- paſs for my Direction, in any Enterprize that I ſhould undertake. The Weather at our ſetting out was very fair, clear, and hot. The Wind was ſtill at S. E. a very ſmall breeze, juſt fanning the Air, and the Clouds were moving gently from Weſt to Eaſt, which gave us hopes that the Winds were either at Weft already, abroad at Sea, or would be ſo in a very ſhort time. We took this opportunity of fair Weather, being in hopes to accompliſh our Voyage to Achin, be- fore the Weſtern Monſoon was ſet in ſtrong, know- ing that we ſhould have very bluftring Weather after this fair Weather, eſpecially at the firſt coming of the Weſtern Monſoon. We rowed therefore away to the Southward, ſuppoſing that when we were clear from the Iſland, we ſhould have a true Wind, as we call it, for the Land hales the Wind; and we often find the Wind at Sea different from what it is near the Shore. We rowed with four Oars, taking our turns: Mr. Hall and I ſteered alſo by turns, for none of the reſt were capable of it. We rowed the firſt Afternoon, and the Night enſuing, about Twelve Leagues, by my Judgment. Our courſe was South South-Eaſt, but the r6th. day in the Morning, when the Sun was an hour high, we ſaw the Illand from whence we came, bearing N. W. by N. Therefore I found we had gone a Point more to the Eaſt than I intended, for which reaſon fteered S. by E. In a 494 Strong Currents. Uncertain Weather. An. 1688. In the Afternoon at Four a Clock, we had a gentle breeze at W. S. W. which continued ſo till Nine, all which time we laid down our Oars, and ſteered away S. S. E. I was then at the Helm, and I found by the ripling of the Sea, that there was a ſtrong Current againſt us. It made a great noiſe that might be heard near half a Mile. At Nine a Clock it fell Calm, and ſo continued till Ten. Then the Wind ſprung up again, and blew a freſh breeze all Night. The 17th. day in the Morning we look'd out for the Iſland Sumatra, fuppoſing that we were now within 20 Leagues of it'; for we had rowed and failed, by our reckoning, 24 Leagues from Nicobar Iland ; and the diſtance from Nicobar to Achin is about 40 Leagues. But we look'd in vain for the Iſland Sumatra; for turning our felves about, we faw, to our grief, Nicobar Iſland, lying W. N. W. and not above 8 Leagues diſtant. By this it was viſible, that we had met a very ſtrong Current againſt us in the Night. But the Wind freſhned on us, and we made the beſt of it while the Weather continued fair. At Noon we had an Obſervation of the Sun, my Lat. was 6 d. 55 m. and Mr. Hall's was 7 d. N. The 18th day the Wind freſhned on us again, and the Sky began to be clouded. It was indiffe- rent clear till Noon, and we thought to have had an Obſervation : But we were hindred by the Clouds, that covered the Face of the Sun, when it came on the Meridian. This often happens that we are dif- appointed of making Obſervations, by the Sun's being clouded at Noon, though it Shines clear, both before and after, eſpecially in places near the Sun; and this obſcuring of the Sun at Noon, is com- monly ſudden and unexpected, and for about half an hour or more. : We a A Halo about the Sun. A Storm. 495 We had then alſo a very ill Preſage, by a great An. 1688. Circle about the Sun, (five or ſix times the Dia- meter of it) which ſeldom appears, but ſtorms of Wind, or much Rain enſue. Such Circles about the Moon are more frequent, but of leſs import. We do commonly take great notice of theſe that are about the Sun, obſerving if there be any breach in the Circle, and in what quarter the breach is , for from thence we commonly find the greateſt ſtreſs of the Wind will come. I muſt confeſs that I was a little anxious at the ſight of this Circle, and wiſh'd heartily that we were near fome Land. Yet I ſhewed no ſign of it to diſcourage my Conſorts, but made a Vertue of Neceſſity, and put a good Countenance on the matter. I told Mr. Hall, that if the Wind became too ſtrong and violent, as I feared it would, it being even then very ſtrong, we muft of neceſſity ſteer away before the Wind and Sea, till better Weather preſented ; and that as the Winds were now, we Should, inſtead of about 20 Leagues to Achin, be driven 60 or 70 Leagues to the Coaſt of Cudda, or Queda, a Kingdom, and Town, and Harbour of Trade on the Coaſt of Malacca. The Winds therefore bearing very hard, we rolled up the foot of our Sail on a Pole faftened to it, and ſettled our Yard within three Foot of the Canoa ſides, ſo that we had now but a ſmall Sail; yet it was ſtill too big, conſidering the Wind ; for the Wind being on our Broad-ſide, preſt her down very much, though ſupported by her Outlagers ; in- ſomuch that the Poles of the Outlagers going from the ſides of their Veſſel, bent as if they would break; and ſhould they have broken, our over- turning and periſhing had been inevitable. Beſides, the Sea increaſing, would ſoon have filled the Veſſel this way. Yet thus we made a ſhift to bear up with the ſide of the Veſſel againſt the Wind for a while: 496 The Storm and their Danger increaſes. An. 1688. while : But the Wind ſtill increaſing, about One a Clock in the Afternoon we put away right before Wind and Sea, continuing to run thus all the Af- ternoon, and part of the Night enſuing. The Wind continued, increaſing all the Afternoon, and the Sea ſtill ſwelled higher, and often broke, but did us no damage ; for the ends of the Veſſel be- ing very narrow, he that ſteered received and broke the Sea on his back, and ſo kept it from coming in ſo much as to endanger the Veſſel : Though much Water would come in, which we were forced to keep heaving out continually. And by this time we ſaw it was well that we had al- tered our Courſe, every Wave would elſe have filled and funk us, taking the ſide of the Veſſel: And though our Outlagers were well laſht down to the Canoa's bottom with Rattans, yet they muſt probably have yielded to ſuch a Sea as this; when even before, they were plunged under Water, and bent like twigs. The Evening of this 18th. day was very diſmal. The Sky looked very black, being covered with dark Clouds, the Wind blew hard, and the Seas ran high. The Sea was already roaring in a white Foam about us; a dark Night coming on, and no Land in ſight to ſhelter us, and our little Ark in danger to be ſwallowed by every Wave; and what was worſt of all, none of us thought our ſelves prepared for another World. The Reader may better gueſs, than I can expreſs, the confuſion that we were all in. I had been in many Immi- . nent Dangers before now, ſome of which I have already related, but the worſt of them all was but a Play-game, in compariſon with this . 1 muſt confeſs, that I was in great Conflicts of Mind at this time. Other Dangers came not upon me with ſuch a leiſurely and dreadful Solemni- ty: A ſudden Skirmiſh or Engagement, or fo, . was . The Author's Confternation. 497 was nothing when ones Blood was up, and puſh'd An. 1688. forward with eager Expectations. But here I had a lingring view of approaching Death, and little or no hopes of eſcaping it; and I muſt confeſs that my Courage, which I had hitherto kept up, failed me here; and I made very fad Reflections on iny former Life, and look'd back with horror and deteſtation, on Actions which before I dif- liked, but now I trembled at the remembrance of. I had long before this repented me of that roving courſe of Life, but never with ſuch concern as now. I did alſo call to mind the many miraculous Acts of God's Providence towards me, in the whole courſe of my Life, of which kind, I believe few Men have met with the like. For all theſe I re- turned thanks in a peculiar manner, and this once more deſired God's Affiftance, and compoſed my Mind, as well as I could, in the hopes of it, and, as the Event ſhewed, I was not diſappointed of my hopes. Submitting our ſelves therefore to God's good Providence, and taking all the care we could to preſerve our Lives, Mr. Hall and I took turns to ſteer, and the reſt took turns to heave out the Water, and thus we provided to ſpend the moſt doleful Night I ever was in. About Ten a Clock it began to Thunder, Lighten, and Rain; but the Rain was very welcom to us, having drank up all the Water we brought from the Iſland. The Wind at firſt blew harder than before, but within half an hour, it abated, and became more moderate; and the Sea alſo affwaged of its fury, and then by a lighted Match, of which we kept a piece burning on purpoſe, we looked on our Compaſs, to ſee how we ſteered, and found our Courſe to be ftill Eaſt. We had no occaſion to look on the Compaſs before, for we ſteered right before the Wind, which if it had ſhifted, we had a 498 Hard Rains. They ſee Land. An. 1688. had been obliged to have altered our Courſe accord- ingly. But now it being abated, we found our Veſſel lively enough with that ſmall Sail which was then aboard, to hale to our former courſe, S. S. E. which accordingly we did, being now in hopes again to get to the Illand Sumatra. But about Two a Clock in the Morning of the 19th. day, we had another Guft of Wind, with much Thunder, Lightning, and Rain, which laſted till day, and obliged us to put before the Wind again, ſteering thus for ſeveral hours. It was very dark, and the hard Rain ſoaked us ſo throughly , that we had not one dry Thread about us. The Rain chill'd us extreamly; for any freſh Water is much colder than that of the Sea. For even in the coldeſt Climates the Sea is warm, and in the hotteſt Climates the Rain is cold, and unwhole- ſome for Man's Body. In this wet ſtarveling plight we ſpent the tedious Night. Never did poor Ma- riners on a Lee-ſhore more earneſtly long for the dawning Light, than we did now. At length the day appeared; but with ſuch dark black Clouds near the Horizon, that the firſt glimpſe of the Dawn appeared 30 or 40 degrees high; which was dreadful enough: For it is a common ſaying a- mong Seamen, and true, as I have experienced, that a high Dawn will have high Winds, and a low Dawn, Small Winds. We continued our Courſe ftill Eaſt, before Wind and Sea, till about Eight a Clock in the Morning of this 19th. day; and then one of our Malayan Friends cryed out, Pulo Way. Mr. Hall, and Ambroſe, and I, thought the Fellow had ſaid, Pull away, an Ex- preſſion uſual among Engliſh Seamen, when they are Rowing. And we wondred what he meant by it, till we ſaw him point to his Conſorts; and then we looking that way, faw Land appearing , like an Iſland, and all our Malayans ſaid it was an 3 Iland River and Town of Paſſange Jonca on Sumatra. 499 Iſland at the N. W. end of Sumatra, called Way; An. 1688. for Pulo Way, is the Iſland Way. We, who were dropping with wet, cold and hungry, were all overjoyed at the ſight of the Land, and preſently marked its bearing. It bore South, and the Wind was ſtill at Weſt, a ſtrong gale ; but the Sea did not run ſo high as in the Night. Therefore we trimmed our ſmall Sail no bigger than an Apron,and ſteered with it. Now our Outlagers did us a great kindneſs again, for although we had but a ſmall Sail, yet the Wind was ſtrong, and preſt down our Veſſei's ſide very much : But being ſupported by the Outlagers, we could brook it well enough, whicli otherwiſe we could not have done. About Noon we ſaw more Land, beneath the ſuppoſed Pulo Way; and ſteering towards it, before Night we ſaw all the Coaſt of Sumatra, and found the Errors of our Achineſe ; for the high Land that we firſt ſaw, which then appeared like an Iſland, was not Pulo Way, but a great high Mountain on the Iſand Sumatra, called by the Engliſh, the Golden Mountain. Our Wind continued till about Seven a Clock at Night; then it abated, and at Ten a Clock it died away : And then we ſtuck to our Oars again, though all of us quite tired with our former Fatigues and Hardſhips. The next Morning, being the acth. day, we ſaw all the low Land plain, and judged our felves not above Eight Leagues off. About Eight a Clock in the Morning we had the Wind again at Weſt, a freſh gale,and ſteering in ſtill for the Shore,at Five a Clock in the Afternoon we run to the Mouth of a River on the Iſland Sumatra, called Pallange Fonca. It is 34 Leagues to the Eaſtward of tichin, and 6 Leagues to the Weſt of Diamond Point, which makes with three Angles of a Rhombus, and is low Land. Our Malayans were very well acquainted here, and carried us to a ſmall Fiſhing Village, within a Kk Mils a a a a 500 The Author's kind Reception at Paſſange Jonca. An. 1688. Mile of the River's Mouth, called alſo by the name of the River, Paſjange Jonca. The hardſhips of this Voyage, with the ſcorching heat of the Sun, at our firſt ſetting out, and the cold Rain, and our con- tinuing wet for the laſt two days, cait us all into Fevers, ſo that now we were not able to help each other, nor ſo much as to get our Canoa up to the Village ; but our Malayans got ſome of the Townf- men to bring her up. The News of our Arrival being noiſed abroad, one of the Oramkai’s, or Noblemen of the INand, came in the Night to ſee us. We were then lying in a ſmall Hut, at the end of the Town, and it being late, this Lord only viewed us, and having ſpoken with our Malayans, went away again ; but he returned to us again the next day, and pro- vided a large Houſe for us to live in, till we ſhould be recovered of our Sickneſs; ordering the Towns- People to let us want for nothing. The Achineſe Malayans that came with us, told them all the Cir- cumſtances of our Voyage; how they were taken by our Ship, and where, and how we that came with them were Priſoners aboard the Ship, and had been ſet aſhore together at Nicobar, as they were. It was for this reaſon probably, that the Gentlemen of Sumatra were thus extraordinary kind to us, to provide every thing that we had need of; nay, they would force us to accept of Preſents from them, that we knew not what to do with; as young Buffaloes, Goats, c. for theſe we would turn looſe at Night, after the Gentle- men that gave them to us were gone, for we were prompted by our Achineſe Conforts to accept of them, for fear of diſobliging by our refuſal. But the Coco-Nuts, Plantains, Fowis, Eggs, Fish, and Rice, we kept for our uſe. The Malayans that accompanied us from Nicobar, ſeparated them- ſelves from us now, living at one end of the Houſe by a His Sickneſs. 501 by themſelves, for they were Mahometans, as all thoſe An.1688. of the Kingdom of Achin are; and though during our Paſſage by Sea together, we made them be con- tented to drink their Water out of the fame Coco- fhell with us; yet being now no longer under chat Neceſſity, they again took up their accuſtomed Ni- cety and Reſervedneſs . They all lay fick, and as their fickneſs increaſed, one of them threatned us, that if any of them died, the reſt hould kill us, for having brought them this Voyage ; yet I que- I ſtion whether they would have attempted, or the Country People have ſuffered it. We made a ſhift to dreſs our own Food for none of theſe People, though they were very kind in giving us any thing that we wanted, would yet come near us, to affift us in dreſſing our Victuals : Nay, they would nos touch any thing that we uſed. We had all Fevers, and therefore took turns to dreſs Victuals, accord- ing as we had ſtrength to do it, or ftomachs to eat ic I found my Fever to increaſe, and my Head fo diſtempered, that I could ſcarce ſtand, therefore I wheued and ſharpened my Penknife, in order to let my ſelf Blood; but I could not, for my Knife was too blunt We ſtayed here Ten or Twelve Days, in hopes to recover our Health, but finding no Amendment, we deſired to go to Achin. "But we were delayed by the Natives, who had a deſire to have kept Mr. Hall and my felf, to Sail in their Veſſels to Malucca, Cudda, or to other places whither they Trade. But finding us more deſirous to be with our Country-men, in our Factory at Achin, they provided a large Proe to carry us thither, we not being able to manage our own Canoa. Beſides, before this, three of our Ma- layan Comrades were gone very fick into the Coun- try,and only one of them and the Portugueſe remained with us, accompanying us to Achin, and they both as fick as we. Kka IC 502 His Arrival, and Examination at Achin. An.1688. It was the beginning of fune, 1688. when we left Paſjange Fonca. We had four Men to row, one to ſteer, and a Gentleman of the Country, that went purpoſely to give an Information to the Go- vernment of our Arrival. We were but three Days and Nights in our Paſſage, having Sea-Breezes by Day, and Land-Winds by Night, and very fair Weather: When we arrived at Achin, I was carryed before the Shabander , the chief Magiſtrate in the City. One Mr. Dennis Driſcall, an Iriſh-man, and a Reli- dent there, in the Factory which our Eaſt-India Company had there then, was Interpreter. I be- ing weak, was ſuffered to ſtand in the Shabander's Preſence : For it is their Cuſtom to make Men fit on the Floor, as they do, croſs-legg'd like Taylors : But I had not ſtrength then to pluck up my heels in that manner. The Shabander asked of me fe- veral Queſtions, eſpecially how we durft adventure to come in a Canoa from the Nicobar Iland to Su- matra. I told him, that I had been accuſtomed to hardſhips and bazards, therefore I did with much freedom undertake it. He enquired alſo concern- ing our Ship, whence ſhe came, &c. I told him, from the South Seas; that ſhe had ranged about the Philippine Iſlands, &c. and was now gone to- wards Arabia, and the Red Sea. The Malayans alſo and Portugueſe were afterward examined, and con- firmed what I declared, and in leſs than half an hour, I was diſmiſt with Mr. Driſcal, who then lived in the Engliſh Eaſt-India Company's Factory. He provided a Room for us to lie in, and ſome Victuals Three days after our arrival here, our Portugueſe died of a Fever. What became of our Malayans I know not. Ambroſe lived not long after. Mr. Hall alſo was ſo weak, that I did not think he would a recover He takes Phyfick of a Malayan. 503 recover. I was the beſt ; yet ſtill very ſick of a An.1688. Fever, and little likely to live. Therefore Mr. Drif- cal, and ſome other Engliſhmen, perſwaded me to take ſome Purging Phyſick of a Malayan Doctor. I took their Advice, being willing to get eafe : But after three Doles,each a large Calabaſh of naity ſtuff, finding no amendment, I thought to defiſt from more Phyfick : But was perſwaded to take one Doſe more ; which I did, and it wrought ſo violently, that I thought it would have ended my days. I ſtruggled till I had been about 20 or 20 times at ſtool : But it working ſo quick with me, with little intermiſſion, and my ſtrength being almoſt ſpent, I even threw my ſelf down once for all, and had above 60 ftools in all before it left off working. I thought my Malayan Doctor, whom they ſo much commended, would have killed me outright. I con- tinued extraordinary weak for ſome days after his drenching me thus : But my Fever left me for above a Wiek: After which, it returned upon me again for a Twelve Month, and a Flux with it. However, when I was a little recovered from the effects of my Drench, I made a shift to go abroad: And having been kindly invited to Captain Bou'rey's Houſe there, my firſt viſit was to him; who had a Ship in the Road, but lived alhore. This Gentleman was extraordinary kind to us all, par- ticularly to me, and importuned me to go bis Boatſwain to Perfir; whither he was bound, with a deſign to ſell his Ship there; as I was told, though not by himſelf. From thence he intended to paſs with the Caravan to Aleppo, and ſo home for Eng- land. His buſineſs requir'd him to ſtay fome time longer at Achin ; I judge, to ſell fome Commodities, that he had not yet diſpoſed of. Yet he choſe ra- ther to leave the diſpoſal of them to fome Mer- chant there, and make a ſhort trip to the Nicobar Ilands in the mean cime, and on his return to take in Kk 3 a 504 A Véſſel of Siam at Achin. An. 1688. in his Effects, and ſo proceed towards Perfia. This was a ſudden Reſolution of Captain Bowry’s, pre- ſently after the arrival of a ſmall Frigot from Siam, with an Ambaſſador from the King of Siam, to the Queen of Achin. The Ambaſſador was a French- man by Nation. The Veíſel that he came in was but ſmall, yet very well mann'd, and fitted for a Fight. Therefore it was generally ſuppoſed here, that Captain Bowry was afraid to lie in Achin Road, becauſe the Siamers were now at Wars with the Engliſh, and he was not able to defend his Ship, if he ſhould be attack'd by them. But whatever made him think of going to the Nicobar Iſlands, he provided to Sail; and took me, , Mr. Hall, and Ambroſe with him; though all of us ſo ſick and weak, that we could do him no Service. It was ſome time about the beginning of Fune when we failed out of Achin Road : But we met with the Winds at N. W. with turbulent Weacher, which forced us back again in two days time. Yet he gave us each 12 Mefs apiece, a Gold Coin, each of which is about the value of 15 Pence Engliſh. So he gave over that Deſign: And fome Engliſh Ships coming into Achin Road, he was not afraid of the Siamers who lay there. After this, he again invited me to his Houſe at Achin, and treated me always with Wine and good Cheer, and ſtill importuned me to go with him to Perfia : But I being very weak, and fearing the Weſterly Winds would create a great deal of trouble, did not give him a poſitive Anſwer ; eſpecially be- cauſe I thought I might get a better Voyage in the Engliſh Ships newly arrived, or ſome others now ex- pected here. It was this Captain Bowry who ſent che Letter from Borneo, directed to the Chief of the Engliſh Factory at Mindanao, of which mention is anade in Chapter XIII. A His Voyage to Tonqueen, Malacca, &c. 505 A ſhort time after this, Captain Welden arrived An.1688. here from Fort St. George, in a Ship called the Cur- tana, bound to Tonqueen. This being a more agree- able Voyage than to Perſia, at this time of the Year, beſides that the Ship was better accommodated, eſpecially with a Surgeon, and I being ſtill fick; I therefore choſe rather to ſerve Captain Welden than Captain Bowry. But to go on with a particular Ac- count of that Expedition, were to carry my Reader back again : Whom having brought thus far to- wards England in my Circum-Navigation of the Globe, I Thall not now weary him with new Ram- bles, nor ſo much ſwell this Volume, as I muſt to deſcribe the Tour I made in thoſe remote Parts of the Eaſt-Indies, from and to Sumatra. So that my Voyage to Tor.queen at this time, as alſo another to Malacca afterwards, with my Obſervations in them, and the Deſcriptions of thoſe and the Neighbouring Countries; as well as the Deſcription of the Iſland Sumarra it felf, and therein the Kingdom and City of Achin, Bencculi, &c. I ſhall refer to another place, where I may give a particular Relation of them. In ſhort, it may fuffice, that I ſet out to Tonqueen , with Captain Welden about July 1688. and returned to Aching in the April following. I ftaid here till the latter end of September 1689. and making a ſhort Voyage to Malacca, came thither again about Chriſt- Soon after that, I went to Fort St. George, and ſtaying there about five Months, I return’d once more to Sumatra; not to Achin, but Bencouli, an Engliſh Factory on the Weſt Coaſt; of which I was Gun- ner about five Months more. So that having brought my Reader to Sumatra , without carrying him back, I ſhall bring him on next way from thence to England: And of all that occurr'd berween my firſt ſetting out from this Iſland in 1688, and my final departure from it at the beginning of the Year 1691. I ſhall only take mas. notice Kk 4 a 506 Of the Cygnet, and her Crew. An.1689. notice at preſent of two Paſſages; which I think I ought not to omit. The firſt is, that at my return from Malacca, a little before Chriſtmas, 1689. I found at Achin one Mr. Morgan, who was one of our Ship’s Crew thar left me alhore at Nicobar, now Mate of a Daniſh Ship of Trangambar; which is a Town on the Coaſt of Coromandel, near Cape Comorin, belonging to the Danes; And receiving an Account of our Crew from him and others, I thought it might not be amiſs to gratifie the Reader's Curioſity therewith; who would probably be deſirous to know the Succeſs of thoſe Ramblers, in their new intended Expedition towards the Red Sea: And withal I thought it might not be unlikely that theſe Papers might fall into the hands of ſome of our London Merchants, who were concerned in fitting out that Ship; which I ſaid forinerly, was called the Cygnet of London, fent on a Trading Voyage into the South Seas, under the Command of Captain Swan: And that they might be willing to have a particular Information of the fate of their Ship. And by the way, even before this meeting with Mr. Morgan, while I was at Ton- queen, fanuary 1689. I met with an Engliſh Ship in the River of Tongueen, called the Rainbow of London, Captain Poole Commander; by whoſe Mate, Mr. Barlow, who was returning in that Ship to Eng- land, I ſent a Pacquet, which he undertook to de- liver to the Merchants, Owners of the Cygnet, ſome of which he ſaid he knew : Wherein I gave a par- ticular Account of all the Courſe and Tranſactions of their Ship, from the time of my firſt meeting it in the South Seas, and going aboard it there, to its leaving me aſhore at Nicobar. But I never could hear that either that, or other Letters which I ſent at the ſame time, were received. To proceed therefore with Morgan's Relation : He told me, that when they in the Cygnet went away 2 Many go into the Mogul's Service. 507 away from Nicobar , in purſuit of their intended An. 1689. Voyage to Perſia, they directed their Courſe to- wards Ceylon. But not being able to Weather it, the Weſterly Monſoon bearing hard againſt them , they were obliged to ſeek Refreſhment on the Coaſt of Coromandel. Here this mad fickle Crew were upon new Projects again. Their Deſigns meet- ing with ſuch delays and obſtructions, that many of them grew weary of it, and about half of them went afhore. Of this number, Mr. Morgan, who told me this, and Mr. Herman Coppinger the Surgeon, went to the Danes at Trangambar, who kindly received them. There they lived very well; and Mr. Morgan was employed as a Mate in a Ship of theirs at this time to Achin; and Captain Knox tells me, that he fince Commanded the Curtana, the Ship that I went in to Tonqueen, which Cap- tain Welden having ſold to the Mogul's Subjects, they employed Mr. Morgan as Captain to Trade in her for them; and it is an uſual thing for the Trading Indians to hire Europeans to go Officers on board their Ships ; eſpecially Captains and Gunners. About two or three more of theſe that were fet aſhore, went to Fort St. George ; but the main Body of them were for going into the Moguls Ser- vice. Our Seamen are apt to have great Notions of I know not what Profit and Advantages to be had in ſerving the Mogul; nor do they want for fine ſtories to encourage one another to it. It was what theſe Men had long been thinking and talking of as a fine thing ; but now they went upon it in good earneſt. The Place where they went alhore was at a Town of the Moors : Which name our Seamen give to all the Subjects of the Great Mogul, but eſpecially his Mahomet an Subjects ; cal- ling the Idolaters, Gentous, or Raſhbouts. At this Moors Town they got a Peun to be their Guide to the 508 Peuns. An.1689. the Moguls neareſt Camp: For he hath always ſe- veral Armies in his vaſt Empire. Theſe Peuns are ſome of the Gentous, or Raſhbouts, who in all places along the Coaſt, eſpecially in Sea- port-Towns, make it their Buſineſs to Hire them- ſelves to wait upon Strangers, be they Merchants, Seamen, or what they will. To qualifie them for ſuch Attendance, they learn the European Languages, Engliſh, Dutch, French, Portugueſe, &c. according as they have any of the Factories of theſe Nations in their Neighbourhood, or are viſited by their Ships. No ſooner doth any ſuch Ship come to an Anchor, and the Men come alhore, but a great many of theſe Peuns are ready to proffer their Service. 'Tis uſual for the Strangers to hire their Attendance du- ring their ſtay there, giving them about a Crown a Month of our Money, more or leſs. The richeſt fort of Men will ordinarily hire two or three Peuns to wait upon them; and even the common Seamen, if able, will hire one apiece to attend them, either for Convenience or Oftentation; or ſometimes one Peun between two of them. Theſe Pouns ſerve them in many capacities, as Interpreters, Brokers, Servants to attend at Meals, and go to Market, and on Errands, &c. Nor do they give any Trouble, eating at their own Homes, and Lodging there, when they have done their Maſters Buſineſs for them; expecting nothing but their Wages, except that they have a certain Allowance of about a Fanam, or 3 d. in a Dollar, which is an 18th. part Profit, by way of Brokerage for every Bargain they drive; they being generally employed in Buying and Selling. When the Strangers go away, their Peuns deſire them to give them their Names in Writing, with a Certificate of their honeſt and diligent ſerving them: And theſe they ſhew to the next comers, to get into Buſineſs ; ſome being able to produce a large ſcrowl of ſuch Certificates. But Captain Oliver and his Men. 509 But to proceed : The Moors Town, where theſe An. 1689. Men landed, was not far from Cunnimere, a ſmall Engliſh Factory on the Coromandel Coaſt. The Go- vernour whereof having intelligence by the Moors of the Landing of theſe Men, and their intended March to the Mogul's Camp, fent out a Captain with his Company to oppoſe it. He came up with them, and gave them hard words : But they being 30 or 40 Reſolure Fellows, not eaſily daunted, he durft not attack them, but returned to the Gover- nour, and the News of it was ſoon carried to Fort St. George. During their March, John Oliver, who was one of them, privately told the Peun who guided them, that himſelf was their Captain. So when they came to the Camp, the Peun told this to the General : And when their Stations and Pay were affign’d them, Fohn Oliver had a greater Re- ſpect paid him than the reft; and whereas their Pay was Ten Pagodas a Month each Man,(a Pagoda is two Dollars, or 9 s. Engliſh) his Pay was Twenty Pagodas: Which Stratagem and Uſurpation of his occafioned him no ſmall Envy and Indignation from his Comrades. Soon after this two or three of them went to Agra, to be of the Mogul's Guard. A while after, the Go- vernour of Fort St. George ſent a Meſſage to the main Body of them, and a Pardon, to withdraw them from thence; which moſt of them accepted, and came away. Fohn Oliver, and the ſmall Remainder, continued in the Country; but leaving the Camp, went up and down Plundering the Villages, and fleeing when they were purſued; and this was the laſt News I heard of them. This Account I had, partly by Mr. Morgan, from ſome of thoſe Deſerters he met with at Trang ambar ; and partly from others of them, whom I met with my ſelf afterwards at Fort I St. George. And theſe were the Adventures of thoſe who went up into the Country, Captain 510 The Cygnet goes to Madagaſcar. An.1689. Captain Read having thus loſt the beſt half of his Men, ſailed away with the reſt of them, after ha- ving filled his Water, and got Rice, ftill intending for the Red Sea. When they were near Ceylon, they met with a Portugueſe Ship richly laden; out of which they took what they pleas'd, and then turn'd her away again. From thence they purſued their Voyage; but the Weſterly Winds bearing hard againt them, and making it hardly feizable for them to reach the Red Sea, they ſtood away for Madagaſcar. There they entered into the Service of one of the Petty Princes of that INand, to aſſiſt him againſt his Neighbours, with whom he was at Wars. During this Interval, a ſmall Veſſel from New- York came hither to Purchaſe Slaves : Which Trade is driven here, as it is upon the coaſt of Guinea; one Nation or Clan ſelling others that are their Enemies. Captain Read, with about five or fix inore, ſtole away from their Crew, and went aboard this New-York Ship; and Captain Teat was made Com- mander of the Reſidue. Soon after which, a Bri- gantine from the Weſt-Indies, Captain Knight Com- mander, coming thither with deſign to go to the Red Sea alſo, theſe of the Cygnet conſorted with them, and they went together to the Iſland Fo- hanna. Thence going together towards the Red sea, the Cygnet proving leaky, and failing heavily, as being much out of Repair, Captain Knight grew weary of her Company, and giving her the ſlip in the Night, went away for Achin; for having heard that there was plenty of Gold there, he went thi- ther with a deſign to cruize : And 'twas from one Mr. Humes, belonging to the Ann of London, Captain Freke Commander, who had gone aboard Captain Knight, and whom I ſaw afterwards at Achin, that I had this Relation. Some of Captain Freke’s Men, their own Ship being loſt, had gone aboard the Cygnet at Johanna : And after Captain Knigbt had left her, And lies funk in St. Auguſtin's Bay. 511 her, ſhe ſtill purſued her Voyage towards the Red An. 1690. Sea : But the Winds being againſt them, and the Ship in ſo ill a condition, they were forced to bear away for Coromandel, where Captain Teat and his own Men went afhore to ſerve the Mogul. But the Strangers of Captain Freke's Ship, who kept fill aboard the Cygnet, undertook to carry her for Eng- land: And the laſt News I heard of the Cygnet was from Captain Knox, who tells me, that ſhe now lies ſunk in St. Auguſtin's Bay in Madagaſcar. This Di- greſſion I have made, to give an Account of our Ship. The other Paſſage I ſhall ſpeak of, that occurred during this Interval of the Tour I made from schin, is with relation to the Painted Prince, whom I brought with me into England, and who died at Oxford. For while I was at Fort St. George, about April 1690, there arrived a Ship called the Mindanao Merchant, laden with Clove-bark from Mindanao, Three of Captain Swan's Men, that remained there when we went from thence, came in her : From whom I had the Account of Captain Swan's Death, as is before related. There was alſo one Mr. Moody, who was Supercargo of the Ship. This Gentleman bought at Mindanao the Painted Prince Jeoly (men- tioned in Chapter XIII.) and his Mother; and brought them to Fort St. George, where they were much admired by all that ſaw them. Some time after this, Mr. Moody, who ſpoke the Malayan Lan- guage very well, and was a Perſon very capable to manage the Company's Affairs, was ordered by the Governour of Fort St. George to prepare to go to Indrapore, an Engliſh Factory on the Weſt Coaſt of Sumatra, in order to ſucceed Mr. Gibbons, who was Chief of that Place. By this time I was very intimately acquainted with Mr. Moody, and was importuned by him to go with him, and to be Gunner of the Fort there. I always a 512 The Author's Arrival at Bencouli. An. 1690. always told him I had a great deſire to go to the Bay of Bengal, and that I had now an offer to go thi- ther with Captain Metcalf, who wanted a Mate, and had already ſpoke to me. Mr. Moody, to en- courage ine to go with him, told me, that if I would go with him to Indrapore, he would buy a ſmall Veffel there, and ſend me to the Iſland Mean- gis, Commander of her; and that I ſhould carry Prince Jeoly and his Mother with me (that being their Country) by which means I might gain a Commerce with his People for Cloves. This was a Deſign that I liked very well; there- fore I conſented to go thither. It was ſome time in July, 1690. when we went from Fort St. George, in a ſinall Ship, called the Diamond, Captain Huwel Commander. We were about so or 60 Paſſengers in all; fome ordered to be left at Indrapore, and ſome at Bencouli: Five or ſix of us were Officers, the reſt Soldiers to the Company. We met nothing in our Voyage that deſerves notice, till we came abreſt of Indrapore : And then the Wind came at N. W. and blew ſo hard that we could not get in, but were forced to bear away to Bencouli, another Engliſh Fa- ctory on the ſame Coaft, lying 50 or 60 Leagues to the Southward of Indrapore. Upon our Arrival at Bencouli we faluted the Fort, and were welcomed by them. The ſame day we came to an Anchor; and Captain Howel, and Mr. Moody, with the other Merchants went alhore, and were all kindly received by the Governour of the Fort. It was two days after before I went alhore; and then I was importuned by the Gover- nour to ſtay there, to be Gunner of this Fort; be- cauſe the Gunner was lately dead : And this being a Place of greater import than Indrapore, I ſhould do the Company more Service here than there. I told the Governour, if he would augment my Sallary, which by Agreement with the Governour of Fort a Iſle of Meangis, its Products. 513 Fort St. George I was to have had at Indrapore, I was An. 1690. willing to ſerve him, provided Mr. Moody would conſent to it. As to my Sallary, he told me, I ſhould have 24 Dollers per Month, which was as much as he gave to the old Gunner. Mr. Moody gave no Anfwer till a Week after, and then, being ready to be gone to Ir.drapore, he told me I might uſe my own Liberty, either to ſtay here, or go with him to Indrapore. He added, that if I went with him, he was not certain, as yet, to perform his Promiſe, in getting a Veſſel for me to go to Meangus, with Feoly and his Mother : But he would be ſo fair to me, that becauſe I left Maderas on his account, he would give me the half hare of the two Painted People, and leave them in my Poffeffion, and at my Diſpoſal. I accepted of the Offer, and Writings were immediately drawn be- tween us. Thus it was that I came to have this Painted Prince, whoſe Name was Feoly, and his Mother. They were born on a ſmall Iſland called Meangis , which is once or twice mentioned in Chap. XII. I ſaw the INand twice, and two more cloſe by it: Each of the three ſeemed to be about four or five Leagues round, and of a good heighth. Feoly himſelf told me, that they all three abounded with Gold, Cloves, and Nutmegs : For I ſhewed him ſome of each fort ſeveral times, and he told me in the Ma- layan Language, which he ſpake indifferent well, Meangis Hadda Madochala je Bullawan : That is, there is abundance of Gold at Meangis. Bullawan, I have obſerved to be the common word for Gold at Mindanao; but whether the pro- per Malayan word I know not, for I found much difference between the Malayan Language as it was ſpoken at Mindanao, and the Language on the Coaſt of Malacca, and Achin. When I fhewed him Spice, he would not only tell me, that there was Mado- 514 Jeoly, the Painted Prince. An. 1690, Madochala, that is, abundance ; but to make it ap- pear more plain, he would alſo ſhew me the Hair of his Head, a thing frequent among all the Indians that I have met with, to ſhew their Hair, when they would expreſs more than they can number. He told me alfo, that his Father was Raja of the Iland where they lived: That there were not above Thirty Men on the Iſland, and about one Hun- dred Women : That he himſelf had five Wives and eight Children, and that one of his Wives painted him. He was painted all down his Breaſt, between his Shoulders behind; on his Thighs (moſtly) be- fore; and in the form of ſeveral broad Rings, or Bracelets, round his Arms and Legs. I cannot liken the Drawings to any Figure of Animals, or the like ; but they were very curious, full of great variety of Lines, Flouriſhes, Chequered Work, &c. keeping a very graceful Proportion, and appearing very Artificial, even to wonder, eſpecially that upon and between his Shoulder-blades. By the Account he gave me of the manner of doing it, I underſtood that the Painting was done in the ſame manner, as the Jeruſalem-Croſs is made in Mens Arms, by pricking the Skin, and rubbing in a pig- But whereas Powder: is uſed in ma- king the Jeruſalem-Croſs, they at Meangis uſe the Gum of a Tree beaten to Powder, called by Eng- liſh Drammer, which is uſed inſtead of Pitch in many Parts of India. He told me, that moſt of the Men and Women on the Iſland were thus painted : And alſo that they had all Ear-rings made of Gold, and Gold Shackles about their Legs and Arms : That their common Food, of the Produce of the Land, was Potatoes and Yames: That they had plenty of Cocks and Hens ; but no other tame Fowl. He ſaid, that Fiſh (of which he was a great Lover, as Wild Indians generally are ) was very plentiful about inent. a Meangian Tongue. P. Jeoly's Captivity. 515 about the Illand; and that they had Canoas, and An. 1690 went a fiſhing frequently in them; and that they often viſited the other two ſmall Iſlands, whore Inhabitants ſpeak the ſame Language at they did; which was ſo unlike the Malay an, which he had learnt while he was a Slave at Mindanao that when his Mother and he were talking together in their Meangian Tongue, I could not underſtand one word they ſaid. And indeed all the Indians who ſpeak Malayan , who are the Trading and po. liter fort, looke on theſe Meangians as a kind of Bar- barians: and upon any occafion of dillike, would call them Bobby, that is, Hoggs; the greateft expref- fion of contempt that can be; eſpecialiy from the mouth of Malayans, who are generally Mahomet ans : and yet the Malayans every where call a Woman Babby, by a name not much different: and Mamma fignifies a Man Tho theſe two laſt words proper- ly denote Male and Female : and as Ejam liguities a Fowl, fo Ejam Mamma is a Cock, and Ejam Babbi is a Hen. But this by the way. He ſaid alſo that the Cuſtoms of thoſe other Iſles, and their manner of living, was like theirs, and that they were the only people with whom they had any converſe : And that one time, as he, with his Father, Mother, and Brother, with 2 or 3 men more, were going to one of theſe other Iſlands, they were driven by a ſtrong wind on the Coaſt of Mindanao, where they were taken by the Fiſhermen of that Iſland, and carried alhore, and ſold as Slaves ; they being firit ítript of their Gold Ornaments. I did not ſee any of the Gold that they wore, but there were great holes in their Ears, by which it was manifelt that they had worn ſome ornaments in them. Feoly was ſold to one Michael a Mindanayan, that ſpoke good Spaniſh, and commonly waited on Raja Laut, ſerving hint as our Interpreter, where the Raja was at a loſs in any LI word, a 516 3 Of P. Jeoly and his Mother. An. 1690 word, for Michael underſtood it better. He did of- ten beat and abuſe his painted Servant, to make him work, but all in vain; for neither fair means, threats nor blows, would make him work, as he would have him. Yet he was very timerous, and could not endure to ſee any ſort of Weapons; and he often told me that they had no Arms a Meangis, they having no Enemies to fight with. I knew this Michael very well, while we were at Mindanao: I ſuppoſe that name was given him by the Spaniards, who baptized many of them at the time when they had footing at that Illand : But at the departure of the Spaniards, they were Mahomet ans again as before. Some of our people lay at this Michael's houſe, whoſe Wife and Daugh- ter were Pagallies to ſome of them. I often faw Jeoly at his Maſter Michael's houſe, and when I came to have him ſo long after, he remembred me again. I did never ſee his Father nor Brother, nor any of the others that were taken with them'; but Feoly came ſeveral times aboard our Ship when we lay at Minlanao, and gladly accepted of ſuch victu- als as we gave him ; for his maſter kept him at very ſhort commons. Prince Jeoly lived thus a Slave at Mindanao 4 ors years, till at laſt Mr. Moody bought him and his Mother for 60 Dollars, and, as is before related, carried him to Fort St. George, and from thence a- long with me to Bencouli. Mr. Moody ſtayed at Bencouli about three weeks, and then went back with Captain Howel, to Indrapore, leaving Feely and his Mother with me. They lived in a houſe by themſelves without the Fort. I had no employ- ment for them ; but they both employed them- ſelves. She uſed to make and mend their own Cloaths, at which ſhe was not very expert, for they wear no Cloaths at Meangis, but only a Cloath about their waftes: and he buried himſelf in making a The Mother dies. Falſe ſtories of Jeoly. 519 making a Cheſt with 4 boards, and a few Nails An. 169 that he begg'd of me. It was but an ill ſhaped odd thing, yet he was as proud of it, as if it had been the rareſt piece in the World. After ſome time they were both taken fick, and though I took as much care of them, as if they had been my Bro- ther and Siſter, yet ſhe died. I did what I could to comfort Feoly; but he took on extreamly, inſo- much that I feared him alſo. Therefore I cauſed a Grave to be made preſently, to hide her out of his ſight. I had her ſhrouded decently in a piece of new Callico; but Feolj was not ſo ſatisfied, for he wrapped all her Cloaths about her, and two new pieces of Chints that Mr. Moody gave her, ſaying that they were his Mothers, and the muſt have em. I would not diſoblige him for fear of endangering his life, and I uſed all poſſible means to recover his health: but I found little amendment while we ſtay'd here. In the little printed relation that was made of him when he was fhewn for a fight in England, there was a Romantick ſtory of a beautiful Sifter of his, a Slave with them at Mindanao; and of the Sultans falling in love with her love with her ; but theſe were ſtories indeed. They reported alſo that his Paint was of ſuch Virtue, that Serpents and Venemous Creatures would flee from him; for which rea- fon, I fuppofe, they repreſented ſo many Serpents ſcampering about in the printed Picture that was made of him. But I never knew any Paint of fuch Virtue : and as for Feoly, I have ſeen him as much afraid of Snakes, Scorpions, or Centapees, Having given this account of the Ship that left me at Nicobar, and of my painted Prince whom I brought with me to Bencouli , I fhall now proceed on with the relation of my Voyage thence to En. gland, after I have given this short account L! 2 of as my ſelf. 518 wiſh my The A. thinks of leaving Bencouli. 49.1690 of the occaſion of it, and the manner of my get- ting away. To ſay nothing therefore now of that place, and my employment there as Gunner of the Fort, the year 1690 drew towards an end, and not finding the Governour keep to his agreement with me; nor ſeeing by his carriage towards others any great reaſon I had to expect he would, I began to ſelf away again. I ſaw ſo much igno- rance in him, with reſpect to his charge, being much ficter to be a Book-keeper than Governor of a Fort; and yet ſo much infolence and cruelty with reſpect to thoſe under him, and raſhneſs in his management of the Malayan Neighbourhood, that I foon grew weary of him, not thinking my ſelf very ſafe, indeed, under a man whoſe hu- mours were ſo brutish and barbarous. I forbear to mention his name after ſuch a character; nor do I care to fill theſe papers with particular ſtories of him: But I therefore give this intimation, becauſe as it is the intereſt of the Nation in general, ſo is it eſpecially of the Honourable Eaſt India Compa- ny, to be informed of abuſes in their Factories. And I think the Company might receive great ad- vantage by ſtrictly enquiring into the behavior of thoſe whom they entruſt with any command. For beſide the odium, which reflects back upon the Superiours from the mif-doings of their Servants, how undeſervedly foever ; there are great and laſt- ing miſchiefs proceed from the Tyranny or igno- rant raſhneſs of ſome petry Governours . Thoſe under them are diſcouraged from their ſervice by it, and often go away to the Dutch, the Mogul, or the Malayan Princes, to the great detriment of our Trade, and even the Trade and the Forts them- felves are many times in danger by indiſcreet pro- vocations given to the Neighbouring Nations, who are beſt managed, as all Mankind are, by ju- ſtice, a- He deſires leave to return home. 519 ſtice, and fair dealings ; nor are any more impla- An, 16 çably revengeful than thoſe Malayans, who live in the Neighborhood of Bencouli, which Fort hath been more than once in danger of being ſurpriz'd by them. I ſpeak not this out of diſguſt to this particular Governour; much leſs would I ſeem to reflect on any others, of whom I know nothing a- miſs : But as it is not to be wondered at, if ſome ſhould not know how to demean them in places of power, for which neither their Education nor their Buſineſs poſibly, have ſufficiently qualified them ; ſo it will be the more neceſſary for che fo Honourable Company to have the cloſer eye over them, and as much as may be, to prevent or re- form any abuſes they may be guilty of; and 'tis purely out of my zeal for theirs and the Nations intereſt, that I have given this caution, having ſeen too much occaſion for it. I had other motives alſo for my going away. I began to long after my Native Country, after lo tedious a ramble from it: and I propoſed no finall advantage to my ſelf from my Painted Prince, whom Mr. Moody had left entirely to my diſpoſal, only referving to himſelf his right to one half ſhare in him. For beſide what might be gained by ſhewing him in England, I was in hopes that when I had got ſome money, I might there obtain what I had in vain fought for in the Indies, viz. A Ship from the Merchants, wherewith to carry him back to Meangis, and rein- ftate him there in his own Country, and by his favour and negotiation to eftablifh a traffick for the Spice, and other products of thoſe Iſlands . Upon theſe projects, I went to the Governour and Council, and deſired that I might have my diſcharge to go for England, with (the next Ship that came. The Council thought it reaſonable, and they conſented to it; he alſo gave me his word that L! 3 20 The A. get on board Captain Heath's Ship. 1691 that I ſhould go. Upon the ad of Jan. 1691. there came to an anchor in Bencouli Road, the Defence, Captain Heath Commander, bound for England, in the ſervice of the Company. They had bee i at Indrapore, where Mr. Moody then was ; and he had made over his ſhare in Prince Jeol, to Mr. Goddard chief Mate of the Ship. Upon his coming on ſhore, he ſhewed me Mr Moody's wri- tings, and lookt upon Jeoly, who had been fick for 2 months : in all which time I tended him as carefully, as if he had been my Brother. I agreed matters with Mr. Goddard, and ſent Jeoly on board, intending to follow him as I could, and defiring Mr. Goddard's aſſiſtance to fetch me off, and con- ceal me aboard the Ship if there ſhould be occa- fion; which he promiſed to do, and the Captain promiſed to entertain me. For it proved as I had foreſeen, that upon Captain Heath's arrival, the Governor repented him of his Promiſe, and would not ſuffer me to depart. I importund him all I could; but in vain: ſo did Captain Heath alſo, but to ng purpoſe. In ſhort, after ſeveral eſſays, I ſlipt away at midnight (underſtanding the Ship was to ſail away the next morning, and that they had taken leave of the Fort) and creeping through one of the Port-holes of the Fort, I got to the Shore, where the Ships Boat waited for me, and carried me on board. I brought with me my Journal, and moſt ofmy written Papers: but ſome Papers and Books of value I left in hafte, and all my Furniture; being glad I was my ſelf at liberty, and had hopes of feeing England again. 3 СНА Р. The ſet ſail for the Cape of Good Hope. 521 An. 169 CH A P. XX. The Author's departure from Bencouli, on board the Defence, under Captain Heath Of a fight between fome French Men of War from Ponticheri, and ſome Dutch Ships fron Pallacat, joined with ſome Engliſh, in figh. of Fort St. George. Of the bed Water taken in at Bencouli ; and the ſtrange ſickneſs and death of the Seamen, ſuppoſed to be occahoned thereby. A Spring at Bencouli recommended. The great exigences on board : a Conſielt held, and a Propoſal made to go to Johanna. A Reſolution taken to proſecute their Voyage to the Cape of Good Hope. The Wind favours them. The Captains Conduct. They arrive at the Cape, and are helped into Harbour by the Dutch. A deſcription of the Cape, its Prof. pect, Soundings, Table M unt, Harbour, Soil, &c large Pomgranates and good linét. The Land- Ànimals. A very beautiful kind of Onager, or Wild Aſs ſtriped regularly black and white. Oftrages. Fifh. Seals. The Dutch Fort and Factory. The r fine Garden. The Traffick here. decorino B Eing thus got on board the Defence, I was con cealed there, till a Boat which came from the Fort laden with Pepper was gone off again. And then we fet fail for the Cape of Good Hope, Fan. 25, 1691. and made the beſt of our way, as Wind and Weather would permit; expecting there to a . L14 meet 522 Pallacat, and Ponticheri. An. 1691 meet 3 Engliſh Ships more, bound home from the 3 Ind es : for the War with the French having been proclaimed at Fort St. George, a little before Cap- tain Heath came from thence, he was willing to have company home, if he could. A little before this War was proclaimed, there was an Engagement in the Road of Fort St. George between ſome French Men of War, and ſome Dutch and Engliſh Ships at anchor in the Road: which, becauſe there is fuch a plauſib'e ſtory made of it in Monſieur Duqueſne's late Voyage to the Eaſt Indies, I ſhall give a thort account of, as I had it particu- larly related to me by the Gunners Mate of Capt. Heath's Ship, a very ſenſible Man, and ſeveral o- thers of his Men, who were in the Action. The Dutch have a Fort on the Coaſt of Coromandel, called Pallacat, about 20 leagues to the Northward of Fort St. George. Upon fome occaſion or other the Dutch ſent fome Ships thither to fetch away their effe&ts, and tranſport them to Batavia. Acts of Hoftility were already begun between the French and Dutch; and the French had at this time a Squa- dron newly arrived in India, and lying at Ponticheri, a French Fort on the ſame Coaft, Southward of Fort St. George. The Dutch in returning to Batavia, . were obliged to coaſt it along by Fort St. George and Ponticheri, for the ſake of the Wind: but when they came near this laft, they ſaw the French Men of War lying at anchor there, and ſhould they have proceeded along the ſhore, or ſtood out to Sea, expected to be purſued by them. They there- fore turned back again; for though their Ships were of a pretty good force, yet were they unfit for Fight, as having great Loads of Goods, and many Paſſengers, Women and Children, on board; ſo they put in at Fort St. George, and defiring the Go- vernours Protection, had leave to anchor in the Road, and to ſend their Goods and uſeleſs people aſhore. 523 A Sea fight before Fort St. George. aſhore. There were then in the Road a few ſmall 49.1691 Engliſh Ships: and Captain Heath, whoſe Ship was a very ftout Merchant-man, and which the French Relater calls the Engliſh Admiral, was juſt come from China; but very deep laden with Goods, and the Deck full of Canniſters of Sugar, which he was preparing to ſend aſhore. But before he could do it, the French appeared; coming into the Road with their lower Sails and Top-fails, and had with them a Fireſhip. With this they thought to have burnt the Dutch Commadore, and might probably enough have done it as the lay at anchor, if they had had the courage to have come boldly on ; but they fired their Ship at a diſtance, and the Dutch ſent and towed her away, where ſhe ſpent her ſelf without any execution. Had the French Men of War alſo come boldly up, and grappled with their Enemies, they might have done ſomething conſiderable, for the Fort could not have played on them, without damaging our Ships as well as theirs. But inftead of this, the French dropt an- chor out of reach of the ſhot of the Fort, and there lay exchanging ſhot with their Enemies Ships with ſo little advantage to themſelves, thrat after about four hours fighting, they cut their Cables, and went away in haſte and diſorder, with all their Sails looſe, even their Top-galiant fails, which is not uſual, but when Ships are juſt next to running away. Captain Heath, notwithſtanding his Ship was ſo heavy and incumbred, behaved himſelf very brave- ly in the fight; and upon the going off of the French went aboard the Dutch Commadore, and told him, that if he would purſue them, he wou'd ſtand out with them to Sea, though he had very little Water aboard; but the Dutch Commander excuſed himſelf, ſaying he had orders to defend himſelf from the French, but none to chaſe them, or a 524 A Mortality. Bad Water. An.1691 or go out of his way to ſeek them. And this was the exploit which the French have thought fit to brag of. I hear that the Dutch have taken from them ſince, their Fort of Ponticherri. But to proceed with our Voyage : We had not been at Sea long, before our men began to droop, in a ſort of a Diftemper that ſtole inſenſibly on them, and proved fatal to above 30, who died before we arrived at the Cape. We had ſome- times two and once three men thrown over board in a morning. This diftemper might probably ariſe from the badneſs of the Water, which we took in at Bencouli: for I did obferve while I was there, that the River-water, wherewith our Ships were watered, was very unwholeſome, it being mixt with the Water of many finall Creeks, that proceeded from Low Land, and whoſe ſtreams were always very black, they being nouriſhed by the Water that drained out of the low fwampy unwholefom ground. I have obſerved not only there, but in other hot Countreys alſo both in the Eaſt and Weſt Indies, that the Land-floods which pour into the Channels of the Rivers, about the ſeaſon of the Rains, are very unwholeſom. For when I lived in the Bay of Campeachy, the Fiſh were found dead in heaps on the ſhores of the Rivers and Creeks, at ſuch a ſeaſon; and many we took up half dead: of which ſudden mortality, there appeared no cauſe but only the malignity of the Waters draining off the Land. This happens chiefly, as I take it, where the wa- ter drains through thick Woods, and Savannahs of long Graſs, and ſwampy Grounds, with which ſome hot Countries abound : and I believe it re- ceives a ſtrong Tincture from the Roots of ſeveral kind of Trees, Herbs, &c. and eſpecially where there is any ftagnancy of the Water, it loon cor- rupts; and poſſibly the Serpents and other poiſon- ous An excellent Spring at Bencouli. 525 ous Vermin and Inſects may not a little contribute An.1691 to its bad qualities : at ſuch times it will look very deep coloured, yellow, red, or black, &c. The ſeaſon of the Rains was over, and the Land floods were abating upon the taking up this Water in the River of Bencouli : but would the Seamen have given themſelves the trouble, they might have fill'd their Veſſels with excellent good Water at a Spring on the back ſide of the Fort, nor above 2 or 300 paces from the Landing place; and with which the Fort is ferved. And I mention this as a caution to any Ships that ſhall go to Bencouli for the future; and withal I think it worth the care of the Owners or Governours of the Factory, and that it would tend much to the preſervation of their Seamens lives, to lay Pipes to convey the Fountain Water to the ſhore, which might eaſily be done, with a ſmall charge : and had I ftaid longer there I would have undertaken it. I had a deſign alſo of bringing it into the Fort, though much higher: for it would be a great convenience and ſecurity to it, in caſe of a Siege. Beſide the badneſs of our Water, it was ſtowed among the Pepper in the Hold, which made it very hot. Every morning when we came to take our allowance, it was ſo hot that a man could hardly ſuffer his hands in it, or hold a bottle full of it in his hand. I never any where felt the like, nor could have thought it poſſible that Water ſhould heat to that degree in a Ships Hold. It was ex- ceeding black too, and looked more like Ink than Water. Whether it grew fo black with ſtanding or was tinged with the Pepper, I know not, for this Water was not ſo black when it was firft taken up. Our food alſo was very bad; for the Ship had been out of England upon this Voyage above three years; and the ſalt Proviſion brought from thence, and which we fed on, having been ſo long in 526 The Ships Crew diſtreſt with Sickneſs. An.1691 in ſalt, was but ordinary food for fickly men to feed on. Captain Heath, when he ſaw the Miſery of his Company, ordered his own Tamarinds, of which he had ſome Jars aboard, to be given ſome to each meſs, to eat with their Rice. This was a great refreſhment to the men, and I do believe it contri- buted much to keep us on our Legs. This diſtemper was ſo univerſal, that I do be- lieve there was ſcarce a man in the Ship, but lan- guiſhed under it; yet it ftole ſo inſenſibly on us that we could not ſay we were ſick, feeling little or no pain, only a weakneſs, and but little ſtomach. Nay moſt of thoſe that died in this Voyage, would hardly be perſwaded to keep their Cabbins, or Hammacks, till they could not ftir about; and when they were forced to lye down, they made their Wills, and piked off in 2 or 3 days. 3 The loſs of theſe men, and the weak languiſh- ing condition that the reſt of us were in, rendered us uncapable to govern our Ship, when the Wind blew more than ordinary: This often happened when we drew near the Cape, and as oft put us to our trumps to manage the Ship. Captain Heath, to encourage his men to their labour, kept his watch as conſtantly as any man, tho fickly himſelf, and lent an helping hand on all occaſions. But at laft, almoſt deſpairing of gaining his paffage to the Cape, by reaſon of the Winds coming Southerly, and we having now been failing 8 or 9 weeks, he called all our men to conſult about our ſafety, and deſired every man from the higheſt to the loweſt, freely to give his real opinion and advice, what to do in this dangerous juncture; for we were not in a condition to keep out long; and could we not get to Land quickly, muſt have pe- riſhed at Sea. He conſulted therefore whether it were beft to beat ftill for the Cape, or bear away for 5 a Captain Heath's Policy to hearten his Men. 527 for fohanna, where we might expect relief, An.1691 that being a place where our outward bound Eaſt India Ships uſually touch, and whoſe Natives are very familiar ; but other places, eſpecially St. Lau- rence, or Madagaſcar, which was nearer, was un- known to us. We were now ſo nigh the Cape that with a fair Wind we might expect to be there in 4 or s days; but as the Wind was now, we could not hope to get thither. On the other ſide, this Wind was fair to carrykus to Johanna : but then Johanna was a great way off ; and if the Wind ſhould continue as it was, to bring us into a true Trade-wind, yet we could not get thither under a fortnight; and if we ſhould meet calms, as we might probably expect, it might be much longer. Beſides, we ſhould loſe our paſſage about the Cape till October or November, this being about the latter end of March, for after the 10th of May 'tis not uſual to beat about the Cape, to come home. All circumſtances therefore being weighed and conſidered, we at laſt unanimouſly agreed, to pro- ſecute our Voyage towards the Cape, and with pa- tience wait for a ſhift of Wind. But Captain Heath, having thus far founded the inclination of his weak men, told them, that it was not enough that they all confented to beat for the Cape, for our deſires were not ſufficient to bring us thither ; but that there would need a more than ordinary labour and management, from thoſe that were able: And withal, for their en- couragement, he promiſed a months pay Gratis, to every man that would engage to aſlift on all oc- caſions, and be ready upon call, whether it were his turn to watch or not; and this Money he promiſed to pay at the Cape. This offer was firſt imbraced by ſome of the Officers, and then as many of the men as found themſelves in a capacity, lifted themſelves in a Roll, to ſerve their Commander. This 528 a They arrive at the Cape of Good Hope. An.1691 This was wiſely contrived of the Captain, for he could not have compelld them in theit weak condition, neither would fair words alone, with- out ſome hopes of a reward, have engag‘d them to ſo much extraordinary work; for the Ship, Sail, and Rigging were much out of repair. For my part, I was too weak to enter my ſelf in that Lift, for elſe our common ſafety, which I plainly ſaw lay at ſtake, would have prompted me to do more than any ſuch reward would do. In a fort time after this, it pleaſed God to favour us with a fine Wind, which being improved to the beſt advan- tage by the inceſſant labour of theſe new lifted men, brought us in a ſhort time to the Cape. The night before we entered the Harbour, which was about the beginning of April, being near the Land, we fired a Gun every hour, to give notice that we were in diſtreſs. The next day, a Dutch Captain came aboard in his Boat, who ſeeing us fo weak as not to be able to trim our Sails to turn into the Harbour, though we did tollerably well at Sea, before the Wind, and being requeſted by our Captain to aſſiſt him, fent alhore for a hundred luſty men, who immediately came aboard, and brought our Ship in to an anchor. They alſo un- bent our Sails, and did every thing for us that they were required to do, for which Captain Heath gra- tified them to the full. Theſe men had better ftomachs than we, and eat freely of ſuch food as the Ship afforded : and they having the freedom of our Ship, to go to and fro between Decks, made prize of what they could lay their hands on, eſpecially falt Beef, which our men, for want of ftomachs in the Voyage, had hung up 6, 8, or 10 pieces in a place. This was conveyed away before we knew it, or thought of it : beſides, in the night, there was a Bale of Muz- lins broke open, and a great deal conveyed away; but The Temparature of the Cape Climate. 529 but whether the Muzlings were ſtoln by our own tin.1691 men, or the Dutch, I cannot ſay; for we had fome very dexterous Thieves in our Ship. Being thuis got ſafe to an anchor, the fick were preſently ſent alhore, to quarters provided for them, and thoſe that were able remained abroad, and had good fat Mutton, or freſh Beef, fent a- broad every day. I went aſhore alſo with my Paint- ed Prince, where I remained with him till the time of failing again, which was about 6 weeks. In which time I took the opportunity to inform my ſelf of what I could concerning this Country, which I ſhall in this next place give you a brief account of, and ſo make what hafte I can home. The Cape of Good Hope is the utmoſt bounds of the Continent of Africa towards the South, lying in 34 d. 30 m. S. lat. in a very temperate Climate. I look upon this latitude to be one of the mildeſt and ſweeteſt for its temperature, of any whatſoever ; and I cannot here but take notice of a common prejudice our European Seamen have as to this Country, that they look upon it as much colder than places in the ſame lat. to the North of the Line. I am not of their opinion as to that : and their thinking ſo I believe may eaſily be ac- counted for from hence, that whatever way they come to the Cape, whether going to the Eaſt Indies or returning back, they paſs thro a hot Climate : and coming to it thus out of an extremity of heat, Ptis no wonder if it appear the colder to them. Some impute the coldneſs of the South Wind here to its blowing off from Sea. On the contrary, I have always obſerved the Sea Winds to be warmer than Land Winds ; unleſs it be when a bloom, as we call it, or hot blaft blow from thence. Such an one we felt in this very Voyage , as we went from Cape Verd Ilands, towards the South Seas; which I forgot to mention in its proper place, Chap. 4th. For а 530 Blooms of Heat. An. 1691 For one afternoon about the 19th of Jan. 1683.in the lat. of 37 South we felt a brisk gale coming from off the Coaſt of America, but fo violent hot, that we thought it came from ſome burning Moun- tain on the ſhore, and was like the heat from the mouth of an Oven. Juſt fuch another gleam I felt one afternoon alſo, as I lay at anchor at the Groinin Fuly 1694. it came with a Southerly Wind: both theſe were followed by a Thunder-Shower. Theſe were the only great blooms I ever met with in iny Travels. But ſetting theſe aſide, which are exceptions, I have made it my general obſervation, that the Sea Winds are a great deal warmer than thoſe which blow from Land : unleſs where the Wind blows from the Poles, which I take to be the true cauſe of the coldneſs of the South Wind at the Cape; for it is cold at Sea alfo. And as for the coldneſs of Land winds, as the South Weſt parts of Europe are very ſenſible of it from the Nor- thern and Eaſtern Winds; fo on the oppoſite Coaſt of Virginia, they are as much pinch d with the North-Weſt Winds, blowing exceſſively cold from over the Continent: though its lat. be not much greater than this of the Cape. But to proceed: This large Promontory conſiſts of high, and very remarkable Land : and off at Sea it affords a very pleaſant and agreeable proſpect. And without doubt the proſpect of it was very agreeable to thoſe Portugueſe, who firſt found out this way by Sea to the Eaſt Indies : when after coafting along the vaſt Continent of Africk, towards the South Pole, they had the comfort of ſeeing the Land and their courſe end in this promontory : which therefore they called the Cape de Bon Eſperance, or of Good Hope, finding that they might now proceed Eaſtward. There is good Sounding off this Cape so or 60 leagues at Sea, to the Southward : and therefore Our a Signs of coming near the Cape of Good Hope. 536 our Engliſh Seamen ftanding over as they uſually An.1690 do, from the Coaſt of Brazil, content themſelves with their Soundings, concluding thereby that they are abreſt of the Cape, they often paſs by without ſeeing it, and begin to ſhape their courſe Northward. They have ſeveral other ſigns where- by to know when they are near it, as by the Sea- Fowl they meet at Sea, eſpecially the Algatroſſes, a very large long winged Bird, and the Mango- volucres, a ſmaller Fowl. But the greateſt depen- dance of our Engliſh Seamen now is upon their obſerving the variation of the Compaſs, which is very carefully minded when they come near the Cape, by taking the Suns Amplitude mornings and evenings. This they are ſo exact in, that by the help of the Azimuth Compaſs, an Inſtrument more peculiar to the Seamen of our Nation, they know when they are abreſt of the Cape, or are either to the East or the Weſt of it: and for that reaſon, though they ſhould be to Southward of all the Soundings, or fathomable ground, they can ſhape their courſe right, without being obliged to make the Land. But the Dutch, on the contrary, having ſettled themſelves on this promontory, do always touch here in their Eaſt India Voyages, both going and coming The moſt remarkable Land at Sea is a high Mountain, ſteep to the Sea, with a flat even top, which is called the Table Land. On the Weſt ſide of the Cape, a little to the Northward of it, there is a ſpacious Harbour, with a low flat Iland lying off it, which you may leave on either hand, and paſs in or out ſecurely at either end. Ships that anchor here, ride near the Main Land, leaving the Iland at a farther diſtance without them. The Land by the Sea againſt the Harbour is low ; but backt with high mountains a little way in, to the Southward of it. Tlie Mm Soil, Fruits, Animals, at the Cape. 532 An. 1691 The Soil of this Country is of a brown colour ; not deep, yet indifferently productive of Grafs, Herbs, and Trees. The Graſs is short, like that which grows on our Wiltſhire or Dorſetſhire Downs. The Trees hereabouts are but ſmall and few; the Country alſo farther from the Sea, does not much abound in Trees, as I lave been informed. The Mould or Soyl alſo is much like this near the Har- bour, which though it cannot be ſaid to be very fat, or rich Land, yet it is very fit for cultivation, and yields good Crops to the induſtrious Husband- man, and the Country is pretty well fettled with Farms, Dutch Families, and French Refugees, for 20 or 30 leagues up the Country; but there are but few Farms near the Harbour. Here grows plenty of Wheat, Barly, Peaſe, &c. Here are alſo Fruits of many kinds, as Apples, Pears, Quinces, and the largeſt Pomgranats that I did ever ſee. The chief Fruits are Grapes. Theſe thrive very well, and the Country is of late years, ſo well ſtockt with Vineyards, that they make abun- dance of Wine, of which they have enough and to ſpare; and do fell great quantities to Ships that touch here. This Wine is like a French High Country White-wine, but of a pale yellowish co- lour; it is ſweet, very pleaſant and ſtrong. The tame Animals of this Country are Sheep, Goats, Hogs, Cows, Horſes, &c. The Sheep are very large and fat, for they thrive very well here: This being a dry Country, and the ſhort pafturage very agreeable to thefe Creatures, but it is not ſo proper for great Cattel; neither is the Beef in its kind ſo ſweet as the Mutton. Of wild Beaſts, 'tis ſaid, here are ſeveral forts, but I ſaw none. However, it is very likely there are ſome wild Beaſts, that prey on the Sheep, becauſe they are commonly brought into the Houſes in the night, and penn'd up. There a Wild Aſs ſtriped. Fowl, Fiſh, Seals. 533 There is a very beautiful fort of wild Aſs in this An.1( 9.1 Country, whoſe body is curiouſly ſtriped with equal liſts of white and black: the ſtripes coming from the ridge of his Back, and ending under the Belly, which is white. Theſe ſtripes are two or three Fingers broad, running parallel with each other, and curiouſly intermixt, one white and one black, over from the Shoulder to the Rump. I ſaw two of the Skins of theſe Beaſts, dried and preſerved to be fent to Holland, as a rarity. They ſeemed big enough to incloſe the Body of a Beaſt, as big as a large Colt of a twelvemonth old. Here are a great many Ducks, Dunghil Fowls, &c. and Oftriges are plentifully found in the dry Mountains and Plains. I eat of their Eggs here, and thoſe of whom I bought them told me that theſe creatures lay their Eggs in the Sand, or at leaſt on dry ground, and to leave them to be hatch'd by the Sun. The meat of one of their Eggs will fuffice two men very well. The Inha- bitants do preſerve the Eggs that they find to fell to ſtrangers. They were pretty ſcarce when I was here, it being the beginning of their Winter; whereas I was told they laytheir Eggs about Chriſta mas, which is their Summer. or The Sea hereabouts affords plenty of Fiſh of di- vers forts; eſpecially a ſmall ſort of Fish, not fo big as a Herring; whereof they have ſuch great plenty, that they pickle great quantities yearly, and ſend them to Europe. Seales are alſo in great numbers about the Cape; which, as I have ſtill obferved, is a good fign of the plentifulneſs of Fiſh, which is their food. The Dutch have a ſtrong Fort by the Sea fide, againſt the Harbour, where the Governour lives. At about 2 or 300 paces diſtance from thence, on the Welt ſide of the Fort, there is a ſmall Dutch Town, in which I told about so or 60 Houſes; Mm 2 low, a 3 The Dutch Garden at the Cape. 534 An. 1691 low, but well built, with Stone-walls; there be- ing plenty of Stone, drawn out of a Quarry cloſe by. On the backſide of the Town, as you go to- wards the Mountains, the Dutch Eaſt-India Com- pany have a large Houſe, and a ſtately Garden walled in with a high Stone Wall. This Garden is full of divers forts of Herbs, Flowers, Roots, and Fruits, with curious ſpacious Gravel-walks and Arbors ; and is watered with a Brook that deſcends out of the Mountains: which being cut into many channels, is conveyed into all parts of the Garden. The Hedges which make the Walks are very thick, and 9 or 10 foot high : They are kept exceeding neat and even by continual pruning. There are lower Hedges within theſe again, which ſerve to ſeparate the Fruit-trees from each other, but without ſhading them: and they keep each fort of Fruit by them- ſelves, as Apples, Pears, abundance of Quinces, Pomgranats, &c. Theſe all proſper very well, and bear good Fruit, eſpecially the Pomgranat. The Roots and Garden-Herbs have alſo their di- ſtinct places, hedged in apart by themſelves; and all in ſuch order, that it is exceeding pleaſant and beautiful. There are a great number of Negro Slaves brought from other parts of the World ; ſome of which are continually weeding, pruning, trimming, and looking after it. All Strangers are allowed the liberty to walk there; and by the Servants leave, you may be admitted to taſte of the Fruit : but if you think to do it clandeſtinly, you may be miſtaken, as I knew one was when I was in the Garden, who took 5 or 6 Pomgranats, and was eſpy'd by one of the Slaves, and threat- ned to be carry'd before the Governour : I believe it coſt him fome Money to make his peace, for I heard no more of it. Further up from the Sea, beyond : The dearneſs of Limor there. 535 beyond the Garden, towards the Mountains, there An. 169 are ſeveral other ſmall Gardens, and Vineyards, belonging to private men : but the Mountains are ſo nigh, that the number of them are buc ſmall. The Dutch that live in the Town get confidera- bly by theShips that frequently touch here, chiefly by entertaining Strangers that come aſhore to refreſh themſelves : for you muſt give 3 s. or a Dollar a day for your entertainment, the Bread and Fleſh is as cheap here as in England, : Beſides they buy good penny worths of the Seamen, both outward and homeward bound, which the Farmers up the Country buy of them again at a dear rate; for they have not an opportunity of buying things at the beſt hand, but muſt buy of thoſe that live at the Harbour : the neareſt Settlements, as I was in- formed being 20 miles off. Notwithſtanding the great plenty of Corn and Wine, yet the extraordinary high Taxes which the Company lays on Liquor, makes it very dear: and you can buy none but at the Tavern, ex- cept it be by ſtealth. There are but 3 Houſes in the Town that ſell ſtrong Liquor, one of which is this Wine-Houſe or Tavern; there they fell only Wine: another ſells Beer and Mum; and the third fells Brandy and Tobacco, all extraordinary dear. A Flask of Wine which holds 3 quarts will coft 18 Stivers, for ſo much I paid for it; yet I bought as much for 8 Stivers in another place, but it was privately, at an unlicenſed Houſe, and the perſon that fold it, would have been ruined liad it been known; and thus much for the Coun- try, and the European Inhabitants. Mm CHAR Of the Hodmadods or Hottantots. 536 n. 1691 CHAP. XX. 5 Of the natural Inhabitants of the Cape of Good Hope , tke Hodmadods or Hottantots. Their Perſonage , Garb , beſmearing them- felves ; their Cloathing, Houfes, Food, way of Living, and Dancing at the Full of the Moon : Compared in thoſe reſpects with other Negroes and Wild Indians. Captain Heath r freſhes his. Men at the Cape, and getting. Some more hands, departs in compa- ny with the James and Mary, and the Joſiah. A great ſwelling Sea from the S. W. They arrive at Santa Hellena, and there meet with the Princeſs Ann, homeward bound, The Air, Situation, and Soil of that Iſland. Its first diſcovery and change of Maſters ſince. How the Engliſh got it. Its Strength, Town, Inhabitants, and the product of their Plantations The Santa Hellena Manatee 110 other than the Sea Lyon. Of the Engliſh Women at this Iſle. The Engliſh Ships re- freſh their Men here; and depart all toge · ther. Of the different Courſes fom bence. to England. Their Courſe, and arrival in the Engliſh Channel and the Downs. 3 THE He Natural Inhabitants of the Cape are the Hodmadods, as they are commonly called, which is a corruption of the Word Hottantot ; for this is the Name by which they call to one ano- ther, either in their Dances, or on any occaſion, as a a The cuſtom of anointing ibeir Bodies. 537 as if every one of them had this for his Name. An. 169 The word probably hath ſome fignification or other in their Language, whatever it is. Theſe Hottantots are people of a middle ftature, with finall Limbs and thin Bodies, full of activity. Their Faces are of a fiat oval Figure, of the Negro make,with great Eye-brows, black Eyes, but neither are their Nofes fo flat, nor their Lips fo thick, as the Negroes of Guinea. Their Complexion is darker than the common Indians; tho not ſo black as the Negroes or New Hollanders ; neither is their Hair ſo much frizled. They befinear themfelves all over with Greafe, as well to keep their Joints fupple, as to fence their half naked Bodies from the Air, by ſtopping up their Pores. To do this the more effectually, they rub Soot over the greaſed parts, eſpecially their Faces, which adds to their natural Beauty, as Painting does in Europe; but withal fends from them a ſtrong ſmell, which though fufficiently pleaſing to themfelves, is very unpleaſant to others. They are glad of the worſt of Kitchin-ſtuff for this purpoſe, and uſe it as often as they can get it. This cuſtom of anointing the Body is very common in other parts of Africn, eſpecially on the Coaſt of Guinea, where they generally uſe Palm-oyl, anointing themſelves from Head to Foot; but when they want Oyl, they make uſe of Kitchin-ſtuff which they buy of the Europeans, that Trade with them. In the Eaſt Indies alſo, eſpecially on the Coaſt of Cudda and Malacca, and in general, on almoſt all the Eaſterly Iſlands, as well on Sumatra, Java, &c. as on the Phillippine and Spice Inlands, the Indian Inhabitants anoint themſelves with Coco-nut Oyl, two or three times a day, especially mornings and evenings. They ſpend fometimes half an hour in chafing the a Mm 4 538 The Hottantots Garb. An. 1691 the Oyl, and rubbing it into their Hair and Skin, leaving no place unſmear d with Oyl, but their Face, which they daub not like theſe Hottantots. The Americans alſo in ſome places do uſe this cu- ftom, but not fo frequently, perhaps for want of Oyl and Greaſe to do it. Yet ſome American Indi- ans in the North Seas frequently daub themſelves with a Pigment made with Leaves, Roots, or Herbs, or with a ſort of red Earth, giving their Skins a yellow, red, or green colour, according as the Pigment is. And theſe ſmell unfavourly e- nough to people not accuſtomed to them; tho not ſo rank as thoſe who uſe Oyl or Greaſe. The Hottantots do wear no covering on their Heads, but deck their Hair with ſmall Shells. Their Garments are Sheep-skins wrapt about their Shoulders like a Mantle, with the woolly fides next their Bodies. The men have beſides this Mantle, a piece of Skin like a ſmall Apron, hanging before them. The Women have another Skin tucked about their Waftes, which comes down to their Knees like a Petticoat ; and their Legs are wrapt round with Sheep-guts, two or three inches thick, fome up as high as to their Calves, others even from from their Feet to their Knees, which at a ſmall diſtance ſeems to be a ſort of Boots. Theſe are put on when they are green; and ſo they grow hard and Aliff on their Legs, for they never pull them off again, till they have occaſion to eat them; which is when they journey from home, and have no other food: then thefe Guts, which have been worn, it may be, fix, eight, ten, or twelve months, make them a good Banquet: This I was informed of by the Dutch. They never pull off their Sheep- skin Garments, but to louſe themſelves, for by continual wearing them they are full of Vermin, which obliges them often to ftrip and fit in the Their Houfes. 539 the Sun two or three hours together in the heat of An. 1691 the day, to deſtroy them. Indeed moft Indians that live remote from the Equator, are moleſted with Lice, though their Garments afford leſs fhel- ter for Lice, than theſe Hottantots Sheep-skins do. For all thoſe Indians who live in cold Countries, as in the North and South parts of America, have ſome ſort of Skin or other to cover their Bodies, as Deer, Otter, Beaver or Seals Skins, all which they as conſtantly wear, without ſhifting them- ſelves, as theſe Hottantots do their Sheep-skins. And hence they are lowſy too, and ſtrong ſcent- ed, though they do not daub' themſelves at all, or but very little; for even by reaſon of their Skins they ſmell ſtrong The Hottantots Houſes are the meaneſt that I did ever fee. They are about 9 or 10 foot high, and 10 or 12 from ſide to ſide. They are in a manner round, made with ſmall Poles ſtuck into the ground, and brought together at the top, where they are faſtened. The ſides and top of the Houſe are fil- led up with Boughs courſely watled between the Poles, and all is covered over with long Graſs, Ruſhes, and pieces of Hides; and the Houſe at a diſtance appears juſt like a Hay-cock. They leave only a ſmall hole on one ſide about 3 or 4 foot high, for a door to creep in and out at; but when the wind comes in at this door, they ſtop it up, and make another hole in the oppoſite lide. They make the Fire in the middle of the Houſe, and the ſmoak aſcends out of the crannies, from all parts of the Houſe. They have no Beds to lye on, but tumble down at night round the fire. Their Houſhold furniture is commonly an earth- en pot or two to boyl Victuals, and they live very miferably and hard; it is reported that they will faſt two or three days together, when they travel about the Country, a Their 540 An.1691 Their Food and Bartering. Their common food is either Herbs, Fleſh, o Shell fiſh, which they get among the Rocks, or other places at low Water: for they have no Boats, Barklogs, nor Canoas to go a fiſhing in; ſo that their chiefeſt fubfiftence is on Land Animals, or on fuch Herbs as the Land na- turally produceth. I was told by my Dutch Land- lord, that they kept Sheep and Bullocks here be- fore the Dutch fettled among them : and 'thas the Inland Hottantots have ſtill great ſtocks of Cattle, and fell them to the Dutch for Roils of Tobacco; and that the price for which they fell a Cow or or Sheep, was as much twiſted Tobacco, as will reach from the Horns or Head, to the Tail; for they are great lovers of Tobacco, and will do any thing for it. This their way of trucking was confirmed to me by many others, who yet faid that they could not buy their Beef this cheap way, for they had not the liberty to deal with the Hot - tantots, that being a priviledge which the Dutch Eaſt India Company reſerve to themſelves. My Landlord having a great many Lodgers, fed us moſt with Mutton, ſome of which he bought of the Butcher, and there is but one in the Town; but moſt of it he kill'd in the night, the Sheep being brought privately by the Hottantots, who affifted in Skinning and Drefling, and had the Skin and Guts for their pains. I judge theſe Sheep were fetched out of the Country, a good way off, for he himſelf would be abfent a day or two to procure them, and two or three Hottantots with him. Theſe of the Hortantots that live by the Dutch Town, have their greateſt fubfiftence from the Dutch, for there is one or more of them be- longing to every houſe. Theſe do all forts of ſervile work, and there take their Food and Greaſe. Three or four more of their neareſt Relations fit at the doors or near the Dutch Houſe , waiting for 541 i a Their Dancing by Moon-light. for the ſcraps and fragments that come from the An.1691 Table ; and if between meals the Dutch people have any occafion for them, to go on Errands, or the like, they are ready at command ; expecting little for their pains; but for a ſtranger they will not budge under a Stiver. Their Religion, if they have any, is wholly unknown to me; for they have no Temple nor Idol, nor any place of worſhip that I did fee or hear of. Yet their mirth and nocturnal paſtimes at the New and Full of the Moon, lookt as if they had fome Superftition about it. For at the Full eſpecially they fing and dance all night, making a great noiſe : I walked out to their Huts twice at theſe times, in the evening, when the Moon aroſe above the Horizon, and viewed them for an hour or more. They ſeem all very buſie, both Men, Women and Children, dancing very oddly on the green Graſs by the ir Houſes. They traced two and fro promiſcuouſly, often clapping their hands and ſinging aloud. Their Faces were ſometimes to the Eaſt, ſometimes to the Weſt : neither did I ſee any motion or geſture that they uſed when their faces were toward the Moon, more than when their backs were towards it. Af- ter I had thus obſerved them for a while, I return- ed to my Lodging, which was not above 2 or 300 paces from their Huts; and I heard them Singing in the fanie manner all night. In the grey of the morning I walked out again, and found many of the men and women Itill Singing and Dancing; who continued their mirth till the Moon went down, and then they left off: Some of them going into their Huts to ſleep, and others to their attendance in their Dutch houſes. Other Negroes are leſs circumſpect in their Night- Dances, as to the preciſe time of the Full Moon; they being more general in theſe Nocturnal pa- Itimes, 542 They refreſh themſelves at the Cape: An.1691 ſtimes, and uſe them oftener; as do many people alſo in the Eaſt and Weſt Indies: Yet there is a dif- ference between colder and warmer Countries as to their Divertiſements. The warmer Climates being generally very productive of delicate Fruits, &c. and theſe uncivilized people caring for little elſe than what is barely neceſſary, they ſpend the greateſt part of their time in diverting themſelves, after their ſeveral faſhions; but the Indians of colder Climates are not ſo much at leiſure, the Fruits of the Earth being ſcarce with them, and they neceſſitated to be continually Fishing, Hunt- ing, or Fowling, for their fubliſtance; not as with us for Recreation. As for theſe Hottantots, they are a very lazy fort of people, and tho they live in a delicate Country, very fit to be manured, and where there is Land enough for them, yet they chooſe rather to live as their Fore-fathers, poor and miſerable, than be at pains for plenty. And ſo much for the Hottantots: I ſhall now return to our own affairs. Upon our arrival at the Cape, Captain Heath took an Houſe to live in, in order to recover his health. Such of his Men as were able did ſo too, for the reſt he provided Lodgings and paid their expences. Three or four of our men, who came aihore very ſick, died, but the reſt, by the aſliſt- ance of the Doctors of the Fort, a fine Air, and good Kitchin and Cellar Phyſick, ſoon recovered their healths. Thoſe that fubfcribed to be at all calls, and affifted to bring in the Ship, received Cap- tain Heath's Bounty, by which they furnished -themſelves with Liquor for their homeward Voyage. But we were now ſo few, that we could not fail the Ship; therefore Captain Heath defired the Governour to ſpare him ſome men ; and as I was informed, had a promiſe to he ſupplied 40 They leave the Cape. A Storm ariſer. 543 fupplied out of the homeward bound Dutch Eaſt An. 1691 India Ships, that were now expected every day, and we waited for them. In the mean time in came the Fames and Mary, and the Fofiah of London, bound home. Out of theſe we thought to have been furnished with men : but they had only e. nough for themſelves; therefore we waited yec longer for the Dutch Fleet, which at laſt arrived : but we could get no men from them. Captain Heath was therefore forced to get men by ſtealth, ſuch as he could pick up, whether Sol- diers or Seamen. The Dutch knew our want of men, therefore near of them, thoſe that had a deſign to return to Europe, came privately and of. fered themſelves, and waited in the night at places appointed, where our Boats went and fetched 3 or 4. aboard at a time, and hid them, eſpecially when any Dutch Boat came aboard our Ship. Here at the Cape I met my friend Daniel Wallis , the fame who leapt into the Sea and fwam at Pulo Condore. After ſeveral Traverſes to Madagaſcar, Don Maſcarin, Ponticherri, Pegu, Cunni- mere, Maderas, and the River of Hugli, he was , now got hither in a homeward bound Dutch Ship. I ſoon perſwaded 'him to come over to us, and found means to get him aboard our Ship. About the 23d of May we failed from the Cape, in the company of the Fames and Mary, and the Foſiah, directing our Courſe towards the Inland Santa Hellena. We met nothing of remark in this Voyage, except a great ſwelling Sea, out of the S. W. which taking us on the broad fide, made us rowl ſufficiently. Such of our Water-casks as were between Decks, running from ſide to ſide, were in a ſhort time all ſtaved, and the Deck well washed with the freſh water. The Shot tumbled out the Lockers and Garlands; and rung a lowd peal, rumbling from ſide to ſide, every rowl that the 544 Their Paſage to Santa Hellena. An.1691 the Ship made: neither was it an eaſie matter to reduce them again within bounds. The Guns, being carefully look'd after and lah'd faft, never budg d, but the Tackles or Pulleys, and Laſhings, made great Muſick too. The ſudden and violent motion of the Ship, made us fearful left fome of the Guns ſhould have broken looie, which muſt have been very detrimental to the Ships fides. The Maits were alſo in great danger to be rowl'd by the board : but no harm hapned to any of us beſides the lofs of 3 or 4 Butts of Water, and a 3 Barrel or 2 of good Cape Wine which was ſtaved in the great Cabbin. This great Tumbling Sea, took us ſhortly after we came from the Cape. The violence of it lafted but one night: yet we had a continual fwel- ling came out of the S. W. almoft during all the paffage to Santa Hellena : which was an eminent token that the S. W. Winds were now violent in the higher latitudes towards the South Pole ; for this was the time of the year for thoſe Winds. Notwithſtanding this boiſterous Sea coming thus obliquely upon us, we had fine clear weather, and a moderate gale at S. E. or between that and the Eaft, till we came to the Iſland Santa Hellena, where we arrived the 20th day of June. There we found the Princeſs Ann at an Anchor, waiting for us. The Iſland Santa Hellena lies in about 16 De- grees South lat. The Air is commonly ſerene and clear, except in the months that yield Rain; yet we had one or two very rainy days, even while we were here. Here are moiſt ſeaſons to plant and ſow, and the weather is temperate enough as to heat, tho ſo near the Equator, and very healthy. The Iſland is but ſmall, not above nine or ten leagues in length, and ftands 3 or 400 leagues from of the ſeveral O ners of Santa Hellena. 545 from the main Land. It is bounded againſt the An. 1691 Sea with ſteep Rocks, ſo that there is no landing but at 2 or 3 places. The Land is high and Mountainous, and ſeems to be very dry and poor; yet there are fine Valleys, proper for cultivation. The Mountains appear bare, only in ſome places you may fee a few low Shrubs, but the Valleys afford fome Trees fit for building, as I was in- formed. This Illand is ſaid to have been firſt diſcover'a and ſettled by the Portugueſe, who ſtockt it with Goats and Hogs. But it being afterwards de- ſerted by them, it lay wafle, till the Dutch, find- ing it convenient to relieve their Eaſt India Ships, fettled it again ; but they afterwards relinquiſhed it for a more convenient place; I mean the Cape of Good Hope. Then the Engliſh Eaſt India Compa- ny ſettled their Servants there, and began to For- tify it, but they being yet weak, the Dutch about the year 1672 came thither, and re-took it, and keep it in their poffeffion. This news being re- ported in England, Captain Monday was ſent to re-take it, who by the advice and conduct of one that had formerly lived there, landed a Party of Armed Men in the night in a ſmall Cove, un- known to the Dutch then in Garriſon, and climb- ing the Rocks, got up into the Inand, and ſo came in the morning to the Hills hanging over the Fort, which ſtands by the Sea in a ſmall Val- ley. From thence firing into the Fort, they foon made them ſurrender. There were at this time two or three Dutch Eaſt India Ships, either at An- chor, or coming thither, when our Ships were there. Theſe, when they ſaw that the Engliſh were Maſters of the Iſland again, made fail to be gone; but being chaced by the Engliſh Frigots, 2 of them became rich Prizes to Captain Monday and a a his men. The a a 546 The Strength, Town,& Product of Santa Hellena. An.1691. The Illand hath continued ever ſince in the hands of the Engliſh Eaſt India Company, and hath been greatly ſtrengthened both with Men and Guns ; fo that at this day it is ſecure enough from the invaſion of any Enemy. For the common Landing place is a ſmall Bay, like a Half Moon, ſcarce 500 paces wide, between the two points. Cloſe by the Sea ſide are good Guns planted at equal diſtances, lying along from one end of the Bay to the other: belides a ſmall Fort, a little fur- ther in from the Sea, near the midſt of the Bay. All which makes this Bay ſo ſtrong, that it is im- poſſible to force it. The ſmall Cove where Cap- tain Monday landed his men when he took thie Iland from the Dutch, is ſcarce fit for a Boat to land at; and yet that is now alſo fortified. There is a ſmall Engliſh Town within the great Bay, ftanding in a little Valley, between two high ſteep Mountains. There may be about 20 or 30 ſmall Houſes, whoſe Walls are built with rough Stones. The inſide furniture is very mean. The Governour hath a pretty tolerably handſome low Houſe, by the Fort ; where he commonly lives, having a few Souldiers to attend him, and to guard the Fort. But the Houſes in the Town before-mentioned ſtand empty, ſave only when Ships arrive here; for their Owners have all Plantations farther in the Iſland, where they con- ftantly employ themſelves. But when Ships ar- rive, they all flock to the Town, where they live all the time that the Ships lye here ; for then is their Fair or Market, to buy fuchi neceſſaries as they want, and to ſell off the produce of their Plantations. Their Plantations afford Potatoes, Yames, and ſome Plantains and Bonanoes. Their ſtock con- fifts chiefly of Hogs, Bullocks, Cocks and Hens, Ducks, Geefe, and Turkeys, of which they have great No Manatee at Santa Hellena. 547 great plenty, and ſell them at a low rate to the An.1695 Sailors, taking in exchange, Shirts, Drawers, or any light Cloaths; pieces of Callico, Silks, or Muzlins : Arack, Sugar, and Lime-juice, is alſo much efteemed and coveted by them. But now they are in hopes to produce Wine and Brandy, in a ſhort time ; for they do already begin to plant Vines for that end, there being a few French men there to manage that affair. This I was told, but I ſaw nothing of it, for it rained ſo hard when I was aſhore, that I had not the opportunity of ſeeing their Plantations. I was alſo informed, that they get Manatee or Sea-cows here, which ſeemed very ſtrange to me. Therefore enquiring more ſtrictly into the matter, I found the Santa Hellena Manatee to be, by their Shapes, and manner of lying aſhore on the Rocks, thoſe Crea- tures called Sea-lyons; for the Manatee never come afhore, neither are they found near any rocky Shores, as this Iſland is, there being no feeding for them in ſuch places. Beſides, in this Illand there is no River for them to drink at, tho there is a ſmall Brook runs into the Sea, out of the Valley by the Fort. We ftayed here 5 or 6 days, all which time the Ilanders lived at the Town, to entertain the Seamen ; who conſtantly flockt afhore, to enjoy themſelves among their Country people. Our touching at the Cape had greatly drained the Seamen of their looſe Corns, at which theſe Il- landers as greatly repined; and ſome of the poorer fort openly complained againſt ſuch doings, ſaying, it was fit that the Eaſt India Company ſhould be acquainted with it, that they might hinder their Ships from touching at the Cape. Yer they were extreamly kind, in hopes to get what was remaining. They are moſt of them very poor : but ſuch as could get a little Liquor to ſell a و Ν 12 to 543 The Women of Santa Hellena. An. 1691 to the Seamen at this time got what the Seamen could ſpare; for the Punch Houſes were never empty. Bur had we all come directly hither, and not touched at the Cape, even the pooreſt people among them would have gotten ſomething by entertaining ſick men. For commonly the Seamen coming home, are troubled, more or leſs, with Scorbutick Diftempers; and their only hopes are to dget Refreſhment and Health at this Iſland, anc theſe hopes feldom or never fail them, if on e they get footing here. For the Iſlands afford abundance of delicate Herbs, wherewith the fick are first bathed to ſupple their Joints, and then the Fruits and Herbs, and freſh food foon after cure them of their Scorbutick Humours.So that in a weeks time, men that have been carried aſhore in Hammocks, and they who were wholly unable to go,have foon been able to leap and dance.Doubtleſs the ſerenity and wholeſomeneſs of the Air contri- butes much to the carrying off of theſe Diftem- pers; for here is conſtantly a freſh breeze. While we ſtayed here, many of the Seamen got Sweet- hearts. One young man belonging to the fames and Mary, was married, and brought his wife to England with him. Another brought his Sweet- heart to England, they being each engaged by Bonds to marry at their arrival in England ; and ſeveral others of our Men were over Head and Ears in love with the Santa Hellena Maids, who, rho they were born there, yet very earneſtly deſired to be releaſed from that Priſon, which they have no other way to compafs, but by marrying Seamen, or Paſſengers that touch here. The young Women born here, are but one remove from Engliſh, being the Daughters of ſuch. They are well fhaped, proper and comely, were they in a Drets to ſet them off. My They depart from Santa Hellena. 549 My ſtay aſhore here was but two days, to get An. 1691 Refreſhments for my ſelf and Jeoly, whom I car- ried aſhore with me: and he was very diligent to pick up ſuch things as the Iſland afforded, carry- ing aſhore with him a Bag, which the people of the Iſle filled with Roots for him. They flockt about him, and ſeemed to admire him much. This was the laſt place where I had him at my own diſpoſal, for the Mate of the Ship, who had Mr. Moodie's Share in him, left him entirely to my ma- nagement, I being to bring him to England. But I was no ſooner arrived in the Thames, but he was ſent afhore to be ſeen by fome eminent perſons ; and I being in want of Money, was prevailed upon to fell firſt, part of my ſhare in him, and by degrees all of it. After this I heard he was car- ried about to be ſhown as a Sight, and that he died of the Small-pox at Oxford. But to proceed, our Water being fillid, and the Ships all ſtocked with freſh Provifion, we failed from hence in Company of the Princeſs Ann, the James and Mary, and the Foſiah, Fuly the 2d, 1691, directing our courſe towards England, and de gri- ing to touch no where by the way. We were now in the way of the Trade Winds, which we commonly find at E. S. E. or S. E. by E. or S. E. till we draw near the Line, and ſometimes till we are 8 or 1o degrees to the North of the Line. For which reaſon Ships might ſhape their courſe ío, as to keep on the African Shore, and paſs between Cape Verd, and Cape Verd Illands; for that ſeems to be the directeft courſe to England. But expe- rience often ſhews us, that the fartheſt way about is the neareſt way home, and ſo it is here. For by ſtriving to keep near the African Shore, you meet with the Winds more uncertain, and ſubject to calms; whereas in keeping the mid way be- tween Africa and America, or rather nearer the American N na 550 Their Arrival in the Downs. Ain, 1691 American Continent, till you are North of the Line, you have a brisk conſtant gale. This was the way that we took, and in our paf- fage before we got to the Line, we ſaw three Ships, and making towards them, we found two of them to be Portugueſe, bound to Brazil : The third kept on a Wind, ſo that we could not ſpeak with her ; but we found by the Portugueſe it was an Engliſh Ship, called the Dorothy, Capt. Thwayt Commander, bound to the Eaſt Indies. After this we kept Company fill with our 3 Conſorts till we came near England, and then were ſeparated by bad weather; but before we came within fight of Land, we got together again, all but the Fames and Mary. She got into the Channel be- fore us, and went to Plymouth, and there gave an account of the reſt of us; whereupon our Men of War who lay there, came out to join us, and meeting us, brought us off of Plymouth. There our Confort the fames and Mary came to us again, and from thence we all failed in company of ſeve- ral Men of War towards Portſmouth. There our firft Convoy left us, and went in thither. But we did not want Convoys, for our Fleets were then re- pairing to their Winter Harbours, to be laid up; lo that we had the company of ſeveral Engliſh Ships to the Downs, and a Squadron alſo of Dutch failed up the Channel, but kept off farther from our Engliſh Coaſt, they being bound home to Holland. When we came as high as the South Foreland, we left them ftanding on their courſe, keeping on the back of the Goodwin Sands; and we lufft in for the Downs, where we anchored September the 16th, 1691. Books Books fold by Janies Knapron, at the Crown in St. Pauls Church-yard. HE Memoirs of Monſieur Pontis, who ſerved in the T French Armies 55 years, tranſlated by Ch. Cotton Eſq; fol. ; Sir W. Temples Memoirs 80. Plutarchs Lives, 5 vol. 80 Scarrons Novels 80 Proceſſus Integri in morbis fere omnibus Curandis a Do. Tho. Sydenham Conſcripti 125. Dr Sydenham's practice of Phyſick, faithfully tranſlated into Engliſh, with large Annotations, Animadverſions and Practical Obſervations on the ſame. By W. Salmon, M. D. 125. Wingates Arithmetick 80. gth Edit. $criveners Directions to a holy Life, 80, A Learned Treatiſe of the ſituation of the Terreſtrial Paradice. Written by Monſieur Huet, done into Engliſh Quadraennium Jacobi, or the hiſtory of the Reign of K. James 2d. from his coming to the Crown to his Deſertion, the 2d edit. A new method of curing all ſorts of Fevers, without taking any thing by the mouth; being a new preſcription for giving the Bark in Clyſter, whereby all the inconveniencies of admini- ftring it in any other form are avoided, and a more ſpeedy and certain Cure is obtained. By A. Helvet M. D. 12$ ad edit. The Gover nour of Cyprus 12s. a Novel. The wapton Fryar 12s. a Novel. Vi&toria Anglicana, or the Hiſtories of ſeveral Battles won by the Engliſh againſt the French, 125. Cornel. Nepos in uſum Delph. 80. The Artificial Glock Maker, a Treatiſe of Watch and Clock Work, wherein the Art of calculating numbers for moſt ſorts of Movements, is explained to the capacity of the unlearned; alſo the Hiſtory of Clock work both Antient and Modern, wich other uſeful matters never before publiſhed, 80. By 1. D. M. A. The Hiſtory of the Inquiſition of Goa, done in Engliſh by the ingenious Mr Wharton, 40. Rusſels Treatiſe of Phyfick, 80. Bugerdicij & Hereboord 'Logica, 125. Elis de Articulis, 125. Mori Ethica, 125. Bakers Chronicle, fol. L' Eſtranges Ælop, fol. Seneas Morals, 80. Tillotſons Works, fol. His late Sermon io 3 vol. 8m 3 Ep. Bp Taylors Life of Chriſt, fol. Par fons Councellor in 80. Dr Lucus enquiry after Happineſs 3 pts. 80. The Common Prayer in lat. 125. Idem in French. The Works of the Author of the whole Duty of Man, fel. Idem in Oltavo. Cambridge Phraſes, 80. Deſign of Ecclefiaftes, 80. Patrick on Exodus The Penitent, or Entertainments for Lent, written in French by the R. F. N. Cauſin, and tranſlated into Engliſh by Sir B. B. Tenth Edition. To which is added ſeveral Sculptures. Wallers poems Oldbams poems Clevelands poems Tates poems Poetry and Plays. Ben. Fohnſons Works folio Sir Rob. Howards Plays The E. of Orrerys Plays folio Drydens Juvenal 80 Miltons Paradiſe loft and regained folio -Poetical works with Notes Prince Arthur King Arthur Ovids Epiſtles by ſeveral hands 80 Drydens Miſcellany poems Dennis poems Flatmans poems Mrs Behns poems Hudibras Mr Dryden's Plays, bound or ſingle, viz. 1 Dramatick eſſay IS Aurenzebes 2 Wild Gallant 16 All for Love 3 Rival Ladies 17 Limber ham 4 Indian Emperor 18 Edipus 5 ☆ Maiden Queen 19 Troilus & Creſida 6 Sir Martin Marrall 20 SpaniſhFryar 7 Tempeſt 21 Duke of Guiſe & Mock Aſtrologer 22 Albion & Albanius 9 Tyrannick Love 23 Don Sebaſtian 10 Conq. of Granada 24 Amphytrion 11 Marriage Alamode 25 King Arthur I 2 Love in a Nunnery 26 Cleomenes 13 Amboyna 27 Love Triumphant 14 State of Innocence Mr. 14 Buvy Fair Mr Shadwel's Plays, bound or ſingle, viz. 1 Sullen Lovers 1o True Widdow 2 Humoriſt I Lancaſhire Witches 3 Royal Shepherdeſs 12 Woman Captain 4. Virtuoſo 13 Squire of Alſatia s Pſycbe 6 Libertine Is Amorous Biggot 7 Epſom Wells 16 Scowrers 8 Timon of Athens 17 Volunteers 9 Miſer Mr Otway's Plays, bound or ſingle, viz. I Alcibiades 6 Titus and Berenice 2 Friendſhip in faſhion 7 Venice preſerved 3 Orphan 8 Don Carlos 4 Soldiers fortune 9 Cains Maius 5 Atheiſt 10 Windſor Caſtle, a poem Mr Lee's Tragedies, bound or ſingle, viz. I Sophonisba 8 Lucius fun. Brutus 2 Nero 9 Conſtantine 3 Alexander the Great | 10 0 Edipus 4 Gloriana 11 Duke of Guiſe 5 Mithridates I2 Maſſacre of Paris 6 Tbeodoſius 13 Princeſs of Cleve 7 Cæſar Borgia Alſo theſe, and all other Modern Plays. Mr Anthony Diſtreffed Innocent Abdelazer Dame Dobſon Alphonſo K. of Naples Durch Lover Antony do Cleopatra Don Quixot 3 parts Adventures of 5 hours Double Dealer Bellamira Empreſs of Morocco Black Prince and Tryphon Earl of Ellex Buſly ' Amboyse Engliſh Monarch Country Wit Engliſh Fryar Country Wife Edward the Third Chances Emperor of the Moon E Circe Engliſh Lawyer Cheats Fond Husband City Politicks Feign'd Courtezans Cambyſes Forc'd Marriage Deftruction of Jeruſalem Female Virtuoſo Duke and no Duke Fortune Hunters Devil of a Wife Fatal Marriage Gentlemen Gentleman Dancing Maſter Succeſsful Strangers Greenwich Park Sir Courtly Nice Henry 5 & Muſtapha Sir Patient Fancy Heir of Morocco Triumphant Widdow Hamlet Titus Andronicus Ibrahim Treacherous Brothers Iſland Princeſs Traytor Ingratitude of Commonwealth Virtuous Wife Julius Cæfar Very good Wife Injur'd Lovers Widdow Ranter Innocent Impoftor Womans Conqueſt Innocent Uſurper Woman Bully King and no King Wives Excuſe King Lear Love for Love Love in a Tub Pyrrhus King of Epire London Cuckolds Mock Marriage Love for Money She ventures, hains Man of Mode Rival Siſters Mulberry Garden Cyrus the Great Mackbeth Lovers Luck Madam Fickle Agnes de Caſtro Maids Tragedy Loves laſt ſhit Marriage hater matched Loſt Lovers Maids laft prayer She Gallants Othello Neglected Virtue old Batchelour Country Wake vistas Orooniko Royal miſchief Plain Dealer I Loves a Jeftino Philaſter 1152 Unhappy Kindneſs Pope Joan Womans Wit Regulus Mourning Bride Rehearſal Timoleon Richmond Heireſs City Lady Scornful Lady Sham Doctor She would if ſhe could Relapſe Siege of Babilon Spaniſh Wives Sir Solomon Single Unnatural Brothers Squire Oldfap Roman Brides Revenge Mr. Wafer's Account of the iſthmus of Darien, dºc. will be ſpeedily publiſhed. And alſo a 2d Vollume of Mr Dampier's Voyages, which he promiſed in his Firſt. 1 po tome FINIS Ting 17 16 vol I oft Voyages Scale try